V  ^ 

-4- 


t 


t 


I 


/ 


■  - 


\ 


» 


'] 


/ 


X 


•  ;/ 


> 


•  ■■ 


A 


/ 


A  GRAMMAR 


OF  THE 

V 


LATIN  LANGUAGE. 


REV.  D.  YENNI,  S.  J.,^ 


PROFESSOR  OF  GREEK  AND  LATIN  IN  SPRINGHILL  COLLEGE.. 


Quo  minus  sunt  ferendi  qui  hanc  artem  ut  tenuem  cavillantnr,  qua  nisi  oratorls  futuri  fundamenta  jecerR 
quidquid  superstruxeris,  corruet:  neeessaria  pueris,  Jucanda  senibus,  quae  vel  sola  ex  omni  studiorua 
genere  plus  habeat  operis  quam  osteutationis. 

Quin  til.  de  Inst.  Or  at.,  L.  I.,  e.  4. 


NEW  YORK: 

D.  &  J.  SADLIER  &  CO.,  31,  BARCLAY  STREET. 

MONTREAL:  COR.  NOTRE-DAME  &  ST.  FRANCIS  XAYIER  STREET. 

1878. 

BOSTON  COLLEGE  LIBRAKY 
CJTESTNOT  MILL,  MASS. 


Entered  according  to  act  of  Congress,  In  the  year  1866,  by 

D.  YENNI, 

£b  t&e  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  Shaiaa, 
for  the  Southern  District  of  Nevr  Yom. 


CONTENTS 


ELEMENTARY  PART. 

CHAPTER  I. 

SUBSTANTIVES. 

PAS® 

Cases  and  Declensions .  9 

Paradigms  of  the  five  declensions . 10-11 

CHAPTER  II. 

Exceptions  in  declension .  13 

First  declension .  13 

Second  declension .  13 

Third  declension . 13 

Fourth  declension . 14 

Irregular  and  compound  substantives . 15 

Buies  of  Gender . * .  15 

In  reference  to  signification .  15 

In  reference  to  termination . 17 

Some  particulars  about  substantives . 20 

Declension  of  Greek  words. 

First  declension .  22 

Second  declension . 22 

Third  declension . 22 

CHAPTER  III. 

ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives  of  three  endings .  24 

Adjectives  of  two  endings . . . . .  25 

Adjectives  of  one  ending . 28 

Comparison  of  adjectives . 28 

Irregular  and  defective  comparison . 29 

Numeral  adjectives .  30 

CHAPTER  IY. 

PRONOUNS. 


Personal  pronouns 


32 


iv  ✓  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Demonstrative  pronouns .  33 

Relative  and  interrogative  pronouns .  34 

Indefinite  pronouns . 35 

Possessive  pronouns . „ .  3G 

Correlative  pronouns . 86 

CHAPTER  Y. 

THE  VERB. 

Division  of  verbs . 37 

Voices,  Moods,  Tenses .  37 

Gerunds,  Supines,  Participles . . . 38 

Tlie  conjugations . . . .* . 39 

The  verb  esse,  “  to  be  ” . . . . . . .  40 

Table  of  the  personal  endings . .  42 

The  Active  of  the  four  regular  conjugations .  44 

Notes  on  the  Active  voice. . 46 

Notes  on  the  Passive  voice .  47 

Verbs  in  -io  of  the  third  conjugation . . . 48 

Deponent  verbs . 50 

Periphrastic  conjugation . 51 

List  of  perfects  and  supines. 

First  conjugation . . 53 

Second  conjugation . 55 

^hird conjugation. . .  57 

Inceptives  (inchoatives) . 62 

Fourth  conjugation.. . . . 63 

List  of  perfects  of  deponents. 

Deponents  of  the  first  conjugation. . . . . . .  64 

Deponents  of  the  second  conjugation.. . . .  64 

Deponents  of  the  third  conjugation . . . 65 

Deponents  of  the  fourth  conjugation . 65 

Exercises  on  the  perfects  and  supines.. . . . .  66 

Irregular  verbs . . . . .  67 

Defective  verbs . 70 

Impersonal  verbs . * . .....; . . . 71 

CHAPTER  YI. 

PARTICLES. 

Adverbs . . ......... . 73 

Prepositions . 74 

’  Prepositions  in  composition . 76 

Inseparable  prepositions . . . . . . . 76 

Conjunctions . » . .  77 


CONTENTS.  y 

Interjections . . . . 77 

General  directions  and  cautions .  78 


SYNTAX. 

Subject  and  predicate . . . 80 

Sentences  and  clauses .  80 

CHAPTER  I. 

THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 

I.  Of  the  finitive  verb  with  its  nominative .  81 

II.  Of  the  adjective  with  its  substantive . 82 

III.  Of  the  relative  with  its  antecedent .  84 

IV.  Of  a  substantive  with  a  substantive .  86 

CHAPTER  II. 

The  interchange  of  the  Act.  and  Pass,  constructions .  87 

The  English  conjunction  that . 88 

Use  of  quod .  88 

Use  of  ut .  89 

Use  of  quo . ; .  91 

Use  of  ne . 92 

Use  of  quin .  93 

Use  of  quominus .  94 

The  accusative  with  the  infinitive .  94 

The  nominative  with  the  infinitive .  99 

Questions  and  answers . 100 

Simple  questions . 100 

Double  questions . 102 

The  answers  yes  and  no.  . . . 104 

CHAPTER  III. 

SUBSTANTIVES. 

A  substantive  answering  to  the  question  whose  ? . 104 

A  substantive  expressing  a  quality  of  another.  . . 105 

A  substantive  expressing  the  situation  of  the  subject . 106 

A  substantive  limiting  the  meaning  of  another . 106 

A  substantive  denoting  price  or  value . .107 

A  substantive  denoting  cause,  manner,  etc . 107 

A  substantive  denoting  extent  of  space . 109 

A  substantive  denoting  the  time  when . 109 

Construot u  of  the  names  of  cities . ,....112 


VI 


CONTENTS. 


PAG* 

Construction  of  domus,  rus,  and  humus . 113 

Use  of  tlie  vocative . 114 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Adjectives. 

Government  of  adjectives. 

Adjectives  governing  the  genitive . ,114 

Adjectives  governing  tlie  dative . 118 

Adjectives  governing  the  ablative . 119 

Use  of  the  comparative. 

Comparison  by  quam . 120 

Comparison  without  quam . 121 

Numeral  adjectives. 

Cardinals  (mille,  millia) . 125 

Ordinals . 127 

Distributives . . . .  -  . . 127 

CHAPTER  V, 

PKONOUNS. 

Personal  and  possessive  pronouns . 128 

Demonstrative  pronouns . 130 

Reflexive  pronouns . 132 

Relative  and  indefinite  pronouns . 134 

CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  VEHB. 

Government  of  verbs. 

Verbs  with  two  nominatives . 139 

Verbs  governing  the  genitive . . . . . . 140 

Verbs  governing  the  dative . 147 

Verbs  governing  the  accusative . 155 

Verbs  governing  the  ablative . 159 

Tenses  of  Verbs 

Present  and  imperfect . 163 

Perfect  and  pluperfect . . . 164 

Future  andfut.  perfect. . ,165 

Sequence  of  tenses . ,..168 

Moods  of  verbs. 

Indicative . 169 

Subjunctive . 171 

Subjunctive  in  independent  sentences . 171 

Subjunctive  after  particles . 173 

Subjunctive  in  condi  onal  sentences . 176 


CONTENTS 


•  t 

Yll 


PAG  E 

gubjunc#  e  in  relative  sentences . * . 173 

Subjunctive  in  intermediate  clauses .  183 

Subjunctive  in  general  sentences . 184 

Imperative . 185 

Infinitive . 183 

Infinitive  in  indirect  narration . 187 

Use  of  the  participle  in  dus . 180 

Use  of  the  gerunds . . . . . 192 

Genitive  of  the  gerund . 192 

Dative  of  the  gerund . . 193 

Accusative  of  the  gerund . 194 

Ablative  of  the  gerund . 194 

CJse  of  the  supines . 195 

The  supine  in  urn . 195 

The  supine  in  u . 196 

The  construction  of  participles . 197 


CHAPTER  VII. 


PARTICLES. 

I.  Adverbs.,  . . 203 

II.  Prepositions . 207 

III.  Conjunctions . 210 

APPENDIX. 

I.  Ellipsis . 213 

II.  Figures  of  syntax . 215 

III.  The  Roman  Calendar . 217 

Method  of  reducing  Roman  time  to  our  own . 219 

Method  of  reducing  our  time  to  Roman . 220 


PROSODY. 
CHAPTER  I. 

General  rules. 

1.  A  vowel  before  a  vowel  in  Latin  words . 

2.  A  vowel  before  a  vowel  in  Greek  words . 

8.  Diphthongs  and  contracted  syllables . . . 

4.  Position. . . . . . 

5.  Mute  and  liquid . . . 

Special  rules. 

G.  Preterites  of  two  syllables . 

7.  Reduplicating  preterites . . . 


,221 

,222 

223 

223 

224 


..224 

..225 


Till 


CONTENTS 


8.  Supines  of  two  syllables . 225 

9.  Polysyllabic  supines . . . 226 

10.  Derivative  words . 226 

11.  Compound  words . 227 

12.  Prepositions  in  composition . 227 

13.  A,E,  I,  0  in  composition . 228 

CHAPTER  II. 

INCREMENTS. 

Increments  of  nouns . 230 

Increments  of  the  first  two  decl.  sing . 230 

Increments  of  tbe  third  decl.  sing . 231 

Plural  increments  of  nouns . 234 

Increments  of  verbs . 235 

CHAPTER  III. 

I.  Quantity  of  penults . 237 

II.  Quantity  of  final  syllables . .239 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Versification. 

Feet.  Metre.  Verse . . 246 

Rhythm.  Arsis.  Thesis . 248 

Caesura.  Scanning.  Figures . 248 

Dactylic  metre . . . 250 

Dactylic  hexameter . . . 250 

Rules  for  the  structure  of  hexameters . *  .251 

Dactylic  pentameter . 254 

Rules  for  the  structure  of  pentameters . 255 

lambic  metre . 255  . 

Trochaic  metre . 257 

The  lyric  metres  of  Horace . 257 

Index  of  the  odes  of  Horace . 26© 

Rhyming  versification . 261 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


1.  The  present  Work  is  the  fruit  of  the  Author’s  thirty  years’ 
experience  as  a  Classical  Teacher,  in  Germany  and  in  America. 
In  this  country,  he  has  found  the  chief  obstacles  to  solid  Classical 
acquirements  to  be :  first,  the  hasty  and  consequently  superficial 
study  of  Grammatical  elements,  and  secondly,  the  imperfection  and 
deficiencies  of  Grammatical  treatises.  On  the  one  hand,  the  Student 
is  hurried  forward  to  translation,  before  he  has  mastered  the  rudi¬ 
ments  ;  on  the  other,  the  Grammars  that  are  given  to  his  use,  are 
either  beyond  his  capacitj7  because  they  are  too  learned  and  phi¬ 
losophical, — or  too  extensive,  embodying  all  possible  minutiae  of 
words  and  forms  of  no  real  and  practical  use, — or,  again,  too  short 
and  defective,  passing  over  in  silence  matters  of  paramount  im¬ 
portance,  such  as  the  rules  of  gender,  the  perfects  and  supines  of 
verbs,  and  treating,  if  at  all,  many  questions  of  Syntax  in  a  very 
superficial  and  desultory  manner. 

2.  To  present  to  the  friends  of  Latin  Literature  a  Grammar,  as  far 
as  possible,  free  from  these  inconveniences,  it  has  been  our  main 
effort  to  combine  brevity,  comprehensiveness,  and  method.  We 
have  discarded,  with  that  view,  a  number  of  preliminary  remarks, 
definitions,  divisions,  and  subdivisions,  and  all  matters,  in  fine, 
which,  belonging  to  General  Grammar,  are  justly  presupposed  to  be 
familiar  to  the  Student  from  a  previous  study  of  his  own  language, 
or  which,  if  peculiar  to  the  Latin  Tongue,  may  easily  be  supplied 
orally  by  the  teacher  himself.  The  present  Work  thereby  gains 
the  advantage,  that  it  adapts  itself  to  any  preceding  stage  of  learn¬ 
ing  and  method  of  instruction,  and  the  fresh  energies  of  the  be¬ 
ginner,  instead  of  lingering  at  the  very  outset,  are  at  once  started 
into  full  play. 


2 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


3.  The  declensions,  as  well  as  the  conjugations,  have  been  placed 
side  by  side,  in  order  to  produce  a  stronger  and  more  lasting 
impression  on  the  eye  and  mind  of  the  pupil,  and  to  render  a 
reference  to  them  as  easy  as  possible. — To  the  Paradigms  both  of 
the  declensions  and  adjectives,  vocabularies  have  been  added 
which  should  be  carefully  committed  to  memory  and  recited,  at  the 
rate  of  ten  or  fifteen  words  every  day.  The  same  practice  of 
learning  the  Rules  of  Gender  and  the  Perfects  and  Supines  of 
Verbs,  we  most  earnestly  recommend.  Experience  teaches  how 
successful  this  practice  is,  and  how  the  young  Latinist  feels  en¬ 
couraged,  when  in  the  course  of  a  few  weeks,  he  finds  himself,  by 
means  of  the  stock  of  words  thus  acquired,  capable  not  only  of 
translating  short  narratives  into  his  own  native  Tongue,  but  of 
framing  by  himself  simple  Latin  sentences,  without  a  continual, 
irksome  recourse  to  the  dictionary.  Mindful  of  Seneca’s  :  Longum 
est  iter  per  proecepta,  breve  et  efficaoc  per  exempla, — we  have  with  un¬ 
sparing  hand  collected  in  the  Syntax  a  great  variety  of  Classical 
examples,  which  exhibit  each  rule  in  its  various  shades  and  lights, 
and  supply  the  Student  not  only  with  exercises  for  translation,  but 
chiefly  with  models  for  imitation.  A  short  example,  in  heavier 
type,  has  been  prefixed  to  every  rule  of  the  Syntax,  according  to 
Lhomond’s  method,  so  that,  when  called  upon  to  account  for  some 
case,  construction,  or  form,  the  pupil  may,  instead  of  reciting  the 
rule  at  full  length,  equivalently  express  it  by  merely  quoting  the 
Heading. 

4.  In  preparing  the  Grammar  here  presented  to  the  public,  we 
have  availed  ourselves  of  the  labors  of  the  very  first  Grammarians 
and  Lexicographers  of  Germany,  England,  France,  and  Italy,  in¬ 
corporating  with  borrowed  materials  such  observations  and  arrange¬ 
ments  as  the  experience  of  so  many  years  has  suggested.  It  is, 
therefore,  not  originality  that  is  claimed  for  the  present  Work,  but 
utility.  No  new  system  has  been  invented;  no  new  method 
introduced.  The  work  thus  compiled  we  intend  not  only  for 
Students  actually  going  through  a  regular  course  of  Classical 
studies  in  Schools  and  Colleges,  but  for  such  also  as  may  deem  a 
private  review  of  the  Latin  Grammar  available.  We  intend  it 
equally  for  both  the  Higher  and  Lower  Classes  :  for  we  do  not 
share  the  opinion  of  those  who  require  a  Latin  Primer  for  begin¬ 
ners,  and  a  Quarto  Grammar  for  adepts,  as  a  necessary  condition 
of  a  successful  Classical  education.  We  rather  think  that  Gram¬ 
mar  best  calculated  to  insure  final  success,  which  provides  eqnally 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


3 


for  all,  which  goes  with  the  child  and  the  youth,  from  year  to  year, 
from  Class  to  Class,  as  a  dear  companion  and  trusty  guide.  In 
this  vade  mecwn,  the  more  talented  pupil  will  have  a  treasure  from 
which  to  store  his  mind  and  fit  himself  for  a  superior  Course,  while 
the  less  talented  pupil  .will  have  a  Mentor  to  clear  up  his  doubts,— 
and  both  will  be  benefited  gradually,  naturally, — as  the  constant 
perusal  of  the  same  book  will,  by  strengthening  local  memory, 
render  its  use  more  agreeable.  “  The  force  of  first  associations,” 
wisely  remarks  B.  A.  Gould  in  his  Preface  to  Adam’s  Latin  Gram¬ 
mar,  “renders  it  almost  impossible  to  use  a  different  Grammar 
from  that  first  learned,  with  the  same  readiness.  The  page,  the 
situation  on  the  page,  the  type,  and  other  circumstances  connected 
with  it  in  the  memory,  all  contribute  to  facilitate  the  turning  to 
any  rule  or  observation  desired.  And  no  small  loss  of  time  is  oc¬ 
casioned  by  the  confusion  which  results  from  having  learned  two 
or  three  Grammars  of  the  same  language.” 

5.  In  order  to  prevent  an  incorrect  pronunciation  on  the  part  of 
the  learner,  several  Grammarians  on  this  Continent  have  thought 
it,  if  not  necessary,  at  least  expedient,  to  make  use  of  accents  and 
other  signs  of  Prosody.  Indeed,  the  Author  himself  has  occasionally 
employed  them,  though  for  the  most  part  in  the  case  of  such  words 
only  as  are  of  less  frequent  occurrence,  e.  g.,  perbrevis,  trucido, 
infldus ,  etc.,  or  such  as,  having  some  derivative  in  English,  may 
easily  mislead  the  pupil  in  his  accentuation,  e.  g.,  confidens,  instigo, 
irrito,  suffdco  (Engl.,  confident,  instigate,  irritate,  suffocate),  etc. — 
In  general,  however,  we  believe  that  the  best,  and  perhaps  the  only 
means  of  imparting  a  correct  pronunciation,  is  the  vox  viva  magisin 
together  with  the  teacher’s  constant,  persevering  care  that  every 
word  shall  be  correctly  uttered  and,  whenever  a  fault  has  been 
committed,  that  the  learner  shall  repeat  the  word  properly.  Where 
this  attention  is  wanting,  all  signs  and  marks  will  prove,  if  not 
utterly  useless,  at  least  of  very  little  avail :  they  will  serve  only  to 
fatigue  the  eye,  confuse  the  mind,  and  impede  an  easy,  fluent  dic¬ 
tion.  We  appeal  to  experience  for  the  fact. 

6.  To  many  teachers,  a  regular  series  of  exercises,  such  as  are 
found  in  several  of  the  modern  Elementary  Books,  will  doubtless 
seem  to  be  wanting  in  this  Volume.  After  mature  deliberation,  the 
Author  has  deemed  it  unadvisable  to  insert  any  besides  the  ex¬ 
amples  illustrating  the  Rules.  And  this  for  several  reasons : 
(1.)  not  to  render  the  Work  too  voluminous  and  costly ;  (2.)  to 


4 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


place  the  different  matters  of  both  the  Elementary  and  Syntactical 
Parts,  in  close,  uninterrupted  connection,  before  the  eyes  of  the 
Student;  and  (3)  because  he  is  fully  convinced  that  far  greater 
advantage  is  derived  from  those  exercises,  which  the  teacher  him¬ 
self  carefully  prepares  beforehand  and  skilfully  adapts  to  his  own 
previous  explanations,  as  well  as  to  the  capacity  and  the  advance¬ 
ment  of  his  scholars,  than  from  those  which  of  late  are  met  with  in 
several  so-called  First  and  Second  Latin  Books. — These  Books  will, 
no  doubt,  be  of  use  in  the  hands  of  a  skilful  master,  who  is  able  to 
change  any  sentence  at  will,  to  adapt  the  same  example  now  to 
this,  now  to  that  rule,  and  to  include  such  difficulties,  as  the  state 
and  progress  of  his  pupils  may  require  or  permit :  but,  as  Text¬ 
books,  the  Author  thinks,  that,  so  far  from  forming  solid  and 
thorough  Latinists,  they  are  more  apt  to  paralyze  the  activity  of 
both  teacher  and  pupil. 

T.  Yet,  although  averse  to  such  books,  he  is  far  from  being  op¬ 
posed  to  the  writing  of  exercises  ;  nay,  he  would  most  earnestly 
recommend  them  and  urge  their  daily  practice.  And,  indeed,  what 
are  lessons,  rules,  theories,  but  a  preparation  for  the  more  important 
task  of  composition  ?  From  the  very  outset,  therefore,  the  pupil 
should  be  dibOcted  to  form  Latin  sentences  by  means  of  the  declen¬ 
sion  or  declensions  he  has  already  mastered,  together  with  a  few 
forms  of  sum,  esse ,  or  of  any  other  verb,  either  previously  explained 
or  dictated,  at  the  time,  in  the  required  person,  number,  tense,  and 
mood.  In  the  General  Directions  and  Cautions  (§  84),  both  teacher 
and  pupil  will  find,  even  before  entering  on  the  study  of  Syntax, 
ample  and  more  than  sufficient  matter  for  a  variety  of  exercises, 
during  the  Course  of  the  first  year. 

8.  Two  kinds  of  exercises  should  every  day  keep  pace  together : 
viz.,  translating  from  Latin  into  English,  which,  for  brevity’s  sake, 
we  call  Version  (written  translation),  and  translating  from  English 
into  Latin,  which  we  call  Theme  (written  Latin  exercises).  Which 
of  the  two  is  the  more  important,  we  will  not  decide.  One  thing  is 
certain,  that  the  Theme  shows  the  real  proficiency  of  a  Student,  as 
there  is  less  room  for  mere  guess-work.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
Version  is  the  best  preparation  for  the  Theme,  as  it  furnishes  to 
the  thinking  scholar  Latin  forms,  original  expressions,  which  may 
enable  him  to  imitate  successfully  the  Roman  models  of  History, 
Poetry,  and  Eloquence.  It  has,  besides,  this  unparallelled  advan¬ 
tage,  to  which  wo  call  the  special  attention  of  pupils,  parents,  and 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


5 


directors,  in  this  our  commercial  age  and  country,  that  it  is  by 
far  the  best,  almost  the  only  way  to  learn  one’s  own  language 
scientifically  and  radicall}',  first,  by  the  knowledge  of  derivatives, 
and  then,  by  the  endeavour  to  exhibit  in  a  modern  dress  the 
blended  strength  and  beauty  of  the  Original, — an  effort,  which,  to 
be  successful,  must  be  renewed  again  and  again,  and  which,  if  con¬ 
tinued  with  patient  constancy,  will  far  better  and  sooner  than  a 
mere  English  course  of  study,  lead  to  literary  preeminence. 

9.  The  Author  would,  moreover,  call  the  attention  of  every 
Classical  teacher  to  another  kind  of  exercise,  calculated  to  produce 
immense  fruits  in  a  very  short  time.  This  exercise  is  called 
Prcelectio  (Explanation).  It  is  the  teacher’s  own.  Let  him  every 
day  read  to  his  pupils  ten  or  twelve  lines  from  one  of  the  best 
Latin  authors,  and,  having  given  first  a  literal  translation,  make  on 
every  leading  word  all  the  grammatical,  literary,  and  miscel¬ 
laneous  observations  of  which  it  is  susceptible,  ending  his  expla¬ 
nation  with  a  fluent  translation  in  the  best  English  possible  ;  let  him, 
in  fine,  require  of  the  students,  for  the  next  day,  after  committing 
to  memory  the  passage,  to  give  an  oral  repetition  of  what  he  him¬ 
self  has  said,  with  such  additional  remarks  of  their  own,  as  re¬ 
flection  or  research  may  have  suggested.  It  is  incredible  how 
much  this  exercise,  even  alone,  can  achieve,  if  properly  performed  : 
but  when  the  Prcelectio  is  daily  gone  through,  and  that  for  several 
years,  together  with  the  Version  and  the  Theme ,  a  thorough  knowledge 
of  Latin  must  be  the  happy  and  natural  result.  The  Student,  en¬ 
riched  with  an  abundant  stock  of  Classical  words  and  phrases, 
and  encouraged  by  the  example  of  his  teacher,  will  soon  begin  to 
express  confidently  and  boldly,  in  Classical  diction,  his  own 
thoughts  and  feelings,  and  free  himself  from  that  embarrass¬ 
ment  in  speaking  Latin  which  even  Scholars,  otherwise  proficient 
in  the  study  of  ancient  authors,  are  often  unable  to  overcome. 

10.  Thus  do  we  understand  Classical  training:  thus  was  it  un¬ 
derstood  for  centuries.  But  where  the  method  of  frequent^  com¬ 
position  united  to  a  constant  and  progressive  reading  of  the 
best  Latin  authors  is  wanting,  where  both  teacher  and  pupils  con¬ 
tent  themselves  with  a  cursory,  often  but  oral,  perusal  of  some 
printed  exercises,  there  results  no  improving  influence  on  na¬ 
tional  literature,  and  no  solid,  no  lasting  fruit  of  Classical  educa¬ 
tion  can  be  expected.  Though  we  may  be  ranked  among  the 
laudatores  temporis  acti  of  Horace,  still  we  fear  not  to  assert  that 


G 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


fifty  years  ago  Latin  was  much  better  and  more  solidly  known 
than  now-a-days,  despite  the  progress  and  inventions  of  the  age. 
How  often  have  we  met  with  Students,  who,  after  having  spent 
several  years  at  school,  when  they  applied  for  admission  into 
College,  being  questioned  concerning  their  previous  studies,  boldly 
answered:  “We  have  read  so  many  books  of  Cmsar — so  many  of 
Virgil — so  many  Orations  of  Cicero,  etc./7 — but  who,  when  more 
closely  examined,  not  indeed  on  Philosophy,  not  on  intricate 
Syntactical  questions,  but  on  the  very  first  elements  of  Grammar, 
on  the  conjugations,  and  even  the  declensions,  were  not  able  to 
answer,  still  less  to  arrange  five  or  six  words  into  a  simple,  but 
complete  and  correct  Latin  sentence  ! 

11.  This  sad  experience  is  well  depicted  and  justly  lamented 
by  a  man  of  highest  authority  in  these  matters, j*  in  the  following 
passage  :  “  De  scholis  inferioribus  quid  dicam  ?  Omne  studium  in 
eo  positum,  ut  quam  plurima  pueri  discant,  discant  autem  quam 
brevissimo  tempore  et  quam  minimo  labore.  Belle  sane.  Bed 
ista  lam  multarvm  rerum  disciplinarumque  varietas,  quas  summis 
labris  attingunt  potius  adolescentuli  quam  hauriunt ,  illud  scilicet 
efficit,  ut  sibi  quidem  multa  scire  videantur  et  aliquando  semidoc¬ 
tor  um  turbam,  scientiis  ceque  ac  reipublicce,  si  qua  est  alia,  perni- 
ciosissimam  augeant ;  at  nihil  vere  ac  solide  sciant.  Ex  omnibus 
aliquid  :  in  toto  nihil.  Ut  percursis  bred  tempore  humanitatis 
studiis,  celate  tenerrimi ,  ingenio  etiamnum  rudi,  ad  gradssima  phi- 
losophice  super iorumque  scientiarum  studia  accedant,  ex  quibus  cum 
emolumenti  veri  capiant  ferme  nihil ,  turn  major  is  libertatis  usu 
capti  in  vitium  proecipites  rapiuntur,  futuri  mox  doctores,  eerie ,  ut 
ienissime  dicamus,  immaturi.  Quod  autem  methodi  usque  faciliores 
excogitentur ,  id  si  quid  habere  videtur  commodi,  habet  certe  et  illud 
incommodi  non  parum ,  quod  primum  quidem  quae  sine  labore  com - 
parantur,  levissime  etiam  menlibus  adheereant,  et  bred  tempore 
acquisita  bred  oblidone  deleantur  ;  dein  de,  quod  quidem  gravioris 
longe  damni  est ,  licet  fortasse  minus  a  plerisque  cogitetur,  quod  ille 
deperdatur  pverilis  institution is  fructus  vix  non  proedpuus,  ut  a 
teneris  annis  ad  seriam  animi  applicationem,  et  ad  laborem  non  sine 
vi  aliqua  sibi  illata  tolerandum  assuescant ;  quod  quantum  valeat  in 
omnem  deinceps  oetatem  ad  pravos  animi  motus  compescendos,  et  ad 
imperandum  sibi,  quotquot  fuere  saqnentes  homines  intellexerunt,  ei 


t  Rev.  J.  Roothaan,  S.  J. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


7 

Spiritus  Sanctus  docet,  vhi  ait :  Bonum  est  homini,  si  portaverit 
jngum  ab  adolescentia  sua.” 


12.  To  conclude : 

With  a  sincere  desire  of  promoting  Classical  studies  in  tin’s 
country,  and  a  hope  of  having  contributed  our  mite  to  encourage 
the  youthful  scholar  in  his  rugged  ascent  to  literary  eminence,  this 
W ork  is  respectfully  submitted  to  the  friends  of  Education. 


Spring-Hill  College,  near  Mobile,  Ala. 
March  19.  1869. 


The  Author. 


ELEMENTARY  PART. 


CHAPTER  I. 


Substantives. 


§  1.  In  every  substantive  four  things  are  to  be  observed  :  gender , 
number ,  case,  and  declension. 

The  cases  are  six  in  each  number :  the  nominative,  genitive,  dative,  accusa¬ 
tive,  vocative,  and  ablative. 

The  nominative  answers  to — who  or  what  placed  before  the  finite  verb  :  as,  “Paul 
excels.”  Who  excels  ?  Paul. — “  The  battle  rages.”  What  rages  ?  The  battle.-— 
“Paul”  and  “  The  battle”  are  the  nominatives. 


The  genitive  answers  to  the  question  ivhose  ?  or,  of  whom  or  what?  asked  in  con¬ 
nection  with  a  noun;  as,  Caesar’s  legions  conquered?  Who  conquered  ?  The  legions. 
Whose  legions?  Caesar’s. — “Legions”  is  the  nominative  ;  “  Caesar’s,”  the  genitive. 

The  dative  answers  to  the  question — to  whom  or  what?  as,  “A  misfortune  has 
happened  to  me.”  What  has  happened  ?  A  misfortune.  To  whom  ?  to  me. — “  A 
misfortune”  is  the  nominative  ;  “  to  me,”  the  dative. 

The  accusative  answers  to — ivhom  or  what  placed  after  a  verb  transitive  ;  as,  “God 
rules  the  world.”  Who  rules?  God.  Eules  what?  the  world. — “God”  is  the 
nominative  ;  “  the  world,”  the  accusative. 


The  vocative  is  the  case  of  direct  address  ;  as,  “  My  son,  fly  from  the  wicked.” — 
“  My  son”  is  the  person  addressed,  and  is,  therefore,  put  in  the  vocative.” 


The  ablative  answers  to — when?  where?  from  {with,  by)  whom  or  what?  as,  “The 
body  is  hardened  by  labor.”  What  is  hardened  ?  The  body.  By  what?  by  labor. — 
“  The  body”  is  the  nominative;  “by  labor,”  the  ablative. 


§  2. — There  are  five  declensions,  distinguished  by  the  ending  of  the 


genitive 


1 

2  3  1  4  1  5 

£6  |  i  |  is 

US 

ei 

singular. 


To  the  first  declension  belong  all  substantives  that  make  the  gen.  sing,  in 
ce  ;  to  the  second  belong  those  that  make  the  gen.  sing,  in  i,  and  so  on. 

To  th Q  fifth  declension  belong  those  that  end  in  es  and  make  the  gen.  sing,  in  ei. 


GENERAL  REMARKS. 

1.  The  voc.  is  throughout  like  the  nom.,  except  in  words  in  us  of  the  second  declen¬ 
sion,  which  make  the  voc.  sing,  in  e. 

2.  The  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  are  alike  in  all  declensions. 

8.  Neuter  nouns  occur  only  in  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  declensions.  They  have  three 
cases  alike  :  the  nom.,  acc.  and  voc.,  and  these,  cases  in  the  plural  end  always  in  a. 


10 


SUBSTANTIVES 


3.  Paradigms  of  the 


I.  II.  III. 


Rosa  (f.) 

a  rose. 

Slave. 

(m.) 

Realm. 

(n.) 

Lion. 

(m.) 

S.  N. 

ros-a, 

a  rose, 

serv-us, 

regnum , 

leo, 

Q. 

ros-se, 

of  a  rose, 

serv-i, 

regn-i, 

leon-is, 

T>. 

ros-88, 

to  a  rose, 

serv-o, 

regn-o, 

leon-i. 

A, 

ros-am, 

a  rose, 

serv-um, 

regnum, 

leon-em, 

V. 

ros-a, 

0  rose  ! 

serv-e, 

regnum, 

leo, 

A.  |  ros-a, 

with  a  rose, 

serv-o, 

regn-o. 

leon-e, 

P.  N. 

ros-se, 

roses, 

serv-i, 

regna , 

leon-es, 

Q. 

ros-arum, 

of  roses, 

serv-orum, 

regn-o  rum, 

leon-um. 

D. 

ros-is, 

to  roses, 

serv-i  s, 

regn-is, 

leon-ibus, 

A. 

ros-as, 

roses, 

serv-os, 

regna, 

leon-es, 

V. 

ros-se, 

0  roses  ! 

serv-i, 

regna. 

leon-es, 

A. 

ros-is. 

with  roses. 

serv-is. 

regn-is. 

leon-ibus. 

First  Declension. 

§  4. — Nouns  of  the  I.  Declension  end  in  a ,  and  are  of  the  feminine 
gender. 

serum na,  hardship. 
ala,  a  wing. 
alauda,  a  lark. 
ancilla,  a  maid. 
aqua,  water. 
aquila,  an  eagle. 
ara,  an  altar.-. 
aranea,  a  spider. 
arena,  sand. 
arista,  an  ear  of  corn. 
aula,  a  hall. 
aura,  a  breeze. 
avia,  a  grandmother. 
barba,  a  beard. 
ealumnia,  slander. 
campana,  a  bell. 
candela,  a  candle. 
catena,  a  chain. 
causa,  a  cause. 
cera,  wax. 
charta,  paper. 
ciconia,  a  stork. 
coena,  a  supper. 
columba,  a  dove. 
corona,  a  croton. 
culina,  a  kitchen. 
culpa,  a  fault. 
cura,  care. 
epistola,  a  letter. 
fabula,  a  fable. 
fama,  fame. 
femina,  a  woman. 
fenestra,  a  window. 
fistula,  a  pipe. 
formica,  an  ant. 
fossa,  co  ditch. 
fovea,  a  pit. 

Decline  together  :  Barba  longa  —  causa  justa — columba  timida — 
gemma  pretiosa.  Regina  pia  et  benigna— formica  sedula  et  labor i- 
osa — turbo  perfida  et  tumultuosa, —  and  the  like. 


galea,  a  helmet. 
gallina,  a  hen. 
gemma,  a  jewel. 
gratia,  a  favor. 
gutta,  a  drop. 
habena,  a  rein. 
hasta,  a  spear. 
lierba,  an  herb. 
bora,  an  hour. 
hostia,  a  victim. 
injuria,  a  wrong. 
inopia,  want. 
insula,  an  island. 
invidia,  envy 
ira,  anger. 
jactura,  loss. 
janua,  a  door. 
lachryma,  a  tear. 
lana,  wool. 
lima,  a  file. 
lingua,  the  tongue. 
luna,  the  moon. 
macula,  a  stain. 
memoria,  memory . 
inensa,  a  table. 
mica,  a  crumb. 
mora,  a  delay. 
musca,  afiy. 
nebula,  a  mist. 
ora,  a  coast. 
pecunia,  money. 
pagina,  a  page. 
pluvia,  rain. 
porta,  a  gate. 
pneda,  booty. 
proeella,  a  storm. 
pugna,  a  fight. 


rana,  a  frog. 
regina,  a  queen. 
riina,  a  chink. 
ripa,  a  bank. 
rixa,  a  quarrel. 
rota,  a  wheel. 
ruga,  a  wrinkle. 
sagitta,  an  arrow. 
sapientia,  ivisdom. 
sarcina,  a  burden. 
scintilla,  a  spark. 
semita,  a  path. 
sententia,  an  opinion. 
silva,  a  wood. 
simia,  an  ape. 
socordia,  sloth. 
spina,  a  thorn. 
spnma  ,foam. 

Stella,  a  star. 
superbia,  pride. 
tabula,  a  board. 
tegula,  a  tile. 
tela,  a  web. 
terra,  the  earth. 
turba,  a  croivd. 
turma,  a  troop. 
ulna,  an  ell. 
umbra,  a  shade. 
unda,  a  wave. 
ungula,  the  hoof, 
uva,  a  grape. 
vacea,  a  cow. 
venia,  leave. 
via,  a  road, ,  way. 
vin dicta,  vengeance, 
virga,  a  rod. 
vita,  life. 


SUBSTANTIVES 


11 


Five  Latin  Declensions. 


iv  v. 


Head. 

(n.) 

Step. 

(m.) 

Horn. 

(n.) 

(Sing,  c., 

Plur.  in.) 

caput, 

grad-us, 

corn-u, 

di-es, 

a  day, 

capit-is, 

grad-us. 

corn-us, 

di-ei, 

of  a  day, 

capit-i, 

grad-ui, 

corn-u, 

di-ei, 

to  a  day, 

caput, 

grad-um, 

corn-u, 

di-em, 

a  day, 

caput, 

grad-us, 

corn-u, 

di-es, 

0  day  ! 

capit-e, 

grad-u, 

corn-u, 

di-e, 

on  a  day,- 

capita, 

grad-us. 

cornua, 

di-es, 

days, 

capit-um, 

grad-uum, 

corn-uum, 

di-erum, 

of  days, 

capit-ibus. 

grad-ibus, 

corn-ibus, 

di-ebus, 

to  days, 

capita, 

grad-us, 

cornua , 

di-es. 

days, 

capita, 

grad-us, 

cornua, 

di-es, 

0  days ! 

capit-ibus. 

grad-ibus. 

corn-ibus. 

di-ebus, 

on  days. 

Second  Declension. 

§  5. — Nouns  of  the  II.  Declension  end  in  us  and  er  (masc.)  and  in 
um  (neuter.) 


acervus,  a  heap. 
aculeus,  a  sting. 
agnus,  a  lamb. 
amicus,  a  friend. 
angulus,  a  corner. 
animus,  the  mind. 
annulus,  a  ring. 
annus,  a  year. 
asinus,  an  ass. 
autumn  us,  the  autumn. 
avus,  a  grandfather. 
campus,  a  plain. 
cervus,  a  stag. 
cibus  /food. 
clavus,  a  nail. 
coquus,  a  cook. 
corvus,  a  raven. 
cumulus,  a  heap. 
cuneus,  a  wedge. 
cuniculus,  a  rabbit. 
digitus,  a  finger. 
dolus,  deceit. 
dominus,  a  lord. 
equus,  a  horse. 
famulus,  a  servant. 
figulus,  a  potter. 
fiuvius,  a  river. 
focus,  a  hearth. 
fumus,  smoke. 
fundus,  a  farm. 
gladius,  a  sword. 
hsedus,  a  kid. 
hamus,  a  hook. 
herns,  a  master. 
hortus,  a  garden. 
humerus,  a  shoulder. 
juvencus,  a  bullock. 


laqueus,  a  noose. 
lectus,  a  bed. 
legatua,  a  legate. 
ludus,  a  game. 
lupus,  a  wolf. 
malleus,  a  hammer. 
medicus,  a  physician. 
mendlcus,  a  beggar. 
modius,  a  bushel. 
modus,  a  manner. 
morbus,  a  disease. 
mundus,  the  world. 
murus,  a  wall. 
nidus,  a  nest. 
nodus,  a  knot. 
numerus,  a  number. 
nuncius,  a  messenger. 
ocultis,  the  eye. 
populus,  a  people. 
porcus,  a  hog. 
pugnus,  the  fist. 
pullus,  a  chicken. 
puteus,  a  ivell. 
radius,  a  ray. 
ramus,  a  branch. 
remus,  an  oar. 
rivus,  a  rivulet. 
sciurus,  a  squirrel. 
somnus,  sleep. 
sonus,  a  sound. 
taurus,  a  bull. 
tumulus,  a  hillock. 
urceus,  a  pitcher. 
ursus,  a  bear. 
ventus,  the  wind. 
vicus,  a  village. 
vitulus,  a  calf. 


argentum,  silver. 
aurum,  gold. 
auxiliuin,  help. 
helium,  war. 
brachium,  an  arm. 
collum,  the  neck. 
damnum,  loss. 
donum,  a  gift. 
ferrum,  iron. 
folium,  a  leaf. 
furtum,  theft. 
gaudium, 
ingenium,  genius. 
initium,  a  beginning. 
lignum,  wood. 
lucrum,  gain. 
membrum,  a  member, 
mendacium,  a  lie. 
negotium,  business. 
odium,  hatred. 
oppidum,  a  town. 
ovum,  an  egg. 
periculum,  a  danger. 
praemium,  a  reward. 
pratum,  a  meadow, 
pretium,  a  price. 
prcelium,  a  battle. 
signum,  a  sign. 
somnium,  a  dream, 
tectum,  a  roof. 
telum,  a  weapon. 
venenum,  poison. 
verbum,  a  word. 
vinculum,  a  chain. 
vinum,  wine. 
vitium,  vice. 
vocabulum,  a  word. 


Decline  together  :  Cervus  timidus — annulus  pretiosus — donum 
pretiosum — templum  magnificum.  Puer  modestus  et  verecundus — 
helium  longum  et  perniciosum, — and  the  like. 


12 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Third  Declension. 

§  6.  Nouns  of  the  III.  Decl.  end  variously,  and  gene  rally  increase  in 
the  genitive. 

In  this  declension  special  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  Stem,  from  which,  by 
the  addition  of  the  respective  endings,  all  the  cases  are  formed. 

The  Stem  of  any  substantive  or  adjective  is  obtained  by  dropping  the  ending  of 
the  genitive. 


(m.) 

flos,  oris,  a  flower. 
mos,  oris,  a  custom. 
ros,  oris,  dew. 
pedes,  itis,  a  footman. 
eques,  itis,  a  horseman. 
fomes,  itis,  fuel. 
gorges,  itis,  a  whirlpool. 
limes,  itis,  a  limit. 
trames,  itis,  a  path. 
homo,  inis,  a  man. 
turbo,  inis,  a  whirlwind. 
caupo,  onis,  an  innkeeper. 
carbo,  onis,  a  coal. 
crabro,  onis,  a  hornet. 
latro,  onis,  a  robber. 
prteco,  onis,  a  herald. 
prtedo,  onis,  a  robber. 
pulmo,  onis,  the  lungs. 
sapo,  onis,  soap. 
pavo,  onis,  a  peacock. 
sermo,  onis,  discourse. 
tiro,  onis,  a  beginner. 
aquilo,  onis,  the  north  wind. 
fra  ter,  tris,  a  brother. 
pater,  tris,  a  father. 
aer,  eris,  the  air. 
agger,  eris,  a  mound. 
anser,  eris,  a  goose. 
asser,  eris,  a  pole. 
career,  eris,  a  prison. 
passer,  eris,  a  sparrow. 
calor,  oris,  heat. 
color,  oris,  color. 
clamor,  oris,  a  cry. 
decor,  oris,  grace. 
olor,  oris,  a  swan. 
dolor,  oris,  pein. 
lepor,  oris,  wit. 
pastor,  oris,  a  shepherd. 
pudor,  oris,  shame. 
rubor,  oris,  a  blush. 
stupor,  oris,  amazement. 
sudor,  oris,  sweat. 
timor,  oris,  fear. 


(f. 

concio,  Snis,  an  assembly. 
ratio,  onis,  reason. 
oratio,  onis,  a  speech. 
suspicio,  onis,  mistrust. 
arundo,  inis,  a  reed. 
formido,  inis,  fear. 
hirundo,  inis,  a  sivallow. 
valetudo,  inis,  health. 
caligo,  inis,  darkness. 
fuligo,  inis,  soot. 
origo,  inis,  an  origin. 
rubigo,  inis,  rust. 
virgo,  inis,  a  virgin. 
vorago,  inis,  a  gulf. 
mater,  tris,  a  mother. 
mulier,  eris,  a  tooman. 
lex,  legis,  a  law. 
vox,  vocis,  the  voice. 
fax,  facis,  a  torch. 
pax,  pacis,  peace. 
crux,  crueis,  a  cross. 
lux,  lucis,  light. 
cervix,  Icis,  the  neck. 
radix,  Icis,  a  root. 
laus,  laudis,  praise. 
fraus,  fraudis,  deceit. 
salus,  utis,  safety. 
virtus,  utis,  virtue. 
testas,  atis,  the  summer. 
aetas,  atis,  an  age. 
bonitas,  tis,  goodness. 
brevitas,  tis,  brevity. 
civitas,  tis,  a  state. 
jucunditas,  tis,  delight. 
paupertas,  tis ,  poverty. 
pietas,  tis ,  piety. 
probitas,  tis,  honesty. 
potestas,  tis,  power. 
sanitas,  tis,  health. 
satietas,  tis,  satiety. 
veritas,  tis,  truth. 
ubertas,  tis,  fertility. 
voluntas,  tis,  will. 
voluptas,  tis,  pleasure. 


(n.) 

funus,  eris,  a  funeral. 
foedus,  eris,  a  covenant. 
genus,  eris,  a  kind. 
latus,  eris,  the  side. 
munus,  eris,  a  gift. 
onus,  eris,  a  burden. 
opus,  eris,  a  work. 
pondus,  eris,  a  weight. 
scelus,  eris,  a  crime. 
sidus,  eris,  a  star. 
ulcus,  eris,  an  ulcer. 
vulnus,  eris,  a  wound. 
agmen,  Inis,  a  troop. 
acumen,  inis,  acuteness. 
carmen,  inis,  a  poem. 
crimen,  inis,  a  crime. 
culrnen,  inis ,  a  summit. 
volumen,  inis,  a  volume. 
gramen,  inis,  grass. 
limen,  inis,  the  threshold. 
lumen,  inis,  light. 
flumen,  inis,  a  stream, . 
fulmen,  inis,  lightning. 
nomen,  inis,  a  name. 
nurnen,  inis,  the  Deity. 
discrlmen,  inis,  a  danger . 
specimen,  inis,  a  model 
ebur,  oris,  ivory. 
robur,  oris,  strength. 
fulgur,  uris,  a  flash. 
guttur,  uris,  the  throat. 
murmur,  uris,  a  noise. 
lei,  fellis,  the  gall. 
mel,  mellis,  honey. 
corpus,  oris,  a  body. 
decus,  oris,  honor. 
dedecus,  oris,  disgrace. 
facinus,  oris,  a  deed. 
frigus,  oris,  cold. 
littus,  oris,  a  shore. 
pectus,  oris,  the  breast. 
pecus,  oris,  cattle. 
pignus,  oris,  a  pledge. 
ternpus,  oris,  time. 


Decline  together  :  Homo  ingeniosus — labor  continuus — virtus  hero' 
ica — crimen  horrendum.  Pastor  fidus  et  intrepidus — lex  impia  et 
funesta — opus  arduum  et  periculosum, — and  the  like. 


EXCEPTIONS  IN  DECLENSION, 


13 


CHAPTER  II. 

I. — Exceptions  in  declension.  II.— Rules  of  Gender.  III. — Some  particulars  about 
Substantives.  IV. — Declension  of  Greek  words. 

I. — Exceptions  in  Declension. 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

§  7.  Tire  words  dea,  a  goddess ;  film,  a  daughter ;  and  occasionally  domins, 
a  mistress ;  anima ,  the  soul ;  liberta,  a  freed  woman ;  serva,  a  female  slave ; 
equa,  a  mare;  mula,  a  she-mule;  and  asina,  a  she-ass,  form  the  Dat.  and  Abl. 
plur.  in  -cibus  instead  of  -is,  to  distinguish  them  from  the  corresponding  mascu¬ 
line  forms  in  -us;  as,  diis  dedbusque .  cumjHiis  etfdiabus. 

When  this  distinction,  however,  is  clear  from  the  context,  the  regular  form 
in  -is  is  always  preferred ;  e.  g.,  cum  ambabus  jiliis. 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§  8.  Proper  names  in  ius,  as  Antonins,  Gains,  Pompeius,  and  also  j films,  a 
son,  and  genius,  a  tutelar  spirit,  drop  in  the  Voc.  sing,  the  final  -ns  of  the  Nom. ; 
as,  0  Antoni!  OCai!  0  Pompei!  But  the  proper  name  Pius,  Greek  proper 
names  in  ins  (from  aos),  as  Arius,  Darius,  and  all  common  nouns  and  ad¬ 
jectives,  as  nuncius,  gladius,  impius,  egregius,  together  with  the  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  names,  as  Delius,  Gynthius,  are  regular,  and  make  the 
Voc.  in  e;  as,  0  Pie!  etc. 

Deus ,  God,  has  in  the  Voc.  Deus  ;  and  meus,  my,  has  mi.  Hence  :  0  mi  Deus  !  0 
fili  mi  ! 

Deus ,  in  the  plur.  is  thus  declined:  dii,  deorum,  diis ,  deos,  dii,  diis. 

The  genitive  plur.  in  -orum  is  often  contracted  in  urn,  as  virum ,  deum ,  minimum, 
modium ,  sestertium ,  instead  of  virorum ,  deorum,  etc. 

§  9.  Words  in  -er  of  the  second  declension  make  the  Voc.  sing,  like  the  Nom. 
They  are  thus  declined : 


N. 

puer 

puer-i 

N. 

ager 

agr-i 

(jr. 

puer-i 

puer-orum 

G. 

agr-i 

agr-orum 

D. 

puer-o 

puer-is 

D. 

agr-o 

agr-is 

A. 

puer-um 

puer-os 

A. 

agr-um 

agr-os 

V. 

puer 

puer-i 

V. 

ager 

agr-i 

A. 

puer-o 

puer-is 

A. 

agr-o 

agr-is 

Like  puer,  “a  boy”,  are  declined:  Liber,  Bacchus ;  gener ,  a  son-in-law;  socer,  a 
father-in-law ;  vesper,  the  evening :  and  liberi ,  -orum,  children. 

The  following  drop  e  before  r,  and  are  declined  like  ager,  “  a  field  :”  aper,  a  wild-boar ; 
arbiter,  an  umpire ;  auster .  the  south-wind  ;  cancer ,  a  crab ;  cutter ,  a  knife  ;  liber,  a 
book ;  faber,  a  workman  ;  magister,  a  teacher ;  and  minister,  a  servant. 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  10.  Accusative  sing. — In  the  accusative  sing,  have  im  instead  of  em  :  1. 
securis,  an  axe ;  sitis,  thirst ;  tucsis,  a  cough ;  vis,  violence ;  and  commonly 


14 


EXCEPTIONS  IN  DECLENSION. 


also  febris,  a  fever ;  pelvis,  a  basin ;  puppis,  tlie  stern  ;  restis,  a  rope ;  and  iur* 
ris,  a  tower.  2.  Many  parisyllables  in  -is  denoting  cities  and  rivers ;  as,  His- 
palis  (Seville),  Neapolis,  Tiberis,  AMs. 

§  11.  Ablative  sing. — In  the  ablative  sing,  have  i  instead  of  e :  1.  Those 
words  that  have  im  in  the  accusative ;  2.  The  names  of  months,  and  occasion¬ 
ally  also 

avis,  a  bird.  classis,  a  fleet.  fastis,  a  club. 

civis,  a  citizen.  cl  avis,  a  hey.  ignis,  fire. 

navis,  a  ship.  neptis,  a  granddaughter.  supellex,  furniture. 

But  restis,  a  rope,  has  more  commonly  reste. 

§  12.  Genitive  plur. — In  the  genitive  plur.  have  ium  instead  of  um :  1. 
Parisyllables  in  -es  and  -is  ;  as,  wipes,  wlpium,  a  fox  ;  collis,  collium,  a  hill ;  2. 
Monosyllables  in  s  and  x  impure ;  as,  urbs,  urbium,  a  city ;  arx,  arcium,  a  cita¬ 
del  ;  3.  The  words  irriber,  a  shower ;  linter,  a  boat ;  venter,  the  belly ;  caro, 
-mis,  flesh ;  and  the  monosyllables  mas,  maris,  a  male ;  {faux)  faucis,  the 
throat, 


as,  assis,  the  as. 
os,  ossis,  a  bone. 


lis,  litis,  a  quarrel. 
glis,  ris,  a  dormouse. 


nix,  mvis,  snow . 
nox,  noctis,  night , 


and  generally,  also,  mus,  muris,  a  mouse,  and  fraus,-dis,  a  cheat.  Gov,  cordis, 
the  heart,  sal,  salt,  and  vas,  vadis,  a  surety,  probably  had  cordium,  salium , 
vadium. — Lar,  a  tutelar  deity,  has  more  frequently  larum  than  larium. 

Note  1. — The  following  have  um:  opes  (from  ops),  wealth;  gryps,-phis ,  a  griffin; 
lynx,-cis ,  sphynx,-gis ,  ambages  (pi.),  evasions ; 

strues,  a  pile.  juvenis,  a  youth.  canis,  a  dog. 

vates,  a  prophet.  senex,  senis,  an  old  man.  panis,  a  loaf. 

And  generally  also  apis ,  a  bee ;  volucris ,  a  bird,  and  sedes ,  a  seat. 

Note  2. — Polysyllables  in  ns  and  rs,  as  cliens ,  infans ,  cohors ,  serpens ,  sapiens ,  ado- 
lescens ,  together  with  Quiris ,  itis,  and  Samnis ,  itis,  and  the  plural  nouns penates,  house¬ 
hold  gods,  and  optimates ,  the  nobles,  generally  have  ium. — But  parentes,  “  parents,”  has 
more  commonly  um; palus,  udis,  a  swamp,  has  um  and  ium. 

%  13.  Neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar  (Gen.  -dris),  have  i,  ia,  ium,  that  is,  they  have 
{  in  the  abl.  sing. ;  ia  in  the  nom.,  acc.,  and  voc.  plur. ;  and  ium  in  the  genitive 
plural ;  as,  mare,  the  sea,  mari,  maria,  marium.  Thus,  rete,  a  net ;  sedlle,  a 
seat ;  tribunal,  a  tribunal ;  vectigal,  revenue,  tax ;  calcar,  a  spur ;  exemplar,  a 
pattern,  etc. 

FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

§  14.  The  following  words  of  the  fourth  declension  make  the  dative  and 
ablative  plur.  in  ubus  instead  of  ibus : 


aeus,  a  needle. 
arcus,  a  bow. 
artus,  a  joint. 


lacus,  a  lake. 
partus,  a  birth. 
quercus,  an  oak. 


specus,  a  cavern. 
tribus,  a  tribe. 
pecu,  cattle. 


Note. — Ficus ,  a  fig  (also,  a  fig-tree),  \\a?,  ficubus  ;  but  the  form  ficis ,  of  the  second 
declension,  is  preferable. — Fortus ,  a  harbor,  has  both  ibus  and  ubus. —  Veru ,  a  spit, 
generally  has  verubus ,  and  tonitru  (better  tonitrus ,  us,  or  tonitruum,-i ),  more  com¬ 
monly  -ibus. 


RULES  OF  GENDER. 


15 


IRREGULAR  AND  COMPOUND  SUBSTANTIVES. 

§  15.  Special  attention  must  be  paid  to  tlie  declension  of  tlie  following 
words : 


An  ox,  a  cow. 
(A) 

Violence. 

(f' 

A  house. 

(Q 

An  oath, 
(n.) 

Commonwealth. 

(f.) 

S.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 

Bos 

bovis 

bovi 

bovem 

bos 

bove 

vis 

vim 

vi 

domus 

domus  and  domi 

domui 

domum 

domus 

domo 

jusjurandum 

jurisjurandi 

jurijurando 

jusjurandum 

jusjurandum 

jurejurando 

respublica 

reipublicse 

reipublicae 

rempublicam 

respublica 

republica 

P.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 

boves 

bourn 

bubus  or  bobus 

boves 

boves 

bubus  or  bobus 

vires 

viriurn 

viribus 

vires 

vires 

viribus 

domus 

domuum  and  -orum 

domibus 

domus  and- os 

domus 

domibus 

jurajuranda 

respublicae 

rerumpublicarum 

rebuspublicis 

respublicas 

respublicie 

rebuspublicis 

jurajuranda 

jurajuranda 

|3gP  Domus  is  partly  of  the  second  and  partly  of  the  fourth  declension.  The  gen. 
domi  is  used  only  in  the  sense  of  “at  home.”  Jupiter  is  thus  declined  :  Jupiter,  Jovis, 
Jovi,  Jovem ,  Jupiter,  Jove.  Sus ,  a  swine,  has  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  subus  instead 
of  euibus. 


II.  Rules  of  Gender. 

§  16. — Tlie  Gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  determined — first  by  tlieir  signification 
and  secondly  by  their  termination. 

Rules  of  Gender  in  reference  to  signification. 

Masculine  :  The  names  of  men  and  male  beings ;  of  nations,  winds, 
rivers,  months,  and  mountains ;  as,  Mars,  Ccesar,  JPersa,  Consul ; 
boreas,  auster ,  aquilo /  Ister ,  Tiberis ,  Euphrates;  Athos ,  Eryx. 
Atlas . 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  Copice,  troops  \  exculioe  and  vigilice,  sentinels ;  custodice,  a  guard  ;  operce,  laborers, 
and  Amazones ,  the  Amazons,  are  Feminine. — Auxilia ,  auxiliary  troops,  and  manci- 
vium ,  servitium,  a  slave,  are  Neutek. 

2.  The  names  of  rivers  in  a ,  as  Allia,  Garumna,  Matrona ,  Seqnana,  etc.,  are  by 
modern  writers  commonly  used  Fem.  ;  the  ancients,  in  most  cases,  used  them  as  Maso. 
—Styx  and  Lethe  are  Fem. 

3.  The  names  of  months  are  by  the  best  writers  used  only  as  adjectives. 

4.  The  names  of  mountains,  "when  the  word  mons  is  not  added,  depend  upofc 
their  termination.  Thus  Ida ,  AEtna ,  (Eta,  Alpes,  are  Feminine  ;  Felion  and  Soracte , 
Neutek. 


lb 


RULES  OF  GENDER. 


Feminine  :  The  names  of  women  and  female  beings ;  of  countries, 
islands,  towns,  trees,  and  gems;  as,  Venus,  Dido ,  Phanium ;  xEgyptus  * 
Delos ,  Salami  s  ;  Lacedcemon,  Tyrus  ;  cedrus,  juniper  us. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  Among  the  names  of  countries,  Bosporus ,  Pontus ,  Hellespontus ,  and  Isthmus 
are  Masculine.  Those  in  um  and  plurals  in  a  are  Neuter;  as,  Latium ,  Bactra .— 
Among  the  names  of  islands,  the  Egyptian  Delta  and  a  few  in  um  are  Neuter. 

2.  The  names  of  cities  in  i,  ovum ;  as,  Delphi,  Veil,  etc.,  together  with  Tunes , 
-etis,  Hippo,  JYarbo,  Frusino,  and  Sulmo  (sometimes  also  Croto,  Pessinus,  - untis ,  and 
SeUnus ,  -untis),  are  Masculine. 

The  following  are  Neuter  :  a)  Those  in  um  and  plurals  in  a,  as  Tarentum ,  Sagun - 
turn,  Ilion,  Susa,  Leuctra ,  Ecbatuna ,  Arblla  ;  b)  Those  in  e  and  ur ,  as  Reate,  Promeste, 
Tergeste ,  Anxur,  Tibur ;  c)  The  indeclinable  names  Illiturgi ,  Asty  and  some  others 
which  are  defective,  as  Ilispal ,  Gadir. — Argos  is  indccl.  and  Neuter  in  the  Singular : 
its  plural  Argi,  orum,  is  regular  and  Masculine. 

3.  Among  the  names  of  trees,  and  shrubs,  oleaster,  pinaster,  styrax ,  amarantus , 
asparagus,  calamus,  dumus,  helleborus ,  and  intubus ,  are  Masculine  ;  raphanus  and 
rubus,  both  Masc.  and  Fem. 

4.  Among  the  names  of  gems,  beryllus,  carbunculus,  opalus,  and  smaragdue ,  are 
Masculine. 


Common  :  The  names  of  persons  that  are  common  to  both  sexes ;  as, 
hie  and  hcec  adolescens,  a  young  man  or  woman.  Thus  : 


affinis,  a  relation, 
artifex,  an  artist. 
auctor,  an  author. 
augur,  a  soothsayer. 
civis,  a  citizen. 
comes,  a  companion. 
conjux,  a  consort. 
consors,  a  partner. 
conviva,  a  guest. 
custos,  a  Jceeper. 
dux,  a  leader. 
exul,  an  exile. 


heres,  an  heir 
liostis,  an  enemy. 
in  cola,  an  inhabitant. 
index,  an  informer. 
infans,  an  infant. 
interpres,  an  interpreter. 
judex,  a  judge. 
juvenis,  a  youth. 
martyr,  a  martyr. 
miles,  a  soldier. 
municeps,  a  burgess. 
obses,  a  hostage. 


par,  a  mate. 
parens,  a  parent. 
patruelis,  a  cousin. 
prses,  a  surety. 
prseses,  a  president. 
pnesui,  a  president. 
princeps,  a  chief. 
sacerdos,  a  priest. 
satelles,  a  life-guard. 
testis,  a  witness. 
vates,  a  prophet,  a  poet, 
vindex,  an  avenger. 


l-gf”  Whenever  the  female  sex  is  not  particularly  to  be  specified,  these  words  aie 
regularly  considered  and  treated  as  of  the  masculine  gender. 

The  forms  antistes,  a  priest,  and  hospes  a  host,  in  the  sense  of  “priestess,”  “host¬ 
ess,”  are  less  common  than  the  forms  antistita,  hospita. 

Neuter:  All  indeclinable  substantives,  as  gummi,  pascka,  sindpi ; — 
the  names  of  letters  and  all  words  and  expressions,  quoted  merely  as 
words,  as  ultimum  vale. 


RULES  OF  GENDER. 


17 


Rules  of  Gender  in  reference  to  termination. 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

§  11. — Words  in  -a  of  the  first  declension  are  feminine  ;  as,  barba 
longa,  vita  beata. — But  the  following  are  masculine  : 

Adria,  tlie  Adriatic  Sea  ;  etesice ,  tlie  trade-winds,  and  all  names  of  men  and 
male  beings  ;  as,  Catilina,  Sylla,  Perm,  Scytha, 

agricola  a  farmer.  n an ta,  a  sailor,  perfuga ,  a  deserter. 

aurlga,  a  charioteer.  collega,  colleague,  poeta,  a 'poet,  etc. 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§  18. — Words  in  -us  and  -er  of  the  second  declension  are  masculine ; 
as,  cervus  timidus,  liber  Latinus. — But  the  following  words  in  -us  are 
feminine : 

Alvus,  tlie  belly ;  coins,  a  distaff;  ficus,  a  fig ;  humus,  the  ground  ;  vannus, 
a  sieve  ; — Greek  words,  such  as  atomus,  methodus,  periodus,  synodus,  para- 
grdphus,  dialectus,  diphthongus, — and  the  names  of  c®untries,  towns,  and  trees  ; 
as,  Peloponnesus,  Epirus ;  Ilhodm,  Gorinthus  ;  pinus,  populus,  sambucus,  etc. 

The  following  in  -us  are  Neuter  :  pelagus,  the  sea  ;  virus,  poison  ;  and  valgus, 
the  crowd.  The  latter  is  sometimes  masculine,  as  Me  vulgus-. 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 

Masculine  are  the  words  ending  in  o ,  or,  os,  er,  and  es  increasing  ;  as, 
leo  magnanimus,  pavo  superbus ,  amor  sincerus, flos  caducus,  passer 
contemptus,  palmes  ( pedmitis )  fecundus,  pes  {pedis)  firmus. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

t 

1.  In  0. — Fem.  :  Words  in  do  that  do  not  denote  corporeal  things;  as,  actio, 
lectio,  mentio,  opinio,  regio,  religio,  etc.,  and  those  in  do  and  go,  as  grando, 
hail,  imago,  a  picture,  etc.  ; — but  carclo,  a  hinge ;  ordo,  order ;  ligo,-onis, 
a  spade  ;  mar  go  (also  fem),  a  brink  ;  harp  ago,  dnis,  a  hook,  and  those  in  do 
that  denote  corporeal  things,  as  titio,  a  firebrand  ;  pugio,  a  dagger,  papilio, 
a  butterfly,  vespertilio,  a  bat,  and  also  septentrio,  the  North,  are  mas¬ 
culine. 

‘3.  In  OR. — Fem.  :  arbor,  a  tree. — Neut.  :  ador,  spelt ;  aequor,  the  sea ;  cor, 
■rdis,  the  heart,  and  marrnor,  marble. 

3.  In  OS. — Fem.  :  cos,-tis,  a  whetstone,  and  dos,-tis,  a  dowry. — Neut.  :  os, 
oris,  the  mouth ;  os,  ossis,  a  bone ;  and  the  Greek  words  chaos,  epos,  and 
melos. 

1.  In  ER. — Fem.  :  lister  (rarely  masc.),  a  boat. —Neut.  :  rer,  the  spring  ;  cada- 
• oer ,  a  corpse;  iter,  a  journey;  spinther,  eris,  a  bracelet;  tuber,  a  hump  ; 
uber,  a  teat,  breast,  and  all  the  names  of  plants  in  er  ;  as,  acer,  a  maple  ; 


13 


RULES  OF  GENDER. 


deer,  a  chick-pea  ;  papdver,  a  poppy  ;  piper,  pepper ;  siler,  a  brook-willow 
siser,  a  carrot  (pi.  siseres,  m.),  and  saber,  tlie  cork-tree. 

5.  In  ES  increasing. — Fem.  :  merges,  itis,  a  sbeaf ;  abies,  etis,  a  fir ;  eeges,  etis,  a 
crop ;  tegis,  etis,  a  mat ;  merces,  edis,  a  reward ;  quies  and  requies,  etis,  rest , 
the  plural  compedes  (4am),  fetters  ;  and  generally  also  ales,  itis,  a  bird,  and 
quadruples,  edis,  a  quadruped. — Neut.  :  ces,  ceris,  brass. 

Feminine  are  the  words  ending  in  as,  is,  cats,  x,  s  impure,  and  part- 
syllables  in  es  /  as,  cetas  aureci ,  turris  cilta,  Ictus  merit  a,  fraus  impia , 
nix  Candida ,  radix  amara ,  mors  certa ,  hiems  frigida,  vulpes  astuta. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


1.  In  AS. — Masc.  :  as,  assis,  the  as;  gig  as,  antis,  a  giant;  adamas,  antis,  a 

diamond ;  and  elephas,  antis,  an  elephant.  Mas,  maris,  a  male,  and  ms, 
vadis,  a  surety,  are  masculine  by  their  signification. — Neut.  :  the  inde¬ 
clinable  fas,  nefas,  and  the  word  ms,  rasis,  a  vase. 

2.  In  IS. — Masc.:  cinis,-eris,  ashes ;  pulvis,-eris,  dust ;  cueTomis,-eris,  a  cucum¬ 

ber;  diSy-ris,  a  dormouse;  lapis,  idis,  a  stone;  pollis,  (also pollen,  n.)  -inis, 
fine  flour ;  sanguis, -inis,  blood,  and  the  following  parisyllables  : 


tunnis,  a  river. 
axis,  an  axletrce. 
callis,  afoot-path. 
canal  is,  a  channel. 
caul  is,  a  static, 
coilis,  a  MU. 
erinis,  the  hair. 
ensis,  a  sword . 


fascis  ,abundle. 
finis,  an  end. 
foilis,  bellows. 
funis,  a  rope. 
fustis,  a  club. 
ignis,  fire. 
mensis,  a  month. 
or  bis,  a  circle. 


panis,  bread. 
piscis,  a  fish. 
postis,  a  post. 
scrobis,  a  pit. 
torris,  a  firebrand, 
unguis,  a  claw. 
vectis,  a  lever.  ' 
vermis,  a  wormt 


together  with  molans  (Abl.  molari  sc.  lapide),  a  millstone ;  natalis  (Abl. 
natal/i  sc.  die),  birth-day,  and  the  plural  nouns  casses,  meshes  ;  sentes,  a 
thorn-bush ;  annates,  annals,  and  pugillares,  writing-tablets. 

The  words  callis,  canalis,  scrobis,  and  also  finis  and  cinis  in  the  singular,  are 
sometimes  used  as  feminines. — Anguis ,  a  snake,  and  tigris ,  -idis  a  tiger,  are  of  either 
gender. — Cards,  a  dog,  is  generally  masculine;  but  in  the  sense  of  a  dog  used  in  hunt¬ 
ing.  it  is  sometimes,  and  when  the  female  sex  is  to  be  denoted,  always  feminine. 

8.  In  X. — Masc.  :  (a)  the  Greek  words  corax,  dds,  a  raven,  and  thorax,  dcis,  3 
breastplate (b)  the  majority  of  words  in  ex;  as 


apex,  a  point. 
codex,  a  ledger. 
eimex,  a  bug. 
culex,  a  gnat. 


f'rutex,  a  shrub. 
grex,  gis,  a  herd. 
latex,  any  fluid. 
pollex,  the  thumb. 


pulex,  a  flea. 
ram  ex,  a  hernia. 
sorex,  a  shrew-mouse. 
vertex,  top,  whirlpool. 


The  words  rex,  a  king ;  pontifex,  a  high-priest ;  carnifex,  a  hangman ; 
remex,-igis,  a  rower ;  and  vervex,  ecis,  a  ram,  are  masculine  by  their  sig¬ 
nification. — Imbrex,  a  shingle ;  cortex,  rind ;  obex,  a  holt ;  pumex,  a 
pumice-stone ;  and  silex,  flint-stone,  are  oftener  masculine  than  femi¬ 
nine  ;  but  faex,-cis,  dregs ;  lex, -gis,  a  law ;  nex,-ds,  death  ;  ( prex )  preces, 
prayers ;  car  ex,  Ids,  sheer-grass ;  forfex,  -ids,  a  pair  of  scissors ;  ilex, 
ids,  a  holm-oak ;  and  supelleX,-lectilis,  furniture,  are  feminine (c)  tho 
following  in  ix  :  calix,  a  cup  ;  calyx,  the  bud  of  a  flower ;  fornix ,  a  vault ; 
phoenix, -iciSy  the  phoenix ;  bombyx,-yds,  the  silk-worm  ( bombyx ,  silk, 

§ 


£»■  03 


RULES  OF  GENDER. 


19 


is  fem.) ;  coccyx, -ygis,  the  cuckoo ;  and  commonly  varix,  a  swollen  vein. 
— Perdix,  -ids,  a  partridge,  is  of  either  gender. 

4.  In  S  impure. — Masc.  :  chalybs,-ybis,  steel ;  gryps,  -yphis,  a  griffin  ;  hydrops, 
-apis,  dropsy ;  torrens,  a  torrent ;  confluens,  a  confluence,  with 

fons,  a  sprivg.  dens,  a  tooth.  triens,  a  third. 

inons,  a  mountain.  bidens,  a  hoe.  quadrans,  a  fourth. 

pons,  a  bridge.  rudens,  a  rope.  sextans,  a  sixth. 

Bidens ,  a  sheep  two  years  old,  is  fem. — Adeps,  lard,  is  more  commonly  masc., 
and  forceps ,  a  pair  of  pincers,  more  commonly  fem. — Serpens  and  continens  are 
generally  fem.,  bestia  and  terra  being  understood. — Animans ,  any  living  being, 
is  of  all  genders:  but  in  the  sense  of  “a  rational  being,”  it  is  generally  masc., 
otherwise  fem.  rather  than  neuter. 


5.  In  ES. — Commonly  masc.  :  palumbes,  a  wood-pigeon  ;  torques  (also  torquis), 
a  necklace ;  and  vepres,  a  bramble. 

Neuter  are  the  words  ending  in  a,  e,  c,  l,  n,  t ,  ar ,  nr,  and  us :  as, 
wnigma  difficile,  mare  profundum,  lac  dulce,  vectigal  injustum, 
nomen  celebre,  caput  opertum,  cadcar  argenleum,  guttur  angusturn, 
genus  prceclarum ,  corpus  mortals. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  In  L. — Masc.  :  mugil,  a  mullet ;  sal,  salt ;  and  sol,  the  sun. — Sal,  in  the  sing. 

is  sometimes  used  as  a  neuter ;  but  in  the  plural,  it  is  always  masc. 

2.  In  N. — Masc.  :  lien,  the  milt ;  splen,  the  spleen ;  ren,  the  kidneys ;  lichen,  the 

ring-worm ;  attdgen,  a  hazel-hen ;  pecten,-inis,  a  comb ;  delphin,  Inis,  a 
dolphin ;  agon,  dnis,  a  contest ;  canon,  dnis,  a  rule  ;  and  horizon, -ontis,  the 
horizon ; — but  aedon,  a  nightingale ;  icon,  an  image ;  and  sindon,  fine 
linen,  are  feminine. 

Paean,  Titan,  Helicon,  daemon,  Hymen  (-enis),  fidieen,  t'lblcen,  tihicen,  and 
flamen,  are  masculine  by  their  signification. 

.  In  AR. — Par,  “  a  pair,”  is  neuter ;  but  par,  “  a  mate,”  “  consort,”  is  common. 
.  In  UR. — Masc.  :  furfur,  bran ;  turtur,  a  turtle  dove ;  and.  vuliur,  a  vulture.-— 
Far.  a  tliief,  is  common. 

5.  In  US.— Masc.  :  tripus  and  Oedipus, -delis. — Fem.:  all  polysyllables  in  -us, 
(gen.  -utis  or  -udis) :  as,  solus,  virtus,  servitus,  incus, -udis,  an  anvil. ;  palm, 
-udis,  a  swamp,  together  with  idles, -uris,  the  earth,  and  pscus-iidis,  a 
single  head  of  cattle  (peats, -oris,  n.,  means  cattle  collectively,  “  a  herd”). 

Lepus,-dris,  a  hare,  and  mus,  mums,  a  mouse,  are  masculine — grus,  a 
crane,  and  sus,  a  pig,  feminine,  when  the  particular  sax  is  not  to  be 
specified. 

FOURTH  DECLENSION. 


§  20.  Words  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in  -'its,  masculine,  and  in  -u, 
neuter ;  as,  exercitus  llomanus ,  genu  distortum.  Thus, 


adventus,  arrival. 
ccetus,  an  assembly. 
conatus,  an  effort. 
cruciatus,  torture. 
currus,  a  chariot. 
cquitatus,  cavalry. 


exercitus,  an  army. 
tl uctus,  a  wave. 
fructus,  fruit. 
impetus,  cm  attack. 
metus,  fear. 
motus,  a  movement. 


passus,  apace, 
spiritus,  breath. 
strep, itus,  a  noise. 
sumptus,  expense . 
vultus,  countenance. 
gelu,  ice ;  geuu,  Jcneen 


20 


SOME  PARTICULARS  ABOUT  SUBSTANTIVES 


But  the  following  in  -us  aro  feminine : 

acus,  a  needle.  idus  (pi.),  the  Ides.  portions,  a  portico. 

domus,  a  house.  manus,  a  hand.  quercus,  an  oak. 

ficus,  a  fig.  penus,  provisions.  tribus,  a  tribe. 

ffigP  Besides  penus, -us,  there  are  two  other  forms  of  the  same  signification  ;  viz., 
penum,-i ,  and  penus, -oris,  both  neuter. — Specus,  a  cavern,  is  generally  masculine; 
in  poetry,  it  is  often  used  as  a  feminine,  and  occasionally  oven  as  a  neuter. 

Anus ,  an  old  woman  ;  nurus ,  a  daughter-in-law  ;  and  socrus ,  a  mother-in-law,  aro 
feminine  by  their  signification. 

FIFTH  DECLENSION. 


21.  Words  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  - es .  and  are  feminine  :  as. 


res  proeclara.  Thus, 

acies,  tattle  array. 
effigies,  an  effigy. 
facies,  the  face. 
fides,  faith . 
glacies,  ice. 
ingluvies,  gluttony. 


pernicies,  ruin. 
res,  a  thing. 
series,  a  series. 
spes,  hope. 

species,  an  appearance. 
superficies,  surface. 


durities,  hardness. 
materies,  matter. 
mollities,  softness. 
mundities,  neatness. 
planities,  a  plain . 
eegnities,  sloth. 


Exc. — Dies ,  a  day,  is  common  in  the  singular  (fern.,  chiefiy  when  a  definite  day— 
“a  day  fixed  upon” — is  denoted),  but  always  masculine  in  the  plural. — Meridies ,  mid¬ 
day,  is  masculine,  and  is  used  only  in  the  singular. 


III.  Some  Particulars  about  Substantives. 


22. — Several  substantives  occur,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  plural 


number  only  ;  as, 

ounce,  a  cradle. 
deliciae,  delight. 
divitice,  riches. 
insidice,  snares. 
mime,  threats. 
nugoe,  trifles. 
nundinal,  the  market. 
nuptiae,  a  wedding. 
tenebrae,  darkness. 


liberi,  children. 
posteri,  descendants. 
arma,  arms. 
spolia,  booty. 

Alpes  (ium),  the  Alps. 
ambages,  evasions. 
compedcs,  fetters. 
fauces,  the  jaws. 
majores,  ancestors. 


natales,  parentage. 
optimates,  the  nobles. 
penates,  the  penates. 
preces,  prayers. 
proceres,  the  chiefs. 
sordes,  filth. 
moenia,  city-ivalls. 
verbera,  lashes. 
viscera,  the  bowels ,  etc. 


§  23. — Several  substantives  have  in  the 
different  from  that  of  the  singular  ;  as, 

cedes,  is,  a  temple.  fortuna,  fortune. 

cedes,  ium,  a  house.  fortunce,  wealth. 


plural  number  a  meaning 

opera,  labor. 
operae,  ivorkmen. 


copia,  plenty. 
copiae,  troops. 


gratia,  a  favor. 
gratice,  thanks. 


sal,  salt. 

sales,  ivitticisms. 


finis,  an  end.  littera,  a  letter. 

fines,  territory,  litterce,  an  epistle. 


tabula,  a  board. 
tabulce,  an  account-book . 


§  24. — Several  substantives  change  in  the  plural  either  gender,  or  de¬ 
clension,  or  both  :  as, 


locus,  a  place ,  pi.  i  and  a. 
frenutn,  a  bridle,  pi.  i  and  a. 
carbasus,,  flax,  pi.  a,-omm. 
Pergamus,  Troy,  pi.  a,-orum. 
Tartarus,  hell,  pi.  a,  oruin. 


ccelum,  heaven,  pi.  3,-orum. 
balneum,  a  bath,  pi.  ce,arum. 
epulum,,/<?as£,  meal,  pi.  ce,-arum. 
vas,  vasis,  a  vessel,  pi.  vasa,-orum. 
Argos  (n.),  Argos ,  pi.  Argi,-orum. 


SOME  PARTICULARS  ABOUT  SUBSTANTIVES. 


21 


§  25. — Several  substantives  are  redundant  either  in  termination, 
gender,  or  declension  ;  as, 


alveare  and  -ium,  a  lee-hive. 
amygdala  and  -um,  an  almond . 
balteus  and  -um,  a  girdle. 
cochlear,  -are,  -arium,  a  spoon. 
conatus  (-us)  and  -um,  an  effort. 
cubitum  and  -us  (-1),  a  cubit. 
elepliantus  and  -phas,  an  elephant. 
exemplar  and  -are,  a  copy. 
galerum  and  -us  (-i),  a  hat. 


palatum  and  -us  (-1),  the  palate. 
pileum  and  -us  (-i),  a  cap,  hat. 
postulatio  and  -atum,  a  request. 
potio  and  potus,  (-us),  a  drink. 


prsesepe,-es,  and  -ium,  a  manger. 
segmentum  and  -gmen,  a  segment. 
sinapi  (nr)  and  sinapis  (f.),  mustard. 


tapetum,-ete,-es  (-etis),  a  carpet. 
vespera,-er  (-i  and  -is),  evening. 


The  words  ficus,  laurus,  pinus,  and  cupressus,  take  in  the  gen.  and  abl. 
sing.,  and  in  the  nom.  and  acc.  plural,  besides  the  endings  of  the  second  de¬ 
clension,  to  which  they  properly  belong,  those  also  of  the  fourth  declension  ;  as, 
G.  fici  and  ficus,  Abl.  fico  and  ficu  ;  N.  pi.  fid  and  ficus,  etc. 

Ilia,  the  entrails,  has  iliorum  and  iliis  along  with  ilium  and  ilibus. — Jugerum, 
an  acre,  in  the  sing,  usually  follows  the  second  declension ;  in  the  plural,  the 
third. 

§  26. — Several  substantives  are  defective  in  case  ;  some  iu  one,  others 
in  more  than  one. 

1.  — Of  the  following  words,  one  case  only  is  in  use  :  Dat.,  derisui,  despicatui, 
ostentui,  in  connection  with  esse,  ducere,  or  habere. — Acc.,  incitas,  infitias,  and 
suppetias,  in  the  phrases  redactus  ad  incitas,  reduced  to  a  strait ;  infitias  ire,  to 
deny ;  suppetias  ferre,  to  bring  supplies. — Abl.,  noctu,  by  night ;  natu,  by 
birth,  in  combination  with  grandis,  magnus,  parvus,  mayor,  minor,  etc. — Con¬ 
cessit,  indultu,  permissu,  hortatu,  invitatu,  mandatu,  jussu,  injussu,  oratu, 
rogatu,  and  the  like,  in  connection  with  a  genitive  or  a  pronoun ;  e.  g.,  man¬ 
datu  Caesaris,  at  Caesar’s  command ;  rogatu  tuo,  at  your  request ;  meo  arbitratu, 
according  to  my  opinion. 

2.  — Of  the  following  words,  two  cases  only  are  in  use :  nom.  and  ACC.,  grates, 
munia,  jura,  rura,  thura,  mella  ;  inferim,  and  inferias,  “  sacrifices  to  the  dead 
and  secus  (n.),  in  the  sense  of  sexus,  as  virile  secus,  muliebre  secus. — Nom.  and 
abl,,  vesper  and  vespere  or  vesperi. — Gen.  and  abl.,  repetundarum  and  repe- 
tundis,  “extortions.” — Acc.  aud  abl.,  for  as  and  foris  (both  forms  used  adverb¬ 
ially),  “out  of  doors;”  e.  g.,  ire  foras,  coenare  foris ;  sordem,  sorde,  filth,  and 
veprem,  vepre,  a  bramble.  ( pgr  Sordes  and  vepres  are  both  complete  in  the 
plural.) 

3.  — Of  the  following  words,  three  cases  are  in  use :  astus,  astu,  and  astus  (acc. 
pi.),  craft.  Lues,  luem,  lue,  a  plague.  (Ops)  opis,  opem,  ope,  help ;  the  plural 
opes,  wealth,  power,  is  complete.  Vicis  (gen.),  vicem,  vice,  place  or  stead ;  plur. 
vices,  etc.,  but  no  genitive  occurs. 

4.  — Of  the  following  words,  four  cases  are  in  use :  virus,  viri,  virus  (acc.)> 
viro,  poison.  (Frux)  frugis,  frugi,  frugem,  fruge,  fruit ;  pi.  fruges,  complete. 
(Daps)  dapis,  i,  em,  e,  food,  banquet ;  pi.  dapes,  complete,  but  no  genitive  seems 
to  occur.  (Ditio)  ditionis,  i,em,  e,  dominion.  (Internecio)  internecionis,  i,  em,  e, 
carnage,  utter  destruction. 


DECLENSION"  OE  GREEK  WORDS, 


22 


IY.  Declension  of  Greek  Words. 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

§  27. — Greek  words  of  the  first  declension  end  in  e  (fem.)  and  in  as  and  es 
(masc.). — Those  that  admit  of  a  plural,  are  declined  in  that  number  like  Latin 
nouns.  Their  declension  in  the  singular  is  as  follows  : 


N. 

epitom-e 

fEne-as 

Atrid-es 

Anchis-es 

G. 

epitom-es 

JEne-se 

Atrid-se 

Ancliis-ae 

D. 

epitom-80 

iEne-se 

Atrid-ae 

Anchis-ae 

A. 

epitom-en 

iEne-am  (an) 

Atrid-en 

Ancliis-en 

V. 

epitom-e 

iEne-a 

Atrid-e  and  a 

Anchis-e 

A. 

epitom-e 

2Ene-a 

Atrid-a  and  e 

Anchis-e 

Notes.— (1.)  The  acc.  of  words  in  as  is  in  prose  generally  am,  in  poetry  frequently 
an. — (2.)  The  voc.  and  abl.  of  words  in  es,  end  both  in  e  and  a  : — in  the  abb,  a  is 
the  regular  ending. — (3.)  The  gen.  plur.  of  patronymics  in  es  is  often  contracted,  as 
BEneadum,  Dardarndum,  for  BEneadarum ,  Dardanidarum,  from  BEneades,  Darda- 
nides. — (4.)  Greek  words  in  e  and  es  often  follow  the  Latin  declension;  thus  we  find 
musiea,  grammatica ,  rhetorica,  Persa ,  sophista,  etc.,  along  with,  and  even  in  prefer- 
ence  to,  musice ,  grammatics ,  rhetorice ,  Perses ,  sophistes. 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§  28. — Greek  words  of  the  second  declension  end  in  os  (masc.  and  fem.)  and 
in  on  (neut.). — They  are  thus  declined  : 


N. 

Rhod-os  (or  us) 

Ili-on  (or  um) 

A  tli- os 

Orpli-eus 

G. 

Rliod-i 

Ili-i 

Ath-o 

Orph-e'i  (or  eos) 

D. 

Rliod-o 

Ili-o 

Ath-o 

Orpli-eo  (or  ei) 

A. 

Rhod-bn  (or  um) 

Ili-on  (or  um) 

Ath-on  (or  0)  Orph-eum  (or  ea) 

V. 

Rliod-e 

Ili-on  (or  um) 

Ath-os 

Orpli-eu 

A. 

Rliod-o 

Ili-o 

Ath-o 

Orph-eo 

Notes. — (I.)  Greek  words  in  os  (&>?),  as  Ceos,  Cos,  Teds,  Androgebs,  either  follow  the 
Greek  (Attic)  declension,  like  Athos,  or  take  the  Latin  forms,  as  Androgens,  i,  o,  urn, 
us  (not  e),  o.  Atlio  in  the  acc.  and  abl.  sing,  sometimes  follows  the  third  declension, 
as  Athonem,  Athone. — (2.)  Proper  names  in  eus,  as  Orpheus,  Perseus,  Theseus ,  make 
the  voc.  always  in  eu .  In  the  gen.,  dat.,  and  acc.  they  follow  either  the  second 
Latin,  or  third  Greek  declension. — (3.)  Words  in  on  are  sometimes  contracted  in  the 
gen.  plur.,  as  Bucolicbn,  Georgicbn ,  for  Bucollcorum ,  Georgicorum. 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 


lamp- 

her- 

poes- 

Teth- 

Par- 

N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 

A. 

as 

adis  (ados) 
adi 

adem  (ada) 

as 

ade 

03 

ois 

oi 

oem  (on) 
os 

oe 

is 

is  (eos) 

i 

im  (in) 

i 

i 

ys 

yis  (yos) 

yi  (y) 

ym  (yn) 

y 

ye  (y) 

is 

idis  (idos) 
idi  [(in) 

idem  (ida),  im 
is  (i) 
ide 

§  29. — Note  1.  Greek  words  in  o,  as  echo,  Dido,  Io ,  Clio,  Clotho,  Sappho,  have  in  the 
genitive,  us  (60s) in  all  other  cases,  0. — The  Latin  forms  onis,  oni,  onem ,  oneui ire  but 
rarely  used. 


DECLENSION  OF  GREEK  WORDS. 


op 


Note  2.  The  neuters  melos ,  epos,  chaos ,  and  cefos  (plur.  mcfe,  cete),  are  scarcely  used 
in  any  other  case  than  the  norn.,  acous.,  and  voe. — Cetos,  a  wliale,  is  declined  also 
after  the  second  declension,  as  cetos,  ceti,  ceto,  cetos,  cetos,  ceto]  plur.,  cete ,  cetorum ,  cetis , 
crfw. 

Note  3.  Argos ,  the  name  of  a  city,  is  in  the  sing,  an  indeclinable  neuter,  used  only 
in  the  nom.  and  ace. — In  the  plural  it  is  masculine,  and  is  thus  declined :  Argi,  ovum , 

iSy  OSy  IS* 

GENITIVE,  ACCUSATIVE,  AND  VOCATIVE. 

{Singular) 

§  30. — Genitive  sing. — Greek  proper  names  in  es  liave  in  the  gen.  sing, 
often  i  instead  of  is  ;  as,  Socrati,  Aristoteli,  JJlixi ,  Achilli,  Pericli,  instead  of 
Socratis,  Aristotelis,  etc. — After  the  time  of  Cicero,  however,  the  form  is  alone 
was  used. 

Accusative  sing. — 1.  Greek  words  whose  genitive  ends  in  -is- {-os)  impure, 
as  lampas,  rhetor,  Hector,  Agamemnon,  Cyclops,  Babylon,  Marathon,  etc.,  and  also 
the  three  words  Tros,-ois ,  herosrois,  and  Minos, -ois,  make  the  accus.  sing,  in 
em  and  a. 

The  ending  a  is  regularly  used  in  aer,  aether,  and  Pan. 

2.  Greek  words  in  is  and  ys  (Gen.  os  pure),  as  poesis,  basis,  thesis,  syrtis,  Tethys } 
Halys,  make  the  accus.  sing,  both  in  iin  and  in. 

Greek  words  in  is,  -idis  (Barytons  in  k,  do),  as  Paris,  Agis,  Daphnis,  Ibis, 
Iris,  Serdpis,  Tigris,  Zeuxis,  etc.,  have  in  the  accus.  sing,  both  irn  {in)  and 
idem  {ida), — but  more  commonly  im. 

Greek  words  in  is,  -idis  (Oxytons  in  <'?,  'do),  as  aegis,  pyramis,  tyrannis,  Chalcis, 
Colchis,  Phocis,  etc.,  have  but  idem  {ida.) 

3.  Proper  names  in  es,  -is,  -which  follow  in  Greek  the  first  declension  (^r,  -bv), 
as  Xerxes,  Mithridates,  Simonides,  Cambyses,  AEschines,  Euphrates,  etc.,  have  in 
the  accus.  sing,  both  em  and  en. — This  is  the  case  also,  though  much  less  fre¬ 
quently,  with  proper  names  in  es,  that  follow  in  Greek  the  third  declension,  as 
Sophocles,  Hippocrates,  etc.  :  acc.  Sophoclem,  more  rarely  Sophoclen. 

Thales  and  Chremes  (Gen.  is  and  etis )  have  Thalem  or  Thaletem  and  Thalen,  etc. 

Vocative  sing. — The  vocative  sing,  of  Greek  words  is  generally  like  the 
nominative. — But  proper  names  in  is,  ys,  em,  and  as  (G.  antis),  drop  the  final  s 
of  the  nominative,  as  Pari,  Thai,  Coty,  Orpheu,  Theseu ,  Atla,  Calcha. 

Words  in  is,  -idis,  however,  make  the  vocative  just  as  often  like  the  nomina¬ 
tive,  as  Paris,  Thais,  Bacchis. 

Proper  names  in  es,  -is,  sometimes  have  e  in  the  vocative,  as  Socrate,  Simonide, 
Damocle,  Sophocle,  etc.,  instead  of  Socrates,  etc. 

GENITIVE,  DATIVE,  AND  ACCUSATIVE. 

{Plural) 

§  31. — Genitive  plur. — The  genitive  plural  of  Greek  words  is  generally  the 
same  as  that  of  Latin  words  ;  but  sometimes,  especially  in  titles  of  books,  the 
Greek  ending  on  {uv)  is  retained,  as  epigrammaton,  metamorphosedn. 

Dative  plur. — Greek  words  in  -ma  have  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  more  fre¬ 
quently  is  than  ibus,  as  poematis,  epigrammatis,  etc.,  instead  of  poematibus,  etc. 

Accusative  plur. — Words  that  have  em  and  a  in  the  accus.  sing.,  have  es 
and  as  in  the  accus.  plur. ;  as,  aspidas,  heroas,  phalangas,  Cyclopas,  JEthiopas, 
Arcadas,  -  Macedonas, — and  in  Caesar  and  Tacitus  we  find  even  AUobrogas , 
Lingonas,  Vangionas,  and  others,  which  are  not  Greek  national  names  at  all. 


24 


ADJECTIVES, 


CHAPTER  III. 

Adjectives. 

Adjectives  are  divided  into  three  classes;  namely,  (1.)  adjectives  of  three 
endings,  (2.)  adjectives  of  two  endings,  and  (3.)  adjectives  of  one  ending. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THREE  ENDINGS. 

§  82. — Adjectives  of  three  endings  end  in  us,  a,  urn,  and  er,  a ,  um. 
They  are  in  the  mascnline  declined  like  serous ,  in  the  feminine  like  roscr, 
and  in  the  neuter  like  regnum. — Those  in  er ,  a,  um ,  make  the  vocative 
like  the  nominative,  and,  for  the  most  part,  drop  e  before  r. 


Declension  of  tonus,  “good,”  and  piger,  “lazy.” 


S.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 

A. 

(m.) 

bon-ns 

bon-i 

bon-o 

bon-um 

bon-e 

bon-o 

bon-a 

bon-se 

bon-ae 

bon-am 

bon-a 

bon-a 

_  (n.) 

oonum 

bon-i 

bon-o 

bonum 

bonum 

bon-o 

N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 

A. 

(m.) 

piger 

pigri 

pigro 

pigrum 

piger 

pigro 

(f.) 

pigra 

pigrse 

pigrse 

pigram 

pigra 

pigra 

>•> 

pigrum 

pigri 

pigro 

pigrum 

pigrum 

pigro 

P.N. 

bon-i 

bon-se 

bona 

N. 

pigri 

pigrse 

pigra 

G. 

bon-orum  bon-arum  bon-orum 

G. 

pigrorum  pigrarum  pigrorum 

D. 

bon-is 

bon-is 

bon-is 

D. 

pigris 

pigris 

pigris 

A. 

bon-os 

bon-as 

bona 

A. 

pigros 

pigras 

pigra 

V. 

bon-i 

bon-se 

bona 

V. 

pigri 

pigrse 

pigra 

A. 

bon-is 

bon-is 

bon-is 

A. 

pigris 

pigris 

pigris 

Words  for  practice. 


acerbus,  harsh. 

caducus,  fading. 

du ms,  hard. 

acid  us,  so  ur. 

crocus,  blind. 

ebrius,  drunk. 

acutus,  sharp. 

cal i do s,  warm. 

egenus,  needy. 

semulus,  vying  with. 

call  id  us,  cunning. 

egregius,  remarkable, 

segrotus,  sick. 

calvus,  bald. 

exiguus,  small. 

sequus,  just. 

Candidas,  candid. 

eximius,  excellent. 

albus,  ivhite. 

earns,  dear. 

externus,  outward. 

altus,  high. 

castus,  chaste. 

facetus,  witty. 

amarus,  litter. 

cautus,  cautious. 

facundus,  eloquent. 

amoenus,  pleasant. 

cavus,  holloiv. 

falsus ,  false. 

amplus,  large. 

certus,  certain. 

ferns,  savage. 

angustus,  narrow. 

clarus ,  famous. 

fessus,  weary. 

antiquus,  ancient. 

claudus,  lame. 

festlnus,  hastening . 

aprlcus,  sunny. 

crassus,  thick. 

fid  us ,  faithful. 

aptus,  fit. 

cunctus,  all. 

firmus,  yb’w. 

arctus,  narrow. 

curtus,  short 

fiavus,  yellow. 

as  tutus,  cunning. 

curvus,  crooked. 

foedus,  ugly. 

austerus,  harsh. 

decorus,  graceful. 

formosus  ,fair. 

avarus,  covetous. 

densus,  thick. 

frivolus,  trifling. 

avidns,  greedy. 

dignus,  worthy. 

garrulus,  prattling . 

barbarus,  savage. 

disertus,  eloquent. 

gratus,  thankf  ul. 

beatus,  blessed. 

diuturnus,  lasting. 

h  u  m  an  u  s ,  human. 

benignus,  kind. 

doctus,  learned. 

bumidus,  moist. 

blandus,  flattering. 

dubius,  doubtful. 

idoneus,^. 

ADJECTIVES. 


25 


ignarus,  ignorant. 

molestus,  troublesome. 

severus,  severe. 

ignavus,  coviardly. 

mundus,  neat. 

siccus,  dry. 

improbus,  wicked. 

mutns,  dumb. 

sobrius,  sober. 

incautus,  inconsiderate. 

nimius,  too  much. 

strenuus,  active. 

incertus,  uncertain. 

novus,  new. 

stultus,  foolish. 

inclytus,  renowned. 

noxius,  hurtful. 

subitus,  sudden. 

industrius,  diligent. 

nudus,  bare. 

superbus,  proud. 

inf  Idas,  unfaithful. 

obscurus,  dark. 
odiosus,  hateful. 

surdus,  deaf. 

in vidus,  envious. 

tacitus,  silent. 

invitus,  unwilling. 

oplmus ,fat,  rich. 

tantus,  so  great. 

jucundus,  pleasant. 

pallidus,  pale. 

tardus,  slow. 

justus,  jms£. 

periculosus,  dangerous. 

tepidus,  lukewarm. 

lactus ,  joyful 

perfldus,  treacherous. 

tumidus,  swollen. 

latus,  broad. 

planus,  plain. 

turbidus,  muddy. 

lentus,  slow. 

plenus,/W/. 

tutus,  safe. 

longinquus,/ar  off. 

prseditus,  endowed. 

varius,  various. 

longus,  long. 

pravus,  wicked. 

verecundus,  bashful . 

lubricus,  slippery. 

probus,  honest. 

venustus,  comely. 

lucidus,  bright. 

profundus,  deep. 

verus,  true. 

maturus,  ripe. 

pudlcus,  chaste. 

vivus,  alive. 

mirus,  wonderful. 

sanus,  sound. 

viclnus,  neighboring. 

seger,  sick. 

pulcher,yhir. 

asper,  rough. 

ater,  black. 

ruber,  red. 

lacer,  torn. 

creber ,  frequent. 

sacer,  sacred. 

liber,  free. 

impiger,  unwearied. 

sinister,  left. 

miser,  wretched. 

integer,  entire. 

teter  ,foul. 

prosper,  prosperous. 

macer,  lean. 

vafer,  crafty. 

tener,  tender. 

Note. — The  adjectives  from  (Eger  to  vafer  drop  the  e  before  r  and  are  declined  liko 
piger. — Asper  and  the  rest,  together  with  the  compounds  of fero  and  gero ,  as  opifer , 
signifer ,  armiger ,  laniger ,  etc.,  retain  the  e  throughout. 

Dexter ,  right,  sometimes  retains,  but  oftener  rejects  the  e  before  r. — Satur ,  sated, 
makes  satura ,  saturum  ;  g.  saturi ,  etc. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  TWO  ENDINGS. 

§  33. — Adjectives  of  two  endings  end  in  e, — (in  zs  for  the  masc. 
and  fem.,  in  e  for  the  neuter) — They  all  follow  the  third  declension,  but 
have  i9  ia,  ium ,  that  is,  they  make  the  abl.  sing,  in  i  ;  the  nom.,  acc.. 
and  voc.  neut.  plur.  in  ia  ;  and  the  gen.  pi.  in  ium. 

Declension  of  lev  is,  “  light,”  and  acer,  “  sharp.” 


S.N. 

(m.) 

lev-is 

(f.) 

lev-is 

V.) 

leve 

N. 

(m.) 

acer 

(O 

acris 

(n.) 

acre 

G. 

lev-is 

lev-is 

lev-is 

G. 

acris 

acris 

acris 

D. 

lev-i 

lev-i 

lev-i 

D. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

A. 

lev-em 

lev-em 

leve 

A. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

V. 

lev-i3 

lev-is 

leve 

Y. 

acer 

acris 

.  acre 

A. 

lev-i 

lev-i 

lev-i 

A. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

P.  N. 

lev-es 

lev-es 

levia 

N. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

G. 

lev-ium 

lev-ium 

lev-ium 

G. 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

D. 

lev-ibus 

lev-ibus 

lev-ibus 

D- 

acri  bus 

acribu3 

acribus 

A. 

lev-es 

lev-es 

levia 

A. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

V. 

lev-es 

lev-es 

levia 

V. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

A. 

lev-ibus 

lev-ibus 

lev-ibus 

A. 

acri  bus 

acribus 

acribus 

26  ADJECTIVES* 


Words  for  practice. 


accllvis,  ascending . 

grandis,  great. 

pinguis,  fat. 

sequalis,  equal. 

gravis,  heavy. 

placabilis,  placable. 

agilis,  nimble. 

hilaris,  cheerful. 

popularis,  popular. 

agrestis,  rustic. 

humilis,  loio. 

procllvis,  prone. 

amabilis,  lovely. 

ignobilis,  mean. 

qualis,  of  ivliat  kind. 

brevis,  short. 

illustris,/i!mows. 

regalis,  kingly. 

civil  is,  civil. 

imbeeillis,  weak. 

rudis,  rough,  rude. 

ccelestis,  heavenly. 

imberbis  feardless. 

salutaris,  wholesome. 

comis,  courteous. 

immanis,  huge. 

segnis,  sluggish. 

credibilis,  credible. 

inanis,  void ,  vain. 

similis,  like. 

crudelis,  cruel. 

incolumis,  safe. 

solemnis,  solemn. 

debilis,  weak. 

inermis,  defenceless. 

stabiiis,  steadfast. 

decllvis,  sloping. 

infamis,  infamous. 

sterilis,  barren. 

deformis,  ugly. 

insignis,  remarkable. 

suavis,  sweet. 

dissimilis,  unlike. 

insomnis,  sleepless. 

subllmis,  lofty. 

docilis,  docile. 

jugis ,  perpetual. 

subtliis,  subtle. 

dulcis,  sweet. 

lenis,  gentle. 

tails,  such. 

exanimis,  lifeless. 

liberalis,  liberal. 

tenuis,  thin. 

exllis,  thin,  poor. 

mediocris,  middling. 

terribilis,  dreadful. 

facilis,  easy. 

mirabilis,  wonderf  til. 

tristis,  sad. 

fertilis ,  fertile. 

mitis,  meek. 

turpis,  base. 

fidelis,  [faithful. 

mobilis,  movable. 

unanimis,  unanimous. 

fiebilis,  lamentable. 

mollis,  soft. 

utilis,  useful. 

fortis,  brave. 

mutabilis,  changeable. 

vilis,  worthless. 

fragilis,  brittle. 

nobilis,  noble. 

viridis,  green. 

gracilis,  slender. 

omnis,  all ,  every. 

vulgaris,  vulgar. 

alacer,  cheerf  ul. 

equester,  equestrian. 

saluber,  wholesome. 

canipester,  level. 

palustcr,  marshy. 

Silvester,  woody. 

celeber,  famous. 

pedestor,  on  foot. 

torrester,  earthly. 

celer,  swift ,  quick. 

p  uter,  rotten ,  decaying. 

volucer,  winged. 

.Note. — The  adjectives 

in  er,  is,  e  (thirteen  in  number 

;  viz.,  acer,  alacer ,  camp  ester, 

etc.),  are  declined  throng 

bout  like  lewis,  except  that  in 

the  nom.  and  voc.  sing,  they 

have  a  distinct  form  in  er 

for  the  masculine. 

Celer  retains  the  e  before  r,  and  lias  in  the  gen.  plur. 

celerum  instead  of  celerium. — 

Salubris ,  equestris ,  Celebris 

f,  silvestris ,  terrestris ,  and  palustris ,  are  sometimes  joined  to 

masculine  nouns  ;  as,  ann 

■us  salubris  for  annus  saluber. 

Thus,  locus  Celebris,  tumul- 

tus  silvesiris,  etc. 

X 

ADJECTIVES  OF  ONE  ENDING.  eA 

S 

§  34.  Adjectives  of  one  ending  end  variously  and  may  be  joined  to 
substantives  of  any  gender  ;  as,  felix  rex,  felix  regina ,  felix  regnum. 
They  are  throughout  declined  like  adjectives  of  two  endings,  except 
that  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  neut.  sing,  are  the  same 
as  the  nominative  masc.  The  ablative  sing,  sometimes  ends  in  e  in¬ 
stead  of  i. 


BOSTON  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 
CHESTN8T  MILL,  MASS. 


ADJECTIVES.  27 


Declension  of  felix,  “  happy.” 


On.) 

(f.) 

(«•) 

S.  N. 

felix 

felix 

felix 

Gh 

felic-is 

felic-is 

felic-is 

D. 

felic-i 

felic-i 

felic-i 

A. 

felic-em 

felic-em 

felix 

V. 

felix 

felix 

felix 

A. 

felic-i  (e) 

felic-i  (e) 

felic-i  (e) 

P.  N. 

felic-es 

felic-es 

felicia 

a. 

felic-ium 

felic-ium 

felic-ium 

D. 

felic-ibus 

felic-ibus 

felic-ibus 

A. 

felic-es 

felic-es 

felicia 

V. 

folic-es 

felic-es 

felicia 

A. 

felic-ibus 

felic-ibus 

felic-ibus 

Words  for  practice. 


audax,  bold. 

atrox,  cruel. 

amens,  maa. 

capax,  capacious. 

ferox,  ferocious. 

demons,  merciful 

efficax,  effectual. 

prsecox,  premature. 

demens,  senseless. 

fallax,  deceitful. 

velox,  swift. 

eloquens,  eloquent. 

ferax,  fertile. 

trnx,  wild,  fierce. 

frequent. 

Joquax,  talkative. 

hebes,  8tis,  dull. 

impatiens,  impatient. 

mendax,  lying. 

sons,  guilty. 

impudens,  imp /dent. 

mordax,  biting. 

insons,  guiltless. 

ingens,  huge. 

min  ax,  threatening . 

expers,  destitute  of. 

insipiens, foolish. 

pertinax,  obstinate. 

sollers,  clever. 

innoe'ens,  guiltless. 

pervicax,  stubborn. 

concors,  agreeing. 

ncgligens,  careless. 

rapax,  rapacious. 

discors,  at  variance. 

opulens,  wealthy. 

sagax,  sagacious. 

excors,  silly. 

prudens,  prudent. 

tenax,  tenacious. 

constans,  constant. 

vqqqws.,  fresh. 

vorax,  devouring. 

elegans,  elegant. 

repens,  sudden. 

simplex,  simple. 

petulans,  wanton. 

sapiens,  ivise. 

duplex,  double. 

praestans,  excellent.  ■ 

vehemens,  vehement. 

Decline  together  : 

Ager  ferax — insula  fer 

ux — ingenium  fere 

Terror  ingens — belluct  ingens — helium  ingens.  Famulus  astutus , 
piger  et  mendax — vir  prudens ,  sag  ax  et  eruditus — saxum  ingens 
et  immobile — tempus  praeteritum ,  praesens  et  futurum — ingenium 
praestans  et  paene  divinum ,  and  the  like. 

Note  1. — The  following  adjectives  of  one  ending  have  only  e  in  the  abl.  sing. :  (1.) 
the  compounds  of  pes,  color ,  and  corpus;  as,  tripes ,  quadrupes,  discolor,  versicolor, 
bicorpor ,  tricorpor  ;  (2.)  Participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  such,  and  not  as  adjectives; 
(3.)  Adjectives  in  general,  when  used  substantively;  as,  artifex,  an  artist;  vigil,  a 
watchman ;  Clemens ,  Pertinax ,  Fidelis,  Vitalis ;  and  (4.)  the  adjectives  jiivenis,  young; 
senejc ,  old ;  along  with 

cselebs,  unmarried.  pubes  ( and  -er),  adult.  pauper,  poor. 

compos,  otis,  master  of.  impubcs,  beardless.  sospes,  itis,  safe. 

deses,  idis,  idle.  princeps,  ipis,  chief.  superstes,  surviving . 

Note  2. — The  following  adjectives  of  one  ending  have  only  um  in  the  genitive 
plur. :  (1.)  the  compounds  in  -ceps;  as,  anceps,  ipitis ,  doubtful;  prceceps,  headlong; 


28 


ADJECTIVES. 


particeps ,  ipis ,  partaking;  (2.)  those  that  have  only  <3  in  the  ablative  ;  and  (3.)  the  adjec¬ 
tives  arti/ex,  skilful ;  vigil,  watchful ;  along  with 

cornpar,  equal.  ales,  itis,  winged.  dives,  itis,  rich. 

impar,  unable.  clear,  uris,  ta7ne.  inops,  helpless. 

dispar,  unlike.  degener,  degenerate.  supplex,  suppliant. 

Note  3. — Manor,  mindful;  immemor,  forgetful;  and  uber,  plentiful,  have  i  in  the 
idol.  sing,  and  um  in  the  genitive  plur. — Par,  equal,  has  pari,paria ,  parium ;  but  its 
compounds  have  i  ( e )  ia,  um. —  Vetus,-eris ,  old,  has  veteri  (e),  vetera,  veterum. — Sons , 
guilty;  insons ,  guiltless;  and  locuples,etis,  rich,  have  um  and  ium. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  35.  There  are  three  degrees  of  comparison  :  the  positive,  the  com¬ 
parative,  and  the  superlative. 

The  positive  degree  is  that  which  is  expressed  hy  the  adjective  in  its  simple 
form;  as,  “An  elephant  is  large;  a  mouse,  small ;  a  lion,  fierce,  active,  bold, 
and  strong.” 

The  comparative  is  that  form,  which  indicates  that  the  quality,  denoted  by 
the  adjective,  exists  in  one  object  in  a  higher  or  lower  degree  than  in  another; 
as,  “  An  elephant  is  smaller  than  a  whale ;  a  mouse,  smaller  than  a  rat.” 

The  superlative  is  that  form  which  indicates  that  the  quality,  denoted  by  the 
adjective,  belongs  to  an  object  in  a  very  high  (low),  or  in  the  highest  (lowest) 
degree ;  as,  “  The  wolf  is  very  strong ;  the  tiger,  still  stronger ;  and  the  lion, 
the  strongest  of  all.” 

The  comparative  and  superlative,  in  Latin,  are  formed  by  adding  - ior 


d  -issimus  to  the  stem. 

Thus  : 

POSITIVE. 

COMP. 

SUPERL. 

longus,  long , 

long-ior, 

long-issimus. 

gravis,  heavy , 

grav-ior, 

grav-issirnus. 

felix,  happy , 

felic-ior, 

felic-issimus. 

Comparatives  end  in  ior  for  the  masc.  and  fern.,  and  in  ius  for  the  neuter.  They 
are  declined  like  adjectives  of  two  endings;  except  that  they  have  e  {%)  in  the  abl. 
sing.,  a  in  the  noin.  acc.,  and  voc.  neut.  plur.,  and  um  in  the  genitive  plural. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

N. 

levior 

levior 

levins 

leviores 

leviores 

leviora 

G. 

levioris 

levioris 

levioris 

leviorum 

leviorum 

leviorum 

D. 

leviori 

leviori 

leviori 

levioribus 

levioribus 

levioribus 

A. 

leviorem 

leviorem 

levins 

leviores 

leviores 

leviora 

v. 

levior 

levior 

levins 

leviores 

leviores 

leviora 

A. 

leviore  (i) 

leviore  (i) 

leviore  (i) 

levioribus 

levioribus 

levioribus 

Decline  together :  Puer  verecundus,  verecundior,  verecundissimus — arbor  cdta, 
altior,  altissima — aqaila  rapax,  rapacior,  rapacissima — vir  sapiens,  sapientior, 
sapientissimus — verbum  fallax,  fallacies,  fallacissimum — vox  pulchra,  pulchrior, 
pidcherrima—opus  difficile,  difficilius,  difficiUimum — poeta  bonus,  melior,  optl 


ADJECTIVES. 


29 


mus — res  mala,  pejor ,  pessima — nomen  magnum,  majus,  maximum— labor 
parvus,  minor,  minimus,  and  the  like. 

Exc.  1. — Adjectives  in  -er  form  tlie  superlative  by  adding  -rimus  to  that 
ending;  as, 


miser,  wretched ,  miser-ior.  miser-rimus. 

celeber,  famous ,  celebr-ior.  celeber-rimus. 

Exc.  2. — The  adjectives  facilis,  difficilis,  similis,  dissimilis,  gracilis,  and 
humilis  form  the  superlative  by  adding  Minus  to  the  stem ;  as, 

gracilis,  slender ,  gracil-ior.  gracil-limus. 

humilis,  low ,  liumil-ior.  humil-limus. 

Exc.  3. — Adjectives  in  - dicus ,  -ficus,  and  -volus  (from  dico,facio,  and  void),  add 
entior,  entissimus  to  the  stem ;  as, 

bonevolus,  kind.  benevol-entior.  benevol-entissimus. 

maledicus,  abusive.  maledic-entior.  maledic-entissimus. 


IRREGULAR  AND  DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON. 


§  36.- 


The  following  adjectives  are  wholly  irregular  in  comparison : 


bonus,  good , 

melior, 

optimus. 

malus,  bad , 

pejor, 

pessimus. 

magnus,  great , 

major, 

maximus. 

parvus,  small , 

minor, 

minimus. 

multus,  much, 

plus, 

plurimus. 

ADJECTIVES  WITH  A  DOUBLE  SUPERLATIVE. 


exterus,  outward, 
inferus,  below, 
superus,  above, 
posterns,  hind, 


exterior, 

inferior, 

superior, 

posterior, 


extremus  (extimus). 
infimus  and  imns. 
supremus  and  summus. 
postremus  (postumus). 


Note.  1.— The  comparative  of  multus  has  in  the  sing,  two  forms  only  ;  viz.,  plus 
(nom.  and  acc.  neut.)  and pluris,  more.  But  the  plural  plures  is  complete;  as,  nom. 
and  acc.  plures ,  plura  (rarely  pluria),  gen.  plurium  (better  than  plurum ),  dat.  and 
abl.  pluribus. — Oomplures  has  in  the  neut.  plur.  both  complura  and  compluria. 

Multus  and  plurimus  are  in  poetry  often  used  in  the  sense  of  many,  as  multa  tabula , 
multa  victima,  plurima  avis ,  instead  of  multce  tabulce,  etc. — The  English  “a  great 
many”  and  “  most”  are  rendered  b j  plur imi  or  plerique. 

Note  2. — The  adj.  exterus ,  inferus ,  superus ,  and  posterns ,  but  rarely  occur  in  the 
singular,  and  their  nom.  sing.  masc.  is  not  found  at  all  in  good  prose. — Dives ,  rich, 
nas  either  divitior ,  divitissimus ,  or  ditior,  ditissimus. —  Vetus ,  old,  has  vetustior  for 
the  comp,  and  veterrimus  or  vetustissimus  for  the  superlative. — Providus,  cautious, 
and  egenus ,  needy,  either  prefix  mag  is,  maxime  to  the  positive,  or  are  supplied  by 
providentior ,  provident  issimus,  and  eg  entior ,  egentissimus. 

Note  3. — Nequam ,  worthless,  and  frugi ,  temperate  (both  indeclinable),  have 
nequior ,  neguissimus ,  and  frugalior ,  frugalissimus. — Maturus ,  ripe,  and  imbecillis 
(also  imbecillus),  weak,  have  in  the  superl.  cither  matvrrimus ,  imbccillimus ,  or 
matur issimus,  imbecillissimus. 


30 


ADJECTIVES. 


§  3t.— “The  following  adjectives 

citerior,  citinms,  near ,  close  to. 
ulterior,  ultimas,  farther ,  last. 
interior,  intimus,  inner ,  inmost. 
propior,  proximus,  nearer ,  next. 


want  the  positive : 

prior,  primus,  former ,  first. 
ocior,  ocissimua,  swifter ,  swiftest . 
deterior,  deterrimus,  worse ,  worst. 
potior,  potlssimus,  better ,  chief. 


The  following  adjectives  want  the 

bell  us,  bellissimus,  lovely. 
diversus,  diversissimus,  different. 
falsus,  falsissimus,  false. 
inclytus,  inclytissimus,  famous . 

The  following  adjectives  want  the 

alacer,  alacrior,  lively. 
deses,  desidior,  indolent. 
diuturnus,  diuturnior,  lasting. 
longinquus,  longinquior,  far  off. 


terminational  comparative : 

invictus,  invictissimus,  invincible. 
meritus,  meritissimus,  deserving. 
uovus,  novissimus,  new ,  last. 
sheer,  sacerrimus,  holy ,  sacred. 

terminational  superlative : 

proclivis,  proclivior,  inclined. 
protervus,  protervior,  impudent. 
propinquus,  propinquior,  near. 
terribilis,  terribilior,  dreadful ,  etc. 


Note  1. — Juvenis  and  adolescens ,  young,  and  sen  ex  (G.  senis),  old,  have  junior , 
adolescentior ,  and  senior.  Their  superlative  is  supplied  by  natu  minimus ,  the 
youngest,  and  natu  maximus ,  the  oldest. 

Note  2. — Adjectives  compounded  with  joer  and  jurre,  as  preealtus ,  preedives,  per- 
brevis ,  peridoneus ,  perjucundus ,  permagnus ,  ect.,  admit  of  no  further  comparison. — 
Prcestans  and  prceclarus  alone  have  -ior,  issimus. 

Note  8. — Many  adjectives  do  not  form  the  comp,  and  superb  by  -for  and  -issimus, 
but  by  prefixing  the  adverbs  magis ,  more,  and  maxime ,  most,  to  the  positive.  Such 


are : 

a)  the  adjectives  in  --ms  pure  (those  in  -quus,  as  t vqmis,  iniquus,  antiquus, 
etc.  excepted);  as,  dubins,  archills,  industrius ,  noxins,  idoneus,  necessarius, 
perspicuus,  strenuus  ; 

b)  nearly  all  in  was,  emus,  ulus,  alls,  ills,  drus,  andus,  endus,  and  bundus, 
as,  lubricus,  modicus,  legitimus,  credulus,  garrulus,  sedulus,  exitialis,  mortalis , 
principalis,  anilis,  hostilis,  scurrilis,  decorus,  sonorus,  laudandus,  expetendus, 
furibundus,  venerabundus  ; 

c)  the  adjectives  albus,  almus,  caducus,  calvus,  canus,  curvus,  ferus,  furtivus, 
gnarus,  lacer,  mutilus,  lassus,  mediocris,  memor,  mirus,  merus,  mutus,  navus, 
nefastus,  par,  parilis,  dispar,  properus,  trepidus,  rudis,  trux,  and  vagus. 


NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 

§  88. — There  are  four  classes  of  numerals  ;  viz,  Cardinal ,  Ordinal , 
Distributive,  and  Adverbial  numerals. 

The  Cardinals  answer  to  the  question  how  many  ? — one,  two,  three  .  .  .  They  are 
indeclinable  from  4  to  100  inclusive  :  but  the  first  three  and  the  hundreds  up  to  1000, 
can  be  declined. 

The  Ordinals  denote  the  place  any  thing  bolds  in  a  series ;  as,  the  first,  second, 
third  ....  They  are  all  declined  like  bonus. 

The  Distributives  answrer  to  the  question  how  many  apiece  ?  how  many  at  a  time  f — 
one  apiece,  or  one  at  a  time  ....  They  are  all  declined  like  boni ,  ee,  a,  and  make  the 
gen.  plur.  generally  in  um  instead  of  ovum  ;  but  singudi  has  always  singulorum. 

The  Adverbials  answer  to  the  question  how  many  times? — once,  twice,  thrice.  .  . . 
They  are  all  indeclinable. 


ADJECTIVES 


o  i 
OX 


Declension  of  the  first  three  cardinals:  units,  one;  duo ,  two; 
ires,  three. 


and 


N. 

G. 

1). 

A. 

A. 


onus,  una,  nnnm 

| -for  all  genders 

unum,  unam,  nnnm 
uno,  una,  uno 


duo,  duos  duo 

duormn,  diuirum,  duomm 

duobus,  duabus,  duo  bus 

duos  et  duo,  duas,  duo 
duobus,  duabus,  duobus 


tres,  tres,  tria 

tribus*  \dor  genders 
tres,  tres,  tria 
tribus,  tribus,  tribus 


No. 

CARDINAL. 

ORDINAL. 

DISTRIBUTIVE. 

ADVERBIAL. 

one,  two. 

first, 

second. 

one  by 

one. 

once,  twice. 

1 

unus 

primus 

singuli 

semel 

2 

duo 

secundus 

bim 

bis 

3 

tres 

tertius 

terni  (trini) 

ter 

4 

quatuor 

quart  us 

qua  terni 

quater 

5 

quinque 

quintus 

quini 

quinquies 

6 

sex 

sext.us 

seni 

sexies 

7 

septem 

septimus 

septeni 

septies 

8 

octo 

octavus 

octoni 

octies 

9 

novem 

norms 

noveni 

navies 

10 

decern 

decimus 

deni 

decies 

11 

undecim 

undecim  us 

undeni 

undecies 

12 

duodecim 

duodecimos 

duodeni 

duodecies 

13 

tredecim 

tertius 

terni 

tredecies 

14 

quatuordecim 

quartos 

quaterni 

quatuordecies 

15 

quindecim 

quintus 

-  decimus 

quini 

J-  deni 

quindecies 

10 

sedecim 

sextos 

seni 

sedccies 

17 

septendeeim 

septimus  _ 

septeni 

septiesdecies 

18 

duodeviginti 

duodevicesimus 

duodevicern 

duodevicies 

19 

uudeviginti 

undevicesimus 

unde  viceni 

.  undevicies 

20 

viginti 

vicesimus 

viceni 

vicies 

21 

viginti  unus 

vicesimus  primus 

viceni  singuli 

vieies  semel 

22 

viginti  duo 

vicesimus 

secundus 

viceni  bini 

vices  bis 

30 

triginta 

tricesirnus 

triceni 

tricies 

40 

quadraginta 

quadragesimus 

quadrageni 

quadragies 

50 

quinquaginta 

quinquagesimus 

quinquageni 

quinquagies 

GO 

sexaginta 

sexagesimus 

sexagem 

sexagies 

70 

septuagi nta 

septuagesimus 

septuageni 

septuagies 

80 

octoginta 

octogesimus 

octogeni 

octogies 

90 

nonaginta 

nonagesimus 

nonageni 

nonagies 

100 

centum 

centesimus 

centeni 

centies 

^  200 

duccnti,  ae,  a 

ducentesimus 

doceni 

ducenties 

300 

trecenti 

trecentesimus 

treceni 

t  re  centies 

400 

quadringenti 

quadringentesimus 

quadringeni 

quadringenties 

500 

quingenti 

quingentesimus 

qumgeni 

quingenties 

600 

sexeenti 

sexcentesimus 

sexceni 

sexcenties 

700 

septingenti 

septingentesimus 

septingeni 

septingenties 

800 

octingenti 

octingentesimus 

octmgeni 

octingenties 

900 

nongenti 

nongentesimus 

nongeni 

nongenties 

1000 

mille 

millesimus 

singula  millia 

millies 

2000 

duo  millia 

bis  millesimus 

bina  millia 

bis  millies 

3000 

tria  millia 

ter  millesimus 

terna  millia 

ter  millies 

Note.  1. — Arribo ,  both,  is  declined  like  duo,  and  lias  likewise  two  forms  for  tlio 
accus.,  ainbos  and  ambo. 

Note  2. — From  20  to  100,  either  the  less  number  precedes  with  et,  or  the  larger 
number  precedes  without  et ;  e.  g,,  23,  tres  et  viginti  or  viginti  tres ;  tertius  et  vicesi- 
mv.i  or  vicesimus  tertius. 

Above  100,  the  large  number  always  precedes,  either  with  or  without  et ;  but  ei  ia 
never  put  twice  ;  c.  g.,  322,  trecenti  viginti  duo  or  trecenti  ct  viginti  duo . 


e 


32 


pRosroum 


Note  3.— Instead  of  sedecim  (also  sexdecim)  and  septendecbn ,  we  may  also  say 
decern  et  sex ,  decern  et  septern ;  and  instead  of  tredecies ,  quatuordecies ,  quindecics , 
and  seclecies,  the  forms  terdecies ,  quaterdecies ,  quinquiesdecies ,  sexiesclecies ,  octiesde- 
cies,  noviesdecies ,  are  also  used. 

Note  4. — The  two  numbers  before  every  ten,  viz.,  IS,  19  ;  28,  29  ;  38,  39,  etc.,  are 
more  commonly  expressed  by  the  subtractive  forms  duode-  and  unde-  ;  e.  g.,  89,  im- 
denonaginta  ;  99,  undecentum;  58,  duodesexaginta.  Such  forms,  however,  as  nona - 
ginta  novem ,  nonaginta  octo ,  septuaginta  novem ,  septuaginta  octo ,  and  the  like,  are 
found  also.— Thus  we  may  say  (18,  19)  decern  et  octo ,  dceem  et  novem  along  with 
duodeviginti,  undeviginti ;  but  the  forms  octodecim  and  novendccim  are  supported 
by  no  authority. 

Note  5.— The  ordinals  21,  22 ;  31,  32  ;  41,  42,  etc.,  are  frequently  expressed  by 
ct  vicesimus ,  alter  et  vicesimus  ;  unus  et  trices imus ,  alter  et  tricesimus ,  instead  of  _pr£- 
mws  et  vicesimus ,  secundus  et  vicesimus.  But  we  say  correctly  vicesimus  primus ,  vi- 
cesimus  secundus ,  etc. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Pronouns. 

Pronouns  arc  divided  into  the  following  classes  :  personal,  demon¬ 
strative,  relative ,  interrogative ,  indefinite ,  possessive ,  and  correlative 
pronouns. 

I.  Personal  Pronouns. 

§  39. — There  are  three  personal  pronouns  :  e/70,  They  aro 

thus  declined  : 


S.  N. 
O. 
D. 
A. 
A. 

ego,  I 
mei,  of  me 
mi  lii,  to  me 
me,  me 
me,  idth  me 

tu,  thou 
tui,  of  thee 
tibi,  to  thee 
te,  thee 
te,  with  thee 

sui,  of  himself,  etc. 
sibi,  to  himself,  etc. 
se,  himself,  etc. 
se,  with  himself,  etc. 

P.  N. 

nos,  toe 

vos,  you 

G. 

nostri  (-um),  of  us 

vestri  (-um),  of  you 

sui,  of  themselves 

D. 

nobis,  to  us 

vo bis,  to  you 

sibi,  to  themselves. 

A. 

nos,  us 

vos,  you 

se,  themselves 

A. 

nobis,  with  us 

vobis,  with  you 

se,  icith  themselves 

Note  1. — To  express  the  English  emphatic  “  self,”  the  syllable  is  (with  or  with¬ 
out  fpse)  annexed  to  all  the  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns,  the  genitives  plur.  and  the 
nominative  sing,  of  tu  excepted;  as,  egojnet  or  egomet  ipse ,  I  myself;  tibimet  or  tibi- 
frat  ipsi ;  nosmet  ipsos ;  vobisinet  ipsis.—il  Thou  thyself,”  is  rendered  by  tide,  or  hi 
ipse,  or  tutemet. 

Note  2. — The  accusatives  me,  tc,  and  sc  are  sometimes  doubled,  meme ,  tetc,  sesc. — 
The  vocative  of  any  pronoun,  if  used  at  all,  is  like  the  nominative. —  Respecting  tlio 
difference  between  nostri,  vestri ,  and  nostrum ,  vest  rum ,  see  §  137. 


PRONOUNS. 


33 


II.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 


§  40. — The  Latin  demonstrative  pronouns  are  hie,  hcec ,  hoc — ille, 
ilia ,  illud — iste,  ista ,  istud — ea,  id,  to  which  may  be  added  the  ad- 


junctive  ipse ,  ipsa,  ipsum, 

“  self.” 

They  are 

thus  declined 

• 

7 

“  this” 

X 

“he”  or  “that” 

S.  N. 

hie 

haec 

hoc 

ille 

ilia 

illud 

G. 

D. 

liuj  us } 
Imic  ) 

for  all  genders 

||j|us  i  for  all  genders 

A. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

ilium 

illam 

illud 

A. 

hoc 

liac 

hoc 

illo 

ilia 

illo 

P.  N. 

hi 

has 

haec 

illi 

illse 

ilia 

G. 

horum 

harum 

horum 

illorum 

ill  arum 

illorum 

D. 

his 

his 

his 

illis 

illis 

illis 

A. 

lios 

has 

haec 

ill  os 

illas 

ilia 

A. 

his 

his 

his 

illis 

illis 

illis 

Note  1. — Like  Me  are  declined  the  emphatic  Mcce ,  hoscce ,  hocce ,  and  the  interroga¬ 
tive  Mccine ,  hceccine ,  hoccine ,  through  all  cases,  ending  in  c  and  sy  as,  hujusce 
huncce ,  Tmce,  hasce,  huiccine. 

Note  2. — Like  ille  is  declined  the  pronoun  is£a,  this,  that. — This  pro 

noun  generally  refers  to  the  person  spoken  to  and  to  the  things  appertaining  to  him. 
e.  g.,  iste  liber ,  that  book  of  yours  ;  negotium  istud ,  that  business  of  yours.  It  some 
times  implies  scorn  or  contempt:  as,  quid  iste  dicit?  what  does  that  fellow  say  \ 
tuus  iste  frater ,  that  fine  brother  of  yours. 

Note  3. — Besides  iste,  ista,  istud  and  ille,  ilia,  illud,  the  early  Latin  writers  used 
also  the  forms  istic,  istcec,  istoc  or  istuc  and  illic,  illcec,  illoc  or  illuc,  but  only  in  thu 
nom.  acc.,  and  abl.  sing.,  and  in  the  nom.  and  acc.  neut.  plural. — The  nettt.  isiuc  an*) 
istcec  sometimes  occur  even  in  Cicero. 

The  familiar  expressions  eccum,  eccam?  ellum,  ellam!  eccos ,  eccas ,  eccillum ,  eccC 
lam ,  stand  for  ecce  eum ,  en  ilium,  etc. 


V 

S.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
A. 

“ that” 

is  ea  id 

g{US  |  for  dll  genders. 

eum  earn  id 

eo  ea  eo 

“  self.” 

ipse  ipsa  ipsum 

ipsi^  |  f°r  aU  ^nders 

ipsum  ipsam  ipsum 

ipso  ipsa  ipso 

P.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
A. 

ii  e«e  ea 

eorum  earum  eorum 
iis  iis  iis 

eos  eas  ea 

iis  iis  iis 

ipsi  ipsse  ips& 

ipsorum  ipsarum  ipsorum 
ipsis  ipsis  ipsis 

ipsos  ipsas  ipsa, 

ipsis  ipsis  ipsis 

Note  4.— The  pronouns  is,  ille,  iste,  and  ipse,  when  used  alone  without  a  substan¬ 
tive,  are  translated  by  he,  she,  it. 

Like  is  is  declined  the  compound  idem;  eadem,  idem,  “the  same;”  but  in  the  ac¬ 
cusative  eundem  and  eandem  are  preferable  to  eumdem,  camdem,  and  in  like  manner  in 

2 


pronouns. 


84 


the  genit.  plur.  eorundem ,  earundem  to  eorumdem ,  earvmdem.  The  nom.  plural  ei  (foi 
ii)  is  rare,  and  eidem  (for  iidem )  does  not  occur  at  all.  Also  eis  and  eisdem  are  not  s« 
common  as  lis  and  iisdem. 


N. 

Idem 

eadem 

Idem 

G. 

X). 

ejusdem  ) 
eidem  f 

for  all  genders 

A. 

eundem 

eandem 

Idem 

A. 

eodem 

eadem 

eodem 

iidem 

eorundem 

iisdem 

eosdem 

iisdem 


ecodem 

earundem 

iisdem 

easdem 

iisdem 


eadem 

eorundem 

iisdem 

eadem 

iisdem 


Note  5. — The  pronoun  ipse,  when  joined  to  another  demonstrative  pronoun,  is 
equivalent  to  the  English  “  very as,  hoc  ipso  die ,  on  this  very  day  ;  eo  ipso  tempore, 
at  that  very  time. 


III.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 


§  41. — The  Latin  relatives  are  qui,  quce ,  quod,  “who,  which,”  and 
quicunque ,  “  whoever.”  They  are  called  relatives,  because  they  gen¬ 
erally  relate  to  some  word  going  before. 

The  Latin  interrogatives  are  quis,  quid  f  who,  what  ?  and  its  com¬ 
pounds  quisnam ,  quidnam  f  who  then,  what  then?  and  ecquis ,  ecquid  f 
is  there  any  one  (or  any  thing)  who  .  .  .  .  ?  does  any  one  or  any 
thing  ....?' 

The  relative  qui  and  the  interrogative  quis  are  thus  declined  : 


S.  N. 

Gr. 

D. 

A. 

A. 

“w7w,  which.” 
qui  quae  quod 

ST}  for  °^j  ffen^ers- 

quern  quam  quod 

quo  qua  quo 

“who,  what?” 

quis  or  qui  quae  quid  or  quod 

cu{US  \  for  0end'ers 

quern  quam  quid  or  quod 

quo  qua  quo 

P.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
A. 

qui  quae  quae 

quorum  quarum  quorum 
quibus  quibus  quibus 
quos  quas  quae 

quibus  quibus  quibus 

qui  quae  quae 

quorum  quarum  quorum 

quibus  quibus  quibus 

quos  quas  quae 

quibus  quibus  quibus 

Note!. — Like  the  relative  qui  is  declined  the  compound  quicunque,,  qucecunque, 
quodcunque  (never  quidcunque ),  the  suffix  - cunque  being  simply  added  to  the  differ¬ 
ent  cases.  Instead  of  quibus ,  quels  is  sometimes  used. 

Note  2.— The  interrogatives  quis,  quisnam ,  and  ecquis  are  declined  like  the  relative 
qui  except  tha*t  in  the  nom.  sing,  they  have  .two  forms  for  the  masculine  ;  quis,  qui; 
and  in  the  nom.  and  aecus.,  two  forms  for  the  neuter:  quid,  quod. 

The  forms  quis  and  quid  are  used  substantively,  that  is,  the}'  stand  either  alone 
without  a  substantive,  or  when  they  are  joined  to  a  substantive,  the  latter  is  putin 
the  genitive:  e.  g.,  quis  est?  quis  nescit?  quisnam  vocat  ?  ecquis  hoc  intelligit? 
quid  est ?  quid  times?  quidnam  vides?  ecquid  and  is?  quis  Uomanorum ?  quisnam 
mortal  ium  ?  ecquis philosophorum?  quid  periculi?  quid  prcemii?  quidnam  scelc- 
ris  ?  ecquid  commodi  ? 

The  forms  qui  and  quod,  on  the  contrary,  are  used  adjeetivcly,  that  is,  tiny  are  used 
in  connection  with  a  substantive  either  expressed  or  understood,  and  agree  with  it 


PKONOUNS. 


35 


Record ingly  ;  e.  g..,  qui  rex?  qui  miles?  quinam  pner  ?  ecqui  philosophus  ?  quod  p tri¬ 
ad  am  ?  quod  pr  osmium?  quodnam  soelus  ?  ecquod  commodum  ? 

The  interrogative  qui  sometimes  stands  substantively  for  quis,  especially  in  indirect 
questions;  e.  g.,  qui  scit  ?  nescimus  qui  sis ;  non  possum  oblioisci  qui  fuerim,  non 
sentire  qui  sim  - — and  quis ,  vice  versa,  adjectively  for  qui,  as  quis  rex  ?  quis  miles  ? 
quis  homo?  quis  hospes  ?  quis  philosophus?  but  in  these  expressions  the  words  rex, 
miles,  homo,  etc.,  are  to  be  regarded  as  placed  in  apposition  to  the  interrogative 
quis. 

Ecquis  has  in  the  nom.  fern.  sing,  and  in  the  neuter  plural  both  ecquoe  and  ecqua. 


XT.  Indefinite  Pronouns. 


§  42. — The  following  indefinite  pronouns  are  declined  like  the  rela¬ 
tive  qui  /  but  in  the  neut.  sing,  they  have  two  forms,  one  in  -quid, 
used  substantively  ;  the  other  in  - quod ,  used  adjectively  ;  as,  ediquid 
temqooris,  aliquid  preemii,  and  all  quod  tempus,  aliquod  preemium. 

Quidarn,  queedam,  quoddam  or  quiddam,  a  certain  one. 

Quilibet,  quselibet,  quodlibet  or  quidlibet,  any  one  you  please. 

Quivis,  qusevis,  quodvis  or  quidvis,  any  one  you  please. 

Quispiam,  qusepiam,  quidpiam  or  quodpiam,  some  one. 

Aliquis,  aliqua,  aliquid  or  aliquod,  some  one ,  something. 

Quisque,  quBeque,  quidque  or  quodque,  every  one. 

Unusquisque,  unaquseque,  unumquidquo  or  -quodque,  each. 

Note  1. — Quidarn  usually  changes  m  before  d  into  n,  as  quendam ,  quandam,  quo- 
rundarn,  instead  of  quemdam ,  quamdam ,  etc. 

Note  2. — Aliquis  lias  in  the  nom.  fein.  sing,  and  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  neut.  plur. 
aliqua.  It  is  thus  declined  : 


S.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

A 

aliquis 

alicuiUS  \  for  aU  Orders 

aliquem 

aliquo 

aliqua 

aliquam 

aliqua 

aliquid  or  -quod 

aliquid  or  -quod 
aliquo 

P.N. 

aliqui 

aliquto 

aliqua 

G. 

aliquorum 

aliquarum 

aliquorum 

D. 

aliquibus 

aliquibus 

aliquibus 

A. 

aliquos 

aliquas ' 

aliqua 

aliquibus 

A. 

aliquibus 

aliquibus 

Aliquis  with  its  derivatives  aliquo  and  aliquando,  generally  loses  the  prefix  ali,  when 
ti,  nisi ,  ne,  nvm,  quo,  quando ,  or  quanto  precedes,  ana  then  in  the  fem.  sing,  and  the 
.neut.  plur.,  the  form  qua  is  used  along  with  quee  ;  hence  we  may  say  siqua,  nequa, 
numqita,  or  si  qua’,,  ne  quee,  num  quae. 

Note  3. —  Unusquisque,  each,  and  quotusquisque ,  how  many  ?  or  how  few!  ocair  in 
the  singular  only,  and  have  both  parts  declined, 
oblique  eases  ;  the  former  is  thus  declined  : 

N.  unusquisque  unaqusequa 

G  miiusenjiiMque  \  foraU  ders 
-L>.  unieuique  K  J 
A.  unumquemque  unamquamquo 

A.  unoqnoque  unaquaque 

Note  4. — Quisquam ,  any  one,  and  quisquis ,  whosoever,  are  almost  always  used  sub¬ 
stantively,  and  have,  therefore,  in  the  neuter  regularly  quidquarn  (or  quicquam)  and 


The  latter  scarcely  occurs  in  the 
unumquidque  or  -quodque 

unumquidque  or  -quodque 


unoquoque 


A 


3G 


PKONOUNS. 


quidquid  (or  quicquid). — Quisquctm  has  neither  fem.  nor  plnr.  The  double  forms 
quc&quaz.  quemquem ,  quoquo ,  quibusquibus  (from  quisquis),  are  not  so  frequent  as  th.036 
formed  by  the  suffix  -cunque. 

V.  Possessive  and  Patrial  Pronouns. 

§  43. — The  possessive  pronouns  are  formed  from  the  genitive  of  the 
personal  and  are  declined  entirely  like  adjectives  of  three  endings.  They 
are  as  follows  : 


mens, 

mea, 

meum, 

my  (  Foe.  mctsc.  mi) 

tuus, 

tua, 

tuum, 

thy 

suus, 

sua, 

suum, 

his,  her,  its  /  pi.  their 

noster, 

nostra, 

nostrum, 

our 

vester, 

vestra, 

vestrum, 

your 

Patrial  pronouns  are  such  as  have  reference  to  a  person’s  country,  family,  or 
party.  They  are  three  in  number  ;  viz., 

cujas ,  -dtis,  what  countryman  ?  of  what  family  or  party  ? 
nostras ,  -atis,  our  countryman,  of  our  family  or  party. 
vestras ,  -dtis,  your  countryman,  of  your  family  or  party. 

The  pronouns  cujas,  nostras ,  and  vestras ,  are  declined  like  felix.  Plur.  nom.,  acc., 
and  voc.,  nostrates,  nostratia ;  gen.,  nostratium  ;  dat.  and  abb,  nostratibus. 

§44. — Here  belong  also  the  so-called  pronominals  or  pronominal  adjectives 
alius,  alter,  uter,  neuter,  ullus,  and  nullus.  These  adjectives,  together  with 
solus  and  lotus,  make  the  genitive  sing,  in  -ius  and  the  dative  in  i,  for  all  gen- 
ders ;  as, 


solus,  alone,  ......... 

D.  soli 

totus,  whole,  . 

Ga  totius 

D.  toti 

alius,  another, . 

G.  alius 

D.  alii 

alter,  the  one,  the  other  {of  two),  .  . 

G.  alterius 

D.  alteri 

uter,  ichich  of  the  two  ? . 

G.  utrius 

D.  utri 

neuter,  neither  of  the  two,  .... 

G.  neutrlus 

D.  neutri 

ullus,  any  one, . 

D.  ulli 

nullus,  no  one, . 

G.  nulllus 

D.  nulli 

Thus  the  compounds  uterque ,  each  of  the  two,  both  ;  utervis,  nterlibet ,  utercunque , 
whichever  of  the  two. — Alteruter ,  either  the  one  or  the  other  (of  two),  has  in  the  gen. 
both  aUerutrius  and  alterius  utrlus  ;  dat.  alterutri  ;  acc.  alterutrum ;  abl.  alterutro. 

YI.  Correlative  Pronouns. 

§  45. — Correlative  pronouns  are  such  as  express  a  mutual  relation  to 
each  other  and  represent  this  relation  by  a  corresponding  form. 


tails,  such ,  of  such  a  hind  ; 
qualis,  as ,  of  what  kind  ? 

tantus,  such ,  so  great ; 
quant  us,  as  great ,  how  great  ? 

tct,  so  many  ; 

quot,  as  many ,  how  many  t 


qualiscunque,  of  whatever  kind. 
talis-qualis,  such  as. 

quantuscunque,  how  great  soever. 
tantus-quantus,  as  great  as. 

quotcunqne,  how  many  soever. 
tot  quot,  as  many  as. 


THE  VERB. 


37 


Decline  together:  Hie  fortissimus  miles ;  hcec  benigna  mater ;  illustre  illucl 
ac  prceclarum  f acinus. — Ego  et  doctissimus  Me  vir  ;  et  ego,  et  hi,  et  hie,  et  laze, 
et  ilia. — Tn  ipse  et  hie  infelix  f  rater  meus ;  hcec  el  qacelibet  alia  causa ;  tu 
solus  nec  quisquam  alius. — Hie  magnanimus  rex  et  demens  ilia  regina ;  idem 
semper  vultus  eademque  frons ;  ego  idem  et  non  alius ;  vir  ille  innocentissimus 
idemque  doctissimus,  and  the  like. 


CHAPTER  Y. 

The  Verb. 

§  46.— Verbs  are  divided  into  two  main  classes, — transitive  and  in¬ 
transitive. 

A  transitive  verb  is  a  verb  which  takes  an  object  in  the  accusative,  in  answer 
to  whom  or  what,  placed  after  it ;  e.  g.,  I  praise  (praise  idiom  f — )  the  scholar  ; 
laudo  discipulum.  I  write  (write  what  f — )  a  letter ;  scribo  epistolam. 

An  intransitive  verb  is  a  verb  which  takes  either  no  object  at  all,  as  sto,  I 
stand ;  sedeo,  I  sit ;  curro,  I  run  ;  ambulo,  I  walk  ; — or,  if  it  takes  one,  does  not 
take  it  in  the  accusative,  but  in  some  other  case ;  as,  obedio,  I  obey ;  parco,  I 
spare ;  faveo,  I  favor ;  and  several  other  verbs  which,  though  transitive  in 
English,  are  intransitive  in  Latin,  because  they  take  their  object  in  the  dative. 

Such  verbs,  of  course,  must  be  learned  chiefly  by  observation  and  practice, 
the  student  in  the  mean  time  taking  as  a  general  rule,  to  consider  verbs  that 
are  transitive  in  English,  as  transitive  also  in  Latin. 

fSgT’  A  verb  is  transitive  in  English,  when  the  word  “  somebody”  or  “  something” 
can  be  placed  after  it.  Thus,  to  praise ,  to  blame ,  to  see ,  to  learn ,  to  hear ,  to  do ,  etc., 
are  transitive  in  English,  because  we  can  say,  to  praise,  blame,  see,  hear,  etc.,  somebody 
or  something. 

VOICES,  MOODS,  AND  TENSES. 

§  47.— Voice  is  a  particular  mode  of  inflecting  or  conjugating  verbs. 
There  are  two  voices,  called  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

The  active  voice  ends  in  o ;  the  passive,  in  or.  In  the  former,  the  subject  is 
represented  as  acting ;  in  the  latter,  as  acted  upon ;  as,  act.,  laudo,  I  praise ; 
pass.,  laudor,  I  am  praised. 

Transitive  verbs  have  both  the  active  and  passive  voices.  Intransitive  verbs 
have  only  the  active  in  o,  and  they  cannot  be  nsed  in  the  passive,  except  im¬ 
personally,  that  is,  only  in  the  3d  singular ;  as,  curritur ,  itur,  venilur,  venieba- 
tur,  ventum  est,  ambulatum  est. 

The  moods  are  four, — the  Indicative ,  the  Subjunctive ,  the  Impera¬ 
tive. ,  and  the  Infinitive . 

The  Indicative  expresses  an  action  or  state  as  a  fact,  as  something  real ;  as,  “  It 
rains.” — “  lie  writes.” — “  They  come  or  asks  a  question  ;  as,  “  Does  it  rain  ?” — 
“  Does  he  write  1” — “  Are  they  coming?” 


38 


THE  VERB. 


The  Subjunctive  expresses  an  action  or  state  not  as  a  fact,  but  mer  Ay  as  possible, 
conditional,  doubtful,  and  contingent;  as, 
they  should  come.” 

The  Imperative  is  used  in  commanding,  exhortin 
thou.” — “  Come  and  see.” — “  Forgive  me.” 

The  Infinitive  expresses  an  action  or  state  indefinitely,  without  limiting  it  to  number 
and  person  ;  as,  “  To  err  is  human.” — “  To  lie  is  baae.” — “  To  forgive  is  divine.” 


•‘It  may  rain.”- — “If  tLm<  write.” — “If 
i g,  or  entreating;  as,  “Depart 


§  48. — The  tenses  are  six:  the  Present ,  Imperfect ,  Perfect,  Phi- 
perfect ,  Future ,  and  Fu.t  -Perfect. 

Pjis.  scribo,  I  ivrite ,  I  am  writing ,  I  do  write. 

Imi\  scribebam,  I  was  writing ,  I  wrote,  I  did  write. 

Prf.  scripsi,  I  wrote,  1  have  written. 

Plp.  scripseram,  Iliad  ivritten. 

Put.  seriham,  I  shall  write. 

F.-pf.  scripsero,  I  shall  have  ivritten. 


The  tenses  are  divided  into  principal  and  historical  tenses. 


PRINCIPAL  TENSES. 

Pp.s.  scribo,  I  write. 

Prf.  scripsi,  1  have  written. 
Fut.  scribam,  I  shall  write. 


HISTORICAL  TENSES. 

Imp.  scribebam,  I  was  writing. 
Plp.  scripseram,  I  had  written. 
Prf.  scripsi,  1  wrote. 


Numbers  and  persons  of  verbs  are  the  same  as  in  English. 


GERUNDS,  SUPINES,  PARTICIPLES. 

§  49. — Gerunds  and  Supines  represent  the  idea  of  the  verb  in  the  form  of 
substantives;  Participles,  in  tbe  form  of  adjectives. 

Gerunds  are  verbal  substantives  of  the  2d  decl.,  used  only  in  the  oblique 
cases  {Gen.,  Dat.,  Acc.,  and  Adi.)  of  the  singular  number. 

Supines  are  verbal  substantives  of  tbe  4tli  decl.,  used  in  tbe  Acc.  and  AM. 
singular.  Tbe  Supine  in  um  has  an  active  meaning ;  the  Supine  in  u,  com¬ 
monly  a  passive  one. 

Participles  are  in  form  adjectives,  but  express,  at  the  same  time,  the  differ¬ 
ent  relations  of  the  aetion  or  state,  whether  it  is  still  lasting  or  terminated.  - 

Regular  Latin  verbs  generally  have  four  Participles  ; — two  in  the  active,  and 
two  in  the  passive. 

In  the  Active :  In  the  Passive  : 

1.  The  Part.  Present  in  ns.  1.  The  Part.  Perf.  in  us. 

2.  The  Part.  Future  in  urus.  2.  The  Participle  in  dus. 

The  Part.  Pres.  act.  in  ns  corresponds  to  the  English  Participle  in  ing ;  &8, 
laudans,  praising ;  scrihens,  writing. 

The  Part.  Fut.  act.  in  urus  expresses  an  intention  or  a  wish  to  do  something  ; 
as,  scripturus .  one  who  intends  (wishes,  is  about  or  going)  to  write. 

The  Part.  Perf.  pass,  in  us  corresponds  to  the  English  Participle  in  ed ;  as, 
laudatus,  praised  ;  rnoniius,  advised. 

The  Participle  in  dus, — commonly,  though  improperly,  called  the  Participle 
Future  passive, — does  not  by  itself  imply  the  idea  of  futurity.  A  reference  to 
future  time  may,  indeed?  be  implied,  but  this  arises  from  the  connection  rather 
than  from  the  Participle  itself.  The  Participle  in  dus  expresses  in  the  nomi- 


THE  VERB. 


39 


native,  and  occasionally  also  in  the  remaining  cases,  necessity,  obligation ,  or 
: propriety .  Thus,  cpistola  scribenda  means  a  letter  that  must  be  written,  not  one 
that  will  be  written. 

Modern  Grammarians  often  call  the  Partic.  in  dus  the  Gerundive,  from 
its  resemblance  to  the  Gerund. 

The  Conjugations. 

§  50. — There  are,  in  Latin,  four  conjugations,  distinguished  by  the 
ending  of  the  Present  Infinitive  active. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

-are 

-ere 

-ere 

-ire 

The  principal  parts  of  a  verb  are  its  Stem ,  Infinitive ,  Perfect ,  and 
Supine.  The  stem  of  a  verb  is  generally  obtained  by  taking  off  the 
ending  of  the  Present  Infinitive. 


Infinitive. 

Perfect. 

Supine. 

1. 

amo, 

am-are, 

amavi, 

am  a  turn, 

to  love. 

2. 

moueo, 

mon-ere, 

monui, 

monitum, 

to  advise . 

3. 

rego, 

reg-ere, 

rexi, 

rectum, 

to  ride. 

4. 

audio, 

aud-ire, 

audivi, 

auditum, 

to  hear. 

51.  THE  FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES. 


From  the  stem  are  formed — by  adding  the  proper  endings 

The  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  indic.  (Act.  and  Pass.) 

The  Present  and  Imperfect  subjunctive  (Act.  and  Pass.) 

The  Imperative  both  Act.  and  Pass. 

The  gerunds  and  participles  in  vs  and  dus. 

From  the  Perfect  are  formed— by  changing  the  final  i  into  cram,  ero,  erim, 
issem,  and  isse,  respectively : 

The  Pluperfect  and  Future-Perfect  indic.  Act. 

The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  subjunctive  Act. 

The  Perfect  infinitive  Active. 


From  the  Supine  are  formed— by  changing  um  into  us  and  urus,  respec¬ 
tively  : 

The  participle  Perfect  Pass,  in  us. 

The  participle  Future  Act.  in  urus. 

Note.— The  Imperfect  Subj.  may  also  be  formed  by  adding  m  for  the  Active,  and  r 
for  the  Passive, — to  the  Infinitive  Present  Active. 

I  he  Imperative  Active  may  be  formed  from  the  Infinitive  Act.  — by  dropping  the 
ending  -re  of  the  Infinitive. 

The  Participle  in  dus  may  be  formed  from  the  genitive  sing,  of  the  Partic.  Present 
Act. — by  changing  Us  into  dus. 

SSTIn  parsing  any  verbal  form,  let  the  pupil  state  (1.)  the  person,  (2.)  the  num¬ 
ber,  (3.)  the  mood,  (4.)  the  tense,  (5.)  the  voice,  (G.)  from  what  verb,  (7.)  the  mean¬ 
ing,  and  (3.)  the  agreement ;  e.  g.,  regimini  is  the  second  person  pi  nr.  of  the  Indio. 
Present  pass,  from  the  verb  rego ,  regere,  rexi ,  rectum ,  “  to  rule,”  an  1  agrees  with.  .  .  . 


THE  VERB 


52. — The  verb  “esse,”  to  be. 


INDICATIVE. 

Sum,  lam. 
es,  tliou  art. 
est,  he,  she ,  it  is. 
sum  us,  we  are. 
estis,  ye  are. 
sunt,  they  are. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

sim,  l may  be. 

sis,  thou  rnayest  be. 

sit,  he  may  be. 
simus,  we  may  be. 
sitis,  ye  may  be. 
sint,  they  may  be. 


eram,  I  teas. 

eras,  thou  roast. 

erat,  he,  she ,  it  was. 
eramus,  roe  were. 
eratis,  ye  were. 
erant,  they  were. 


IMPERFECT. 

essem,  I  might,  etc.,  be. 
esses,  thou  mightest  be. 
esset,  he  might  be. 
essemus,  we  might  be. 
essetis,  ye  might  be. 
essent,  they  might  be. 


fui,  I  have  been. 
fuisti,  thou  hast  been. 
fuit,  he  has  been. 
fuimus,  roe  have  been. 
fuistis,  ye  have  been, 
fuerunt,  they  have  been. 


PERFECT. 

fuerim,  I  may 
fueris,  thou  rnayest 
fuerit,  he  may 
fuerimus,  we  may 
fueritis,  ye  may 
fuerint,  they  may 


fueram,  I  had  been. 
fueras,  thou  hadst  been. 
fuerat,  he  had  been. 
fueramus,  toe  had  been. 
fueratis,  ye  had  been. 
fuerant,  they  had  been. 


PLUPERFECT. 


fuissem,  I  might,  etc. 
fuisses,  thou  mightst 
fuisset,  he  might 
fuissenuis,  toe  might 
fuissetis,  ye  might 
fuissent,  they  might 


ero,  I  shall  be. 

eris,  thou  wilt  be. 

erit,  he  will  be. 
erimus,  we  shall  be. 
eritis,  ye  will  be. 
erunt,  they  will  be. 


FUTURE. 

futur¬ 
es, 
a,  urn 
futur- 
h 

ce,  a 

FUT. -PERFECT. 


/  sim,  [shall  be. 

•<  sis,  thou  wilt  be. 

(  sit,  he  will  be. 
simus,  we  shall  be. 
sitis,  ye  will  be. 
sint,  they  to  ill  be. 


fuero,  1  shall 
fueris,  thou  wilt 
fuerit,  he  will 
fuerimus,  we  shall 
fueritis,  ye  will 
fuerint,  they  ivill 


' 

>-  have  been. 


supplied  by 
fuerim  cr fuis&em. 


have  been , 


THE  VERB. 


41 


S.  es,  be  ihou 

esto,  ihou  shalt  be 
estOj  he  shall  be 


IMPERATIVE. 


P.  este,  be  ye 

estote,  ye  shall  be 
sunto,  they  shall  be. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pks.  esse,  to  be 

Pkf.  fuiase,  to  have  been 

Fut.  futurus  (a,  urn)  esse,  to  be  about  to  be. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Prs.  and  Prf.,  wanting 

Fut.  futurus,  a,  um,  one  who  is  about  to  be. 


Note  1.— The  forms  forem,  fores,  for et,  and  forent,  are  sometimes  used  for  essem, 
esses,  esset,  and  essent ;  and  fore  often  stands  in  place  of  futurum  esse. 

Note  2. — The  Participle  of  the  Inf.  Future  has  two  cases  only;  viz.,  the  nom.  and 
ace. ;  as, 

S.  N.  futurus,  a,  um  esse  I  P.  N.  futuri,  ae,  a  esse 

A.  futurum,  am,  um  esse  |  A.  futuros,  as,  a  esse. 

Note  3. — Like  sum  are  inflected  :  absum,  I  am  away  from  ;  adsum ,  I  am  present; 
desum ,  I  am  wanting ;  insum ,  I  am  in ;  intersum,  1  am  present  at ;  obsum,  I  am 
against  or  in  the  way  ;  prcesum ,  I  preside  over,  am  at  the  head ;  prosum,  I  benefit, 
am  useful;  subsum,  I  am  under;  supersum,  I  am  left,  survive. 


Prosum,  profui,  prodesse,  inserts  d  in  all  forms  of  sum  that  begin  wuu  e, 


as. 


prosum 

pro-d-es 

pro-d-est 

prosum  us 

pro-d-estis 

prosunt 


pro-d-eram 
pro-d-eras 
pro-d-erat 
pro-d-eram  us 
pro-d-eratis 
pro-d-erant 


pro-d-essem 
pro-d-esses 
pro-d-esset 
pro-d-essemus 
pro-d-essetis 
pro-d-essent 


with  e 
pro-d-ero 
pro-d-eris 
pro-d-erit 
pro-d-erimus 
pro-d-eritis 
pro-d-erunt. 


On  the  verb  sum  and  its  compounds. 


Historia  semper  erit  egregia  vita?  magistra. — Contentum  esse  suis  rebus  maxima? 
sunt  eertissimseque  divitise. — Juvenes,  ut  fuerit  industria  vestra,  ita  etiam  prsemium 
vestrum  erit. — Multi  essent  doctiores,  si  diligentiores  fuissent. — Neque  timidus  esto 
neque  audax. — Quis  sim,  mihi  notum  quis  futurus  sim,  mihi  ignotum  est.Q- Ego 
sum  principium  mundi  et  finis  omnium  rerum  :  ego  sum  trinus  et  unus,  et  tamen 
non  sum  Deus. — Benefieiorum  per  omnetn  vitam  memores  estote. — Incertum  est  num 
vita  nostra  beata  futura  sit. — Qui  prodest  reipublicte,  prodest  sibi  ipsi. — Ncn  sum 
nescius  qua  mente  tu  et  prius  in  me  fueris,  et  nunc  sis,  et  semper  futurus  sis. — Persa? 
Graecis  infesti  erant. — Demosthenis  astate  multi  oratores  magni  et  clari  fuerunt,  et 
antea  fuerant ,  nec  postea  defuerunt. — Suae  quisque  fortuna?  faber  erit. — Magno 
Persarutn  exercitui  dux  peritus  defuit. — Incredibile  est  quanta  conscientia?  vis  sit. — 
Qualis  in  alios  f  ueris,  tales  ipsi  in  te  erunt. — Ut  magistratibus  leges,  ita  populo 
proesunt  magistratus. — Avaritia  fons  est  atque  origo  multorum  malorutn. — Urbs 
Syracuse  maxima  et  pulcherrima  erat  omnium  Grsecarum  urbium. — Proceila?  nautif 
pernicios*  sunt. 


42 


THE  VEEB 


§  53. — Personal  endings 


ACTIVE. 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 


S.  O 
as 
at 

P.  am  us 
atis 
ant 


S. 


P. 


a"ba:n 

abas 

a  bat 

abamus 

abatis 

abant 


FUTURE. 


S.  abo 

ebo 

am 

iam 

abis 

ebis 

es 

ies 

abit 

ebit 

et 

iet 

P.  a  Warns 

ebimus 

emus 

iemus 

abitis 

ebitis 

etis 

ietis 

abunt 

ebant 

ent 

ient 

PERFECT. 

PLUPERF. 

FUT.-PERF. 

PERFECT. 

PLUPERF. 

FUT.-PERF 

(for  all  conjugations.') 

(for  all  conjugations.) 

S.  i 

eram 

ero 

erim 

issem 

isti 

eras 

eris 

eris 

isses 

it 

erat 

erit 

erit 

isset 

P.  itnus 

eram  us 

erimns 

erimus 

issemus 

wanting 

istis 

eratis 

eritis 

eritis 

issetis 

grunt 

erant 

erint 

erint 

issent. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 


eo 

0 

lO 

em 

earn 

am 

es 

is 

is 

es 

eas 

as 

et 

it 

it 

et 

eat 

at 

emus 

imus 

imus 

emus 

earn  us 

amus 

etis 

itis 

itis 

etis 

eatis 

atis 

ent 

unt 

iunt 

ent 

eant 

ant 

IMPERFECT. 

IMPERFECT. 

ebam 

ebam 

iebam 

arem 

erem 

erem 

ebas 

ebas 

iebas 

ares 

eres 

eres 

ebat 

ebat 

iebat 

aret 

eret 

eret 

ebamus 

ebamus 

i  ebamus 

aremus 

erernus 

eremus 

ebatis 

ebatis 

iebatis 

aretis 

eretis 

eretis 

ebant 

ebant 

iebant 

arent 

erent 

erent 

iam 

ias 

iat 

iarnus 

iatis 

iant 


irem 

ires 

iret 

iremus 

iretis 

irent 


FUTURE. 


The  Partic.  in  urus  with  sim  or  essem. 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

S.  2.  a  or  ato 

3.  ato 

P.  2.  ate  or  atote 

3.  auto 

IMPER 

e  or  eto 
eto 

ete  or  etote 
ento 

ATIVE. 

e  or  ito 
ito 

ite  or  itote 
unto 

i  or  Ito 

Ito 

Ite  or  itote 
iunto 

Prs.  are 

Pbk.  isse 

Put.  ur us  esse 

INFIls 

Sre 

isse 

urus  esse 

riTIVE. 

ere 

isse 

urus  esse 

ire 

isse 

urus  esse 

Prs.  ans 

Put.  urus  (a,  um) 

PARTICIPLES. 

ens  |  ens 

urus  (a,  um)  |  urus  (a,  um) 

iens 

urus  (a,  um) 

THE  VERB 


43 


OF  THE  REGULAR  VERBS. 


PASSIVE. 


II. 

III. 

IV. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

i. 


INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 


or 

aris 
atur 
am  nr 
amini 
antur 


abar 

abaris 

abatur 

abamur 

abamini 

abantur 


abor 

aberis 

abitur 

abimur 

abimini 

abuntur 


eor 

eris 

etur 

cmur 

emini 

entur 


or 

eris 

itur 

iraur 

imini 

untur 


mPERFECT. 

ebar 
ebaris 
ebatur 


ebarnur 

ebamini 

ebantur 


ebar 

ebaris 

ebatur 

ebarnur 

ebamini 

ebantur 


lor 

Iris 

itur 

Imur 

imini 

iuntur 


iebar 
i  ebaris 
iebatur 
iebamur 
iebamini 
i  ebantur 


FUTURE. 


ebor 

ar 

iar 

eberis 

eris 

ieris 

ebitur 

etur 

ietur 

ehimur 

emur 

iemur 

ebimini 

emini 

iemini 

ebuntur 

entur 

ientur 

PERFECT. 

PLUPERF. 

FUT.-PERF. 

PERFECT. 

PLUPERF. 

FUT.-PERF 

( for  all  conjugations.) 

( for  all  conjugations.) 

Partic.  in-t/s 

Partic.  in  -vs 

Partic.  in  - us 

Partic.  in-«s 

Partic.  in  -us 

with 

with 

with 

with 

with 

wanting. 

sum 

e  r  a  m 

e  r  o 

sim 

essem 

(fui) 

(fueram) 

(fuero) 

(fuerim) 

(fuissem) 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 


er 

eris 

etur 

emur 

emini 

entur 


arer 

areris 

aretur 

aremur 

aremini 

arentur 


ear 

earis 

eatur 

eamur 

earn  ini 

eantur 


ar 

aris 

atur 

am  nr 

amini 

antur 


IMPERFECT. 


erer 

ereris 

eretur 

eremur 

eremini 

ereutur 


erer 

ereris 

eretur 

eremur 

eremini 

erentur 


iar 

iaris 

iatur 

iamur 

iamini 

iantur 


irer 

ireris 

iretur 

iremur 

iremini 

irentur 


FUTURE. 


wanting. 


I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

S.  2.  are  or  ator 

3.  ator 

P.  2.  amini 

3.  antor 

DIPERA 

Sre  or  etor 
etor 
emini 
entor 

TIVE. 

ere  or  itor 
itor 
imini 
untor 

ire  or  Itor 
itor 
imini 
iuntor 

Pas.  ari 

Pkf.  us  (a,  um)  esse 
Put.  um  iri 

INFII 

6ri 

us  (a,  um)  esse 
um  iri 

TITIVE. 

i 

us  (a,  um)  esse 
um  iri 

iri 

us  (a,  um)  esso 
um  iri 

Pkf.  us 

■ -  andu3 

PARTICIPLES, 
us  1  us 

endus  |  endus 

us 

iendus 

44 


THE  VERB 


§  54. - THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


ACT 

1 

I. 

n. 

III. 

TV. 

INDICATIVE.  l 

PRESENT. 

. 

1  love,  am  loving,  do  love  ;  I advise,  rule,  hear,  am  advising,  etc.,  do  advise,  els. 

S.  Am-o 

Mon-eo 

Reg-o 

Aud-io 

am-as 

mon-es 

reg-is 

aud-is 

am -at 

mon-et 

reg-it 

aud-it 

P.  am-amiw 

mon-emus 

reg-Imua 

aud-Imus 

am-atis 

mon-etis 

reg-itis 

aud-itis 

am-ant 

mon-ent 

reg-unt 

aud-iunt 

IMPERFECT. 

I  loved,  was  loving,  did  love  ;  I  advised. 

ruled,  heard,  was  advising,  did  advise. 

S.  am-abam 

mon-ebam 

reg-ebam 

aud-iebam 

am-abas 

mon-ebas. 

reg-ebas 

aud-iebaa 

am-abat 

mon-ebat 

reg-ebat 

aud-iebat 

P.  am-abamus 

mon-ebamus 

reg-ebamus 

aud-iebamus 

am-abatis 

mon-ebatis 

reg-ebatis 

aud-iebatis 

am-abant 

mon-ebant 

reg-ebant 

aud-iebant 

FUTURE. 

I  shall  love,  advise,  rule,  hear. 

S.  am-abo 

mon-ebo 

reg-am 

aud-iam 

am-abis 

mon-ebi3 

reg-es 

aud-ies 

am-abit 

mon-ebit 

reg-et 

aud-iet 

P.  am-abimus 

mon-eblmus 

reg-emus 

aud-iemus 

am-abitis 

mon-ebitis 

reg-etis 

aud-ietia 

am-abuut 

mon-ebuut 

reg-ent 

aud-ient 

PERFECT. 

J  loved,  have  loved  ;  I  advised,  have  advised. 

S.  amav-i 

monu-i 

rex-i 

audiv-i 

amav-isti 

monu-isti 

rex-isti 

audiv-isti 

amav-it 

monu-it 

rex-i  t 

audiv-it 

P.  amav-imns 

monu-imu3 

rex-i  mu  s 

audiv-i  in  us 

amav-istis 

monu-istis 

rex-istis 

audiv-istis 

amav-erunt 

monu-erunt 

rex-erunt 

audiv-eruut 

PLUPERFECT. 

1  had  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

S.  amav-eram 

monu-eram 

rex-eram 

audiv-eram 

amav-eras 

monu-eras 

rex-eras 

audiv-eras 

amav-erat 

mona-erat 

rex-erat 

audiv-erat 

P.  amav-eramus 

monu-eramus 

rex-e  ramus 

audiv-e  ramus 

amav-eratis 

monu-eratis 

rex-eratis 

audiv-eratis 

ainav-erant 

monu-erant 

rex-erant 

audiv-erant 

FUT.-PERFECT. 

i 

I  shall  have  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

S.  amav-ero 

monu-ero 

rex-ero 

audiv-ero 

amav-eris 

monu-eris 

rex-eris 

audiv-eris 

amav-erit 

monu-erit 

rex-erit 

audiv-erit 

P.  amav-erimua 

monu-crimus 

rex-erimus 

audiv-erimus 

amav-eritis 

monu-eritis 

rex-eritis 

audiv-eritia 

omaynsrinf 

monu-erint 

rex-erint 

audiv-erint 

0 


THE  VERB.  45 


THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


IVE. 

i. 

XL 

III. 

IV. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

I  may  love,  advise,  rule,  hear. 

6.  Am-em 

Mon-eam 

Reg-am 

Aud-iam 

am-es 

mon-eas 

reg-as 

aud-ias 

ain-et 

mon-eat 

reg-at 

aud-iat 

P.  am-emus 

mon-eamus 

reg-amus 

aud-iamus 

am-etis 

mon-eatis 

reg-atis 

aud-iatis 

am-ent 

mon-eant 

reg-ant 

aud-iant 

IMPERFECT. 

I  might  ( should ,  would)  love,  advise,  rule,  hear . 

S.  am-arem 

mon-erem 

reg-erem 

aud-irem 

am-ares 

mon-eres 

reg-eres 

aud-ires 

ain-aret 

mon-eret 

reg-eret 

aud-iret 

P.  am-aremus 

mon-eremus 

reg-eremus 

aud-iremus 

am-aretis 

mon-eretis 

reg-eretis 

aipd-iretis 

am-arent 

mon-erent 

reg-erent 

aud-irent 

FUTURE. 

- 

I  shall  love,  advise,  rule,  hear. 

£.  amatur-  I  sim 

monitur-  1  sim 

rectur-  j  sim 

auditur- 

sim 

vs,  -J  sis 

vs,  >sis 

us,  •<  sis 

us,  J 

sis 

a,  urn  (  sit 

a,  um  )  sit 

a,  um  {  sit 

a,  um  i 

sit 

P.  amatur-  l  simus 

monitur-  }  simus 

rectur-  j  simus 

auditur- 

simus 

i,  ■<  sitis 

i,  >■  sitis 

i,  >  sitis 

i,  « 

sitis 

ce,  a  (  sint 

ce,  a  )  sint 

ce,  a  )  sint 

ce,  a 

,  sint 

PERFECT. 

I  may  have  loved ,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

S.  amav-erim 

monu-erim 

rex-erim 

audiv-erim 

amav-eris 

monu-eris 

rex-eris 

audiv-eris 

amav-erit 

monu-erit 

rex-erit 

audiv-erit 

P.  amav-erimus 

monu-erimus 

rex-erimus 

audiv-erimus 

amav-eritis 

monu-eritis 

rex-eritis 

audiv-eritis 

amav-erint 

monu-erint 

rex-erint 

audiv-erint 

PLUPERFECT. 

I  might  ( should ,  would)  have  loved ,  advised ,  ruled ,  heard. 

6.  amav-isfiem 

monu-issem 

rex-issem 

audiv-issem 

amav-isses 

monu-isses 

rex-isses 

audiv-isses 

amav-isset 

monu-isset 

rex-isset 

audiv-isset 

P.  amav-issemus 

monu-issemus 

rex-issemus 

audiv  issemus 

amav-issetis 

monu-issetis 

rex-issetis 

audiv-issetis 

amav-issont 

monu-issent 

rex-issent 

audiv-issent 

FUT.-PERFECT. 

I  shall  have  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

wanting. 

(generally  supplied  by  the  Sub}.  Perf.  or  Pluperfect.) 

(See  §  187.) 

46 


THE  VERB. 


THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


ACTIVE. 

1  1 

x. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

IMPERATIVE. 

I 

?ot>e  CAoit,  sTiaft  ».  ;  Ae  s7ia7Z  7 

;  love  ye,  ye  shall  l.,  they  shall  l. 

S.  2.  am-a 

mon-e 

reg-e 

aud-i 

am-ato 

rnon-eto 

reg-ito 

aud-Ito 

3.  am-ato 

mon-eto 

reg-ito 

aud-ito 

P.  2,  am-ate 

mon-ete 

reg-ite 

aud-ite 

am-ato  to 

mon-etote 

reg-itote 

aud-i  tote 

8.  am-anto 

mon-ento 

reg-unto 

aud-iunto 

INFINITIYE. 

to  love ,  to  have  loved ,  to  be  about  to  love. 

Prs.  am-are 

mon-ere 

reg-ere 

aud-ire 

Prf.  amav-isse 

monu-isse 

rex-isse 

audiv-isse 

Fut.  amaturus  esse 

moniturus  esse 

recturus  esse 

auditurus  esse 

GERUNDS. 

G.  of  loving  or  to  love  ;D.  and  A.  to  love;  Ahl.  by  loving. 

Gen.  am-andi 

mon-endi 

reg-endi 

aud-iendi 

Dat.  am-ando 

mon-endf) 

reg-endo 

aud-iendo 

Acc.  am-andum 

mon-endum 

reg  eudum 

aud-iendum 

Abl.  am  ando 

mon-endo 

reg  endo 

aud-iendo 

SUPINES. 

1.  (in  order)  to  love  ; 

2.  to  love  or  to  be  loved. 

1.  amatum 

monitum 

rectum 

auditum 

2.  amatu 

monitu 

rectu 

auditu 

PARTICIPLES. 

Prs. 

loving ,  advising  ....  Fut.  being  about  to  love,  to  advise. 

Prs.  am-ans 

mon-ens 

reg-ens 

aud-iens 

Ftjt.  amat-urus 

monit-urus 

rect-urus 

audit-urus 

'  §  55. - NOTES  ON  THE  ACTIVE  VOICE. 

Note  1. — The  third  person  plural  of  the  Indie.  Perfect  sometimes  ends  in  ere  instead 
of  Irunt ;  as ,fuc.re,  amavlre ,  monuere ,  rexere ,  etc.,  instead  of  fuerunt,  amaverunt ,  mo- 
nuerurt ,  rexerunt ,  etc. 

Note  2. — Perfects  in  cm  of  the  first,,  and  in  evi  of  the  second  conjugation,  as  well  as 
the  tenses  formed  from  the  Perfect,  frequently  drop  vi  and  ve  before  r  and  8 ;  as,  ama - 
runt,  amaram ,  amarint,  for  ama-verunt,  amaveram ,  amaverint  / — amasti,  amassent , 
amasse ,  for  amavisti ,  amavissent ,  amavisse  ; — nerunt ,  delevam ,  Jlesti,  compkssem,  for 
neverunt,  deleveram,  jlevisti,  complevinem.  Thus,  consuerunt ,  consuesscm ,  of  the  third 
ionjugation,  for  consneverunl ,  consuevissetn. 


THE  YERB. 


47 


Note  3. — Perfects  in  ivi ,  of  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  often  drop  v  before 
*,  and  sometimes  before  i  ;  as,  desier  unt ,  audierunt ,  for  desiverunt ,  audiverunt ; — • 
quasieram ,  definierat ,  for  qucesiveram ,  definiverat  ; — petierim,  audiero ,  for  petiverim , 
audivero  ;  more  rarely  audiit ,  muniit ,  petiissem,audiisss,  for  audivit ,  munivit ,  petivis- 
tem ,  audivisse. 

When  iw  is  followed  by  s,  the  whole  syllable  may  be  dropped  ;  as,  petisli,  petis- 
sem,  audisse,  abissem ,  rcdisti ,  subisse ,  for  petivisti,  petivissem,  audivisse ,  etc. 

Note  4. — X>ic<9,  efoico,  facio,  and /e/'o,  with  their  compounds,  have  ahh,  duc^fer^fac, 
in  the  Imperative. 


§  56. — NOTES  ON  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 


Note  1. — The  second  person  singular  of  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
as  well  as  of  the  Imperfect  and  Future  Indicative,  often  ends  in  re  instead  of  ns;  as, 
monear e  for  monearis ;  monerere  for  monereris ;  amabare  for  amabaris ;  amabere  for 
amaberis  ;  regare  for  regaris  ;  regere  for  regeris ,  etc. 

Note  2. — To  express  more  emphatically  the  completion  of  an  action,  the  following 
forms  are  sometimes  used  : 


amatus  fui yhr  amatus  sum 
amatus  fueram/or  amatus  eratn 
amatus  fuerim  /or  amatus  sim 
amatus  fuissem /or  amatus  essem 
amatus  fuisse  /or  amatus  esse. 

Note  3. — The  Participles  of  the  Infinitive  Perfect  pass,  and  of  the  Infinitive  Future 
act., have  two  cases  only :  viz.,  the  nominative  and  accusative  both  sing,  and  plural ;  as, 

Sing.  N.  amatus  (a,  um)  esse  Plur.  N.  amatd  (se,  a)  esse 

A.  amatum  (am,  um)  esse.  A.  amatos  (as,  a)  esse. 


Sing.  N.  amaturus  (a,  um)  esse  Plur.  N.  amaturi  (se,  a)  esse 

A.  amaturum  (am,  um)  esse.  A.  amaturos  (as,  a)  esse. 

Note  4. — The  Participle  in  dus ,  in  verbs  of  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  ends 
sometimes  in  undus ,  instead  of  endus ,  especially  when  i  precedes;  as,  regundus,  fad- 
undus ,  capiundus ,  and  regularly  potiundus. 


Verbs  in  -io 

of  the  third  conjugation. 

§  57. — Verbs  ending  in  - io ,  of  the  third  conjug.,  as  capio ,  cvpio,  fodio,  fugio,  jacio, 
rapio ,  etc.,  retain  the  i  before  am  and  ar  ;  ebam  and  ebar  ;  ens,  endus ,  and  endi,  through¬ 
out, — and  also  before  the  endings  unt,  untur ,  unto,  and  untor , — in  other  words,  they 
retain  the  i  in  the  Present  Subj.,  in  the  Imperfect  Indie.,  and  in  the  Future  Indie., 
both  active  and  passive :  besides  in  the  participles  in  ens  and  dus ,  in  the  Gerunds, 
and  also  in  the  third  person  plur.  of  the  Present  Indie,  and  of  the  Imperat.  both  active 
and  passive ;  as,  - 


Pres. 

Subj. 

Fut. 

Indie. 

Impf.  Indie. 

ACT. 

PASS. 

ACT. 

PASS. 

ACT. 

PASS. 

cap-i-am 

cap-i-ar 

cap-i-am 

cap-i-ar 

cap-i-ebam 

cap-i-ebar 

cap-i-as 

cap-i-aris 

cap-i-es 

cap-i-eris 

cap-i-ebas 

cap-i-ebaris 

cap-i-at 

cap-i-atur 

cap-i-et 

cap-i-etur 

cap-i-ebat 

cap-i-ebatur 

etc.  etc.  etc. 


cap-i-unt  and  -untur,  cap-i-unto  and  -untor,  cap-i-ens  and  cap-i-endus. 


48 


THE  VERB 


§  58. - THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


PASS 


i. 


ii. 


hi. 


IT. 


X 


X 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

I  am  loved ,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


IMPERFECT. 

I  was  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


s. 


p. 


s. 


p. 


s. 


p. 


am-abor 

am-aberis  (re) 

am-abitur 

am-abimur 

am-abimini 

ain-abuntur 


amat- 
us,  • 
a,  um 
amat- 

h  ■ 
ce,  a 


amat- 
us,  - 
a,  um 
amat- 

h  ■ 
oz,  a 


FUTURE. 

I  shall  he  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

mon-ebor 
mon-eberis  (re) 
mon-ebitur 


mon-ebimur 

mon-ebimini 

mon-ebuntur 


reg-ar 

reg-gris  (re) 

reg-etur 

reg-emur 

reg-emini 

reg-entur 


PERFECT. 

I  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


sum 

xnonit-  1 

|  sum 

rect-  i 

(  sum 

es 

us,  J 

es 

us,  - 

es 

est 

a,  um  ( 

!  est 

a,  um  i 

(  est 

sumus 

mo  nit-  l 

j  sumus 

rect-  i 

sumus 

estis 

*>  •< 

estis 

i,  h 

estis 

sunt 

a,  a  < 

!  sunt 

ce,  a  i 

[  sunt 

PLUPERFECT. 

I  had  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


eram 

eras 

erat 

eram  us 

eratis 

erant 


ce,  a 


eram 

eras 

erat 

eram  us 

eratis 

erant 


rect¬ 

os, 

a ,  um 
rect- 

% 
a r,  a 


eram 

eras 

erat 

eramus 

eratis 

erant 


S. 


P. 


FUT.-PERFECT. 

I  shall  have  been  loved,  advised,  r  uled,  heard. 

ero 
eris 
erit 
erimus 
eritis 
erunt 


(  cro 

mo  nit-  ( 

j  ero 

rect-  f 

1  eris 

us,  J 

eris 

us,  J 

(  erit 

a,  um  | 

|  erit 

a,  um  ( 

(  erimus 

monit-  | 

l  erimus 

rect-  ( 

<  eritis 

b 

eritis 

i,  •< 

(  erunt 

ob,  a  | 

[ erunt 

«  ( 

X 


S. 

Am -or 

Mon-eor 

Reg-or 

Aud-ior 

am-aris 

mon-eris 

reg-eris 

aud-Iris 

am-atur 

mon-etur 

reg-itur 

aud-itur 

P. 

am-amur 

mon-emur 

reg-imur 

aud-imur 

am-amini 

mon-emini 

reg-imini 

aud-imini 

am-antur 

mon-entur 

reg-untur 

aud-iuntur 

S.  am-abar 

mon-ebar 

reg-ebar 

am-abaris  (re) 

mon-ebaris  (re) 

reg-ebaris  (re) 

am-abatur 

mon-ebatur 

reg-ebatur 

P.  am-abamur 

mon-ebamur 

reg-ebamur 

am-abamini 

mon-ebamini 

reg-ebamini 

am-abantur 

mon-ebantur 

reg-ebantur 

aud-iebar 

aud-iebaris  (re) 

aud-iebatur 

aud-iebamur 

aud-iebamini 

aud-iebantur 


aud-iar 

aud-ieris  (re) 

aud-ietur 

aud-iemur 

aud-iernini 

aud-ientur 


audit- 
us, 


i 


sum 
,  es 
um  (  est 

sumus 
estis 
sunt 


audit-  f  eram 
us,  -j  eras 
a ,  um  (  erat 
audit-  l  eramua 
i ,  •<  eratis 


ce ,  a 


erant 


audit-  (  ero 
us,  ^  eris 
a,  um  l  erit 
audit-  (  erimus 
i ,  <  eritis 

os,  a  {  erunt 


THE  VERB. 


49 


THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


IYE. 

i. 


n. 


in. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 


I  may  be  loved ,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


S.  Am-  er 

Mon-  ear 

Reg-  ar 

And-  iar 

am-  eris  (re) 

mon-  earis  (re) 

reg-  aris  (re) 

and-  iaris  (re) 

am-  etur 

mon-  eatur 

reg-  atur 

aud-  iatur 

P.  am-  emur 

mon-  eamur 

reg-  amur 

aud-  iamur 

am-  emini 

mon-  eamini 

reg-  amini 

aud-  iamini 

am-  entur 

mon-  eantur 

reg-  antur 

aud-  iantur 

IMPERFECT. 


I  might  (should,  would)  be  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


S. 

am-  arer 

mon-  erer 

reg-  Srer 

aud-  irer 

am-  areris  (re) 

mon-  ereris  (re) 

reg-  ereris  (re) 

aud-  ireris  (re) 

am-  aretur 

mon-  eretur 

reg-  eretur 

aud-  iretur 

P. 

am-  aremur 

mon-  eremur 

reg-  eremur 

aud-  iremur 

am-  aremini 

mon-  eremini 

reg-  eremini 

aud-  iremini 

am-  arentur 

mon-  erentur 

reg-  erentur 

aud-  irentur 

FUTURE. 

J  shall  be  loved ,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

Wanting. 


(See  §  186.) 


B.  amat-  |  sim 

us,  •<  sis 
a,  um  (  sit 
P.  amat-  l  simus 
i,  •<  sitis 
as,  a  (  sint 


PERFECT. 

J  may  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard 


monit-  i 

(  sim 

US,  H 

sis 

a,  um  i 

(  sit 

monit-  1 

j  simus 

i,  \ 

sitis 

os,  a  | 

;  sint 

rect¬ 

( sim 

os, 

<  sis 

a,  um 

(  sit 

rect- 

l  simus 

i, 

■<  sitis 

ce,  a 

(  sint 

audit-  | 

1  sim 

us,  ^ 

sis 

a,  um  ( 

sit 

audit- 

(  simus 

i,  - 

sitis 

ce ,  a  i 

(  sint 

PLUPERFECT. 

I  might  (should,  would)  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


S.  amat-  (  essem 
us,  esses 

a,  um  (  esset 
P.  amat-  f  essemus 
i,  essetis 

<B,  a  (  essent 


monit-  (  essem 
us,  •<  esses 
a,  um  (  esset 
monit-  (  essemus 
i,  essetis 
as,  a  (  essent 


rect- 

(  essem 

us , 

1  esses 

a,  um 

[  esset 

rect- 

I  essemus 

iy 

<  essetis 

ce,  a 

(  essent 

audit-  (  essem 
us,  •<  esses 
a,  um  (  esset 
audit-  1  essemus 
i,  J  essetis 
(B,  a  (  essent 


FUT.-PERFECT. 

t  shall  have  been  loved ,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


Wanting. 


Generally  supplied  by  the  Subj.  Perf.  or  Plupf. 
(See  §  187.) 


50 


THE  VERB 


THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 


X 

*  PASSIVE.  * 

I. 

n. 

III. 

IV. 

IMPERATIVE. 

he  thou  loved ,  thou  shall  he  — ,  he  shall  he  — ;  he  ye  loved,  they 

shall  he  — . 

8.  2.  am-are 

mon-ere 

reg-ere 

aud-ire 

atn-ator 

mon-etor 

reg-itor 

aud-Itor 

3.  am-ator 

mon-etor 

reg-itor 

aud-itor 

P.  2.  am-amini 

mon-emini 

reg-imini 

aud-i  mini 

3.  am-antor 

mon-entor 

reg-untor 

aud-iuntor 

INFINITIVE. 

to  he  loved  ;  to  have  heen  — ;  to  he  about  to  he  — . 

Prs.  am-nri 

mon-eri 

reg-i 

aud-iri 

Prf.  amatus  esse 

monitus  esse 

rectus  esse 

auditus  esse 

Fut.  amatum  iri 

m on i turn  iri 

rectum  iri 

auditum  iri 

PARTICIPLES. 

Prf.  loved; — one  who  must  he  loved. 

Prf.  ama-tus 

monit-us 

rect-us 

audit-us 

—  am-andus 

mon-endus 

reg-endus 

aud-iendus 

DEPONENT  VERBS. 

§  59. — Deponent  verbs  are  such  as  have  the  passive  form,  but  an 
active  (trans.  or  intrans.)  signification.  They  are  called  deponents, 
from  depono,  “  to  lay  aside,”  as  having  laid  aside  the  active  form  j  e.  g., 
hortor  (trans.),  I  exhort ;  morior  (intrans.),  I  die. 

Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  only  in  the  passive  voice  ;  but  they  have  algo 
the  Gerunds,  Supines,  and  Participles  of  the  active.  Their  signification  is 
throughout  active,  the  Participle  in  dus  excepted,  which  has  always  a  passive 
meaning. 

There  are  deponent  verbs  of  all  conjugations ;  the  following  is  an  example 
of  a  deponent  of  the  first  conjugation  : 


Miro r,  mirari,  miratus  sum ,  I  admire, 


indicative. 

Prs.  miror,  1  admire 
Imp.  mirabar,  1  was  admiring 
Put.  mirabor,  I  shall  admire 
Prf.  miratus  sum,  I  have  admired 
Plp.  miratus  erain,  I  had  admired 
F.-pe.  miratus  ero,  I  shall  have  admired. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

mirer,  I  may  admire 
mirarer,  I  might  admire 
miraturus  sim,  I  shall  admire 
miratus  sim,  I  may  have  admired 
miratus  essem,  I  might  have  admired 
( supplied  by  the  Perfect  Subj.) 


IMPERATIVE. 

S.  2.  mirnre,  -ator,  admire  thou.  I  T.  2.  miramini,  admire  ye., 

3.  mirator,  let  him  admire.  |  3.  mirantor,  let  them  admire. 


THE  VERB. 


51 


INFINITIVE. 

Prs.  mirari,  to  admire 

Prf.  miratus  esse,  to  have  admired 

Fut.  mira turns  esse,  to  he  about  to  admire. 


Prs.  mirans,  admiring 

Fut.  miraturus,  about  to  admire . 


PARTICIPLES. 

Prf.  miratus,  having  admired 


-  -  -  7  - *7  -  ' 

—  mirandus,  one  that  is  to  be  adm . 


GERUNDS.  SUPINES. 

mirandi,  o,  urn,  o,  of  admiring,  etc.  |  miratum,  -n,  to  admire ,  to  be  admired . 

Note. — The  following  deponents  have  in  the  Perf.  Participles,  besides  the  active 
meaning,  a  passive  one  also  :  adipiscor,  comitor ,  commentor ,  comminiscor ,  completion, 
eonfiteor ,  depopulor ,  detestor ,  dimetior,  emetior ,  effari,  ementior,  experior,  exsecror ,  inter - 
preior,  meditor,  opinor ,  paciscor ,  partior ,  perfungor ,  periclitor ,  stipulor,  testor ,  contestor , 
and  some  others  which  rely  on  inferior  authority,  or  are  found  in  poetry  only. 


adeptus,  obtained 
comitatus,  accompanied 
commentatus,  discussed 
commentus,  invented 
com  plexus,  comprised 
confessus,  acknowledged 
depopulatus,  devastated 
detestatus,  detested 


dimensus,  measured 
emensus,  traversed 
effatus,  pronounced 
ementitus,  forged 
expertus,  tried 
exsecratus,  accursed 
interpretatus,  interpreted 
meditatus,  meditated 


opinatus,  imagined 
pactus,  agreed  upon 
partitus,  divided 
perfunctus,  endured 
periclitatus,  tried 
stipulatus,  promised 
testatus,  attested 
contestatus,  contested. 


§  60. — The  four  verbs  audeo,  fido,  gctudeo,  and  soleo,  are  called  semirdeponents, 
because  in  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future,  they  have  the  active  form ;  in 
the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Fut.-Perf.,  the  passive ;  as. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres,  gaudeo,  1  rejoice. 

Impf.  gaudebam,  I  was  rejoicing. 
Fat.  gaudebo,  I  shall  rejoice. 


Perf.  gavlsus  sum,  1  have  rejoiced. 
Plpf.  gavisus  eram,  1  had  rejoiced. 

F.  Pf.  gavisus  ero,  I  shall  have  rejoiced . 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres,  gaudere,  to  rejoice. 

Perf.  gavisus  esse,  to  have  rejoiced. 

Fut.  gavisurus  esse,  to  be  about  to  rejoice. 

Thus  audeo ,  I  venture,  ausus  sum  ;  soleo,  I  am  accustomed,  solitus  sum  ;  fido, 
I  trust,  with  its  compounds  confido,  I  confide,  and  diffido,  I  distrust,  fisus, 
confisus,  and  dififisus  sum.  The  active  Perfect-forins  confidi  and  diffldi 

but  rarely  occur.) 

PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGATION. 

There  are  two  conjugations  called  periphrastic  or  by  circumlocution, — 
the  one,  active  ;  the  other,  passive. 

§  61. — The  active  'periphrastic  co7ijugation  is  formed  by  the  com¬ 
bination  of  the  Participle  in  rus  with  the  tenses  of  sum.  It  usually 
expresses  an  intention  or  a  wish  to  do  something  ;  as,  scripturus  sum , 
I  intend  writing  or  to  write, — I  am  to  write, — am  about  or  going  to 
write, — have  a  mind  to  write, — think  of,  or  am  on  the  point  of  writing. 


52 


THE  VERB. 


INDICATIVE. 

Prs.  scripturus,  (  sum 
a,  um  -j  es 

(est 

scrip  turi,  ( sum  us 
ce,  a  <  estis 

(sunt 

Imp.  scripturus  eram 
Pup.  scripturus  fui 
Plp.  scripturus  fueram 
Put.  scripturus  ero 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


scripturus,  ( 

sim 

a.  um  \ 

sis 

( 

sit 

scripturi,  ( 

simus 

ce,  a 

sitis 

sint 

Imp.  scripturus  essem 
Prf.  scripturus  fuerim 
Plp.  scripturus  fuissem 
Fut.  ( like  the  Present.) 


INFINITIVE. 

Prs.  scripturus  (a,  um)  esse,  to  intend  writing 
Prf.  scripturus  (a,  um)  fuisse,  to  have  intended  to  write 
Fut.  (i the  same  as  the  Infinitive  Present.) 

The  Participle  in  urus  with  the  verb  sum  does  not  always  express  an  intention  to 
do  something,  but  sometimes  it  merely  denotes  futurity,  as  it  is  the  case  in  the  Future 
Subj.  and  Future  Infin.  active  of  the  four  regular  conjugations.  Thus,  nescio  num 
venturus  sit ,  may  signify  both 

1.  I  do  not  know  whether  he  will  come, — and 

2.  I  do  not  know  whether  he  has  a  mind  to  come. 


In  case  1,  mere  futurity  is  denoted,  and  venturus  sit  is  the  Future  Subj.  act.  of 
fenio.  In  case  2,  the  intention  of  coming  is  expressed,  and  venturus  sit  is  the  Present 
Subj.  of  the  periphrastic  conjugation. 

§  62. — The  passive  periphrastic  conjugation  is  formed  by  the 
combination  of  the  Participle  in  dus  with  the  tenses  of  sum.  It 
always  expresses  necessity,  duty,  or  conveniency  ;  as,  laudandus  sum, 
I  must  or  should  be  praised, — I  have  or  am  to  be  praised, — ought,  am 
worthy,  deserve  to  be  praised. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


laudandus, 

(sum 

a,  um 

•jes 

(est 

laudandi. 

( sumus 

ce,  a 

■<  estis 

( sunt 

laudandus 

eram 

Prf.  laudandus  fui 
Plp.  laudandus  fueram 
Fut.  laudandus  ero 


Prs.  laudandus,  (sim 

a,  um  •<  sis 
(sit 

laudandi,  i  simus 
ce,  a  •<  sitis 
(sint 

Imp.  laudandus  essem 
Prf.  laudandus  fuerim 
Plp,  laudandus  fuissem 
Fut.  (like  the  Present.) 


INFINITIVE. 

Prs.  laudandus  esse,  that  one  ought  to  be  praised 

Prf.  laudandus  fuisse,  that  one  ought  to  have  been  praised 

Fut.  laudandum  fore,  that  one  will  have  to  be  praised. 

To  express  passively,  what  is  about  to  be  done,  the  form  in  eo  est  ut  or  futurum  est 
ut,  with  the  Present  or  Imperfect  Subjunctive  passive  is  used ;  e.  g.,  “  they  are  about 
to  be  dismissed 

in  eo  est  or  futurum  est  ut  dimittantur, 
in  eo  erat  or  futurum  erat  ut  dimitterentur, 
in  eo  erit  or  futurum  erit  ut  dimittantur. 


THE  VERB 


53 


LIST 

OF  PERFECTS  AND  SUPINES. 

Note  1. — Forms  printed  in  Italics  occur  only  in  composition  ;  as,  -pleo,  expleo,  im- 
pleo,  compleo. 

Note  2. — A  vowel  in  parenthesis,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  shows  the  change  of  the 
stem-vowel  in  composition  ;  as,  habeo  (i), — exhibeo,  prohibeo ;  spargo  (e), — aspergo 
conspergo. 

Note  3. — A  letter  in  parenthesis,  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  denotes  the  existence  of 
two  forms,  the  one,  with  that  letter ;  the  other,  without ;  as,  sanc(i)tum,  that  is, 
sancltum  or  sanctum. 

§  63. — FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

Verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  have  avi,  atum ;  as,  cimo,  amavi, 
amatum. — Thus 


abundo,  abound. 

destino,  destine. 

itero,  do  again. 

accuso,  accuse. 

devoro,  devour. 

jacto,  boast. 

eedifico,  build. 

dissipo,  squander. 

judico,  judge. 

aestimo,  'value. 

dono,  bestow. 

juro,  swear. 

ambulo,  walk. 

duro,  harden ,  last. 

laboro,  labor. 

animo,  encourage. 

educo,  bring  up. 

lacero,  tear. 

appello,  call. 

ejulo,  lament. 

latro,  bark. 

apto,  fit ,  adapt. 

emendo,  correct. 

laudo,  praise. 

aro,  plough. 

equito,  ride. 

lego,  depute. 

assevero,  affirm. 

erro,  mistake. 

levo,  relieve. 

ausculto,  listen. 

existimo,  think. 

libero,  free. 

bello,  wage  war. 

exploro,  explore. 

llgo,  bind. 

caelo,  carve. 

fasclno,  fascinate. 

litigo,  quarrel. 

canto,  sing. 

fatigo,  weary. 

loco,  place. 

castigo,  chastise. 

festlno,  hasten. 

lustro,  traverse. 

celebro,  celebrate. 

firmo,  strengthen. 

macto,  slay. 

celo,  conceal. 

flagito,  demand. 

maculo,  defile. 

certo,  strive. 

flagro,  be  on  fire. 

mando,  command . 

clamo,  cry. 

formido,  dread. 

mSno,  flow. 

cogito,  think. 

formo,  form. 

memoro,  mention. 

comparo,  compare. 

fraudo,  defraud. 

mendlco,  beg  alms . 

concilio,  reconcile. 

fundo,  found. 

migro,  depart. 

concordo,  agree. 

guberno,  govern. 

ministro,  serve. 

confuto,  confute. 

gusto,  taste. 

mitlgo,  soothe. 

considero,  consider. 

habito,  dwell. 

monstro,  show. 

cremo,  burn. 

hassito,  be  at  a  loss. 

multo,  pmiish. 

creo,  create. 

honoro,  honor. 

mutilo,  maim. 
inuto,  change. 

crucio,  torment. 

ignoro,  not  know. 

euro,  care. 

impero,  command. 

narro,  relate. 

darnno,  condemn. 

impetro,  obtain. 

navigo,  sail. 

declaro,  declare. 

indago,  investigate. 

nego,  deny. 

decllno,  decline. 

instauro,  reneiv. 

’no,  nato,  swim. 

decoro,  adorn. 

instlgo,  push  on. 

nomino,  name. 

delecto,  delight. 

intro,  go  into. 

noto,  mark. 

vlelibero,  deliberate. 

investigo,  discover. 

nudo,  make  bare. 

dellbo,  taste. 

invito,  invite. 

numero,  count. 

dellro,  rave. 

irrigo,  water. 

nuncupo,  name. 

desidero,  desire. 

irrlto,  provoke. 

nuntio,  tell. 

54 


THE  VERB. 


objurgo, 

reenpero,  regain. 

suffdco,  stifle. 

obligo,  oblige. 

reciiso,  refuse. 

supero,  overcome. 

obsecro,  beseech . 

redundo,  overflow. 

suppedito,  afford. 

obtempero, 

regno,  reign. 

supplico,  supplicate. 

obturo,  sfop 

reparo,  repair. 

tardo,  delay. 

onero,  foa<2. 

resero,  unlock . 

taxo,  rate. 

opto,  rn'sA. 

rogo,  ask. 

tempero,  temper. 

or  bo,  deprive. 

sagino,  fatten. 

tento,  try. 

ordino,  order. 

salto,  dance. 

termino,  limit. 

orno,  adorn. 

saluto,  salute. 

titubo,  waver. 

oro, 

sano,  heal. 

tolero,  bear. 

paco,  pacify. 

satio,  satiate. 

trucldo,  kill. 

pa.ro,  prepare. 

saucio,  wound. 

turbo,  disturb. 

pecco,  sm. 

sedo,  allay. 

ululo,  howl. 

penetro,  penetrate. 

separo,  sever. 

vacillo,  stagger. 

persevero,  persevere. 

servo,  keep. 

vaco,  be  at  leisure. 

placo,  appease. 

sibilo,  hiss. 

-  vapulo,  be  beaten. 

ploro,  bewail. 

sicco,  dry. 

vario,  vary. 

porto,  carry. 

signo,  mark. 

vasto,  lay  ivaste. 

postulo,  demand. 

simulo,  pretend. 

velo,  cover. 

privo,  deprive. 

sollicito,  stir  up. 

verbero,  flog. 

probo,  approve . 

sotnnio,  dream. 

vexo,  tease. 

procrastino,  put  off. 

specto,  behold. 

vibro,  brandish. 

profligo,  overthrow. 

spero,  hope. 

vigil o,  watch. 

promulgo,  publish. 

spiro,  breathe. 

vindico,  revenge. 

propero,  hasten. 

spolio,  rob. 

violo,  violate. 

propino,  drink  to. 

sputno,  foam. 

vitio,  vitiate. 

pugno,  fight. 

stillo,  drop. 

vito,  avoid. 

pullulo,  sprout  out. 

stimulo,  incite. 

vitupero,  blame. 

pulso,  beat. 

stipo,  surround. 

voco,  call,  name. 

purgo,  cleanse . 

strangulo,  strangle. 

volo,  fly. 

puto,  think. 

sudo,  sweat. 

vulnero,  wound. 

The  following  are  irregular : 


do1, 

dedi, 

datum, 

to  give. 

sto2. 

steti. 

statum, 

to  stand. 

crepo3. 

crepui, 

crepitum, 

to  creak. 

cubo, 

cubui. 

cubitum, 

to  lie  down. 

domo. 

domui, 

domitum, 

to  tame. 

sonof. 

sonui. 

sonitum. 

to  sound. 

tono, 

tonui. 

tonitum. 

to  thunder. 

veto. 

vetui, 

vetitum, 

to  forbid. 

secof, 

secui, 

sectum, 

to  cut. 

mico4, 

micui, 

to  glitter. 

juvof, 

juvi, 

jutum. 

to  help. 

lavo5. 

lavi, 

lotum. 

to  wash. 

poto6, 

potavi, 

potum, 

to  drink. 

f)  Part.  Fut.  act., 

sonaturus ,  secaturus ,  juvaturus. — ')  Thus, 

circumdo ,  surroi 

pessundo ,  ru’n,  and  venundo ,  sell ; — but  those  compounded  with  monosyllables  have 
-didi ,  - ditum ,  and  follow  the  third  conjugation  ;  as,  abdo,  abdidi ,  abditum ,  hide;  thus, 
add ;  condo,  build ;  publish  ;  perdo ,  lose,  ruin  ;  prodo ,  betray  ;  reddo ,  return  ; 
subdo,  subdue  ;  trado ,  deliver  over  ;  vendo,  sell. — Abscondo ,  conceal,  has  abscondi  and 
abscondidi. — 2)  Thus,  antesto ,  circumsto ,  supersto  j  but  those  compounded  with  mono- 


THE  VERB. 


55 


syllables  have  -stiti,  -statum ;  as,  condo ,  consist  of,  cost;  exsto ,  exist;  insto,  insist; 
obsto,  hinder;  resto,  remain.  Prcesto ,  surpass,  has  prcestiti,  prmtatum  and  prmtilum, 
but  always  praestaturus. — 3)  Discrepo,  differ,  and  increpo ,  scold,  have  both  ui ,  itum , 
and  am,  atum.  4)  JEmico ,  dart  forth,  has  ui,  atum.  Dimico ,  fight,  is  regular. — B)  Su¬ 
pine,  also  lautum  and  lavatum. — 6)  Supine,  also  potatum.  The  Partic .  potus  signifies 
both  “having  drunk”  and  “  having  been  drunk.” 

flSfr*  Neco,  kill,  is  regular ;  eneco,  vex  to  death,  has  both  enecui ,  enectum ,  and  enecavi , 
mecatum  ;  but  the  Part,  is  usually  enectus.—Plico,  fold,  occurs  only  in  poetry  and  post- 
classical  prose :  its  compounds  applico ,  explico ,  and  implico ,  have  ui,  itum ,  and  <m, 
atum.  The  forms  ui,  atum ,  seem  to  be  the  more  common. — Those  derived  from  adjec¬ 
tives  in  -plex,  as  supplico ,  duplico ,  multiplico,  are  regular  and  have  avi ,  atum. 

The  Perfect  Participles  ccenatus  and  juratus  (from  cceno  and  juro )  have  an  active 
signification,  “one  who  has  dined,  sworn.” 

§  64. — SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


Perfect  -ui.  Supine  -itum. 


caleo,  am  hot. 

habeo  (i),  have. 

placeo,  please. 

careo,  want. 

jaceo,  lie. 

displiceo,  displease. 

coerceo,  redrain. 

liceo,  am  for  sale. 

prsebeo,  afford. 

debeo,  owe,  must. 

mereo,  merit. 

taceo  (i),  am  silent. 

doleo ,  feel  pain. 

noceo,  hurt. 

terreo,  terrify. 

exerceo,  exercise. 

pareo,  obey. 

valeo,  am  well. 

Perfect  -ui, — no  Supine. 

arceo,  keep  off. 

lateo,  lie  hid. 

sordeo,  am  filthy. 

areo,  am  dry. 

madeo,  am  wet. 

splendeo,  am  bright. 

candeo,  plow. 

niteo,  shine. 

studeo.  am  zealous. 

caneo,  am  gray. 

oleo,  smell. 
palleo,  am  pale. 

stupeo,  am  stunned , 

egeo,  want. 

timeo  ,fear. 

eixiineo,  stand  forth. 

pateo,  am  open. 

torpeo,  am  torpid. 

fioreo ,  flourish. 

rigeo,  am  stiff. 

tumeo,  am  swollen. 

horrao,  shudder. 

rubeo,  am  red. 

vigeo,  am  vigorous. 

langueo,  languish. 

sileo,  am  silent 

vireo,  am  green. 

Without  Perf.  and  Supine. 

aveo,  desire. 

hebeo,  am  dull.  , 

polleo,  am  strong. 

calleo,  am  skilled  in. 

immineo,  threaten. 

promineo,  stand  forth . 

fiaveo,  am  yellow. 

liveo,  am  livid. 

scateo,  gush  forth. 

fceteo,  smell  ill. 

moereo,  mourn. 

squaleo,  am  dirty. 

The  following  are  irregular  : 

doceo,  docui, 

doctum, 

to  teach. 

misceo1,  miscui, 

mixtum. 

to  mix. 

Borbeo,  sorbui, 

-sorptum, 

to  sip  (ab-). 

teneo  (i),  tenui  (i),  -tentum, 

to  hold  (con-). 

torreo,  torrui, 

tostum, 

to  roast. 

censeo2,  censui, 

censum. 

to  estimate. 

deleo,  delevi, 

deletum. 

to  destroy. 

fieo,  flevi. 

fletum, 

to  weep. 

neo,  nevi, 

netum, 

to  spin. 

■pleo,  pled, 

-pletum, 

to  fill  (re-,  etc.). 

* 

THE  VERB. 

aboleo, 

abolevi, 

abolltum. 

to  abolish. 

adoleo, 

adolevi, 

adultnm, 

to  grow  up. 

exoleo, 

exolevi, 

exoletum, 

to  fade. 

obsoleo, 

obsolevi, 

obsoletum, 

to  grow  obsolete. 

caveo, 

cavi. 

cautnm, 

to  beware  of. 

faveo. 

favi, 

fautum. 

to  favor. 

foveo. 

fovi, 

fotum, 

to  cherish. 

moveo, 

movi, 

mo  turn, 

to  move. 

voveo, 

vovi, 

votum, 

to  vow. 

cieo3, 

civi, 

citum, 

to  stir  up. 

paveo, 

pavi, 

to  dread. 

ferveo, 

fervi,  -bui. 

to  glow,  boil 

» 

conniveo, 

(connivi). 

- - 

to  connive. 

prandeo4, 

prandi, 

pransum, 

to  breakfast . 

sedeo  (I); 

sedi, 

eessum. 

to  sit. 

video. 

vidi. 

visum. 

to  see. 

mordeo, 

momordi, 

morsum, 

to  bite.  ■> 

1  2 

pendeo, 

spondeo, 

pependi, 

Bpopondi, 

pensum, 

gponsum, 

to  hang,  j 
to  engage,  j 

f 

tondeo, 

totondi, 

tonsum, 

to  shear.  J 

I  8  S 

ardeo, 

arsi, 

arsum. 

to  burn. 

lisereo, 

hassi, 

liaesum. 

to  cleave,  stick. 

j  ubeo, 

jussi. 

jussum, 

to  bid. 

maneo. 

mansi, 

mansum, 

to  remain. 

mulceo. 

inulsi. 

mulsum, 

to  stroke. 

mnlgeo. 

mnlsi. 

mulsum, 

to  milk. 

rideo, 

risi. 

risum, 

to  laugh. 

suadeo, 

suasi, 

Buasum, 

to  advise. 

tergeof, 

tersi, 

tersum. 

to  wipe. 

augeo. 

auxi, 

auctum. 

to  increase. 

torqueo, 

torsi, 

tortum, 

to  twist,  torture. 

indulgeo, 

indulsi, 

indultum, 

to  indulge. 

algeo. 

alsi. 

to  shiver  with  cold. 

fulgeo, 

fulsi. 

to  flash,  shine. 

turgeo, 

tursi, 

to  swell. 

urgeo, 

ursi. 

to  press,  urge. 

frigeo. 

(frixi). 

— — - 

to  be  cold. 

luceo 

luxi. 

to  shine. 

lugeo, 

luxi, 

to  mourn. 

strideof , 

stridi. 

to  hiss,  creak. 

*  Also  tergo  and  striclo ,  of  the  third  conjugation. — JSup.,  also  mistum. — 2  Recenseo 
review,  has  recensum  and  recensitum. — 3  Also  do,  cire ,  civi,  citum ,  of  the  fourth 
conjugation;  hence  accitus,  summoned;  and  excitus ,  called  out;  but  excitus ,  in  tho 
sense  of  “  excited.” — 4  The  Partic.  pransus  has  an  active  signification,  “  one  who  haa 
breakfasted.” 


THE  VERB 


57 


§  65. - THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

1.  Verts  in  io,  uo,  and  vo. 


capio  (T), 

cepi, 

captum  (e). 

to  take. 

facio1, 

feci. 

factum, 

to  do,  make. 

jacio  (i), 

jeci. 

j  actum  (e), 

to  throw. 

— lido. 

— lexi, 

-lectum, 

(ad,  per) ;  -  but 

elicio, 

elicui, 

elicitum. 

to  draw  out. 

— spicio, 

— spexi, 

-spectum, 

(ad,  in,  etc.) 

fbdio. 

f<3di, 

fossum, 

to  dig. 

fugio, 

fdgi, 

fugitum. 

to  flee. 

cupio. 

cupivi. 

cupitum, 

to  desire. 

rapio  (i). 

rapui  (i), 

raptum  (e). 

to  snatch. 

pariof. 

peperi, 

partum, 

to  bring  forth. 

quatio, 

quassum. 

to  shake. 

— cutio, 

-cussi, 

-cussum, 

(ex,  in,  etc.) 

sapio  (i). 

-ui  or  ivi. 

to  be  wise. 

acuo, 

acui, 

acutum. 

to  sharpen. 

argno,2 

argui. 

argutum, 

to  convict  of. 

ex  uo, 

exui. 

exutum, 

to  strip  off. 

induo, 

indui. 

indutum. 

to  put  on. 

imbuo, 

imbui, 

imbutum, 

to  imbue. 

minuo, 

minui, 

minutum, 

to  lessen. 

polluo. 

pollui, 

pollutum, 

to  defile. 

luof. 

lui, 

- lutum , 

to  atone  for. 

ruof, 

rui, 

- rutum , 

to  rush. 

spuo, 

spui, 

sputum, 

to  spit  (con). 

statuo  (i), 

statui  (i), 

statutum  (i). 

to  establish. 

suo, 

sui, 

sutum, 

to  sew  (con). 

tribuo, 

tribui. 

tributum, 

to  give,  allot  to. 

solvo. 

solvi. 

solutum. 

to  loosen. 

volvo, 

volvi, 

volutum, 

to  roll. 

struo, 

struxi, 

structum, 

to  build,  pile. 

vivo, 

vixi. 

victum, 

to  live. 

fluo. 

fluxi. 

to  flow. 

congruo, 

congrui. 

to  agree. 

ingruo, 

ingrui. 

to  rush  into. 

metuo, 

metui. 

to  fear. 

-nuoz, 

-nui, 

(ad,  re,  in). 

pluo, 

plui, 

to  rain. 

sternuo. 

sternui. 

to  sneeze. 

2. 

Verbs  in  do  and  to. 

a  V 

claudo  (n), 

clausi  (u), 

clausum  (u). 

to  shut  (in,  ex). 

divido, 

divisi, 

divisum, 

to  divide. 

laedo  (i), 

laesi  (i). 

laesum  (I), 

to  hurt. 

ltido, 

lusi, 

lusum. 

to  play. 

plaudo,1 

plausi. 

plausum. 

to  clap  hands. 

rado, 

rasi, 

rasum, 

to  shave,  scrape. 

58 


THE  VERB 


rodo, 

rosi, 

rosum, 

to  gnaw  (con). 

trudo, 

trusi, 

trusum, 

to  p  ush ,  thr  ust. 

vado, 

-vast, 

-vasum, 

to  go  (in,  e,  per). 

cado  (i),2 

cecidi. 

casum, 

to  fall. 

• 

02  O 

csedo  (i), 

cecldi, 

csesum  (I), 

to  cut. 

pendo, 

pependi. 

pensum, 

to  weigh. 

£  s 

y  O 

P-  © 

a  * 

tendo3, 

tetendi. 

tens-  or  tent-. 

to  stretch. 

tundo4, 

tutudi, 

tunsum, 

to  beat. 

credo, 

credidi, 

creditum, 

to  believe. 

vendo, 

vendidi, 

venditnm, 

to  sell. 

-cendo, 

-cendi, 

-censum, 

(in,  ad,  sub). 

cildo. 

cudi, 

-< casum , 

to  stamp  (ex). 

edo, 

edi. 

esum, 

to  eat  ( also  comestue). 

mando, 

mandi, 

mansum, 

to  chew. 

scando  (e), 

scandi  (e), 

scansum  (e), 

to  climb  (con,  de). 

defendo. 

defendi. 

defensum. 

to  defend. 

offendo, 

oftendi, 

offensum, 

to  offend. 

ostendo, 

ostendi, 

ostensum, 

to  show. 

prehendo, 

prebendi. 

prebensum. 

to  seize. 

strido5, 

stridi. 

to  grate. 

fundo. 

fudi. 

fusum. 

to  pour. 

cedo, 

cessi, 

cessum, 

to  yield. 

findo, 

fidi, 

fissum. 

to  split. 

scindo, 

scidi, 

scissum. 

to  cut. 

frendo. 

(frendui), 

fres(s)um, 

to  gnash. 

meto, 

messui, 

messnm, 

to  reap. 

mitto, 

misi. 

missum. 

to  send. 

pando6. 

pandi, 

passum, 

to  spread. 

peto, 

petivi, 

petitum, 

to  ash,  attack. 

rudo, 

rudivi, 

to  bray. 

sido7. 

sedi, 

sessum. 

to  sit  down. 

sisto8. 

stiti  (obs.), 

statum, 

to  stop  (trans.) 

sisto, 

Bteti, 

etatum, 

to  stop  (intr.) 

sterto, 

stertui, 

to  snore. 

verto9, 

verti. 

versum, 

to  turn. 

3. 

Verbs  in  bo  and  po. 

glubo, 

(glupsi), 

-gluptum, 

to  peel. 

nubo, 

nupsi. 

nuptum, 

to  marry. 

scribo, 

scripsi, 

scriptum, 

to  write. 

carpo  (e), 

carpsi  (e). 

carptum  (e), 

to  pluck  (ex 

de). 

repo, 

repsi, 

reptnm, 

to  creep. 

scalpo. 

scalpsi. 

scalptum, 

to  carve. 

sculpo, 

sculpsi, 

scnlptum, 

to  chisel. 

Berpo, 

serpsi, 

serptum, 

to  creep. 

rumpo, 

rupi, 

ruptum, 

to  b'  eak,  tea/r. 

bibo, 

blbi, 

bibit  am, 

to  drink  (e-). 

- cumbo , 

- cubui , 

-cubit  wn, 

(de,  in,  sub). 

THE  VERB 


strepo, 

lambo, 

Ecabo, 

strepui,  - - 

Iambi,  — - 

scabi,  - - 

4.  Verbs  in  co,  cto,  go,  and  quo. 

to  make  a  noise, 
to  lick, 
to  scratch. 

cingo. 

cinsi. 

cinctum, 

to  gird. 

-fllgo1, 

-flixi, 

-flictum. 

(ad,  in,  con). 

jungo, 

junxi. 

junctum. 

to  join. 

lingo, 

linxi, 

linctum, 

to  lick  up. 

mungo, 

-munxi. 

-munctum, 

to  No  w  the  nose  (©*), 

plango, 

planxi, 

planctum. 

to  bewail. 

rego  (i), 

rexi. 

rectum, 

to  rule. 

pergo. 

perrexi. 

perrectum. 

to  go  on. 

surgo, 

surrexi, 

surrectum. 

to  rise. 

sugo. 

suxi. 

suctum. 

to  suck. 

tego, 

texi. 

tectum, 

to  cover. 

tingo, 

tinxi. 

tinctum. 

to  dip,  dye. 

-stinguo, 

-stinxi, 

-stinctum, 

(ex,  re,  dig). 

lingo, 

nnxi. 

unctum, 

to  anoint. 

traho, 

traxi. 

tractum, 

to  draw. 

velio2, 

vexi. 

vectum, 

to  carry. 

dico. 

dixi. 

dictum, 

to  say. 

duco, 

duxi, 

ductum. 

to  lead. 

coquo. 

coxi, 

coctum. 

to  cook. 

fingo, 

finxi. 

lictum. 

to  feign. 

pingo, 

pinxi, 

pictum, 

to  paint. 

stringo, 

strinxi, 

strictum, 

to  bind  tight. 

figo, 

fixi. 

fixum, 

to  fix. 

flecto, 

flexi. 

flexum, 

to  bend. 

necto. 

nexui, 

ncxum, 

to  bind. 

pecto. 

pexi, 

pexum. 

to  comb. 

plecto3, 

plecto, 

ango, 

ningit, 

(plexi), 

anxi, 

ninxit, 

(plexum), 

to  twist, 
to  punish, 
to  torment, 
it  snows. 

parco4, 

peperci, 

parsum, 

to  spare. 

pnngo5, 

pupugi, 

punctum. 

to  sting. 

tango6, 

tetigi. 

tactum, 

to  touch 

pango7, 

pepigi, 

pactum. 

to  bargain. 

\  pango, 

panxi. 

panctum, 

to  drive  in. 

( -pingo, 

-pegi, 

-pactum., 

(con,  in). 

ago8, 

egi, 

actum, 

to  drive,  do. 

cogo, 

dego, 

coegi, 

degi. 

coactum, 

to  compel, 
to  spend  one's  time. 

frango  (i). 

fregi, 

fractum, 

to  break. 

lego9, 

legi, 

lectum, 

to  gather,  read. 

ico10. 

ici. 

ictum, 

to  strike. 

vinco, 

vici. 

victum, 

to  conquer. 

linquo, 

-liqui, 

-lictum, 

to  leave  (de,  re). 

00 


THE  VEKB* 


merge. 

mersi. 

mersnm, 

to  dip. 

spargo  (e), 

sparsi  (e), 

sparsum  (e), 

to  scatter  (ad,  in). 

tergo, 

vergo, 

tersi,  tersum, 

5.  Verbs  in  lo,  mo,  no,  and  bo. 

to  wipe, 
to  incline. 

como. 

compsi. 

comptum. 

to  adorn. 

demo, 

dempsi. 

demptum. 

to  take  away 

promo. 

prompsi, 

promptum, 

to  bring  out. 

sumo. 

sumpsi, 

sumptum. 

to  take. 

temno, 

-tempsi, 

-temptum, 

to  despise  (con). 

alo, 

(  -cello, 

alui, 

-cellui, 

al(!  )tum. 

to  nourish. 

(ex,  ante) ;  -  but 

( percello. 

perculi, 

perculsum. 

to  strike  down. 

colo, 

colui, 

cultum, 

to  till,  worship. 

consulo. 

consului, 

consultum, 

to  consult. 

molo. 

molui, 

molitum, 

to  grind. 

occulo. 

occului, 

occnltum, 

to  conceal. 

fremo, 

fremui, 

fremitum, 

to  growl,  rage. 

gemo, 

tremo, 

gemui, 

tremui, 

gemitum, 

to  groan, 
to  tremble. 

vomo, 

vomui, 

vomitum, 

to  vomit. 

gigno. 

genui. 

genitum, 

to  bring  forth. 

pono. 

posui, 

positum, 

to  place. 

cano1. 

cecini. 

cantum, 

to  sing. 

curro2, 

fallo3, 

cucurri, 

fefelli. 

cursum, 

to  run. 
to  deceive. 

pello4. 

pepuli. 

pulsum, 

to  drive. 

cerno, 

cerno. 

crevi, 

-cretum, 

to  decree  (de). 
to  see. 

lino. 

levi  or  livi. 

litum, 

to  anoint  (ob). 

sino. 

sivi, 

situm, 

to  allow  (de). 

sperno, 

sprevi, 

spretum, 

to  despise. 

sterno5. 

stravi. 

stratum, 

to  spread  out  (pro). 

sero, 

sevi, 

satum  (l). 

to  sow  (con,  in). 

sero6. 

serui , 

- sertum , 

to  join  (con,  in,  de) 

tero, 

furo7 

trivi. 

tritum. 

to  rub  (con). 
to  rage. 

emo  (i), 

emi. 

emptum, 

to  buy  (ex,  per). 

premo  (1), 

pressi, 

pressum, 

to  press. 

gero, 

gessi. 

gestum, 

to  carry. 

uro, 

ussi, 

nstum, 

to  burn  (con). 

verro, 

verri. 

versum, 

to  sweep. 

qusero  (1), 

qusesivi  (i), 

qmesltum  (i), 

to  seek  (ex,  in). 

tollo, 

sustuli, 

sublatum, 

to  lift  up,  kill. 

vello8, 

psallo, 

velli, 

psalli, 

vulsum. 

to  pluck  out. 
to  play  on  the  lyre. 

/ 


THE  VEBB.  61 


6.  Verbs  in  so,  sco,  and  xo. 

\ 

texo. 

texui. 

textum, 

to  weave. 

depso, 

depsui, 

depstum, 

to  knead. 

pinso1. 

pinsui. 

pinsum. 

to  pound. 

viso. 

visi, 

visum, 

to  visit  (in,  re). 

ji  arcesso  or 

arcessivi, 

arcessitum, 

|  to  ser.d  far. 

|  accerso2, 

accersivi, 

accersltum, 

capesso, 

capessivi, 

capessitum, 

to  seize. 

facesso, 

facessi, 

facessitum, 

to  cause. 

incesso, 

incessivi, 

to  attack. 

lacesso, 

lacessivi, 

lacessitum, 

to  provoke. 

cresco, 

crevi, 

cretum, 

to  grow. 

nosco3. 

novi, 

notum, 

to  become  acquainted. 

pasco. 

pavi. 

pastum, 

to  feed. 

quiesco, 

qnievi, 

quietum, 

to  rest. 

scisco, 

scivi, 

scitum. 

to  decree. 

suesco, 

suevi. 

suetum, 

to  be  accustomed. 

disco4. 

didici, 

to  learn. 

posco, 

poposci, 

to  demand. 

compesco. 

compescui. 

to  restrain. 

glisco. 

to  blaze  up. 

liisco, 

fatisco, 

— t)  Part.  fut. 

act.,  pariturus , 

luiturus,  and  ruiturvs.- 

to  gape, 
to  crack  open. 

-1)  The  compounds  with 

prepositions  have  -ficio,  - ficere ,  -feci ,  -fectum;  Imper.,  fee ;  and  in  the  passive,  feior, 
fei ,  fectus  sum.  But  those  compounded  of  cate-,  tepe-,  frige-,  are-,  made-,  pate-, 
lake-,  assue-,  and  satis-,  follow  throughout  in  the  active,  facio  ;  and  in  the  passive,  fio 
(§70). — *)  Arguiturus  is  found  in  Sallust.  “Convicted  of”  is  usually  expressed  by 
convictus  from  convincere. — 3)  Of  abnuo ,  abnuiturus  is  found. 

2. — >)  Thus  applaudo ;  but  explodo  has  explosi ,  explosum. — 3)  Of  the  compounds  of 
cado ,  only  incido,  occido,  and  recido,  have  the  Supine,  as  incasum ,  occasum ,  recasum. — 
*)  Extendo  and  protendo  have  in  the  Supine  both  -sum  and  -turn  •  the  rest  have  only 
-turn. — 4)  The  compounds  of  tundo  have  -tudi,  -tusum. — 6)  Also  strideo,  ere. — ®)  Expando 
has  expansum  and  expassum  •  dispando,  only  dispansum. — •’)  The  compounds  of  si  do, 
as  assulo ,  consido,  insido,  reside,  subsido ,  have  sedi  (rarely  sidi),  sessum. — 8)  Its  com¬ 
pounds  are  all  intransitive  and  have  -stiti,  -stitum,  as  con-,  ad-,  de-,  in-,  ex-,  ob-,  per-, 
re-,  sub-sisto.—9)  Deverto,  turn  in;  preeverto,  anticipate;  and  reverto ,  turn  back,  are  in 
the  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future,  frequently  used  as  deponents ;  in  the  past  tenses, 
the  active  form  is  more  common.-. 

4. — *)  Profigo,  overthrow,  is  of  the  first  conjugation  and  has  -avi,  -atum. — 2)  Vehor, 
vehi ,  vectus  sum,  be  carried,  e.  g.,  curru ,  navi,  equo.  *  Invehor  means  “to  inveigh 
against.” — 3)  Plecto ,  twist  (the  primitive  of  amplector  and  complecto?'),  scarcely  ever 
occurs.  Plecto,  punish,  is  commonly  used  as  a  passive  ( plector ),  and  has  neither 
Perfect  nor  Supine. — 4)  The  forms  parsi ,  parcitum ,  are  less  common. — 6)  The  com¬ 
pounds  have  -punxi,  -punctum,  as  compungo ,  dispungo,  interpuvgo. — «)  The  compounds 
of  tango  have  no  reduplication,  as  attingo,  attigi ,  attadum. — 7)  Pango,  in  the  sense  of 
“to  bargain,”  is  supplied  in  the  Present  by  paciscor. — 8)  Thus  the  compounds  abigo, 
adigo,  exigo,  redigo,  subigo ,  and  transigo.  Circvmago  and  perago  retain  the  stem-vowel 
a.  Prodigo,  “squander,”  has  prodegi  without  Supine.  Arnbigo ,  “doubt,”  and  satago, 
“be  busy,”  want  both  the  Perfect  and  Supine. — 9)  Thus  eligo,  colligo ,  deligo.  Perlego , 
prodtgo,  and  relego ,  retain  the  stem-vowel  e.  Piligo,  love;  intelligo ,  understand  ;  and 


G  2 


THE  VERB. 


negligo,  neglect,  have  - exi ,  -ectum. — 10)  loo  occurs  in  the  past  forms  only  :  ici,  iceramy 
icisse,  ictus  esse.  Of  the  Present,  the  third  person  sing,  only  is  found,  the  rest  being 
supplied  by  ferio,  -ire. 

5.  — ')  Concino  has  concinui  without  Supine.  The  other  compounds,  accino ,  prcecino , 

succino ,  etc.,  very  rarely  occur  and  generally  want  both  the  Perf.  and  Sup.  -  . — The 
compounds  sometimes  retain,  but  oftener  reject  the  reduplication. — 3)  Refello ,  refute, 
has  refelli  without  Supine. — 4)  The  compounds  drop  the  reduplication,  as  repello , 
repuli ,  repulsum. — »)  Thus  consterno,  bestrew;  but  consterno ,  “alarm,”  is  of  the  1st 
conj.  and  has  consternavi ,  consternatum. — 6)  Desero,  resero ,  and  dissero ,  have  always 
- serui ,  -sertum. — 7)  in  the  past  tenses,  is  supplied  by  the  verb  insanio. — 8)  Gon- 

vello,  revello ,  and  divello ,  have  only  -velli]  but  avello  and  evello  have  both  -velli  and 
-vulsi. 

6.  — ’)  Also,  pinsi ,  pinsitum  and  pistum. — 2)  The  Infin.  pass,  is  sometimes  accersiri 
instead  of  accersi  ;  thus'  lacessiri  for  lacessi. — 3)  Thus  ignosco ,  pardon.  But  agnosco } 
cognosco ,  and  recognosco ,  have  -ovi,  -itum.  Dignosco  and  internosco  have  no  Supine.— 

Disciturus  is  found  in  Appuleius. 

INCEPTIVES. 

§  66. — Inceptive  or  inchoative  verbs  are  such  as  denote  a  becoming, 
or  beginning  of  the  act  or  condition  expressed  by  the  primitive.  They 
end  in  sco  and  follow  the  third  conjugation. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  inceptives, — verbal  and  nominal. —  Verbal-inceptives 
are  derived  from  verbs,  by  adding  the  syllable  -co  to  the  2d  sing,  of  the  Indie. 
Pres.  act. ;  they  generally  take  the  Perf.  and  Sup.  of  their  primitives. — 
Nominal-inceptives  are  derived  from  nouns,  and  are,  for  the  most  part,  without 


Perfect  and  Supine. 

adolesco,  adolevi. 

Verbal-inceptives. 

adultum, 

to  grow  up. 

coalesco, 

coalui, 

coalltum. 

to  grow  together. 

concupisco, 

concupivi. 

concupitum, 

to  desire  strongly. 

convalesco, 

convalui. 

convalitum. 

to  recover  health. 

exardesco, 

exarsi, 

exarsum, 

to  become  inflamed. 

inveterasco, 

inveteravi, 

inveteratum, 

to  grow  old. 

obdormisco, 

obdormivi. 

obdormitum, 

to  fall  asleep. 

obsolesco, 

obsolevi. 

obsoletum, 

to  become  obsolete. 

revivisco. 

revixi, 

revictum. 

to  recover  life. 

albesco, 

ui, 

to  grow  ichite. 

ingemisco, 

ui, 

to  groan. 

aresco, 

ui, 

to  grow  dry. 

intumesco, 

ui, 

to  swell  up. 

canesco, 

ui, 

to  become  gray. 

irraucescov 

si, 

to  become  hoarsQ. 

conticesco, 

ui, 

to  become  still. 

languesco, 

ui, 

to  become  weak. 

contremisco, 

ub 

to  tremble. 

liquesco, 

cui. 

to  melt  away. 

defervesco, 

bui, 

to  cool  down. 

madesco,  * 

ui, 

to  become  wet. 

delitesco, 

ui. 

to  lie  hid. 

marcesco, 

ui, 

to  pine  away. 

effervesco, 

bui, 

to  boil  up. 

putresco, 

ui, 

to  moulder. 

erubesco, 

ui, 

to  blush. 

refrigesco, 

xi, 

to  grow  cold. 

excandcsco, 

ui, 

to  take  fire. 

resipisco, 

ui, 

to  become  reasonable . 

exhorresco, 

ui, 

to  shudder. 

senesco  (con-) 

ui, 

to  grow  old. 

expallesco, 

ui, 

to  turn  pale: 

tepesco, 

ui, 

to  grow  tepid. 

extimeseo, 

ui, 

to  fear  greatly. 

obstupesco, 

ui, 

to  become  amazed. 

illucesco, 

xi, 

to  grow  light. 

perhorresco, 

ui, 

to  shudder. 

incalesco, 

ui, 

to  grow  lift. 

viresco  (re-), 

ui, 

to  become  green. 

THE  VERB. 


63 


Nominal-Incentives. 


ditesco  (dives),  to  become  rich. 
dulcesco  (dulcis),  to  become  sweet. 
ignesco  (ignis),  to  take  fire. 
ingravesco  (gravis),  to  increase. 

The  following  have 

consanesco  (sanus),  to  be  healed. 
evanesco  (vanus),  to  vanish. 
innotesco  (notus),  to  become  known. 
maturesco  (maturus),  to  grow  ripe. 


mitesco  (mitis),  to  become  mild. 
mollesco  (mollis),  to  grow  soft. 
pinguesco  (pinguis),  to  grow  fat. 
repuerasco  (puer),  to  become  childish. 

-ui  in  the  Perfect. 

ohduresco  (durns),  to  grow  hard. 
obmutesco  (mutus),  to  become  dumb, 
obsurdesco  (surd us),  to  become  deaf. 
percrebesco  (creber),  to  spread  (intr.). 


§  6Y. - FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

Verbs  of  tbe  fourth  conjugation  have  ivi,  itwn  ;  as  audio ,  audivi , 
auditum .  Thus  : 


condio,  season. 

impedio,  hinder. 

punio,  punish. 

custodio,  watch. 

irretio,  ensnare. 

redlmio,  croivn. 

deflnio,  define. 

lenio,  calm. 

scio,  know. 

dormio,  sleep. 

mollio,  soften. 

servio,  serve. 

erudio,  instruct. 

mngio,  bellow. 

sitio,  thirst. 

esurio,  be  hungry. 

munio,  fortify. 

sopio,  lull  asleep. 

expedio,  extricate. 

nutrio,  nourish. 

stabllio,  establish. 

Jinio,  finish. 

obedio,  obey. 

tinnio,  tinkle. 

gestio,  exult. 

polio,  polish. 

vestio,  clothe. 

The  following  are  irregular : 

fnlcio, 

falsi. 

fultum, 

to  prop. 

haurio,1 

hausi, 

liaustum. 

to  draw. 

sancio, 

sanxi, 

sanc(I)tum, 

to  sanction. 

sarcio. 

sarsi. 

sartum. 

to  patch. 

Bentio, 

sensi. 

sensum, 

to  feel. 

eepio. 

sepsi, 

septum, 

to  hedge  in. 

vincio. 

vinxi. 

vinctum, 

to  bind. 

amicio, 

(-xi,  -cui), 

amictum, 

to  clothe. 

aperio, 

aperui. 

apertum, 

to  open. 

operio. 

operui, 

opertum, 

to  cover. 

comperio, 

comperi, 

compertum, 

to  experience. 

reperio, 

reperi. 

repertum, 

to  find. 

salio,2 

salui, 

to  spring. 

sepelio. 

sepelivi. 

sepultum, 

to  bury. 

venio, 

veni. 

ventum, 

to  come. 

J)  Partic.  Fut.  hausurus  and  hausturus. — 2)  Thus  desilio.  exilio ,  insilio ,  prosilio.  The 
Perfect-form  -silui  is  far  better  than  the  form  -triin.  6 adoy  in  the  sense  of  •'  u;  fait,” 
has  salitum  without  a  Perfect. 


THE  VERB. 


6± 


§  68. — Deponent  Yerbs. 

1.  Deponents  of  tlie  first  conjugation. 


abominor,  abhor. 
adulorf,  flatter. 
adversor,  oppose. 
cemulor,  rival. 
altercor,  quarrel. 
aquor,  fetch  water. 
arbitrorf,  think. 
argumentor,  prove. 
aspernor,  despise. 
assentor,  agree,  flatter. 
aucupor,  catch  birds. 
anguror,  foretell. 
auspicor,  forebode. 
auxilior,  help. 
aversor,  dislike. 
calumnior,  slander. 
cavillor,  ridicule. 
comitor,  accompany. 
concionor,  harangue. 
eonor,  attempt. 
consilior,  advise. 
conspicor,  behold. 
contemplor,  view. 
convicior,  revile. 
criminorf,  accuse. 
cunctor,  delay. 
dedignor,  disdain. 
deprecor,  deprecate. 
despicor,  despise. 
dignorf,  think  worthy. 
dominor,  rule. 
epulor,  feast. 
exsecror,  curse. 
fabricor  (-0),  form. 
fabulor,  talk. 
famulor,  serve. 
ferior,  keep  holiday. 
lluctuor  (-0),  fluctuate. 
frumentor,  fetch  corn. 
frustror,  disappoint. 
ftlror,  steal. 
glorior,  boast. 


grassor,  to  rage. 
gratificor,  gratify. 
gratulor,  congratulate. 
heluor,  gormandize. 
liortor,  exhort. 
imaginor,  imagine. 
imitor,  imitate. 
imprecor,  imprecate. 
indignor,  be  indignant. 
infitior,  deny. 
insector,  pursue. 
insidior,  plot. 
interpreter,  expound. 
jaculor,  dart. 
jocor,  jest. 
laetor,  rejoice. 
lamentor,  lament. 
latrocinor,  rob. 
lenocinor,  cajole. 
lignor,  fetch  wood. 
lucror,  gain. 
luctor,  v)restle. 
machinor,  devise. 
medicor,  heal. 
meditor,  meditate. 
mercor,  purchase. 
minor  (con-),  threaten. 
miseror,  pity. 
moderor,  temper. 
morigeror,  comply. 
moror,  delay. 
mutuor,  borrow. 
negotior,  traffic. 
nidulor,  build  a  nest. 
nugor,  trifle. 
nundlnor,  trade,  buy. 
obtestor,  beseech. 
oderor,  smell  out. 
ominor,  forebode. 
oplnor,  think. 
opitulor,  bring  aid. 
otior,  be  at  leisure. 


pabulor,  forage. 
palor,  straggle. 
patroclnor,  patronize. 
percontor,  ask. 
peregrin  or,  go  abroad. 
periclitor,  attempt. 
piscor,  fish. 
populor  (-0),  lay  waste 
pried  or,  plunder. 
prsestolor,  wait  for . 
precor,  pray. 
proelior,  fight. 
ratiocinor,  reason. 
recordor,  remember. 
refragor,  oppose. 
remuneror,  reward. 
rixor,  quarrel. 
rusticor,  rusticate. 
sciscitor,  inquire. 
scitor,  ask,  inquire. 
scrutor  (per-),  search. 
sector,  follow. 
solor  (con-),  comfort. 
spatior,  ivalk  about. 
speculor,  spy  out. 
stipulor,  stipulate. 
stomachor,  be  indignant . 
suffragor,  assent  to. 
suspicor,  suspect. 
tergiversor,  shuffle. 
testificor,  attest. 
testor,  bear  witness. 
tricor,  play  tricks. 
tristor,  be  sad. 
tutor,  protect. 
vagor  (e-),  wander. 
vaticlnor,  foretell. 
veneror,  venerate. 
venor,  hunt. 
verecundor,  be  shy. 
versor,  dwell,  be  in. 
vociferor,  vociferate. 


t  Adulor,  arbitror,  criminor,  and  especially  dignor,  are  used  also  as  pastiivsa. 


fateor  (i), 
Jlceor, 
medeor1 , 


2.  Deponents  of  the  second  conjugation. 

fassus  (e)  sum.  to  acknowledge. 

licitus  sum,  to  bid  on  goods . 

-  to  heal. 


THE  VERB. 


65 


inereor 

meritus  sum, 

to  deserve.- 

misereor. 

miser(i)tus  sum, 

to  pity. 

polliceor, 

pollicitus  sum, 

to  promise. 

reor. 

ratus  sum, 

to  think. 

tueor. 

tuitus  sum. 

to  protect. 

vereor. 

veritus  sum, 

to  fear. 

3.  Deponents  of  tbe  tliird  conjugation. 

adipiscor, 

adeptus  sum, 

to  obtain. 

amplector, 

amplexus  sum, 

to  embrace. 

comminiscor. 

commentus  sum, 

to  devise. 

expergiscor, 

experrectus  sum, 

to  become  awake. 

fruorf, 

fructus  or  fruitus  s., 

to  enjoy. 

fungor, 

functus  sum, 

to  perform. 

gradior  (e). 

gressus  sum. 

to  proceed. 

invehor, 

invectus  sum, 

to  inveigh  against. 

irascor,2 

to  grow  angry . 

labor, 

lapsus  sum, 

to  fall  (e,  re). 

lbquor, 

locutus  sum, 

to  speak  (ad,  con). 

moriorf. 

mortuus  sum, 

to  die. 

nanciscor. 

na(n)ctus  sum, 

to  obtain. 

nascorf, 

natus  sum, 

to  be  born. 

nltor. 

nisus  or  nixus  s., 

to  strive,  rely  upon. 

obliviscor. 

oblltus  sura, 

to  forget.- 

paciscor, 

pactus  sum. 

to  make  a  bargain. 

pascor,  • 

pastus  sum, 

to  feed  (intr.). 

patior  (e), 

passus  (e)  sum, 

to  suffer  (per). 

proficiscor, 

profectus  sum, 

to  start,  travel. 

quoror, 

questus  sum, 

to  complain. 

reminiscor,3 

to  remember. 

ringor, 

to  grin. 

sequor, 

secutus  sum, 

to  follow . 

ulciscor, 

ultus  sum, 

to  revenge. 

utor, 

usus  sum, 

to  use  (ab). 

vescor4, 

to  eat,  feed  on. 

4.  Deponents  of  tbe  fourth  conj  ugation. 

assentior. 

assensus  sum, 

to  assent. 

experior, 

expertus  sum, 

to  try,  experience. 

mentior, 

mentitus  sum, 

to  lie. 

metior, 

mensus  sum, 

to  measure. 

opperior. 

opper(i)tus  sum, 

to  wait  for. 

ordior. 

orsus  sum, 

to  begin. 

orior5, 

ortus  sum, 

to  rise  ;  P.  oriturus. 

Vruiturvs ,  moriturus ,  nasciturus. — ')  Perf.  supplied 

from  medicor. — 2)  Perf. 

plied  from  succenseo.  Iratus  sum,  means  simply  “  I  am  angry. ” — s)  Perf.  supplied  from 
rwordor,—*)  Perf,  supplied  from  edo. — #)  The  Present  Indie,  of  orior ,  oriri ,  follows  tha 

s 


66 


THE  VERB. 


third  conjugation,  as  trior,  oreris  (and  oriris ),  oritur ;  orimur ,  orimini ,  oriuntur.  In 
the  Imperfect  Subj.  we  find  both  orerer  and  orirer.  Thus  coorior  and  exorior  ;  bul 
adorior  is  regular,  and  follows  throughout  audior. 

Exercises  on  the  preceding  irregular  Perfects  and  Supines. 

Selected  chiefly  from  Kiihner.) 

1. 

Romani  multas  gentes  ac  nationes  armis  domuerunt. — Non  dedit  beneficium 
qui  invltus  profuit. — Nulla  pestis  liumano  generi  pluris  stetit  quam  ira. — Dux 
milites  vehementer  increpuit. — Augustus  carmina  Yirgilii  cremari  vetuit. — Non 
solum  fortuna,  sed  etiam  tua  industria  te  in  hoc  negotio  adjuvit. — Tota  urbs 
vocibus  civium  de  victoria  ex  liostibus  reportata  exultantium  percrebuit. — Nisi 
libidines  resecueris,  frustra  beate  vivere  studebis. — Hostes  obsides,  quos  Csesar 
imperaverat,  dederunt. — Agricolas  frumenta  desecta  in  horrea  congerunt. — Si 
fortuna  nos  adjuverit,  splendidam  ex  hoste  victoriam  reportabimus. — Dubitan- 
dum  non  est  quin  Hannibal  ceteris  imperatoribus  prudentia  multo  prcestiterit.  - 
Urbs  tota  clamore  militum  personuit. 

2. 

Deus  bonis  omnibus  mundum  implemt. — Cras  in  horto  prcinsuri  sumus. — 
Yelim  mihi  dicas  quis  te  Grammaticam  docuerit. — Gaudeo  quod  semper  mihi 
meisque  studiis  favisti. — Did  nequit  quot  pericula,  quot  miserias,  milites  in 
itinere  sustinuerint. — Cicero  omnes  artes  a  Minerva  edoctus  est. — Quo  magis 
indulseris  dolori,  eo  intolerabilior  erit. — Sicario  sicam  de  manibus  extorserunt. — 
Die  mihi  quare  fieveris. — Spopondistine  pro  amico?  Spopondi. — Dux  mitibus 
verbis  excitos  militum  animos  permulsit. — Tu  me  tot  ac  tantis  auxisti  beneficiis, 
quanta  nunquam  vel  sperare  ausus  sum. — Yirgilii  carmina  discipulorum  ani¬ 
mos  mirifice  permulserunt. — Multa  puer  sustinuit,  sudavit  et  alsit. — Quis  est  cui 
semper  arriserit  fortuna  ? — Quomodo  in  viro  latebit  scintilla  ingenii,  quae  iam 
in  puero  eluxit  f — Multi  si  tacuissent,  famam  sapientiae  obtinuissent. 

3. 

Xerxes,  cum  Graeciam  subacturus  esset,  ingentem  exercitum  coegit. — Milites  ne 
infantibus  quidem  pepercerunt. — Ubi  victoria  cimissa  est,  nihil  refert  quot  in 
proelio  coesi  aut  in  fuga  capti  sint. — Male  parta  male  dilabuntur. — Omnia  longe 
iateque  telis,  armis,  cadaveribus  constrata  erant. — Quare  consilium  meurn 
sprevisti  ? — Gives  belli  calamitatibus  confecti  pacem  expoposcerunt. — Cuique  nos¬ 
trum  amor  vitae  est  insitus. — Tria  bella  atrocissima  gesta  sunt  inter  Romanos  et 
Carthaginienses. — Alexander  tot  regum  et  populorum  victor,  tandem  irae  suc- 
cubuit. — Dediscet  animus  sero,  quod  didicerit  diu. — Yix  credideris  quantopere 
gar r ulus  iste  homo  me  garriendo  enecuerit. — Socratis  responso  sic  judices  exar- 
serunt,  ut  capitis  hominem  innocentissimum  condemnarent. — Explorator  ad 
castra  hostium  accessit  ibique  magnam  partem  diei  consumpsit. — Barbari  vallo 
et  fossa  hiberna  cinxerunt. 

4. 

Homines  artes  innumeras  docente  natura  repererunt. — Omnia  superiora 
damna  liac  una  victoria  sarta  sunt. — Regis  sepulchro  haec  verba  inscripta  sunt : 
Probe  vixit,  improbos  vinxit,  hostes  vicit. — Septum  undique  et  vestitum  vepri- 


THE  VERB. 


67 


bus  et  dumetis  indagavi  sepulchrum.~~ Rex  rempublicam  labefactatam  sua 
virtute  fulsit. — Quo  quis  affluentius  voluptates  undique  hauserit,  eo  gravius 
ardentiusque  sitiet. — Homines  urbes  moenibus  sepserunt. — Quis  est  qui  nunquam 
Dei  munificentiam  senserit  ? — Continuis  bellis  reipublicse  opes  exhausted  sunt. — 
Vide  quibus  prsesidiis  philosophise  septus  sim. — Bellum  gravissimum  Pompeii 
adventu  sublatum  ac  sepultum  est. — Deus  oculos  membranis  tenuissimis  vesti- 
vit  et  sepsit. — Sene  curiam  ingrediente  surrexerunt  omnes  capitaque  aperuerunt. 

5. 

Venio  meum  prsesidium  tibi  polliciturus. — Si  cunctam  terrain  intuitus  eris,  de 
providentia  divina  non  dubitabis. — Quicunque  culpas  suas  fassi  erant,  veniam 
impetrarunt. — Cicero  prseclare  de  republica  meritus  est. — Quis  dubitat  quin 
aliquando  moriturus  sit  ? — Cives,  cum  hostibus  pacti,  pace  fruiti  sunt. — Simu- 
latque  experrecti  sumus,  visa  in  somnio  contemnimus. — Die  mihi  quo  et  quando 
frater  tuus  profecturus  sit. — Plura  ad  te  scribam  cum  plus  otii  nactus  ero. — 
Senectutem  ut  adipiscantur,  omnes  optant:  eandem  accusant  adepti. — Avida 
est  periculi  virtus,  et  quo  tendat,  non  quid  passura  sit,  cogitat. — Non  adeo  ini- 
qua  fortuna  usi  sumus,  ut  dignitatis  nostrse  simus  obliti. — Dnm  urbem  oppugn  are 
adorimur,  hostes  a  tergo  nos  aggressi  sunt. 

6. 

Favemus  iis  qui  eadem  quibus  ipsi  perfuncti  sumus,  pericula  ingrediuntur. — 
Nihil  est  virtute  amabilius,  quam  cum  adepti  eritis,  Deo  bonisque  hominibua 
cari  eritis. — Socrates  paulo  ante  mortem  cum  amicis  de  immortalitate  animi 
colloeutus  esse  dicitur. — Caesar  militum  virtuti  confisus,  sine  mora  hostium  exer- 
citum  adortus  est. — Ridiculi  sunt  qui  quod  ipsi  experti  non  sunt,  id  docent 
ceteros. — Coorta  saeva  tempestate,  omnes  nautas  ingens  pavor  occupavit. — 
Unde  exorsa  est,  ibidem  terminetur  oratio. — Ex  decemvirorum  injustitia  subito 
exorta  est  maxima  perturbatio. — Solem  oriturum  cum  maxima  voluptate  spec- 
tamus. — Multi  multas  variasque  terras  emensi,  multas  same  res  prodigiosas 
ementiti  sunt. — Huie  sententise  dubito  num  multi  assensuri  sint. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  69. — Irregular  verbs  are  such  as  in  some  of  their  tenses  or  persons 
deviate  from  the  ordinary  form  of  regular  verbs.  They  are,  besides  the 
verb  sum , 


x 


Possum  (potis  sum),  potui,  posse,  to  be  able  {can). 
Volo,  volui,  velle,  to  ivish ,  to  be  willing. 

Nolo  (=  non  volo),  nolui,  nolle,  to  be  unwilling. 
Malo  (=magis  volo),  mului,  rnalle,  to  wish  rather. 
Edo,  edi,  esum,  edere,  to  eat. 

Eo,  ivi,  itum,  ire,  to  go. 

Fero,  tuli,  latum,  ferre,  to  carry ,  bring. 

Fio,  factus  sum,  fieri,  to  be  made,  become ,  happen. 


63 


THE  VERB 


§  to. — IRREGULAR 

VERBS. 

PlW. 

Possum 

INDICATIVE. 

Volo 

Nolo 

Malo 

potes 

vis 

lion  vis 

mavis 

potest 

vult 

non  vult  - 

niavult 

possumus 

volumus 

noluinus 

malum  us 

potestis 

vultis 

non  vultis 

mavultis 

possnnt 

volunt 

nolunt 

malunt 

Imp. 

poteram 

volebam 

nolebam 

malebam 

Eut. 

potero 

vo lam,  es 

nolam,  es 

malam,  es 

Prf. 

potui 

volui 

liolui 

malui 

Plp. 

potueram 

volueram 

nolueram 

malueram 

E.-pf.  potnero 

voluero 

noluero 

maluero 

Prs. 

possim 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

v  el  ini 

nolim 

malim 

possis 

velis 

ndlis 

hialis 

possit 

velit 

nolit 

malit 

possim  us 

vellmus 

nollmus 

malim  us 

possitis 

velitis 

nolitis 

malitis 

possint 

velint 

nolint 

malint 

Imp. 

possem 

veil  cm 

nollem 

maliem 

Pp.f. 

potuerim 

voluerim 

lioluerim 

maluerim 

Plp. 

potuissem 

voluissem 

noluissem 

maluissem 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Prs. 

posse 

IMPERATIVE. 

INFINITIVE. 

velle 

noli,  Ito 
nolite,  unto 

nolle 

mrdle 

Prf. 

potuisse 

voluisse 

noluisse 

inaluisse 

Ptc.  potens  (adj.) 
Gkb.  - 


volens 
volendi,  do 

Edo,  edi,  esum,  edere,  to  eat. 


nolens 

nolendi 


The  verb  edo  lias,  besides  its  own  regular  forms,  several  others  resembling  tliosa 
forms  of  the  verb  sum,  which  begin  with  es ;  as, 

INFINITIVE. 

edere  or  esse. 


INDICATIVE. 

edo 

edis  or  es 
edit  or  est 
edimus 
editis  or  estis 
edunt 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

ederem  or  essem 
ederes  or  esses 
ederet  or  essent 
ederemus  or  essemus 
ederetis  or  essetis 
ederent  or  essent 


IMPERATIVE. 

ede  or  es 
edito  or  esto 
edito  or  esto 
edite  or  esto 
editote  or  estote 
edunto 


THE  VERB 


39 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pes. 

Eo 

Fero 

Peror 

Fio 

is 

fers 

ferris 

fis 

it 

fert 

fertur 

fit 

imus 

ferimus 

ferlmur 

firnus 

itis 

fertis 

l'eritnini 

fitis 

eunt 

ferunt 

feruntur 

fiunt 

Imp. 

ibam 

ferebam 

ferebar 

fiebam 

Put. 

ibo 

feram,  es 

ferar,  eris 

fiam,  es 

Prf. 

ivi 

tuli 

latus  sum 

factus  sum 

Plp. 

iveram 

tuleram 

latus  cram 

factus  eram 

F.-pf. 

ivero 

tulero 

latus  ero 

factus  ero 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pbs. 

earn 

feram 

ferar 

fiam 

eas 

feras 

feraris 

fias 

eat 

ferat 

feratur 

fiat 

earn  us 

feramus 

feramur 

fiamus 

eatis 

feratis 

feramini 

fiatis 

eant 

ferant 

ferantur 

fiant 

Imp. 

ircm 

ferrem 

ferrer 

ficrem 

Put. 

iturus  sira 

laturus  sim 

Prf. 

iverirn 

tulerim 

latus  sim 

fiictus  sim 

Plp. 

ivissem 

tulissem 

latus  essem 

factus  essem 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. 

i,  ito 

fer,  ferto 

ferre,  fertor 

fi 

ito 

ferto 

fcrtor 

Plur. 

ite,  itote 

ferte,  fertote 

ferimini 

fite 

eunto 

ferunto 

feruntor 

— 

INFINITIVE. 

Pbs. 

ire 

ferre 

ferri 

fieri 

Prf. 

ivisse 

tulisse 

latus  esse 

factus  esse 

Fut. 

iturus  esse 

laturus  esse 

latum  iri 

factum  iri 

PARTICIPLES. 

pRS,. 

iens,  euntis 

ferens 

Prf.  latus 

Prf.  factus 

Put. 

iturus 

laturus 

—  fer  end  us 

—  faciendus 

Ger.  and  Sup.  :  eundi 

,  etc. ;  ferendi, 

etc. ; — 5 turn,  latum, 

factum,  etc. 

The  following 

1  compounds  of fero  require  special  attention: 

aufero, 

abstuli, 

ablatum,  to  take  away. 

effero, 

extuli, 

elatum,  to  carry  forth. 

differo, 

distuli, 

dilatum,  to  delay. 

5^”  Svffero,  “  endure,”  and  differo  in  the  sense  of  “differ,”  have  neither  Perfect 

nor  Supine. 


70 


THE  VERB. 


Note  1. — Of  the  passive  of  edo ,  estur  sometimes  occurs  instead  of  editur ,  and  essetur 
instead  of  ederetur. — The  compounds  corned &  and  exedo ,  besides  their  own  regular 
forms,  take  likewise  those  of  sum  that  begin  with  es  ;  as,  comesse ,  exesse ,  for  comedere , 
exedere  ;  comest ,  for  corn  edit,  exedit ,  etc. 

Note  2. — The  verb  <?o,  in  the  passive,  exists  only  as  an  impersonal.  But  some  of 
its  compounds  acquire  a  transitive  meaning,  and  may,  accordingly,  have  a  personal 
passive  ;  e.  g.,  adeor  (from  adeo ,  I  approach),  adiris,  aditur ,  adimur ,  adimini ,  adeun - 
/  Subj.  adear ;  Impf.  adibar ,  a  direr  ;  Fut.  adibor,  adiberis,  adibitur  ;  Imper.  adire, 
add  tor,  adimini ,  adeuntor  ;  Part,  aditus ,  adeundus. 

The  compounds  of  eo  generally  drop  #  in  the  past  tenses,  as  rediisii,  obiit, 

subierunt,  redierat,  periisse.  Before  the  letter  5,  the  whole  syllable  vi  may  be  dropped, 
as  inisti,  abissem ,  subisse ,  for  inivisti,  abivissern ,  si/bivisse. 

Note  3. —  Veneo  (venum  eo),  “  I  go  to  sale”  or  “  I  am  sold”  (Perf.  venii ,  venierim , 
venieram,  etc.),  wants  the  Imperative,  the  Supines,  Gerunds,  and  Participles. 

Ambio,  “  I  go  about,” — “  sue  for  an  office,”  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  fourth  conju¬ 
gation  ;  hence  the  forms  ambiunt ,  ambiam ,  ambiebam ,  ambiet ,  ambiens  (-ientis),  ambir 
endum  ; — though  the  forms  ambibam,  ambibo,  are  occasionally  found  also. 

Like  eo  are  conjugated  queo,  I  can,  and  nequeo,  I  cannot;  but  most  of  their  forms, 
the  Present  Indie,  and  Subj.  excepted,  very  seldom  occur. 

Note  4. — Fio  (the  Greek  <pi o>)  is  used  as  a  passive  of  facio,  in  the  Present,  Imper¬ 
fect,  and  Future  Indie.  ;  in  the  Present  and  Imperf.  Subj.  ;  in  the  Imperative,  and 
in  the  Present  Infinitive.  Such  forms  as  facior,  f aciuntur,  faciatur ,  facer etur,  facie - 
bantur ,  and  the  like,  are,  therefore,  carefully  to  be  avoided. 

DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

§  'll. — Defective  verbs  are  such  as  are  used  ouly  in  some  particular 
lenses,  numbers,  and  persons  ;  as,  1.  ocli ,  I  hate  ;  memini ,  I  remem¬ 
ber  ;  novi,  I  know  ;  coepi,  I  begin,  and  I  have  begun ;  2.  aio ,  I 
affirm,  say  yes  (opposed  to  nego)  ;  inquam ,  I  say :  fari  (poet.),  to 
speak  ;  salve,  ave,  hail,  welcome,  good-day ;  and  vale,  farewell. 


1. 


INDICATIVE. 

Prf.  odi 

Pip.  oderam 

F-Pf.  odero 

memini  novi 

meminermn  noveram 

meminero  novero 

coepi 

coeperam 

coepero 

SUEJIJNCTIVE. 

Prf. 

Pip. 

Fut. 

oderim 
odissem 
osurus  sim 

meminerim  noverim 

meminissem  novissem 

coeperim 
coepissem 
coepturus  sim 

INFINITIVE. 

Prf. 

Fut. 

odisse 
osurus  esse 

meminisse  novisse 

coepi  sse 
coepturus  esse 

PARTICIPLES. 

Prf. 

Fut. 

osus  (obsol.) 
osurus 

coeptus  (pass.) 
coepturus 

Note  1. — Odi  and  memini  have  in  the  Perfect  the  meaning  of  the  Present ;  in  the 
Pluperfect,  the  meaning  of  the  Imperfsct ;  and  in  the  Fut. -Perfect,  the  moaning  of 
the  simple  Future. 


4  ' 


THE  VERB. 


71 


This  is  the  case  also  with  novi  (the  Perfect  of  nosco,  “  I  am  acquainted”) ;  as,  novi, 
1  know  ;  noveram ,  I  knew  ;  novero ,  I  shall  know ;  novisse ,  to  know.  The  Partic.  notui 
is  used  adjeetively. — Novi  generally  drops  vi  and  ve  before  r  and  s,  as  nosti,  norunt, 
noram,  nosse,  etc.,  instead  of  novisti,  noverunt,  noveram,  novisse. 

Note  2. —  Gcepi  means  both  “I  begin”  and  “I  have  begun.”  The  Partic.  carptus 
has  always  a  passive  meaning,  “begun.” — With  an  Infinitive  pass.,  cceptus  sum  is 
generally  used  instead  of  coepi  j  as,  Tyrus  oppugnari  coepta  est ,  for  ccepit ;  hello  premi 
sunt  coepti ,  for  coeperunt ;  de  repuhlica  consuli  coepti  sumus ,  for  co&pimus. 

Note  3. — The  Imperative  of  odi  and  novi  is  supplied  by  the  Subjunctive;  e.  g.,  ns 
oderis ,  “  do  not  hate  ;”  noverint ,  “  let  them  know.”  Memini  has  memento,  memen¬ 
to  te,  along  with  the  Subjunctive  forms  memineris  and  memineritis ,  “remember,” 
minerit  and  meminerint,  “  let  him  (them)  remember.” 

Note  4. — The  obsolete  osus  and  its  compounds  exosus  and  perosus  have  an  active 
meaning,  “  one  who  hates  or  has  hated ;”  hence,  osus  sum,  I  have  hated. 


2. 


Prs.  ind.  Aio, 

SUB.  - 

Imp.  ind.  aiebam, 


ais, 

aias, 

aiebas, 


ait, 

aiat, 

aiebat, 


aiebamus,  aiebatis, 


aiunt. 

aiant. 

aiebant. 


Prs.  ind.  Inquam, 

SUB.  - 

Imp.  ind.  inquiebat, 


inquis,  inquit,  inqulmus,  inquitis, 

inquias,  inquiat,  -  inquiatis, 

Prf.  inquisti,  inquit.  Put.  inquies, 


inquiunt. 

inquiant. 

inquiet. 


Prs.  ind.  Fatur,  fantur.  Put.  fabor,  fabitur.  Imper.  fare.  Injin.  fari. 
partig.  (fans)  fantis,  i,  em,  e,  and  fatus.  ger.  fandi,  fando. 


imper.  s. 
p. 


Ave, -eto  ;  Salve  (salvebis),  -eto  ;  Vale  (valebis), -eto. 
avete,  salvete,  valete.  inf.  avere,  salvere,  valere. 


Note  5. — Inquit  and  ait,  “says  he”  or  “said  he,”  are  placed  after  one  or  more 
words  of  a  quotation.  The  Imperative  forms  inque  a.nd  inquito  are  found  in  Terence 
and  Plautus. 

Note  6. — Ain1  ?  “what?”  “do  you  really  think  so?”  is  used  iustead  of  aisne ,  in 
the  same  way  as  Hostin'*  and  viden ’  are  used  instead  of  nostine  and  videsne. 

To  the  defective  verbs  belong  also  queeso ,  queesumus ,  I  (we)  beseech  ;  ausim ,  ausit, 
I  (he)  might  venture  :  faxit,  faxint ,  may  he  (they)  grant ;  e.  g.,  faxint  dii  immor- 
tales  •  and  apage ,  away,  begone. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

§  Y2.  There  are  two  kinds  of  impersonal  verbs  ;  viz.,  Impersonals, 
strictly  speaking — and  Impersonals,  in  a  wider  sense. 

Impersonals  strictly  speaking  are  those  of  which  but  the  third  person  singular 
is  used,  and  which  do  not  admit  any  nominative  either  of  person  or  thing.  Such 
are  the  following  six  : 

piget,  it  grieves.  tsedet,  it  disgusts.  poenitet,  it  repenis . 

pudet,  it  shames.  miseret,  it  pities.  oportet,  it  hehoones. 

Impersonals  in  a  wider  sense  are  those  which  sometimes  admit  a  nominative 
of  a  person  or  thing  (at  least  that  of  a  neuter  pronoun)  and  consequently  may 


72 


THE  VERB. 


also  be  used  in  the  third  person  plural, — or  which  are  used  as  impersonals  only 

Of  this  kind  are  : 

stat,  it  is  resolved. 


in  a  particular  meaning. 

tonat,  it  thunders. 
fulminat,  it  lightens. 
plait,  it  rains. 
ningit,  it  snows. 
gelat,  it  f  reezes. 
gran di nut,  it  hails. 
lucescit,  it  dawns. 


decet,  it  becomes. 
dedecet,  it  is  unbecoming . 
li-bet,  it  pleases. 
licet,  it  is  allowed. 
liquet,  it  is  clear. 


constat,  it  is  known. 
praestat,  it  is  better. 
patet,  it  is  plain. 
apparet,  it  appears. 
refert,  it  concerns. 
interest,  it  concerns. 


The  verbs  tonat,  fulminat,  etc.,  and  a  few  others  that  denote  the  state  of  the  weather, 
sometimes  admit  of  a  personal  subject,  such  as  Deus ,  Jupiter ,  ccelum. 

The  verbs  decet,  dedecet,  etc.,  often  admit  a  nominative  of  a  thing,  especially  that  of 
a  neuter  pronoun,  and  may  accordingly  be  used  also  in  the  plural ;  as,  modestia  pueros 
decet— parvum  parva  decent — non  omnibus  omnia  licent. 

The  verbs  stat,  constat ,  praestat ,  etc.,  along  with  restat,  it  remains  ;  jurat,  delectat,  it 
delights;  fallit,  fugit, prceterit,  it  escapes  ;  conducit,  convenii,  expedit ,  it  suits,  is  useful ; 
accidit ,  contwgit,  evenit,  it  happens, — and  some  more,  are  used  as  impersonals  in  that 
particular  meaning  only,  being  otherwise  personal  verbs.  Most  of  them,  likewise, 
admit  a  nominative  of  a  thing,  and  may  accordingly  be  used  in  the  plural;  as,  nos 
multa  efjugiunt — talia  non  omnibus  contingunt — non  omnia  expediant. 

Contingit  is  said  of  good  events ;  accidit,  generally,  of  bad  ones  ;  and  evenit,  of 

both  good  and  bad. 

* 

§  13. — Impersonal  verbs  are  inflected  through  all  the  moods  and 
tenses,  in  the  following  manner  : 


pudet,  pudebat,  puduit,  puduerat,  pudebit,  pudere. 
pudeat,  puderet,  puduerit,  puduisset,  -  puduisse. 

Most  of  them  may  in  some  way  be  inflected,  even  through  the  various  persons 
and  numbers  of  each  tense  and  mood,  by  adding  the  accusatives  me,  te,  ilium ,  nos, 
vos,  illos,  or  the  datives  mild,  tibi,  illi,  nobis,  vobis,  illis, — respectively ;  thus : 


pudet  me,  I  am  ashamed 
pudet  te,  thou  art  ashamed 
pudet  earn,  he  is  ashamed 
pudet  nos,  we  are  ashamed 
pudet  vos,  ye  are  ashamed 
pudet  eos,  they  are  ashamed 


licet  mihi,  lam  allowed 
licet  tibi,  thou  art  allowed 
licet  ei,  he  is  allowed 
licet  nobis,  we  are  allowed 
licet  vobis,  ye  are  allowed 
licet  eis,  they  are  allowed. 


Note  1. — Impersonal  verbs,  as  such,  are  generally  without  Imperatives,  Gerunds, 
Supines,  and  Participles.  Of  licet,  libet,  pcenitet,  piget,  and  pudet,  however,  we  have 
libens ,  licens ,  licitus,  poenitens,  pcenitendus,  pigendus,  and  pudendus. — The  place  of  the 
Imperative  is  supplied  by  the  Subjunctive  ;  c.  g.,  pudeat  te  or  vos ,  “  be  ashamed.” 

Note  2.— Any  intransitive  verb,  when  used  passively,  becomes  impersonal,  that  is, 
it  admits  only  of  the  third  person  singular.  In  translating  such  verbs  wre  generally 
use  such  a  word  as  one,  they ,  people,  we;  e.  g.,  itur,  they  go;  curritur ,  people  run  ; 
ambulatum  est  satis,  we  have  walked  enough. 

Even  transitive  verbs  may  be  used  impersonally  in  the  third  person  sing,  passive  ; 
as,  scribitur ,  they  write;  bibitur ,  they  drink;  pie  creditur ,  it  is  piously  believed; 
actum  est ,  it  is  over. 

§  14. — List  of  Verbs 

which  are  entirely  or  nearly  alike,  but  differ  from  one  another  in  conju¬ 
gation,  sense,  or  pronunciation  : 


PARTICLES, 


T3 


appello,  1.  call 

appello,  3.  land 

colllgo,  1.  tie  together 

colllgo,  3.  collect 

COmpello,  1.  address 

compello,  8.  force 

consterno,  1.  alarm 

consterno,  3.  bestrew 

dellgo,  1.  tie,  hind 

dellgo,  3.  choose 

dico,  1.  dedicate 

dlco,  3.  say 

edSco,  1.  educate 

educo,  3.  lead  forth 

fundo,  1.  found 

fundo,  3.  pour  out 

indlco,  1.  indicate 

indlco,  3.  proclaim 

l5go,  1.  send 

lego,  3.  read 

mando,  1.  order 

mando,  3.  chew 

praedico,  1.  proclaim 

prsedlco,  3.  foretell 

relego,  1.  send  away 

relego,  3.  read  over 

volo,  1.  fly 

volo,  velle,  he  willing 

concldo,  3.  fall  down 

concldo,  3.  cut  to  pieces 

excido,  3.  fall  out 

excido,  3.  cut  out 

incldo,  8.  fall  into 

incldo,  3.  cut  into 

occido,  3.  fall,  set 

occido,  3.  Mil 

erelo,  1.  carve 

celo,  1.  conceal 

fugo,  1.  pvt  to  flight 

fugio,  2>.  flee 

mano,  1.  flow 

maneo,  2.  remain 

permano,  1.  flow  through 

permaneo,  2.  remain 

miseror,  1.  pity 

misereor,  2.  pity 

moror,  1.  delay 

morior,  3.  die 

jaceo,  2.  lie  down 

jacio,  3.  throw 

pendeo,  2.  hang 

pendo,  3.  weigh 

dellgo,  3.  choose 

dillgo,  3.  love 

Undo,  3.  split 

fido,  3.  trust 

fingo,  3.  feign 

Ago,  3.  fix 

vinco,  3.  conquer 

vincio,  4.  hind 

venio,  4.  come 

veneo,  ire,  be  sold. 

Veneo ,  ire,  is  commonly  used  in  a 
meaning  is  “  I  go  to  sale”  ( venum  eo).- 

passive  sense — “  to  be  sold  ;”  but-  its  propei 
-Of  a  similar  kind  are  vapulare ,  u  to  be  beaten,” 

from  vapulo ,  “  I  get  a  flogging  and  exulare,  “  to  be  banished,”  from  exulo,  “I  am 

an  exile  or  live  in  exile.” 


CHAPTER  YI. 

Particles. 


I.  ADVERBS. 

§  75. — There  are  various  classes  of  Adverbs  : 
of  place,  of  manner  etc. 


(time.) 

aliquando,  once 
eras,  to-morrow 
lieri,  yesterday 
hodie,  to-day 
interdnm,  sometimes 
jam,  already 
minquam,  never 
quotidio,  daily 
semper,  always 


(place.) 
hie,  here 
illic,  ibi,  there 
nusquam,  nowhere 
quo,  whither 
nbi,  where 
ubieunque,  wherever 
ublque,  everywhere 
unde,  whence 
undlque,  from  all  sides 


viz.,  adverbs  of  time, 

(manner.) 
fere,  almost 
imprimis,  especially 
otnnino,  altogether 
palam,  openly 
pariter,  likewise 
paulatim,  by  degrees 
prsesertirn,  chiefly 
repente,  suddenly 
saltern,  at  least 


74 


PAETICLES. 


§  1 6.— Adverbs  are  either  primitive  or  derivative . — Derivative 
adverbs  are  mostly  derived  from  adjectives,  and  admit  of  the  degrees 
of  comparison.  They  are  formed  in  the  following  manner  : 

1.  Adjectives  in  us  (er),  a,  um,  generally  add  e  to  the  stem  ;  as, 


ADJECTIVE. 

longus, 

liber, 

pulclier, 


ADYEBBi 

long-e, 

liber-e, 

pulchr-e 


COMP. 

longius, 

liberius, 

pulclirius, 


8CPERL, 

longissime, 

liberrime. 

puicherrime. 


2.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  add  iter  to 
those  ending  in  ns  add  er  only  ;  as, 


the  stem 


but 


acer,  acr-iter, 

felix,  felic-iter, 

amans,  amant-er, 


acrius, 

felicius, 

araantiuSj 


acer  rime. 

felicissiine. 

amantissiine. 


Note  1. — The  adjectives  durus,  firmus,  largus,  and  humanus,  add  both  e  and  Her 
to  the  stem,  as  dure  and  duriter  /  firme  and  fir  miter,  etc. —  Violentus  and  fraudulently s 
have  violenter,  fraudulenter ;  luculentus  generally  has  luculenter. 

Note  2. — In  several  adjectives  in  us,  the  ablative  sing,  supplies  the  place  of  the  ad¬ 
verb;  as,  continuo ,  immediately  ;  crebro ,  frequently  ;  /also ,  falsely  ;  merito ,  deservedly: 
necessario ,  necessarily  ;  perpetuo ,  continually  ;  raro,  rarely  ;  sedulo]  sedulously  ; 
eubito ,  suddenly  ;  tuto,  safely,  etc. 

Facilis ,  impunis ,  and  sublimis ,  have  facile ,  impure ,  and  sublime  ;  audax ,  bold,  lias 
audacter  •  and  dificilis  has  difficile ,  dfficulter ,  and  dffeiliter. 

Note  3. — The  following  adverbs  deserve  particular  notice  :  bene ,  well ;  male ,  badly  ; 
parum ,  not  enough  ;  mnltum ,  much  ;  seAs,  enough  ;  props,  near ;  Aw,  long  ;  nuper , 
lately  ;  secus,  otherwise  ;  and  scepe,  often. 


POS. 

CQMP. 

8  UP. 

P08. 

COMP. 

8UP. 

bene 

melius 

optime 

parum 

minus 

mini  me 

male 

pejus 

pessime 

mul  turn 

plus 

plurimum 

{more) 

magis 

maxime 

(sooner) 

ocius 

ocissime 

(worse) 

deterius 

deterrime 

(rather) 

potius 

potissimum  (e) 

satis 

satius 

nuper 

nuperrime 

prope 

pro pi us 

proxime 

seeus 

secius 

diu 

diutius 

diutisaime 

siepe 

ssepius 

saepissime 

II.  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  'It. — Some  prepositions  govern  the  accusative;  others,  the  abla¬ 
tive  ;  and  a  few  govern  both  the  accusative  and  ablative. 


PREPOSITIONS  GOV.  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


ad,  to,  unto 
apud,  at,  by,  with 
ante,  before 
adversus,  )  ,  . 

adversum,  j  a9alns 


cis,  ) 
citra,  j 

c!rca’  l  around,  about 
circum, )  ’ 

circiter,  about 


on  this  side 


contra,  against 
erga,  towards 
extra,  beyond,  without 
infra,  beneath ,  below 
intra,  within 
inter,  between,  among 
juxta,  next,  to 
ob,  on  account  of 
penes,  in  the  power  of 
per,  through,  during 


PARTICLES. 


pone,  behind 
post,  after 
prseter,  beside,  except 
prope,  near  by 
propter,  on  account  of 


secundum,  according  to 
supra,  above 
trans,  on  the  other  side 
versus,  toicards 
ultra,  beyond 


PREPOSITIONS  GOV.  TFK  ABLATIVE 


a,  ab,  abs,  from,  by 
absque  (obsol.),  without 
coram,  in  presence  of 
cum,  with 

de,  down  from,  concerning 


e,  ex,  out  of,  from 
prae,  before,  owing  to 
pro,  before,  for 
sine,  without 
tenus,  as  far  as,  up  to 


PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  BOTH  TIIE  ACC.  AND  ABL. 

in,  in,  on,  into,  towards  super,  above,  concerning 

sub,  under,  towards  subter,  under,  beneath 

Rote  1. — A  and  e  never  stand  before  a  vowel  or  h  ;  ab  stands  before  vowels,  and 
often,  also,  before  consonants  ;  ex  stands  indiscriminately  before  vowels  and  conso¬ 
nants.  Abs  is  used  only  in  the  combination  abs  te,  for  which,  however,  a  te  is  used 
also.  Absque  is  obsolete. 

Rote  2. — The  preposition  cum  is  always  annexed  to  the  ablatives  me,  te,  se,  nobis , 
and  vobis,  and  commonly  to  quo,  qua ,  quibus,  and  to  qui  when  used  for  quo  •  as, 
rnecum ,  tecum,  secum,  nobiscum,  etc. 

Rote  3. — The  prepositions  ob,  post,  de,  ex,  in,  cum,  and  inter,  are  not  unfrequently 
placed  between  the  substantive  and  its  adjective.  Tenus  and  versus  generally  follow 
their  cases.  E.  g.,  quam  ob  causam,  aliquot  post  menses,  certis  de  causis,  magna  ex 
parte,  hac  in  re,  magna  cum  voluptate,  medios  inter  hostes,  coelo  tenus,  Iiornam  versus. 

Note  4. — Several  of  the  above-mentioned  prepositions  are  sometimes  used  as  ad¬ 
verbs  ;  as,  ante,  before  ;  post,  afterward ;  contra,  on  the  contrary ;  prope,  almost ; 
circiter,  about. — When  used  adverbially,  they,  of  coarse,  govern  no  case. 


in  and  sub. 

§  78. — In  takes  1.  The  accusative  with  verbs  of  motion  {whither  f),  and 
when  tendency  toward  or  against  is  denoted ;  as,  eamus  in  hortum,  proficiscor 
in  Galliam,  pietas  in  Deum,  amor  in  patriam,  odium  in  Hannibalem,  Ciceronis 
oratio prima  in  Catilinam,  etc. — 2.  The  ablative  in  answer  to  where?  when 
rest  in  a  place  is  denoted ;  as,  ambulat  in  horto,  cecidit  in  preelio,  fuistine  in 
schola  f  hoc  in  fratre  tuo  laudo,  in  f  amine  Istro  pons  erat. 

Note  1. — With  esse,  liaberi,  poni,  duci,  and  numerari ,  in  takes  the  ablative  in  the 
sense  of  “among”  as.  in  bonis  civibus  {in  magnis  viris,  in  optimis  scriptoribus)  esse , 
haberi ,  etc.,  dolor  a  multis  in  maximis  malis  ducitur. 

Note  2. — In  takes  the  ablative,  also,  with  verbs  of  “placing,”  as ponere,  locare ,  and 
collocare  ;  e.  g.,  pone  librum  in  mensa. — Thus  the  verbs  defig  ere,  inserere,  and  inscribere, 
are  frequently  construed  with  in  and  the  ablative  ;  as,  oculos  in  alicujus  vultu  defigere, 
inscribere  in  basi ,  etc. 

Sub.  takes  1.  The  accusative  with  verbs  of  motion  {whither  f),  and  when 
the  time  toward  or  about  which,  is  denoted  ;  e.  g.,  venire  sub  oculos,  mittere  sub 
jugum,  sub  imperium  redire,  sub  vesper  am,  sub  idem  tempus ; — 2.  The  ablative 
in  answer  to  where  f  when  rest  in  a  place  is  denoted ;  as,  esse  sub  oculis,  sedere 
sub  scamno,  esse  sub  regibus,  sub  imperio,  esse  sub  dio,  “  to  be  in  the  open  air.” 

Supek,  in  the  sense  of  over,  above,  takes  the  accusative  in  answer  to  where 
and  whither ;  as,  avis  volat  super  aquam,  avis  nidum  construit  super  aquam. — Iu 


\ 


70  PARTICLES. 

the  sense  of  concerning,  about,  it  takes  the  ablative;  as ,  super  hoc  re  ( much 
better,  Jute  de  re)  pluribus  ad  te  scribam. 

Subter,  under,  beneath,  is  rarely  used,  and  in  prose  with  the  accusative 
only. 

PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 

§  79. — Several  prepositions  when  compounded  with  other  words,  undergo  a 
change  for  the  sake  of  euphony.  The  following  cases  are  of  most  common  oc¬ 
currence  : 

Ad  is  assimilated  before  c,f,  g, l,p, r,  sand  t ;  as,  accedo,  affero,  aggredior,  ah 
l udo,  appono,  arrideo,  assisto,  attingo. — Before  q,  the  d  generally  changes  to  c, 
as  acquiro,  acquiesco. 

Per  and  inter  remain  unchanged,  except  in  the  words  pellicio,  pejero  (per - 

juro ),  and  intelligo. 

Ob  is  assimilated  before  c,f,  g,  and  p  ;  as,  occurro,  offer o,  oggannio,  oppono. 

Trans  drops  the  s  before  s;  as,  transcribo,  transilio,  transcendo.—ln  trado, 
traduco,  trajicio,  and  trano,  the  ns  is  better  omitted,  though  transdo,  transduco, 
etc.,  are  found  also. 

A  stands  before  m  and  v  ;  as  amitto,  averto  ;  abbs,  before  c  and  t,  as  abscondo, 
abstineo. — In  all  other  combinations  ab  is  used. — In  the  words  aufero  and  aufu- 
gio,  ab  is  changed  into  au  (a v). 

Com  remains  unchanged  before  b,  p,  and  m  ;  it  is  assimilated  before  l,  n,  and 
r, — and  changes  to  n  before  the  remaining  consonants ;  as,  comburo,  compono, 
committo  ; — colligo,  connecto,  corripio; — concludo,  conduco,  confer o,  conjungo, 
etc. — Before  h  and  vowels  the  m  is  dropped,  as  cohibeo,  collar eo,  coalesco,  coerceo. 

Ex  is  assimilated  before  /,  as  effero,  efficio,  effugio,  effundo.  In  the  words 
exsequor,  exsilium,  exsul,  exsulo,  exspecto,  exstinguo,  the  s  is  often  dropped,  as  ex- 
equor,  exilium,  exid,  etc. 

In  changes  final  n  into  m  before  b,  p,  and  m  ;  as,  imbibo,  impono,  immitto . 
Before  l  and  r  it  is  assimilated ;  as,  illudo,  irruo,  irrumpo. 

Sub  is  assimilated  before  c,  f,  g,  p,  and  r  ;  as,  succurro,  suffero,  suggero,  sup- 
pono,  surripio,  though  commonly  subrideo. — Before  sp,  the  final  b  is  dropped,  as 
suspiro,  suspicio,  suspecto. — In  suscipio,  suscito,  suspendo,  sustineo,  and  the  per¬ 
fect  sustuli,  the  b  has  been  replaced  by  the  letter  s. 

INSEPARABLE  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  80. —  Inseparable  prepositions  are  such  as  are  found  only  in  compo¬ 
sition  ;  as,  amb,  dis ,  re,  and  se. 

Amb  (an<pi),  “  around as,  arnbigo,  ambio,  amburo.  In  amplector  and  amputo 
the  b  is  dropped ;  before  c,  h,  and  q,  and  also  in  the  word  anfractus,  amb  changes 
to  an ;  as,  anceps,  anhelo,  anquiro. 

Dis,  “  asunder/’  drops  the  final  s  before  all  consonants,  except  c,  p,  q,  t,  and 
s  followed  by  a  vowel ;  as,  digredior,  dildbor,  dimitto,  diripio,  divello  ;  but  dis- 
cedo,  dispono,  disquiro,  disturbo,  dissemino,  dissuadeo.  Before  s  followed  by  a 
consonant,  di  is  used,  as  disto,  dispergo,  distinguo. — Before/,  both  dis  and  di  are 
found,  as  disjicio,  disjungo ;  but  dijudico. — Before  /  the  final  s  is  assimilated, 
as  differo,  diffido,  diffundo. 

Re  (before  h,  and  a  vowel,  red-),  “  back as,  reduco,  refero,  remitto;  redhibeot 
redeo,  redintegro. 

Se,  “apart,”  “aside;”  as,  seduco,  sejungo,  sepono. 


PARTICLES. 


77 


III.  CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  81. — There  are  several  classes  of  couj unctions:  viz., 

1.  Copulative;  as,  et,  ae,  atque ,  que,  and;  nec,  neque,  and  not,  nor;  e tiam, 
quoque,  also ;  item,  likewise  ;  et — et,  both — and  ;  quurri — turn,  both— and  especial 
ly,  not  only — but  also ;  turn — turn,  both — and,  as  well — as,  not  only — but  also ; 
tarn — quam,  as  well — as. 

2.  Disjunctive  ;  as,  aut,  sive,  seu,  vel,  ve,  or ;  aut — aut,  sive — sice,  seu—seu,  vel — 
vel,  either — or ;  nec — nec,  neque — neque  (both  very  frequent),  neque — nec  (some¬ 
times),  nec — neque  (very  rare),  neither — nor. 

8.  Concessive ;  as,  etsi,  etiamsi,  tametsi,  licet,  quamvis,  quamquam,  although  ; 
guamtumvis,  quamlibet,  how  much  soever ;  ut ,  granting,  although ;  quidem., 
truly,  indeed,  certainly. 

4.  Adversative  ;  as,  sed,  autem,  verum,  veto,  at,  atqui,  but,  but  in  fact ;  tamen, 
attamen,  verumtamen ,  yet,  but  yet,  nevertheless,  however ;  enimvero,  yes  in¬ 
deed,  to  be  sure. 

5.  Conditional ;  as,  si,  if;  si  forte,  if  perchance;  si  modo,  modo,  dummodo,  if 
but,  if  only ;  si  tamen,  if  however ;  sin,  sin  autem,  sin  vero,  but  if,  if  on  the 
contrary ;  nisi,  if  not,  unless ;  dummodo  ne,  modo  ne,  provided  that  not. 

6.  Causal ;  as,  nam,  namque,  enim,  etenim,  for;  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  quum, 
because ;  quando,  quandoqmdem,  siquidem,  since,  since  indeed ;  quippe  (com¬ 
monly  in  connection  with  qui),  because,  since. 

7.  Conclusive ;  as,  ergo,  igitur,  itaque,  ideo,  idcirco,  proinde,  propterea,  there¬ 
fore  ;  unde,  quocirca,  quare,  quapropter,  quamobrem,  wherefore. 

8.  Final ;  as,  ut,  uti,  quo,  that,  in  order  that ;  ne,  neve  ( neu ),  in  order  that 
not ;  quin ,  quominus,  that  not. 

9.  Temporal ;  as,  quum,  when ;  turn,  then ;  ubi,  ut,  ubi  primum,  ut  primum, 
quum  primum,  simul  ac,  simul  atque,  as  soon  as ;  antequam,  priusquam,  before  * 
postquam,  after ;  dum,  while ;  dam,  usque  dum,  quoad,  donee,  until ;  quamdiu,  as 
long  as. 

10.  Comparative  ;  as,  ut,  sicut,  velut,  ceu,  as,  like ;  tamquam,  quasi,  ac  si,  as,  af 
if ;  ac  and  atque  in  the  sense  of  “  as”  after  deque,  pariter,  perinde,  pro  eo,  similiter 
totidem,  aliter,  contra,  secus. 

§  82. — Note  1.  Ac  never  stands  before  a  vowel  and  h  ;  atque  stands  most  commonly 
before  vowels,  but  before  consonants  also.  Que  and  ve  are  always  appended  to  the 
following  word,  as  terra  marique,  ter  qualerve. 

Note  2. — Enim ,  autem ,  and  vero ,  never  stand  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  or  o! 
any  member  of  a  sentence,  but  always  after  the  first  or  second  word.  They  are  placed 
after  the  second,  when  one  of  the  first  two  words  is  either  the  verb  sum  or  a  preposi¬ 
tion  ;  as,  incredibile  est  enim , — ad  vos  autem  per tinet. 

Note  3. — Quidem,  “  indeed,”  “  at  least,”  and  quoque ,  “  also,”  are  always  placed 
after  the  emphatic  word  ;  as,  hoc  quidem  tempore, — tu  quoque  contra  me  es  ! 

The  English  “not — even”  is  expressed  by  ne — quidem ,  the  emphatical  word  being 
placed  between  n#  and  quidem  ;  as,  nepatrem  quidem  veretur. 

§  83. — Interjections  are  words  uttered  to  express  some  emotion  of 
the  mind.  Such  are  : 

Evoe  or  evax,  hurrah  ! — Euge ,  bravo  ! — Vae,  woe  ! — Hei,  heu ,  (lieu,  proh,  alas  ! — Ileus , 
e ho,  ehodum,  holla  ! — phui,  vah,  away,  begone  ! — Pax,  hush  ! — Infandum ,  shame  !— 
Age  or  agite ,  quick  ! — Sodei,  pray  do  1 — Mehercle,  by  Hercules  1  and  the  like. 


78 


DIRECTIONS  AND  CAUTIONS. 


§  84. — General  Directions  and  Cautions. 

(For  beginners.) 

1.  In  translating  English  into  Latin,  the  young  student  who  pays  due  atten 

tion  to  the  directions  given  in  §  1,  for  the  employment  of  the  Latin  Cases, 
will  spare  himself  much  time  and  trouble,  and  will  soon  become  familiar 
with  the  structure  of  Latin  sentences.  As  in  every  sentence  the  nomina 
tive  is  the  first  thing  to  be  sought  for,  let  his  first  question  always  be 
who  or  what  placed  before  the  finite  verb,  and  the  word  answering  to  the 
question  will  be  the  nominative. 

In  the  following  sentence  all  six  cases  occur :  “  My  son,  by  good  works 
men  secure  to  themselves  the  everlasting  joys  of  heaven.” — This  and  like 
sentences  the  pupil  ought  to  parse  thus : 

Who  secure  ?  men  secure. — “  Men”  is  the  nominative  ( homines )  because  it  answers 
to  who  or  what  placed  before  the  finite  verb. 

Secure  what  ?  the  everlasting  joys. — “The  everlasting  joys”  is  the  accusative  ( externa 
gaudia )  because  it  answers  to  whom  or  what  placed  after  a  verb  transitive. 

The  joys  of  what  ?  of  heaven. — “  Of  heaven”  is  the  genitive  {coali)  because  it  answers 
to  the  question  of  whom  or  what ,  asked  in  connection  with  a'noun. 

Secure  to  whom ?  to  themselves.— ■“  To  themselves”  is  the  dative  isibi)  because  the 
dative  answers  to  the  question  to  whom  or  what? 

By  what  ?  by  good  works. — “  By  good  works”  is  the  ablative  ( bonis  operibus )  be¬ 
cause  the  ablative  answers  to  the  questions  when  ?  where  ?  by  (, from ,  with) 
whom  or  what  ? 

“  My  son”  is  the  person  addressed,  and  is,  therefore,  put  in  the  vocative. 

The  whole  sentence,  accordingly,  runs  thus  in  Latin  :  Fill  mi,  bonis  operibus 
homines  ceterna  cceli  gaudia  sibi  parant. 

ppf2 3 4  It  is,  of  course,  not  enough  merely  to  see  in  what  case  each  noun  or 
adjective  has  to  be  put :  the  pupil  must  moreover  take  into  consideration 
the  gender,  number,  declension,  agreement,  etc. 

2.  Every  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  in  number  and  person ;  as, 

“  The  boys  play.” — Who  play  ?  “  The  boys ;”  Pueri  ludunt. 

3.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles,  agree  with  their  substantives 

in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as,  “  A  good  man Vir  bonus. — “  A  kind 
mother Benigna  mater.  * 

4.  When  an  adjective  or  participle  (e.  g.,  wise,  poor,  rich , — sent,  given,  written, 

etc.)  is  separated  from  its  substantive  by  some  intervening  word  or  words, 
ask  simply  the  question  :  “  Who  is  said  to  be  (or  have  been)  wise,  poor, 

rich ?” — “what  is  said  to  be  (or  have  been)  sent,  given,  written ?”  and  then 
make  these  adjectives  and  participles  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case, 
with  the  word  that  answers  to  the  question,  * 

5  Translate  the  rich,  the  poor,  the  wise,  the  ignorant ,  etc.,  always  by  the  plural, 
unless  they  refer  expressly  to  a  singular  noun  ;  as,  “  Imitate  (thou)  the 
good,  and  shun  the  wicked  Imitare  bonos,  fuge  malos. — “  The  rich  are 
not  always  happy ;”  Bivites  non  semper  felices  sunt. — But,  “  The  good 
man  is  happy ;  the  wicked,  unhappy;”  Vir  bonus  felix  est,  improbus 
infelix 


DIRECTIONS  AND  CAUTIONS. 


79 


6.  When  the  question  what?  placed  before  the  finite  verb,  is  answered  by  an¬ 
other  verb,  put  the  latter  in  the  Infinitive,  and  when  there  is  an  adjective 
referring  to  this  In  finitive,  put  it  in  the  neuter  gender ;  as, 

“  To  lie  is  disgraceful.”  What  is  ?  to  lie  is.  Mentiri  turpe  est. 

“  To  err  is  human.”  What  is?  to  err  is.  Err  are  humanum  est. 

7.  When  the  question  what  ?  placed  after  a  verb  transitive,  is  answered  by 

another  verb,  the  latter  is  put  in  the  Infinitive  ;  as, 

“  He  wishes  (wishes  what  ? — )  to  know.”  Vult  scire . 

“  He  begins  (begins  what  ? — )  to  speak.”  Incipit  loqui. 

8.  A  noun  used  to  explain  a  preceding  noun  or  pronoun,  and  designating  the 

same  person  or  thing,  is  put,  by  apposition,  in  the  same  case ;  as,  “  Cicero 
the  Orator Cicero  orator. — “  To  Philip,  king  of  Macedonia,  father  of 
Alexander  the  Great ;”  Philippo  regi  Macedonia,  patri  Alexandri  Magni. 

9.  The  relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  number,  and  person  •  but 

the  case  depends  on  the  construction  of  its  own  clause ;  as,  “  The  letter 
which  I  wrote  Litter cc  quas  scripsi. 

10.  Verbs  signifying  “to  be,”  “to  exist,”  as  sum,  fio,  existo,  nascor ,  maneo,  etc., 

and  passive  verbs  signifying  “to  be  called,”  “to  be  chosen,”  “to  be 
deemed,”  take  both  a  subject-nominative,  and  a  predicate-nominative: — - 
the  former  answering  to  who  or  what  placed  before  the  verb  ;  the  latter, 
to  what  placed  after  the  verb ;  as,  “  I  am  called  Robert Ego  vocor  Rober 
tus,  etc. 

11.  Never  put  a  and  e  before  a  vowel  or  an  h,  but  ah  and  ex. 

12.  Never  put  enim,  vero,  autem,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  or  of  any  mem¬ 

ber  of  a  sentence. 

13.  Que  and  re  must  always  be  appended  to  the  next  word;  as,  “Father  and 

mother ;”  Pater  materque,  not  pater  que  mater. — “  Three  or  four  times 
Ter  quaterve,  not  ter  ve  quater. 

14.  Never  forget  the  Imperatives :  die,  due,  fer,  fac. 

15.  Translate  “not”  before  an  Imperative  always  by  ne,  never  by  non ;  as, 

“  Do  not  fear ;”  Ne  time. — “  Be  not  forward  Ne  proeax  esto. — “  Do  not 
hasten ;”  Nefestina. 


A 


SYNTAX. 


|  85. — Syntax  treats  of  the  due  arrangement  of  words  in  sentences. 

The  principal  parts  of  a  sentence  are  the  subject  and  predicate ,  or  the  nominativf 
and  the  finite  verb. 

The  finite  verb  is  that  verb  which  is  limited  to  number  and  person  :  it  is  either  ic 
the  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  or  Imperative. 

The  Subject  or  nominative  of  a  sentence  is  that  which  answers  to— - 
who  or  what  ?  placed  before  the  finite  verb. 

The  Predicate  is  that  which  is  affirmed  of  the  subject.  It  is  gene¬ 
rally  a  verb,  but  often  a  substantive  or  an  adjective  combined  with  the 
verb  esse,  “  to  be  ;  ”  as, 

Csesar  conquered. — God  is  just. — Sylla  was  Consul. 

In  these  three  sentences,  Caesar ,  God ,  and  Sylla ,  are  the  Subjects;  conquered ,  is 
just ,  and  teas  Consul,  the  Predicates. 

§  86. — Sentences  are  of  two  kinds,  simple  and  compound. — Com¬ 
pound  sentences  are  either  co-ordinate  or  subordinate. 

Co-ordinate  sentences  are  those  which  are  introduced  by  copulative, 
disjunctive,  adversative,  conclusive,  and  comparative  conjunctions 
(§  81).  Co-ordinate  sentences  are  independent  of  each  other. 

Subordinate  sentences  or  clauses  are  those  which  are  introduced  by 
concessive,  conditional ,  causal,  final,  and  temporal  conjunctions  {§  81), 
also  relative  clauses,  indirect  questions,  and  clauses  containing  the  Ac¬ 
cusative  with  the  Infinitive 

A  sentence  with  which  a  subordinate  clause  is  connected,  is  called,  in 
reference  to  the  latter,  the  principal  or  leading  sentence  ;  its  subject, 
the  principal  or  leading  subject  ;  and  its  verb,  the  principal  or  leading 
verb. 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 

I.  Of  the  Finite  Verb  with  its  Nominative. 

Ego  valeo. 

§  8E— Eyerv  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  in  number  and 
person  ;  as,  “  I  am  well.”  Magister  docet ,  discipuli  audiunt.  Ani- 
malia  currunt.  Lupi  ululant.  Ranee  coaxant. 

Note  1. — The  nominative  of  a  sentence  is  commonly  a  noun  or  pronoun  ;  but  any 
part  of  speech, — even  a  whole  clause  may  take  the  place  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  Errare 
humanum  est.  Et  monere  et  moneri  proprium  est  verm  amicitim.  Gras  istud  quatido 
venit?  Incertum  est  quam  longa  cu-j  usque  vita  futura  sit. 

Note  2. — The  nominatives  ego ,  tu,  nos ,  and  vos,  are  generally  omitted  :  but,  when 
contrast  or  emphasis  is  intended,  they  must  be  expressed.  E.  g.,  Quid  agis ,  amice? 
Si  saZutaris,  resaluta. — Ego  aio ,  tu  negas.1  Nos  ridemus ,  vosfletis.  Tu  hoc  fecisli. 

Est  and  sunt  are  likewise  often  omitted,  especially  in  proverbial  sentences  ;  as,  Ornne 
varum  carum.  Omnia  prmclara  rara.  Aurora  musis  arnica.  Ubi  opes ,  ibi  amici.  Ubi 
bene ,  ibi  patria.  Qualis  rex,  tails  grex.  Adi  labor es  j ucundi.  Corruptio  optirni  pessima. 
Quot  capita,  tot  sentential. 

Note  3. — Collective  nouns,  such  as  plebs,  pars ,  turba,  multitudo ,  etc. — also  uterque, 
alius — alium,  alter — alterum ,  and-  especially  pro  se  quisque ,  “  every  one  for  his  part,” 
sometimes  take  a  verb  in  the  plural ;  as,  “Each  lays  the  blame  on  the  other;”  Alter 
in  alterum  causam  conferunt.  Ears  Sabinis  eunt  subsidio ,  pars  Romanos  adoriuntvr. 
Locros  omnis  multitudo  abeunt.  Uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exercitum  educunt.  Alius 
alium ,  ut  proelium  incipiant ,  circumspectant. 

A  plural  verb  is  often  used,  also,  when  a  nominative  singular,  by  means  of  cum , 
is  joined  to  an  ablative  plural,  especially  when  the  latter  is  followed  by  a  relative 
clause;  as,  Demosthenes  cam  ceteris  qui  bene  cle  republica  merer i  exist hnabaniur,  in 
exilium  erant  expulsi. 

Note  i. — When  there  are  two  or  more  nominatives  sing.,  the  verb  is  generally  put 
in  the  plural ;  and  when  the  nominatives  are  of  different  persons,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  first -person  rather  than  the  second,  and  with  the  second  rather  than  the 
third  ;  as,  Romulus  et  Remus  Romam  condiderunt.  Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  suavis- 
simus  Cicero  valemus.  Tu  et  f  rater  tuus  vapulabitis. 

When  the  nominative  denote  things,  the  verb  frequently  agrees  with  the 


J)  I  say  “  ;”  and  you,  “  no.” 

6 


82 


THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 


nearest :  but,  if  one  of  the  nominatives  is  plural,  the  veib  is  generally  put  in  the  plural 
also. — The  agreement  with  the  nearest  takes  sometimes  place  even  when  persons 
are  denoted.  E.  g.,  Tempos  necessitasque  hoc  post alat.  Beneficent ia ,  liber alitas,  j ustitia, 
funditus  tollitur.  Vita,  mors ,  diviti.ee ,  pavpertas ,  ornnes  homines  vehement! ssi?ne  per- 
movent. — Dixit  hoc  Zosippus  et  Ismenias ,  homines  nobilissimi.  Vos  ipsi  et  Senatus  fre- 
quens  restitit. 

Note  o. — When  of  two  nominatives  belonging  to  the  same  verb,  different  things 
are  asserted,  the  verb  always  agrees  with  the  nearest;  as,  Ego  misere ,  tu  feliciter 
vivis. — With  two  nominatives  connected  by  et — et  or  aut — aut ,  the  verb  is  more  com¬ 
monly  put  in  the  singular.  With  nec — nec ,  the  singular  is  likewise  preferred,  unless 
one  of  the  nominatives  denotes  a  first  or  second  person.  E.  g.,  Et  ego  et  Cicero  mens 
fiagitabit.  Eec  Caesar  nec  Pompeius  insidias  effugere potuit.  ILx.c  neque  ego  neque  tu 
fecimus. 

The  phrases  Senatus  Populusque  Eomanus  and  units  et  alter  regularly  take  a  verb 
in  the  singular  number;  as,  Senatus  Populusque  Eomanus  hoc  intelligit.  TInus  et 
alter  dies  intercesserat . 


II.  Of  the  Adjective  with  its  Substantive. 

Vir  bonus. 

§  88. — Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles,  agree  with 
their  substantives  in  gender,  number,  and  case  ;  as,  “  A  good  man.’* 
Vir  sapiens  felix  est.  JBoni  homines  bonis  liominibus  cari  sunt.  Ami¬ 
cus  certus  in  re  incerta  cernitur.  Sincera  fides  j ungit  veros  amicos. 

Note  1. — When  an  adjective  relates  to  a  substantive  quoted  merely  as  a  word,  or 
to  an  Infinitive,  Imperative,  adverb,  or  a  whole  clause,  it  is  put  in  the  neuter  gen¬ 
der  ;  as,  Eex  est  monosyllabum ,  regina  polysyllabum.  Dulce  et  decorum  est  pro  patria 
mori.  Turpius  est  fallere  quam  falli .  Supremum  vale  dixit.  Incertum  est  quid  eras 
futurum  sit. 

Sometimes  the  adjective  does  not  agree  with  its  substantive,  but  with  another,  un¬ 
derstood  in  the  former  ;  as,  Pars  in  criicem  adi,  pars  bestiis  objecti  sunt.  Capita  con- 
jurationis  securi  percussi  sunt.  Samnitium  ccesi  sunt  tria  millia  ducenti.  Latium 
Capuaque  agro  multati  sunt. 

Note  2. — An  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle,  in  the  nom.  or  acc.,  with 
the  word  things  expressed  or  understood,  is  generally  put  in  the  neuter  plural ;  as, 
“We  cannot  change  the  past,”  i.  e.,  past  things;  Prceterita  mutare  non  possumus. — 
Thus,  Audi  mult  a,  loquere  pauca.  Supra  lunam  edema  sunt  omnia.  Video  meliora 
proboque ,  deteriora  sequor.  Permulta  parentibus ,  Deo  omnia  debencus.  Tria  vobis 
propono. 

Instead  of  the  neuter  plural,  however,  the  word  res  may  be  used  also,  as  Ees  omnes 
mutationi  sunt  obnoxice.  Ees  magnoe  non  viribus ,  sed  consilio  geruntur.  Ees  1  romance 
fragiles  caducacque  sunt. 

The  addition  of  res  is  even  necessary  in  those  cases  in  which  the  neuter  form  does 
not  differ  from  that  of  the  other  genders,  as  in  the  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative. 
Thus  e.  g.,  “  of  many  things”  must  be  rendered  by  multarum  rerum ,  not  by  the 
neuter  multorum ,  because  the  form  multorum  would  leave  it  doubtful,  whether 
things  or  persons  are  meant. 


THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 


83 


Note  3. — When  an  adjective  or  participle  belongs  to  two  or  more  substantives,  it 
;  j?.  generally  put  in  the  plural;  as,  Eos,  equus  et  asinus  sunt  utilissimi.  Gollis  et  ager 
fioribus  vestiti  sunt.  Luna  et  terra  globosce  sunt. 

When  the  substantives  are  of  different  genders,  see  whether  they  denote  persons 
:  or  things  : 

a)  If  they  denote  persons,  the  adjective  is  put  in  the  plural  of  the  masculine 
gender  ;  as,  Jam pridem  pater  mihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt. 

b)  If  they  denote  things,  the  adjective  either  agrees  with  the  nearest  or  is  put  in 
the  neuter  plural  ;  as,  Error  in  hae  causa  atque  invidia  versata  est.  Tibi  omnmm 
salus,  liberi ,  fama ,  fortunes  sunt  carissimos. — Perspicua  suum  consilium  conatusque 
omnibus  fecit.  Porta  murusque  de  ccelo  tacta  sunt. 

c)  If  partly  persons,  partly  things  are  denoted,  the  adjective  either  takes  the 
gender  of  the  person  or  is,  again,  put  in  the  neuter  plural  ;  as,  Bex  regiaque  classis 
una  profecti  sunt.  Romani  regem  regnumque  Macedonia?,  sua  futura  sciunt. 

With  two  or  more  feminine  substantives,  denoting  abstract  ideas,  the  adjective 
is  sometimes  put  in  the  neuter  plural ;  as,  Ira  et  avaritia  imperio  potentiora  sunt. 
Stultitia ,  temeritas ,  injustitia ,  et  intemperantia fugienda  sunt. 

Note  4. — An  adjective  standing  in  immediate  connection  with  two  substantives,  is 
either  repeated  with  each, — or  it  is  placed  immediately  before  or  after  the  first, — or  it 
follows  the  last.  Accordingly  we  may  say — meo  consilio  et  auctoritatemea ,  meo  consilio 
et  audoritate ,  consilio  meo  et  audoritate ,  and  consilio  et  audoritate  rnea. — Hominis  utili- 
\  tati  agri  omnes  et  maria  parent.  Metellum  multifilii  et  filioc  in  rogum  imposuerunt. 

When  an  adjective  belongs  to  two  or  more  substantives  jointly,  so  that  it  cannot 
be  applied  to  them  taken  separately,  it  is  always  put  in  the  plural ;  as,  Inter  se  con- 
traria  sunt  beneficium  et  injuria.  Grammatice  quondam  et  musice  j  undo?  fuerunt. 

- 

Note  5. — AYhen  hie,  is,  ille,  qui  (“  this,  that,  what”),  are  joined  to  a  following  sub¬ 
stantive  by  means  of  sum ,  or  a  verb  of  naming,  seeming,  deeming,  they  agree 
with  that  substantive  in  gender,  number,  and  case  ;  e.  g.,  “  That  was  the  very  cause 
of  the  war  Ea  ipsa  causa  belli  fuit.  Eas  divitias,  earn  bonam  famam  magnamque 
!  nohilitatem  putabantl  Qua?  est  ista  servitus 2  de  qua  loqueris  f  Hcbc  fuga  est ,  non  pro- 
fectio.  Idem  velle  atque  idem  nolle,  ea  demum2  firma  amicitia  est.  Qua?  pertinacia  qui- 
busdam,  eadem  aliis  constantia  •videturP 

When  the  interrogative  “  what  ?”  does  not  inquire  after  the  quality,  but  after  the 
very  nature  or  definition  of  a  thing,  it  must  be  expressed  by  quid  ;  as,  Quid  est  servi¬ 
tus  ?  Quid  est  Pens  ?  Quid  mors  ipsa  sit,  primum  videndum  est. 

Note  6. — When  the  words  “  beginning,  end” — “  top,  summit,  surface,  foot,  bot¬ 
tom” — “heart,  middle,  centre,  extremity” — “rest,  whole,” — are  to  be  translated  by 
the  adjectives  primus,  ultimus — summus ,  imus — intimus,  extremus — medius,  reliquus, 
universus, — in  Latin,  these  adjectives  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  fol¬ 
lowing,  and  are  put  with  it  in  the  case  in  which  the  words  beginning,  end,  top, 
etc.  themselves  would  be  placed  if  they  were  to  be  expressed  by  substantives ;  as, 
“  On  the  summit  of  the  Alps  the  snow  never  melts  ;”  In  summis  Alpibus  nix  nun- 
quam  liquescit.  Persuadere  conantur  mathematiei  ter  ram  in  medio  mundo  (in  the 
centre  of  the  world)  esse  sitam.  Mento  summam  (the  surface  of)  aquam  attingens, 
siti  enecatur  Tantalus.  Summus  (the  summit  of)  mans  a  T.  Labieno  tenebatur.  Alex- 
andriam  reliquamque  (the  rest  of)  EEgyptum  invisere  cupio.  Antistius  abdidit  se  in 
intimam  ( the  very  heart  of)  Macedoniam.  Medium  urbem  interfluit  amnis.  Tantum 
helium  Pompeius  extrema  hieme  apparavit,  ineunte  vere  suscepit,  media  cestate  confecit. 


*) That  they  thought  riches,  that....  a)  W  h  a  t  is  that  slavery  ....  *)  T  h  a  t 
i*  . . . ,  4)  W  h  at  seems  to  some  ....that  seems  to  others  .... 


84 


THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 


' 


III.  Of  the  Relative  with  its  Antecedent. 

Ego  qni  loquor. 

. 

§  89. — The  relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  number,  and 
person  •  but  the  case  depends  on  the  construction  of  its  own  clause  ;  as, 
u  I  who  am  speaking.’’ 

Arbores  serit  agricola  quarum  fructus  ipse  aspiciet  nunquam.  0  te 
ferreum,  quem  tanta  mala  non  moveant!  Nobis  quidem,  qui  te 
amamus ,  hoc  gratissimum  exit.  Adestote  animis,  qui  adestis  cor- 
poribus. 


Note  1. — When  the  antecedent  is  a  demonstrative  (hie,  is,  ills),  the  latter  is  com¬ 
monly  omitted,  especially  when  it  is  in  the  same  case  as  the  relative  ;  as,  Gontemnuntur 
merito  (ii),  qui  nee  sibi  nee  aliis  prosunt.  Lauda  (id),  quod  laudem  meretur.  JVobilis 
est  (is),  quem  sua  virtus  nobilitat. 

Note  2. — When  the  relative  refers  to  a  whole  clause,  it  is  put  in  the  neuter.  In 
this  case,  id  quod  or  quae  res,  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  simple  quod .  E.  g., 
Lacedcsmonii  Agim  regem,  quod  (or  id  quod)  nunquam  antea  apud  eon  acciderat, 
necaverunt.  Multcs  civitates  a  Gyro  defecevunt ,  quae  res  multcrum  bellorum  causa 
fait. 

Note  3. — When  the  relative  refers  to  two  or  more  antecedents,  it  agrees  with  them 
in  gender  and  number,  just  as  the  adjective  does  with  two  or  more  substantives. 
E.  g.,  Eomerus  et  Virgilius  quorum  carmina  miramur.  Eex  et  regina  qui  una  profecti 
sunt.  Ego  et  tu  qui  scribimus. 

When,  however,  the  antecedents  denote  things  and  are  of  different  genders,  the 
relative  is  regularly  put  in  the  neuter  plural  (as,  Otium  et  divitiaz  quae  prima  mortales 
putant ),  and  it  should  not  be  made  to  agree  with  the  nearest,  except  when  the  ante¬ 
cedents  express  similar  ideas,  or  when  the  relative  is  intended  to  refer  to  the  last 
only  ;  e.  g.,  Eos  f rages  atque  fructus  quos  terra  gignit ; — decus  et  gloria  quam  consecutus 
es; — naves  et  capiivi  qui  ad  Chiicm  capti  erant. 

Note  4. — The  antecedent  is  often  taken  from  its  own  sentence  and  put  in  the  rel¬ 
ative  clause  in  the  same  case  with  the  relative.  The  relative  clause  i3  then  com¬ 
monly  placed  first.  E.  g., 

Paulo  ante  accepi  litteras,  quas  ad  me  dedisti. 

Paulo  ante  accepi,  quas  ad  me  dedisti  litteras. 

Quas  ad  me  dedisti  litteras ,  paulo  ante  accepi. 

Ad  quas  res  aptissimi  erimus ,  in  Us  potissimum  elaborabimus ,  instead  of:  In  iis  rebus 
potissimum  elaborabimus,  ad  quas  aptissimi  erimus.  Eestice  in  quo  loco  nates  sunt,  ex 
to  se  non  commovent. 

A  similar  transposition  sometimes  takes  place,  when  the  antecedent  is  a  superla¬ 
tive  ;  e.  g.,  “  Of  the  many  most  glorious  and  joyous  days  which  P.  Scipio  witnessed 
in  the  course  of  his  life,  this  day  was  the  most  glorious,”  P.  Scipioni  ex  multis  diebus, 
quos  in  vita  celeberrimos  lastissimosque  vidit,  ille  dies  clarissimus  fuit.  Themistocles  de 
servis  suis  quem  habuit  fidelissimum,  ad  Xerxem  misit. 


THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 


85 


Note  5. — TLc  expression  “  he  was  the  first  (the  last,  the  only  one)  that . ,”  is 

commonly  contracted,  in  Latin,  into  one  sentence, — by  omitting  the  relative  and  the 
verb  sum  of  the  preceding  clause,  and  putting  the  adjectives  primus,  ultimus ,  solus , 
etc.,  with  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  they  refer,  in  the  case  in  which  the  relative 
would  otherwise  stand.  E.  g.,  “This  city  was  the  first  that  Caesar  approached,” 
Jianc  urbem  primam  Ccesar  adiit ,  instead  of:  Ilsec  urbs  fuit  prima  quarn  Caesar 
adiit.  TJnum  tex  sapientem  et  appellant  et  existimanU  Thales  Milesius  omnium  Gneco- 
rum  primus1  iefectionem  soils  praedixit. 

Note  6. — When  the  relative,  by  means  of  sum  or  a  verb  of  naming ,  deeming ,  etc.  is 
joined  to  a  substantive  of  a  different  gender  from  that  of  its  antecedent,  or  when  it 
refers  to  two  antecedents,  denoting  the  same  object,  but  of  different  genders,  it  may 
agree  with  either.  E.  g.,  Sempiterni  illi  ignes  quas  stellas  dicirnus.  Animal  hoc  sagax 
quem  vocamus  hominem.  Domicilia  conjuncta  quas  urbes  dicimus.  Thebes  quod  Boeotice 
caput  est. — F lumen  lihenus  qui  (or  quod)  in  Oceanum  ivfluit. 

Note  7. — When  the  relative  stands  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  it  is  frequently 
omitted  in  Latin.  The  verb  of  the  relative  clause  is  then  changed  into  its  correspond¬ 
ing  participle,  and  the  latter  made  to  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the  an¬ 
tecedent.  (flpjf”  If  the  relative  stands  in  the  accusative,  the  relative  clause  must  first 
be  changed  into  the  passive.) — E.  g.,  “  Think  of  death  which  always  threatens  thee 
Cogita  mortem  tibi  semper  imminentem.  Nemo  cunctam  intuens  terram  de  divina  provi- 
dentia  dubitabit.  Male  agent  is  animus 3  numquam  est  sine  metu.  Sudani  A  frigida 
potio  perniciosissima  est.  Felicitas  hominis  adhuc  viventis  non  minus  incerta  est  ac 
dubia ,  quam  militis  adhue  pugnantis  victoria.  Compara  tibi  divitias  perpetuo  dura- 
turas ,5  Adulator  aut  laudat  vituperanda ,  aut  vitupemt  laudanda. — Beneficiorum  a 
Deo  accept orum*  semper  memor  esto.  Timotheus  a  patre  acccptam  gloriarn 7  multis  auxit 
virtutibus. 

Sometimes,  when  sum,  esse ,  is  the  verb  of  the  relative  clause,  both  the  relative  and 
the  verb  sum  are  omitted,  the  predicate-noun  or  adjective  being  then  made  to  agree 
with  the  antecedent  accordingly;  as,  “  The  man  that  is  contented  with  his  lot,  is 
happy  Homo  sua  sorte  contentus,felix  est.  Multas  res  nobis  incognitas* posteri  sclent. 
Canem  tibi  infensum  mitigare  studes  :  quidni  et  hominem  ? 

When  the  relative  refers  to  the  person  included  in  a  possessive  pronoun,  the  pred¬ 
icate-noun  or  adjective  of  the  relative  clause  must  be  put  in  the  genitive  (see  §  13S)  ; 
e.  g.,  “  Thy  speech,  who  wert  once  my  preceptor,  is  approved  by  all Tua  pr  acceptor  is 
quondam  mei  oratio  omnibus  probat ur. 

Note  8. — The  rule  for  the  agreement  of  the  relative  with  its  antecedent,  applies 
also  to  the  following  correlatives  : 

idem — qui  (or  ac,  atque ),  “  the  same  as 

tails — qualis  (or  ac),  “such — as”  (of  quality); 

tantus — quantus,  “such — as,”  i.  e.,  as  great — as  (of  size). 

E.  g.,  “lie  is  the  same  as  {or  that)  he  has  ever  been  ;”  Idem  est  qui  (or  ac,  atque) 
semper  fuit.  lidem  abeunt  qui  venerunt.  Hoc  idem  est  ac  Mud.  Tails  es  quulem  te 


*)  You  are  the  only  one  whom  they  both .  2)  Thales  was  the  first  that 

foretold .  s)  The  mind  of  him  who  does  ill.  4)  To  him  who  is  perspiring. 

b)  that  will  last  for  ever.  6)  which  you  have  received  ....  Pass.,  which  have  been 
received  [by  you].  7)  the  glory  (which)  he  had  inherited  from  ....  B)  which  are 
unknown  to  us. 


36 


THE  FOUR  CONCORDS. 


semper  putabam.  Xerxes  cum  tantis  copiis  G-ra&ciam  invasit ,  quanta s  neque  antea  neqiu 
postea  hdbuit  quisquam.  Quanta  potui  celeritale  accurri ,  i.  e.,  edentate  tarda  quanta, 
potui ,  “  as  quick  as  possible.” 


IV.  Of  a  Substantive  with  a  Substantive 

Cyrus  res. 

§  90. — A  noun  used  to  explain  a  preceding  noun  or  pronoun  and  des¬ 
ignating  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put,  by  apposition,  in  the  same 
case  ;  as,  “  Cyrus,  the  king.” 

Apud  Herodotum ,  patrem  histories,  sunt  innumerabiles  f abides. 
Seleitcus,  rex  Syria? ,  Berenicen,  sororem  Ptolemcei,  regis  JEgypti  inter - 
fecit.  Marcellas  Syracusas ,  iirbem  pulcherrimam,  vi  consilioque 
cepit.  Tidlia,  delicice  nostres,  salutem  tibi  plurimam  adscribit.  Me, 
prceceptorem  vestrum,  pueri ,  audits.  Hoc  tibi  juventus  Bomana1 
indiciums  bellum. 

Note  1. — When  to  the  common  nouns  c  i  t  y,  i  s  1  a  n  d,  m  o  n  t  h,  the  proper  name  of 
a  city,  island,  or  month  is  added,  the  two  substantives  are  put  in  the  same  case, 
though  the  sign  “  of”  intervenes  ;  as,  Insula  Cyprus ,  insulam  Cyprum ,  in  insula  Cypro. 
Urbs  Iioma ,  urbem  Romam.  Mensis  Maius ,  rnense  Maio. 

Note  2. — When  urbs ,  civitas,  or  oppidum ,  is  placed  in  apposition  to  a  plural  name 
of  a  town,  the  verb  commonly  agrees  with  the  substantive  in  apposition  ;  as,  Tungri , 
civitas  Gallics ,  fontem  luibet  insignem.  Volsinii ,  oppidum  Tuscorum  opulent issimum, 
totum  concrematum  est  fulmine. 

Note  3. — When  the  noun  in  apposition  admits  of  two  forms,  one  masculine,  the 
other  feminine,  the  masculine  form  must  be  used,  when  the  preceding  noun  is  either 
masculine  or  neuter  ;  but  the  feminine,  when  the  former  is  feminine.  Thus  we  say  : 
Usus:  magister  egregius  ;  Vinum ,  cur  arum  expulsor  ;  Deus ,  consiliorum  meorum  adjutor 
etc. ;  but  we  must  say  :  Philosophia ,  magistra  morum ,  virtutis  indagairix  expultricqu-e 
vitiorum  ;  Assentatio ,  vitiorum  adjutrix. 

Note  4. — When  a  name  belongs  to  two  or  more  persons  in  common,  it  is  used  hut 
once,  generally  in  the  plural ;  as,  Lucius  et  Spurius  Afummii,  fratres.  Mihi  Gneius  et 
Publius  Scipiones fortunati  videbantur. — Thus  also  with  other  substantives,  as  Martia 
et  quarta  legiones  and  legio  Martia  et  quarto..  Quartam  et  Martiam  legiones  mecum 
fuiuras  putavi. 


‘)  i.  e.,  Hoc  tibi  bellum  nos,  juventus  Romana ,  indicimus. 


INTERCHANGE  OF  CONSTRUCTION. 


87 


CHAPTER  II. 

i.  The  intercharge  of  the  Active  mi  l  Passive  constructions. — 2.  The  English  conjunction  THAT. — 3.  The 
Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. — i.  Questions  and  Answers. 

I.  The  Interchange  of  the  Active  and  Passive  Constructions. 

§  91. — The  active  construction  is  made  passive,  by  changing 

the  Nominative  into  the  Ablative, 
the  Accusative  into  the  Nominative,  and 
the  active  voice  into  the  passive. 


§gpF°  In  changing  the  active  construction  into  the  passive,  and  vice  versa ,  the  mood 
and  tense  of  the  verb  remain  always  the  same,  but  the  number  and  person  depend  on 
the  new  nominative. — When  the  ablative  denotes  a  person  or  any  thing  p  ersoni- 
f  i  e  d,  the  preposition  ab  must  be  prefixed.  E.  g., 

Act.  Prceceptor  discipulos  monuit ;  Pass.  Discipidi  a  prceceptore 
rnoniti  sunt. — Act.  Sol  terrain  collustrat ;  Pass.  Terra  sole  (or  a  sole) 
collustratur. 


Note. — Instead  of  the  ablative  (of  the  Agent)  with  ab ,  the  dative  is  sometimes 
used  ;  e.  g.,  Difficillimum  est  facere  quod  omnibus  probet ur.  Iionesta  bonis  viris ,  non 
occulta  queeruntur.  Gui  7ion  sunt  auditoe  Demosthenis  vigilice  ? 

§  92. — The  passive  construction  is  made  active,  by  changing 

the  Nominative  into  the  Accusative, 
the  Ablative  into  the  Nominative,  and 
the  passive  voice  into  the  active. 

E.  g\,  Pass.  Impii  a  Deo  punientur  ;  Act.  Deus  impios  puniet. — 
Pass.  Esto  bonus  et  ab  omnibus  amaberis  ;  Act.  Esto  bonus  et  omnes 
te  amabunt. 


Note  1. — The  change  of  the  passive  construction  into  the  active  is  necessary,  when¬ 
ever  an  English  passive  verb  is  to  be  rendered  into  Latin  by  a  Deponent;  because 
deponent  verbs,  though  passive  in  form,  are  (with  very  few  exceptions)  but  active  in 
signification  and  do  not,  therefore,  admit  of  a  passive  construction.  E.  g.,  “  Cicero’s 


S3 


QUOD. 


eloquence  is  admired  (miror)  by  all ;”  Act.  “All  admire  Cicero’s  eloquence;”  Cue' 
ronis  eloquentiam  omnes  mirantur , — not,  Ciceronis  eloquentia  ab  omnibus  miratur, 

Note  2. — When  in  changing  the  active  construction  into  the  passive,  there  ap¬ 
pears  no  nominative,  the  verb  is  construed  impersonally,  that  is,  it  is  put  in  the 
od  person  sing.,  and  the  Participle,  if  the  tense  is  a  compound  one,  in  the  neuter  sin¬ 
gular ;  e.  g.,  “We  have  now  walked  enough;”  Satis  jam  (nos)  arabulaximus  ;  Pass. 
Satis  jam  ( a  nobis)  ambulatum  est. — Ad  Alpes  quum  pervenissent ;  Pass.  Ad  Alpes 
quum  ( ab  Us)  perventum  esset. 

II.  The  English  Conjunction  “that.” 

§  93. — The  English  conjunction  that  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  quod, 
ut,  or  quo  ;  and  that  not,  by  quod  non ,  ut  non ,  ne,  quin ,  or  quomi- 
nus. — Very  often  that  is  not  expressed  in  Latin  at  all,  and  then  the 
construction  of  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  takes  place. 

Note  1. — The  conjunctions  ut ,  quo ,  ne,  quin,  and  quominus ,  always  govern  the  Sub¬ 
junctive.  Quod  takes  the  Indicative,  when  the  speaker  or  writer  states  his  own 
opinion, — and  the  Subjunctive,  when  the  opinion  or  allegation  of  some  other  person 
is  expressed.  (Compare  §  199,  IV.) 

Note  2. — An  Infinitive  or  a  participial  noun  being  often  employed  in  English,  where 
in  Latin  the  Subjunctive  with  one  of  the  above-mentioned  conjunctions  is  used,  the 
pupil,  in  translating  English  sentences  into  Latin,  should  always  change  such  Infini¬ 
tives  and  participial  nouns — by  means  of  “  that”  or  “  because” — into  subordinate 
clauses,  but  so  that  a  principal  tense  (§  188)  in  the  leading  clause  be  followed  by  a 
principal  tense  in  the  subordinate  clause  ;  and  an  historical  tense  in  the  leading 
clause,  by  an  historical  tense  in  the  subordinate  clause.  E.  g., 

(Eng.)  I  come  to  see  you.  (Lat.)  I  come  that  I  may  see  you. 

(Eng.)  I  came  to  see  you.  (Lat.)  I  came  that  I  might  see  you. 

Gaudeo  quod  vales. 

§  94. — Quod  (“  that,”  “the  fact  that,”  11  because,”  or  “of  [in,  for]” 
with  a  participial  noun)  is  used  : 

1. )  When  the  clause  which  it  introduces,  contains  the  explanation  of 
a  former  statement,  or  when  it  is  a  purely  periphrastic  nominative,  as 
for  example,  in  the  sentence  :  “  The  fact  that  I  am  at  Rome  (=  my 
stay  at  Rome)  causes  suspicion  to  many.” — Such  explanatory  and  peri¬ 
phrastic  clauses  generally  refer  to  a  preceding  demonstrative,  such  as 
hoc ,  id,  illud ,  in  eo,  ex  eo  (or  hide),  ex  hoc  (or  hinc ),  ideo,  idcirco,  propter  ea , 
either  expressed  or  understood. 

2. )  After  the  expressions  bene  {male,  jucunde,  humaniter  . . . .)  facere  ; 
bene  {male,  commode,  percommode )  factum  est ,  accidit ,  evenit ;  preetereo 
and  mitto,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  pass  over  in  silence  and  generally  after 


UT. 


89 


adde ,  adjice,  and  accedit ,  “add  to  this,”  “to  this  must  be  added  that,” 
“  beside  (or,  in  addition  to)  this.” 

3.)  After  verbs  denoting  a  feeling  of  joy  or  pain,  as  gaudeo ,  lector, 
delector,  juv  at  me,  gratum  or  ju.cundum  mihi  est,  miror,  doleo,  angor,  solli- 
citor ,  succenseo,  indignor ,  cegre  ( graviter ,  indigne,  moleste )  fero,  and  also 
after  verbs  of  praising,  censuring,  accusing,  pardoning,  thanking,  consol¬ 
ing,  congratulating,  and  complaining.  E.  g.,  “I  am  glad  that  you  are 
well.” 

Magnum  benejicium  est  naturae,  quod  necesse  est  mori.1  Mihi  quidem 
videntur  homines  hac  re  maxirne  bclluis  preestare,  quod  loqui  possunt. 
Quod  Romce  sum ,  multis  suspicionem  movet.  Facis  fraterne ,2  quod  me 
hortaris.  Percommode  accidit  quod  Ccesarem  vidi.  Non  pigritia  facio,3 
quod  non  mea  manu  ad  te  scribo.  Quod  abes,  gratulor.  Adde  hue  quod 
litterce  tuce  nullo  modo  perferri  potuerunt.  Quod  spiratis,  quod  vocem 
mittitis,  indignantur.  Merito  reprehenderis ,  quod  non  scrip  sis  ti.* 

Note  1. — Verbs  expressing  an  affection  or  feeling  of  the  mind,  as  gaudeo ,  doleo , 
miror ,  etc.,  are  more  frequently  construed  with  the  Ace.  c.  Inf. ;  as,  Gaudeo  tibi 
jucundas  esse  meas  litteras.  Macedones  indigne  ferebant  Eumenem  sibi  anteponi.  Ego 
tc  abfuisse  tamdia  a  nobis,  et  dolui  quod  carui  fructu  jucundissimo  consuetudinis ,  et 
icetor  quod  absens  omnia  es  consecutus. 

Note  2. — Accedit  is  sometimes  (though  rarely)  followed  by  ut ;  as,  ‘‘Besides  being 
old,  he  was  also  blind  Ad  hominis  senectutem  accedebat  ut  coccus  esset. 

With  excusare ,  the  thing  excused  is  expressed  by  quod ;  and  the  excuse  alleged, 
either  by  a  noun  in  the  accusative  or  by  the  Ace.  c.  Inf.  ;  e.  g.,  “  He  pleaded  illness 
as  his  excuse  for  not  having  come  yesterday  Quod  heri  non  venerit,  morbum  excu- 
savit ,  or  excusavit  se  ccgrotasse. 

Note  3. — The  pronouns  hoc,  id,  illud ,  are  often  used  pleonastically  with  verbs  that 
require  ut  or  ne  after  them  ;  as,  lUad  te  moneo  ut  in  munere  tuo  sis  diligentissirnus. 
Te  illud  primum  rogo ,  ne  quid  invitus  mea  causa  facias. 

Cura  ut  convalescas. 

§  95. — UT  is  used  in  the  following  cases  : 

1. )  When  an  intention  (“  in  order  that,”  or  “  in  order  to” — with  the 
Inf.)  or  a  consequence  (“  so  that,”  or  11  so  [such]  as  to” — with  the  Inf.) 
is  expressed.  In  the  latter  case  ut  is  always  preceded  by  such  a  word  as 
sic ,  ita,  adeo,  tarn,  tantus,  tot ,  talis ,  ejusmodi ,  or  is  (for  tails')  either  ex¬ 
pressed  or  understood  ; 

2. )  After  verbs  signifying  to  make,  effect,  care ,  strive,  endeavour,  re- 


•)  The  necessity  of  dying.  2)  You  act  a  brother’s  part  in  ... .  3)  It  is  not  from  in¬ 
dolence  that  . . . .,  or  the  fact  that  ....  does  not  arise  from  indolence.  4)  for  not  having 
written. 


90 


UT. 


solve,  beg,  request ,  advise ,  persuade,  encourage,  excite,  compel,  commi&ion , 
and  command  (the  verb  jubeo  excepted),  because  clauses  dependent  on 
these  verbs  generally  express  an  intended  effect ; 

3. )  After  the  phrases  in  eo  esse ,  id  [illud)  ago ,  opera m  do,  animum 
(or  in  animum )  induco,  consilium  capio,  nihil  antiquius  habeo  (or  duco ) 
quam ,  consuetudo  [mos  or  moris)  est,  consuetudo  (natura)  fert ,  lex  est,  hoc 
consilio,  hac  condi tione  ; 

4. )  After  the  impersonal  expressions  :  “hence  it  is,”  be  it  that,”  “it 
is  the  case,”  “  it  happens,”  etc.,  est,  futurum  est,  esto,  fit,  accidit,  con- 
tingit,  evenit ,  usu  venit,  occurrit,  fore  or  futurum  esse,  restat,  superest , 
reliquum  [extremum,  prope  or  proximum)  est.  E.  g.,  “Take  care  that 
you  get  well.” 

Edimus  ut  vivamus ,  non  vivimus  ut  edamus.  Tanta  vis  probitatis  est 
ut  earn  vel  in  hoste  diligamus.  Sol  ejficit  ut  omnia  fioreant .  Enitar  ut 
vincam.  Nihil  antiquius  hahui  quam  ut  te  convenirem.  Fieri  protest  ut 
fallar.  Restat  ut  de  litterarum  utilitate  loquar.  Vetus  est  lex  ut  idem 
amici  velint.  Equidem  in  me  ipso  scepissime  experior 1  ut  exalbescam  in 
principiis  dicendi  et  iota  mente  atque  omnibus  artubus  contremiscam. 

Note  1. — The  verb  cogo,  instead  of  ut  with  the  Subj,,  sometimes  takes  the  Infinitive 
after  it. — Studeo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  wish,”  almost  exclusively  takes  the  Inf.  or  the 
Ace.  c.  Inf. — Even  impero ,  “  I  command,”  is  occasionally  construed  with  the  Acc.  c. 
Inf.,  when  the  latter  is  passive.  E.  g.,  Quis  te  cogit  abire  ?  Omnibus  se  gratum  videri 
studet.  Dux  urbem  diripi  imperavit. 

Note  2. — Verbs  of  resolving,  as  statuo ,  constituo,  decerno ,  animum  induco ,  con¬ 
silium  capio ,  are  generally  followed  by  the  Infinitive,  when  the  subordinate  and  lead¬ 
ing  clauses  have  the  same  subject.  Thus  we  may  say  both,  Constituerunt  naves  con- 
scendere  and  ut  naves  conscenderent ,  “  They  resolved  to  embark  on  board  their  ships.” 
But  we  can  say  only,  Constituerunt  ut  nemo  navem  conscenderet ,  because  here  the 
subjects  are  different. — Consilium  capio ,  besides  ut  and  the  Infinitive,  takes  also  the 
Genitive  of  the  Gerund. 

Note  3. — Verbs  of  asking,  advising,  and  reminding,  and  also  decerno, 
take  sometimes  the  Subjunctive  without  ut ;  as,  Caesar  consolatus  Divitiacum  rogat 
finem  orandi  faciat.  Senatus  decrevit  darent  operam  Consules  ne  quid  respublica  detri- 
menti  caperet. — This  omission  of  ut  regularly  takes  place  after  velim,  nolim,  malim, 
vellem,  nollem ,  mallem ,  and  the  Imperative  fac. 

The  phrase  in  eo  esse ,  “  to  be  about  or  on  the  point  of. . . .”  is  generally  construed 
impersonally  ;  as,  In  eo  est  ut pontem  rescindant ; — in  eo  fuit  ut  palam  reprehen dereris  ; 
— in  eo  est  ut  abeamus. — The  personal  construction  ( in  eo  sunt  ut  pontem  rescindant — in 
eo  fuisti  ut  palam  reprehendereris — in  eo  sumus  ut  abeamus )  is  rare  and  should  be 
avoided. 

Verbs  of  advising,  persuading,  encouraging,  impelling,  are, 
by  way  of  exception,  sometimes  construed  with  the  simple  Infinitive,  especially  in  the 


J)  equivalent  to  Saepissime  mihi  accidit,  u( 


•  •  • 


QUO. 


91 


poets  and  later  prose  writers ;  e.  g.,  Reipubliice,  dignitas  hcec  minora  relinquere  lior - 
tatur.  Persuasit  Dionysio  libertatem  reddere  Syracusanis ,  etc. — Such  constructions, 
however,  should  not  bo  imitated. 

Note  i. — Facio  ut  with  the  Subj.  often  stands  periphrastically  for  the  simple  Indica¬ 
tive. — In  the  sense  of  “  to  represent  or  introduce,”  facio  is  construed  with  the  Parti¬ 
ciple  or  also  with  the  Infinitive  passive.  E.  g.,  Invitus  quidem  feci  ut  L.  Flaminium 
e  Senatu  ejicerem ,  instead  of  invitus  ejeci.  Xenophon  facit  ( fingit )  Socratem  disputuntem. 
Isocratem  Plato  admirabiliter  laudari  a  Socrate  facit. 

The  Imperative/ac,  in  the  sense  of  “  suppose  ejfcio ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  prove,” 
“  infer  persuadeo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  convince  a  person  of  the  truth  of  something 
decerno ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  judge,”  and  moneo,  admoneo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  remind 
a  person  that  a  thing  is”  (without  intending  that  a  thing  be  done),  are  followed  by 
the  Ace.  c.  Inf.  ;  as,  Fac  rem  ita  se  habere.  In  his  libris  vult  effcere ,  animos  esse  im- 
mortales.  Mihi  nunquam  persuadebis ,  animum  posse  interire.  Unum  illud  te  moneo , 
artem  sine  assiduitate  dicendi  non  multum  juvare.  Mea  virtute  atque  diligentia  perdi- 
torum  hominum  patefactam  esse  conjurationem  decrevistis. 

Censeo,  “to  decree,”  “to  think,”  “  to  vote  for  or  give  one’s  opinion  to  the  effect 
that,” — is  construed  with  uty  the  Ace.  c.  Inf.,  and  frequently  with  esse  and  the  Parti¬ 
ciple  in  dus  •  as,  Plerique  censebant  ut  noctu  iter  facerent.  Quid  mihi  animi  in  na - 
I'igando  censes  fore  ?  Erant  sentential  quae  castra  oppugnanda  censerent.  Ego  vero  censeo 
Carthaginem  esse  delendam. 

Note  5. — The  English  “  instead  of,”  far  from,”  or  “  so  far  from,”  is  often  expressed 
in  Latin  by  tantum  abest  ut — ut ;  e.  g.,  “I  am  so  far  from  blaming  him  that  I  rather 
praise  him,”  or  “  Ear  from  blaming  him,  I  rather  praise  him  ;”  Tantum  abest  ut  eum 
reprehendam  ut  contra  (or  etiam , — but  not  potius)  laudem ,  or  Laudo  eum ,  tantum  abest 
ut  reprehendam. — Tantum  abest  ut  hi  voluptates  consectentur,  ut  etiam  curas ,  sollicitudi- 
nes ,  vigilias  p  erf  erant,  or  Tantum  abest  ut  hi  voluptates  consectentur ,  etiam  curas ,  solli- 
citudines,  vigilias  perferunt. 

If  the  tense  of  the  English  leading  verb  is  past,  the  formula  tantum  abest  ut  changes 
to  tantum  aberat  ( abfuit )  ut ;  if  future,  to  tantum  aberit  ut ;  as,  “Instead  of  being 
praised,  you  will  be  blamed  Tantum  aberit  ut  lauderis  ut  etiam  reprehendaris. 

Repetam  quo  melius  intelligas. 

§  96. — QUO  (“that  hereby”  [ut  eo],  “in  order  that  so  much  the”)  is 
generally  used  when  an  intention  or  purpose  is  expressed,  and  a  com¬ 
parative  enters  the  sentence  ;  as,  “  I  will  repeat  that  you  may  under¬ 
stand  the  better.” 

Medico  aliquid  dandum  est ,  quo  sit  studiosior.  Legem  brevem  esse 
oportet  quo  facilius  ab  imperitis  teneutur.  Obducuntur  cortice  arbores 
quo  sint  a  frigore  et  calore  tutiores.  Ager  aratur  et  iteratur  quo  meliores 
fructus  possit  et  grandiores  edere. 

Note. — Eon  quo  (or  non  quod ,  non  eo  quod )  means  “  not  as  if ;”  and  non  quin  (or  non 
quo  non ,  non  quod  non),  “not  as  if  not;”  e.  g.,  Ad  te  litteras  dedi  non  quo  haberem 
magnopere  quod  scriberem,  sed  ut  loquerer  tecum  absens.  Eon  quin  confiderem  diligenticB 
tuce,  sed  quia  (or  quod)  etc. 


92 


NE.  QUIN, 


Cave  ne  cadas. 

§  91. — NE  (“in  order  that  not,”  “lest,”  “in  order  not  to” — with 
the  Infinitive)  is  used  when  a  negative  intention  or  purpose  is  expressed  : 
hence,  in  general,  when  any  thing  is  forbidden,  prevented,  or  guarded 
against  by  way  of  begging ,  entreating ,  endeavoring ,  advising ,  persuading , 
exciting ,  commanding .  ( jpgy**  Instead  of  the  simple  ne,  Cicero  frequently 
uses  ut  ne.)  E.  g.,  “  Take  care  lest  you  fall.” 

Gallinoe  pennis  fovent  pullos  ne  frigore  Icedantur.  Animum  adver- 
tamus  oportet  ne  callida  assentatione  capiamur.  Fugiendum  est  Mud  ne 
offeramus  nos  periculis  sine  causa.  Themistocles  qucerebat  angustias  ne 
multitudine  circumiretur .  Tu  cura  ut  ne  scintilla  teterrimi  belli  re- 
linquatur. 

Note  1. — NE  regularly  stands  with  prohibitive  Imperatives  and  also  in  formulas  of 
swearing  and  protesting.  E.  g.,  Ne  festina.  Ne  animum  desponde.  Crab  rones  ne 
irrita. — Ne  sim  salvus  (or  ne  vivam)  si  aliter  scribo  ac  sentio. 

Note  2. — When  a  clause  introduced  by  ut  or  ne,  is  to  be  continued  by  another — • 
negative  clause,  the  latter  is  generally  introduced  by  neve  or  neu ,  more  rarely  by 
neque.  E.  g.,  Caesar  milites  hortatus  est ,  vti  suae  pristince  virtutis  memoriam  retinerent , 
neu  perturbarentur  animo.  Thrasybulus  legem  tulit  ne  quis  ante  actarum  rerum  ac~ 
cusaretur,  neve  multaretur. 

Note  3. — In  clauses  expressing  an  intended  effect,  the  English  “  that  nobody,”  “  that 
nothing,”  “  that  no,”  “  that  never,”  are  rendered  by  ne  quis ,  ne  quid ,  ne  ullus,  and 
ne  unquam  ; — but  in  clauses  expressing  a  mere  consequence  without  any  previous  in¬ 
tention,  “  that  not”  is  rendered  by  vt  non  ;  “  that  nobody,”  by  ut  nemo  /  “  that  noth¬ 
ing,”  “that  no,”  “that  never,”  by  ut  nihil,  ut  nullus,ut  nunquam.  E.  g.,  Consoles 
edixervnt  ne  quis  urbe  excederet.  Vide  ne  quid  desit. — Turn  forte  agrotabam  ut  ad 
nuptias  tuas  venire  non  possem.  Quis  tarn  contentus  vivit  ut  jam  nihil  desideret? 

Note  4. — With  verbs  of  fearing  “  that”  must  be  rendered  by  ne ,  and  “  that  not,” 
by  ut, — and  the  English  Future  by  the  Latin  Present  or  Imperfect.  Instead  of  ut,  ne 
non  is  sometimes  used. 

E.  g.,  Timeo  ne  eat,  I  fear  that  lie  will  go  (i.  e.,  1  wish  he  may  not  go). 

Timeo  ut  eat,  I  fear  that  he  will  not  go  (i.  e.,  I  wish  he  may  go). 

Vereor  ne  labores  tuos  augeam.  Favor  ceperat  milites  ne  mortiferum  esset  Scipionis 
xulnus. — Avarus  semper  veretur  ut  satis  habeat.  Timeo  vt  pax  firma  sit. — Timeo  ne  non 
impetrem.  Union  vereor  ne  Senatus  Pompeium  nolit  (=  vt  velit)  dimittere. 

When  no  wish  or  desire  is  implied,  verbs  of  fearing  are  followed  by  the  Infinitive; 
t.  g.,  Non  timeo  dicere.  Vereor  laudare  prcesentem. 

Non  possum  quin  exclamem. 

§  98. — QUIN  (“that  not,”  “but  that,”  or  “without”  before  a  par¬ 
ticipial  noun)  is  used,  in  general,  after  negative  sentences  and  such  in- 


QUIN. 


93 


terrogative  clauses  as  expect  a  negative  answer. — In  particular,  quin 
stands 

1. )  Instead  of  qui  non ,  quce  non ,  quod  non ,  after  nemo ,  nullus ,  nihil, 
vix,  cegre — est,  invenitur ,  reperitur  ;  quis  est  ?  ecquis  est  ?  numquis 
est  ? 

2. )  After  facere  non  possum  (or  simply  non  possum),  fieri  non  potest ; 
nulla  causa  or  nihil  causce  est,  quid  causce  est ?  nihil  (gpaulum  [not 
paruni],  haud  multum,  haud  procul)  abest  y  non,  vix,  cegre — abstineo  or 
me  contineo  ;  tenere  me  or  temperare  mihi  non  possum,  “  I  cannot  refrain 
from  nihil  prcetermitto,  “  I  leave  nothing  undone  as,  “  I  cannot  help 
crying  out,”  or  “  I  cannot  but  cry  out.” 

3. )  In  the  sense  of  "  that”  or  “  but  that,”  after  non  dubito ,  non  est 
dubium,  dubitari  non  potest,  nemo  dubitat ,  quis  dubitat  ? — and  some¬ 
times,  instead  of  the  more  usual  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  after  quisignorat?  and 
negari  non  potest. 

Nunquam  accedo  quin  abs  te  abeam  doctior.  Nihil  causce  est1  quin 
idem  tibi  liceat.  Nemo  est  tarn  bonus  quin  peccet  inter  dum?  Dies  fere 
nullus  est  quin  (or  quo  non)  ad  te  scribam.  Facere  non  possum 3  quin 
rideam.  Nihil  abest*  quin  sim  miserrimus.  Paulum  abfuif  quin  cade- 
rem.  Ego  nihil  prcetermisi6  quin  Pompeium  a  Gcesaris  conjunctione 
avocarem. 


Note  1. — Qui  non  and  quin  are  used  indiscriminately  after  nemo  est ,  nullus  est ,  nihil  est , 
etc.  Hence  we  may  say  both,  Quis  est  quin  cernat  and  quis  est  qui  non  cernat  ?  “  Who  is 
there  that  does  not  see  ?” — But  when  after  these  and  other  negative  expressions,  the 
particle  non  either  belongs  to  some  particular  word,  and  not  to  the  leading  verb  of  the 
sentence,  or  when  it  is  used  emphatically,  qui  non  and  ut  non  must  be  used  respect¬ 
ively,  and  not  quin.  E.  g.,  Non  adeo  imperitus  sum  ut  nesciam  (not  quin  sciam). 
Adhuc  neminem  cognovi  poet  am,  qui  sibi  non  optimus  videretur.  Tu  non  potuisti  ullo 
modo  facere  ut  mihi  Mam  epistolam  non  mitteres.  Fieri  non  potest  ut  Deus  non  sit 
beatissimus. 

Note  2. — Non  dubito  is  sometimes  construed  with  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  especially  in 
Nepos  and  later  writers.  When  followed  by  a  negative,  it  is  equivalent  to  credo  or 
certus  sum  ;  as,  Nunc  mihi  non  est  dubium,  quin  legiones  venturce  non  sint,  “  Now  1  am 
sure  that  the  legions  will  not  come.”  Bubitandum  non  est,  quin  nunquam possit  utili- 
tas  cum  honestate  contendere,  “We  must  believe  that  utility,  etc.” 

The  English  “  I  doubt  whether”  is  expressed  by  dubito  num,  dubito  sitne ,  dubito 
utrum — an,  dubito  sitne — an;  as,  “I  doubt  whether  I  should  give  you  the  same  ad¬ 
vice  Dubito  num  idem  tibi  suadere  debeam.  Beum  esse  qui  dubitet,  haud  sane  in - 
telligo  cur  non  idem  sol  sit  an  nullus  sit,  dubitare  possit. 


*)  There  is  no  reason.  2)  as  not  to .  3)  I  cannot  but ....  or  I  cannot  help . . . . 

‘)  Nothing  is  wanting  to  make  me  ....  6)  I  was  near  (not  far  from  or  within  a  little 
of)  falling.  ®)  I  did  all  in  my  power. 


91- 


Q  HOMES  US. 


The  English  “  I  doubt  that”  is  rendered  by  dubito  num  with  the  Subjunctive  ;  as, 
“  I  doubt  that  this  is  the  ease Dubito  num  res  ita  se  habeat. 

Dubito  and  non  dubito ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  hesitate,”  “  to  scruple,”  are  followed  by 
the  Infinitive  |  as,  Non  dubito  ajjirmare.  Eumenes  non  dubitavit  prcelium  statim  com- 
mittere. 

Note  3. — To  render  the  English  “without”  before  a  participial  noun — by  quin ,  it  is 
necessary  that  the  preceding  sentence  be  negative.  If  this  is  not  the  case,  some  other 
construction  must  be  employed,  for  which  see  §  221,  HI.  8. 

Note  4. — Quin  is  sometimes  used  adverbially  in  the  sense  of  “  nay,”  “  oven,” — and 
sometimes  as  a  particle  of  encouragement  in  the  sense  of  “  why  not ;”  as,  Credibile  non 
est  quantum  scriham  die ,  quin  etiam  noctibus.  Quin  conscendimus  equosf  i.  e.,  conscen- 
damus  equos  ! — It  also  stands  with  Imperatives  in  the  sense  of  “well,”  “pray  as, 
Quin  audi  !  Quin  die  uno  verbo  ! 

Quid  obstat  quominus  earn? 

§  99. — QUQMIMJS  (“  in  order  that  not,”  usually  “  from”  with  a  par¬ 
ticipial  noun)  stands  after  verbs  of  hindrance,  as  deterrere ,  impedire , 
intercede re,  obstare ,  officere,  obsistere ,  prohibere,  recusare ,  repugnare ,  per 
me  stat,  per  me  fit,  non  pugno,  nihil  moror ,  and  others  of  the  same  mean¬ 
ing  ;  as,  “  What  prevents  me  from  going  ?”  Lit.  What  stands  in  the 
way  by  which  I  should  go  the  less  ? 

Lex  naturce  prohibet  quominus  alteri  noceamus.  Injirma  valetudo  me 
tenuit  quominus  ad  vos  venirem.1  Per  Trebonium  stetit  quominus  oppido 
potirentur .2  Non  Isocrati  quominus  haberetur  summits  orator ,  ojfccit , 
quod  infinnitate  vocis,  ne  in  publico  dicer et,  impediebatur. 

•s 

I  Note. — Verbs  of  hindrance  are  sometimes  followed  by  ne,  and  when  a  negative 
precedes,  even  by  quin. — Non  impedio,  non  prohibeo,  non  inter dico,  however,  are 
usually  construed  with  quominus. 

Impedio ,  recuso,  deterreo ,  and  especially  proldbeo,  are  also  found  with  the  Infinitive  ; 
e.  g.,  Tux  me  laerimee  prohibent  neplura  diearn.  Recusare  non  possum  quin  a  me  dis- 
sentiatis .3  Non  recuso  mori.  llcec  commemorare  pudore  deterreor. 

III.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. 

§  100. — The  conjunction  that  is  frequently  left  untranslated  in  Latin, 
and  then  the  construction  of  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  takes 
place. 

The  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  consists  in  leaving  out  the  con¬ 
junction  that,  and  putting  the  nominative  after  that  into  the  accusative, 
and  the  verb  into  the  Infinitive,  of  the  same  tense. 


J)  prevented  me  from  visiting  you.  ?)  It  was  owing  to,  or  it  was  T’s  fault  that. .  . . 
sj  I  cannot  object  to  vour  dissenting  from  me. 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 


95 


Patet  Deum  esse. 

§  101. — The  construction  of  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is 
used 

1. )  After  the  verbs  sentiendi  and  declarandi ; 

2. )  After  jubeo,  “X  bid,”  and  veto,  “I  forbid 

3. )  After  the  expressions  denoting  “  it  is  clear,”  “it  is  known,’7  “it  is 
evident,”  etc., — constat ,  patet ,  apparet,  credibile  ( apertum ,  certum ,  manifes- 
tum)  est,intelligitur,percipitur,  memorice  proditum  est,  fama  fert ,  spes  est,. 
rumor  est ,  opinio  est ,  and  the  like  :  as,  “  It  is  evident  that  God  exists.77 

Those  verbs  are  called  verbs  sentiendi,  which  denote  the  exercise  either  of  our  senses 
or  our  intellectual  powers  ;  as,  to  see,  hear,  feel,  think,  understand,  perceive,  hope,  re¬ 
member,  forget,  judge,  suspect ,  believe,  imagine ,  be  convinced,  know,  conclude ,  consider , 
reflect — and  the  like. 

Those  verbs  are  called  verbs  declarandi,  which  denote  the  communication  of  thought 
by  way  of  speaking,  writing,  etc. ;  as,  to  say,  relate ,  write,  inform,  reveal,  betray,  re¬ 
port,  shoio,  conceal,  answer,  a  firm,  deny,  announce,  promise,  pretend ,  prove,  witness, 
swear,  threaten ,  and  the  like. 

Democritus  dicit  innumerabiles  esse  mundos.  Aristoteles  docet  poetam 
Orpheum  nunquam  fuisse.  Scribit  meas  litteras  magnum  apud  te  pon- 
dus  habituras  esse.  Amicitice  nostros  memoriam  spero  sempiternam  fore. 
—  Videmus  Dei  providentia  mundum  administrari.  Existimare  debes 
omnium  oculos  in  te  esse  conjectos.  Patet  hominum  causa  factam  esse 
terrain.  Spero  consilium  ineitm  tibi  probatum  iri. 

Note  1. — When  a  verb  sentiendi  or  declarandi  is  parenthetically  inserted  in  a  sen¬ 
tence,  or  when  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  either  drawn  into  the 
principal  clause  or  introduced  before  the  Infinitive  by  the  sign  “for,”  the  proposi¬ 
tion  ought  to  be  arranged  so  that  the  verb  sentiendi  or  declarandi  be  placed  before 
“that,”  and  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  after  “  that.”  E.  g.,  “  Ctesar, 
I  think,  acted  well,”  i.  e.,  “  I  think  that  Caesar  acted  well.”  Thus, 

Livy  relates  of  Cato  that  he _  f  (  Livy  relates  that  Cato _ 

It  is  right  for  you  to  obey.  ( It  is  right  that  you  should  obey. 

Note  2. — When  a  verb  sentiendi  or  declarandi  is  followed  by  a  simple  Infinitive, 
resolve  the  latter  into  a  subordinate  clause  with  “  that ;”  thus, 

You  think  to  understand  it.  J*  j  You  think  that  you  understand  it. 

He  pretended  to  be  sick.  ( He  pretended  that  he  was  sick. 

Translate  the  English  “  he,”  “  she,”  and  “  they”  by  sui ,  sibi,  se ,  when  they 
refer  to  the  nominative  of  the  leading  clause  ;  but  by  is,  ea,  id,  when  they  do  not  refer 
to  that  nominative  ;  e.  g.,  “  Cains  thinks  that  he  acted  wisely;  but  I  think  (that)  he 
acted  unwisely ;”  Cuius  putat  se  prudenter  egisse,  ego  vero  eum  imprudenter  egisse 
txistimo. 


96 


Accusative  with  infinitive. 


Note  3. — After  verba  of  hoping,  promising,  swearing,  and  threatening, 
the  English  Infinitive  Present  is  generally  rendered  by  the  Infinitive  Future  ;  as,  “  I 
hope  to  return  soon”  (=  that  I  shall  soon  return) ;  Spero  me  brevi  r  edit  arum  esse. 
“  He  promised  to  come  to-morrow”  (=  that  he  would  come)  ;  Promisit  se  eras  veniu- 
rum  esse. — “  Kegulus  swore  to  return  to  Carthage”  (—  that  he  would  return) ;  Regulus 
juravit  se  Carthaginem  rediturum. — “  The  general  threatens  to  plunder  the  city” 
(=that  he  will  plunder) ;  Dux,  minatur  se  urbem  direpturum  (esse). 

PF°  The  English  “  would”  after  a  past  tense  generally  denotes  futurity. 

Instead  of  the  Infinitive  Future,  both  act.  and  pass.,  fore  vt  (=  futurum  esse  ut) 
with  the  Subjunctive  Pres,  or  Imperf.  may  also  be  used,  and  this  circumlocution  is 
even  necessary,  whenever  the  verb  of  the  subordinate  clause  wants  the  Supine.  Thus 
we  can  say  Mihi  persuasum  estfore  aliquando  ut  omnis  Me  mvndus  defag  ret,  as  well  as 
Mi  hi  per  suasum  est  omnem  hunc  mundum  aliquando  esse  defagraturum.  Exauditri  vox 
est  futurum  esse  ut  Roma  caperetur ,  and  Exaudita  vox  est  Romam  captum  iri. — But  we 
can  only  say :  Video  te  velle  in  codum  migrare  et  spero  fore  ut  canting  at  id  nobis.  Te 
co  ns  tardier,  tuce  puto  fore  ut  nunquam  pceniteat. 

Note  4. — When  in  the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  two  accusatives  conic  to¬ 
gether,  and  from  this  circumstance  an  ambiguity  is  likely  to  arise,  the  subordinate 
clause  must  first  be  made  passive  ;  as, 

(Eng.)  It  is  certain  that  Milo  killed  Clodius. 

(Lat.)  It  is  certain  that  Clodius  was  killed  by  Milo. 

Constat  Clodium  a  Milone  interfectum  esse ,  not  Milonem  Clod'mm  interfecisse,  because 
from  this  text  we  would  not  know  which  of  the  two  accusatives  is  the  acc.  of  the  sub 
ject,  and  which  that  of  the  object; — in  other  words,  we  would  not  know  whether 
Milo  killed  Clodius,  or  Clodius  Milo. — Thus,  Quod  scribis  te  a  Caesare  quotidie  plus 
diligi  (not  te  Ceesarem  plus  diligere)  immortaliter  gaudeo.  Nunquam  auditum  est  croco - 
dilurn  violatum  esse  cib  vEgyptio  (not  crocodilum  PEgyptium  violasse).  But  where  no 
such  ambiguity  is  to  be  apprehended,  two  accusatives  may  well  stand  together  ;  as, 
Spero  te  cum  voluptate  hunc  librum  perlecturum  esse.  Quis  non  videt  Deurn  omn<.m  liunc 
mundum  sapientissime  gubernare  ?  Spero  me  brevi  vos  (or  mairem  vieam)  visurum  esse. 
Legimus  Alexandrum  captivas  esse  consolatum. 

Note  5. — A  past  tense  after  a  present  is  always  rendered  by  the  Infinitive  Perfect; 
as,  “  lie  says  that  it  pleased  him  Dicit  sibi  placuisse. 

A  past  tense  after  another  past  tense,  is  rendered — sometimes  by  the  Infinitive 
Perfect  and  sometimes  by  the  Infinitive  Present.  It  is  rendered  by  the  Inf.  Perf., 
when  the  notion  expressed  by  the  verb  after  that,  is  prior  to  the  notion  expressed  by 
the  verb  before  that ;  and  by  the  Inf.  Present,  when  the  notions  expressed  by  the  two 
verbs  arc  simultaneous,  that  is,  when  they  exist  together.  E.  g., 

He  said  that  it  pleased  him  ;  dixit  sibi  placuisse. 

He  said  that  it  pleased  him  ;  dixit  sibi  placer e. 

Here,  sibi  placuisse  means  that  he  was  pleased  previously,  that  is,  some  time  before 
his  saying  it ;  and  sibi placere,  that  he  was  pleased  at  the  very  time  he  said  it. 

Note  6. — The  Infinitive  form — urum  esse  is  used  in  the  following  three  cases; 
1.)  When  we  wish  to  express  mere  f  u  tu  ri  ty  ;  as,  “I  think  (that)  I  shall  be  able 
to  pay  ;”  Puto  me  solvendo  par  em  futurum  esse. — 2.)  When  mi  intention,  a  w  i  s  h, 
a  being  ab  o  ut,  is  to  be  expressed  ;  e.  g.,  “  He  says  that  he  has  no  mind  to  do 
it;”  Negat  se  id  facturum  esse.  “  It  is  rumored  that  the  ambassadors  are  about  to 
return  ;”  Rumor  est  legatos  domum  redituros  esse. — 3.)  In  hypothetical  clauses, 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 


97 


to  denote  what  under  a  certain  condition,  either  expressed  or  understood,  would 
take  place;  e.  g.,  “I  think  he  would  give,  if  he  had;”  Puto  eum  daturum  esse  si 
haberet. 

The  Infinitive  form — urum  fuisse  should  never  be  used  to  express  mere  futurity. 
A  state  or  an  action  completed  in  future  time,  is  expressed — actively  by  fore  ut  with 
the  Subjunctive  Perf.  or  Pluperf.,  and — passively  by  fore  with  the  Participle  Perfect. 
E.  g.,  “I  hope  you  will  have  finished  the  business  to-morrow  at  this  time  Spero 
fore  ut  eras  hoc  ipso  tempore  rem  confeceris.  Credebam  fore  ut  tunc  epistolam  scripsisses. 
Spero  eras  hoc  ipso  tempore  rem  confectam  fore ,  or  Non  dubito  quin  eras  hoc  ipso  tem¬ 
pore  confecta  jam  res  futura  sit. 

The  Infinitive  form — urum  fuisse  is  used,  however,  like  the  form — urum  esse ,  in  the 
following  two  cases  :  1.)  When  an  intention,  a  wish,  a  b  e  i  n  g  a  b  o  u  t,  is  to- 

be  expressed ;  as,  “  I  know  that  you  had  the  intention  to  write;”  Scio  te  scripturum 
fuisse. — 2.)  In  hypothetical  clauses,  to  denote  what  under  a  certain  condition, 
either  expressed  or  understood,  would  have  taken  place ;  as,  “I  think  he  would  have 
given,  if  he  had  had;”  Credo  eum  daturum  fuisse  si  habuisset. — Stantes  plaudebant  in 
re  ficta  y  quid  in  vera  facturos  fuisse  arbitramur  ?  Pollio  Asinius  Ccesarem  suos  rescrip - 
turum  et  correcturum  commentaries  fuisse  existimat  (sc.  si  diutius  vixisset). 

To  express  passively  what  under  a  certain  condition  would  have  taken  place,  the 
circumlocution  with  futurum  fuisse  lit  and  the  Subjunctive  Imperf.  is  used;  e.  g., 
“  The  king  did  not  know  that  the  city  wmiild  have  been  surrendered  to  him,  if....  ;” 
Ilex  ignorabat futurum  fuisse  ut  sibi  urbs  trader  etur  siunum  diem  expectasset .' 

HfSgF”  When  the  consequence  of  a  hypothetical  clause  depends  on  such  a  verb  as 
puto,  credo ,  opinor,  it  is  often  advisable  (and  if  the  dependent  verb  wants  the  Supine, 
even  necessary)  to  express  the  consequence  or  apodosis  by  the  Subjunctive;  as, 
Cautius ,  credo ,  viv event  homines ,  si  cogitarent  se  brevi  morituros.  Si  Romeo  nunc  esses , 
valeres ,  opinor ,  melius  quam  vales.  Citius ,  opinor,  didicisses,  nisi  cessator  ac  negligens 
fuisses. 

Note  7. — After  memini ,  the  English  Infinitive  Perfect  is  rendered  by  the  Infinitive 
Present,  when  the  speaker  mentions  an  event  which  he  has  witnessed  himself  and 
which  lie  wishes  to  represent  as  continuing  ;  e.  g.,  “  I  recollect  Cato  to  have  asserted 

»n  conversation  with  myself  and  Scipio . ;”  Memini  Catonem  mecum  et  cum  Scipione 

disserere.  Memini  Pamphilium  mihi  narrare. — But  when  a  fact  is  to  be  represented 
as  completed,  the  Infinitive  Perfect  should  be  used ;  as,  Ego  memini  summos  fuisse 
in  civitate  nostra  viros. 

After  video  and  audio ,  the  English  Infinitive  Present  is  generally  expressed  by  the 
Participle  Present,  to  denote  the  particular  state  in  which  we  see  or  hear  somebody 
or  something;  e.  g.,  Audio  te  canentem ,  “I  hear  you  sing  or  singing.”  ( Audio  te 
eanere  would  signify,  “  I  hear  [i.  e.,  I  am  told — hear  from  others]  that  you  are  sing¬ 
ing).” — Socratem  Xanthippe  eodem  semper  vultu  vidit  exeuntem  et  revertentem.  Lacesse 
iracundum  et  videbis  furentem.  Etiam  voce  dignoscimus  amicurn  quum  eum  loquentem 
audimus. 

Note  8. — When  in  the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  the  nominative  of  the  subor¬ 
dinate  clause,  by  means  of  qui ,  quails ,  quantus ,  quot ,  quam ,  ut,  sicut ,  ac  or  atque 
(“  as”),  is  joined  to  another  nominative,  the  latter  is  likewise  changed  into  the  accusa¬ 
tive.  But  when  either  the  preceding  verb  is  repeated  or  the  second  subordinate  clause 
has  a  verb  of  its  own,  the  nominative  remains  unchanged  and  the  verb  agrees  with  it 
accordingly  ;  e.  g.,  Deed  patriam  nobis  cariorem  esse  quam  nosmetipsos ,  or  quam  nos- 
metipsi  sumus.  Suspicor  te  iisdem  rebus  quibus  me  ipsum  permoveri ,  or  quibus  ego  ipse 
permoveor.  Pompeium  audio  plura  bella  gessisse  quam  ceteri  legerunt. 

Sometimes,  when  two  subordinate  clauses  are  connected  by  potius  or  citius  quam, 
the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  extends  also  to  the  latter  ;  as,  Dixerunt  se  in  cor - 


08 


ACCUSATIVE  WITS  INFINITIVE. 


pora  s«a  citius  mvituvos  quamfidem  violaluros  esse,  instead  of  the  more  regular  quam 
violarent  or  quam  ut  violarent.  Tibi  ajfirmo  quidvis  me potius  perpessurum  quam  ex  hoc 
loco  dbiturum ,  instead  of  quam  (or  quam  ut)  abeam. 

Note  9. —  Video ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  care  censeo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  advise  and 
the  verbs  dico ,  scribo ,  nuniio ,  and  responded,  when  implying  a  command  or  a  wish  that 
something  be  done  or  omitted,  are  construed  with  ut  or  ne ,  accordingly  ;  as,  Navem 
idoneam  ut  habeas ,  diligenter  vide.  Hoc  tantum  ad  te  scribo  ut  valetudinem  tuam  quam 
diligentissime  cures.  Respond'd  eis  Caesar,  ne  timer ent,  ut  contra  bono  animo  essent ;  se 
enim  non  amplius  veterum  injuriarmn  velle,  reminisci. 

Jubeo ,  when  used  absolutely,  that  is,  without  an  accusative  of  the  person  com¬ 
manded,  takes  the  Subjunctive  with  or  without^;  as,  Jube  mild  multa  rescribat. 
Jubeo  ut  hoc  fiat.  Jussit  ne  longius  procederent. 

pT-  Sic ,  it  a,  hoc,  id ,  illud,  are  often  used  pleonastically  with  verbs  sentiendi  and 
declarandi,  of  course,  without  influence  upon  the  construction  ;  as,  Sic  habeto  (=scito) 
non  te  esse  mortalem  sed  corpus  hoc.  Ita  tibi  persuadeas,  nihil  bonum  esse  nisi  honestum. 
Illud  te  irdelligere  volo  pergraviter  ilium  esse  offensum. 


Cupio  te  valere,  or  Cupio  ut  valeas. 

§  102. — The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive,  or  ut  with  the  Subjunc¬ 
tive  is  used  : 

1. )  After  verbs  signifying  “  to  be  willing,”  “  to  wish,”  u  to  permit,” 
as  volo,  nolo ,  malo,  cupio,  opto ,  sino,  patior ,  permitto ,  concedo ,  licet ; 

2. )  After  the  expressions  denoting:  It  follows  ( sequitur ,  efficitur ),  it 
is  rare,  strange,  fair,  right,  just,  convenient,  useful,  expedient,  necessary, 

true,  false,  probable,  that . ;  as,  “I  wish  you  to  be  in  good 

health.” 

Pacem  conservari  { ut  pax  conservetur )  omnes  boni  optant.  Quod  vis 
alium  silere  ( ut  alius  sileat )  primus  sile.  Non  est  rectum  minori  par  ere 
majorem  {ut  minori  pareat  major).  Si  hoc  verum  non  est ,  sequitur  esse 
falsum  {ut  f ahum  sit).  Nam  rem  tibi  volo  bene  et  feliciter  evenire  {ea. 
res  ut  tibi  eveniat). 

Note!. — Necesse  est ,  “it  is  necessary  that,”  “must,”  and  oportet,  “it  behooves,’ 
“  ought,”  take  either  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  or  the  Subjunctive  without  ut ;  as,  A  Deo  mun- 
dum  regi  (m  undus  regalur)  necesse  est.  Legem  brevem  esse  (lex  brevis  sit)  oportet. — 
Necesse  est  sometimes  takes  the  dative  of  the  person  ;  as,  Mihi  necesse  est  dicer e.  Nobis 
necesse  est  mori. 

Note  2. — Patior  and  sino  are  generally  followed  by  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  rarely  by  ut. 
Concedo  and  permitto  may  take  either  the  Infinitive  or  ut  with  the  Subjunctive  :  tho 
latter  is  the  practice  of  the  best  prose  writers. 

Note  3. — The  verbs  volo ,  nolo,  malo,  opto,  cupio,  and  studeo  (in  the  sense  of  cupio), 
are  in  Latin  constructed  with  the  simple  Infinitive  when  the  subject  of  the  latter  is 
the  same  as  the  subject  of  the  verbs  volo ,  nolo,  malo ,  etc.  themselves  ;  as,  cupio  videre, 
Volumus  dire,  noluit  Irdelligere ,  etc. 


NOMINATIVE  "WITH  INFINITIVE. 


99 


When  the  Infinitive  is  one  of  those  verbs  that  are  construed  with  two  nominatives, 
such  as  esse,  fieri,  haberi ,  judicari ,  etc.,  and  the  subject  remains  the  same,  the  verbs 
volo,  nolo,  malo ,  etc.  are  construed  either  with  the  simple  Infinitive,  the  predicate- 
noun  or  adjective  being  then  put  in  the  nominative,  or  with  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  in  which 
case  the  predicate  together  with  the  personal  pronoun  implied  in  the  leading  verb,  13 
put  in  the  accusative.  Accordingly  we  can  say  Volo  esse  clemens  as  well  as  Volo  me 
esse  clementem.  Volumus  esse  benefici  and  beneficos  nos  esse  volumus,  etc.  etc.  Omnibus 
gratus  videri  studet  and  omnibus  gratum  se  videri  studet.  Princeps  esse  mavult  quam 
videri  and  principem  se  esse  mavult  quam  videri.  Volo  is  esse  (and  eum  me  esse  volo ) 
quern  lu  me  esse  voluisti. 

When  the  subjects  are  not  the  same,  either  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  or  ut  with  the  Subjunc¬ 
tive  must  be  used  ;  as,  Cupio  te  valere  or  cupio  ut  valeas. 

Note  4. — With  licet,  the  person  allowed  or  permitted  is  generally  put  in  the  dative; 
as,  Per  me  tibi  abire  licet.  Cur  mihi  idem  facer e  non  liceat?  Quid  decent  vos,  non 
quantum  liceat  vobis ,  spedare  debetis. 

When  the  accompanying  infinitive  (especially  esse,  fieri,  vivere,  egredi,  invehi,  and 
the  like)  has  a  predicate-noun  or  adjective  joined  to  it,  the  latter,  too,  is  put  in  the 
dative  ;  as,  Tibi  quieto  esse  licet.  Mihi  negligenti  esse  non  licet.  Rogavit  ut  sibi  tri- 
umplianti  (“  in  triumph”)  urbem  invehi  Uceret.  Patricio  Romano  tribuno  plebis  fieri 
non  licuit. — The  same  construction  is  found,  also,  with  necesse  est,  datur,  lubet,  in  con¬ 
nection  with  licet ;  as,  Non  datur  omnibus  esse  opulentis,  sed  licet  omnibus  esse  bonis. 
Illis  timidis  et  ignavis  licet  esse,  vobis  necesse  est  fortibus  viris  esse. 

The  Acc.  c.  Inf.  with  licet  is  found  also,  though  less  frequently,  and  for  the  most 
part  only  when  no  definite  subject  is  expressed  ;  e.  g.,  Syracusanum  in  insula  habitare 
non  licet.  Non  licet  esse  negligentem. — Still  more  rare  is  it  to  find  both  cases  in  the  same 
sentence,  as  Medios  esse  non  licet  poetis.  Is  erat  annus  quo  per  leges  ei  Con sulem  fieri 
Uceret. 

Licet  and  volo  are  often  construed  with  the  simple  Subjunctive;  as,  Per  me 
abeas  licet.  Per  me  vel  stertas  licet,  non  modo  quiescac.  Quid  vis  faciam  ?  Visne  te 
Latine  interrogem  ? —  Volo  ut  intimates  a  strong  emphasis,  as  Volo  ut  taceas,  ut  re - 
spondeas,  etc. 


THE  NOMINATIVE  WITH  THE  INFINITIVE. 

§  103. — The  verbs  of  “say mg’’ and  “thinking,”  as  dico,  trado,  fero,  puto, 
credo,  etc.,  are  often,  in  English,  construed  impersonally :  “  it  is  said,”  “  it  is 
reported,”  “it  is  thought,” — or  with  an  indefinite  subject-nominative:  “they 
say,”  “  they  think,”  “  people  say,”  “  people  think.”  Whenever  this  is  the  case, 
the  verbs  dico,  trado,  fero,  etc.,  are  either  put  in  the  3d  pers.  plur.  act.  (dicant, 
tradunt,  ferunt)  and  construed  with  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  or  they  are  expressed  pas¬ 
sively  and  construed  with  the  Nom.  c.  Inf.,  that  is,  the  nominative  of  the  sub¬ 
ordinate  clause  is  drawn  into  the  principal  sentence  and  made  the  subject 
nominative  of  the  whole  proposition.  With  this  nominative,  the  verbs  dicor 
trador,  feror,  etc.,  are  then  made  to  agree  in  number  and  person,  whereas  the 
verb  after  “that”  is  put  in  the  Infinitive  of  its  own  tense. 


Rex  esse  credor. 


§  104. — The  nominative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  with  the  passive 
verbs  dicor ,  trador ,  feror ,  pa  tor,  credor ,  haheor ,  judicor ,  ezislimor ,  me- 


100 


QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS. 


moror ,  narror ,  nuntior ,  perhibeor ,  demonstrate  negor ,  jubeor,  vetor  ;  as, 
“  They  take  me  for  a  king,”  or  “They  think  (that)  I  am  a  king.” 

Xanthippe  morosa  admodum  fuisse  fertur.  Castor  et  Pollux  victories, 
nuntii  fuisse  perhibentur.  Luna  solis  lumine  collustrari  putatur.  In - 
soft's  medulla  inesse  negatur.  Jam  adesse  Cajsaris  equites  nuntiabantur. 
Senatores  vetiti  sunt  ingredi  LE gyptum. 


Note  1. — The  verb  videor ,  “  I  seem,”  is  regularly  construed  with  the  Norn.  c.  Inf.; 
as,  “It  seems  (that)  I  have  mistaken,”  Lat.,  “  I  seem  to  have  mistaken;”  Videor 
errasse. — “  It  does  not  seem  as  if  you  were  (=  that  you  are)  dangerously  sick,”  Lat., 
“  You  do  not  seem  to  be  d.  s.  Non  videris  periculose  oegrotare. 

With  the  dative  of  a  person,  videor  corresponds  to  the  English  “  think,”  “  imagine,” 
“  fancy  ;”  as,  “  You  think  (■==  it  seems  to  you  that)  I  have  mistaken,”  Lat.,  “  I  seem 
to  you  to  have  mistaken  ;”  Videor  tibi  errasse. — “  I  think  («=  it  seems  to  me  that)  you 
acted  imprudently,”  Lat.,  “You  seem  to  me  to  have  acted  imprudently;”  Videris 
mihi  imprudenter  egisse. —  Videor  mihi  videre  imminentes  reipublicce  tempestates. 

Note  2. — When  the  dependent  Infinitive  is  an  impersonal  verb,  the  verbs  dicor , 
trador ,  feror ,  putor ,  credor ,  etc.,  are  likewise  construed  impersonally  ;  as,  Eos  igno- 
raniice  suce  pcenituisse  dicitur.  Omnium  vehementer  interesse  videtur. 


IV.  Questions  and  Answers. 


§  105. — There  are  two  kinds  of  questions  :  viz.,  simple  and  double. 

A  simple  question  is  one  that  consists  of  one  member  only;  as,  “  Whence  do  you 
come  ?”  “  Where  are  they  ?”  “  Who  is  it  ?”  “  How  is  your  cousin  ?” 

A  double  question  is  one  that  consists  of  two  or  more  members  connected  dis¬ 
junctively  by  or  •  as,  “  Is  this  wine  or  water  ?”  “  Am  I  right  or  wrong  ?”  “  Was  it 

you  or  James  or  Henry  that  did  it?” 

Both  simple  and  double  questions  are  either  direct  or  indirect. 

A  question  is  said  to  be  direct,  when  it  asks  positively,  that  is,  when  it  does  not 
depend  on  any  word  or  phrase  going  before ;  as,  “  Where  are  my  books  ?”  “  Why 

do  you  laugh  ?”  “  Was  it  my  fault  or  yours  ?” 

A  question  is  said  to  be  indirect,  when  it  depends  on  some  word  or  phrase  going 
before,  such  as  a*k,  doubt ,  see,  consider ,  know,  try,  it  matters ,  it  makes  a  difference ,  it 
is  uncertain ,  and  the  like;  as,  “I  should  like  to  know  where  my  books  are.”  “I 
know  why  you  are  laughing.”  “  It  matters  little  whether  it  was  my  fault  or  yours.” 


In  direct  questions,  the  Indicative  ;  in  indirect ,  the  Subjunctive  is 
used. 


(Simple  Questions.) 


Quid  rides? 

§  106. — Simple  questions,  both  direct  aud  indirect,  are  introduced 
either 


SIMPLE  QUESTIONS. 


101 


By  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  such  .as  uter,  quis ,  quis- 
nam,  ecquis ,  qualis ,  quantus ,  quam ,  quamdiu ,  gwo,  <^o£,  quoties ,  quomodo, 
quando ,  quorsum ,  w&i,  car,  quare  ; — or 

b)  By  the  interrogative  particles  72c,  num,  nonne ;  e.  g.,  “  Why  do 
you  laugh  ?,J 

[Direct.]  Unde  venis  ?  Estne  frater  tuns  domi  ?  Ecquid  audis  ? 
Cur  me  excrucio  ?  Nonne  canis  similis  est  lupo  ?  Quis  vestrum  igno 
rat  ?  Quamdiu  patientia  nostra  abuteris  ?  Num  quid  vis?  Num 
negare  a  ud.es  ? 

[Indirect.]  Incerium  est  quid  eras  fuiurum  sit.  Olim  queestio  erat 
num  terra  rotunda  essrt.  Scire  velim  numquid  necesse  sit  esse  Romce. 
Quceritur  umquamne  fuerint  monocerotes.  Non  video ,  cur  te  excrucies. 

Note  1. — NE  asks  simply  for  information  and  is  generally  appended  to  the  verb  of  the 
sentence.  When,  annexed  to  the  emphatic  word,  it  usually  expects  a  negative  an¬ 
swer.  E.  g.,  “Do  you  hear?”  Audisne  ?~u  Have  you  done  this?”  or,  “You  have 
not  done  this.  Have  yon  ?”  Tun&  hoc  fecisti  ? — In  nostrane  potestate  est  quid  me- 
minerimus  ? 

NUM  in  direct  questions  expects  the  answer  no;  in  indirect  questions  it  implies 
neither  negative  nor  affirmative. 

NONNE  always  expects  the  answer  yes  ;  as,  “  Have  not  you  done  this  ?”  or,  “  You 
have  done  this.  Haven’t  you  ?”  Nonne  tu  hoc  fecisti  ?  or,  Tu  hoc  fecisti ,  nonne  ? — 
Nonne  vir  sapiens  beatus  est  ?  or,  Vir  sapiens  beatus  est ,  nonne  ? 

NE  and  NUM,  in  direct  questions,  are  not  translated  ;  in  indirect  questions,  they 
are  translated  by  whether. 

Instead  of  num  sometimes  numne ,  numquid ,  and  ecquid  are  used,  the  quid  in  this 
case  having  no  meaning  at  all;  as,  Deum  ipsum  numne  vidisti  ?  Numquid  vos  duas 
habetis  patrias  ?  Ecquid  audis?  i.  q.  num  audis? 

Note  2. — When  the  interrogative  nature  of  a  sentence  is  clear  from  the  context,  the 
interrogative  particle  is  often  wholly  omitted  ;  but  in  this  case  the  emphatic  word  is 
placed  first ;  as,  Tu  innocentior  Metello  ? — Miser  ergo  Archelaus  ? — Potest  quidquam  esse 
absurdius  ? — Tu  in  forum  prodire ,  tu  Lumen  conspicere ,  tu  in  horum  conspectum  venire 
audes  ? 

Note  3. — When  a  question  asks  doubtingly,  that  is,  when  it  does  not  require 
an  answer  for  information,  but  simply  expresses  some  emotion  or  perplexity  of  mind, 
the  Subjunctive  must  be  used,  though  the  question  be  direct.  The  English  language, 
in  this  case,  generally  employs  the  auxiliaries  may,  can ,  will ,  shall ,  could ,  should ,  etc. : 
as,  “  What  can  I  do  ?”  Quid  faciam  ? — “  What  am  I  to  say  ?”  Quid  dicam  ? — “  What 
could  (should)  he  do?”  Quid  faceret? — “  What  was  he  to  say?”  Quid  diceret? — 
“  What  ought  I  to  have  done?”  Quid facer  em?—  Quo  me  vertum  ?  Quis  Peum  non 
timeat  ? 

Note  4. — Questions  are  sometimes  put  in  a  direct  form  with  the  Indicative,  where 
the  Subjunctive  might  be  expected.  This  is  especially  the  case  a)  after  the  Impera- 


')  Do  you  hear  any  thing  ?• 


102 


DOUBLE  QUESTIONS. 


fives  die,  die  mild ,  and  vide ; — b)  after  mirum  quam ,  minim  quantum ,  nimium  quan¬ 
tum .,  when  these  expressions  are  equivalent  to  mirabiliter  or  plurimum  ;  and  c)  after 
nescio  quis ,  nescio  quid ,  nescio  quern ,  nescio  quomodo,  etc.,  when  they  stand  for  aliquis , 
aliquid ,  aliquem ,  aliquomodo ,  etc. ;  as,  queeso,  fuistine  fieri  in  schola  f  Vide  quam 
conversa  res  est  !  Id  consilium jmir um  quantum  mihiprofy.it.  I* rope  me  hie  nescio  qui 
loquitur. 

Note  5. —Questions  conveying  the  idea  of  surprise,  scorn,  sorrow,  or  in¬ 
dignation,  are  frequently  expressed  by  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  where  e&tne  credibile  ? — or 
Dy  ut  with  the  Subjunctive,  where  ferine  potest  ?  may  be  supplied  ;  as,  Tene  hoc  dicere 
tali  prudentia  praeditum  ?  Adeone  hominem  infelieem  esse  quern  quam  ut  ego  sum? — • 
Egone  ut  te  interpellem  ?  Te  ut  ulla  res  frangat  ?  Victamne  ut  quisquam  vietrici 
patriae  proferret. 


(Double  Questions.) 

Par  an  impar  ? 

§  107. — In  double  questions  the  first  member  is  introduced  by  utrum 
or  the  suffix  ne,  and  the  second  by  an  ; — or  the  first  member  has  no  in¬ 
terrogative  particle  at  all,  and  the  second  takes  an  or  the  suffix  ne ; 
e.  g.,  “  Odd  or  even  V ’ 

[Direct.]  Utrum  major  est  sol  an  minor  quam  terra  P  Casune  mun- 
dus  est  effectus  an  vi  divina?  Stellarum  numerus  par  esi  an  impar  ? 
Sol  mobilis  est  immobilisne  P 

[Indirect.]  Si  sitis ,  nihil  interest  utrum.  aqua  sit  an  vinum  ?  XJnum 
illud  nescio  gratulerne  tibi  an  timeam  P  Stellarum  numerus  par  sit  an 
impar ,  nescitur.  Multum  interest  valentes  imbecilline  simus 

Note  1. — Instead  of  the  simple  utrum  and  an ,  utrumne  (mostly  separated)  and 
anne  are  sometimes  used  ;  as,  Quceritur  tria  pauca  sint  anne  multa.  Videamus  utrum 
ea  fortuitane  sint  an .... 

The  English  “  or,”  in  double  questions,  must  not  be  translated  by  aut  or  vel,  but  by 
an  or  the  suffix  ne. — The  English  “  or  not,”  in  direct  questions  is  generally  rendered 
by  annon ,  in  indirect  by  necne.  E.  g.,  Hoccine  facies ,  annon?  Iliccim  est  quern 
queeris ,  annon  ? — Amazones  fuerint  necne ,  quceritur.  Quceritur  sintne  dii  necne  sint. 

Note  2.— The  particle  an ,  in  the  best  Latin  writers,  and  especially  in  Cicero,  the 
chief  model  of  good  Latinity  and  first  authority  in  matters  of  Grammar,  is  never  used 
either  in  simple  direct  or  simple  indirect  questions,  but  only  in  the  latter  member  of 
double  questions,  and  always  in  the  sense  of  “  or.”  It  is  only  with  the  later  writers 
that  the  use  of  an  in  the  sense  of  “  whether”  originated.  Constructions  therefore  as 
the  following :  An  legisti  Ciceronem  ?  An  f  rater  turn  domi  est  ?  Quceritur  an  hoc 
verum  sit  ?  etc.,  should  be  avoided,  and  we  ought  to  say  rather :  Legistine  Ciceronem  ? 
E&tne f 'rater  tuns  domi?  Quceritur  num  hoc  verum  sit. 

An  ( anne ,  an  vero ),  it  is  true,  frequently  seems,  even  in  Cicero,  to  introduce  simple 
interrogative  clauses.  But  in  these  passages  an  is  used  exclusively  in  the  sense  ot  '  “  or,” 

‘  or  perhaps,”  “  or  rather,”  “  then,”  so  that  a  preceding  alternative  question  is  always 
to  be  supplied  by  the  mind,  fcftich  questions,  therefore,  are  simple  questions  only  in 


DOUBLE  QUESTIONS. 


103 


appearance,  but  double  or  disjunctive  in  reality.  E.  g.,  Diels  te  crediturum  si  hilarem 
me  videris.  An  tu  esse  me  tristem  putas?  “Do  you,  then,  believe  me  to  be  sad?” 
Supply  before  an :  Nonne  hilarem  me  essevidesf — Thus,  Invitus  te  offendi :  an  putas 
me  delectari  Icedendls  hominibus?  Supply:  credisne  hoc ? — 0 valorem  irasci  minims 
decet.  An  tibi  irasci  turn  indemur,  quum  quid  in  causis  acrius  et  vehementius  dicimus? 
Supply  :  Nonne  ab  ira  temperare  nos  vides  9 

When  another  question  precedes,  an  generally  introduces  the  answer  to  that  ques¬ 
tion  and  is  then  equivalent  to  nonne  (“not”);  e.  g.,  Quando  autem  isia  vis  evanuit  1 
an  posbquam  homines  minus  creduli  esse  cceperunt ?  Supply  before  an:  utrum  alio 

tempore  ?  “  Did  it  not  disappear  after _ V' — Quidnam  beneficio  provocati  facere  de~ 

bemus  ?  an  imitari  agros  f entiles  qui  multo  pAus  ejferunt  quam  acceperunt  ?  Supply  be¬ 
fore  an  :  utrum  aliquid  aliud  ?  “  Should  we  not  imitate,  etc.  ?” 

From  this  rule,  however,  we  must  except  the  use  of  an  after  nescio ,  hand  scio ,  and 
other  expressions  denoting  uncertainty,  such  as  delibero ,  hcesito ,  dubito ,  dukium 
est ,  incertum  est.  In  these  combinations,  an  is  taken  in  the  sense  of  “  whether  not,” 
and  as  the  English  “  whether  not,”  “whether  not  perhaps,”  always  inclines  towards 
a  modest  affirmation,  the  expressions  nescio  an ,  haud  scio  an ,  etc.,  may  be  translated 
by  “probably,”  ’4  perhaps,”  “I  might  almost  ....,”  “I  feel  inclined  to  ....  ;”  as, 
lJubito  an  Hannibalcm  ceteris  omnibus  anteponamd  Timiditatem  dico  ?  nescio  an  melius 
ignaviam  dicere  possimA  Moriendum  certe  est ,  et  id  incertum  an  eo  ipso  die*  Quae 
para-re  arduum  /  nil  nescio  an  tveri  dijjicilius  sit.*  Haud  scio  an  perjicere  possis}  Ilaud 
scio  an  non  possis  perjicere*  Huic  uni  contigit  quod  nescio  an  nulli  (not  ulli)?  Haud 
scio  an  habeai  parem  neminem  (not  quemquam )}  IIoc  haud  scio  an  nunquam  (not  un- 
quam)  futurum  sit* 

But,  when  mere  uncertainty  is  denoted,  without  any  inclination  towards  either  the 
affirmative  or  negative,  num  or  the  suffix  ne  must  be  used  after  nescio ,  haud  scio ,  dubito , 
etc.  ;  as,  Dubito  num  idem  tibi  suadere  debeam.  Hezc  nescio  vectene  litteris  com- 
mitiantur. 

An  sometimes  occurs  in  the  sense  of  “  or,”  in  sentences  which  do  not  seem  to  be  of 
an  interrogative  nature.  In  these  instances  incertum  est  or  non  constat  J  it  is  uncer¬ 
tain  whether  ....  or,”  must  be  supplied;  e.  g.,  Themistocles ,  quum  ei  Simonides  an 
quis  alius ,  artem  memories  polliceretur ,  oblivionis ,  inquit ,  mallem.  Nos  hie  te  ad  men¬ 
sem  Januarium  expectamus ,  ex  qioodam  rumore  an  ex  litteris  tuis  ad  alios  missis. 

Note  3. — From  double  or  disjunctive  questions  the  so-called  parallel  questions  must 
be  carefully  distinguished.  By  the  latter  are  meant  two  or  more  interrogative  mem¬ 
bers  or  clauses  which  are  connected  by  “  or,”  but  not  disjunctively,  that  is,  not  so  as 
to  exclude  one  another,  as  is  the  case  in  double  questions. — In  parallel  questions,  the 
English  “  or”  is  either  expressed  by  aut  ( ve ),  or  the  interrogative  particle  num  ( ne )  is 
repeated  with  every  member.  E.  g.,  Voluptas  melioremne  ejficit  aut  lauddbiliorem 
'dr  um  t  Numquid  simile  Populus  Homanus  audierat  aut  viderat  ?  Quid  ergo ,  solem 
dicam  aut  iunam  aut  coelurn  deum  ?  Quid  primum  querar  ?  aut  unde  potissimum  or - 
diar  ?  aut  quod  aut  a  quibus  auxilium  petam  ?  deorumne  immortalium  ?  Populine 
Romani?  vestramne  iioc  tempore  jidem  implorem? — Quo&ro  ate,  num  Cornelius  legem 
neglexerit ,  num  Consuli  vim  attulerit ,  num  armatis  hominibus  templum  tenuerit ,  num 
religionem pollueitt,  oerarium  exhauserit ,  rempublicam  compilarit  ? 


J)  I  might  almost  prefer _  2)  I  might  perhaps  with  more  right  call  it  cowardice. 

s)  and  perhaps  on  that  very  day.  4)  it  is  perhaps  still  more  difficult _  5)  You  will 

probably  be  able  to  do  it.  6)  You  will  perhaps  not  be  able  to  do  it.  7)  what  perhaps 
happened  to  no  one.  8)  He  has  probably  not  his  equal.  9)  This  prohabiy  will  never 
be  the  case. 


104 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Intelligisne  ? — Xntelligo. 

§  108. — The  answers  “yes”  and  “no”  are  variously  expressed  in 
Latin :  viz., 

The  answer  “  yes  a)  by  ita,  ita  plane ,  ita  prorsus ,  ita  est,  sic  est , 
sane ,  sane  quidem ,  etiam ,  vero ,  certe ,  profecto ,  utique  ; — b)  by  repeating" 
the  emphatical  word  ;  e.  g.,  “  Do  you  understand  ?”  Yes,  or  I  do. 

The  answer  “no:”  a)  by  wow,  minime ,  mini?ne  vero ,  ncquaquam , 
neutiquam ,  wwZ/fo  modo  ; — b)  by  repeating  the  emphatical  word  with 
wow  placed  before  it ; — c)  by  m?wo  or  immo  vero  with  the  addition  of 
the  contrary. 

Haeccine  tua  domus  est  ?  Ita. —  TVswe  tecum  earn  ?  Sane  et  libenter 
quidem. —  Certumne  hoc  est  ?  Certissimum. —  Yitwc  te  hinc  abiisse 
negas  ?  Nego  enimvero. — Fierine  potest  ?  Potest. — Dasne1  deorum 
immortalium  numine  naturam  omnem  regi?  Do  sane . 

Non  pudet  te  vanitatis  ?  Minime. — Num  tu  hcec  fecisti  ?  Minime 
vero. — Estne  frater  intus  ?  Non  est. — Fuisiins  heri  in  schola  ?  Non 
fui. —  Visne  desinam  ?  Immo  perge. — Num  Cross'd s  pauper  fuit  ? 
Immo  divitissimus. — Siccine  hunc  decipis  ?  Immo  vero  ille  me  decipit. 


CHAPTER  III 

SUBSTANTIVES. 

Arma  Achillis. 

§  109. — Any  substantive  which  answers  to  the  question  “whose?” 
or,  “  of  whom  or  wdiat  ?”  asked  in  connection  with  another  substantive, 
is  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  “  The  arms  of  Achilles.” 

Initium  sapientice  est  timor  Domini.  Ordo  est  anima  rerum.  Vere- 
cundia  est  maximum,  ornamentum  adolescentice.  Mirum  me  tenet  de- 
siderium  urbis ,  incredible  meorum  atque  imprimis  tui. 

Notk  1. — The  sign  of  this  genitive  is  generally  either  the  npostrophic  “ ’s”  or  the 
preposition  “  of”  placed  between  two  nouns.  Not  unfrequently,  however,  other  prepo¬ 
sitions,  also,  are  used  as  connectives;  as,  Skill  in  war,  peritia  belli. — Incitement  to 


3)  Do  you  grant  ? 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


105 


virtue,  indtamentum  viriutis. — Access  to  praise,  adit  as  laudis. — Disgust  for  labor, 
tedium  labor  is. — Longing  for  repose,  desiderium  otii. — Escape  from  danger,  fug  a 
periculi. — Longing  after  riches,  cupiditas  divitiarum. — Kemedy  fo  r  pain,  remedium 
doloris. — Converse  with  friends,  consuetudo  amicorum ,  etc. 

Note  2. — The  genitive  dependent  upon  another  substantive,  has  often  a  twofold 
meaning,  a  subjective  and  an  objective ,  according  as  it  denotes  that  which  does  some¬ 
thing,  or  that  which  is  the  object  of  the  action  or  feeling  spoken  of.  Thus  amor  Dei 
may  denote  either  the  love  of  God  towards  men,  and  then  the  genitive  is  subjec¬ 
tive,  because  it  denotes  the  subject  which  exercises  the  act  of  loving,  or  it  may  signify 
the  love  of  men  towards  God,  and  in  this  case  the  genitive  is  objective,  because  it 
denotes  that  which  is  the  object  of  man’s  love. — The  same  can  be  said  of  the  following 
combinations  :  pieias  parentum ,  cur  a  liberorum ,  odium  llannibalis,  desiderium  me- 
orum.  horum  amidtia ,  triumphus  Gallorum,  injuries  Helvetiorum ,  judicium  Perris , 
fuga  hostium,  etc. 

In  these  and  similar  expressions  the  context  generally  decides  whether  the  genitive 
is  to  be  taken  subjectively  or  objectively. — In  case,  however,  of  any  real  ambiguity,  it 
is  advisable  to  use  a  preposition  instead  of  the  objective  genitive;  e.  g.,  amor  in 
Benin ,  pietas  erga  parentes ,  cur  a  de  liberis ,  de  Verre  judicium ,  amidtia  cum  7ns,  odium 
in  or  adversus  Hannibalem,  triumphus  de  Gallis,  etc. 

Note  3. — When  to  the  words  vox,  verbum,  nomen ,  cognomen,  the  name  itself  is  added, 
the  "latter  is  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  Quid  sonat  vox  voluptatis  f1  Ccesar  recepit  preeno- 
men  imperatoris ,  cognomen  patris  patriae.  Ex  amove  nomen  amicitice  ductum  est. 

Note  L. — The  words  instar ,  “like;”  causa ,  gratia,  “for  the  sake  of;”  and  nihil, 
“  nothing”  (before  a  substantive,  “  no”),  are  in  reality  substantives,  and  as  such 
govern  the  genitive  of  the  noun  following. —  Causa  and  gratia  are  generally,  and  instar 
often,  placed  after  the  genitive.  E.  g.,  Plato  mihi  unus  instar  est  omnium.’1  Mon- 
tium  instar  mavis  fluctus  exsurgunt.  Romani  habebant  domes  instar  urbium.  Multi 
utilitaiis  causa  fingunt  amicitias.  Bestias  hominum  gratia  generatas  esse  videmvs, 
Justitia  nihil  expetit  pro&mii ,  Fortuna  nihil  habet  stabilitatis.  Nihil  timent  qui  nihil 
mali  commiserunt.  Nihil  novi  sub  sole. 

The  English  “on  my  (thy,  his,  our,  etc.)  account,”  “for  my  (thy,  his,  our,  etc.) 
sake,”  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  mea  ( tua ,  sua,  nostra,  vestra)  causa ;  as,  Deus  omnia 
nostra  causa  fecit.  A  te  peto,  ut  id  cum  tua,  turn  mea  causa  facias.  JSon  tarn  mea  quam 
tua  causa  doleo  te  non  valere. 

V 

Puer  bonee  indolis,  or  bona  indole. 

§  110. — A.  substantive  having  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  and  ex¬ 
pressing  a  quality  or  property  of  a  former  substantive,  is  put  in  the 
genitive  or  ablative  ;  as,  “  A  boy  of  a  good  disposition.” 

Viv  prcestcuitis  ingenii  or  preestanti  ingenio.  Homo  antiqua  virtute 
el  fide.  Vir  Claris  natal  ions/  Vir  insianis  prudentice.  Spelunca  in- 
finiia  altiludine.  Tarquinius  firatrem  habuit  Aruntem,  mitis  ingenii 
juvenem,  Ccesar  ad  Ariovistum  Valerium  misit ,  sumrna  virtute  et 
humanitaie  adolescentem. 


T)  What  does  the  word  pleasure  mean  ?  2)  is  to  m$  as  good  as  all.  3)  of  noble 
birth 


106 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Note  1. — Sometimes  both  constructions  arc  found  m  the  ffime  sentence  ;  as,  Len~ 
tulum  nostrum ,  eximia  spe  summceque  virtutis  adolescentem ,  tibi  etiam  atque  etiam  com - 
mendo.  Neque  monere  ie  audeo prcestanti prudentia  xirum ,  nec  confirmare  maximi  animi 
Tiominem. 

Note  2. — When  the  accompanying  adjective  is  a  numerical  one,  the  genitive 
only  can  be  used;  as,  “Corn  for  thirty  days ;”  Frumentum  triginta  dierum.  Iter 
unius  diei.  Exilium  decern  anncrum.  Classic  dvceniarum  naviurn.  Fossa  quindedm 
pedum.  Colossus  centum  viginti  pedum*.  Homo  trium  litter  arum.1 

Note  3. — When  the  qualifying  noun  has  no  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  it  cannot  be 
expressed,  in  Latin,  by  a  substantive,  but  must  be  rendered  by  an  adjective  ;  as,  “  A 
mail  of  talent,”  Vir  ingeniosus,  not  xir  ingenii.  “  A  man  of  learning — of  courage — of 
experience,  etc.,”  Vir  eruditus ,  xir  fiovtis ,  xir  expertus, — not  xir  eruditionis ,  fortitudi- 
nis ,  experientice. 

Magno  timore  sum. 

§  111. — A  substantive  expressing  tne  situation  or  condition ,  in  which 
the  subject  of  the  verb  is,  is  put  in  the  ablative  ;  as,  “  I  am  in  great 
fear.” 

Ego  sum  spe  bona.  Incredibili  sum  sollicitudine  de  tua  valetudine. 
Quanto  fuerim  dolor  e,  mcministi.  Apud  regem  plebemque  longe  maximo 
honore  Servius  Tullius  erat.  TJt  meliore  simus  loco,  ne  optandum  qui- 
dem  est. 

Note. — The  preposition  in  is  sometimes  added  to  this  ablative  ;  as,  Eram  in  magna 
spe.  Arx  Eomce  capitoliumque  in  ingenti  periculo  fuit. — The  preposition  in  is  even 
necessary,  when  the  ablative  has  no  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  as  esse  in  spe ,  in  honore , 
in  periculo,  in  deliciis,  etc. 

Nation©  Gallus. 

§  112. — A  substantive  limiting  the  meaning  of  another  substantive 
(verb,  or  adjective)  to  some  particular  part  or  circumstance,  is  put  in 
the  ablative  ;  as,  “  A  Gaul  by  birth.” 

Sunt  quidam  homines  non  re ,2  sed  nomine.  Agesilaus  ciaudus  erat 
altero  pede .3  Centum  numero  sumus.  Erat  Persarum  exercitus  numero 
amplissimus,  firmitate  exiguus.  Epaminond.ee  nemo  Thebanus  par  erat 
eloquentia.  Populus  Pornanus  omnes  gentes  virtute  superavit. 

Note  1. — This  ablative  is  called  “  the  ablative  of  limitation.” — It  is  in  English 
generally  expressed  by  as  to,  in,  with  regard  to,  in  respect  of,  accord¬ 
ing  to,  and  answers  the  questions  “  in  what?”  “  as  to  what  ?”  “  in  what  respect?” 
etc.;  as,  primus  or  din  e  ;  prior  tempore  ;  puer  oitate  ;4  pietate  films,  consilio  parens, 


l)  i.  e.,  Fur.  2)  not  in  reality.  3)  in  one  of  his  feet.  4)  in  yearn. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


107 


tir  ndbililate  excellent,  virtu  te  eximius ,  cloquentia  summits;  natu  major,  vain  minor; 
oculis  pedib  usque  eager;  oculis  et  mente  cap  t  us  ;l  crine  ruber,  statura  procerus ;  meo 
juclicio ,  mea  opinione  ;  more  or  consuetudine  Grc&corum ,  etc. 

Noth  2. — Such  expressions  as  nudus  membra,  saucius  pedes,  humeros  oleo  perfusus, 
os  humerosque  deo  similis,  miles  fractus  membra  labore,  redimitus  tempora  lauro,  ovinia 
Mercuric  similis  vocemque  coloremque  et  crines  jlavos,  and  the  like,  are  Greek  imita¬ 
tions,  which  should  not  be  admitted  into  prose. 


Constat  talento. 

§  113. — A  substantive  denoting  the  price  or  value  of  a  thing,  is  put' 
in  the  ablative  ;  as,  “  It  costs  one  talent.” 

Viginti  talentis  unam  orationem  Isocrates  vendidit.  Multo  sanguine 
ea  Poems  victoria  stetit.  Lis  ejus  centum  talentis  cestimata  est 2  Sextante 
sal  et  Pomce  et  per  totam  Italiam  erat .3  Quingentis  sestertiorum  millibus 
villain  cestimabant.  Modius  tritici  binis  sestertiis,  ad  summum  ternis 
erat.  Triginta  millibus  Coelius  habitat .4 

Note  1. — When  the  price  of  a  thing  is  expressed — not  by  a  substantive,  but  in¬ 
definitely  by  such  adjectives  as  “  much,”  “more,”  “little,”  “less,”  “as  much  as,” 
etc.,  in  Latin,  the  genitives  magni,  permagni,  maximi—pluris,  plurimi, — parvi,  minor  is, 
minimi , — tanti,  quanti,  quanticunque,  are  used  ( pdp  but  never  multi  and  major'.::) ; 5 
as,  “  What  does  the  peck  sell  for?”  Quanti  modius  venit?  Asse  et  joluris. — Mer co- 
tores  non  tantidem  vendnnt,  quanti  emerunt.  Dimidio  minoris  vendo  quam  ederi. 
Pluris  quam  decern  millibus  emerunt.  Quanti  Cadius  habitat  ?  triginta  millibus.  By- 
gas  me  quanti  doceam  talento. 

Note  2. — With  verbs  of  costing,  buying,  and  selling,  the  ablatives  magno, 
permagno,  plurimo,  parvo,  minimo ,  nimio ,  and  nihilo,  are  found  also;  as,  “  Wheat 
sells  very  dear Permagno  triticum  renit .  Magno  patri  meo  constiti.  Non  potest 
parvo  res  magna  constare.  Venditori  expedit  rem  venire  quam  plurimo. — pgr* *  “  To  cost 
nothing,”  is  rendered  by  constare  gratis  or  nihilo. 


Fame  periit. 

§  114. — A  substantive  denoting  the  cause ,  manner ,  means,  or  instru¬ 
ment  of  an  action,  is  put  in  the  ablative  ;  as,  “  He  died  of  hunger.” 

Metu  pallet.  Gaudio  exultat.  Flagrat  cwpiditate.  Ardet  iracun- 
clia. —  Sapiens  cequo  animo  moritur.  I)eos  pur  a,  et  incorrupta  mente 
venerctri  debemus. —  Concordia  res  parvee  crescunt,  discord, ia.  maximee  dila- 
buntur. —  Cornibus  tauri,  apri  clentibus ,  morsu  leones ,  alice  fug  a  se,  alice 
occultatione  tutantur. 


T)  blind  and  crazy.  2)  was  rated  at.  s)  was  worth — was  sold  for — stood  at.  4)  pays 
for  his  lodging.  5)  Instead  of  multi  use  magni ,  and  instead  of  majoris,  plans. 

•)  what  my  terms  are  in  teaching. 


108 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


EoteI. — An  interior  cause,  that  is,  a  cause  which,  proceeds  from  the  subject 
itself,  as  love,  hatred,  anger,  pity,  hope,  fear,  etc.,  is  often  expressed  by  the 
ablative  with  an  additional  Perf.  Participle  ;  as,  timore  perterritus ,  terrore  abreptus , 
pudore  adductus ,  necessitate  compulsus,  amove  captas ,  odio  mfammaius,  cupiditaie  in¬ 
census. ,  desiderio  incitatus,  metu  coactus,  spe  ductus ,  dolore  victus,  misericord, ia  motus , 
injuria  lacessitus ,  blanditiis  voluptatum  delinitus ,  religione  tactus ,  etc. —  Timore  per- 
territi 1  A'A/i  consilio  destiterunt.  Rex  ArMochus  seu  inopia  pecuniae,  compulsus ,  seu 
avaritia  sotticitcitus  templum  Jovis  aggreditur. 

An  exterior  cause,  that  is,  one  which  does  not  proceed  from  the  subject  itself, 
is  generally  expressed  by  ob.  propter ,  causa,  and  gratia ,  with  their  respective  cases ; 
as,  JAns  propter  incertos  casus  quotidie  imminet.  Ego  te  propter  humanitatem  et  mo- 
destiam  tuam  jdiligo.  Plurvna  facimus  amicorum  causa.  lUa  brevitatis  gratia 
preetereo. 

A  preventive  cause  (“for,”  “  by  reason  of,” — in  negative  sentences,  and  in 
clauses  with  vix)  is  generally  expressed  by  pros  ;  as,  Free  g audio,  ubi  sim ,  nescio.  Free 
lacrimis  nec  cogitare  nec  scribere  possum.  Decretum  exaudiri  pros  strepitu  et  clamore 
nonpotuit.  Free  meerore  loqui  vix  possum.  Free  gaudio  vix  compos  est  animi. 

Note  2. — The  ablative  ot  manner,  when  not  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  gen¬ 
erally  takes  the  preposition  cum.  Except  are  the  ablatives  dolo,  vi,  casu ,  joco ,  ordine , 
and  those  that  denote  by  themselves  manner,  mind,  condition,  or  inten¬ 
tion,  as  modo,  more ,  ritu,  ratione,  animo,  consilio,  lege,  conditione.  We  say,  there¬ 
fore,  cum  dignitate  vivere,  cum  gravitate  loqui,  cum  voluptate  audire ,  cum  cura  et  dili- 
geutia  scribere,  and  the  like  ; — but,  without  cum :  multa  casu  fiunt,  omnes  ordine  pro- 
fecti  sunt ,  urbs  dolo  capta  est,  etc. 

When  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  the  ablative  may  stand  either  with  cum,  or 
without  cum.  Thus,  we  find  :  Impetus  cedi  cum  admirdbili  celeritate  movetur ,  and 
Stellez  circulos  suos  orbesque  confidant  celeritate  mirabili. — The  ablative  generally  stands 
with  cum,  when  the  concomitant  circumstance  is  regarded  as  something  merely 
additional  and  accidental,  e.  g.,  Semper  magno  cum  metu  incipio  dicere ;  id  cum  maxi- 
mo  reipublicee  detrimento  accidit ;  Divitiacus  multis  cum  lacrimis  Ceesarem  complexus 
obsecrare  coepit ; — and  without  cum,  when  the  concomitant  circumstance  is  regarded 
as  an  essential  characteristic  of  the  action  ;  e.  g.,  amicitiam  maxima  fide  colere  ;  magno 
impetu  urbem  expugnare ,  etc.,  or  when  the  ablative  is  one  of  those  above-mentioned 
(modo,  more ,  ritu ,  ratione,  etc.) ;  as,  Sapiens  cequo  animo  moritur  /  divino  consilio  fac¬ 
tum  est ;  Jiac  lege  or  conditione  pacem  composuit. 

Instead  of  the  ablative  of  manner,  per  with  the  accusative  is  sometimes  used  ;  as, 
per  vim,  “violently;”  per  insidias,  “insidiously;”  per  summum  dedecus ,  “most  in¬ 
famously  ;”  per  summam  injuriam ,  “  most  unjustly  ;”  per  ludum  et  jocum ,  “in  sport 
and  jest,”  or  “jestingly.” 

Note  3. — The  means  by  which  an  action  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  ablative  with¬ 
out  preposition.  But  when  the  means  is  a  person,  the  accusative  with  per  is  gen¬ 
erally  used  ;  e.  g.,  Rinas  tibi  per  servum  litteras  misi.  Alcibiades  cum  Pisandro  per 
internuncios  colloquitur.  Per  te  (or  tva  opera,  tuo  beneficio )  salvi  sumus.  Dumnorix 
summam  in  spem per  Helvetios  regni  obtinendi  venit. 

Note  4. — The  instrument  with  which  an  action  is  performed,  is  likewise  put  in 
the  ablative  without  preposition  ;  as,  Gladio  me  defendo. 

When  the  English  “with”  denotes  accompaniment  (=■“  together  with”),  it  must 
be  rendered  by  cum  ;  as,  Veni  mecum.  Curiam  cum  gladio  ingreditur.  In  foro  cum 
pugione  comprehensus  est.  Servi  cum  armis  traditi  sunt. 


T)  for,  through,  out  of  or  in  consequence  of. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


100 


The  historians,  howeve:,  when  speaking  of  military  movements,  frequently  omit 
cum,  especially  with  such  verbs  as  adesse ,  sequi,  venire,  and  proficisci ;  e.  g.,  Ccesar  in- 
genii  exerdtu  ( omnibus  copiis,  trecentis  navibus,  quarta  et  quinta  legionibus ,  etc.)  profec - 
tus  est. 

Note  5. — The  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made,  is  expressed  either  by  an  adjec¬ 
tive,  or  by  ex  with  the  ablative,  where  the  Participle  f 'actus  is  commonly  added  ;  as, 
“  A  stone- wall ;”  mums  lapideus  or  ex  lapidibus  exstructus  /  vas  aureum  or  ex  auro fac¬ 
tum]  statua  marmorea  or  ex  marmore  facta. 


Fossa  sex  pedes  alta. 

§  115. — A  substantive  denoting  the  extent  of  space ,  is  put  in  the  ac¬ 
cusative  ;  as,  li  A  ditch  six  feet  deep  ” 

Milites  aggerem  latum  pedes  trecenios ,  altum  pedes  octoginta  exstru- 
xerunt.  A  portu  stadia  centum  et  viginti  processimus.  Zama  quinque 
dierum  iter  abest  ab  Carthagine}  Bidui  (sc.  iter)  a  castris  aberam. 
Ab  hac  regula  miki  non  licet  transversum}  ui  aiuni ,  digitum  disced  ere. 2 
Helvetiorum  fines  in  longitudinem  (or  longitudine  without  in)  millia. 
passuum  centum  quadraginta  patent.  Negat  se  unquam  a  te  pedem 3 
discessisse.  Adrumctv.ru  abest  a  Zama  circiter  millia  passuum  trecenta . 

Note  1. — The  accusative  of  space  answers  to  the  questions — how  long  ?  how  high? 
how  deep?  how  wide  ?  how  broad?  how  far?  how  far  distant?  and  is  generally  joined 
to  such  adjectives  and  verbs  as  longus,  altus,  lotus,  crassus, — abesse ,  distare ,  patcre, 
eminire, procedure,  discedere. 

Note  2. — The  question  “  how  far  off?”  is  answered  by  the  accusative  or  ablative. — 
"When  the  distance  is  indicated  by  the  words  spatium  or  intervallum ,  the  ablative  is 
regularly  used.  E.  g.,  Tria  millia  passuum  ab  ipsa  urbe  loco  edito  castra  posuit.  Ab 
expioratoribus  certior  f actus  est,  Amovisti  copias  a  nosiris  millious  passuum  quatuor  et 
viginti  abesse.  Quindecim  ferme  millium  spatio  castra  ab  Tarenio  posuit. 

Wnen  the  place  from  which  the  distance  is  estimated,  is  not  mentioned,  but  under¬ 
stood  from  the  context,  the  ablative  with  a  (sometimes  enf  with  an  ordinal)  is  generally 
used ;  e,  g.,  “  The  Belgians  encamped  within  less  than  two  miles,”  sc.  of  Caesar’s 
camp.  Belgce  ab  millious  passuum  minus  auobus  (sc.  a  castris  Csesaris)  castra  posue- 
runt.  Ab  sex  millibus passuum  abfuii ,  sc.  ab  Urbe  Koma.  Ad  quintum  iapidem  sepultus 
est.  Ad  tertium  milliarium  consedii. 


Venit  hora  tertia. 

§  11G. — A  substantive  denoting  the  time  when  or  at  which ,  is  put  in 
the  ablative  ;  as,  “  He  came  at  three  o’clock.” 

Mors  omnibus  horis  impend  et.  Alexander  quarto  et  tricesimo  cetatis 


x)  five  days’  journey.  2)  not  one  finger’s  breadth.  3)  one  steD 


110 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


anno  Babylone  decessit.  Hieme  omnia  Leila  jure  gentium  conquiescunt. 
Excurremus  mense  Seytembri ,  ut  Januario  revertamur.  Ehcedrus  Au- 
qusti  temporibus  scripsit. 

Note  1. — The  ablatives  tempore  and  temporibus ,  in  the  sense  of  “  distress,”  “cir¬ 
cumstances,” — pueritia,  adolescentia,  and  senectnte ,  generally  take  the  preposition  in; 
as,  “In  the  present  circumstances;”  In  hoc  tempore.  In  summo  et  periculosissimo 
reipublicce  tempore ,  or  in  difficillimis  reipublicce  temporibus. — Thus  we  also  find  in 
hello ,  in  initio ,  in principio  :  but  bello ,  when  combined  with  an  adjective  or  a  genitive, 
is  more  commonly  used  without  in ,  as  Bello  Mithridatico ,  hello  Latinorum.  Tem¬ 

pore  and  in  tempore  are  frequently  used  adverbially  in  the  sense  of  “at  the  proper 
time,”  “  in  good  time.” 

Note  2. — The  time  how  long  is  expressed  by  the  accusative  (sometimes  with 
per ,  “  during”),  more  rarely  by  the  ablative.  E.  g.,  Septevi  horas  dormisse  sat  est. 
Qucedam  bestiolce  unum  diem  mount.  Nestor  tertiam  cetatem.  vixit.  Duodequadraginta 
annos  tyr annus  Syracusanorum  erat  Dionysius.  Dies  festus  Diana  per  iriduurn  agitur. 
Per  annos  quatuor  et  viginti  primo  Punico  hello  certatum  est  cum  Poenis . — Tredecim  annis 
Alexander  regnavit. 

When  the  time  how  long  has  not  yet  expired,  an  ordinal  numeral  in  the  sing,  may 
be  used  instead  of  a  cardinal ;  but  then  the  English  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  must  be 
rendered  by  the  Present  and  Imperfect  respectively.  E.  g.,  “We  have  already  these 
twenty  days  been  waiting  for  you  ;”  Nos  mcesimurn  jam  diem  te  expedamus. — “  He 
has  been  reigning  more  than  twenty  jears;”  Primnm  ti  vicesimian  jam  annum 
regnat. 

Note  3. — The  time  in  or  within  which  is  expressed  either  by  the  ablative, 
or  the  accusative  with  intra  ; — in  both  cases  with  cardinals  as  well  as  ordinals;  as, 
Agamemnon  vix  decern  annis  or  intra  decern  annos  (decimo  anno ,  or  intra  decimum 
annum )  unam  urbem  cepit.  Saturni  stella  triginta  fere  annis  cursum  suam  conficit. 
(PIT  His  annis  viginti ,  triginta ,  etc.,  means  :  “  within  these  [or,  the  last]  twenty, 
thirty _ years”). 

The  question  how  often  during  a  certain  time,  is  answered  by  the  ablative  with 
in  ;  as,  ter  in  anno ,  quater  in  mense ,  semel  in  die.  Thus,  Sol  binas  in  singulis  annis 
conversiones  facit.  Si  semper  haberem ,  cui  litteras  darem ,  vel  ternas  in  hora  darem. 

The  question  for  what  time  or  for  how  long?  is  answered  by  the  accusative 
with  in  ;  as,  Sempronium  ad  cccnam  invitavit  in  posterum  diem.  Solis  defectiones  item- 
que  lunae  prcedictae  sunt  in  multos  annos.  Audio  constituta  est  in  mensem  Januarium. 
Quanti  habitas  ( doces )  in  mensem ,  in  annum  t — The  exact  time  for  which  some  arrange¬ 
ment  has  been  made,  is  often  expressed  by  the  accusative  with  ad  ;  e.  g.,  Vide  ut  adsis 
ad  lioram  qvintam.  Vult  me  prazsto  esse  ad  horam  destinatam.  Solvam  ad  G-rceeae  Calen- 
das ,  i.  e.,  nunquam. 

Note  4. — The  time  how  long  before  and  how  long  after,  when  calculated 
from  a  definite  point  of  past  or  future  time,  is  expressed  by  the  ablative.  Ante  and 
post  are  then  used  as  adverbs,  unless  there  be  a  noun  or  pronoun  dependent  on  them 
in  the  accusative.  When  used  adverbially,  they  are  placed  either  after  the  ablative, 
as  tribus  annis  ante ,  tribus  annis  post ,  or  between  the  numeral  and  its  substantive,  as 
Iribus  ante  annis ,  tribus  post  annis.  .  Thus  we  say  multo ,  paulo ,  aliquanto ,  bzennio , 
triennio  ante  or  post.  E.  g.,  Themidodes  fecit  idem  quod  viginti  annis  ante  fecerat  Cori- 
olanvs.  Socrates  supremo  vitce  die  de  immortalitate  animi  mult-a  disseruit ,  et  paucis 
ante  dieb us,  quum  facile  potuisset ,  educi  e  custodia  n-oluit.  Homerus  multis  annis 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Ill 


ante  Romulum  fuit.  Lcelius  sermonem  de  amicitia  habuit  paucis  diebus  postmortem 
Africani. 

Sometimes,  when  strict  accuracy  is  not  intended,  it  is  indifferent  whether  the  abla¬ 
tive  or  accusative  be  used  ;  as,  Messanam  rediit  ibique  tribus  diebvs  post  (or  post  tre 
dies ,  post  diem  tertium)  decessit.  Servi  iis  etiam  judicibus  qui  multis  seculis  post  (or  post 
mv-lia  scecula )  de  te  judiccibunt. 

When  ante  and  post  are  followed  by  qvam  and  a  verb,  the  phrase  may  be  variously 
expressed  ;  as,  “  He  died  three  years  after  his  return  Decessit 


tribus  annis  postquam  rodierat,  post  tres  annos  quam  redierat, 

anno  tertio  postquam  redierat,  post  annum  tertium  quam  redierat; 

or, 

[by  omitting  either  post  or  quam ] 

anno  tertio  quam  (quo)  redierat ;  post  annum  tertium  quo  redierat. 

Thus  we  say : 

Pridie  (postridie)  quam  redierat,  the  day  before  ( after •)  his  return. 

Priore  (postero)  anno  quam  obierat,  the  year  before  {after)  his  death. 

Note  5. — The  length  of  time  before  or  after,  when  calculated  from  the  present 
moment,  is  expressed — the  former  oy  abhinc  (tne  English  “ago”),  and  the  latter  by 
post.  Abhinc  generally  takes  tne  accusative,  though  the  ablative  is  found  also:  it 
usually  precedes,  and  is  joined  to  cardinals  only.  E.  g.,  “  About  300  years  ago 
Abhinc  annos  fere  irecenios.  Abhinc  sex  menses  (also,  ante  hos  sex  menses )  maiedixisti 
mihi.  Post  paucos  dies  (or  without  post ,  paucis  diebus)  ad  vos  veniam. — Paucis  his 
diebus  means  “  a  few  days  ago,’5  and  is  equivalent  to  abhinc  paucos  dies. 

§117. — Note  6.  The  English  “old”  is  expressed  either  by  natus  with  the  ac¬ 
cusative  of  the  years,  or  without  natus  by  the  genitive,  when  the  latter  is  closely 
joined  to  the  name  of  the  person  ;  e.  g.,  “  Alexander  died  at  the  age  of  thirty-three 
years.” 

Alexander  triginta  tres  annos  natus  decessit. 

Alexander  annoruin  trium  et  triginta  decessit. 

We  may  also  say,  Alexander  tertio  et  tricesimo  cetatis  anno  decessit ,  and  Alexander 
tertium  et  tricesimum  cetatis  annum  agens  decessit. 

The  English  “  above”  or  “under”  a  certain  age,  is  expressed  by  plus  (minus)  or 
major  (minor),  with  natus  and  the  accusative  of  the  years  (in  each  case  with  or  with¬ 
out  quam),  or  by  major  (minor)  with  either  the  genitive  or  ablative;  as,  “  Ke  is 
above  (under)  thirty-three  years.” 

Plus  (minus)  triginta  tres  annos  natus  est. 

Plus  (minus)  quam  triginta  tres  annos  natus  est. 

Major  (minor)  triginta  tres  annos  natus  est. 

Major  (minor)  quam  triginta  tres  annos  natus  est. 

Or,  major  (minor)  triginta  trium  annomm  est,  major  {minor)  quam  triginta  trium 
annorum  est,  major  (minor)  triginta  iriuus  annis  est ; — also,  jam  ( nondum )  triginta 
tres  annos  confecit,  compievit,  or  tertium  et  tricesimum  cetatis  annum  jam  ( nondum ) 
wmplevit,  excessit,  egressus  est. 


112 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Habitat  Romse. 

§  118. — The  names  of  cities  and  smaller  islands  are  construed  as 
follows : 

1. )  The  name  of  the  town  where  ?  is  put  in  the  genitive,  when  the 
name  is  of  first  or  second  declension ;  but  in  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition,  when  the  name  is  either  of  the  third  declension,  or  plural 
number;  as,  “  He  lives  ( where  ?)  at  Rome.” 

2. )  The  name  of  the  town  whither?  is  put  in  the  accusative  -without 
a  preposition  after  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  as  eo,  curro , 
contendo ,  proficiscor ,  mil  to,  venio ,  etc. ;  as,  “  He  arrived  at  Rome/’  Lit 
11  He  came  (whither  ?)  to  Rome.”  Venit  Romam. 

8.)  The  name  of  the  toivn  whence  ?  is  put  in  the  ablative  with¬ 
out  a  preposition;  as,  “He  fled  (whence?)  from  Corinth.”  Fu<jit 
Corintho. 

Cur  Plato  Tarentum  venit  et  Locros  ?  Dionysius  Syracusas  nciviga- 
bcit.  Fui  Lipsice ,  Parisiis ,  Lon d ini,  Viennce ,  Petropoli ,  Gadibus  et 
Athenis.  Legati  Carthagine  Romam  venerunt.  Dionysius  Platonem 
Athenis  Syracusas  arcessivit.  Venetiis  proficiscar  Romam  atque  hide 
Neapolim.  Dionysius  tyrannus  Syracusis  expulsus  Corinthi  pueros 
docebat. 


Note  1. — When  urbs,  oppidum,  caput,  locus,  are  placed  in  apposition  after  the 
name  of  a  town,  they  are  put  in  the  ablative  in  answer  to  “  where?”  and  “whence  ?” 
and  in  the  accusative  in  answer  to  “whither?” — sometimes  with,  but  oftener  with¬ 
out  a  preposition.  E.  g.,  (Where? — )  Archias  Antiochian,  natus  eat,  celebri  quondam 
urbe  et  copiosa.  Thus  we  find :  Tuscuh,  satubri  et  propinquo  loco .  Neapoli,  in 
celeberrimo  oppido. — (Whence  ? — )  Jjemaratus  Corintno ,  uvoe  ampiissirna,  Tarqv.i- 
nios  fugit.  Thus,  Tusculo,  ex  clarissimo  oppido. — (Whither? — )  Cicero  profectus  est 
AtJienas,  urbem  celeberrimam.  Bemaralus  se  contidit  Tarquinios ,  in  urbem  Etrurice 
florentissimam. 

When  urbs, oppidum, caput,  locus,  are  placed  before  the  name  of  a  town,  the  same 
construction  takes  place,  but  always  with  a  preposition  ;  as,  Ad  urbem  Ancyram.  ab 
urbe  Roma,  ex  oppido  Thei'mis,  in  oppido  Athenis,  m  urbe  Antiochia,  in  urbe  Citio. 
(S^p  In  urbe  Antiochiee ,  in  urbe  Citii,  and  the  like,  are  not  to  be  imitated.) 

When  a  city  name  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  the  ablative  in  answer  to 
“  where  ?”  generally  takes  the  preposition  in,  as  in  ipsa  Alexandria,  iota,  (or  in  iota) 
Corintho. — The  accusative  and  ablative  in  answer  to  “  whither  ?”  and  “whence?” 
are  used  both  with  and  without  prepositions ;  as,  projiciscar  doctas  (or  ad  doctas) 
Athenas. 

Note  2. — When  a  city  name  is  preceded  by  such  a  preposition  as  rxar,  around, 
towards,  through,  before,  as  far  as,  it  must  be  expressed  also  in  Latin  ;  as,  “  in  the 
vicinity  of  Cannse,”  ad  Gannas ;  “in  the  neighborhood  of  Lome,”  prope  Romam ; 
“  through  Vienna,”  per  Viennam.  Thus  we  say:  circa  Neapolim ,  Brundusium  versus, 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


113 


ante  Troiam,  supra  Byzantium ,  usque  (or  usque  ad)  Numantiam. — Iter  per  Thebas 
fecit.  Marius  ad  (arrived  before)  Zamam pervenit.  'Tree  aunt  ad  (in  the  direction  to) 
Mutinam  vice. 

Note  3. — The  names  of  countries  and  of  larger  islands,  as  Sardinia ,  Sicilia ,  BrD 
tannia ,  Greta ,  Euboea ,  and  of  all  other  places,  are  regularly  construed  with  prepositions, 
as,  (Where  ? — )  Bella  gessit  in  Asia ,  in  Gallia ,  m  Britannia.  Vidi  fratrem  tuum  paulo 
ante  ambulantem  in  horto. — (Whither? — )  Legati  in  Africam  trajecerunt .  Eamus  in 
hortuni.  Multitude)  incredibilis  in  Capitolium  convenit.  Duces  in  consilium  convene- 
rant.' — (Whence  ? — )  Cotta  ex  Sicilia  in  Africam  profugit.  Persarum  rex  Darius  ex 
Asia  in  Europam  exercitum  trajecii. 

[giV*1  Petere ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  repair  to,”  takes  the  accusative  of  the  place 
(whither  ?)  without  a  preposition  ;  as,  petere  Romam ,  petere  u-rbern,  petere  loca  calidiord , 
etc. — In  like  manner  does  the  ablative  of  place  (where  ?)  when  accompanied  by  totus, 
generally  stand  without  a  preposition ;  as,  iota  Asia,  iota  urbe ,  toto  mari ,  toto  orbe  ter- 
rarum ,  etc. — though  also  in  toto  orbe  terrarum,  in  iota  provincia. 

These  two  cases  excepted,  the  use  of  names  of  countries  without  a  preposition,  is  an 
irregularity  not  less  than  the  use  of  names  of  towns  with  the  prepositions  in,  ab,  and 
ex.  Such  expressions,  therefore,  as  Africam  transiturus,  Macedoniam  pervenit,  lllyri- 
cum  prof ectus, — legati  ab  Ardea  Romam  venerunt ,  has  litteras  a  Brundusio  dabam , 
should  be  avoided. 


Domus.  Rus.  Humus. 

§  119. — The  words  domus ,  rus ,  and  humus,  are  construed  like  the 
names  of  towns ;  namely, 

(Where?)  (Whither!)  (Whence?) 

domi,  at  home,  domum ,  home,  domo,  from  home, 

ruri  (e),  in  the  country,  rus,  into  the  country,  rure  (i),  from  the  country, 

humi,  on  the  ground.  humi ,  to  or  on  the  ground,  humo ,  from  the. ground. 

Manlius  ruri  juventutem  egit.  Nusquam  commodius  vivitur  quam 
domi.  Qui  domo  venerit ,  nescil  num  domum  sit  rediturus.  Quum 
Tullius  rure  redierii ,  mittam  eum  ad  le.  Humi  repit  hedera.  Vix 
oculos  attollit  humo.  Ego  rus  ibo  atque  ibi  manebo.  Darii  mater , 
perlala  fama  de  Alexandri  movie ,  laceratis  crinibus,  humi  corpus 
abjecit. 

Note  1. — Domus,  when  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  generally  takes  a  preposi¬ 
tion  ;  as,  in  ilia  domo ,  in  domo  privata,  ad  illam  domum,  ex  domo  paterna  ; — but  when 
accompanied  by  one  of  the  possessives  mens,  tuus ,  suns,  nosier,  vester,  or  the  adjec¬ 
tive  alienus,  the  preposition  is  more  commonly  omitted,  and  the  question  “where 
answered  by  the  genitive  ;  as,  habitat  domi  sum,  nostras,  alienee  ;  domes  suas  abiermit , 
modo  domo  sua  egressus  est . 

With  the  genitive  of  the  possessor,  the  question  “where?”  may  be  answered  olthe; 


T)  had  met  in  council. 

8 


114 


ADJECTIVES. 


by  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  with  in;  as,  domi  Ccesa.ris  or  (more  commonly)  in 
domo  Cmaris  ;  domi  ipsius  or  in  ipsius  domo. 

The  genitive  humi  stands  not  only  in  answer  to  “where  ?”,  but  also  in  answer  to 
“  whither?”  ;  as,  aliquid  humi projicere ;  exanimis procurnbit  humi  bos. 

Note  2. — The  words  militia  and  helium ,  in  connection  with  domi ,  are  likewise  put 
in  the  genitive  in  answer  to  “where?”  as,  domi  militiazque,  domibellique ,  or  belli 
domique ,  “  at  home  and  abroad,”  “  in  peace  and  in  war.” — Without  domi ,  we  should 
say  pace  et  hello  inclytus ,  magnus  hello  nec  minor  pace,  “  equally  great  in  war  and  in 
peace,”  and  the  like. 


O  dii  immortales! 

§  120. — The  name  of  the  person  or  thing  addressed,  is  put  in  the 
vocative ;  as,  “  0  immortal  gods  !” 

Vale,  mi  suavissime  et  optime  frater.  Puer ,  abige  mascas.  Sollicitat 
me  kta ,  mi  Tiro ,  valetudo.  0  dii  boni ,  quid  est  in  hominis  vita  diu? 
0  frustra  suscepti  mei  labores  !  0  spes  f allaces  !  0  cogitationes  inanes 

mece  ! 

Note. — In  exclamations  of  wonder  or  grief,  when  no  address  is  made,  the  name 
of'  the  person  or  thing  wondered  at,  is  put  in  the  accusative ;  as,  O  tempora ,  0  mores  ! 
O  me  miserum  /  0  pr  cedar  am  sapientiam  !  0  fallacem  hominum  spem  !  0  gratae 

tuas  mihi  jucundasque  litteras  ! 


CHAPTER  IY. 

ADJECTIVES. 

I.  Government  of  Adjectives. — II.  Use  of  the  Comparative. — III.  Numeral  Adjectives. 

I. — Government  of  Adjectives. 

ADJECTIVES  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 

Avidus  laudis. 

§  121. — Adjectives  denoting  desire ,  knowledge ,  skill,  remembrance , 
participation ,  power,  fulness,  and  their  contraries,  govern  the  genitive 
of  the  thing  of  which  one  is  desirous,  mindful,  ignorant,  etc. ;  as, 
“  Desirous  of  praise.’’ 

Conon  rei  militaris  peritissimus  fuit.  Vita  sine  amicis  insidiarum  el 


ADJECTIVES. 


115 


mehts  plena  est.  Mens  criminis  conscia  tranquilla  esse  non  potest. 
Bestice  rationis  ei  orationis  sunt  expertes.1  Semper  appetentes  glorice 
prater  ceteras  gentes  atqus  avidi  laudis  fuistis. 

Note  1. — To  this  rule  belong  the  adjectives  cupidus ,  avarus ,  avidus,  cemulus ,  studi~ 
osus  ; — conscius ,  inscius ,  nescius ,  gnarus ,  ignarus ,  rudis ,  peritus ,  imperitus,  memor , 
immemor ,  incuriosus  ; — compos ,  impos ,  potens ,  impotens ,  particeps ,  expers  ; — plenus, 
dives,  fertilis ,  inanis ,  inops,  egenus,  indigus,  etc. — also  verbal  adjectives  in  ax,  as 
capax,  ferax,  tenax,  etc. — and.  many  Participles  in  ws,  such  as  amans,  appetens,  diligens , 
efficiens,fugiens,  negligens, patiens,  tolerans,  observans ,  etc.,  when  they  are  used  adjec- 
tively,  that  is,  when  they  do  not  express  a  merely  transient  act  or  condition,  but  a 
habitual,  permanent  quality,  as  puer  veritatis  amans ,  vir  officii  sui  negligens,  miles 
fugiens  laboris ,  etc.  In  this  case,  they  also  admit  of  the  degrees  of  comparison  ;  as, 
famulus  amantior  est  domini  quam  cams  ?  Gam  navigare  poteris ,  ad  nos  tui 
amantissimos  veni. — But  when  Participles-  in  ns  are  used  as  such,  that  is,  when  they 
do  not  denote  a  permanent  quality,  but  a  merely  transient,  momentary  act,  they 
govern  the  case  of  their  verbs.  Accordingly 

Patiens  frigoris  is  said  of  one  that  is  able  to  endure  cold  at  any  time; 

Patiens  frigus,  of  him  that  endures  cold  in  a  particular  case  only. 

Note  2. — The  adjectives  of  fulness  may  also  be  construed  with  the  ablative,  and 
with  referius  this  is  regularly  done ;  e  g.,  Epicureis  nihil  prcestalilius  fuit  quam 
vita  otiosa  et  plena  voluptatibus.  Domus  Antonii  erat  aleatoribus  referta  et  plena 
ebriorum. 

Eudis  often  takes  the  ablative  with  in. — Conscius ,  besides  the  genitive  of  the 
thing,  usually  takes  an  additional  dative  of  the  person  ;  as,  Nullius  culpce  mihi  conscius 
sum, — To  peritus  and  consultus ,  both  jure  and  juris  may  be  joined  ;  as,  jureconsultus 
and  jurisconsulius,  etc. 

Note  3. — The  genitive  animi  stands  frequently  (esp.  in  late  prose)  instead  of  animo, 
with  the  adjectives  ceger,  anxius,  audax,  certus,  confidens,  confusus,  ferox,  furens, 
ingens,  suspensus ,  territus ,  turbatus,  and  several  others,  and  also  with  verbs  denoting 
anxiety,  as  angor  animi ,  discrucior  animi, — Ego  quidem  vehementer  animi  pendeo. 


Qnis  mortalium  ? 

§  122. — Partitive  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns  govern  the  geni¬ 
tive  of  the  whoie ;  as,  “  Who  of  mortals  V 1 

Multce  istarum  arborum  mea  manu  sunt  satce .  Quotusquisque  phi - 
losophorum 3  ita  moraius  est  ut  ratio  postulat  ?  Alexander  seniorcs 
miiitum  in  poAriam  remisit.  Galiorum  omnium  foriissimi  sunt  Belgce. 
Sylia  centum  viginti  quaiuor  suorum  amisit. 

Note  1. — Partitives  are  words  which  denote  a  part  of  the  whole,  such  as  uter,  alter, 
neuter,  uterque ,  utervis,  alius,  solus,  ullus,  nullus,  quis ,  quisque ,  aliquis,  quidam,  quili- 


x)  are  without 


have  neither — nor.  a)  IIow  many  ?  or,  how  few  1 


116 


ADJECTIVES. 


bet,  multi,  plures,  plurimi,  plerique,  pauci,  nonnulli ,  quot ,  quotcunque ,  quoiusquisque, 
and  also  comparatives,  superlatives,  and  numerals,  when  they  are  intended  to  denote 
a  part  of  the  whole. 

When  these  adjectives  are  not  used  partitivelv,  that  is,  when  they  are  not  intended 
to  denote  a  part  of  the  whole,  they  agree.  like  other  adjectives,  with  their  substan¬ 
tives  in  gender,  number,  and  case;  as,  “The  other  Consul,”  alter  Consul ; — “  many 
soldiers,”  multi  milites ; — t:  some  trees;”  nonnullce  arbor es ; — “a  most  skilful  gene¬ 
ral,”  dux  periiissimus. 

Note  2. — The  partitive  genitive  is  generally  known  by  the  sign  “  of  or  out  of,”  “from 
amongst,”  “among.” — In  its  place,  Latin  writers  frequently  use  the  prepositions  ear, 
inter,  and  sometimes  /  as,  unus  ex  vobis .  instead  of  unus  restrum',  unus  e  multis, 
doetissinius  inter  Grceccs,  primus  inter  omnes.  Be  tuis  innumerabilibus  in  me  ojjiciis 
erit  hoe  gratissimum. 


Note  8. —  Uter  and  neuter  are  used  with  reference  to  two;  quis  and  nullus,  with 
reference  to  many;  as,  Utra  manuum  est  agilior  ?  Uter  nostrum  tandem,  Lahiene, 
popular  is  est  ?  tune  an  ego  ? —  Quis  restrum,  milites ,  ignorat  ? 

Note  4. — The  English  we  both,  you  both,  they  both,  both  these  or  these 
two,  who  both,  are  expressed  in  Latin,  by  uterque  nostrum,  uterque  vestrum ,  uter¬ 
que  eorum ,  uterque  horum ,  and  quorum  uterque ;  as,  “We  were  both  present;” 
Uterque  nostrum  adfuit  (or  also,  without  nostrum,  uterque  adfuimus). — But,  when 
uterque  is  joined  to  a  noun,  they  are  both  put  in  the  same  case,  even  when  a  pronoun 
is  added,  as  uterque  dux,  uterque  exerciius,  utrumque  regnum,  quod  uirumque  ex- 
emplum. 

The  plural  of  uterque  is  in  general  used  only  when  there  are  several  individuals 
on  each  side  ;  as,  Utrique  vicioriam  crudeliter  exercebant.  Utrique  Socratici  et  Blatonici 
volumus  esse. 


Note  5. — When  a  numeral  adjective,  such  as  few,  in  an  y,  more,  ten.  lnindre  d, 
etc.,  is  joined,  by  means  of  the  sign  “of,”  to  a  personal,  demonstrative,  or  relative 
pronoun,  the  latter  is  put  in  the  same  case  with  the  adjective,  when  not  a  part  only, 
but  the  whole  party  are  spoken  of;  e.  g.,  “There  are  ten  of  us:  how  many  are  there  of 
you  ?”  (=  “  We  are  ten  in  all :  how  many  are  you  all  together  ?”)  Nos  decern  sumus  : 
quot  ipsi  estisf — Trecenti 1  conjuravimus.  Venio  ad  tuas  cpistolas.  quas  (of  which)  ego 
sexcentas  uno  tempore  accept,  aliam  alia  jucundiorem.  Be  vera  loquor  amicitia,  qualis 
eorum  qui 2  pauci  numerantur ,  fuit.  Veniamus  ad  vivos  qui  (of  whom)  duo  de  consu- 
larium  numero  supersunt. 


Note  6. — When  besides  the  partitive  genitive,  there  occurs  another  substantive  of 
a  different  gender  from  that  of  the  genitive,  the  adjective  may  agree  in  gender  with 
either;  as,  Leones  ferarum  generosissimi  sunt.  Indus  omnium  jlumin  am  est  maxi- 
mus. — Animalium  terrestrium  maximum  est  elephas.  Velocissimum  omnium  animalium 
est  delphinus. 


J)  Three  hundred  of  us,  i.  c.,  We,  tliree  hundred  in  all,  have  ....  8)  of  whom  verj 

few  are  recorded. 


ADJECTIVES. 


117 


Multum  pecuniae. 

§  128. — The  genitive  stands  also  with  the  following  neuters  of  adjec¬ 
tives  and  adjective  pronouns  :  tantum ,  so  much  ;  quantum,  ho\t  much  ; 
aliquantum,  some  ;  tantum — quantum ,  as  much — as  ;  and  their  diminu¬ 
tives  tantalum ,  quantulum ,  aliquantuium ,  quantulumcunque  ; — multum , 
jo/ws,  plurimum, — minus ,  minimum, — paulum ,  paululum ,  nimium, — 
quid  with  its  compounds  aliquid ,  quid  quid ,  quidpiam ,  quidquam , — hoc, 
id,  illud,  istud,  idem , — gwoc?  in  the  sense  of  quantum,  and  quodcunque  in 
the  sense  of  quantumcunque ;  as,  “Much  (of)  money.” 

Quantum  voluptatis 1  ajfert  liber alitas  !  Minus  habeo  virium  quam 
vestrum  utervis .  ?2o?2  habei  vita  laboris?  Undique  ad  inferos 

tantundem  vice  est.  Quid  causae ,  quid  rei  est  ?  Exponam  quid  hominis 
sit.  Quid  tu  hominis  es  ?  Quod  cuique  temporis  datur ,  eo  debet  esse 
contentus .  AToc  ac?  te  litterarum 2  idem  consilii  do  quod 

mihimet  ipsi.  Sicilia  hoc  mihi  oneris  negotiique  imposuit. 


Note  1. — Of  these  neuters, — plus,  and  quid  with  its  compounds,  are  regularly  con¬ 
strued  with  the  genitive.  Eor  quid  and  its  compounds,  however,  see  Note  2. 

The  rest  govern  the  genitive  only  under  condition  a)  that  they  be  used  in  a  quanti¬ 
tive  sense  {much,  more,  little,  less ,  etc.)  ;  b)  that  they  be  either  in  the  nom.  or  accus. 
neut.  sing.  ;  and  e)  that  they  be  independent  of  any  preposition.  Otherwise,  they 
agree,  like  other  adjectives,  with  their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and  case. — Hence 
we  say  :  tantum  laboris ,  “  so  much  labor but  tantus  labor,  “  so  great  a  labor  — * 
multum  pecuniae ,  “much  money;”  but  multa  pecunia,  “a  large  sum  of  money;” — 
minus periculi,  “less  danger;”  but  minus  periculutn ,  “  i  smaller  danger ;”  multum 
sanguinis  effudit,  but  multo  sanguine  victoria  stetit paululum  vice  progressus,  but 
pro  paulula  via  magna  scape  merces  solvenda  ; — multum  diei  processerunt,  but  ad  multum 
noctcm 3  colloquebantur ,  etc. 

Note  2. — The  genitive  construed  with  the  above-mentioned  neuters  is  not  always  a 
substantive,  but  often  the  neuter  of  an  adjective,  as  aliquid  boni,  quiddam  novi ,  quid 
pulchri?  etc.  ; — but  with  adjectives  of  the  8d  declension  we  can  say  only  aliquid 
memorabile,  quidquam  tale,  nihil  utile,  nihil  suave ,  and  not  aliquid  memorabilis,  quid¬ 
quam  talis,  etc.,  except,  perhaps,  for  the  sake  of  correspondence,  in' connection  with 
neuters  of  the  2d  declension,  as  aliquid  noviac  memorabilis ,  aliquid  vagi  et  instabilis, — 
though  even  in  this  case  it  is  better  to  say,  aliquid  novum  ac  memorabile,  aliquid 
vagum  et  instabile 

With  quid,  aliquid,-  quiaquam,  and  nihil,  an  adjective  of  the  2d  deck  is  sometimes 
put  in  the  same  case,  as  it  wore,  in  apposition,  especially  where  there-  is  any  case 
dependent  on  such  an  adjective,  e.  g.,  Quid  nonesium  dictu  preetenditur  ?  Nihil 
expectations  vestra  dignum  dico.  Nihil  (quod  est)  altum,  nihil  magnificum ,  nihil  divinum 


J)  How  much  pleasure . ( quantam  voluptatem  would  signify:  how  great  a 

pleasure  !)  2)  that  much  of  a  letter.  3)  until  late  at  night. 


I 


118  ADJECTIVES. 

suspicere  possunt.  Qui  se  ipse  norit ,  sentiet  aliquid  se  habere  (quod  est)  divinum .  Thus, 
Quid  aliud?  “  what  else  ?”• — Quid  mirum  t  “  What  wonder  ?” 

Note  3. — When  tantum  and  id  are  followed  by  their  correlatives  quantum  and  quod , 
the  former  are  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  Medico  mercedis  quantum poscet,  promitti  jubeto. 
Navium  quod  ubique  fuerat,1  unum  in  locum  Caesar  coegerat ,  instead  of  id  navium  quod. 
Vastatur  agri  quod  inter  urbem  ac  Fidenas  est.  Misit  Antiocho  vini ,  olei,  quod  ei  -visum 
erat ;  etiam  tritici ,  quod  satis  esset ,  instead  of  tantum  vini  quantum ,  etc. 

Note  4. — To  this  rule  belong  also  the  expressions  extremum  anni,  ultimum  inopioe , 
reliquum  noctis ,  summum  montis ,  summa  tectorum ,  cuncta  terrarum ,  angusta  viarum , 
opaca  loco  rum,  incerta  belli ,  incerta  casuum ,  extrema  ag  minis,  reliqua  rerum  buarum , 
opportuna  locorum ,  prcerupta  collium ,  ard.ua  montium ,  and  the  like,  which  are  fre¬ 
quently  met  with  in  poets  and  historians, — and  also  the  phrases  id  lemporis  and  w 
(Aoc,  idem)  cetatis ,  which  often  occur  in  the  sense  of  fo  tempore ,  “  at  that  time,”  and  fa 
“  at  (of)  that  age  e.  g.,  Purgavit  se  quod  id  temporis  venisset.  Id  cetatis  jam 
sumus ,  omnia  fortiter  ferre  debeamus. 


ADJECTIVES  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 

Utilis  agris. 

§  124. — Adjectives  denoting  usefulness,  pleasantness,  fitness,  readiness , 
equality ,  similarity ,  facility ,  proximity ,  and  their  contraries,  govern  the 
dative  of  the  object  to  which  these  qualities  are  directed;  as,  “Useful 
to  (or  for)  the  fields.” 

Cunctis  esto  benignus ,  nulli  blandus ,  panels  familiar  is,  omnibus  acquits. 
Me  omnibus  in  rebus  tibi  amicissimum  fidelissimumque  cognosces. 
Themis  tocli  pauci  pares  putantur .  Nihil  est  morti  tarri  simile  quam 
somnus.  Voluptatibus  maximis  fastidium  fnitimum  est.  Quid  est 
tarn  commune  quam  spiritus  vivis ,  terra  mortuis ,  ware  fuctuantibus. 
litus  ejectis  ? 

Note  1. — The  adjectives  cequalis  (in  the  sense  of  “contemporary”),  communis , 
peculiaris,  proprius ,  and  superstes,  beside  the  dative,  take  also  the  genitive  ;  and  the 
adjectives  propior  and  proximus ,  beside  the  dative,  also  the  accusative.  E.  g.,  Fm 
propria  est  maxirne  fortiiudo.  Proprium  est  oratoris  ornate  dicere.  Amicorum  omnia 
sunt  communia.  Aristides  fuit  ceaualis  Themuloclis.  TItinam  te  non  solum  vitce  sed 
etiam  dignitatis  superstitem  reliqnissem  !  Grauus  cum  legione  septima  proximus  Oceanum 
(or  Oceano)  hiemabai.  Ubii proximi  Rhenum  incolunt. 

The  adjectives  amicus,  inimicus ,  adver  sarins,  intimus ,  familiar  is,  cognat-us ,  and 
necessarius  (“  a  relative”),  are  not  unfrequently  used  as  substantives,  and  as  such 
construed  with  the  genitive.  This  is  sometimes  the  case  even  when  they  are  used  as 
adjectives,  but  in  the  superlative  degree;  as,  amicissimus  ( familiar issimus,  inimi- 
cissimus)  nostrorum  hominum. 


J)  as  many  ships  as. 


ADJECTIVES. 


119 


Note  2. — Adjectives  denoting  readiness  more  frequently  take  the  accusative 
with  ad ;  as,  ad  omnia  {ad  pugnam ,  ad  omne  f acinus)  par atus  ;  pig er  ad  poenam ,  ad 
premia  velox. 

Adjectives  denoting  a  friendly  or  hostile  disposition  often  take  the  accusa¬ 
tive  with  in,  erga ,  adversus  ;  as,  benevolus  erga  cites ,  acerbus  in  hostes ,  crudelis  in  suos, 
grains  erga  me,  fidelis  et  benignus  in  omnes. 

Adjectives  denoting  fitness  and  usefulness  generally  take  the  accusative  of 
the  thing  with  ad,  but  always  the  dative  of  the  person  to  or  for  whom  a  thing  is  use¬ 
ful  or  tit;  as,  locus  ad  insidias  aptissimus  ;  corporis  motus  ad  naturam  accommodati ; 
Pompeius  ad  omnia  summa  natus  j  homo  ad  nullarn  rem  utilis.  Faciam  id  quod  est  ad 
omnium  salutem  utilius. 

Note  3. — Similis ,  consimilis ,  and  dissimilis ,  govern  the  dative,  when  an  outward 
resemblance  is  spoken  of;  but  the  genitive,  when  an  inward  resemblance, — a 
resemblance  in  character  and  disposition  is  referred  to ;  e.  g.,  Canis  nonne  similis 
lupot  P.  Crassus  dum  Cyri  et  Alexandra  similis  esse  voluit,  et  L.  Crassi  et  multorum 
Crassorum  inventus  est  dissimillimns.  But  when  the  word  depending  on  these  adjec¬ 
tives,  as  also  on  par  and  dispar ,  is  a  personal  pronoun,  the  genitives  mei,  tui,  sui , 
nostri,  and  vestri ,  are  always  used ;  as,  Cur  semper  tui  dissimiles  defendis  ?  Q.  Metellum, 
cvjus paucos  pares  hcec  civitas  tulit,  cum  Pisone  non  conferam.  Fee  habet  animi  natura 
in  se  quicquam  admixtum  dispar  sui  atque  dissimile. 

Diversus  and  absonus,  “  unlike,”  generally  take  the  ablative  with  ab. — Consentaneus 
sometimes  takes  the  ablative  with  cum.  E.  g.,  Certa  cum  illo  qui  a  te  totus  diversus 
est.  Fee  absoni  a  voce  motus  erant.  Decorum  id  est  quod  consentaneum  est  hominis 
excellentice ,  or  cum  hominis  excellentia. 

Mutual  or  reciprocal  similarity  is  generally  expressed  by  the  accusative  with  inter  ; 
as,  inter  se  similes  ;  inter  se  diversi  j  pessirna  ac  diversa  inter  se  mala,  luxuria  atqw 
avaritia. 


ADJECTIVES  GOVERNING  THE  ABLATIVE. 

Laude  dignus. 

*  §  125. — The  adjectives  dignus ,  indignus ,  alienus — contentus ,  f veins , 
proeditus — liber,  immunis,  vacuus — ex  tor  vis,  orbus,  viduus — and  others 
of  a  similar  meaning,  govern  the  ablative  ;  as,  “  Deserving  of  praise.” 

JExcellentium  hominum  virtus  imitatione,  non  invidia  digna  est. 
QuoUisquisque  sorte  sua  contentus  vivit  ?  Alienum  est  magno  vivo,  quod 
alteri  prceceperit,  id  ipsum  facere  non  posse.  Omni  perturhatione  animi 
liber  esto.  Datames  fretus  numero  copiarum,  confligere  cupiebat. 

Note  1. — Dignus  and  indignus,  in  the  sense  of  u  becoming”  and  “  unbecoming,” 
are  construed  with  the  ablative  of  the  person  ;  as,  Pigritia  homine  est  indig na . 
Fulla  res  juvene  magis  digna  est  quam  virtutis  ac  litter  arum  studium. 

Alienus,  “  unbecoming,”  “  not  suited.”  takes  the  ablative  with  or  without  ab,  and 
sometimes  also  the  genitive  :  e,  g.,  Hoc  a  te  alienum  est.  Fon  alienum  putat  dig  nit  ate 
sua  or  suce  dignitatis. — In  the  sense  of  “averse,”  “disaffected,”  “hostile,”  it  usually 
takes  the  ablative  (always  with  ab),  and  occasionally  the  dative  ;  as,  homo  alienus  a 
liUeris  j  habere  animum  alienum  ab  aliquo.  Id  dicit  quod  Mi  causa,  maxime  alienum  esL 


120 


ADJECTIVES. 


Note  2.- -The  adjectives  liber ,  immunis ,  and  vacuus,  take  the  ablative  both  with  and 
without  ab  ;  as,  liber  omni  metu ,  liber  db  omni  molestia  j — animus  curls  vacuus  and 
hora  nulla  a  scelere  vacua. 

Adjectives  signify  ng  “  descending  from.”  as  natus ,  genitvs ,  satus ,  ortus ,  oriundvs , 
are  usually  construed  with  the  ablatives  Zoco,  genere ,  stirpe,  faniilia,  patre ,  parentibus 
e.  g.,  Agathocles  patre  jigulo  natus  erat.  Me  equestrl  loco  ortum  videtis.  Archias  natus 
est  loco  nobili. 

Note  3.— To  this  rule  belong  also  a)  the  defective  adjective  iwacfc  in  the  phrases 
made  virtute  esto  and  macti  virtute  estote ,  “  hail  to  your  heroism  1”  or  simply  made 
viKute,  “  good  luck  to  you  !”  “  well  done,”  “  bravo  and  b)  the  adjectives  grandis , 
gr audio r  j  mag nus,  major,  rnaximus  ;  minor ,  minimus,  to  which  the  ablative  natu  is 
frequently  added  to  denote  age.  E.  g.,  Macte  virtute  diligeniiague  esto.  Macte  nova 
virtute,  puer :  sic  itur  ad  astra. — Idmeaminimerefert  qui  sum  natu  rnaximus.  Ado- 
lescentis  est  major  es  natu  vereri. — We  find  also  magno  natu,  maximo  natu:  as,  Timotheus, 
cum  esset  magno  natu,  magistratus  gerere  desiit.  A  Datame  Scismas,  maximo  natu 
jilius ,  desciit. 


II.  Use  of  the  Comparative. 

There  are  two  ways  of  comparing  one  object  with  another :  1.)  by 
quam ,  and  2.)  without  quam. 

COMPARISON  by  QUAM. 


Virtus  est  pretiosior  quam  aurum. 

§  126. — When  two  objects  are  compared  by  quam,  they  are  both  put 
in  the  same  case  ;  as,  “  Virtue  is  more  valuable  than  gold.” 

j Europa  minor  est  quam  Asia.  Lingua  Latina  locupleiior  est  quam 
Grceca.  Carior  mild  est  patria  quam  egomet  ipse. —  Gertum  est  Europam 
minorem  esse  quam  Asiam.  Lta  sentio  linguam  Latinam  locupleiior em 
isse  quam  Grcecam.  Decet  cariorem  nobis  esse  patriam  quam  nosmet 
ipsos. 


Note  1. — When  the  same  noun  belongs  to  each  member  of  the  comparison,  it  is  in 
Latin  expressed  in  the  first  clause,  and  omitted  in  the  second.  In  English  we  like¬ 
wise  express  it  in  the  first  member,  but  replace  it  by  “that”  or  “those”  in  the 
second.  These  pronouns,  however,  are  not  to  be  translated  into  Latin.  E.  g,,  “The 
song  of  the  nightingale  is  sweeter  than  that  of  the  other  birds  p  Lusc inice  cantus 
tuavior  est  quam  ceterarum  avium  (sc.  cantus).  Themistoclis  nomen  illustrius  est 
qua?nl  Solonis  (sc.  nomen).  Morbi  animi  pevicidosiores  sunt  quam 2  corporis  (sc. 
morbi). 

Note  2. — The  English  “  still”  before  a  comparative  is  rendered,  in  the  Classical 


p  than  that  of.  2)  than  those  of. 


ADJECTIVES, 


121 


writers,  by  etiam  ;  in  later  prose,  by  adlinc;  as,  Tantmi  el  plus  etiam  fnihi  debet.  Ui 
in  corporibus  mag  nee  dissimilitiidin.es  sunt,  sic  in  animis  existunt  etiam  major  es. — 
Sometimes  it  is  not  translated  at  all ;  e.  g.,  Indiqnum  est  a  pari  vinci ,  indig nius  ab 
infer  lore.  Acerbum  est  ab  aliquo  circarnveniri ,  acerbius  a  propinquo. 

Note  3. — When  an  accusative  precedes,  and  the  predicate-adjective  belonging  to  it 
can  be  resolved  into  a  relative  clause,  the  object  after  quam  is  either  put  in  the  nomi¬ 
native  with  est,  fuit ,  etc.,  or  else  it  is  attracted  into  the  same  case,  that  is,  into  the 
accusative,  provided  the  verb  of  the  preceding  clause  can  be  supplied  after  guam. 
E.  g.,  “  I  do  not  know  a  more  jovial  man  than  thou  art,” — equivalent  to:  “I  do  not 
know  a  man  that  is  more  jovial  than  thou  art.” 

Non  novi  hominem  hilariorem  quam  tu  es,  or  quam  te. 

Thus,  Tota  Sicilia  non  vidimus  pulchriorem  urbem  quam  Syracusas,  or  quam  est  urbs 
Syracuse.,  Neminem  aui  majorem  am  utiliorem  virum  Lacedaemon  genuit  quam  Lycur- 
gvm,  or  quam  Lycurgus fuit.  Lgo  hominem  callidiorem  vidi  neminem  quam  Phormi- 
onem ,  or  quam  Pnormio  esi- 

When  the  preceding  substantive  with  its  predicate-adjective  is  not  in  the  accusa¬ 
tive,  or  when  the  verb  before  quam  cannot  be  supplied  after  quam ,  no  attraction 
■whatsoever  takes  place  and  the  object  after  quam  must  be  put  in  the  nominative  with 
quam  est ,  quam  fuit,  etc.,  expressly  added  to  it ;  as,  Hcbc  sunt  verba  Varronis ,  quam 
fait  Clodius,  doctibris ,  not  quam  Clodii.  Librum  dedi  Caio  adolescenti ,  quam  tu  es, 
multo  digniori,  not  quam  tibi.  Sempronio  viro  eruditiore,  quam  Elpidius  est,  familiar  i- 
Ur  ulor,  not  quam  Mpidio.  Paulum  tribus  annis  natu.  minor em,  quam  ipse  sum ,  fratrem 
ami-si,  not  quam  me  ip  mm ,  because  the  verb  amisi  could  not  be  supplied  with  this 
accusative. 

'jpLP  Let  the  pupil  bear  in  mind  that  the  preceding  examples  are  elliptical,  and  that 
the  objects  compared  with  each  other  belong  in  reality,  though  not  in  appearance,  to 
the  same  verb,  and  are  in  the  same  case.  For  instance,  Librum  dedi  Caio  adolescenti , 
quam  tu  es,  multo  digniori — is  in  its  full  construction  (see  §  89,  7)  equivalent  to  : 
Librum  dedi  Cain,  qui  est  adolescens  multo  dignior  quam  tu  es.  From  this  text  it  is  easy 
to  see  that  the  objects  grammatically  compared  by  quam,  are  not  Caio  and  tu,  but  the 
relative  qui  and  tu,  both  of  which  belong  to  the  same  verb  esse,  and  are  in  the  same 
case,  namely,  in  the  nominative. 


COMPARISON  Without  QUAM, 

Virtus  pretiosior  est  a  tiro. 

§  12Y. — When  two  objects  are  compared  without  quam,  the  latter  la 
put  in  the  ablative ;  as,  “  Virtue  is  more  valuable  than  gold.” 

Lux  sonihtr  velocior  est.  Tallus  Ilostilius  ferocior  etiam  Romulo  full. 
JElephxmto  belluarum  nulla  est  prudentior.  Mihi  nemo  est  amicior  nec 
jucundior  nec  carior  Atiico.  Nihil  est  oiiosa  senectute  jucundius.  Nec 
melior  vir  fuit  Africano  quisquam  nec  clarior. 

Note  1. — To  emit  quam,  it  is  necessary  (a)  that  the  objects  compared  be  either  in 
the  nominative  or  (in  the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.)  in  the  accusative ;  (b)  that 
the  y  belong  to  the  same  verb;  and  (c)  that  they  be  not  both  of  the  first  declension 


122 


ADJECTIVES. 


singular. — Accordingly  quam  must  be  expressed  in  such  sentences  as  :  Multi  cont&n- 
tionis  quam  veritatis  sunt  cupidiores.  Ppaminondas  saluti  civitatis  magis  quam  victor-in 
Thebanorum  consuluit.  Pompeius  pl-ura  hello,  gees  it  quam  ceteri  legerunt .  Hibernia 
minor  est  quam  Britannia. 

In  the  last  example  the  omission  of  quam  (sc.  Hibernia  Britannia  minor  est )  would 
make  it  doubtful  whether  II.  is  smaller  than  B.,  or  B.  smaller  than  II.,  because  we 
would  not  know  which  of  the  two  is  the  nominative  and  which  the  ablative. — But  no 
such  ambiguity  is  to  be  apprehended  in  the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  and  we 
may,  therefore,  say  without  quam  :  Constat  Hiberniam  minor  era  esse  Britannia. 

Note  2. — The  ablative  instead  of  quam  with  the  accusative  is  more  frequent  in  poetry 
than  in  prose.  Still  we  meet,  even  in  the  best  writers,  with  such  instances  as,  Sapiens 
humana  omnia  inferiora  virtute  ducit.  Caesar  militum  suorum  vitam  sua  ipsius  salute 
habuit  cariorem.  Beminem  Ly cargo  utiliorem  virum  Lacedaemon  genuit.  Bum  mittent 
hominem  Servilio  digniorem  ?  Aut  die  aliquid  silentio  melius ,  aut  tace. 

In  prose  the  ablative  more  frequently  occurs  with  demonstratives, — and  when  a 
comparative  is  connected  with  the  relative,  the  ablative  is  exclusively  used  ;  e.  g., 
Hoc  mihi  gratius  nihil  facere  potes.  Ne  off  eras  te  periculis  sine  causa ,  quo  nihil  potest 
esse  stultius.1  Secundum  Punicum  bellum  quo  nullum  neque  magus  neque  periculosiu* 
.Romani  gessere ,2  finitum  est  anno ,  etc.  Senectus  adolescentulos  doceat ,  quo  quid  potest 
esse  prosclarius?  Miramur  Phidias  simulacra ,  quibus  nihil  in  eo  genere  per/ectius 
videmus. 

Note  3. — After  the  comparatives  plus,  amplius ,  and  minus ,  when  joined  to  numerals, 
quam  is  often  omitted  without  influence  upon  the  construction,  that  is,  without  the 
nominative  or  accusative  being  changed  into  the  ablative,  though  the  ablative  may  be 
used  also  ;  as,  Plus  quam  quingenti  viri,  plus  quingenti  viri ,  and  plus  quingentis  viris. 
Mille  amplius  homines  quotidie  sustentat. 

The  comparatives  plus,  amplius ,  and  minus,  are  in  this  case  indeclinable,  and 
when  any  of  them,  joined  to  a  plural,  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  the  verb  must  be 
put  in  the  plural  also;  e.  g.,  “  It  is  already  more  than  six  months;”  Jam  amplius 
{quam)  sex  menses  sunt ,  not  est.  Minus  duo  millia  hominum  ex  tanto  exercitu  effvgerunt , 
not  effugit.  Plus  pars  dimidia  ex  quinquaginta  millibus  hominum  ccesa  sunt. — plus 
quingentos  colaphos  inf  regib  mihi ,  not  pl-ures.  Pictores  antiqui  non  sunt  usi  plus 
{quam)  quatuor  coloribus ,  not  pluribus.  ( phP  But  we  would  say  correctly:  Plures 
tibi  colaphos  infregit  quam  mihi  ;  and,  Burn  nostree  aetatis  pictores  pluribus  utuntur 
coloribus  quam  pictores  antiqui  usi  sunt  ?,  because  in  each  of  these  sentences,  plus — not 
being  joined  to  any  numeral — is  a  declinable  adjective  and  agrees  with  its  substan¬ 
tive  accordingly.) 

Sometimes,  as  it  has  been  observed,  the  ablative  is  used  instead  of  the  nominative 
or  the  accusative  ;  as,  Bora  amplius  moliebantur.  Eo  die  caesi  sunt  Iiomanis  minus 
mingentis.  Roscius  nunquam plus  triduo  Romae  fuit. 

Thus  with  longius  ;  as,  Caesar  ab  hostium  castris  non  lonqius  mille  quingentis  passibus 
{mille  quingentos  passus ,  and  quam  mille  ouingentos  passus)  aberat. 

Note  4. — To  the  comparative  construction  belong  also  the  expressions  :  opinions 
major ,  spe  citius ,  solito  tristior ,  plus  eeqvo,  and  the  like  ;  as,  “  Ke  returned  sooner 
than  was  expected;”  Spe  or  expectations  citius  rediit.  Dido  citius 3  otquora  placat. 


l)  than  which  there  is  nothing  more  foolish, — or  which  is  the  greatest  folly  that 

can  be  imagined.  2)  than  which  the  K.  did  not  w'age  a  greater  or  more  dangerous, — 

the  greatest  and  most  dangerous  the  E.  had  ever  waged.  9)  quicker  than  the  word 

was  spoken. 


ADJECTIVES. 


123 


Cccsar  opinions  celerius 1  venzurus  esse  dicitur.  Hoc  malum  latius  opinions  dissemina- 
turn  est. 

Quam  pro ,  joined  to  a  comparative,  means  “in  proportion  to,”  or  “too  e.  g.,  great, 
wise  ....  for:”  as,  “A  battie  too  severe  (unusually  severe)  for  the  number  of  com¬ 
batants  Prcelium  atrocius  quam  pro  pugnardium  numero  editur.  Alexander  in  regia 
sella  consedit  multo  excelsiors  quam  pro  habitu  corporis  2 

Note  5. — When  the  comparison  is  made — not  between  two  objects,  but  between 
the  qualities  of  the  same  ob  ject,  in  Latin  either  the  comparative  with  quam ,  or  the 
positive  with  magis  quam,  is  used;  as,  “A  pestilence  more  alarming  than  fatal;” 
Pestilentia  minacior  quam  perniciosiov  (minax  magis  quam  perniciosa )  co-orta  est . 
Romani  queeaam  bella  fortius  quam  felicius  ( magis  fortiter  quam  feliciter)  gesserunt . 
Acrius  quam  dtutius  ( magis  acriter  quam  diu )  pugnatum  est, 

Note  6. — The  words  rather,  too,  somewhat,  before  a  positive,  are  commonly 
rendered  by  the  comparative,  unless  they  be  used  emphatically ;  e.  g.,  “  The  crop 
was  rather  scanty,”  etc.  Frumentum  in  Gallia  propter  siccitates  angustius  provenerat. 
Senectus  est  natura  loquacior.  Themistocles  liberius  vivebat . 


Minor  uno  mense. 

§  128. — The  measure  by  which  one  thing  exceeds  or  falls  short  of 
another,  is  expressed  by  the  ablative ;  as,  “  Younger  by  one  month.77 

Hibernia  dimidio  minor  est  quam  Britannia .  Romani  duobus  milli¬ 
ons  plures  erani  quam  Sabini.  Turres  denis  pedibus  quam  murus , 
altiores  sunt.  Februarius  duobus  vel  tribus  diebus  brevior  est  quam 
ceteri  menses. 

i 

?  Note  1. — The  measure  is  often  expressed  by  such  ablatives  as  multo,  tanto,  quanto, 
aliquanto ,  pavlo,  pauiuio,  tantulo,  altera  tanto,5  multis  partibus ,4  hoc,  eo,  and  quo  ;  as, 
“So  much  the  better;”  Eo  or  tanto  melius. — “So  much  the  worse;”  Eo  or  tanto 
pejus. — “A  way  twice  as  long  ;”  Via  altero  tanto  longior. 

These  ablatives  are  often  used  also  with  verbs  that  contain  the  idea  of  a  compari¬ 
son,  such  as  mails,  prceslart,  superare,  excellere ,  antecedere ,  and  the  like ;  e.  g.,  Satis 
docui,  hominis  natura  quanto  anteiret  omnes  animantes. — With  antecedere,  excellere , 
and  preestare,  tantum  and  quantum  are  sometimes  used  even  in  tiie  best  writers.  Thus 
we  find  multo  and  multurn  prccstare 

Note  2. — The  English  “  the — the,”  before  two  comparatives,  is  in  Latin  expressed 
by  quo — eo,  or  quanto — tanto  ;  as,  Procellce  quanto  plus  habent  virium,  tanto  minus 
temporis.  Homines  quo  plura  habent ,  eo  cupiunt  ampliora.  Quo  quisque  est  sollertior  et 
ingeniosior ,5  hoc  docet  iracundius  et  laboriosiue. 

In  sentences  containing  no  definite  subject  and  expressing  a  mere  general  idea, 
Latin  writers,  instead  of  quo — eo  with  two  comparatives,  frequently  use  ut  quisque — 
iia  with  two  superlatives.  Thus, 

Quo  quis  est  fortior,  eo  est  generosior, — or, 

Ut  quisque  est  fortissimus,  ita  est  generosissimus. 


*)  sooner  than  is  believed.  2)  far  too  high  for  his  stature.  *)  twice  a9  much.  4)  by 
far  or  many  times.  6)  also,  quo  quis  est  sollertior  or  quo  sollertior  aliquis  est. 


12J- 


ADJECTIYES. 


Quo  quis  melius  elicit,  eo  mag  is  dicendi  diflicultatem  timet ,  or  Ut  quisque  optime  dicit , 
ita  maxime  dicendi  d ijjicultatem  timet. — Ita  before  the  second  superlative  is  sometimes 
omitted  ;  as,  Ut  quisque  maxime per spicit,  quid  in  re  quaque  verissimum  sit ,  is  pruden- 
tissimus  et  sapientissimus  rite  liabevi  solet. 

Note  3. — When  ut  quisque  is  combined  with  sum ,  esse,  the  two  clauses  arc  fre¬ 
quently  contracted  into  one,  by  omitting  ut — est  in  the  former  and  ita  in  the  latter 
clause,  and  putting  quisque  with  its  superlative  in  the  case  of  the  demonstrative, 
either  expressed  or  understood,  (jjpgjp  Quisque ,  then,  is  always  placed  immediately 
after  the  superlative.)  E.  g., 

(Nominative.) 

Quo  quid  est  melius,  eo  rarius  est. 

Ut  quidque  est  optimum,  ita  (id)  rarissimum  est. 

Optimum  quidque  rarissimum  est. 

(Genitive.) 

Quo  quis  est  mclior,  eo  magis  vicem  eius  dolemus. 

Ut  quisque  est  optimus,  ita  maxime  ejus  vicem  dolemus. 

Optimi  cuj usque  vicem  maxime  dolemus. 

(Dative.) 

Quo  majus  beneficium  quodque  est,  eo  plus  ei  debetur. 

Ut  quodque  beneficium  est  maximum,  ita  plurimum  ei  debetur, 

Maximo  cuique  beneficio  plurimum  debetur. 

(Accusative.) 

Quo  fortior  quis  est,  eo  magis  fortuna  ipsum  juvat. 

Ut  quisque  est  fortissimus,  ita  maxime  fortuna  eum  juvat. 

Fortissimum  quemque  fortuna  maxime  juvat. 

(Ablative.' 

Quo  quisque  est  sapientior,  eo  magis  ab  eo  alienum  est. 

Ut  quisque  est  sapientissimus,  ita  maxime  ab  eo  alienum  est. 

A  sapientissimo  quoque  alienissimum  est. 

Thus,  Sapientissimus  quisque  aiquissimo  animo  moritur  ;  stullissimus  iniquissimo. 
Occultissima  queeque  pericula  dijjicillime  vitantur.  Altissima  queeque  jlumina  minimo 
sono  labuntur.  Credulitas  in  optimi  cujusque  mentem  facillime  irrepit.  Optimo  et 
justissimo  cuique  reditus  in  caelum  patet  expeditissimus . 

In  translating  such  sentences,  we  may  either  use  (a)  “  the — the”  with  two  compara¬ 
tives,  or  say  (b)  “  in  proportion  as — so,”  or  we  may  render  (c)  quisque  by  always 
and  place  it  between  the  two  superlatives.  Thus  the  sentence:  Optimum  ouidque 
rarissimum  est ,  may  be  rendered  : 

The  better  a  thing  is,  the  rarer  it  is,  or 

In  proportion  as  a  thing  is  good,  so  is  it  rare,  or 

The  best  tilings  are  always  the  rarest 

Igp*  Quisque  preceded  by  the  superlative,  expresses  universality,  and  is,  in 
general,  equivalent  to  omnes  with  the  positive:  e.  g.,  Epicureos  doctissimus  quisque 1 
contemnit.  Nonne  optimus  quisque  et  gravuiimus  conjitetur  se  multa  ignorare  ?  Alex¬ 
ander  periculcsissima  queeque  aggrediebatur. 


r)  All  learned  men,  or  the  most  learned  men. 


ADJECTIVES. 


125 


Note  4. — To  increase  the  meaning  of  the  superlative,  quam ,  vel,  mulio,  longs,  facile , 
unus  with  or  without  ovinis ,  quam  possum,  and  quantum  possum,  are  frequently 
added  ;  as,  quam  brevissime ,  as  short  as  possible ; — vel  minima ,  the  very  least  things; — 
pax  vel  iniquissima ,  the  most  unjust  peace  in  the  world  ; — multo  or  longe  felirissimus , 
by  far  the  happiest  facile  doctissimus ,  unquestionably  the  most  learned. — Marcellas 
equites  quanto  maximo  possentx  impetu  in  hostem  irrumpere  jubet.  Quod  me  rogasti , 
quam potero  maturrime  faciam.  Quanto  m.aximo  potes  studio ,  in  rempublicam  incumbe. 
Dolores  me  cruciant  quanti  in  hominem  maximi  cadere  possunt .2  Hoc  ego  uno  -top rile 
Romano  familiar  issime  utor.  Scasvolarn  unum  nostras  civitatis  piuestantissimum  audeo 
dicere.  Eloqueniiam  rem  unam  esse  omnium  diffteillimam  existimo. 

Quam  qui  maxime ,  and  nihil  with  the  comparative,  have  likewise  the  force  of  an 
increased  superlative  ;  as,  Fratrem  tuum  ita  amo  quam  qui  maxime ,  “  as  much  as  any 
one.” — Tam  sum  amicus  reipublicoc  quam  qui  maxime.  Tam  mitis  sum  quam  qui 
maxime,  or  quam  qui  lenisswms. — Tam  mini  graium  id  erii  quam,  quod  maxime ,  or  quam 
quod  gratissimum,  “as  dear  as  possible,  or  as  dear  as  any  thing.” — Tantifil  quanti  qui 
maximi  or  piurimi. — Senectus  ibi  iantum  honor aiur  quam  ubi  maxime,  “as  much  as 
anywhere.” — Tam  pig er  esi  quam  cum  maxime,  “  as  iazy  as  ever.” — Nihii  me  infer- 
tuna  Lius,  nihil  fortunatius  esi  Catulo. — Nihil  meo  fraire  lenias,  nil  rib  asperius  iua 
tor  ore  mihi  visum  est. 

III.  Numeral  Adjectives. 

CARDINALS. 

§  129. — The  plural  of  unus  is  used  only  in  connection  with  substan¬ 
tives  which  have  no  singular,  or  which  have  in  the  plural  a  meaning 
different  from  that  of  the  singular ;  e.  g.,  unce  nuptice,  “  one  wedding  f 
unce  litter  ce,  “  one  letter una  castra ,  “  one  camp.” 


It  also  occurs,  though  rarely,  in  the  sense  of  “alone,”  or  “the  same;”  as,  JTni 
TJbii  iegatos  miser  ant.  Lacedxmonii  septingentos  jam  annos  unis  moribus  ei  nunquam 
mutatis  legibus  vivunt. 

Mille  and  Millia. 


§  ISO. — Mille  is  an  indeclinable  adjective,  and  may  be  joined  to  any 
case  of  a  substantive;  as, 


N.  mille  viri, 

(1.  mille  virornm. 
D.  mille  viris, 

A.  mille  viros, 

A.  mille  viris 


mille  miiites, 
mille  militum, 
mille  militibus, 
mille  miiites, 
mille  militibus 


mille  dies, 
mille  dierum, 
mille  diebus, 
mille  dies, 
mille  diebus. 


Sometimes,  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  mille  is  used  substantively  and  con¬ 
strued  with  tne  genitive;  as,  milbe  passuum,  mille  gugerum,  mille  nummum,  mille 
takntum. — Ea  civiias  mille  misit  militum.  Ante  fisnaum  Cloaii  facile  mille  hominum 
versabatur  (or,  mille  being  taken  collectively,  versabaniur). 


*)  with  the  greatest  possible  impetuosity.  2)  as  great  as  can  possibly  befail  a  man, 
or  the  greatest  that  can  befall  a.  man. 


128 


ADJECTIVES. 


§  181. — Millia  is  v  neuter  substantive  of  the  3d  declension,  and  is 
declined  like  tria,  triuin.  It  is  generally  preceded  by  cardinals,  and 
always  governs  the  genitive  of  the  persons  or  things  numbered  ;  e.  g., 
153000  foot. 

IT.  septingentr.  quinquaginta  tria millia  peditum, 

G.  septingentorum  quinquaginta  trium  millium  peditum 
D.  septingentis  quinquaginta  tribus  millibus  peditum. 

A.  septingenta  quinquaginta  tria  millia  peditum, 

A.  septingentis  quinquaginta  tribus  millibus  peditum. 

Noie. — In  place  of  the  cardinals,  the  .distributives  aro  sometimes  used  with 
millia;  as,  bin  a  millia,  quina  millia,  dena  millia ,  octogena  sena  millia ,  instead  of  duo 
millia ,  quinque  millia,  etc. 

.  When  millia  is  followed  by  a  lower  numeral,  tne  persons  or  things  numbered  aro 
either  put  in  the  genitive  and  placed  immediately  before  or  after  millia ;  e.  g.,  8641 
horse  perished  ; 

equitum  tria  millia  sexcenti  umis  et  quadraginta  perierunt, 
tria  millia  equitum  sexcenti  nnus  et  quadraginta  perierunt ; 

or  tney  are  put  in  the  same  case  with  millia,  and  placed  either  at  the  very  beginning 
or  after  the  smaller  number ;  as. 

equites  perierunt  tria  millia  sexcenti  quadraginta  units, 
tria  millia  sexcenti  units  et  quadraginta  equites  perierunt. 


How  to  read  numbers. 

§  132. — Numbers  exceeding  six  figures  are  not  read  in  Latin  by 
millions,  as  in  English,  but  by  cemum  millia  (usualiy  ceniena  millia ), 
“  hundreds  of  thousands,” 

To  facilitate  tlie  reading  of  numbers  expressive  of  millions,  it  is  advisable  to 
cut  off  the  five  right-hand  figures  of  the  given  number, — to  express  then  the 
number  arising  from  the  figures  to  the  left  by  adverbials,  with  centena  millia 
added,  and  the  number  arising  from  tlie  figures  cut  off  towards  the  right,  by 
cardinals. 

II^T'  Should  the  whole  number  contain  units  and  tens  of  thousands,  their 
respective  value  is  to  be  inserted  between  ceniena  and  millia.  E.  g., 

Undecies  centena  millia  quadringenti  tree. 

11)00403 )  1 

60,300022  f  gexcentjes  ter  centena  millia  viginti  duo. 

603 1 00022 } 

<4)0,0^3000 )  rp  r  mppcs  centena  viginti  tria  millia. 

3000123000  \  J 

41260  72895 )  Quauragies  semel  millies  ducenties  sexagies  centena  sevtuaginta 

41260|  72895  f  duo  millia  octingenti  nonaginta  quinque 


ADJECTIVES. 


127 


To  acquire  facility  in  tlie  reading  of  numbers,  let  the  pupil  set  down  any 
figure  whatever  (e.  g.,  the  figure  5),  and  then  increase  this  figure  by  the  addi¬ 
tion  of  as  many  other  optional  figures  as  may  be  desired.  These  optional  figures 
(e.  g.,  2,  7,  8,  9.  4,  8)  should  be  added,  in  succession,  one  by  one, — first  to  the 
left,  and  then  to  the  right ;  thus, 

5,  25,  725,  372d,  93725,  493725,  8493725, 

5,  52,  527,  5273,  52739,  527394,  5273948, 

the  pupil  each  time  expressing  in  Latin,  the  value  of  the  number  thus  arising 
from  the  successive  addition  of  the  several  figures. 

Note. — In  poetry,  the  thousands  are  generally  expressed  by  mille  with  the  adver- 
bials  ;  as,  43000  men. 

N.  quadragies  ter  mille  viri, 

G.  quadragies  ter  mille  virorum, 

D.  quadragies  ter  mille  viris, 

A.  quadragies  ter  mille  viros,  etc. 


ORDINALS. 

§  133. — The  ordinals  are  sometimes  used  where  in  English  the  cardinals  are 
employed.  This  is  particularly  the  case,  when  such  questions  are  asked,  as 
“what  year?** — “  what  page?” — “what  o’clock?” — E.  g.,  “The  year  1867  after 
Christ,”  Annus  post  Christum  natum  millesimus  octingcniesitnus  sexagesimus 
Septimus . — “  In  the  year  245  of  Rome,”  Anno  ab  XJrbe  condita  ducentesimo 
quadragesimo  quinzo, — “  Page  five  (sixty-two,  hundred  and  one),”  Pcigina  quinta 
( sexagesima  secunaa,  centesima  prima). — “  It  will  soon  be  one  (three,  five,  eleven) 
o’clock,”  Mox  exit  hora  prima ,  tertia,  quinta,  undecima. — “  He  arrived  at  half 
past  one,”  Advenit  hora  prima  cum  dimidio  ;  “  at  a  quarter  past  three,”  quad- 
rante  post  zertiam,  or  tertia  cum  quadrante ;  “at  a  quarter  to  five,”  hora  quarta 
cum  tribus  quaarantibus. 


DISTRIBUTIVES. 

§  134. — The  distributive  numerals  are  used : 

(a)  In  answer  to  “  how  many  each  time  ?” — “  how  many  a  piece  ?” — as,  Lex 
oratori  ternas  horas  assignavit.  Scipio  et  Hannibal  cum  singulis  (each  with 

an . )  interpretibus  congressi  sunt.  Digiti  articulos  hdbent  ternos,  pollex  binos. 

Roma  per  qumos  dies  senatores  imperaveruni.  Agri  Yeientani  septena  jugera 
plebi  (to  each  plebeian)  dividebanzur. — W hen  singuii  is  expressly  added,  a  car¬ 
dinal  may  be  used  instead  of  a  distributive ;  a*3,  Romos  per  quinque  dies  singuii 
senatores  imperaveruni. 

(b)  In  connection  with  adverbials,  m  the  multiplication  of  numbers;  as,  “Do 
you  know  how  many  twice  two  make  ?”  Ridicistine  bis  bina  quot  sint  ?  Quot 
suni  xexies  sepzena  ?  Quinquies  duodena  fiuni  sexaginta.  Luna  curriculum 
quaver  septenis  die'ous  conficitur. 

(c)  Instead  of  cardinals  (in  answer  to  the  question  “  how  many  ?”)  with  such 
plural  substantives  as  have  either  no  singular  at  all,  as  nuptice,  codicUli, — or,  if 


128 


PRONOUNS. 


the  singular  occurs,  have  in  the  plural  a  signification  different  from  that  of  the 
singular,  as  litter ce,  castra,  cedes  But  here  it  must  he  observed  that  instead  of 
singuli  and  term  commonly  uni  and  trini  are  used,  singuli  and  terni  retaining 
their  own  distributive  signification:  hence  we  say,  uni,  Uni,  trini  codiciUi ; 
unce,  Unce,  trince  nuptial. 

pgr  Words  like  litter  a,  castra,  cedes,  that  have  in  the  plural  a  signification 
different  from  that  of  the  singular,  take  in  the  signification  of  the  plural  the 
distributives  ;  but  in  that  of  the  singular,  the  cardinals  ;  as, 


unum  ca strum  means  one  fort, 
duo  castra  “  two  forts, 

tria  castra  u  three  forts. 


una  castra  means  one  camp, 
Una  castra  “  two  camps, 

trina  castra  “  three  camps, 


una  cedes 
dues  cedes 
tres  cedes 


means  one  temple, 

“  two  temples, 

“  three  temples. 


unce  cedes  means  one  house, 
binoe  cedes  two  houses, 

trince  cedes  “  three  houses. 


Una  (for  singula)  castra  ex  Unis  facta  esse  videbantur.  Unas  (for  singulas ) 
Unas ,  ternas,  quinas,  etc.,  a  te  accept  litteras.  Vox  “  do ”  duabus  litteris  constat. 

Fractional  expressions. 

§  135. — Fractions  are  generally  expressed  in  Latin,  as  in  English ;  as,  P,  dimi* 
dium  or  dimidia  pars ;  >/3,  tertia  pars  ;  %,  quinta  pars  ;  |,  dues  septirnce,  i.  e. 
partes ;  ^|,  tredecim  undetricesimce  ;  una  et  quadraginta  centesimal,  etc. 

When  the  denominator  exceeds  the  numerator  only  by  one,  as  g  4  1  11 
etc.,  the  fractions  are  expressed  by  dues,  quatuor,  seplem ,  undecim  partes ,  the 
denominator  being  understood.  Thus, 

is  read :  tres  sc.  partes,  i.  e.,  three  parts  out  of  four  ; 
ill,  is  read :  decern  sc.  partes,  i.  e.,  ten  parts  out  of  eleven,  etc. 


CHAPTER  Y 

PRONOUNS 

I.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

Cura  mea — cura  mei 

§  136. — The  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  mdt  tui,  sui ,  noslri, 
and  vcslri,  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  possessives  meus,  tuns,  suus , 
nosier ,  and  vester.  The  latter  are  generally  used  subjectively;  the 


PRONOUNS,  129 

foimer,  objectively ;  that  is,  the  possessive  pronouns  generally  denote 
the  person  that  does  or  possesses  something;  the  genitives  mei,  tui ,  sui, 
nostri,  and  vestri,  on  the  contrary,  denote  the  object,  to  which  an  actioD 
or  a  state  of  feeling  is  directed.  Thus,  e.  g., 

cur  a  nostra  means  our  care,  i.  e.,  the  care  which  we  have  of  others ; 
cura  nostri  “  the  care  of  us,  i.  e.,  the  care  which  others  have  of  us. 

amor  v ester  means  your  love,  i.  e.,  the  love  which  you  hear  to  others  ; 
amor  vestri  “  the  love  of  you,  i.  e.,  the  love  which  others  bear  to  you. 

Memoriam  nostri  pie  inviolateque  servate.  Ninas  vehernenter  tua  sui 
memoria  delectatur.  Lysander  magnam  reliquit  sui  famam.  Peto  a  te 
ne  me  putes  oblivione  tui  rarius  ad  te  scribere  quam  solebam.  Aviam 
tuam  scito  desiderio  tui  mortuam  esse.  Amove  tui  fratrem  tuum  odisse 
desinam. 


Note. — Sometimes,  however,  the  genitive  of  a  personal  pronoun  takes  the  place  of 
a  possessive,  and  still  oftener  does  a  possessive  (especially  when  joined  to  injuria ) 
stand  in  place  of  the  genitive  of  a  personal  pronoun.  E.  g.,  Neque  cuiquam  mortalium 
injurix  sux  (for  sui)  par vx  videntur.  Non  sua  (for  sui)  solum  ratio  habenda  est,  sed 
etiam  aliorum.  Tua  (for  tui)  hxc  esi  imago , — tarn  consimilis  est  quam  potest. 


Nostii,  vestri, — Nostrum,  vestrum. 

§  13?. — The  genitives  nostri  and  vestri  must  be  distinguished  from  the 
genitives  nostrum  and  vestrum.  The  forms  nostrum,  and  vestrum  are 
used  1.)  in  connection  with  partitives  (§  122,1),  in  the  sense  of  “among 
or  from  among  us  or  you as,  “  Who  among  you  is  ignorant  ?”  Quis 
vestrum  ignorat  ?  and  2.)  in  connection  with  the  genitive  omnium ;  as, 
“our  country  is  the  common  parent  of  us  all  f  P atria  communis  est 
omnium  nostrum  parens. — In  all  other  combinations  the  forms  nostri  and 
vestri  ought  to  be  used. 

Domus  u triusque  nostrum  ccdificatur  strctiue.  Nolo  singulos  vestrum 
excitare. —  Voluntati  vestrum  omnium  parui.  Ad  ilia  venio  quce  ud 
omnium  nostrum  vitam  salutemque  pertinent. — Habetis  ducem  memorem 
vestri ?  oblitum  sui.  Quando  te  nostri  et  reipubliece  miser ebit  ? 


Note  1. — With  omnium ,  the  possessives  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitives 
nostrum  and  vestrum ;  as,  Gog  or  vests  am  omnium  vicem  consulere.  Nolite ,  si  in  nostro 
omnium  fletu  nullam  lacrimam  aspexistis  Milonis,  hoc  ei  minus  parcere. — Thus  wo 
may  say  nostra  omnium  refert)  or  nostrum  omnium  rgert ;  vestra  omnium  interest,  or 
vestrum  omnium  interest. 


130 


PRONOUNS. 


Note  2. — "Wo  must  also  distinguish  the  expressions  pars  nostri  and  pars  vestri  from 
pars  nostrum  and  pars  vestrum.  The  expressions  pars  nostrum ,  pars  vestrum ,  signify 
fome  of  our  or  your  aggregate  number  (“  some  among  us  or  among  you”),  while  pars 
nostri ,  pars  vestri ,  mean  a  part  or  portion  of  our  or  your  individual  being  or  nature. 
E.  g.,  “  The  more  noble  part  of  us  is  the  soul;”  Nostri  pars  melior  animus  est. — Pars 
tui  melior  immortalis  est.  Pars  nostri  (i.  e.,  nostri  “  esse”)  est  sanguis.  Cui  propo~ 
eita  sit  conservatio  sui ,  necesse  est  hide  partes  quoque  sui  caras  esse  carioresque  quo 
perfeciiores  sint. 


Mea  unius  opera. 

§  138. — As  the  possessives  mens,  tuus ,  suits,  noster ,  v ester,  supply  the 
place  of  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  t  mei ,  tui ,  sui,  nostri ,  and 
vestri,  any  word  in  apposition  to  the  person  implied  in  a  possessive 
pronoun,  is  put  in  the  genitive.  Genitives  of  this  kind  are  especially 
unius,  solius  (“alone”),  and  ipsius ,  ipsorum ,  ipsarum  (“own”).  E.  g., 
“  Through  my  care  alone,”  i.  e.,  “  Through  the  care  of  me  alone.” 

Juravi  rempublicam  mea  unius  opera  esse  salvam.  Vestra  ipsorum, 
mater  advenit.  Meum  solius  peccatum  corrigi  non  potest.  Tuus  ipsius  f rater 
expectatur.  Mea  ipsius  (or  nostra  ipsorum )  maxime  interest } — Tua 
prceceptoris  quondam  mei  oratio  omnibus  probatur.  Tuum  viri  gravis - 
simi  atque  eruditissimi  judicium*  plurimi  et  feci  semper  etfaciam ..  Vim 
tuam  preesentis  exercitusque  tui 4  experiri  noluerunt.  Aves  foetus  suos 
libero  coelo  sueeque  ipsorum  fducice  permittunt.  Nonne  ei  meas  preesentis 
preces  prof uturas  fuisse  putas,  cui  nomen  meum  absentis  honorifuii? 

Note. — When  ipse  stands  in  apposition  to  a  possessive  pronoun  in  a  reflective 
clause,  it  usually  takes  the  case  of  the  subject;  as,  “  I  am  afraid  of  my  own  shadow 
Meam  ipse  umbram  timeo.  Tuam  ipse  umbrarn  times :  mam  ipse  umbram  timet  •  nos- 
tram  ipsi  umbram  timemus  ;  vestram  in  si  umbram  iimetis. —  Vestra  ipsi  virtute*  hana 
fraudem  vitastis .  Nec  hostes  modo  timebant ,  sed  suosmet  ipsi  cives. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  genitive  is  found,  where  the  case  of  the  subject  should  be 
used ;  as,  Suamei  ipsorum  culpa  duces  victi  sunt ,  instead  of  ipsi.  Suismet  ipsorum 
viribus  iantam  molem  belli  tolerare  non  possunt,  instead  of  ipsi. 


II.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 
Hie-  -me. 


§  139. — When  hi,  and  Me  refer  to  persons  or  things  mentioned 
before,  hie  generally  relates  to  the  nearer,  and  ille  to  the  more  remote. 


T)  It  is  my  (our)  own  greatest  concern.  2)  Your  speech,  once  my  preceptor,  or  who 
were  once  my  p,  s)  Thy  judgment,  a  most  grave  and  learned  man,  or  who  art  so 
grave  and  learned  a  man.  4)  Your  force,  who  were  on  the  snot,  and  that  of  your 
army.  6)  Through  your  own  resolution. 


PBONOUNS. 


131 


- — Hie ,  then,  answers  to  the  English  “  this”  or  “  the  latter and  ille ,  to 
“  that”  or  “  the  former.” — This  order,  however,  is  not  always  observed. 

Idem  et  docenti  et  discenti  debet  esse  propositum  ;  ut  ille  prodesse  velit , 
hie  projicere.  Gory  don  et  Thyrsis  ducebant  yreges :  hie  oves ,  ille 
capellas. — Melior  tutiorque  est  certa  pax ,  quam  sperata  victoria  :  hat 
(pax)  in  tua ,  ilia  (victoria)  in  deorum  maim  est. 


Cato  ille  Uticensis. 

§  110. — Ille  when  referring  to  some  well-known  or  celebrated  person, 
is  commonly  rendered  into  English  by  u  the  famous,”  “  the  well-known;” 
as,  “That  famous  Cato  of  Utica.”  Thus,  Antipater  ille  Sidonius. 
Xenophon ,  Socraticus  ille. — Aristides  a  Themistocle  collabefaclus  testula 
ilia  exilio  decern  annorum  multatus  est. 

Note — Ille  is  often  in  partial  concessions  placed  pleonastically  before  quidem — 
sed, ,  “indeed — but,”  or  “it  is  true — but;”  e.  g.,  Res  geris  magnas  illas  quidem ,  sed 
plenas  laboris.  Morositas  Jiabet  aliquid  excusationis,  non  illius  quidem,  justce,  sed  quae 
probari  posse  videatur.  Multa  scripta  sunt  inconsiderate  ab  optimis  illis  quidem  viris , 
sed  non  satis  eruditis. 


Vincula  et  ea  sempiterna. 

§  141. — Is  in  connection  with  et ,  que,  atque ,  is  equivalent  to  the 
English  “  and  tliat,”“  and  that  too ;”  as,  “Imprisonment,  and  that  too 
perpetual.” 

Multa  preetereo  eaque  praclara.  A  te  bis  litteras  et  eas  quidem 
perbreves  accepi.  Equidem  expectabam  tuas  litteras  idque  cum  multis. 
Crassum  cognovi  optimis  studiis  deditum ,  idque  a  puero.  Unam  rem 
explicabo  eamque  maximum.  Erant  in  Torquato  plurimce  litterce ,  nee  ea 
vulgar  es. 


Note> — Idem  and  etipse. — Idem  is  used  in  the  sense  of  “also,”  “likewise,”  “at 
the  same  time,”  when  different  things  are  predicated  of  the  same  subject.  Et  ipse 
frequently  occurs  in  Livy,  Curtins,  and  later  writers,  in  the  sense  of  “also,”  when 
the  same  thing  is  predicated  of  different  subjects.  E.  g.,  “A  speech  sublime  and  at 
the  same  time  humorous,”  Oratio  grandis  cademque  faceta.  Libera  quam  eandem 
Proserpinarn  vocant. — Quos  amamus ,  eosdem  f  slices  esse  cupimus.  Cicero  orator  fuit 

idemque  philosophies.  Fuere  quidam  qui  iidem  ornate  ac  graviter  (“at  once . 

and _ ”),  iidem  versute  et  subtiliter  dicerent. —  Vespasiano  Titus  filius  successit ,  qui  et 

ipse  Vespasianus  est  dictus.  Darius  cum  rind  suos  videret ,  mori  voluit  et  ipse. 

Idem  qui,  idem  ac,  and  idem  atque ,  are  rendered  into  English  by  “the  same  as;” 
e.  g.,  “  He  is  the  same  as  he  has  ever  been  ;”  Idem  est  qui  semper  fuit.  Feripatetid 
quondam  iidem  erant  qui  Academici . 


132 


PKONOUNS. 


Me  ipse  consoler. — Me  ipsum  consolor. 

§  1,42. — Ipse,  when  joined  to  a  personal  pronoun,  is  either  put  in  the 
case  of  the  subject,  when  the  subject  is  contrasted  with  other  sub¬ 
lets,  or  in  the  case  of  the  object  (i.  e.,  of  the  personal  pronoun),  when 
the  object  is  contrasted  with  other  objects ;  as,  Me  ipse  consolor,  “  I 
(and  not  another)  console  myself — but  Me  ipsum  consolor ,  “  I  console 
[whom?)  myself  (and  not  another).” 

De  me  ipse  loquor.  Ego  me  ipse  vitupero.  Ipse  tioi  noces.  Pro  se 
ipse  dixit.  Multi  sibi  ipsi  mortem  consciscunt. — Ego  me  ipsum \  vitupero. 
Tibi  ipsi  noces.  Pro  se  ipso  dixit.  Pompeium  omnibus ,  Leniulum 
mihi  ipsi  antepono. 


Note. — When  ipse  stands  in  the  nominative,  it  may  be  placed  before  or  after  the 
pronoun;  as,  Me  ipse  or  ipse  me  consolor :  but,  when  it  is  in  any  of  the  oblique  cases, 
it  is  regularly  placed  after  che  pronoun ;  as,  Se  ipsos  (not  ipsos  se)  omnes  natura  diligunt. 
Tibi  ipsi  (not  ipsi  ci'oi)  noces. 

Ipse ,  when  joined  to  a  demonstrative,  or  to  words  expressing  time  or  number,  is 
equivalent  to  the  English  “just,’’  “exactly,”  “very;”  as,  Demosthenes  ejus  ipsius  artis, 
cui  studebat ,  primam  litteram  non  poterat  dicers,  lllo  ipso  die  advenii.  Atherds  decern 
ipsos  diesf  ui.  Crassus  erat  triennio  ipso  minor  quam  Antonins.  Ipsis  Fords  Februcvriw 
accidit. 


III.  XIeflexive  Pronouns 


(In  simple  sentences.) 

Fauci  se  norunt.' 

§  143.— Tho  personal  pronouns  him,  her,  them,  are  rendered  by 
sui,  sibi,  se,  when  they  refer  to  the  nominative  in  the  sentence  (in  English 
we  use,  in  this  case,  generally  the  forms  himself,  herself,  and 
themselves) ; — but  by  is,  ea,  id,  when  they  do  not  refer  to  that  nom¬ 
inative.  E.  g.,  “  Few  persons  know  themselves.” 

Ccescir  civitatem  liberum  sibi  servire  coegit.  Omnes  sibi  cari  sunt  segue 
ipsos  natura  diligunt. —  Quid  eis  respondeam,  nescio.  Quam  bonus  est 
Mens!  eum  semper  cole  et  ama. 

Note. — When  him,  her,  them,  refer  to  a  noun  in  tbs  possessive  case,  they  arc 
translated  by  suns  in  agreement  with  the  noun  that  governs  the  said  possessive,  and 
the  possessive  itself  is  put  in  the  case  which  the  pronoun  would  otherwise  stand;  e.  g., 
“  Hannibal’s  fellow-citizens  expelled  him  from  his  country:”  Jlannibalern  sui  does 


PKOS'OUFS* 


133 


patria  ejecerunt. — “That  man’s  ambit-toe  will  min  iilru  ;**  iSu/±  hominem  perdet  ambitio. 
■ — “  Often  the  faults  of  the  teacher  fall  back  o:i  las  own  head  (—  on  himself);”  S 'cepe 
sua  in  magistrum  vitia  redeunt . — “Every  one's  manners  make  his  fortune  (=»  to  him);” 
Sui  cuique  mores  fingunt  fortunam. 


Bum  officii  sui  monui. 

§144. — The  possessive  pronouns  his,  her,  their,  are  rendered  by 
suus, ,  sua ,  suum ,  when  they  refer  to  the  nominative  or  to  any  other 
word  of  the  sentence, — by  ejus,  eorum ,  and  earum ,  when  they  refer  to  no 
word  of  the  sentence  ;  e.  g.,  “I  reminded  him  of  his  duty.” 

Alexander  moriens  annuium  suum  deaerat  Perdiccce.  Plurimi  homines 
sua  vitia  ignorant.  Suum  Ccesari  gladium  resiitui.  Sua  illis  nocebit 
inertia.  Sua  eum  commendat  pietas.  Constat  cunctis  nationibus  suas 
esse  leges. — JSjus  eloquentiam  omnes  admirantur.  De  eorum  reditu 
faciam  te  certiorem.  M.  Fabio  familiarissime  utor  ;  ejus  negotium  sic 
velim  suscipias ,  ut  si  esset  res  mea. 

Note. — The  pronouns  his,  her,  tneir,  before  the  second  of  two  substantives 
connected  by  et,  are  rendered  by  ejus ,  eorum ,  earum  ;  but  when  the  substantives  are 
connected  by  »,  they  are  rendered  by  suus ;  e.  g.,  “Plato  and  his  scholars,”  Plato 
«t  discipuli  ejus ,  or  Plato  cum  discipulis  suis.  Duces  sorumgue  milites  a  rege  defecerunt, 
or  duces  cum  suis  militibus  a  rege  defecerunt. 


(In  compound  sentences.) 

Promisir  se  venturum. 

§  145. — When  in  a  subordinate  clause  (§  86)  the  personal  pronouns 
him,  her,  them  (that  he,  that  she,  that  they),  and  the possessives 
his,  her,  their,  refer  to  the  nominative  of  the  leading  clause,  the  former 
are  rendered  by  sui ,  sibi,  se,  and  the  latter  by  suus,  sua,  suum  / — but 
when  they  do  not  refer  to  that  nominative,  him,  her,  them,  etc.  are 
rendered  by  is,  ea,  id,  and  his,  her,  t  li  e i r,  by  ejus ,  eorum,  earum, 
respectively ;  as,  “  He  promised  to  come”  (§  101,  3). 

Sperat  plerumquc  adolescens  se  diu  victurum.  Syracusani  rogabant  ut 
sibi  ignosceretur.  Macedones  putabant  regem  suum  vinci  non  posse. 
Per  Themistoclem  rex  certior  factus  esc ,  adversarios  cuos  in  fuga  esse, — - 
Quando  putas  eum  prof ecturum  esse  ?  Fquidem  eorum  causam  justissi- 
mam  esse  arbitror. 

Note  1. — To  render  the  pronouns  him,  her,  them,  etc.,  by  sui  and  suus ,  it  is  not 
enough  that  they  merely  refer  to  the  nominative  of  the  leading  clause;  it  is,  more- 


134 


PKONOUNS. 


over,  necessary  that  the  subordinate  clause  express  the  thoughts  or  words  of  the 
leading  subject. — which  is  generally  the  case  in  clauses  dependent  upon,  or  containing 
the  Acc.  c.  Inf,  and  in  those,  also,  introduced  by  interrogatives,  or  by  ut  {ne) 
intentional ;  as,  Roscius  postulat  ut  hunc  sibi  ex  animo  scrupulum  evellatis.  Syracusani 
orabant  ut  sibi  ignosceretur ,  quod  pro  beneficiis  sibi  tributis  gratias  uondum  tgissent. 
Orator  sagaciter  investigat  quid  sui  cives  cogitent ,  sentiant,  opinentur,  expectent. 

When  the  subordinate  clause  does  not  express  the  sentiment  of  the  leading  subject, 
but  is  stated  by  the  writer  merely  as  a  remark  of  his  own  or  of  some  other  person,  the 
demonstrative  is  must  be  used  ;  e.  g.,  Epaminondas  fuit  etiarn  disertvs  ut  ( ut  conse¬ 
cutive)  nemo  Thebanus  ei  par  essei  eloquentia.  Diogenes  contemnebat  divitias  quod  eum 
felicem  redder e  non  poterant.1  Verves  Milesios  natem  poposeit  quce  prcesidii  causa  eum1 
Myndum  prosequeretur.  Gortyhii  templum  magna  cura  custodiunt ,  non  turn  a  ceteris 
qv.am  ab  Hannibale  ne  quid  ille  inscientibus  his  toller et  secumque  duceret . 

When  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  does  not  immediately  depend  on  the  verb  to  whose 
subject  the  pronoun  liis,  her,  or  their,  refers,  the  demonstrative  may  be  used  as 
well  as  the  reflexive  ;  e.  g.,  Siculi  me  scspc  pollicitum  esse  dicebant  commodis  eorum  (or 
sui?)  me  non  defat  vrum  esse. 

Note  2. — It  Is  not  necessary  that  the  principal  subject  be  always  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive:  it  is  often  sufficient  that  it  can  be  conceived  as  sucn ;  as,  A  Ocesare  inviior 
(=  Caesar  me  invitat)  sibi  ut  aim  legaius,  Magna  Antonium  spes  tenet  (=  Antonius 
sperat)  rerum  se  potiiurum.  in  suspicionem  ei  venit  («=  suspicatus  est )  aliquid  in  epistola 
de  se.  scriptum  esse. 

Note  3. — When  the  subordinate  clause  has  a  nominative  of  its  own,  and  an  ambi¬ 
guity  is  likely  to  arise  whether  the  reflexive  sui  or  suus  refers  to  the  nominative  of 
the  principal  clause  or  to  that  of  the  subordinate,  the  reference  to  the  former  must  be 
expressed  by  ipse,  and  tne  reference  to  the  latter  by  sui  or  suus  ;  e.  g.,  “  Narbazanes 
and  Bessus  besought  Artobazus  to  plead  their  cause;”  Narbazanes  et  Eessus  Artobazum 
orabant ,  ut  causam  ipsorum  tueretur.  Jugurtha  legatos  ad  consulem  misit  qui  ipsi 
liberisqus  tit  am  peterent.  Caesar  milites  suos  incusavit ,  cur  de  sua  (militum)  virtute 
avt  de  ipsius  (Caesaris)  diligentia  desperarent. 

When  it  is  evident  from  the  context  that  reference  is  made  to  the  nominative  of  the 
principal  clause,  and  no  ambiguity,  therefore,  is  to  be  apprehended,  the  reflexives 
sui  and  suus  are  generally  used,  though  grammatically  they  refer  to  the  nominative 
of  their  own  clause;  e.  g.,  Cicero  Quintum  fratrem  rogavit  ut  ad  se  vemret.  Cicero 
effecerat  ut  Q.  Gurius  consilia  Catilince  sibi  proderet.  Ariovistus  respondit ,  non  sees 
Gallis ,  sed  Gallos  sibi  (for  ipsi)  bellum  intulisse.  Themistocies  necessitate  coactus  domino 
navis,  qui  sit,  aperit,  multa  pollicens,  si  se  (for  ipsum)  conservasset.  Patres  conscripti 
Vgatos  in  Bithyniam  miserunt  qui  ab  rege  peterent ,  ne  inimicissimum  suum  (ipsorum) 
tecum  haberet  sibique  (ipsisque)  traderet. 


IY.  Relative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

§  146. — The  relative  qui  is  frequently  used  instead  of  a  personal  or 
denominative  with  et,  vero,  enim ,  igitur ;  e.  g.,  “  Philosophy  teaches 


T)  Quod  eum  non  poterant,  expresses  the  sentiment  of  the  writer ;  quod  eum  non 
possent,  would  express  the  sentiment  of  some  other  person, — and  quod  se  non  possent , 
the  sentiment  of  Diogenes  himself  (Compare  §  199,  IV.).  a)  quae  se  would  express 
the  sentiment  and  intention  of  Verres  himself. 


PKONOUNS. 


135 


that  the  world  moves  ;  and  if  this  is  true,  we  also  necessarily  move 
Philosophia  docet  mundum  moveri,  quod  (et  hoc)  si  verum  est ,  nos  quo - 
que  moveamur  necesse  est. — Thus, 

Habes  me  tibi  amicissimum ,  quern  (me  vero)  si  irritaveris ,  habebis 
inimicissimum.  Nihil  vretiosius  est  animi  tranquillitate ;  qua  (hac 
enim)  qui  caret ,  eum  nec  regiae  opes  quidquam  juvant.  Multas  ad  res 
peruiiles  Xenophontis  libri  sunt ;  quos  (eos  igitur)  legite ,  quoeso,  studiose. 

.  §  141. — When  in  English  such  a  clause  as  they  say ,  it  is  said ,  as — 
says ,  etc.,  is  inserted  parenthetically  in  a  relative  sentence,  the  verb  of 
that  clause  becomes,  in  Latin,  the  leading  verb  of  the  relative  sentence 
and  is  construed  with  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  that  is,  the  nominative  of  the 
relative  sentence  is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  its  finite  verb  in  the  Infini¬ 
tive.  E.  g.,  “  Socrates,  whom,  they  say,  Apollo  himself  had  declared  to 
be  the  wisest  of  mankind,  lived  at  Athens  Socrates  quern  dicunt  ab 
Apolline  ipso  sapien tissimum  fuisse  judica turn,  Athenis  vixit.  Thus, 

Gratiam  habeo  Simonidi  illi  quern,  primum  ferunt  artem  memoriae 
protulisse.1  Crassus  quern  Lucilius  setnel  tantv'n  risisse  refert ,2  Ciceroni 
fere  cequalis  fait.  Apollonius ,  cum  merceck  d-oaeret,  eos  quos  judicabat 
non  posse  oratores  evadere ,  dimisitj 

§  148. — When  in  a  clause  that  is  connected  with,  or  inserted  in,  a 
relative  sentence,  there  occurs  a  demonstrative  which  refers  to  the  pre¬ 
ceding  relative,  in  Latin  the  demonstrative  is  generally  left  untranslated, 
and  the  relative  put  in  the  case  in  which  the  demonstrative  would  other¬ 
wise  be  placed.  E.  g.,  “  There  are  persons  who,  unless  you  flatter  them, 
will  be  disgusted.”  Sunt  quidam  quibus  nisi  blandiaris ,  tcedio  afficiantur. 
Thus, 

Historia  res  pr ceclar issime  gestas  tradit  quas  quum  legimus*  imitandi 
cupiditate  incendimur .  Sunt  per mul ta  quae  orator  nisi  a  natura  haberet* 
non  multum  a  raagistro  adjuvaretur.  In  hortos  me  M.  Flacci  contuli 
cui  quum  publicatio  bonorum exilium ,  mors  proponeretur*  hcec  perpeti 
maluit ,  quam  custodiam  mei  capitis  dimittere. 

§  149. —  Qui  in  connection  with  sum  and  a  substantive  either  in  the 
nominative  or  ablative,  is  often  used  in  explanatory  clauses  instead  of 
pro ,  in  the  sense  of  “  according  to,”  or  “in  accordance  with.”  E.  g., 


f)  who,  they  say,  was  the  first  that  taught.  2)  who,  as  Lucilius  tells  us,  never 
laughed  but  once.  8)  who  in  his  judgment,  or  as  he  judged,  were  unable.  *)  by 
which,  when  we  read  them.  5)  in  which  an  orator,  had  he  them  not  by  nature,  would 
be  little  aided.  6)  who,  when  he  was  threatened  with.... 


130 


PRONOUNS. 


“You,  being  so  courteous  (or,  with  your  usual  courtesy),  will  take  in 
good  part  to  be  advised  ;7?  Tu  pro  tua  humanitate  {(quae  tua  est  humani- 
tas ,  or  qua  tu  es  humanitate )  aequo  animo  te  moneri  paiieris. — Thus, 
Spero  quae  tua  prudentia  et  temperantia  est ,  te  jam  bene  valere.  Qua 
es  prudentia ,  nihil  te  fugiet ,  si  mcas  litteras  diligenter  legeris.  Tu  pro 
tua  prudentia  ( quae  tua  est  prudentia ,  or  qua  tu  es  prudentia *)  quia 
optimum  factu  sit  videbis. 

Note. — Quod  often  serves  merely  the  purpose  of  transition,  especially  ■when  fol¬ 
lowed  by  'si,  nisi,  utinam.  It  may  then  be  rendered  by  nay,  now,  and,  or 
if  then.  E.  g.,  Quod  si  mundum  efficere  potest  concursus  otomorum,  cur  porticum , 
cur  templum ,  cur  domum,  cur  urbem  non  potest? — Quod  nisi  domi  civiurn  suorum  invidia 
debilitatus  esset,  Romanos  videretur  superare  potuisse. 

Quid  is  sometimes  taken  in  the  sense  of  “why as,  Quid  venisii  ?  Quid  ego  taceam  ? 
Quid plura?  Quid  pi ur a  disputo  ? 


Quisque,  Aliquis,  Quisquam,  Quotusquisque. 

§  150. — 1.  Quisque  is  always  placed  immediately  (a)  after  the  reflexive  pro¬ 
nouns  sui  and  suus,  except  bp  relative  clauses  where  its  position  is  close  to  the 
relative ;  (b)  after  superlatives,  when  universality  is  expressed ;  and  (c)  after 
ordinal  numerals.  B.  g.,  Trahit  sua  quemque  voluptas.  Suum  cuique  carum 
est. — Maxime  decet  quod  est  cujusque  maxime  suum? — Optimus  quisque  fatetur. 
Altissima  quceque  jlumina. —  Vix  decimus  quisque? — Tertio  quoque  anno ? — 
Primo  quoque  tempore .5 

2.  Aliquis  generally  loses  the  prefix  ali  after  si,  nisi,  ns,  quo,  quando,  quanto  : 
but  when  it  stands  in  an  antithetical  relation  to  something  else,  or  when  it  is 
used  emphatically,  the  prefix  ali  is  retained  ;  e.  g.,  Timebat  Pompeius  omnia  ne 
aliquid  vos  timeretis.  Si  aliquid  de  summa  gravitate  Pompeius,  multum  de 
cupiditate  Ccesar  remisisset.  Si  aliquid  (“  when  really  something”)  dandum  est 
voluptati,  senectus  modicis  conviviis  potest  delectari. 

3.  Quisquam  and ullus  “any”  (the  former  substantively,  the  latter  adjectively), 
are  used  in  negative  sentences  only,  and  in  such  questions  as  imply  a  nega¬ 
tive, — also  after  vix  and  sine,  and  in  comparative  clauses.  E.  g.,  Beatior  sum 
quam  quisquam  vestrum.  Num  quisquam  est  ceque  miser  ?  Nemo  quidquam 
tale  conatur.  Vix  quemquam  invenies  qui  nesciat,  Vix  ullum  auctorem  legit. 
Sine  ullo  malejicio  iter  per  provinciam  fecerunt. 

When  sine  is  preceded  by  non,  aliquis  is  to  be  used  in  place  of  ullus ;  as,  sine 
ulla  spe  ;  but,  non  sine  aliqua  spe,  “  not  without  some  hope.” 

4.  Quotusquisque  designates  a  small  number  and  may  be  expressed  either  by 
“  how  many  ?”  in  form  of  a  question,  or  by  “  how  few !”  in  form  of  an  exclama¬ 
tion  ;  e.  g.,  Quotusquisque  mortalium  sorte  sua  contentus  vivit  ? 


T)  you,  being  so  prudent  (who  lire  so  prudent,  such  is  your  prudence,  prudent  as 
you  are,  or  with  your  usual  prudence).  7-)  which  is  most  peculiarly  a  man’s  own. 
s)  scarcely  one  in  ten,  or  scarcely  every  tenth.  4)  every  three  years,  or  every  third 
year.  6)  as  soon  as  possible. 


PRONOUNS. 


137 


Alius  A,i  ter. 

§  151. — Alter — alter  or  unus — alter,  “  tbe  one — tlie  other,”  is  used  of  two 
only ;  alius — alius  or  unus — alius,  “  one — another, ”  of  more  tlian  two. — Alii  (or 
quidam,  nonnulli ) — alii  means  “  some — others  ;”  aliud — aliud,  “  one  thing — 
another  alias — alias,  “  at  one  time — at  another,”  or  “  now — now  aliter — 
aliter,  “  in  one  way-  -in  another,”  or  “  so — otherwise  ;”  E.  g.,  “  The  one  says 
yes  ;  the  other,  no.” 

Units  {alter)  ait,  negat  alter.  Alii  ludunt,  cantant  alii.  Divitias  alii  prce - 
ponunt,  bonam  alii  mletudinem,  alii  potentiam,  alii  honores,  multi  etiam 
voluptates.  Aliud  est  iracundum  esse ,  aliud  iratum.  Aliter  cum  tyranno 
vivitur,  aliter  cum  amico.  Alias  helium  inferunt,  alias  illatum  defendant. 
Aliud  loquitur,  aliud  sentit}  Aliter  mild  videtur,  aliter  tibi .2 

§  152. — Alius,  when  joined  to  a  case  of  its  own,  or  to  one  of  its  derivatives 
{alias;  alibi,  alio,  aliter,  aliunde ),  forms  an  abridged  proposition,  for  which  in 
English  often  two  sentences  with  “  the  one — the  other,”  etc.  are  used  ;  e.  g., 
“  One  likes  this,  and  another  that,”  or  “different  persons  like  different  things.” 

Aliud  aids  placet.  Alias  aliud  iisdem  de  rebus  judieamus.3  Aids  alibi 
placet.4.  Aids  aliunde  est  periculum .6  Aliter  cum  cdiis  loquitur .6  Alius  alio 
mittitur ,7  Alius  alia  de  causa  (of  two,  alter  altera  de  causa)  vend. 


Note  1. — Alius  atque  alius  or  alius  aliusque  means  “now  this,  now  that,”  i.  e. 

different e.  g.,  Res  inchoata  scape  aids  atque  aids  de  causis  differtur.  Milites  tram 
J lumen  aids  atque  aids  locis  trajiciebant . 

Note  2. — In  phrases  such  as  “One  hand  washes  the  other” — “One  wedge  drives 
another” — “  One  fear  overcomes  another,”  etc.,  the  English  “other”  is  not  translated 
by  alius  or  alter ,  but  by  the  repetition  of  the  word  with  which  it  is  contrasted.  Tlie 
words  expressing  contrasted  ideas  are  then  placed  by  the  side  of  each  other;  as, 
Manus  manum  lavat.  Cuneus  cuneum  trudit.  Timorem  timer  vincit.  Nulla  virtu  s 
virtuti  contraria  est.  Cives  civibus  parcere  ceauum  est.  Ex  domo  in  domum  migrant. 
Hominem  homini  similiorem  non  vidi. 

This  juxtaposition  is  also  to  be  observed  in  such  expressions  as  alius  alio  fortior , 
aliud  alio  melius ,  alium  alio  nequiorem. — Alius  alio  plus  habct  virium.  Aliud  ex  alio 
malum  nascitur.  Me  quotidie  aliud  ex  alio  imp  edit. 

Note  3. — The  English  reciprocal  “each  other,”  “ one*  another,”  k  expressed  in 
Latin  by  alter  alteri  or  alterum ,  and  alius  alii  or  alium  :  e.  g.,  Alter  in  aUerwn  causam 
covferunt.  Milvo  est  helium  cum  carvo :  ergo  alter  alterius  ova  frangtt  or  fmr.gunt. 


J)  or  aliud  loquitur  ac  {atque,  quam)  sentit ,  he  speaks  otherwise  than  La  thinks. 
J)  or  aliter  mihi  videtur  ac  tibi ,  I  think  differently  from  you.  3)  At  different  limes  we 
think  differently  on  the  same  subject,  or  at  one  time  we  think  so,  at  another  other¬ 
wise.  4)  Some  like  to  be  here,  and  others  elsewhere,  or  different  persons  like  to  be  in 
different  places.  5)  Different  persons  are  threatened  from  different  quarters.  °)  To 
one  he  speaks  in  this  way,  to  another  in  another,  or  to  different  persons  he  speaks  in  a 
different  way.  7)  One  is  sent  hither,  another  thither,  etc. 


133 


PRONOUNS. 


Alter  alieri  sulvenii.  Nec  quidqucm  secreturn  alter  ab  allero  Kabet. — Alius  aliutr* 
increpabant.  Alius  alii  subsidiumfar J  ovj^runt. 

Instead  of  alter  alterum  and  alius  idiri%\  we  may  say  also  inter  se,  inter  nos,  inter 
vos ;  as,  Inter  nos percontamur.  Diffltgwm  ft  Dion  inter  se  (=  alter  alterum )  time- 
bant.  Aristides  et  Themistocles  ohtrcctanoit  inter  sc.  Furtim  inter  se  aspiciunt.1 
Demosthenes  et  Isocrates  inter  se  discrepant.  Complecti  inter  se  lacrimantes  milites 
cceperunt. — Thus,  inter  se  diligunt,  amant ,  timent ,  etc.  (pIAT  se  mutuo  or  se  invicem, 
in  such  phrases,  is  Post-classical.) 

THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN  “  ONE.” 

§  153. — The  indefinite  pronoun  one  is  variously  expressed  in  Latin,  viz., 

(a)  By  the  Passive ;  as,  “  One  lives  well  everywhere,”  Ubique  bene  xintur. — 
“When  one  deviates  from  justice,  ail  things  become  uncertain,”  Omnia  fiunt 
incerta,  quum  a  jure  discessum  est. 

(b)  By  the  1  pers.  plur.  Active,  when  the  speaker  includes  himself  under  the 
unknown  subject;  as,  “What  one  wishes,  one  gladly  believes,”  Quce  vohimus , 
libenter  credimus.  “There  is  scarcely  one  night  in  which  one  does  not  dream,” 
Nulla  fere  est  nox,  qua  non  somniamus. 

(c)  By  the  2d  sing.  Indie,  or  Subj.,  according  as  a  definite  or  an  indefinite 
person  is  addressed ;  as,  “  When  one  yields  to  sloth,  in  vain  are  the  gods 
implored,”  JJbi  socordice  te  atque  ignamce  dederis,  nequidquara  deos  implor obis. 
Non  decet  ea  docere  relle,  quce  nunquam  dicliceris.  Deum  non  vides,  tamen  ut 
Deum  ex  operibus  agnoscisd 

(d)  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  by  the  Present  Partic.;  as,  “  When  one  is  at 
sea,  things  that  stand,  seem  to  move,”  Navigantibus  moveri  videntur  ea  quce 
slant. 


T)  They  look  stealthily  at  one  another.  a)  One  does  not  see  God,  yet  ho  may  be 
recognized  as  God  by  .... 


VEBBS  WITH  TWO  NOMINATIVES?. 


189 


t 


CHAPTER  VI. 


THE  YEEB. 

1,  ftov&rnmenl  of  Verbs.  2.  Tenses  of  Verbs. — 3.  Moods  of  Verbs. — 4.  Gerunds,  Supines.  Participles.  ' 

I.  Government  of  Verbs. 

VERBS  WITH  TWO  NOMINATIVES. 

Ego  vocor  Robertas. 

§  154. — Verbs  of  “ being,”  “becoming,”  and  “  seeing,”  as  sum,  I  am ; 
exsislo ,  I  exist ;  fio ,  evado ,  I  become  ;  maneo ,  I  remain  ;  nascor ,  I  am 
born ;  videor ,  I  seem ;  appareo,  I  appear,  etc.,  and  passive  verbs  signi¬ 
fying 

11  to  be  named  or  called,”  as  dicor ,  nominor ,  vocor,.  appellor,  nun- 
cupor ,  salutor  ; 

“to  be  made  or  chosen,”  as  creor,  deligor ,  designor ,  renuntior , 
declaror,  constituor  ; 

“to  be  deemed  or  reckoned,”  as  ducor ,  credor,  habeor,  judicor,  exis- 
timor ,  numeror,  putor,  agnoscor,  demonstror,  deprehendor,  take  two 
nominatives,  a  subject-  and  a  predicate-nominative  :  the  former  answer¬ 
ing  to  the  question  who  or  what  placed  before  the  verb,  and  the 
latter  to  the  question  ivhat  placed  after  the  verb  ;  as,  “  I  am  called 
Robert.” 

Nemo  repente  jit  pessimus.  Multa  somnui  verx  evadunt.  Nemo 
nascitur  dives.  Scythce  perpetuo  invicti  mcinserunt.- — Numa  rex  creatus 
est.  Clodius  tribunus  plebis  est  designatus. — Scgtharurn  gens  anti - 
quissima  semper  habita  est.  jijjc  consideremus  quos  faciunt  ii  qvd 
habentur  boni. 

Note  1. — Verbs  that  are  construed  with  two  nominatives,  generally  agree  with  tlia 
subject-nominative,  as  Allohroges  sunt  genus  agreslc,  etc. — But,  when  the  predicate 
is  a  noun  and  stands  near  the  verb,  the  verb  not  unfrequently  agrees  with  the  predicate- 
nominative  ;  as,  Hie  honos  ignominia  putanda  est.  Hen  omnis  error  stultitia 
dicenda  est.  Paupertas  mihi  onus  visum  est  miserum  et  grove.  Gens  universa 
Veneti  appellati  sunt.  Universus  hie  mundus  una  civitas  communis  deorum  atque 
Itominum  existimanda  est. 


140 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 


Note  2. — When  the  predicate-nominative  admits  of  two  forms,  one  masculine,  the 
other  feminine,  the  masculine  form  must  be  used  when  the  subject-nominative  is 
either  masculine  or  neuter;  but  the  feminine,  when  the  former  is  feminine;  as, 
Eventus  (or  tempus )  est  optimus  stultorum  magister.  Bistoria  est  magistra  vitce,  uuncia 
(not  nuncius)  vetustatis.  Licentia  est  corrvptrix  (not  corrvptor )  morum.  Bona  con- 
scientia  est  perpetua  (not  perpetuus)  comes  recte  faciorum.  (Compare  §  90,  3.) 

Note  3. — The  predicate-nominative  of  an  adjective  is  often  used  in  Latin,  where  in 
English  an  adverb,  or  a  noun  with  a  preposition  is  used.  This  is  especially  the  case 
with  the  verbs  vivo,  morior ,  eo ,  sto ,  venio ,  sedeo,  jaceo.,  dormio,  and  other  intransitive 
verbs,  when  we  wish  to  express  the  state  or  condition  of  the  subject  during  an  action. 
E.  g.,  “  I  live  most  miserably,  or  in  the  greatest  misery;”  Vivo  miserrimus.  I)or~ 
miunt  securi.  Sapiens  nil  facit  invitus.  Nemo  fere  saltat  sobrius.  Justus  moritur 
securus.  Intrepidus  ad  me  venit.  Salvi  in  BEgyptum  pervenerunt.  Socrates  venenum 
Icetus  ac  lubens  hausit. 

Note  4. — In  the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  both  the  subject-  and  the  predicate- 
nominative  are  changed  into  the  accusative;  as,  (Brutus  exstitit  vindex  Roman® 
libertatis),  Constat  Brutum  exstitisse  vindicem  Romanov  libertatis. 

Note  5. — The  verb  habeor ,  instead  of  the  predicate-nominative,  sometimes  takes 
the  ablative  with  pro  or  loco  {in  numero )  with  the  genitive  ;  as,  Audacia  pro  muro 
kabetur.  Brodigii  loco  clades  habitaest.  Helvetii  in  hostium  numero  habentur. 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 

Memini  vivorum. 

§  155. — 1.  Yerbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting ,  as  memini ,  reminiscor , 
recorder ,  and  obliviscor ,  govern  the  genitive  of  the  person  or  thing 
which  one  remembers  or  forgets ;  as,  “  I  remember  the  living.” 

Paeri  meminerint  verecundice.  Semper  hvjus  diei  et  loci  meminero . 
Dulce  est  meminisse  laborum  actorum.  Jubes  me  bona  cogitare ,  oblivisci 
malorum.  Hannibal  adkortatus  est  milites  ut  reminiscereniur  pristince 
virtutis  suce  neve  mulierum  liberumque  obliviscerentur.  Homo  nefarius 
cum  dolore  fagitiorum  suorum  aliquando  recordabitur. 

Note  1. — When  the  object  remembered  or  forgo  t  ten  is  a  thing ,  it  is  often  putin 
the  accusative  (especially  with  recorder ),  and  when  it  is  expressed  by  the  neuter  of  an 

Note  2. — Memini ,  in  the  sense  of  u  to  remember  a.person  as  acontemporary,  as 
one  who  has  lived  in  our  time,” — always  takes  the  acc.  of  the  person.  In  the  sense 
of  “  to  mention”  {mentionem  facer e),  it  sometimes  takes  the  genitive,  but  more  com¬ 
monly  the  ablative  with  de.  E.  g.,  Cinnam  memini ,  vidi  Sullam.  Utinam ,  Antoni , 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 


141 


avum  tuum  meminisses  !  Antipater  ille  Sidonius  quern  tu  probe  meministi. — De  Jiomine 
importunissimo  ne  meminisse  quidem  nolo.  Meministi  ipse  de  exulibus.  The 

ablative  of  the  person  with  de  is  found  also  with  recordo r,  as  Petirnus  ut  de  suis  liberis 
recordentur. 

Note  3. — The  verbs  of  reminding  ( moneo ,  admoneo ,  commoneo ,  commonefacio )  are 
construed  aliquem  alicujus  rei  or  de  aliqua  re,  that  is,  the  person  whom  one  reminds,  is 
put  in  the  accusative,  and  the  thing  of  which,  either  in  the  genitive  or  in  the  ablative 
with  de  ;  as,  Grammaticos  ojjicii  sui  commonemus.  Ille  te  veteris  amicitice  commonefacit. 
Oro  ut  Terentiam  de  testarnento  moneatis . — If  the  thing  is  expressed  by  the  neuter  of 
an  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative;  as,  Hoc  unum  te 
moneo.  Illud  me  pr cedar e  admones.— |3§p  Monere  with  the  genitive  of  the  thing  is 
Post-Augustan. 


Note  4. — With  renit  mihi  in  mentem ,  the  thing  that  occurs  to  one’s  mind,  is  com¬ 
monly  put  in  the  genitive,  and  sometimes  in  the  nominative  ;  as,  Venit  mihi  Pla- 
tonis  in  mentem.  Non  dubito  quin  in  metu  tuorum  tibi  scelerum  veniat  in  mentem  (or 
tua  tibi  scelera  in  mentem  veniant).  Multa  mihi  in  mentem  veniunt.  Quid  tibi  in 
mentem  venit  ? 


Facio  te  magni. 

§  156. — 2,  Verbs  of  valuing  and  esteeming,  as  cestimo ,  duco,  facto, 
psndo,  habeo ,  puto ,  taxo,  and  esse  in  the  sense  of  “to  be  worth,”  “  to 
be  estimated,”  govern  the  genitive  of  value,  when  indefinitely  expressed 
by  an  adjective ;  but,  when  expressed  by  a  substantive,  the  ablative  is 
used.  E.  g.,  “  I  esteem  thee  highly.” 

Divitice  a  sapienti  viro  minimi  putanturd  Heplicestionem  Alexander 
plurimi  fecerat.  Si  prata  et  horlulos  tanli  cestimamus ,  quanti  est 
cestimanda  virtus?  Quanti  quisque  amicos  fac'd ,  tanti  fit  ab  amicis. 
Mea  mihi  conscientia  pluris  est  quam  omnium  sermo.  Tanti  est  exer- 
citus ,  quanti  imperator?  Quanti  est  sapere  Is 

Note  1. — The  genitives  of  value  are  :  magni ,  permagni ,  maximi, — pluris,  pLurimi, — 
parvi ,  minoris,  minimi , — tanti ,  quanti ,  tantidem ,  quantivis,  quantilibet ,  quanticun- 
que,  and  nihili  ;  but  never  multi  and  majoris,  in  place  of  which  magni  and  pluris  are 
used  respectively. — These  genitives  are  variously  rendered  in  English  ;  for  example, 
magni,  much,  greatly,  highly,  at  a  high  rate,  of  great  importance  ;  parvi ,  little,  at  a 
low  rate,  of  little  importance,  etc. 

To  this  class  belong  also  the  genitives  assis,flocci ,  nauci,  pili,  teruncii ,  and  pe-nsi , 
generally  with  a  negative.  They  are  used  to  denote  that  a  thing  is  worth  nothing, 
and  are  equivalent  to  the  English  expressions  :  “  not  to  be  worth  a  cent,  a  farthing, 
a  pin,”  etc. — “  not  to  care  or  give  a  cent,  a  farthing,  a  pin,  a  straw,  a  hair,  a  bulrush, 
for  a  thing.” 


J)  are  held  very  low.  2)  The  value  of  an  army  depends  on  that  of  the  general. 
*)  What  a  fine  thing  it  is. . . . 


142 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 


Note  2.— The  phrase  tanti  est ,  means  “  it  is  worth  while,”— or  contemptuously  with 
a  fillip  :  “  it  is  worth  so  much”  or  “  I  care  so  much  for  it;”  as,  Video  quanta  tempestas 
invidiai  nobis  impendeat  :  sed  est  miJii  tanti , — dummodo  ista  privata  sit  calamitas. 

Note  3. — Instead  of  aliquid  nihili  facer e ,  we  find  also  aliquid  pro  nihilo  habere , 
ducere ,  putare  •  as,  Philosophi  ca  quce  plerique  vehementer  expetunt ,  pro  nihilo  ducunt.  — 
With  cestimo  the  ablatives  magno.  permagno ,  nihilo ,  and  nonnihilo ,  sometimes  occur, 
as  Istam  gloriosam  mrtutem  non  magno  cestimo. 


Arguit  me  furti. 

§  151. — 3.  Yerbs  of  accusing ,  convicting ,  condemning ,  and  acquitting , 
together  with  arcesso ,  ci/o,  defer o ,  and  postulo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  sum¬ 
mon  before  the  court,”  “  to  prosecute,”  govern  the  genitive  of  the  crime 
of  which  one  is  accused,  acquitted,  etc. — This  genitive  depends  on  the 
ablative  crimine ,  or  nomine  (“pretext,”  “on  account”),  which  is  gen¬ 
erally  understood,  and  sometimes  expressed.  E.  g.,  “  He  charges  me 
with  theft.” 

Athenienses  Socratem  impietatis  insimulabant.  Milticides  proditionis 
est  accusatus.  Te  convinco  non  solum  inhumanitatis ,  sec?  etiam  amentice. 
Nicomedes  furti  damnatus  est.  Ducem  proditionis  absolvunt.  Scaur  us 
pecunice  a  Jugurtha  acceptor  arcessebatur . — Nomine  sceleris  conjurationis - 
que  damnati  sunt  multi.  Alcibiades  postulabat  ne  absens  invidice  crimine 
accusaretur.  Si  iniquus  es  in  me  judex ,  condemnabo  ego  eodem  ie 
crimine. 

i 

j 

-  Note  1. — The  verbs  of  accusing  and  condemning,  instead  of  the  genitive, 
sometimes  take  the  ablative  with  de  ;  as,  Non  committam  posthac  ut  me  de  epistolarum 
negligentia  accusare  possis.  Pilius  de  repetundis  M.  Servilium  postulavit. — Thus  we 
say  deferre  nomen  alien j-us  ( UpjgT*  deferre  align em  is  Post- Augustan)  de  ambitu ,  de 
parricidio ,  de  veneficiis ,  etc. — With  accuso  and  convinco  we  find  even  the  ablative  with 
in,  as  Primum  me  tibi  excuso  in  eo  ipso,  in  quo  te  accuso. 

Note  2. — The  punishment  to  which  a  person  is  condemned,  is  commonly  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  genitive,  more  rarely  by  the  ablative  or  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in: 
thus,  damnare  aliquem  mortis ,  mullaz,  pccnnice,  tripli ,  quadruple,  etc.,  or  morte ,  multa, 
pecunia ,  triplo ,  quadrvplo , — damnare  ad  bestias ,  ad  metalla ,  ad  {in)  opus  publicum,  in 
expensas.1  E.  g..  Nympho  condemnalur :  quanti?  fortasse  queeritis  '—frumenti  ejus 
omnis  quod'  in  areis  esset. — Frusinates  tertia  parte  agri  damnati  sunt . —  Vitia  hominum 
atque  fraudes  damnis,  ignominiis ,  vinculis,  verberibus ,  exiliis,  morte  multantur 
(|gr  The  verb  multare  is  always  construed  with  the  ablative.) 

When  the  punishment  consists  in  a  definite  sum,  the  ablative  is  invariably  used ; 
e.  g.,  Sex  millibus  ceris  damnatus  est. — Capital  punishment  is  expressed  both  by  capitis 
and  capite ,  as  Multi  capitis  or  capite  damnati  sunt. — The  phrase  voti  or  votorum 
damnari  means  “  to  be  adjudged  to  the  fulfilment  of  a  vow,”  hence  “  to  obtain  what 
one  wishes.” 


J)  to  pay  the  expenses. 


VEPBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 


143 


Note  3. — The  verbs  of  acquitting  (esp.  libero ),  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  crime 
or  punishment,  take  also  the  ablative;  as,  Ego  me,  etsi  peccato  abaolvo,  mpplieio  non 
libero.  Thus,  absolvere  aliqiiem  regni  suspicione ,  supplicio ;  liberare  aliquem  culpa , 
suspicione  crudelitatis ,  etc. 

Note  4. — When  the  verbs  of  accusing  are  not  taken  in  a  judicial  sense,  but  merely 
in  the  sense  of  “to  find  fault  with,”  or  “to  blame  one  for  something,”  they  are 
usually  construed  with  the  accusative  of  the  fault  aud  the  genitive  of  the  person  ; 
e.  g.,  Samnites  incusahant  injurias  Romanov  urn.  Tribuni  plebis  nunc  fraudem ,  nunc 
negligentiam  Consulum  accusabant.  Rharnabazus  in  epistola  lysandri  avaritiam 
verfidiamque  accusavit. 


Est  boni  regis. 


§  158. — 4.  The  genitive  stands  with  the  verb  sum ,  1.)  when  in  the 
predicate  a  substantive  is  omitted  that  has  been  previously  expressed ; 

2. )  when  in  the  predicate  such  a  word  as  homo ,  vir,  animal ,  is  omitted ; 

3. )  when  sum  is  taken  in  the  sense  of  “  it  is  a  person’s  business,  office, 
lot,  or  property,”  where  indicium ,  negotium ,  proprium ,  or  ojfcium  is 
understood  ;  as,  “  It  is  the  part  of  a  good  king.” 

Captivorum  numerus  fuit  (numerus)  mille  quingentorum.1  Persarum 
classis  fuit  (classis)  ducentarum  navium. — Pst  (homo)  sui  juris? 
Hannibal-  turn  (puer)  novem  annorum  erat. — Superstilio  est  (indicium) 
imbecilli  animi.  Hoc  non  est  (negotium)  mearum  virium ?  Suadcre 
principi  quod  oportet ,  (res  or  negotium)  multi  laboris*  est.  Cujusvis 
hominis  est  errare.  Fortis  et  constants  animi  est  non  perturbari  in 
adversis.  Hcec  studia  omnium  temporum  sunt  atque  locorum?  Hlud 
vestrce  dignitatis  erat ?  Hon  est  mecc  virtutis.1  Fst  adolescentis  majores 
natu  vereri. — Periculose  emitur  quod  multorum  est ?  Totus  Pompeii 
sum?  Procter  Capitolium  omnia  hostium  erant?0 

Note  1. — The  predicate-genitive  with  sum  is  variously  expressed  in  English  ;  as,  it 
shows ,  it  betrays ,  it  proves  ; — it  suits ,  it  fits,  it  becomes  ; — it  requires,  it  demands,  it  is 
for ,  e.  g.  the  rich,  etc. ; — it  is  peculiar  to,  it  is  incumbent  on,  it  belongs  or  pertains 
to  ; — any  one  may,  any  one  is  liable  to,  it  is  not  every  one  who  ; — should ,  must,  ought , 
use,  be  leant,  etc. — These  and  similar  phrases,  when  rendered  by  sum ,  esse ,  the  young 
student  should  always  reduce  to  this  simple  formula  : 


J)  consisted  of  or  amounted  to.  2)  is  at  his  own  disposal — his  own  master.  s)  is 
beyond  my  strength.  4)  is  a  difficult  task.  6)  are  suitable  for.  B)  your  dignity 
required  that.  7)  it  is  not  consistent  with  my  character.  8)  what  belongs  to  many. 
)  I  am  all  Pompey’s— belong  wholly,  or  am  wholly  devoted,  to  Pcmpey.  10)  all  was 
n  the  power  of. 


VERB?  GOVERNING  TIIE  GENITIVE. 


144 

“ . is  (a  sign,  the  part,  lot ,  duty ,  property )  of. . . . as, 

(Eng.)  Superstition  betrays  a  weak  mind. 

(Lat.)  Superstition  is  (a  mark )  of  a  weak  mind. 

(Eng.)  Every  man  may  err,  or  is  liable  to  err. 

(Lat.)  To  err  is  (the  lot )  of  every  one. 

(Eng.)  A  king  is  bound  to  protect  his  subjects. 

(Lat.)  To  protect  his  subjects  is  ( the  duty)  of  a  king. 

Note  2. — When  the  predicate-genitive  expresses  a  quality  and.  has  an  adjective 
agreeing  with  it,  the  ablative  is  frequently  used  instead  of  the  genitive  (§  110)  ;  as, 
“  Socrates  was  (a  man)  of  a  very  mild  temper  Socrates  erat  mitissimi  ingenii  or 
mitissimo  ingenio.  In  omnibus  rebus  Cato  singulars  fuit  prudentia  et  industria.  Bono 
semper  animo  esto.  Agesilaus fuit  statura  humili  et  corpore  exiguo 

Note  3. — When  the  person  whose  part  or  duty  any  thing  is,  is  expressed  by  a  per¬ 
sonal  pronoun  (“it  is  incumbent  on  me,  on  us,  on  you,” — “you  should,”  “you 
ought”),  instead  of  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns:  mei ,  tui ,  sui,  nostri,  vestri , 
the  neuters  of  the  possessives  :  m,e.um ,  tuum ,  suum ,  nostrum ,  and  vestrum  (sc.  nego- 
iium  or  ofiicium)  are  used;  as,  “  It  is  for  us  to  commence  Nostrum  est  incipere. 
Tuum  est  videre  quid  agatur.  Feci  quod  meum  erat ,  tu  modo  fac  quod  tuum  est.  Si 
cvjusquam ,  certe  tuum  est  nihil  prater  virtutem  in  bonis  ducere.  Meum  esse  puto  quid 
sentiam  ostendere. 

In  like  manner,  when  sum  is  taken  in  the  sense  of  “  to  belong  to,”  “to  be  the  prop¬ 
erty  of,”  the  possessives  are  used,  and  made  to  agree  with  the  subject-nominative  in 
gender,  number,  and  case;  e.  g.,  “This  book  belongs  to  me;”  Hie  liber  meus  est. 
Hac  vestis  tua  est.  Si  nos  defenditis ,  vestri ;  si  deseritis ,  Samnitium  erimus. — “I  am 
totally  devoted  to  you — am  all  yours  ;”  Totus  tuus  sum. 

Note  4. — Instead  of  stulti  est ,  regis  est ,  Eomanorum  est ,  cvjusvis  hominis  est ,  etc., 
we  may  say  with  equal  propriety  stultum  est ,  regium  est ,  Romanum  est ,  humanvm  est , 
etc. ;  e.  g.,  Et  facere  et pati  fortia  Bomanum  est. — But  with  adjectives  of  one  ending 
the  genitive  only  ought  to  be  used,  as  sapientis  est ,  insipientis  est ,  etc. 

Sometimes,  when  the  predicate-genitive  expresses  a  quality,  the  nominative  may 
be  used  as  well  as  the  genitive.  Thus  we  can  say,  Frustra  niti  extrema  dementia  or 
extrema  dementia  est.  Sic  agere  summa  lemtatis  or  summa  levitas  est.  Nego  hoc  moris 
esse  Gracorum  or  hunc  rnorem  esse  Gracorum. 

Note  5. — The  predicate-genitive  stands  also  with  puto ,  liabeo ,  existimo,  and  fieri  in 
the  sense  of  “to  come  to  belong  to.” — Facio  with  the  genitive  ditionis  means  “  to 
subdue,”  “to  bring  under  one’s  dominion,”  and  is  equivalent  to:  in  ditionem  or 
poteslatem  redigere. — E.  g.,  Tempori  cedere  semper  sapientis  est  habitum.  Multi  super- 
stitionem  imbecilli  animi  putart.  Qua  Macedonum  erant,  populi  Romani  facta  sunt. 
Tota  Asia  popidi  Romani  facta  est.  Hannibal  Italiam  sua  ditionis  fecit.  Scipio  omnem 
vram  usque  ad  lbermn  jiumen  Romana  ditionis  fecit. 


Teedet  me  vitae, 

§  159. — 5.  The  impersonal  verbs  poznitet,  piget,  pudet ,  tcedet,  and 
miseret ,  govern  the  accusative  of  the  person  in  whom  the  feeling  of 


THE  VERB. 


145 


shame,  grief,  etc.,  exists,  and  the  genitive  of  the  thing  which  causes  the 
feeling  ;  as,  “  I  am  weary  of  life.” 

Poenitet  ( me ),  I  repent  of,  Perf.  prenituii ,  Fnt.  pemitebit. 

Piget  ( me ),  I  am  vexed  at,  I  regret,  Pert',  piguit  or  pig  it  um  est. 

Pudet  (me),  I  am  ashamed  of,  Pjrf.  puduit  or puditum  est. 

Tcedet  (me),  I  am  tired  of,  Perf,  pertmum  est ,  rarely  toeduit. 

Miseret  {me),  I  pity,  Perf.  muertftum  est,  rarely  miseruit. 

life  tui  miseret.  Pudet  me  tui  hominis  vanissimi.  Miseret  te  alioru?nf 
tui  nee  miseret  nec  pudet.  Nunquam  Atticum  suscepti  negat  'd  pertcesmn 
est.  Me  civitatis  morum  piget  tcedetque.  Mala  me  fortunes  pamiteat , 
quo.m  victories  pudecit.  Ignavum  poenitebit  aliquando  ig navies  sues.  Sunt 
homines  quos  infamies  suce  neque  pudeat  neque  teed  eat. 


Rote  1.— When  the  thing  which  causes  the  feeling,  is  expressed — not  by  a  sub¬ 
stantive,  but  by  a  verb  or  the  neuter  of  a  pronoun,  the  former  is  either  put  in  the  Inf. 
or  rendered  by  a  clause  with  quod  ;  the  latter  is  put  in  the  accusative ;  as,  “  I  am  sorry 
for  having  done  this;”  Poenitet  me  hoc  fecisse.  Piget  me  plura  dicere.  Non  me  tarn 
diu,  vixisse  poenitet.  Poenitet  me  quod  te  offendi.  Sapientis  est  proprium  nihil  quod 
po&nitere  possit,  facer  e. 

Rote  2. — Pudet  takes  also  the  genitive  (generally  without  an  accusative  of  the 
person)  in  the  sense  of  “to  feel  ashamed  for,  or  in  the  sight  of e.  g.,  “  It  is  scanda¬ 
lous  in  the  sight  of  gods  and  men Pudet  deorum  hominumqvx .  Pudet  hvjus 
legionis,  pudet  optimi  exercitus.  Nonne  te  Tiujustempli ,  nonurbis,  nan  dice,  non  lucis 
pudet? — The  Participle  pertcesus  often  takes  the  accusative  of  the  tiling,  instead  of 
the  genitive,  as  Pertcesus  ignaviam  suam. 

Rote  3. — Here  are  to  be  noticed  the  two  verbs  misereor  2.  and  miseresco  3.,  “I  pity.’ 
They  are  both  construed  personally,  that  is,  the  person  who  pities,  ia  put  in  the  nom¬ 
inative,  and  with  this  nominative  the  verbs  themselves  agree  in  number  and  person  ; — 
but  the  object  which  causes  the  feeling,  is  put  in  the  genitive :  as,  Boni  homines 
eiiam  pecoris  miserentur.  Arcadii ,  queeso ,  miserescite  regis. 

Miseror  1.  and  commiseror  1.,  “I  pity,”  are  transitive  and  accordingly  take  the  accu¬ 
sative  of  the  object;  as,  Agesilaus  commiseratus  est  fortunam  Grcecice. 


Interest  omnium. 

§  1G0. — 6.  The  impersonal  verbs  interest  and  refert ,  “it  concerns— 
matters — is  of  consequence  or  importance  to,”  govern  the  genitive  of 
the  person  whose  interest  or  concern  any  thing  is  ;  ns,  “It  concerns  all.” 

floe  multarum  civitatum  in  Gi'cecia  inter fuit.  Interest  red  pm  blicai  juven- 
tutem probe  institui.  Theodori  nihil  interest ,  humine  an  sublime putrescat,1 


T)  whether  he  rot  on  the  ground  or  on  high. 

10 


146 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 


Civiurti  refert  legibus  obtempevare.  Ostendam  quantum  salutis  com¬ 
munis  inter  sit  duos  consules  in  republica  esse. 

Note  1. — When  the  person  whom  any  thing  concerns,  is  expressed  in 
English  by  a  personal  pronoun,  in  Latin  the  possessive  forms  mea,  tua ,  sua,  nostra, 
and  vestra ,  are  used  ;  as,  Interest  mea  ut  te  videam.  Tua  quod  nihil  refert,  percontari 
desinas.  Caesar  dicere  solebat,  non  tam  sua  quam  reipublicoe  interesse  ut  salvus  esset. 

Note  2. — How  much  or  how  little  one  is  concerned,  is  expressed  either  (a)  by 
the  genitives  tanti,  quanti,  quanlicunque ;  magni,  permagni,  maximi  ;  pluris,  plurimi ; 
parvi,  minoris,  minimi  (but  never  multi  and  majoris ) ; — or  (b)  by  the  neuters  tantum, 
quantum,  aliquantum  ;  muUum,  plus,  plurimum,  permultum ,  infinitum,  mirum  quan¬ 
tum  ;  minus,  minimum;  nihil,  quid,  quiddam ; — or  (c)  by  the  adverbs  tantopere,  magno- 
pere,  magis ,  maxitne,  vehemenUf,  tam ,  quam,  minime.  E.  g.,  Illud  mea  mag¬ 
ni  (or  multum ,  magnopere)  interest  ut  in  officio  tuo  sis  diligentissimus.  Quanto- 

pere  (or  quanti,  quantum)  inter  sit  opprimi  Doldbellam,  profecto  intelligis.  Maxime  (or 
maximi,  plurimum )  rfiert ,  quemadmodum  quceque  res  audiatur .  Non  tam  interest  quo 
animo  scribatur  epistola,  quam  quo  acoipiatur. 

Note  3. — The  thing  which  concerns,  is  expressed  in  Latin,  either  (a)  by  the 
simple  Infinitive  or  the  Ace.  c.  Inf.  ;  (b)  by  a  subordinate  clause  with  ut,  ne,  or  an 
interrogative ;  or  (c)  by  a  neuter  pronoun,  such  as  hoe,  id,  illud,  quod. — In  English, 
the  t  hing  is  commonly  expressed  bjr  a  substantive  ;  as, 

(Eng.)  The  price  of  corn  is  of  great  importance  to  us. 

(Lat.)  It  concerns  us  much  what  corn  sells  for. 

(Eng.)  Thy  health  and  diligence  concern  me  much. 

(Lat)  It  much  concerns  me  that  thou  be  healthy  and  diligent. 

(Eng.)  Of  what  consequence  is  to  you  the  fall  of  Troy  ? 

(Lat.)  What  does  it  matter  you  that  Troy  has  fallen? 

Magni  omnium  interest  leges  servari — ut  leges  serventur — ne  leges  perfringantur — 
utrum  leges  serventur  neene.  Multum  nostra  interest  quanti  frumentum  veneat.  Quid 
tua  refert  Troiam  eversam  esse ?  Multum  mea  interest  ut  sis  sanus  et  diligens ,  or  te 
scinum  esse  et  diligentem.  Vehementer  mea  interest  quid  boni  homines  de  me  judicent. 

Note  4. — When  ipse,  unus ,  solus ,  or  a  noun,  is  added  in  apposition  to  the  posses- 
Bives  mea,  tua,  sua ,  nostra,  vestra,  it  must  be  put  in  the  genitive  (§  138),  unless  the 
noun  he  added  as  a  vocative  of  address.  E.  g.,  “  It  is  my  (our,  your)  own  interest 
Mea  ipsius  ( nostra ,  vestra  ipsorum)  interest. — “It  concerns  thee  alone;”  Tua  unius  or 
eolius  interest.  Mea  proeceptoris  vestri  plurimum  interest.  Nullius  magis  quam  tua, 
mi  Tiro ,  interesse  puta. 

NoteS. — The  object  in  regard  to  which  or  for  which  a  thing  is  of  importance, 
’s  expressed  by  the  accusative  with  ad  ;  as,  Equidem  ad  nostrum  laudem  non  multum 
video  interesse..  Magni  ad  honorem  nostrum  interest  quam  primum  ad  urbem  me  venire. 

Note  6 . — Refert,  in  the  best  Latin  writers,  is  but  rarely  used  with  a  genitive  of  the 
person.  It  oftener  occurs  with  the  ’possessives  mea,  tua,  sua,  etc. ;  and  most  com¬ 
monly  without  a  genitive  or  possessive  at  all.  E.  g.,  Quid  mea  refert  ?  Illud  per¬ 
magni  refem  arbitror.  Meminero,  sed  quid  meminissc  id  refert  ? 


THE  VERB. 


14  T 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 

Do  vestem  pauperi. 

§  161. — 1.  The  dative  may  stand  with  any  verb  in  answer  to  the  ques¬ 
tion  to  whom  or  what?  or,  for  whom  or  what?  that  is,  for  whose  ad¬ 
vantage  or  disadvantage  ?  as,  “I  give  a  garment  to  a  poor  man.” 

Karras  fabulam  surdo.  Pueri ,  ne  socordice  vos  atque  ignavice  tradite. 
Non  scholce,  sed  vitce  discimus.  Tibi  seris ,  tibi  metis.  Avarus  aliis  divitias 
par  at,  non  sibi.  Non  solum  nobis  divites  esse  volumus ,  sed  Uberis,  pro¬ 
pin  quis,  amicis,  maximeque  reipublicce. 

Note. — As  the  preposition  “  to”  is  often  omitted  in  English,  especially  after  verbs 
of  giving,  sending ,  showing ,  telling ,  'promising ,  etc.,  beginners  should  carefully  dis¬ 
tinguish  between  the  object  given,  sent,  promised,  etc.,  and  the  person  to  whom 
it  is  given,  sent,  promised,  etc.  The  former  is  put  in  the  accusative  answering  to  the 
question  whom  or  what ;  the  latter,  in  the  dative  answering  to  the  question  to  whom  or 
what?  E.  g.,  “Give  (to)  me  this  picture;”  Da  mihi  hanc  imaginem. — “Show  (to) 
your  father  that  letter;”  Ostende  patri  hanc  epistolam. — “  I  sent  (to)  your  brother  a 
large  sum  of  money ;”  Fratri  tuo  mag nam  pecuniae  summam  misi. — “  Tell  (to)  us  some 
news ;”  Die  nobis  aliquid  novi. 


Sunt  mihi  libri. 

§  162.  —  2.  The  verb  sum  in  the  sense  of  “to  have,”  takes  the  dative 
of  the  person  who  has,  and  the  nominative  of  the  thing  which  he 
has. — The  verb  sum  g  of  course,  is  to  agree  with  the  nominative  of  the 
thing,  in  number  and  person.  E.  g.,  “  I  have  books.” 

Est  homini  cum  Deo  similitudo.  Non  semper  idem  color  est  foribus. 
Suus  cuique  mos  est.1  Nulla  potest  esse  voluptati  cum  honestate  con - 
junctio.  Sunt  nauticis  corpora  '  dura,  agricolis  manus  tritce ;  agilia 
sunt  membra  cursoribus. —  Videmus  non  semper  eundem  esse  eolorem 
foribus. 

Note. — We  must  here  notice  the  phrase  est  mihi  nomen ,  “  my  name  is,”  or  “  I  am 
called,”  where  the  name  itself  is  added  either  in  the  dative  or  nominative,  very  rarely 
in  the  genitive.  E.  g.,  Fst  mihi  nomen  Alexandro  or  Alexander.  -  -Quodnam  est  tibi 
nomen?  Marcello  or  Marcellas. — Erat  inter  illos  juvenis  cui  cognomen postea  Coriolano 
fuit.  Consoles  leges ,  quibus  tabulis  duodecim  est  nomen,  in  publico  proposuerunt. 
Damaratus  duos  filios  habuit :  nomina  his  Lucumo  et  Aruns  fuere. 

Like  est  mihi  nomen  is  construed  the  passive  phrase  nomen  mihi  datum  ( indiinm , 


T)  Every  one  lias  his  own  way. 


148 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 


imposU-um ,  or  factum)  est ;  as,  Puero  oh  inopia  Egerio  (or  Egerius)  nomen  inditurn  est. 
Fiumini  a  celeritate  Tigri  (or  Tigris)  nornen  est  inditum. — In  the  active  construction, 
the  proper  name  stands  either  in  the  dative  or  accusative  ;  as,  Pesipiunt  o tones  qui 
tibi  nomen  insano  posuere.  Puero  Ascanium  pa-rentes  dixere  nomen .  Amphyction 
civitati  nomen  Atkenas  or  Athenis  dealt. — When  the  name  is  an  adjective  taken  sub¬ 
stantively  rati  ler  than  areal  proper  name,  the  genitive  is  used  also;  e.  g.,  Metello 
cognomen  Numidioi  inditum  fait.  Mithridati  res  gesict  Magni  cognomen  dederunt. 


Est  tibi  lionori. 

§  1  Cm. — 3.  The  verb  sum,  in  the  sense  of  to  serve  for ,  to  cause ,  to 
give ,  to  bring ,  to  afford,  etc.,  usually  takes  two  datives, — one  of  the 
persons  to  whom  any  thing  serves  for,  brings,  or  affords  ;  and  the 
other  of  the  thing  which  it  serves  for  brings,  or  affords ;  as,  “  It 
does  you  honor/’  or  “  It  redounds  to  your  honor.” 

Eloquentia  principibus  maximo  ornamento  est.  flare  est  exitio 
nauiis.1  Curate  ut  et  vobis  honori  et  amicis  utilitati  et  reipuhlicce  emo- 
lumento  esse  possitisd  Hoc  in  tempore  nulla  eiviias  Athemensibus 
auxilio  fuit.  Patri  non  minori  fuit  adjumento  in  pcriculis  quam  solatio 
in  laboribus. 

Note  1. — The  dative  of  the  thing  is  variously  expressed  in  English  :  (a)  by  the 
nominative  with  the  verb  “to  be  ;”  (b)  by  the  objective  depending  upon  such  a  verb 
as  to  serve  for,  to  cause,  procure,  occasion,  bring,  give,  afford;  and  (c) 
by  an  adjective.  E.  g.,  Est  solatio, it  affords  consolation,  it  is  a  (source  of)  consola¬ 
tion,  it  is  consoling. — Est  voluptati ,  It  is  a  pleasure,  it  gives  or  affords  pleasure,  it  is 
pleasant. 

Instead  of  Hoc  solatio ,  argumento ,  documento  est ,  we  may  also  say  Hoc  solatium , 
zrgumenium ,  documentum  est. 

Note2. — A  double  dative — one  of  the  person  to  whom,  and  the  other  of  the 
end  or  purpose  for  which — stands  often  also 

(a)  With  do,  duco,  tribuo,  habeo,  rerto,  and  fio,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  impute  for  or 
asp  “to  reckon  or  regard  as;”  e.  g.,  vitio  vertere ,  to  charge  as  a  crime  against  ; 

litdibrio  habere,  to  make  a  laughing-stock  of _ ;  laudi  ducere ,  to  reckon  as  a 

recommendation  ;  ignavias  tribuere ,  to  attribute  as  cowardice  ;  gloria  ducere ,  to 
regard  as  a  source  of  glory.  —  Paupertas  probro  haberi  or  fieri  ccepit.  Quis  erit  qui 
hoc  tibi  vitio  vertat  ?  Vitio  mihi  dant  quod  mortem  horn inis  necessarii  graviter  fero. 
Id  sibi  glories  duxitA  Ampler  domus  scope  ft  dedecori  domino,  si  in  ea  est  solitudo. 

(b)  With  do,  mitto,  venio,  profciscor,  accipio,relivquo,  when  the  purpose  of  giving, 
.sending,  coming,  etc.,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  a  substantive;  as,  “I  shall  come 
to  aid  you,”  or  “I  shall  come  to  your  assistance.” — Veniam  tibi  auxilio.  Pausanias 
Atticis  auxilio  venit.  Goesar  quinque  cohortes  castris pressidio  (also  ad  presidium)  reli- 
quitA  Virtus  sola  neque  clono  datur  ncque  accipiturA 


')  brings  ruin  upon.  2)  become  an  honor  to  yourselves,  a  benefit  to  your  friends, 

and  an  advantage  to _  s)  He  thought  it  glorious  for  himself.  4)  as  a  garrison,  or 

for  the  protection  of  the  camp.  6)  is  neither  bestowed  as  a  present. 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 


149 


Note  3. — To  this  rule  are  to  be  referred,  also,  the  phrases  est  mihi  cures,  “I  care,  or 
am  anxious  about,”  and  est  mihi  cordi,  “  I  have  at  heart,”  “  it  is  dear  to  me.”  E.  g., 
“  Every  one  minds  his  own  gratification  Cures  est  sua  cuique  voluptas.  Est  adhuc 
cures,  hominibus  fides  et  ojjicium.  Amicos  Attico  euros  esse  cognitum  est.  Id  mild  non 
minor i  cures  est  quain  tibi.1  Hoc  mihi  magnopere  cordi  est. 

Upgf3"  With  cures  the  adjectives  magnets,  niajori ,  maximes,  etc., — with  cordi  the  adverbs 
magnopere,  magis,  maxime,  etc.,  arc  commonly  used. 


Studeo  Grammatics©. 


§  164. — 4.  The  dative  stands  with  many  intransitive  verbs  signifying 
to  please ,  favor ,  help,  profit,  trust ,  and  their  contraries, — to  command, 
obey,  serve ,  resist,  approach ,  threaten,  and  be  angry  with.  The  principal 
verbs  of  this  kind  are  :  placeo,  displiceo,  arrideo,  assentior,  assentor , 
blandior ,  lenocinor ,  gratificor,  palpor, — -faveo,  studeo,  ignosco,  indulgeo, 
suffragor,  invideo,  insidior ,  convicior,  insulto, — auxilior,  opitulor,  patro - 
cinor ,  subvenio,  succurro,  medeor,  incommodo ,  obtrecto , — prosum,  obsum, 
noceo,  officio, — credo,  fido ,  confido,  diffido, — impero,  mcindo ,  prcecipio, — 
obedio,  pareo ,  obsequor,  obtempero ,  morigeror,  cedo,  dicto  audiens  sum, — 
servio,  inservio,  ministro ,  famulor ,  ancillor, — adversor ,  refragor ,  obsto, 
renitor ,  repugno ,  resisto, — propinquo ,  appropinquo ,  occurro,  obvius  sum 
or  fio,  obviam  eo  ( fio ,  venio ), — minor,  comminor,  impendeo,  immineo, — 
succenseo ,  irascor.  To  these  must  be  added  nubo ,  parco,  benedico,  male- 
dico,  suadeo,  persuadeo ,  dissuadeo,  supplico ,  satisfacio,  respondco,  and  the 
impersonals  libet,  licet,  liquet,  conducit,  convenit,  exped.it,  accidit,  evenit, 
and  contingit.  E.  g.,  “I  study  Grammar.” 


adminiculor,  1.  to  help. 
adversor,  1.  to  oppose. 
ancillor,  1.  to  serve. 
appropinquo,  1.  to  approach. 
arrideo,  2.  to  please. 
assentior,  4.  to  agree  with. 
assentor,  1.  to  flatter. 
auxilior,  1.  to  help. 
benedico,  3.  to  praise. 
blandior,  4.  to  flatter. 
cedo,  3.  to  yield. 
comminor,  1.  to  threaten. 
confido;  3.  to  confide  in. 
convicior,  1.  to  revile. 
credo,  3.  to  trust. 
dicto  audiens  sum,  to  obey. 
diffido,  3.  to  distrust. 
displiceo,  2.  to  displease. 


dissuadeo,  2.  to  dissuade. 
famulor,  1.  to  serve. 
faveo,  2.  to  favor. 
fido,  3.  to  trust. 
gratificor,  1.  to  gratify. 
ignosco,  3.  to  pardon. 
immineo,  2.  to  threaten. 
impendeo,  2.  to  threaten. 
impero,  1.  to  command. 
incommodo,  1.  to  molest. 
indulgeo,  2.  to  indulge. 
inservio,  4.  to  serve. 
insidior,  1.  to  lay  snares. 
insulto,  1.  to  insult. 
invideo,  2.  to  envy. 
irascor,  3.  to  be  angry. 
lenocinor,  1.  to  wheedle. 
inaledico,  3.  to  abuse. 


mando,  1.  to  command. 
medeor,  2.  to  heal. 
ministro,  1.  to  serve. 
minor,  1.  to  threaten. 
morigeror,  1.  to  gratify. 
noceo,  2.  to  hurt. 
nubo,  3.  to  marry. 
obedio,  4.  to  obey. 
obsequor,  3.  to  comply  with. 
obsto,  1.  to  oppose. 
obsum,  to  be  against. 
obtempero,  1.  to  obey. 
obtrecto,  1.  to  disparage. 
obviam  eo,  to  go  to  meet. 
obiam  venio,  to  meet. 
obvius  sum,  to  meet. 
occurro,  3.  to  meet. 
officio,  3.  to  hinder. 


*)  It  is  a  subject  of  no  less  anxiety  to  mo 


150 


YERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE.- 


opitulor,  1.  to  help. 
palpor,  1.  to  wheedle. 
parco,  3.  to  spare. 
pareo,  2.  to  obey. 
putrocihor,  1.  to  defend. 
persuadeo,  2.  to  persuade. 
».Jaceo,  2.  to  please. 
prtecipio,  3.  to  command. 


propinqno,  1.  to  approach. 
prosum,  to  profit. 
refragor,  1.  to  oppose. 
renitor,  3.  to  resist. 
repugno,  1.  to  oppose. 
resisto,  3.  to  resist. 
respondeo,  2.  to  answer. 
satisfacio,  3.  to  satisfy. 


servio,  4.  to  serve. 
studeo,  2.  to  apply  one's  self 
snadeo,  2.  to  advise. 
subvenio,  4.  to  aid. 
succenseo,  2.  to  be  angry  ivith 
succurro,  3.  to  succor. 
suffraeor,  1.  to  support. 
supplico,  1.  to  entreat. 


Mors  nulli  hominum  parcit.  Vir  probus  nemini  invidet.  Mali  bonis 
obtrectare  solent.  Festinationi  niece  brevitatique  litterarum  ignosce.  Vir 
bonus  non  incommodat  alieri.  Cccsari  pro  te  libentissime  supplicabof 
Quis  mild  jure  succenseat  ?  Non  crimini  patrocinamur ,  sed  homini. 
Homines  plurimum  hominibus  et  prosunt  et  obsuntd  Dies 3  stultis  quo - 
que  mederi  solet.  Voluq^tas  semibus  blanditur.  Hoc  rectene  an  per- 
peram  fecerim ,  nondum  mild  plane  liquet. 


Rote  1. — In  the  passive  construction,  the  preceding  intransitive  verbs  become 
impersonal,  that  is,  they  are  put  in  the  third  person  singular,  retaining  the  dative 
which  they  govern  in  the  active.  To  this  the  young  student  should  pay  particular 
attention,  as  most  of  them  are  transitive  in  English  and  accordingly  admit  of  a 
personal  passive  ;  as, 


Parcitur  mihi,  lam  spared , 
parcitur  tibi,  thou  art  spared , 
parcitur  illi,  he  is  spared, 
parcitur  nobis,  we  are  spared , 
parcitur  vobis,  ye  are  spared , 
parcitur  illis,  they  are  spared. 


Favetur  mihi,  lam  favored , 
favetur  tibi,  thou  art  favored , 
favetur  illi,  he  is  favored , 
favetur  nobis,  ice  are  favored, 
favetur  vobis,  ye  are  favored, 
favetur  illis,  they  are  favored. 


Thus,  “I  am  molested,”  mihi  incommodatur ,  not  ego  incommodor. — “You  are 
envied,”  vobis  invidetur,  not  vos  invidemini. — “  Thou  art  obeyed,”  tibi  obtemperatur , 
not  tu  obtemperaris. — “  They  were  abused  with  impunity,”  illis  impune  maledictum 
est,  not  illi  impune  maledicti  sunt. — “I  have  been  persuaded,”  i.  e.,  “I  am  con¬ 
vinced,”  mihi  persuasum  est ,  not  ego  persuasus  sum. 

Rote  2. — The  verbs  credo ,  mando,  impero,  praecipio ,  minor ,  suadeo ,  and  respondeo, 
besides  the  dative  of  the  person,  take  sometimes  an  accusative  of  the  thing;  as,  “I 
am  threatened  {minor,  §  92.)  with  death,”  Mortem  mihi  minantur. — “He  spoke  in 
favor  of  peace,”  Suasit  pacem  sc.  civibus. — “  Csesar  demanded  arms  and  hostages  from 
the  states,”  Caesar  arma  et  obsides  civitatibus  imperavit. 

As  the  accusative  of  the  thing,  in  the  passive  construction,  becomes  the  nomina¬ 
tive,  these  verbs  may  admit  of  a  personal  passive  and  accordingly  be  used  in  the 
plural,  if  the  nominative  be  plural  ;  e.  g.,  “Matters  about  which  advice  is  asked,  are 
replied  to  with  very  little  risk;”  Quae  consuluntur ,  minimo  per iculo  respondentur. 
Tota  Italia  delectus  habentur ,  arma  imperantur.  Mdduatici  quce  ( sibi )  imperarentur , 
facere  dixerunt. 


l)  entreat  in  thy  behdf.  3)  profit  and  hurt  one  another.  s)  Time. 


VERBS  GOVERNING-  THE  DATIVE. 


151 


Note  3.  —When  two  verbs  connected  by  et,  of  which  one  governs  the  dative,  the 
other  the  accusative,  affect  in  common  the  same  object,  the  noun  is  expressed  witr 
the  first  verb,  and  represented  with  the  other  by  the  appropriate  case  of  the  demon¬ 
strate  is  or  ille ;  as,  “The  desires  of  the  soul  must  obey  and  follow  reason  Animi 
appetitus  rationi  pareant  eamque  sequantur  necesse  est. 

Note  4. — With  persuadeo ,  the  thing  of  which  one  persuades  himself  or  another,  is 
commonly  expressed  by  a  clause, — sometimes  by  the  accusative  of  an  adjective  or 
adjective  pronoun  in  the  neuter  gender,  as  hoc ,  id,  Mud,  unum ,  utrumque ,  mutta , 
etc., — and  sometimes  by  the  ablative  with  de,  as  persuadere  alicui  de  paupertate ,  dt 
animi  immortalitate ,  etc. 

The  English  “  to  envy  some  one  for  something”  is  rendered  in  Latin  either  by  the 
dative  of  the  person  with  the  accusative  of  the  thing,  as  “I  envy  no  man’s  honor,” 
Nulli  honorem  invideo ;  incident  nobis  optimam  magistram ,  naturam,— or,  what  is 
more  common,  the  thing  is  expressed  by  the  dative  and  the  person  by  the  genitive  or 
a  possessive  pronoun.  E.  g.,  Nullius  invideo  honori.  Tlorum  laudi  invident.  Non 
ego  invideo  tuis  commodis. 

Note  5. — Insulto  is  generally  construed  with  the  dative,  very  rarely  with  the 
accusative. — Benedico  takes  the  dative  in  the  sense  of  “to  praise  ;”  the  accusative,  in 
the  sense  of  “  to  bless.”  The  former  but  seldom  occurs,  the  latter  is  found  only  in 
ecclesiastical  writers. — Nuibo ,  “to  marry,”  (properly)  “  to  veil,”  is  said  of  the  bride  ; 
ducere  in  matrimonium  or  simply  ducere ,  of  the  bridegroom. 

pIP  The  verbs  jubeo,  juvo ,  Icedo ,  and  offendo ,  are  transitive,  and  accordingly  govern 
the  accusative. 


Annue  cceptis. 

§  165. — 5.  The  dative  stands  with  many  verbs  compounded  with  ad, 
ante,  con,  de,  in,  inter,  oh,  post,  proe,  sub,  and  super,  provided  the  signi¬ 
fication  of  these  prepositions  be  not  lost  in  composition ;  as,  “  Favor 
our  undertakings.  * 

Of  these  verbs  some  are  transitive ;  others,  intransitive. 


addo,  3.  to  add. 
affero,  to  bring. 
afflgo,  3.  to  fasten  to. 
adjicio,  3.  to  add. 
adjungo,  3.  to  join. 
adhibeo,  2.  to  employ. 
admoveo,  2.  to  lead  to. 
alllgo,  1.  to  bind. 
applico,  1.  to  apply. 
antepono,  3.  to  prefer. 
comparo,  1.  to  compare. 


The  following  are  transitive  : 


confero,  to  compare  with . 
conjungo,  3.  to  join. 
defero,  to  confer  upon. 
derogo,  1.  to  derogate. 
detraho,  3.  to  take  off. 
eripio,  3.  to  snatch  away. 
immisceo,  2.  to  mingle  with. 
incldo,  3.  to  cut  into. 
infero,  to  bring  upon. 
injicio,  3.  to  throw  into. 
insero,  3.  to  insert. 


inuro,  3.  to  brand. 
objicio,  3.  to  object  to 
offundo,  3.  to  pour  before. 
oppono,  3.  to  oppose. 
posthabeo,  2.  to  esteevn  inferior. 
postpono,  3.  to  esteem  less. 
prsefero,  to  prefer. 
prteficio,  3.  to  place  over. 
praepono,  3.  to  prefer. 
subjicio,  3.  to  subject. 
suppono,  3.  to  place  under. 


152 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 


aceedo,  8.  to  approach. 
adhgBreo,  2.  to  stick  to. 
adjaceo,  2.  to  lie  near. 
alliido,  3.  to  allude  to. 
annuo,  3.  to  grant. 
assideo,  2.  to  sit  near. 
assurgo,  3.  to  rise  up  to.  interjaoeo,  2.  to  lie  between,  supervivo,  3.  to  survive. 
cohsereo,  2.  to  cohere.  intervenio,  4  .to  come  between,  praesuin,  to  preside. 
congrno,  3.  to  accord  with,  obrepo,  3.  to  steal  upon.  intersum,  to  be  present  at. 
consentio,  4.  to  agree.  obstrepo,  3.  to  annoy.  subsum,  to  be  beneath. 

illacrimo,  1.  to  cry  over.  obversor,  1.  to  be  before.  supersum,  to  be  remaining 

Senectus  nobis  obrepit.  Leonidas  securis  Per  sis  supervenit .  JVasus 
quasi  murus  oculis  inter jectus  esse1  videtur.  Thebanorum  genii  plus 
inest 2  virium  quam  ingenii.  Hannibal  proefuit 3  equitatui.  Aristides 
pugnae  navali  interfuit.  Plures  cecidissent ,  ni  nox  proelio  intcrvenisset.* 
An  vero  quisquam  par uit,  quisquam  in  curiam  venienti  assurrexit  ? 


The  following  are  intransitive: 


immbror,  1.  to  linger  over. 
indormio,  4.  to  sleep  over. 
inhsereo,  2.  to  st^ck  to. 
inbio,  1.  to  long  for. 
innaseor,  3.  to  groio  up  in. 
insisto,  3.  to  insist  on. 


praem.ineo,  2.  to  excel. 
prsesideo,  2.  to  preside. 
preevaleo,  2.  to  prevail. 
succumbo,  3.  to  succomb. 
supersto,  1.  to  stand  upon. 
supervenio,  4.  to  come  upon. 


Note  1. — Verbs  compounded  with  ad ,  con ,  and  in ,  sometimes  repeat  these  prepo¬ 
sitions  with  their  respective  cases.  E.  g.,  Confer  nostram  longissimam  cetatem  cum 
csternitate.  Navis  adhceret  ad  scopulum.  Dux  signa  in  hostes  inf  err'd  jussit.  In  omnium 
animis  Dei  notitiam  impressit  ipsa  natura.  Timotheus  ad  bellicam  laudem  doctrines 
gloriam  adjecil.  Cunctus  senatus  ad  Ccesarem  svpplex  accessit. 

Note  2. — Adjaceo  takes  sometimes  the  accusative,  but  without  a  preposition;  as, 
Timotheus  socios  omnes  eas  gentes  adjunxit  qiue  mare  Mud  adjacent. — ' The  accusative 
without  a  preposition  is  found  also  with  accedo ,  as  Hannibal  cum  quinque  navibus 
Africa/m  accessit. 

Applico  is  generally  construed  se  ad  aliquid ,  e.  g.,  ad  virtutem ,  ad  philosophiamj 
etc. ;  very  rarely  se  alicui  rei. — Communico ,  in  the  Classical  prose,  is  construed  ali- 
ouid  cum  aliquo ,  occasionally  aliquid.  inter  se ,  inter  nos ,  etc. ;  in  late  prose  only  alicui 

aliquid,. 

Obambulo  and  obequito  take  the  dative,  when  the  meaning  is  uto  walk,  ride  in 
front  of  or  towards;”  and  the  accusative,  when  the  meaning  is  “to  v/alk,  ride  through 
or  over.” 

Obrepo  and  obversor,  instead  of  the  dative,  sometimes  take  the  accusative  with  a 
preposition  ;  as,  obrepere  in  animum ,  obversari  ante  oculos. 


Cui  or  quern  praestolaris  ? 

§  1G6. — 6.  The  following  verbs  take  either  the  dative  or  the  accusa¬ 
tive  :  antecedo ,  ante  cello ,  anteeo ,  antesto ,  procedo ,  prcecello ,  prceeo ,  pree - 


T)  interposed  as  a  wall  between _  3)  possesses  more. ...  s)  commanded.  4)  had 

not  interrupted.  6)  to  attack  the  enemy.  Lit.,  to  bear  or  carry  the  standards 
against. . . . 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 


153 


curro,  prcesio ,  prceverto ;  allatro ,  ausculto ,  illudo  /  adulor ,  cemulor , 
medico? and  prcestolor  ;  as,  “For  whom  are  yon  waiting?” 

adulor,  1.  to  flatter.  ausculto,  1.  to  to.  prsesto,  1.  to  excel. 
aemulor,  1.  to  illudo,  8.  to  ridicule.  prcestolor,  1.  to  for. 

allatro,  1.  to  «£.  medicor,  1.  to  prseverto,  8.  to  avoid. 

Certis  rebus  certa  signa  proecurrunt.  Ut  homo  iners  hominem  diii- 
gentem  pr  occur  rat,  fieri  non  potest. —  Quis  horum  talium  virorum  digni* 
tatiilludat?  Carneades  oratorum  prcecepta  illudere  solebat. —  Tibi  ad 
forum  Aurelium  prcestolabantur  armati .  Quem  prcestolare ,  Parmeno , 
hie  ante  ostium  ? 


Note. — The  verbs  compounded  with  pree  and  ante,  when  taken  in  the  sense  of  “to 
excell,”  together  with  adulor,  cemulor,  and  allatro,  are  more  commonly  construed  with 
the  accusative. — Antecedo,  preesto ,  and  antecello,  however,  are  used  by  Cicero  with  the 
dative  only. 

Hanc  tibi  imaginem,  or  Hac  te  imagine  dono. 

§  161. — 1.  The  verbs  aspergo ,  inspergo ,  circumdo ,  dono,  impertio 
(and  -ior),  induo,  exuo,  and  intercludo,  are  construed  both  alicui  rem 
and  aliquem  re,  that  is,  they  take  either  the  dative  of  the  person  with 
the  accusative  of  the  thing,  or  the  accusative  of  the  person  with  the 
ablative  of  the  thing  ;  as,  41 1  present  you  this  picture.” 

Hosti  commeatu?n  (or  hostem  commea.tu )  inter  cluser  at  d  Carnem  sale 
(or  carni  salem)  aspergimus.  Archiam  poetam  Tarentini  civitate  dona- 
runt.  Orationi  aspergantur  sales. 

Note  1. — Interdicere,  “  to'  forbid,”  or  “  debar  from,”  is  generally  construed  alicui 
?v,and  sometimes  also,  alicui  rem.  E.  g.,  Ariovistus  omni  Gallia  interdixit  Romanis. 
Male  rem  gerentibus  bonis  paternis  interdict  solet.  Plancum  sic  contemnit  lament  am  si 
illi  aqua  et  igni  interdictum  sit. 

Note  2. — Such  expressions  as  galeam  indutus ,  chlamydem  lacerto  circumdatus ,  fer- 
vum  cinctus,  and  the  like,  are  Greek  imitations,  met  with  in  poetry. 

Consulo  tibi — Consulo  te. 

§  168. — 8.  The  following  verbs  take  at  one  time  the  dative ;  at 
another,  another  case,  but  in  a  different  signification : 


J)  intercepted  or  vRi  off. — We  also  find  intercludere  aliquem  ab  aliqua  re,  e.  g.,  ali¬ 
quem  ab  exercitu. 


3  54 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 


JEquare  aliquid  alicui  rei  or  cum  aliqua  re,  e.  g.,  Rannibali  PJiilippum,  to 
equalize,  to  compare  witli, — urbem  solo,  to  level  or  to  raze  to  the  ground ; 
aliquem  or  aliquid,  e.  g.,  majores,  mo  jorum,  gloriam,  cursum  equorum,  to 
equal,  attain  to ;  aliquem \  aliqua  re,  e.  g.,  majores  gloria,  equitem  cursu, 
to  keep  up  with  come  up  to. 

Caver e  alicui,  to  provide  for,  watch  over ;  aliquem  or  ab  aliquo,  to  avoid,  "beware 
of,  guard  against ;  absoh,  or  with  sibi,  to  he  on  one’s  guard. 

Consider e  alicui,  to  take  care  of,  provide  for  one’s  interests  ;  aliquem  aliquid  or 
de  aliqua  re,  to  consult,  ask  one’s  advice ;  cequi  boni  or  cequi  bonique  con- 
sulere  ( facere ),  and  boni  consulere,  to  take  in  good  part. 

Convenire  aliquem,  to  visit  some  one  ;  conzenit  mild,  etc.,  it  suits  me  ;  convenit 
alicui  cum  aliquo  or  inter  aliquos,  e.  g.,  mild  tecum,  or  inter  nos  convenit , 
we  agree ;  convenit  inter  omnes,  all  agree. 

Cupere  alicui,  to  favor,  wish  well  to ;  aliquid,  to  wish  something. 

Deficere  alicui  (very  rare),  to  fail,  be  wanting ; — usually  deficere  aliquem,  as  me 
vox,  vires  deficiunt,  or  absoh,  vox,  tempus,  memoria  deficit ;  sol,  luna 
deficit,  is  eclipsed ;  ab  aliquo,  to  forsake,  fall  off  from,  revolt  against, 
e.  g.,  a  Romanis,  a  virtute ;  ab  aliquo  ad  aliquem,  to  desert  to ;  deficere 
animo,  to  "be  disheartened,  lose  courage. 

lmponere  alicui,  to  cheat,  to  impose  upon ;  alicui  aliquid,  to  lay  something 
upon  some  one. 

Incumbere  rei,  to  lean  upon ;  ad  or  in  rem,  e.  g.,  in  rempublicam,  ad  litteras,  to 
apply  or  devote  one’s  self  to. 

Manet  mihi,  it  remains  for  me ;  manet  me,  it  awaits  me,  as  mors  sua  quemque 
manet ;  manere  in  sententia,  to  adhere  to. 

Moderari  rei,  to  check,  restrain ;  rem,  to  manage,  regulate,  govern. 

P etere  alicui  aliquid,  to  beg  something  for  another ;  aliquid  ab  aliquo,  to  ask 
some  one  for  something,  or  something  of  some  one  ;  aliquem,  to  attack, 
aim  at ;  locum,  e.  g.,  Romam,  urbem,  castra,  to  go  to. 

Prospicere  (provider e)  alicui,  to  take  care  of,  provide  for ;  aliquid,  to  foresee. 

Queer  ere  alicui  aliquid,  e.  g.,  sibi  laudem,  to  seek  to  gain ;  aliquem  or  aliqidd, 
to  seek,  look  for ;  ex  (ab,  de)  aliquo  aliquid ,  to  question  some  one  about 
something,  e.  g.,  ex  me  qucesitum  est,  I  was  asked ;  de  aliqua  re,  to  inquire 
into  j  uridically. 

Recipere  aliquid,  to  receive  something ;  alicui,  to  warrant,  promise ;  aliquem 
domo,  tectis,  to  entertain ;  in  se,  to  pledge  one’s  word ;  se,  animum  a  (ex) 
pavore,  to  recover  from,  collect  one’s  self;  se,  or  se  in  locum,  e.  g.,  domum, 
to  retreat,  return. 

Ref  'erre  alicui  aliquid,  to  bring  or  carry  back ;  gratiam,  to  return  thanks  ;  se 
Romam,  return  to ;  pedem,  to  retreat ;  rem  or  de  re  ad  senatum,  to  lay 
before. 

Temperare  rei,  to  check,  restrain ;  sibi  ab  aliqua  re,  to  abstain  from ;  rem,  to 
manage,  regulate ;  alicui,  e.  g.,  hostibus,  to  refrain  from  severity  towards 
to  spare. 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


155 


Timer  e  ( metuere )  rei  or  de  re,  alicui  or  de  aliquo,  to  fear  for  something  or  for 
some  one  ;  tibi  or  tua  causa,  I  am  alarmed  on  thy  account ;  aliquem  or 
aliquid,  to  fear  some  one  or  something ;  aliquid  ab  aliquo,  to  fear  some¬ 
thing  from  some  one. 

Vacare  rei,  to  devote  one’s  self  to ;  re  or  a  re,  to  he  free  from,  to  be  without. 


Note. — The  following  verbs  take,  in  the  same  signification,  sometimes  the  dative, 
and  sometimes  another  case,  with  or  without  a  preposition  : 

Acquiescere  rei ,  re ,  and  in  re,  to  find  pleasure  in  something. 

Adscribere  aliquem  ciritati  and  in  civitatom,  to  receive  some  one  as  a  citizen. 

Assuescere ,  insuescere  rei  and  (more  commonly)  re,  rarely  ad  aliquid ,  to  accustom 
one’s  self  to. 

Attendere  aliquem  or  aliquid,  more  rarely  alicui  rei ;  also  attendere  animum  ad  ali¬ 
quid,  to  listen  to. 

Desqoerare  ran,  e.  g.,  rempublicam,  to  give  up ;  de  re  or.  alicui  rei,  e.  g.,  sibi, fortunis 
Buis,  to  despair  of. 

Txcellere  alicui  (rarely  aliquem)  and  inter  omnes ,  to  excel. 

Mittere ,  scribere  alicui  and  ad  aliquem,  to  send,  write  (to)  some  one. 

Occumbere  morte  and  (more  commonly)  mortem,  to  fall,  to  die. 

Supersedere  alicui  rei  and  (more  commonly)  aliqua  re,  to  omit,  desist  from. 


Quid  mihi  Celsus  a  git  ? 

§  169. — 9.  The  datives  mihi ,  tibi,  sibi ,  nobis,  and  vobis ,  are  often 
used,  where  the  English  language  has  no  equivalent  expression.  They 
are  for  the  most  part  redundant,  and  serve  merely  for  the  purpose  of 
indicating  familiarity  and  liveliness  of  feeling;  as,  “  What  is  my  friend 
Celsus  doing  ?” 

Quid  ait  tandem  nobis  Sannio  ?  Hie  mihi  quisquam  misericordiam 
nomine 1 11  Epistolam  cum  a  te  avide  expectarem,  ccce  tibi  nuncius , 
pueros  venisse  Roma,.  An  ille  mihi  liber, *  'cui  m  ulie  r  i  in per  at  ?  Quid 
hoc  sibi  vult  ? 3  Quid  hcec  sibi  dona  volunt  ?* 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

Am  a  Deum. 

§  170. — 1.  The  accusative  stands  with  all  transitive  verbs  in  answer 
to  the  question  whom  or  what  ?  placed  after  the  verb ;  as,  “  Love  (love 
whom? — )  God.” 


l)  Let  here  any  one  talk  to  me  of  mercy.  2)  Or  can  I  think  him  free - ?  s)  Wha; 

does  this  mean  ?  <)  What  is  the  meaning  of. ...  ? 


156 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


Oleum  et  operam  perdidi ,  surdo  cecini ,  lapidem  coxi.  Obsequium 
c vnicos ,  veritas  odium  parit .  Maximum  ornamentum  amicitice  tollit ,  qui 
ex  ea  tollit  verecundiam.  Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  movet. 
Hcec  studia  adolescentiam  alunt ,  senectutem  oblectant ,  secundas  res 
ornant ,  adversis  perfugium  ac  solatium  prcebent. 

Note  1. — Transitive  verbs  compounded  with  trans ,  take  two  accusatives  ;  on© 
depending  on  the  verb,  the  other  upon  the  preposition.  In  the  passive  construction, 
the  former  becomes  the  nominative,  the  latter  remains  unchanged. — E.  g.,  “Agesilaus 
led  his  forces  across  the  Hellespont Agesilaus  copias  Hellespontum  trajecit.  Vbii 
orabant  ut  Ccesar  exercitum  Rhenum  transportaret. — Ab  Agesilao  copiaz  Hellespontum 
trajectce  sunt.  Pelgaz  Rhenum  traducti  sunt.  Thus,  Scipio  mm  classe  Pyrenozos  monies 
circumveetus  est. 


Note  2, — Ivfany  verbs,  which  are  properly  intransitive,  are  often  used  as  transi¬ 
tives,  and  accordingly  take  an  accusative,  especially  that  of  a  neuter  adjective  oi 
adjective  pronoun.  E.  g.,  Hoc  gandeo  or  lector,  I  rejoice  at  this  ;  illud  tibi  assentior ,  1 
agree  with  you  in  this  point;  non  possum  idem  gloriari ,  I  cannot  make  the  same 
boast ;  illud  non  dubito ,  I  do  not  doubt  that ;  omnes  hoc  unum  student ,  all  are  anxious 
about  this  one  thing;  idem  ( multa  alia)  peccasti,  you  have  made  the  same  blunder. — 
Olere  vinum ,  to  smell  of  wine  ;  redolere  antiquitatem ,  to  savor  of  antiquity  ;  vox  sonat 
hominem ,  the  voice  sounds  like  that  of  a  man  ;  anhelwre  scelus,  crudelitatem ,  to  be 
panting  for,  to  breathe  out;  gemere ,  lugere ,  lacrimare  casum ,  to  grieve  at,  or  mourn 
over;  fastidire  preces,  mores  alien j us,  to  be  disgusted  with;  festinare  mortem ,  to 
accelerate;  horrere  tenebras ,  crimen  ingrati  animi ,  to  shudder,  be  horr-ified  at;— 
indignari  vicem  suam ,  erubescere  fratres,  currere  stadium ,  navigare  mare ,  tertiam  vivere 
aztatem ,  etc. 

Note  3. — Several  intransitive  verbs  implying  motion,  become  transitive,  when 
compounded  with  prepositions  governing  the  accusative,  especially  with  circum,  per , 
preeter ,  trans ,  and  super ,  and  accordingly  take  an  accusative  ;  as,  transnatare  fiumen  ; 
circumvenire  hostem  ;  adire  regem ,  provinciam  ;  sulbire  jugum  ;  obire  mortem  ;  inire 
foedus ,  proelium. — Ea  fama  forum  et  urbem  pervasit.  Nos  undigue  fata  circumstant. 
Tanais  Europam  et  Asiam  mediae  interfluit. 


Note  4.— Some  intransitive  verbs  take  an  accusative  of  kindred  signification,  but 
mostly  in  connection  with  an  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun  ;  as,  pugnam  pugnan 
acerrimam  /  somnium  mirum  somniare ;  servire  servitutem  turqnssimam  /  jusjurandum 
jurare  verissimum  ;  vitam  vivere  miserrimam  ;  suum  gaudium  gaudere  ;  hanc  pugnam 
pugnare ;  haze  vota  vovere ,  etc. 

Note  5. — Here  should  also  be  noticed  the  verb  appellere ,  “to  land”  (properly  “  to 
drive  towards”).  This  verb  is  in  the  classical  prose  thus  construed :  Apellimvs  or  navem 
appellimus ,  “we  land.”  Pass.,  Apellimur  or  nave  appellimur  e.  g.  ad  Africam ,  ad 
Italian ,  ad  Delum ,  ad  Syracusas  (more  rarely  in  Africam ,  etc.).  We  find  also  Navis 
appellitur  and  ventus  ( nauta )  navem  'appellit. — Later  writers  sometimes  use  appellen 
instead  of  appelli  with  the  simple  accusative;  as,  Puteolos  nave  appulit.  Triremix 
terram  appulit.  Alexandrina  navis  Dertosam  appulit. 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


157 


Urbem  Romani  vocat. 

§  111. — 2.  Verbs  that  take  in  the  Passive  two  nominatives  (§  154), 
take  in  the  Active  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  object,  the  other  of  the 
predicate, — the  former  answering  to  the  question  whom  or  what ,  the 
latter  to  the  question  what  placed  after  the  verb;  as,  “He  called  the 
city  Rome.” — Such  verbs  are  those  signifying 

“  to  call  or  name,”  as  dico ,  nomino ,  voco ,  appello ,  nuncupo , 
saluto  ’ 

“  to  choose  or  make,”  as  creo,  deligo ,  designo ,  renuntio ,  declaro , 
constituo,  facio,  reddo  ; 

“to  deem  or  reckon,”  as  credo,  haheo,  judico,  arhitror , 
timo,  numero ,  agnosco ,  reperio ,  invenio. 

Omnes  perturbationes  animi  morbos  philosophi  appellamt.  Ciceronem 
universus  populus  Consulem  declaravit.  Socrates  totius  mundi  se  inc.o- 
lam  et  civem  arbitrabatur S  Senatus  Antonium  hostem  judicavit .’ 
Vehementer  errant  qui  corporis  voluptatem  summum  bonum  existimant. 
Gupiditas  et  avaritia  homines  ccecos  reddit. 

Note  1. — The  verbs  habere ,  ducere ,  and  putare,  are  sometimes  followed  by  pro  with 
the  ablative,  or  by  loco,  (in)  numero  with  the  genitive  ;  as,  Quid  stultius  quam  incerta 
pro  certis  habere  ?  Pollionem  vetustissimorum  familiarium  loco  habuit. — Thus  aliquid 
pro  nihilo  putare,  aliquem  in  hostium  numero  habere,  etc. 

Note  2. — To  this  rule  also  belong  (a)  the  verbs  hdbeo,  accipio ,  sumo ,  adjungo ,  do, 
tribuo,  addo,  and  accio ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  have,”  “to  summon,”  “  to  take  or  give 
some  one  as  ....  (b)  the  expressions  se prcestare,  se prcebere,  to  prove  or  show  one’s 

self  as  ;  and  (c)  the  phrase  certiorem  aliquem  facere  de  aliqua  re  or  alioujus  rei,  “  to 

inform  some  one  of _ ” — E.  g.,  “I  shall  accompany  you  Me  tibi  comitem  adjuvgam. 

Tiberius  Druso  Sejanum  dedit  adjutorem.  Philippus  Aristoielem  Alexandro  jilio  doc¬ 
tor  em  accivit. — Bene  de  me  meritis  gratum  me  proebeo.  Antistius  se prcestitil  acerrimum 
propugnatorem  libertatis.  Tu  me  de  tuis  rebus  velim  quam  familiarissime  certiorem 
facias.  Faciam  te  consilii  nostri  certiorem. 

Doceo  pueros  Crammaticam. 

g  172. — 3.  The  verbs  doceo  and  edoceo,  I  teach  ;  dedoceo,  I  unteach  ; 
celo,  I  conceal  from  ;  and  those  signifying  to  entreat,  demand,  and 
inquire,  as  oro,  rogo,  precor /  posco ,  reposco,  fiagito ;  interrogo ,  and  per- 


])  Socrates  thought  (thought  whom? — )  himself  (thought  himself  what? — )  an 
inhabitant,  etc.  2)  The  Senate  declared  (declared  whom  ? — )  Antony  (declared  him. 
what )  an  enemy. 


15S 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


coni  or,  take  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  the  other  of  the  thing; 
as,  “  I  teach  the  boys  Grammar.” 

Ciceronem  Minerva  onines  artes  edocuit.  Mon  te  celavi  ' sermonem 
Ampii.  Verves  parenles  pretiurn  pro  sepultura  liberorum  poscebat. 
Legati  Pmnenscs  ad  Verrem  adennt  eumque  simulacrum  Cereris  repos - 
cunt. — Me  primum  sententiam  rogavit.  Pusionem  quondam  Socrates 
apud  Platonem  interrogat  qucedam  geometrica. 

Note  1. — When  these  verbs  are  made  passive,  the  acc.  of  the  person  becomes  the 
nominative,  but  the  accusative  of  the  thing  is  retained  ;  as,  Latinoe  Legiones  militiam 
Romanam  edoctce  snnt.  Id  ego  diu  celabar.  Primus  sententiam  rogatus  sum.  Segetes 
alimentaque  debita  dives  poscebatur  humus. 

Note  2. — With  celare  and  the  verbs  of  entertaining,  demanding,  and  in¬ 
quiring,  the  accusative  of  the  thing  is  most  common,  when  it  is  expressed  by  the 
neuter  of  an  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun.  E.  g.,  “  What  do  you  ask  me  for  ?” 
Quid  me  rogas  ? — Hoe  te  vehementer  rogo.  Nihil  aliud  vos  oro  atque  obsecro.  Ilis  (or 
ad  hcec)  quce  te  interrogo  responds,  llcec  te  celare  nolui. 

Note  3. — The  verbs  of  demanding,  instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  person,  fre¬ 
quently  take  the  ablative  with  ab.  In  the  passive  construction  the  accusative  of  the 
thing  is  then  changed  into  the  nominative. — E.  g.,  Quid  studia ,  quid  artes  a  teflagitent , 
tu  videbis.  A  me  annona  jlagitabatur.  Nunc  a  te  illud  primum  rogabo ,  ne  quid  invitus 
mea  causa  'facias.  Quce  deprecatus  sum  a  diis  immortalibus  ut  ea  res  mihi  Populoque 
Romano  bene  atque  feliciter  eveniret ,  eadem  precor  ab  iisdem  diis  immortalibus,  ut 
vestrce  mentes  atque  sentential  cum  Populi  Romani  voluntate  svjf ragiisque  conscntiant. 

The  ablative  of  the  person  with  ab  stands  regularly  with  peto,  exigo,  and  postulo  • 
as,  Athenienses  auxilium  a  Lacedcemoniis  petierunt.  Quo  fcicilius  id  a  te  exigam,  quod 
(a  te)  peto ,  nihil  tibi  a  me  postulanti  recusabo. 

Note  4. — The  verbs  of  inquiring,  instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing,  often 
take  the  ablative  with  de.  This  is  not  rarely  the  case,  also,  with  celo ,  especially  in  the 
Passive. — E.  g.,  Visne  ego  te  vicissim  iisdem  de  rebus  Latine  interrogem  ?  Ego  ilium  de 
sue  regno,  ille  me  de  nostra  republica  percontatus  est. — De  insidiis  celare  te  nolui. 
Maximis  de  rebus  afratre  celatus  sum.  Non  est  profecto  de  illo  veneno  celata  mater. 

The  verbs  qucero  and  sciscitor ,  and  occasionally  also  percenter ,  are  construed  all- 
quid  ex  (ab,  de)  aliquo  ;  as,  “  Atticus  was  asked  his  opinion Sententiam  ex  Attico 
sciscitabantur  (§  92).  Dion  a  medicis  queasivit  quomodo  se  haberet  Dionysius.  Qvcesi- 
vit  de  Zen  one  quid  f  uturum  esset.  Non  qucero  abs  te  quare  patrem  Sex.  Roscius 
occiderit. 

Note  5. — Doceo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  inform,”  takes  the  ablative  of  the  thing  with 
de ;  as,  Sulla  de  his  rebus  docetur.  De  itinere  hostium  senatum  edocet. 

In  the  phrases  aliquem  docere  Ji dibus ,  tibiis,  armis ,  supply  can'ere  and  uti  respco 
tively  ;  as,  Docebantur  (or  discebant)  fidibus  antiqui ,  i.  e.,fidibus  canere. 


Music  a  me  juvat. 

§  H3.— :4.  The  impersonals  decet,  it  becomes;  dedccet ,  it  does  not 
become  ;  j  iz at,  ddectat ,  it  pleases,  delights  ;  fugit ,  fallit,  preeterit ,  it 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ABLATIVE. 


159 


escapes  (§  12),  take  the  accusative  of  the  person  whom  any  thing 
becomes,  delights,  escapes, — and  the  nominative  of  the  thing  which 
becomes,  delights,  or  escapes  ;  as,  “  I  delight  in  music,”  or  “  Music 
delights  me.” 

Modestia  pueros  decet ,  garrulitas  dedecet.  Parvuin  parva  decent. 
Candida  pax  homines ,  trux  decet  ira  /eras.  Multum  ista  me  sapiential 
fama  clelectat.  Hominem  amentem  hoc  fugit.  Qais  sst  quern  nulla 
res  fugiat  ? 

Note  1. — The  nominative  of  the  thing  is  often  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive,  an  Acc.  <v 
Inf.,  or  a  clause  with  the  Subjunctive;  as,  Oratorem  irasci  minime  decet.  Decet  vere- 
cundum  esse  adolescentem.  Te  Jiilari  animo  esse  one  valde  jurat.  De  Ocesare  fugerat  me 
(I  had  forgotten)  ad  te  scrihere.  Non  me  p-rceterit  (I  know  well)  Gallos  fama  belli 
prcestare.  Quid  optimum  sit ,  neminem  f  ugit  (every  one  knows),  lllud  alterum  quam 
sit  difficile  non  te  fugit ,  nec  vero  Gcesarem fefellit. 

Note  2. — The  phrase  latet  me  (rarely  mihi ),  “it  is  concealed  from,  or  unknown  to 
me,”  is  found  only  in  poetry  and  in  Post- Augustan  prose  writers ;  as,  IJcec  res  Ran - 
nibalem  non  diu  latuit. 

The  verbs  spectare ,  attinere ,  and  periinere ,  in  the  sense  of  “  it  regards,  concerns, 
belongs  to,”  take  the  accusative  with  ad  ;  as,  Non  est  dubium  ad  quern  suspicio  male - 
ficii pertineat.  Quoniam  de  eo  genere  beneficiorum  dictum  est,  quae  ad  singulos  spectant , 
deinceps  de  iis  quae  ad  universos ,  quceque  ad  rempublicam  pertinent ,  disputandum  est. 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ABLATIVE. 

Mihi  libris  opus  est,  or  Mihi  libri  opus  sunt. 

§  114. — 1.  Opus  est ,  “  there  is  need,”  governs  the  dative  of  the  person 
who  needs,  and  the  ablative  or  nominative  of  the  thing  which  is  needed ; 
as,  “  I  need  books.” 

Auctoritate  tua  nobis  opus  est.  Quantum,  argenti  op7is  est  tibi  ? 
Corpori  cibo  et  p>otione  opus  est.  Exempla  permulta  nobis  opus  sunt, 
fffon  opus  est  tibi  amico ,  de  cujus  benevolentia  dubites.  Ubi  rerum  tes- 
timonia  adsunt,  quid  opus  est  verbis?  Atticus  quee  amicis  suis  opus 
fuerant ,  omnia  ex  sua  re  familiari  dedit. 

Note  1. — Whenever  the  thing  needed  is  put  in  the  ablative,  opus  est  is  construed 
impersonally;  but  when  it  is  put  in  the  nominative,  the  verb  sum  is  to  agree  with  it 
accordingly ;  as,  Mihi  libris  opus  est  or  mihi  libri  opus  sunt.  Quid  tibi  divitiis  opus 
est,  or  quid  tibi  divitiat,  opus  sunt  ?  Dux  or  duce  adolescentibus  opus  est. 

The  nominative  of  the  thing  is  most  frequently  used  with  the  neuters  of  adjectives 
and  adjective  pronouns. 

Note  2. — When  the  thing  needed  is  expressed  by  a  verb,  either  the  Infinitive 
the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  or  ut  with  the  Subj.,  or  the  Supine  in  u,  or  the  ablative  of  the  Perf. 


1G0 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ABLATIVE. 


Part,  may  be  used.  E.  g.,  Nihil  opus  est  pluribus  verbis  commemorart.  Nunc  opus 
est  te  animo  valere ,  ut  corpore  possis.  Nunc  tibi  opus  est  cuprum  ut  simules.  Quoad 
scitu  opus  est.  Opus  fuit  Hirtio  conventoP  Facto ,  non  consulto ,  in  tali  periculo 
opus  est. 

Abundat  divitiis. 

§  1*75. — 2.  The  verbs  of  abounding,  wanting ,  and  depriving ,  such  as 
abundo ,  redundo,  affiuo,  scateo  ;  careo ,  egeo ,  indigeo  ;  orbo,  privo ,  spolio, 
nudo,  fraudo,  etc.  govern  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  in  which  one  abounds, 
which  one  wants,  of  which  one  is  deprived  ;  as,  “  He  abounds  in  ^iches.,, 

Antiochia  quondam  eruditissimis  hominibus  affluebat.  Quid  cons i Hi 
offer  re  potest ,  qui  ipse  eget  consilio  ?  Quam  paucis ,  qua  parvis  rebus 
eget  natura !  Miserum  est  carere  consuetudine  arnicorum.  Respublica 
multis  claris  viris  est  orbata.  Democritus  oculis  se  privasse  dicitur. 
Arbores  nudantur  foliis.  Grave  est  spoliari  fortunis.  Milites  mercede 
fraudati  sunt. 


Note  1. — Fgeo  is  sometimes,  an indigeo  often,  construed  with,  the  genitive;  as, 
Gravitas  morbi  facit  ut  medicines,  egeamus.  Deus  nullius  rei  incliget. — Also  with  com- 
pleo  and  impleo  the  genitive  is  sometimes  found  instead  of  the  ablative. — E.  g., 
Convivium  vicinorum  quotidie  compleo  ; — career  jam  mercatorum  completes, — ollam 
denariorum  implere. 

Note  2. — Pluit ,  <£it  rains,”  is  frequently  construed  with  such  ablatives  as  lapidibus , 
lapide ,  lade ,  came ,  terra ,  sanguine;  e.  g.,  Nuntiatum  regi  patribusque  est ,  in  monte 
Albano  lapidibus  pluisse. — But  the  accusative  is  found  also ;  as,  Sanguinem  pluisse 
Senatui  nuntiatum  est. 

Hoc  me  libera  metu. 

§  116. — 3.  The  verbs  of  freeing  and  removing;  keeping  off \  prevent¬ 
ing ,  and  desisting ,  as  laxo ,  libero ,  solvo ,  expedio ;  moveo ,  amoveo,  demoveo, 
pello ,  depello ,  expello ,  deturbo ,  dejicio ,  ejicio  ;  arceo,  absterreo ,  deterreo, 
prohibeo ,  abslineo,  decedo ,  desisto ,  etc. — govern  the  ablative  of  the  thing 
from  which  one  is  freed,  removed,  or  prevented, — either  with  or  without 
the  prepositions  e?#,  :  but  when  separation  from  a  person  is 

expressed,  the  preposition  ab  is  regularly  used.  E.  g.,  u  Eree  me  from 
this  fear.” 

Te  a  quartana  liberatum  gaudeo.  Timoleon  Dionysium  iota  Sicilia 
depulit.  Amicitia  nullo  loco  excluditur.  Hannibal  ex  Africa  deccdcre 
coactus  est.  Helvetii  suis  sedibus  pulsi  sunt.  Ilostem  aditu  arcent. 


J)  to  visit,  or  to  speak  to. 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ABLATIVE. 


101 


Tu,  Jupiter ,  liunc  a  tuis  arts ,  a  vita  fortunisque  civium  arcebis.  Fab  a 
Pytkagorcei  abstinuerunt.  Egredere  ex  urbe ,  Catilina ,  libera  rempubli- 
cam  metu. 

'  Note  1. — Levare ,  exonerare,  and  exsolvere ,  “to  free,”  and  supersedere,  “to  abstain 
from,”  “  to  omit,”  take  the  ablative  without  preposition  ;  as,  Leva  me  hoc  onere . 
Caesar  prcdio  supersedere  statuit. 

Abdicare,  “  to  resign,”  takes  either  the  accusative  alone,  or  the  ablative  witli  the 
accusative  of  a  personal  pronoun  ;  as,  Magistratum  ( dictaturam ,  etc.)  abdicavit ,  or 
Magistrate,  ( didatura ,  etc.)  56  abdicavit .  Abdico  prceturam,  or  me  prcetura. 

Note  2. — The  verbs  signifying  “to  differ”  and  “to  distinguish,”  as  discerno , 
secerno ,  distinguo ,  differo ,  discrepo ,  dissentio ,  dissideo ,  cafeto,  abhorreo ,  and  also  alieno 
and  abalieno ,  are  generally  construed  with  aZ> ;  as,  opinione  Pompeius  valde 

abhorruit. 

The  verbs  of  differing  are  construed,  also,  with  the  dative,  though  more  rarely 
in  prose  than  in  poetry,  as  s/.&i  singuli  discrepabant. — With  dissentio,  dissideo , 
discrepo ,  and  especially  discordo,  the  ablative  with  cum  is  also  found. 

Note  3. — The  verbs  egredi  and  excedere ,  in  the  sense  of  “to  transgress,”  are  con¬ 
strued  with  the  accusative,  as  excedere  modum,  fines,  etc. 


Fungor  officio. 

§  111. — 4.  The  ablative  stands  with  the  deponent  verbs  wfor,  fruor, 
fungor  (and  their  compounds)  ;  potior ,  dignor ,  vescor  ;  lector ,  glorior , 
m'for  ;  as,  “  I  discharge  my  duty.” 

utor,  3.  to  potior,  4.  to  get,  obtain ,  Isetor,  1.  to  rejoice  at, 

fruor,  3.  to  enjoy,  dignor,  1.  to  deem  worthy,  glorior,  1.  to  0/) 

fungor,  3.  to  discharge,  vescor,  3.  to  eat,  feed  on,  nitor,  3.  to  rely  upon. 

Quousque  tandem,  Catilina ,  abutere  patientia  nostra  ?  Hannibal 
multis  variisque  perfunctus  laboribus  anno  acquievit  septua.gesimo. 
Semiramis  regno  Assyriorum  potita  est.  Numidce  lade  et  ferina  came 
vescebantur.  Nulla  re  turn  Icetari  soleo  quam  meorum  ojfciorum  con- 
scientia.  Tuo  consilio  et  auctoritate  nitor. 

Note  1. —  TJtor  is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  “  to  have,”  especially  when  the 
ablative  is  accompanied  by  a  noun  or  an  adjective  ;  as,  “  Se8  what  an  equitable 
man  you  will  have  (find)  in  me Hie  vide  quam  me  sis  usurus  cequo.  Libertas 
non  in  eo  est  ut  justo  utamur  domino ,  sed  ut  nullo.  Alexander  Aristotele  usus 
est  prceceptore. 

Potior  is  sometimes  construed  with  the  genitive,  especially  the  genitive 
rerum,  when  it  means  “  to  obtain  supreme  power.”  E.  g.,  Dion  totius  ejus 
partis  Sicilice  potitus  est,  quee  sub  Dionysii  potentate  fuerat.  Nemini  in  opinio 
nem  veniebat,  Antonium  rerum  potiturum. 

Dignor  is  used  both  actively  and  passively,  as  dignari  aliquem  honore  and 

u 


162 


VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ABLATIVE. 


ab  aliquo  honore,  “to  deem,  or  to  be  deemed  worthy  of  honor.” — Cicero  uses  it 
mostly  in  a  passive  sense. 

Glorior  and  lector  are  sometimes  construed  with  de,  or  the  accusative  of  a 
neuter  pronoun  (§  170,  2) ;  as,  Lent  or  de  tuo  triumpho.  Quis  de  vita  misera 
potest  gloriari?  Eqiddem  idem  gloriari  posse  vellem.  TJtrumque  Icetor. — 
Gloriari ,  “  to  glory  in,”  takes  the  ablative  with  in,  as  In  virtute  recte 
gloriamur. 

Niior  takes  sometimes  the  ablative  with  in;  as.  In  vita  Pompeii  nitebatur 
salus  civitatis. — In  the  sense  of  “to  strive  after,”  it  takes  the  accusative  with  in 
or  ad ;  as,  Nitimur  in  vetitum  semper  cupimusque  negata.  Optimi  cujusque 
animus  maxima  ad  immortalitatem  glorice  nititur. 

Note  2. — To  these  deponents  may  also  be  added  the  verb  metior ,  “  to  measure, 
judge,  estimate  by  .... as,  Annum,  soils  reditu  metimur.  Homines  queestu  ac  volup- 
tate  omnia  metiuntur  (=  judicant,  ponderant). 


Fame  laboro. 

§  118. — 5.  The  ablative  stands  with  the  verbs  ga.udeo ,  doleo — valech, 
laboro — fido ,  con/ido — sto,  consto — vivo,  floreo,  and  officio  ;  as,  “I  suffer 
from  hunger.” 

Javenis  gaudet  equis.1  Duobus  vitiis  diversis ,  avaritid  et  luxuria, 
civitas  laborat.  Britarmi  lade  et  came  vivuntd  Pericles  florebat  omni 
genere  virtutis.  Conditionibus  stare  oportet.  Plurimum  inter  eos  Bello- 
vdei  et  virtute  et  audoritate  et  hominum  numero  valent.3  Delicto  dolere , 
corredione  gaudere 4  nos  oportet. 

Dolere,  “to  grieve  for as,  laude  aliena,  injuriis  civitatis,  clade  accepta. — We 
also  find  dolere  de  {ex)  aliqua  re. — In  the  sense  of  “to  lament,”  “to  deplore,”  it 
takes  the  accusative,  as  dolere  xicem,  casum,  injurias,  mortem  alicujus. — When 
used  in  the  sense  of  “to  pain,”  we  say:  dens,  caput,  pes  {mild)  dolet ;  dentes, 
oculi,  latera  dolent,  “I  have  the  tooth-ache,”  etc. 

Valere,  “to  be  strong,”  “to  have  influence,”  “to  prevail;”  as,  corpora,  pedi- 
bus,  stornaclio, — gratia,  opibus,  armis,  audoritate. 

Laborare,  “  to  suffer  from,”  “  to  labor  under ;”  as,  morbo,  crudelitate  domes- 
tica,  odio  apud  hostes  (to  be  hated),  contemptu  inter  socios, — and  frequently  ex 
aliqua  re,  as  ex  pedibus,  ex  intestinis,  ex  renibus,  ex  cere  alieno,5  ex  invidia,— 
also,  a  re  frumentaria,  “to  be  in  difficulty  about  supplies.” 

Eidere  and  confidere,  “  to  trust,  confide  in,”  as  alicujus  prudentia  et  consilio, 
corporis  firmitate,  natura  loci,  and  the  like. — They  are  also  construed  with  the 
dative,  especially  the  dative  of  the  thing,  more  rarely  that  of  the  person.-- 
Biffido  always  takes  the  dative. 

Stare,  “to  adhere  or  stand  to,”  “to  keep,”  “to  persist  in,”  as  promissis, 


x)  delights  in.  3)  live  upon.  s)  aro  foremost  in.  *)  to  rejoice  at.  6)  to  be  deep  in 
debt. 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


163 


foidere,  jurejurando,  judicio  suo,  opinione  or  decreto  alicujus ;  also,  in  fide. — 
Stat  mihi  sententia  means  “  I  am  determined.” 

Gonstare,  “  to  consist  of;”  as,  tota  oratio  longioribus  membris,brevioribus  peri- 
odis  constat ; — but  it  more  commonly  takes  the  ablative  with  ex,  as  homo  ex 
animo  constat  et  cor  pore. 

Florere,  “  to  be  eminent,  renowned,  distinguished as,  rerum  gestarum 
gloria,  lepore  dicendi,  ingenii  laude,  justitice  famd,  nobilitate  discipulorum. — • 
Florere  gratia  means  “  to  be  liked.” 

A fiicere,  “  to  affect  some  one  with  something,”  is  construed  aliquem  aliqua 
re  as,  afiicere  aliquem  laude,  to  praise  some  one ;  honore,  to  honor ;  gaudio, 
to  gladden;  beneficio ,  to  benefit;  voluptate,  to  delight;  prcemio,  to  reward'; 
poena,  to  punish ;  injuria,  to  injure  ;  ignominia,  to  disgrace ;  dolor e,  to  grieve ; 
exilio,  to  banish  ;  cruciatibus,  to  torment ;  morte,  to  kill ;  sepidtura,  to  bury ; — 
and  passively,  ajfici  morbo,  to  fall  sick ;  voluptate,  Icetitia,  to  be  delighted ;  laude, 
to  be  praised ;  admiratione,  to  be  admired,  etc. 

E.  g.,  Stadium  tuum  curaque  de  salute  mea  nova  me  voluptate  affecit.  Quid 
dbsurdius  quam  res  deformes  divino  honore  afiicere? — Gravi  oculorum  morbo 
Hannibal  afiectus  est.  Admiratione  afificiuntur  ii  qui  anteeunt  ceteros  virtute. 


II.  Tenses  of  Yerbs. 


§  119. — The  tenses  are  divided  into  principal  and  historical  tenses. 


Principal : 

Pres,  ago,  I  do, 

Perf.  egi,  I  have  done, 
Fut.  agam,  I  shall  do. 


Historical : 

Impf.  agebam,  I  was  doing , 
Perf.  egi,  I  did, 

Plop,  egeram,  I  had  done. 


Present  and  Imperfect. 


§  180. — The  Present  represents  an  action  as  going  on  at  the  time 
present  to  the  speaker;  as,  “I  am  writing,”  Scribo. —  Omne  animal  se 
ipsum  diligit.  HEgyptum  Nilus  irrigat.  Plato  aliter  hac  de  re  jwdicai 
(i.  e.,  in  his  works). 


Note  1. — With  jam  diu,  jam  pridem,  jam  dudum ,  an  action  that  has  been  going  on 
for  some  time  and  is  still  going  on,  is  often  expressed  by  the  Present,  where  in 
English  the  Perfect  is  used  ;  as,  “  During  so  many  years  I  have  already  been  waging 
war;”  Tot  jam  annos  bella  gero.  Annum  jam  audis  Gratippum.  Cupio  equidem  etjam 
pridem  cupio  (and  I  have  long  been  desiring)  Alexandriam  reliquarnque  SEgyptum 
vise-re. 

Note  2. — In  rnimated  narrative,  the  Present  is  often  used  instead  of  the  Perfect,  to 
represent  a  past  action  or  event  as  present.  It  is  then  called  the  historical 
Present.  E.  g.,  Pisidas  resistentes  Datames  invadit ,  primo  impetu  pell  it ,  fvgientes 
persequitur ,  mulios  interficit ,  castra  hostium  capit.  Ccesar  Dumnorigem  ad  se  vocat, 


164 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


fratrem  adhibet ;  qvce  in  eo  reprehended ,  ostendit ;  qvce  ipse  intelligat ,  quee  civitas 
queratur,  proponit ;  monet  ut  in  reliquum  tempus  omnes  suspiciones  mtet ;  pnzterila  se 
condonare  dicit ,  etc. 

§  181. — The  Imperfect  represents  a  past  action  or  event  as  continu¬ 
ing*  and  contemporary  with  some  other  past  action  (or  time),  either 
expressed  or  to  be  supplied  by  the  mind.  E.  g.,  “  Whilst  thou  wast 
playing,  I  was  writing  Dum  tu  ludebas.  ego  scribebam.  Quum 
scribebam  in  expectatione  erant  omnia.  Principio  rerum  imperium  penes 
reges  erat.1 

Note  1.  — The  Im  perfect  is  used,  also,  to  express  repeated  andcustomary  actions ; 
as,  An  seres  Romce  publice  alebantur  in  Capitolio.  Socrates  dicelat  or  dicere  solebat  ,a  Pan- 
sanias  apparatu  regio  utebatur ,  epulabatur  luxuriose ,  superbe  respondebat ,  et  crudeliter 
imperabat.  Verves  simul  atque  in  oppidum  quodpiam  venerat ,  immittebantur  homines , 
qui  investigabant  et  perscrutabantur  omnia. 

Note  2. — The  Imperfect  is  invariably  used,  where  in  English  the  compound  tense 
“I  was  reading,”  “  he  was  playing,”  “  they  were  singing,”  etc.,  is  employed ;  e.  g., 
“  I  was  accidentally  going  along  the  via  sacra ^  Ibam  forte  via  sacra. — Sometimes  it 
denotes  merely  the  beginning  of  an  action, — an  action  intended  or  attempted,  but  not 
carried  into  full  effect.  It  is  then  almost  equivalent  to  the  past  of  the  active  peri¬ 
phrastic  conjugation.  E.  g.,  “  Porscna  attempted  to  frighten  him;”  Porsena  eum 
terrebat.  Rum  dubitas  id  me  imperante facere  quod  jam  tva  sponte  faciebas  (or  fadurvs 
eras)  ?  Piso  abire  se  et  cedere  urbe  testabatur  et  simul  curiam  relinquebat  (i.  e.,  relinquere 
tentabat). 

Note  3. — In  the  epistolary  style,  the  Imperfect  is  frequently  employed  instead  of 
the  Present,  when  the  writer  speaks  ©f  actions  and  events  which,  though  present  at 
the  time  he  writes,  are  past  at  the  moment  the  letter  is  received.  He,  therefore,  in 
writing,  uses  the  same  terms  he  would  employ  if  he  were  to  arrive  himself  in  place 
of  the  letter.  E.  g.,  “  This  is  already  the  7th  day  that  we  are  detained  in  Corfu 
Jam  septimum  diem  Corcyrce  tenebamur. — “I  write  you  this  at  midnight ;”  Hcec  ad  te 
scribebam  media  node.  Plabc-s  totum  reipublicce  statum ,  qui  qvidem  turn  erat  cum  has 
litteras  dabam.  Summa  cura  expedabam  adventum  Menandri.  quern  ad  te  miseram. 
Nihil  habebam  quod  soriberem  :  neque  enirn  novi  quidquam  audieram  et  ad  tuas  omnes 
rescripseram  pridie. 

In  translating  such  passages,  the  Latin  Imperfect  must  be  rendered  by  the 
English  Present,  and  the  Latin  Pluperfect  by  the  English  Perfect. 

“  To-day,”  in  the  epistolary  style,  is  often  expressed  by  eo  ipso  die  cum  hcec  scribe¬ 
bam  ; — “yesterday,”  by  pridie  ejus  diei  quo  hcec  scribebam ; — and  “to-morrow,”  by 
postridie  ejus  diei  qui  erat  turn  futures  cum  hcec  scribebam. 


Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 

§  182. — The  Perfect  Indicative  is  used  both  as  a  principal  and  an 
historical  tense. 


J)  The  time  referred  to  is  implied  in  principio.  a)  the  Perfect  solitus  est  would 
represent  the  habit  as  a  merely  historical  fact. 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


165 


As  a  principal  tense,  the  Perfect  Ind.  corresponds  to  the  English 
Perfect  with  “have,”  and  represents  an  action  or  event  as  just  com¬ 
pleted  at  the  present  time,  or  existing  to  the  present  in  its  results. 
E.  g.,  “He  is  gone,  he  has  left,  he  has  escaped,  he  has  rushed  out;” 
Abiit ,  excessit,  evasit ,  erupit. 

As  an  historical  tense,  the  Perfect  Ind.  corresponds  to  the  Past 
English  forms  I  came ,  I  saw,  I  wrote ,  I  went ,  etc.,  and  represents  a  past 
action  or  event  absolutely,  without  reference  either  to  the  present  time, 
or  to  another  past  action ;  as,  Hannibal  Ilispaniam  bello  subegit. 
Alexander  Baby  lone  decessit. 

Note  1. — The  historical  Perfect  goes  sometimes  with  the  Imperfect:  the 
former  denoting  a  merely  historical  fact ;  the  latter,  a  continuing,  customary,  or 
repeated  action;  as,  “  Hortensius  used  to  speak  better  than  he  wrot Qp  Ilortensius 
dicebat  melius  quam  serif  sit.  PEdui  se  in  oppida  receperunt  murisque  se  tenebant.  In 
Grcecia  musici  fioruerunt  discebantque  (used  to  learn)  id  omnes.  Ita  enim  censebat , 
itaque  disseruit  (on  a  particular  occasion). 

Note  2. — The  conjunctions  vbi ,  ut ,  ut  primum,  simul  ac ,  postquam ,  and  posteaquam, 
usually  go  with  the  Perfect,  when  two  actions  are  spoken  of  as  following  each  other  in 
immediate  succession.  In  English,  the  Pluperfect  is  then  commonly  used.  E.  g., 
Hannibal  ubi  Garthaginem  rediit ,  Prcdor  est  fadus.  Hostium  exercitus  postquam 
intrasse  Romanos  vidit  saltum ,  repente  cum  clamore  incautus  invadit. — But,  when  a 
considerable  or  definite  space  of  time  intervenes,  or  when  actions  of  repeated  occur¬ 
rence  are  spoken  of,  the  Pluperfect  must  be  used  ;  as,  Hannibal  anno  tertio  postquam 
domo  profugerat ,  in  Africam  venit.  Alcibiades  simul  ac  se  remiserat ,  intemperans 
reperiebatur. 

Note  3. — The  Latin  Perfect  sometimes  implies  the  meaning  of  euro  or  jubeo ,  “  to 
order,”  or  “  to  have;”  as,  Manlius  securi  jilium  percussit  (for  percuti  jussit  or  per- 
cutiendum  curavit ,  “  he  had  him  put  to  death”).  Verres  ad  palum  alligavit  piratas 
(u  he  had  them  tied  to  . . . .”).  Cimon  complures  pauperes  mortuos  suo  sumptu  extulit 
(==  efferri  jussit  or  efferendos  curavit). 

Note  4. — The  Perfect  (or  Imperfect)  Indie.,  both  simple  and  periphrastic,  is  some¬ 
times  used  in  hypothetical  sentences,  instead  of  the  Plupf.  Subj.  (§  189,  3),  to  denote 
what  would  have  happened,  had  not  some  obstacle  intervened ;  as,  Deleri  totus 
exercitus  potuit  (==  potuisset ),  si  f  ugientes  persecuti  vidores  esseni.  Vincebai  (==  vi- 
cisset)  paucitas  militum ,  ni  Veiens  exercitus  in  verticem  collis  evasisset.  Hannibal 
nisi fugae  speciem  abeundo  timuisset,  Galliam  repetiturus.fuit  or  erat  (=  repetiisset) . 

§  183. — The  Pluperfect  represents  a  past  action  as  completed  before 
another  past  action ;  as,  Pausanias  eodem  loco  sepultus  est,  ubi  vitam 
posuerat.  Quum  in  Lyciam  venissemus,  naves  onerarias  dominis 
restituimus. 

Future  and  Fut.-Perfect. 

§  184. — The  Future  represents  an  action  or  event  as  future  in  rela¬ 
tion  to  the  present  time  of  the  speaker;  as,  Dicam  si  potero  Latins 


[. 


166  USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 

Rursus  quum  procul  abesse  nos  credes ,  videbis  in  tnis  castris.  Si  mik 
probabis  ea  quae  dices,  libenter  cissentiard 

Note. — The  English  Present  after  if,  when ,  as  long  as,  or  a  relative, — is  generally- 
translated  by  the  Future,  when  the  leading  clause  contains  a  future  tense,  an  Impera¬ 
tive,  or  a  Subjunctive  used  imperatively.  E.  g.,  “I  shall  do  it,  if  I  can;”  Faciam 
si  potero. — “  I  shall  be  as  you  wish  me  to  be  JJt  voles  me  esse ,  ita  ero. — Naturam  si 
tequemur  ducem ,  nunquam  aberrabimus.  Qui  adipisci  veram  gloriam  volet ,  furgatur 
(■—, fungitor)  justitiaz  officiis.  Dum  erimus  in  t  err  is  (as  long  as  we  are  on  earth)  per- 
fecta  felicitate  nonfruemur. 


§  185. — The  Future-Perfect  represents  a  future  action  or  event  as 
completed  at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  future  action  or  event ; 
as,  “  When  I  (shall  have)  come  thither,  I  shall  explain  the  matter  to 
you  Quum  istuc  venero ,  rem  tibi  exponam.  Cum  coenavero,  profciscar. 
Quid  si  te  rogavero ,  nonne  respondebis  ? 

Note  1. — As  the  English  Present  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  Future,  so  is  the 
English  Present  (Perfect  or  Future)  translated  by  the  Fut.-Perfect,  when  the  action 
expressed  by  the  verb  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  completed  before  the  action  relat¬ 
ing  to  it  takes  place;  as,  ‘‘When  I  come  to  home,  I  will  write  to  you  what  I  shall 
observe  Roman  cum  venero ,  quce  perspexero ,  scribam  ad  te.  Tit  sementem  feceris  (as 
you  sow),  ita  metes.  A  one  quum  paullum  otii  nacti  ei'imus ,  uberiores  litteo-as  expectato. 
Tit  primum  librum  confecero  (as  soon  as  I  have  finished)  ad  vos  xeniam.— Thus  we 
say  :  si  potuero,  si  volueods,  si placuerit,  si  otiuon  habuero,  etc. 

But,  when  a  future  event  depends  on  some  present  circumstance  or  resolution,  the 
Present  is  used  after  si,  though  in  connection  with  a  future  tense  ;  e.  g.,  Si  vincimus , 
omnia  nobis  tuta  patebunt.  Perficietur  belluon  si  non  urgemus  obsessos. — Thus,  Fac  si 
vis  ;  defende  si  potes,  and  the  like. 

j 

!  Note  2. — The  Future-Perfect  is  often  used,  in  leading  clauses,  to  denote  the 
rapidity  with  which  a  future  action  will  be  completed,  and  to  express  with  emphasis 
what  otherwise  would  be  expressed  by  the  simple  Future.  E.  g.,  “If  you  abandon 
me,  I  am  lost;”  Si  me  deseris,  periero.  Too  invita  senes,  ego  accivero  pueros.  Si 
pergis,  abiero.  Quae  fuerit  causa ,  max  videro.  Recte  secusve,  alias  viderionvs.  Non 
imprudenter  feceris,  si  hoc  a  me  celaods.  Qvi  Antonium  oppresserit,  bellum  corfecerit. 
Tolle  hanc  conditionem  (=  si  banc  conditionem  tollis),  luctum  sustuleris ,2 

§  186.- — The  Future  Subjunctive,  both  in  the  Active  and  Passive 
Voices,  has  no  form  of  its  own. 

In  the  Active  Yoice,  the  Future  Subj.  is  generally  supplied  by  the 
Participle  in  rus  with  sim  or  essem,  according  as  a  principal  or  an  his¬ 
torical  tense  precedes. 


0  The  actions  spoken  of  {probabis,-  dices,  assentiar)  ar e  contemplated  as  contem¬ 
porary  in  future  time,  and,  therefore,  expressed  by  the  simple  Future.  2)  Do  away 
with  this  condition,  and  you  will  have  at  once  done  away  with  our  grief. 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


167 


In  the  Passive  Yoice  (and,  if  the  verb  wants  the  Supine,  also  in  the 
Active)  the  Future  Subj.  must  be  expressed  by  the  circumlocution 
futurum  sit  ( esset )  with  the  Pres,  or  Impf.  Subj.;  as, 

Non  dubito  quin  frater  tuns  brevi  rediturns  sit ; 

Non  dubitabam  quin  frater  tuus  brevi  rediturus  esset. 

Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  ut  ab  omnibus  lauderis; 

Non  dubitabam  quin  futurum  esset  ut  ab  omnibus  laudareris. 

Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  tu  diiigentius  discas  ; 

Non  dubitabam  quin  futurum  esset  ut  diiigentius  disceres. 


Note  1. — The  Future  Subj.  Pass,  should  never  be  expressed  by  the  Participle  in 
dus  with  sim  ( essem ) ;  because  the  Participle  in  dus  combined  with  sum,  esse ,  always 
conveys  the  idea  of  necessity,  duty,  or  propriety, — never  that  of  mere  futurity. 

Note  2. — As  the  circumlocution  futurum  sit  (esset)  with  the  Present  or  Imperfect 
Subj.  is  of  very  rare  occurrence  in  the  Classical  writers,  and  as  the  idea  of  futurity 
admits  of  so  great  a  variety  of  expression,  it  is  always  advisable  to  arrange  the  sen¬ 
tence  in  such  a  manner  as  to  avoid  that  circumlocution. 

Thus,  for  example,  instead  of  saying :  Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  ut  diiigentius 
discas ,  we  may  say  : 

Haud  dubie  diiigentius  in  posterum  disces, 

Spero  fore  ut  in  posterum  diiigentius  discas, 

Spero  te  in  posterum  fore  diligentiorem, 

Non  dubito  quin  diligentior  posthac  futurus  sis, 

Spero  te  diligentiorem  operam  litteris  daturum  esse, 

Spero  fore  ut  diiigentius  in  litterarum  studia  incumbas,  etc. 

In  like  manner,  instead  of  saying  :  Non  dubitabam  quin  futurum  esset  ut  ab  omni¬ 
bus  laudareris ,  we  may  say : 

Minimo  dubitabam  quin  omnium  laudem  assecuturus  esses, 

Persuasum  mihi  erat  fore  ut  ab  omnibus  laudareris, 

Haud  dubium  mihi  erat  quin  in  ore  omnium  futurus  esses, 

Certum  habebam  te  ab  omnibus  laudatum  iri, 

Nihil  dubitabam  quin  omnes  te  laudaturi  essent, 

Probe  sciebam  fore  ut  ab  omnibus  laude  afficereris,  etc. 

§  187. — The  Future-Perfect  Subj.  has,  like  the  simple  Future  Subj., 
no  form  of  its  own. 

The  Fut.-Perfect  Subjunctive,  both  Active  and  Passive,  is  generally 
supplied  by  the  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive,  especially  when  a 
future  tense  occurs  in  the  same  sentence. — When  no  future  occurs,  it  is 
supplied  either  by  the  simple  Perfect  or  Pluperf.  Subj.,  or  (more  rarely) 
by  the  circumlocution  futurum  sit  (esset)  ut  with  the  Perf.  or  Pluperf. 
Subj. — E.  g.,  Liscus  ait  (aiebat)  se  non  dubitare  quin  si  Helvetios 


168 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


super  arint  (superassent)  Romani ,  AEduis  sint  (essent)  libertatem  erep - 
turi.  Thus, 

Act.:  Oraculum  can  %  (cecinit)  eum  qni  ncdum  Gordii  solvent 
(solvisset)  tota  Asia  regnzturum  esse . 

Pass.  :  Oraculum  canit  (cecinit)  eum  a  quo  nodus  Gordii  solutus  sit 
(esset)  tota  Asia  regnaturum  esse. 


Non  dubito  quin  perendie  hac  ipsa  hora  frater  tuns  redierit. 

Non  dubitabam  quin  postridie  ea  ipsa  hora  frater  tuus  rediisset. 

or , 

Fore  arbitror  ut  perendie  hac  ipsa  hora  frater  tuus  redierit. 

Fore  arbitrabar  ut  postridie  ea  ipsa  hora  frater  tuus  rediisset. 

(More  rarely) 

Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  ut  eras  hac  ipsa  hora  frater  redierit. 
Non  dubitabam  quin  futurum  esset  ut  postridie  ea  ipsa  h.  rediisset. 


jUggr*  When  the  subordinate  clause  expresses  what  one  would  have  done,  or  what 
would  have  been  done,  if  some  obstacle  had  not  intervened,  the  Fut.-Perf.  Subj. 
Active  is  supplied  by  the  Participle  in  -rus  with  fuerim ,  and  the  Fut.-Perf.  Subj. 
Passive  by  the  Participle  in  - us ,  with  essem. — E.  g., 

Pollio  Asinius  non  dubitat  quin  Caesar ,  si  diutius  vixisset ,  suos  rescripturus  et  correc- 
turus  commentarios  fuerit ;  or,  by  the  Ace.  c.  Inf. :  Pollio  Asinius  Caisarern  existimat 
suos  rescripturum  et  corredurum  commentarios  fuisse,  si  diutius  vixisset. 

Non  dubito  quin  si  Saguntinis  impigre  Romani  tulissent  opem,  totum  in  TTispaniam 
bellum  aver  sum  esset!  or,  by  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.:  Si  Saguntinis  impigre  Romani  tulissent 
opem,  futurum  fuisse  arbitror ,  ut  totum  in  Ilispaniam  bellum  averteretur. 


Or  the  Sequence  of  Tenses. 

§  188. — General  rule  :  A  principal  tense  must  be  followed  by  a 
principal  tense,  and  an  historical  tense  must  be  followed  by  an  historical 
tense. 


Principal  tenses : 


Pres.  I  ask 
Perf.  I  have  asked 
Fut.  I  shall  ask 


Os  doing, 
j  {  has  done, 
£  ( will  do. 


Qumo  (agat, 
Quaisivi  ’$  <  egerit , 
Queer  am  ^  (  acturus  sit. 


Historical  tenses : 


Impf.  I  was  asking  ®  (  did,  was  doing, 
Perf.  I  asked  H-  <  had  done, 
Plup.  1  had  asked  Is  (would  do. 


Queer  ebam  (  ageret , 

Quasivi  ’§  •<  egisset, 
Qucesiveram  ^  ( acturus  esset. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


169 


Note  1.— The  historical  Present  is  followed  by  the  Imperf.  and  Plupf.  as  well 
as  by  the  Present  and  Perfect;  as,  Caesar  legatos  mittit  qui  nuntiarent  (or  nuntient). 
Verves  eos  certicres  facit  quid  opus  esset  (or  sit).  Argilius  Pausanice  aperit  quid  ex 
litter  is  comperissei  (or  comp  ever  if). 


Note  2.— The  ut  consecutive  after  an  historical  tense,  is  often  (especially  in 
Nepos)  followed  by  the  Perfect  Subj.,  instead  of  the  Imperfect;  as,  Adeo  excellebat 
Aristides  abstinentia  ut  unus post  hominum  memoriam  cognomine  Justus  sit  appellatus. 
Factum  est  ut  plus  quam  colleger  Miltiades  valuer  it.  Xerxes  adeo  angusto  mari  conjiixit 
ut  ejus  multitude  navium  explicari  non potuerit. 


Note  3. — When  a  subordinate  clause  expresses  a  general  truth  or  a  result 
which  extends  to  the  present  time  of  the  speaker,  its  verb  is  put  in  the  Present  (or 
Perfect),  whatever  may  be  the  tense  of  the  preceding  verb.  E.  g.,  Prajanus  rempub- 
licam  ita  administravit  ut  omnibus principibus  merito  preferatur A  Ardebat  Hortensius 
cupiditate  dicendi  sic  ut  in  nullo  unquam  jlagrantius  studium  viderim.  Atticus  fecit  ut 
vere  dictum  videatur :  Sui  cuique  moves  fingunt  fortunam .  Antiocho  pacem  petenti  ad 
priores  conditiones  nihil  additum ,  Africano  praedicante  neque  Romanis  si  vincantur 
animos  minui,  neque  si  vine  ant)  secundis  rebus  insolescere. 

Note  4. — The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  where  we  might  expect  the 
Present.  This  is  the  case  (a)  after  the  English  Perfect  with  “  have,”  when  the  action 
expressed  by  the  Perfect  can  be  conceived  in  its  progress  and  duration ;  as,  “  I  have 
for  a  long  time  doubted  (conceived  in  its  duration,  •=  I  was  doubting)  if  it  would  not 
be  better;”  Dm  dubitavi  an  melius  esset.  Quoniam  quae  subsidia  Tiaberes  et  habere 
posses ,  exposui,  nunc  de  magnitudine  petitionis  dicam  j  (b)  after  Perfect  Infinitives  that 
depend  on  a  preceding  present  or  future  tense,  and  are  equivalent  to  the  Perfect 
Indie,  with  “  have  ;”  as,  “  I  think  to  have  said  enough  (=  that  I  have  said  enough) 
why  this  war  is  necessary  .....  ;”  Satis  mihi  multa  verba  fecisse  videor  quare  esset  hoc 
bellum  genere  ipso  necessarium ,  magnitudine  periculosum.  Free  dare  mihi  videris 
posuisse  ante  oculos  quid  dicere  oporteret  eum  qui  orator  esset  futurus. — The  Present 
Subj.,  in  such  instances,  would  indeed  not  be  incorrect;  but  it  would  be  contrary  to 
the  usage  of  the  best  writers. 


III.  Moods  of  Yerbs. 

INDICATIVE. 

§  189. — The  Indicative  represents  an  action  or  state  as  something 
real  and  certain, — as  a  fact ;  e.  g.;  Deus  est  ceternus.  Virtus  est  sum- 
mum  bonum. 


i)  The  Present  preferatur  means  that  Trajan  was  preferred  to  all  other  rulers  up 
to  the  time  of  the  writer,  whereas  the  Imperfect  would  mean  that  he  was  preferred 
only  to  his  contemporaries. i)  2)  Here  the  Imperfects  v incerentur  and  vincerent  would 
not  be  wrong,  but  the  Presents  vincantur  and  vincant  more  clearly  show'  that 
equanimity  was  one  of  the  leading  features  of  the  Roman  character,  not  only 

on  the  present  occasion,  but  at  all  times  and  under  all  circumstances. 


I 


170  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

The  Indicative  is  sometimes  used  in  Latin,  where  in  English  the 
potential  mood  is  employed.  This  is  the  case : 

1.  With  the  expressions  par,  fas,  cequum,  justum,  consentarieum,  long  urn, 
immensum,  infinitum,  satius,  cequius,  melius,  utilius,  etc,  est  or  erat, — when 
we  wish  to  express  that  something  would  he  (or  have  been)  just,  reasonable, 
easy,  difficult,  etc.  The  Imperfect  of  the  English  Potential  is  then  generally 
rendered  by  the  Present  Indicative,  and  the  English  Pluperfect  by  the  Imper¬ 
fect  or  Perfect  Indicative.  E.  g.,  “It  would  lead  too  far....  Longum  est 
ennmerare  omnia  prcelia.~(i  There  would  be  no  end. . . .  Infinitum  est  ad 
omnia  respondere.—(‘  How  easy  would  it  have  been  for  me. . . .  Quam  facile 
mihi  erat,  orbis  imperium  occupare  Romanis  militibus.  Longe  utilius  fuit 
angustias  aditus  vaUdo  occupare  prcesidio .  Erat  infinitum  bene  de  me  meritos 
omnes  numerare. 

2.  With  the  verbs  possum,  licet,  convenit,  oportet,  debeo,  and  necesse  est,  when 
it  is  intimated  that  something  might,  could,  or  should  have  taken  place.  The 
Imperfect  Indie,  of  these  verbs  is  used  when  we  wish  to  express  that  some¬ 
thing  ought  to  have  been  done  and  that  the  time  for  doing  it  is  not  yet 
passed,-— that  it  may  still  be  done:  the  Perfect  Ind.,  when  we  wish  to  express, 
that  something  should  have  been  done,  but  that  the  time  for  doing  it  is  already 
passed.  E.  g.,  “You  ought  to  have  been  put  to  death  long  ago  Ad  mortem 
te  duci  jam  pridem  oportebat.  Contumeliis  eum  onerasti,  quern  patris  loco  colere 
debebas.  Deleri  totus  exercitus  potuit,  si  fugientes  persecuti  victores  essent. 
Volumnia  debuit  in  te  ojficiosior  esse,  et  id  ipsum,  quod  fecit,  potuit  facer e  dili- 
gentius.  Aut  non  suscipi  bellum  oportuit,  aut  geri  pro  dignitate  Populi 
Romani. — Thus  in  the  Periphrastic  conjugation :  Quodsi  On.  Pompeius  prim - 
tus  esset  hoc  tempore,  tamen  erat  mittendus.1  Qui  si  hoc  tempore  non  diem 
suum  obiisset,  paucis  post  annis  tamen  ei  moriendum  fuit. 

3.  In  the  conclusion  of  hypothetical  sentences  when  we  wish  to  express  what 
would  have  happened,  had  not  some  obstacle  intervened.  E.  g.,  Perieram 
(—  periissem),  nisi  accurrisses.  Labebar  (=  lapsus  essem)  longius,  nisi  me 
retinuisses.  Mazceus  si  iranseuntibus  flumen  Macedonibus  supervenisset,  hand 
dubie  oppressurus  fuit  (—  oppressisset)  incompositos.  Populus  Romanus,  Caesar  e 
et  Pompeio  trucidatis,  in  statum  pristince  libertatis  redierat,  nisi  aut  Pompeius 
liberos ,  aut  Caesar  hceredem  reliquisset. 

4.  After  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs  that  are  either  doubled  or  have  the 
suffix  - cunque ,  as  quisquis,  quotquot,  utut,  ubiubi,  quicunque,  qualiscunque,  quan- 
tuscunque,  utcunque,  and  also  after  sire— sice.  E.  g.,  Quidquid  id  est  (‘whatever 
it  may  be’)  timeo  Danaos  et  dona  ferentes.  Sapiens  ubicunque  est  (‘  wherever 
he  may  be’)  beatus  est.  Totum  hoc  leve  est  qualecunque  est.  Utcunque  sese  res 
habet,  tua  est  culpa.  Sice  tacebis  sive  loquere,  mihi  perinde  est.  Sice  rerum  id 
est  sive  falsum  (‘  be  it  true  or  false’),  mihi  quidem  ita  nuntiatum  est. — 2gj§P  In 
these  and  similar  instances,  however,  later  writers  frequently  use  the  In¬ 
dicative. 


*)  he  would  have  been  the  person  to  be  sent. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


171 


5.  After  the  adverbs  prope  and  pane,  when  we  wish  to  express  that  an  eyent 
was  on  the  point  of  taking  place;  as,  “I  bad  almost  forgotten. . . .  Prope 
oblitus  sum  quod  maxime  scrihendum  erat.  Prutum  non  minus  amo  quam  tu  : 
pome  dixi,  quam  te.  Pons  Sublicius  iter  pane  hostibus  dedit,  ni  unus  xir 
fuisset. 

Note. — The  Present  Indie,  of  possum  stands  frequently  for  possem ;  as,  Possum 
persequi  mult  a,  sed  ea  ipsa  qua  dixi ,  sentio  fuisse  longiora.  Possum  sexcenta  decreta 
proper  re. — But  also  :  Plurima  quidem  proferre  possemus,  sed  modus  adhibendus  est. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

§  190. — The  Subjunctive  represents  a  state  or  action— not  as  a  fact, 
but  as  a  mere  conception  of  the  mind,  as  something  possible,  conditional, 
or  doubtful.  The  English  language  commonly  expresses  the  nature  of 
the  Latin  Subjunctive  by  the  auxiliaries  may,  can ,  shall ,  might,  could , 
should,  and  would. — Thus,  when  I  say,  F 'rater  tuus ,  etsi  doctissimus  sit 
(‘though  he  may  be’),  multa  tamen  se  nescire  fatebitur , — I  represent 
your  brother’s  being  learned,  not  as  a  fact,  but  as  a  mere  possibility : 
but,  when  I  say,  Frater  tuus,  etsi  doctissimus  est  (‘though  he  is’),  multa 
tamen  se  nescire  fatetur  his  being  learned  is  represented  as  a  fact — as  a 
reality. 

Note. — When  the  English  may,  can ,  might,  could ,  etc.,  are  not  used  as  auxiliaries, 
hut  as  principal  verbs,  they  must  be  translated  by  licet,  possum ,  nolo,  debeo,  or 
oportet ,  respectively.  E.  g.,  “You  may  go,”  Tibi  abire  licet. — “  I  might  have  gone,” 
Mihi  abire  licuit. — “  He  could  not  have  come  sooner,”  Aon  potuit  citius  venire. 
“You  ought  to  have  done  that,”  Te  oportuit  hoc  facer e. — “It  could  not  have  been 
done  better,”  Melius  fieri  non  potuit. 

The  English  Perfect  Inf.  after  the  forms  might,  could,  and  ought,  is  generally  trans¬ 
lated  by  the  Present  Infin.,  unless  an  action  is  to  be  represented  as  completed  at  or 
before  some  specified  time  ;  as,  “  At  that  time  it  ought  to  have  been  already  done,” 
Turn  jam  factum  esse  (te  id  fecisse )  oportuit. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDEPENDENT  SENTENCES. 

Feream  si  mention 

§  191. — The  Subjunctive  (especially  the  Subj.  Present)  is  used  in 
independent  sentences,  to  express  a  modest  assertion,  a  wish,  a  supposi¬ 
tion,  a  concession,  a  deliberative  question,  an  exhortation,  an  assurance 
or  protest ;  as,  “  May  I  perish,  if  I  lie.” 

Nemo  sapiens  Mud  tibi  concedat.* 1  Feras  puterrd  quibus  ex  raptu 
alimenta  sunt ,  meliores  quo  iracundiores ;  sed  patientiam  laudaverim 

>)  No  wise  man  probably  will  concede.  a)  I  feel  inclined  to  think — but  I  confess, 

I  admire. 


172 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


bourn  et  equorum. —  Valeant  cives  mei ,  voleant ,  incolumes ,  y?o* 

rentes,  sint  beati ,  stei  hccc  pr  cedar  a. — aSW  dicat1  nunc  aliquis. 

Rones’1  me  quid  sit  Reus. — Rixerit  Epicurus .3  Sit  scelestus ,  sit  f  ur  ;  at 
est  bonus  imperator. —  Quis  non  timeat  omnia  providentem  et  animadver- 
tentem  Reum  ?  Valerius  quotidie  cantabai :  erat  enim  scenicus  ;  quid 
facer ed  aliud  ? — Imitemur  nostros  Brutos ,  Camillos ,  Curios,  Fabri- 
cios  y  amemus  patriam,  par eamus  senatui,  consulamus  bonis. 


N<  te  1. — A  modest  assertion,  or  a  deliberative  question,  is  often  expressed  by  the 
Subj.  Perfect  rather  than  the  Present;  as,  “  Who  would  grant  you  this?”  “Who 
would  doubt?”  “By  your  leave  I  would  say,”  etc.,  Quis  tibi  hoc  concesserit?  Quis 
dubitaverit  ?  Pace  or  venia  tua  dixerim.  Baud  facile  concesserim ,  dixerim,  crediderim. 
Forsitan  aliquis  dixerit.  Crediderit  forte  quispiam.  Hoc  sine  ulla  dubitatione  confir- 
maverim.  Voluptati  qui  se  dederit ,  vix  earn  virum  dixerim.  Libenter  bis  accesserim* 
qui  ....  etc. 

Note  2. — The  English  indefinite  expressions  “One  (or,  you)  might  have  said, 
seen,  thought,”  are  generally  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  Subj.  diceres ,  xideres ,  putares , 
etc. ;  as,  Hostcs  lento s  modo ,  modo  pavidos  animadverteres.  Pedites  mcesti ,  crederes 
victos,  in  castra  redeunt.  Covfectoprcdio ,  turn  vero  cerneres ,  quanta  audacia  fuisset  in 
exercitu  Catilinos. 

Note  3. — A  wish  conceived  as  possible — which,  we  know,  can  or  will  be  realized,  is 
expressed  by  the  Subj.  Pres,  or  Perf. :  but  a  wish  conceived  as  impossible — which, 
we  know,  cannot  or  will  not  be  realized,  by  the  Subj.  Imperf.  or  Pluperf.  ;  e.  g., 


(Of  things  represented  as  possible.) 

Utinam  veniat !  Would  that  he  may  come  ! 
Utinam  venerit !  Would  that  be  may  have  come  l 


(Of  things  represented  as  impossible.) 

Utinam  veniret !  Would  to  God  he  might  come  ! 

Utinam  venisset !  Would  to  God  he  had  come  ! 

Nolim  id  factum  esse*  Nollem  id  factum  esse?  Quam  velim  mihi  ignoscat  /  Quam 
vellem  mihi  ignosceret !  Utinam  hoc  verum  sit/,  Utinam  hoc  verum  esset !  Utinam 
ealuti  nostraz  consulere  possimus !  Vellem  adesse  posset  Pancetius  !  Utinam ,  Patres 
Conscripti ,  Calendis  Sextilibus  adesse potuissem  ! 

§  192 . — In  forms  of  protestation  and  swearing,  tlie  form ula  ita  [sic) 
with  the  Subjunctive  (“as  true  as”)  is  followed  by  ut  with  the  Indicative, 


J)  I  suppose  some  one  now  to  say.  2)  Supposing  you  ask  me.  s)  Granting  that  E. 
could  have  said.  4)  what  could  (should)  he  have  done  else?  6)  I  feel  inclined  to 
accede  readily.  B)  I  could  wish  it  not  to  have  happened  (=  I  hope  it  has  not  hap¬ 
pened).  T)  I  could  wish  it  had  not  happened. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


173 


when  a  simple  assertion  is  made, — with  the  Subjunctive,  when  a  wish  is 
expressed.  E.  g.,  “As  true  as  I  live,  I  shudder. . . .”  Ita  vivam  ut  toto  corpora 
perhorresco.  “As  true  as  I  wish  to  he  happy,  there  is  nothing. . . .”  Ita  sim 
felix,  ut  nihil  est  prceclarius  virtute. — “As  true  as  I  wish  that  God  may  help 

me,  so  truly  do  I  wish  you _ ”  Ita  me  Deus  adjuvet  (or  ita  deos  mild  velira 

propitios)  ut  diutissime  vivas.  “  As  true  as  I  wish  to  see  all  my  desires  accom¬ 
plished,  I  should  like. . . .”  Tecum  esse,  ita  mild  omnia  quae  opto  contingant,  ut 
vehementer  velim. 

Sometimes  ita  with  the  Subjunctive  is  thrown  in  parenthetically  without 
ut;  as,  Scape,  ita  me  dii  juvent,  te  auctorem  consiliorum  meorum  desidero. 
Sollicitat,  ita  vivam,  me  tua,  mi  Tiro,  valetudo. 

jj£gP  A  negative  protest  is  always, — a  negative  wish  or  concession  generally, 
expressed  by  ne ;  as,  Ne  sim  salvvs  ( ne  vivam),  si  aliter  scribo  ac  sentio.  TJtinam  ne 
(more  rarely  non )  iibi  in  mentem  venisset.  Ne  cequaveritis  Hannibaii  Philippum, 
Pyrrho  certe  azquabitis.1 

Subjunctive  after  Particles. 

Tacet  quasi  nesciat. 

§  193. — The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  the  particles  0  si  (poet.), 
utinam ,  would  that !  ut,  even  if,  although  ;  ne,  although  not ;  quasi , 
tamquam,  velut ,  ac  si,  velut  si,  tamquam  si,  perinde  ( ceque ,  non  secus)  ac 
si,  as  if:  licet,  although;  quamlibet,  quantumvis,  how  much  soever; 
rnoclo,  dummodo,  if  but,  provided  that;  m.odo  ne,  dummodo  ne,  dumne, 
provided  that  not ;  and  after  nedum ,  much  less,  still  less^  when  followed 
by  a  verb.  E.  g.,  “He  is  silent,  as  if  he  were  ignorant.” 

Ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas.  Ne  sit  summum  malum 
dolor,  malum  certe  est.  Quod  turpe  est,  id  quantumvis  occultetur,  tamen 
honestum  nullo  modo  fieri  potest.  Quid  ego  his  testibus  utor,  quasi  res 
dubia  aut  obscura  sit  ?  Multi  omnia  recta  et  honesta  negligunt ,  dum¬ 
modo  potentiam  consequantur .  Vix  cum  aspicit,  nedum  amet. 

QUAMQUAM  AND  QUAMVIS. 

§  194. — Quamquam,  “  although,”  “  however  much,”  is  in  the  Classical  prose 
regularly  construed  with  the  Indicative, — and  quamvis ,  “  although,”  “  how¬ 
ever  much,”  with  the  Subjunctive. 

Poets  and  later  prose  writers,  however,  construe  quamquam  generally  with 
the  Subjunctive,  and  quamvis  with  the  Indicative. — Quamquam  with  the  Subj. 
occurs  even  in  some  passages  of  Cicero. 

Quamvis,  when  taken  adverbially,  in  the  sense  of  “  howsoever,”  has  no 
influence  upon  the  mood  of  the  verb ;  as,  “  I  shall  be  content  with  ever  so 
small  a  corner  of  Italy,”  Quamvis  parvis  Italiae  latebris  contentus  ero. 

Etsi,  tametsi,  and  etiamsi,  “  although,”  take  the  Indie,  when  an  action  or  a 
state  is  represented  as  a  reality,  as  a  fact, — and  the  Subj.,  when  it  is  repre 
sented  as  merely  possible. 


>)  Granting  that  you  cannot  consider  Ph.  equal  to  IT. ,  yet  you  will  surely .... 


174 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


ANTEQUAM  AND  PRIUS QU AM, 

§  195. — 1.  With  antequam  and  priusquam  the  Present  Indie,  is  used,  when  an 
action  or  event  is  represented  as  certain  and  near  at  hand ;  the  Present  Snhj., 
when  an  event  is  represented  not  as  a  fact,  hut  merely  as  one  that  may  possibly 
occur — hence  its  special  use  in  general,  indefinite  sentences  in  which  it  is 
stated,  what  usually  happens  or  should  happen,  before  a  certain  event  takes 
place.  E.  g.,  Priusquam  de  ceteris  respondeo,  de  amicitia  pauca  dicam.  Dabc 
operam  ut  istuc  veniam  antequam  plane  ex  animo  tuo  effluo.  Si  quemquam 
nactus  eris  qui  perferat  litteras ,  des  antequam  discedimus. — Priusquam  incipias, 
consulto  opus  est.  Tempestas  minatur  (‘  usually  threatens’)  antequam  surgat ; 
crepant  cedificia,  antequam  corruant.  In  omnibus  negotiis,  priusquam  aggre- 
diare ,  adhibenda  est  prmparatio  diligens. 

It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  the  Present  Subj.  is  not  unfrequently 
used  even  where  things  are  represented  as  certain  and  near  at  hand ;  as,  De  quo 
priusquam  scribanms  (instead  of  scribimus ),  lime  prcecipienda  videntur.  Antequam  de 
republica  dicam  (instead  of  dico),  exponam  breviter  consilium  prof  ectionis  mem. 

2.  In  simple  narration,  antequam  and  priusquam  are  construed  either  with 
the  Indie.  Perfect,  or  the  Subj.  Imperf.  and  Pluperf. ; — with  the  Indie.  Perfect, 
when  mere  priority  of  one  action  or  event  before  another  is  expressed  (in  this 
case  ante  and  prius  are  commonly  used  emphatically),  and  with  the  Subj. 
Imperf.  and  Pluperf.,  when  between  the  preceding  and  subsequent  actions 
there  is  some  closer  connection  than  that  of  mere  priority,  when,  for  instance, 
one  actiQn  is  declared  to  be  necessary  or  proper  to  precede  the  other,  or  when 
a  purpose  or  design  is  implied.  E.  g.,  Hmc  omnia  ante  facta  sunt  quam  Verres 
Itdliam  attigit.1  Non  prius  inde  discessit  quam  totam  insulam  dexicit .2 — Dies 
obrepsit  hostibus  priusquam  agger  cm  extruxissent.  Ducentis  annis  antequam 
Romam  caperent,  in  Itdliam  Galli  transcenderunt. — In  the  following  passage 
of  Nepos  the  Subjunctive  seems  to  be  exceptionable :  Hcec  pugna  facta  est  prius 
quam  Aristides  poena  liberaretur. 

|jggp“  Here  must  also  be  mentioned  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  with  or  without  ut , 
after  antequam ,  priusquam ,  citius  quam ,  and  potius  quam ,  in  the  sense  of  “  sooner 
than,”  or  “rather  than,”  with  the  Infinitive;  as,  Cur  non  in  prodio  cecidisti  potius 
quam  (or  quam  ut)  in  potestatem  inimici  venires  ? 

DUM,  DO  NEC,  QUOAD. 

§  19G. — 1.  Dum ,  donee,  and  quoad,  in  the  sense  of  “  as  long  as.”  are  com¬ 
monly  construed  wuth  the  Indicative  {donee,  in  this  sense,  is  found  only  in 
poetry  and  late  prose) ;  as,  Cato  quoad  vixit,  xirtutum  laude  crexit.  Lace- 
deemoniorum  gens  fortis  fuit  dum  Lycurgi  leges  xigebant.  Donee  eris  felix 
multos  numerabis  amicos. 


])  2)  If,  in  these  two  sentences,  ‘  Verres’s  coming  to  Italy’  and  ‘the  conquest  of 
the  island’  were  to  be  represented  as  events  that  had  been  intended,  the  Subjunc¬ 
tive  would  be  necessary — priusquam  attingeret  or  attigisset  and  priusquam  devicisset. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOO'D. 


175 


2  Dum ,  donee,  and  quoad,  in  the  sense  of  “  until/’  take  either  the  Indicative 
or  Subjunctive: — the  Indie,  (mostly  the  Perf.  Ind.),  when  an  action  or  event  is 
represented  as  a  fact,  and  when  they  merely  mark  the  time  up  to  which  the 
action  or  state  denoted  by  the  principal  verb  is  to  be  continued,  no  purpose  or 
design  whatsoever  being  implied;  the  Subj.  (mostly  the  Pres.,  Impf.,  and 
Plupf.),  when  an  event  is  conceived  as  merely  possible,  or  when  an  intention 
or  purpose  is  implied.  E.  g.,  Milo  adfuit  quoad  Senatus  dismissus  eat.  Epmni- 
nondas  ferrum  in  corpore  retinuit  quoad  renuntiatum  eat  ricisse  Bceotios  (had 
the  arrival  of  the  victorious  tidings  been  intended,  the  Subj.  renuntiaretur  or 
renuntiatum  esset,  would  have  been  used). — Pulsabam  dum  ostium  aperiretur 
(the  opening  of  the  door  being  intended).  Iratis  subtrahendi  aunt  ii,  in  quos 
impetum  conantur  facere,  dum  se  ipsi  colligant  (the  intention  being  implied 
that  they  may  recover  themselves). 

Note. — Donee ,  in  the  sense  of  “  until,”  frequently  occurs  in  Livy  and  the  poets,  but 
very  rarely  in  Cicero  and  Caesar. — Tacitus  uses  it  with  the  Subjunctive,  even  where  t 
simple  fact  is  expressed. 

Dum ,  in  the  sense  of  “  until,”  takes  in  Cicero  generally,  in  Caesar  exclusively,  tho 
Subjunctive. — In  the  sense  of  “  whilst”  it  is  usually  construed  with  the  Indie. 
Present,  even  when  the  principal  verb  is  a  past  tense.  E.  g.,  Dum  haze  geruntur, 
Cazsari  nuntiatum  est.  Dum  ea  Romani  par  ant,  jam  Saguntum  oppvgnabatur  ; — but 
the  Imperfect  and  Perfect  are  found  also;  as,  Dum  haze  in  Apulia  gerebantur , 
Samnites  urbem  non  tenuerunt,  Quaz  divina  res  dum  conficiebatur ,  qinzsivit  a  me 
pater ,  etc. 

QUUM. 

§197. — Quum  either  denotes  the  cause,  or  expresses  the  time  of  an 
action.  In  the  former  case  it  is  called  quum  causale ;  in  the  latter,  quum 
temporale. 

1.  Quum  causale,  “  since,”  “  as,”  and  when  taken  in  the  sense  of  quamvis, 
“though,”  “although,”  “wdiereas,”  always  takes  the  Subjunctive;  as,  Quce 
cum  ita  sint,  quid  est  quod  timeas  ?  Quum  Athenas  tamquam  ad  mercaturam 
bonarum  artium  sis  profectus,  inanem  redire  turpissimum  est.  Phocion  fuit 
perpetuo  pauper,  quum  ditissimus  esse  posset. 

2.  Quum  temporale,  “when,”  generally  takes  the  Subjunctive  Impf.  and 
Pluperf.,  and  the  Indicative  of  the  remaining  tenses ;  as,  Antigonus  quum 
adversus  Seleucum  pugnaret,  in  prcelio  occisus  est.  Alexander  cum  interemisset 
Clitum,  nix  a  se  manus  abstinuit. — Qui  non  propulsat  injuriam  a  suis  quum 
potest,  injuste  facit.  Jam  ver  appetebat,1  quum  Hannibal  ex  hibernis  movit. 
Ager  quum  multos  annos  quievit ,2  uberiores  efferre  fructus  solet.  Sapiens  non 
ejulabit,  quum  doloribus  torquebitur. 

Note  1. — Quum  temporale  takes  the  Indie.  Impf.  and  Pluperf.  in  the  following 
cases :  (a)  the  Indie.  Imperf.,  when  simultaneous  actions  or  events  are  expressed,  the 
English  “  when”  being  then  equivalent  to  tvhile.  In  this  case,  interim  or  interea 
is  usually  added  to  quum.  E.  g.,  Ccedebatur  virgis  in  medio  foro  Messanai  eivis 


J)  The  spring  was  drawing  on.  2)  when  it  has  lain  fallow. 


176 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Roman, us  quum  interim  nulla  vox  istius  miseri  inter  dolorem  crepitumque  plagarvm 
audiebatur  nisi  hcec :  Civis  Romanus  sum; — (b)  the  Indie.  Pluperf.,  when  actions  of 
repeated  occurrence  are  spoken  of.  E.  g.,  Verves  quum  (whenever)  ad  aliquod  oppi- 
d/um  venerat ,  lectica  usque  in  cubiculum  deferebatur.  Quum  ver  esse  coeperat ,  dabat  se 
labori  atque  itineribus  ; — (c)  the  Indie,  both  Imperf.  and  Pluperf.,  whenever  quum 
describes  time  in  a  very  marked  manner,  being  then  equivalent  to  turn  quum  or  eod 
tempore  quum .  E.  g.,  Nuper  quum  te  jam  adventare  arbitral amur,  repente  abs  te  in 
mensem  Quintilium  rejecti  sumus.  Credo  turn  quum  Sicilia  Jiorebat  opibus  et  copiis , 
viagna  artificia  fuisse  in  ea  insula. 

Note  2. — Quum  sometimes  takes  both  the  Indie,  and  Subj.  in  the  same  sentence,  • 
when  in  one  clause  it  simply  marks  the  time,  while  in  another  the  passage  assumes 
the  character  of  an  historical  narrative.  E.  g.,  An  turn  eratis  consules  quum  cunctus 
ordo  reclamabat ,  quum _ cupere  vos  diceretis ,  etc. 

Note  3. — Quum  takes  the  Indicative,  also,  when  it  stands  for  ex  eo  tempore  quo , 

“  since  as,  Multi  anni  sunt  quum  Fabius  diligitur  a  me  propter  summam  humanita- 
tem  et  observantiam.  Fere  triennium  est  quum  virtuti  nuntium  remisisti. 

When  quum  stands  for  quod,  after  gaudeo ,  gratulor ,  etc.  it  takes  the  same  mood 
which  quod  would  take  itself;  as,  “I  congratulate  you  on  your  influence  with 
Dolabella,”  Gratulor  quum  tantum  vales  apud  Dolabeilam.  Gratias  tibi  ago  quum 
tantum  litterce,  mere  apud  te  potuerunt.  Pr  declare  fads  quum  liorum  virorum  memoriam 
tenes  (in  retaining  the  recollection  of  . . . .). 

SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

§  198. — There  are  four  kinds  of  hypothetical, or  conditional, sentences  : 

m 

Si  hoc  dicis,  erras. 

1 .  Where  both  the  condition  and  conclusion  are  considered  as  facts, 

and  hence  as  certain.  In  this  kind  of  conditional  sentences  the  Indica¬ 
tive  is  used  in  both  clauses.  E.  g.,  “  If  you  say  this,  you  err.”  ; 

Si  hoc  dixisti ,  errasti.  Si  hoc  dices,  errabis.  Stomachabatur  senex , 
si  quid  asperius  dixeram.  Si  turbidas  res  sapienter  ferebas  (as  you 
really  did),  tranquilliora  Icete  feres.  Nisi  quid  me  etesice  morabuntur 
(as,  I  hope,  will  not  be  the  case)  celeriter  vos  videbo. 

Note. — Instead  of  the  Indicative,  the  Imperative,  or  the  Subjunctive  taken  impera¬ 
tively,  may  stand  in  the  conclusion ;  e.  g.,  Si  abire  volunt ,  abeant.  Si  dormis , 
expergiscere  ;  si  stas,  ingredere;  si  ingreaeris ,  curve  ;  si  curds,  advola. 

Si  hoc  diceres,  errares. 

2.  Where  it  is  affirmed  that  something  would  take,  or  would  have 
taken  place  under  a  certain  condition, — but  did  not,  because  the  condition 
was  not  fulfilled.  Iu  this  kind  of.  conditional  sentences,  the  Subj.  Irnpf. 
or  Pluperf.  stands  in  both  clauses.  E.  g.,  “  If  you  said  this,  you  would 
err.” 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


177 


Sic  hoc  dixisses ,  errasses .  Si  tu  Me  esses ,  aliter  sentires.  Plura 
scriberem ,  si  possem.  Si  tacuisses ,  philosophies  mansisses.  Si  cavere 
sibi  potuisset ,  viveret.  Si  ita  natura  paratum  esset  ut  ea  dormienies 
agerent,  quee  somniarent ,  alliffandi  omnes  essent  qui  cubitum  irent. 


Note. — The  best  writers  sometimes  use  in  conditional  sentences  the  Imperfect 
where  the  Pluperfect  should  be  employed;  as.  Mortals  tarn  religiosa  jura  majores 
nosti'i  tribuerunt ,  quod  non  fecissent  profecto,  si  nihil  ad  eos  p  er  liner  e  arbitrarentur , 
instead  of  arbit  'rati  essent.  Nam  tu  igitur  eum ,  si  turn  esses,  temerarium  civem  aut 
crudelem putares  ?  instead  of fuisses  and  putasses. 

Si  hoc  dicas,  errabis. 

3.  Where  the  condition  is  represented  as  a  mere  supposition,  the 
realization  of  which,  however,  is  regarded  as  possible,  and  even  expected. 
The  clause  with  si  ( nisi )  takes  then  the  Subj.  Present  or  Perfect;  the 
conclusion,  being  represented  as  certain,  the  Indicative  (commonly 
Future)  or  the  Imperative.  E.  g.,  “If  you  say  this  (as  maybe  the 
case),  you  will  err.” 

Si  quid  habeam ,  dabo.  Si  abire  velinl  (as  possibly  they  may  wish), 
abeant.  Sapiens  non  dubitat ,  si  ita  melius  sit ,  de  vita  migrare. 


Si  hoc  dicas,  erres. 

4.  Where  both  the  condition  and  the  conclusion  are  represented  as  a 
mere  supposition,  without  determining  whether  the  thing  supposed  be 
real  or  not  real,  possible  or  impossible.  In  this  case  the  Subj.  Pres,  or 
Perf.  stands  in  both  clauses.  E.  g.,  “  Jf  you  should  say  this,  you  would 
err.” 

Tu  si  hie  sis,  aliter  sentias.1  Tu  si  hie  fueris ,  aliter  senseris.  Si 
tantum  eum  prudentem  dicam,  minus  quam  debeam,  proedicem.  Si  roges 
me,"1  quid  aut  quale  sit  Pens,  nihil  fortasse  respondeam.  Si  gladium 
quis3  apud  te  Sana  mente  deposuerit,  repetat  insaniens :  reddere  peccatum 
sit,  ojjicium  non  reddere. 

Note. — In  animated  or  oratorical  style,  sometimes  even  the  impossible  is  repre¬ 
sented  as  possible,  and  accordingly  expressed  by  the  Subj.  Present;  as,  Hcec  si  p  atria 
tecum,  Catilina ,  loquatur ,  nonne  impetrare  debeat,  etiamsi  vim  adhibere  non  possit  t  Si 
existat  liodie  ab  inferis  Lycurgus,  gaudeat. 


*)  If  you  were  here  (supposing,  for  a  moment,  you  were  here),  you  would  think 
differently.  3)  If  you  were  now  to  ask  me.  s)  Supposing  som®  one. . . . 


173 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  RELATIVE  SENTENCES. 

Dignus  est  qui  diligatur. 

§  199. — The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  sentences  in  the  following 
cases  : 

I.  When  the  relative  stands  for  ut  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative 
pronoun,  as  ut  ego,  ut  tu ,  ut  ille ,  through  all  the  cases,  genders,  and 
numbers ;  or  for  ut  with  a  possessive  pronoun,  as  cujus  for  ut  mens,  ut 
tuus y  quorum  for  ut  nosier,  ut  vester.  E.  g.,  “He  is  worthy  to  be 
loved,”  Lat.,  He  is  worthy  who  (—  that  he)  should  be  loved. 

The  relative  has  this  force: 

(a)  After  the  adj.  dignus,  indignus ,  aptus,  and  idoneus  ; 

(b)  After  tarn,  tantus,  tails ,  is  or  ille  (for  tails),  ejusmodi / 

(c)  When  it  follows  a  comparative  with  quam  • 

(d)  When  it  introduces  a  purpose  or  design. 

Vol-uptas  non  est  digna  ad  quam  (ut  ad  earn)  sapiens  respiciat.1  Digni 
sunt  parentes  quorum  (ut  eorum)  jussa  prompte  et  alacriter  exequamur. 
Vir  probus  dignus  est  cui  (ut  ei)  fidem  habeamus.  Nonne  hoc  indig - 
nissimum  est,  vos  idoneos  habitos ,  per  quorum  (ut  per  vestras)  sententias 
et  jusjurandum  id  assequantur ,  quod  antea  ipsi  scelere  et  ferro  assequi 
consueverunt  ?  Ea  est  Romana  gens  quae  (ut  ea)  victa  quiescere  nesciat. 
Non  ii  sumus  quibus  (ut  nobis)  nihil  verum  esse  videatur.  Natura 
homini  rationem  dedit  qua  (ut  ea)  regerentur  animi  appetitus .  Populus 
Romanus  tribunes  plebis  creavit  per  quos  (ut  per  eos)  contra  senatum  et 
consules  tutus  esse  posset. 

Note  1. — After  the  expressions  non  ego  is  sum  qui,  non  tu  is  es  qui ,  etc.,  the  person 
of  the  verb  following  is  determined — not  by  the  pronoun  is,  but  by  the  preceding 
subject-nominatives  ego,  tu,  etc. ;  as,  Eon  ego  is  sum  qui  tot  ac  tantis  reipublicae  mails 
non  movear.  Tu  non  is  es  qui  re  nulla  nisi  jure  civili  delecteris  (but  we  would  say  : 
quern  res  nulla  nisi  jus  civile  deledet).  Noli  oblivisci  te  eum  esse  qui  aliis  consueris 
prcecipere. 

Note  2. — The  demonstratives  is,  ille,  tails ,  ejusmodi ,  are  not  always  expressed,  but 
must  often  be  supplied  before  qui  with  the  Subjunctive;  as,  Die  aliquid  quod  (=  ali- 
quid  tale  ut  id)  ad  rem  pertineat.  En  miles  quern  (=  talis  ut  eum)  nulla  pericula 
terreant.  Multi  vulnerati  etiam  quos  vires  san guisque  desererent,  ut  intra  vallum  hos- 
tium  caderent ,  nitebantur.  Nihil  agis ,  nihil  moliris,  nihil  cogitas  quod  (=  nihil  tale  ut 
id)  ego  non  modo  non  audiam,  sed  etiam  videam  planeque  sentiam.  Quam  longe  videtur 
a  carcere  atque  a  vinculis  abesse  debere  qui  seipsum  jam  dignum  custodia  judicavei'it  ? 

This  is  generally  the  case,  also,  after  unus  and  solus  ;  as,  Solus  es  Caesar  in  quo  (=  tu 
solus  talis  es  ut  in  te)  nitalur  civitatis  salus.  Voluptas  est  sola  quee  nos  alliciat  suapte 
natura. 


i)  that  a  wise  man  should  care  for  it. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


179 


Note  3. — Special  attention  must  be  .paid  to  those  clauses  that  are  introduced  by 
qui  after  a  comparative  with  quam  following.  In  English,  such  sentences  are  com¬ 
monly  expressed  in  quite  a  different  manner,  as  can  easily  be  seen  from  the  following 
examples:  “The  loss  of  honor  and  faith  is  too  great  to  be  estimated,”  Famaz  et  fidei 
damna  majora  sunt  quam  quae  (=  ut  ea)  cestimari  possint. — “  The  Greeks  felled  trees 
too  large  and  too  branchy  for  the  soldier  to  carry  along  with  his  armor,”  Greed  et 
major es  et  magis  ramosas  arbor es  cazdebant  quam  quas  (=  ut  eas)  ferre  cum  armis 
miles  posset. 

To  translate  such  sentences  into  Latin,  change  the  English  positive  with  “  too” 
into  the  comparative  with  than  who ,  than  whose ,  than  whom,  than  ichich — accordingly, 
and  the  Infinitive  into  the  potential  mood  with  can,  may,  might,  could. — When  the 
Infinitive  is  preceded  by  “for”  with  an  objective  case,  omit  the  sign  “for”  and  make 
the  objective  the  nominative  to  the  following  verb.  Thus, 

(Eng.)  Your  benefits  are  too  great  to  be  repaid. 

(Lat.)  Your  benefits  are  greater  than  which  can  be  repaid. 

(Eng.)  The  burden  is  too  heavy  for  the  boy  to  carry. 

(Lat.)  The  burden  is  heavier  than  which  the  boy  can  carry. 

(Eng.)  I  am  too  great  for  fortune  to  do  me  harm. 

(Lat.)  I  am  greater  than  to  whom  fortune  can  do  harm. 

Beneficia  tua  majora  sunt  quam  quaz  (ut  ea)  referri  possint.  Onus  gravius  est  quam 
quod  (ut  id)  puer  portare  possit.  Major  sum  quam  cui  (ut  mild)  fortuna  nocere  possit. 
TJvaz  pendent  altius  quam  quas  (ut  eas)  vulpes  attingat  or  possit  attingere. 

Note  4. — Not  only  relative  pronouns,  but  also  relative  adverbs  require  the  Subj., 
when  they  stand  for  ut  with  a  demonstrative,  as  quo  for  ut  eo,  unde  for  ut  inde,  ubi  for 
ut  ibi.  E.  g.,  Nihil  tarn  alte  natura  constituit  quo  (=  ut  eo)  virtus  non  possit  eniti. 
Artaxerxes  Lampsacum  urbem  Themistocli  donarat ,  unde  (==  ut  inde)  vinum  sumeret. 

Note  5. — Here  is  to  be  noticed,  also,  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  in  restrictive 
clauses,  that  is,  in  clauses  which  limit  in  some  way  a  preceding  general  statement. 
E.  g.,  Antonins  omnium  oratorum,  quos  viderim  (‘  at  least  of  those  I  was  able  to  see’), 
longe  eloquentissimus  fuit.  liefertm  sunt  Catonis  orationes,  quas  quidem  (‘  those  at 
least  which’)  aut  invenerim  aut  legerim,  et  verbis  et  rebus  illustribus.  Aristides  unus, 
quod  quidem  audierimus,  cognomine  Justus  est  appellatus. 

Thus  :  Quod  sciam,  “  as  far  as  I  know quod  ivtelligam ,  “  as  far  as  I  understand 
quod  salva  fide  possim,  “  as  far  as  I  can  with  good  conscience  quod  sine  molestia  tua 
fiat,  “  as  far  as  can  be  done  without  inconveniencing  you.”  But  limitations  with 
quantum  generally  take  the  Indicative,  as  quantum  scio,  quantum  memini ,  quantum 
inteUigo,  quantum  in  me  est ,  etc., — unless  the  Subjunctive  be  necessary  for  some 
other  reason. 


Me  caecum  qui  hasc  ante  non  viderim ! 

II.  When  the  relative  stands  for  quum  ego,  quum  tu ,  quum  Me,  etc., 
that  is,  when  the  relative  introduces  the  ground  or  reason  of  what  is 
going  before ;  as,  “  0  blind  man  that  I  am  for  not  having  seen  this 
before.”  (Why  blind? — because  I  have  not  seen _ ). 


180 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


0  fortunate  adolescens  qui  (quum  tu)  turn  virtutis  Homer um  prceconem 
inveneris.  0  magna  vis  veritatis ,  quce  facile  se  ipsa  defendat.  Caninius 
fait  mirifica  vigilantia1  qui  (quum  is)  suo  toto  consulatu  somnum  non 
wider  it.  Quid  ego  te  invitem  a  quo  (quum  a  te)  jam  sciam  esse  prcemis- 
sos  qui  tibi  praes  tolar  entur  ? 

Note  1. — Qui ,  when  introducing  a  cause  or  reason,  is  often  strengthened  by  the 
addition  of  quippe ,  utpote ,  or  ut ;  as,  Mihi  quidem  tribunorum  plebis  potestas  pestifera 
videtur,  quippe  quce  (quum  ea)  in  seditione  ct  ad  seditionem  nata  sit.  Convivia  cum 
patre  non  inibat ,  quippe  qui  ne  in  oppidum  quidem  nisi  perraro  veniret. 

Note  2. — The  relative  qui  stands  sometimes  for  quamvis  (si,  dummodo )  ego ,  tu,  etc., 
and  then,  too,  requires  the  Subjunctive.  E.  g.,  Multi  etiamnv.no  credunt  Chaldceis 
quorum  (quamvis  eorum)  prcedicta  quotidie  eventis  refellantur.  Ego  qui  (quamvis  ego) 
sero  Grcecas  litteras  attigissem ,  tamen  complures  dies  Athenis  commoratus  sum.  An 
mihi  quidquam  potest  esse  molestum,  quod  (si  id  or  dummodo  id)  tibi  gratum  sit  ? 

Note  3. — When  qui  is  used  in  its  pure,  relative  sense,  without  implying  any  acces¬ 
sory  idea  of  purpose,  cause,  reason,  concession,  supposition,  or  condition,  it  takes 
the  Indicative.  Hence  we  may  say :  Nihil  in  mails  duco  quod  (nothing  which)  est  a 
Deo  constitutum,  as  well  as  Nihil  in  mails  duco  quod  (provided  it  be)  sit  a  Deo  con - 
stitutum.  Quid  a  me  petis  qui  (of  me  who)  nihil  habeo,  and  Quid  a  me petis  qui  (since 
I)  nihil  habeam?  Nihil  bonum  est  quod  (nothing  which)  hominem  non  facit  meliorem , 
and  Nihil  bonum  est  quod  (if  it  does  not)  hominem  nonfaciat  meliorem. 


Sunt  qui  dicant. 

III.  After  the  general  and  indefinite  expressions  sunt ,  non  desunt , 
reperiun  tur,  existunt,  exoriuntur  ; — quis  est?  quid  est?  ecquis  or  num- 
quis  est  ?  an  quisquam  est  ?  quotusquisque  est  ?  quot  sunt  ? — nego  esse 
quemquam ,  nec  est,  nee  ullus  est ;  nemo ,  nullus ,  nihil  est ,  vix  est ,  vix 
ullus  est ,  vix  decimus  quisque  est.  After  these  expressions  such  a  word  as 
is,  talis,  ejusmodi ,  must  be  supplied  before  the  relative,  the  qui  being 
equivalent  to  ut  with  a  demonstrative.  E.  g.,  “  There  are  some  (or, 
there  are  persons)  who  say.” 

Sunt  qui  vel  mundi  opifeem  sapientissimum  reprehendere  audeant. 


J)  To  understand  this  and  several  other  passages  from  Cicero,  a  short  historical 
remark  may  not  be  unnecessary. — The  Consul  C.  Fab.  Maximus  had  died  on  the 
very  day  when  his  term  of  office  was  to  end.  This  was  a  few  hours  after  midnight, 
the  last  day  of  December,  ab  U.  C.  709. — Csesar,  professing  to  be  a  scrupulous  observer 
of  ancient  customs,  immediately  appointed  Caninius  to  be  Consul  for  the  deceased 
till  the  next  regular  election,  i.  e.,  till  six  o’clock  in  the  evening  of  the  same  day. 
Cicero,  fond  of  a  joke,  made  this  ephemeral  Magistracy  the  subject  of  many  a  pointed 
remark.  “Quick,  quick,”  said  he  to  his  friends,  “let  us  lose  no  time,  but  make 
haste  to  pay  our  compliments  to  our  new  Consul,  for  fear  he  may  already  be  gone 
out  of  office,  before  we  arrive  at  his  house.” — This  gives  the  key  to  the  example 
quoted. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


181 


Nihil  est  quod  tarn  miseros  facial  qaam  impietas  et  scelus.  Quis  est 
qui  non  oderit  libidinosam  et  protervam  adolescentiam  ?  Quotusquisque 
est  cui  sapientia  omnibus  omnium  divitiis  prazponenda  videatur  ?  Nemo 
est  orator  qui  se  Demosthenis  similem  (or  qui  Demosthenis  Simms')  esse 
nolit. 


Note  1. — When  two  future  events  are  described  as  simultaneous,  the  relative  qui, 
after  the  foregoing  indefinite  expressions,  is  construed  with  the  Subj.  Piesent. 
E.  g.,  “There  will  always  be  some  who  will  say,1’  Semper  erunt  qui  dicant,  \enient 
legiones  quce  neque  me  inultum  neque  te  impunitum  patiantur.  Quamdiu  quisquam  erit 
qui  te  defendere  audeat ,  rives. 

Note  2. — When  the  nominative  to  sunt ,  /{ there  are,”  is  distinct  and  definite,  qui 
takes  the  Indicative ;  as,  Sunt  bestiee  quondam  in  quibus  inest  aliquid  simile  virtutis ,  ut 
in  leonibus ,  ut  in  canibus ,  ut  in  equis. 

But,  when  the  nominative  is  general  and  indefinite,  as  quidam ,  nonnulli ,  pauci , 
multi ,  plures ,  etc.,  both  the  Indie,  and  Subj.  are  used  ; — the  former,  when  we  wish 
simply  to  state  a  fact,  as  Sunt  quidam  e  nostris  qui  hoc  negant  (equivalent  to  the  simple 
statement:  Quidam  e  nostris  hoc  negant )  ;  the  latter,  when  we  wish  at  the  same  time 
to  intimate  a  certain  qualification  of  the  subject,  as  Sunt  quidam  e  nostris  (i.  e.,  tales , 
ejusmodi ,  tarn  stulti ,  etc.)  qui  negent. 

When  sunt  has  no  nominative  expressed  at  all,  the  Subjunctive  with  qui  is  so  com¬ 
mon  in  the  Classical  prose  that  the  Indicative  must  be  regarded  as  an  exception. 

Note  3. — We  must  here  notice,  also,  the  phrases  est  ( non  est,  nihil  tst ,  quid  est ) 
quod ,  cur ,  or  quare ,  and  non  habeo  (nihil  habeo,  quid  habes )  quod ,  “there  is  reason,” 
“there  is  no  reason,”  “what  reason  is  there?”  followed  by  the  Infinitive.  E.  g., 
“  Thou  hast  reason  to  rejoice,”  Est  quod  gaudeas  (=  est  aliquid  propter  quod,  =  est 
aliquid  tale  ut  propter  id). — “  We  have  no  reason  to  fear,”  Nihil  est  quod  ti- 
meamus. — “  I  have  no  reason  to  be  ashamed,”  Non  est  quod  me  pudeat. — Quid  est 
quod  (or  cur)  festines?  Nihil  habeo  quod  incusem  senectutem.  Quid  habes  quod  me 
reprehendas  ? 

From  the  phrase  habeo  quod,  “  I  have  no  reason  we  must  distinguish 

the  phrase  Non  habeo  quid,  which  is  an  indirect  question  ;  as,  “  I  do  not  know  what 
to  say,”  Non  habeo  quid  dicam.  Non  habebat  quid  responderet.  Be  pueris  quid  agam , 
non  habeo. 


Socrates  accusatus  est  quod  corrumperet  juventutem. 

IV.  When  the  relative  clause  expresses  the  sentiment  or  words — 
not  of  the  speaker  or  writer,  but  of  some  other  person  either  spoken  of 
in  the  sentence  or  to  be  supplied  from  the  context.  By  “  a  relative 
clause”  is  here  meant  any  clause  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun, 
adverb,  or  conjunction,  such  as  qui ,  quo ,  qua ,  quod ,  quonidm ,  etc.— 
E.  g.,  “  Socrates  was  accused  of  corrupting  the  youth.” 


J)  because  (as  it  was  alleged  by  his  accusers,  the  Athenians)  he  corrupted  thQ 
youth. 


182 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Diogenes  contemnebat  divitias  quod  se  felicem  reddere  non  possent.1  JVoc- 
tu  ambulabat  in  publico  Themistocles  quod  somnum  capere  non  posset  * 
Noricis  adversus  Romanos  dabant  animos  Alpes  et  nives ,  quo  bellum  non 
posset  accedere .8  Aristides  nonne  ob  earn  causam  expulsus  est  patria 
quod  prceter  modum  justus  esset  Deum  invocabant  cujus  ad  solemne 
venissent f  Gyges  ceneum  equum  animadvertit  cujus  in  lateribus  fores 
essent .6  Multa  scope  dicit  de  laude  et  gloria ,  quce  sola  sit 7  digna  tot 
laborum  merces.  Pcetus  omnes  libros  quos  f rater  suus  reliquisset ,8  mild 
donavit. 

Note  1. — In  the  preceding  find  similar  sentences,  the  Indicative  (in  the  subor¬ 
dinate  clauses)  would  not  be  incorrect ;  but  it  would  mean  that  the  writer  wTas  con¬ 
vinced  of  the  truth  of  his  assertion,  which  conviction  the  Subjunctive  does  not 
imply. 

Note  2. — Quod  and  quia,  when  joined  to  a  negative  ( non  quod ,  non  eo  quod ,  non 
ideo  quod),  regularly  take  the  Subjunctive,  because  the  clause  introduced  by  non  quod , 
non  quia ,  etc.,  does  not  state  the  true  reason;  as,  Pugiles  in  jactandis  ccestibus  inge- 
miscunt  non  quod  doleant ,  sed  quia  profundenda  voce  omne  corpus  intenditur.  Mo j ores 
nostri  in  dominum  de  servo  queen  noluerunt ,  non  quia  non  posset  verum  inveniri ,  sed 
quia  videbatur  indignum  esse,  Observe  the  real  reason  introduced  by  sed  quod , 

sed  quia,  with  the  Indicative. 

Note  3. — Sometimes  the  speaker  or  writer  states  his  own  sentiment  in  such  a  man¬ 
ner  as  though  it  were  the  sentiment  of  another  person,  and  accordingly  expresses  it 
by  the  Subjunctive;  e.  g.,  Caesar  graviter  yEduos  incusat  quod  tarn  necessario  tempore 
ab  Us  non  sublevetur.  Caesar  quotidie  JEduos  frumentum  quod  publice  essent  polliciti , 
jlagitabat. 

Note  4. — The  expressions  “because  he  thought,”  “because  he  said,”  are  frequently 
rendered  by  the  Subjunctive  ( quod  crederet,  quod  putaret ,  quod  diceret ),  where  we 
might  expect  the  Indicative,  and  where, — not  the  verbs  credo,  puto,  dico,  but  the 
Infinitive  dependent  on  these  verbs,  ought  to  be  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive  ;  e.  g., 
Quurn  exisset  de  castris,  rediit  paulo  post,  quod  se  oblitum  nescio  quid  diceret,  instead  of 
quod  nescio  quid  oblitus  esset. 


J)  because  (as  he  [Diogenes]  said)  they  could  not  . JSIT’  If  the  writer  of  this 

sentence  were  to  allege  the  substance  of  the  relative  clause  as  his  own  opinion,  he 
would  have  said  quod  eum  felicem  reddere  non  poterant,  and  the  Indicative  would 
render  him  responsible  for  the  truth  of  his  allegation.  If  the  relative  clause  were  to 
express  the  sentiment  neither  of  Diogenes,  nor  of  the  writer,  but  of  some  other 
person,  the  text  would  run  thus :  quod  eum  felicem  reddere  non  possent.  Comp. 
§  145,  1.  a)  because  (as  it  was  alleged  by  Themistocles  himself,  or  by  some  other 
person)  he  could  not  sleep.  3)  whether  (as  they  [the  Norici]  thought)  war  could 
not....  4)  because  (as  the  Athenians  pretended)  he  was....  6)  to  whose  solemnity 

(as  it  was  alleged  by  themselves)  they  had  come,  =■  cujus  ad  solemne  se  venisse  dixeruni. 
B)  in  each  side  of  which  there  was  a  door  (as  he  [Gyges]  observed,  or  pretended  to 
have  observed).  7)  which  (according  to  him,  or  as  he  asserts)  is  the  only  reward.... 

quam  solam  dicit  esse  dignam  mercedem ,  etc.  *)  which  as  he  said,  his  brother. . . .  =— 
quos  fratrem  suum  sibi  reliquisse  dicebat. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  183 


Quacuuque  incederent,  impugnabantur. 

Y.  When  in  a  narrative,  after  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  actions 
of  repeated  occurrence  are  spoken  of.  The  verb  of  the  leading  sentence 
is  then  usually  the  Imperfect  Indie.,  whereas  that  of  the  relative  clause 
is  the  Imperf.  or  Pluperf.  Subj. — E.  g.,  “  In  whatever  direction  they 
marched,  they  were  attacked.” 

Quemcunque  lictor  jussu  consults  prehendisset ,  tribunus  mitti  (i.  e., 
liberaTi)  jubebat.  Si  quis  rem  malitiosius  gessisset ,  dedecus  existimabant. 
Socrates  quam  se  cunque  in  partem  dedisset ,  omnium  facile  fuit  princeps , 
Semper  habiti  sunt  (habebantur)  fortissimi ,  qui  summam  imperii  potirem- 
tur.  Hortensius  quae  secum  commentatus  esset ,  ea  sine  scripto  verbis 
eisdem  reddebat  quibus  cogitasset.  Sccevola  simul  atque  luceret ,  faciebat 
omnibus  sui  conveniendi  potestatem. 

Note. — In  such  propositions,  however,  the  Indicative  is  not  less  frequently  used  in 
the  subordinate  clause  than  the  Subjunctive,  and  the  Indicative  would  be  even 
necessary,  if  a  distinct,  particular  case  were  spoken  of. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INTERMEDIATE  CLAUSES. 

I5P”  By  intermediate  clauses  are  meant  those  subordinate  clauses  which  are  con¬ 
nected  with,  or  inserted  in,  other  dependent  propositions. 

Rex  imperat  ut  quae  bello  opus  sint  parentur. 

§  200. — The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  intermediate  clauses,  when  they 
express  the  thoughts  or  words  of  the  person  spoken  of,  and  form  an 
integral  part  either  of  the  statement  implied  in  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  or  of 
the  purpose,  request,  or  command,  expressed  by  the  subjunctive  clause  ; 
as,  “The  king  orders  that  those  things  that  are  necessary  for  war,  be 
prepared.” 

Aristoteles  ait  bestiolas  quasdam  nasci  quee  unum  diem  vivant.  Temere, 
multi  credunt  eum  qui  orationem  bonorum  imitetur ,  etiam  facta  imita- 
turum.  Socrates  dicer e  solebat  omnes  in  eo  quod  scire nt,  satis  esse  elo- 
quentes. — Pietas  erga  Deum  postulat  ut  nihil  ab  eo  expetatur  quod  sit 
inhonestum  atque  injustum.  Omnis  virtus  facit  ut  eos  diligamus  quibus 
ipsa  inesse  videatur. 

Note  1. — When  such  intermediate  clauses  do  not  express  the  thoughts  or  words  of 
the  person  spoken  of,  nor  form  an  integral  part  either  of  the  statement  implied  in  the 
Acc.  c.  Inf.,  or  of  the  purpose,  request,  or  command,  expressed  by  the  subjunctive 
clause,  they  must  be  regarded  as  merely  explanatory  remarks  of  the  speaker  or 
writer,  and  as  such  be  expressed  by  the  Indicative. 


181 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Eor  the  sake  of  explanation  let  us  take  the  following1  sentences : 

(a)  Dixit  mihi  in  somnis  Scipio,  omnem  terram  quam  incolamus ,  parvam  quondam 
insulam  esse  mari  circumfusam. — In  this  example  the  words  spoken  by  Scipio,  were: 
Omnis  terra  quam  incolitis  parva  qucedam  insula  est  mari  circumfusa. .  The  relative 
clause  quam  incolitis ,  forming  a  part  of  this  statement,  is  therefore  expressed  by  the 
Subjunctive.  Had  Seipio  simply  said  :  Tei'ra  parva  qucedam  insula  est  mari  circum- 
fusa ,  then  the  relative  clause,  being  not  included  in  this  statement,  would,  as  a 
merely  explanatory  remark  of  the  narrator,  be  expressed  by  the  Indicative,  and  the 
whole  proposition  would  run  thus :  Dixit  mihi  in  somnis  Scipio ,  terram  quam  inco- 
limus ,  parvam  quondam  insulam  esse  mari  circumfusam. 

(b)  Hannibal  Scipionem  prcestantem  virum  esse  credebat  quod  adversus  se  dux  electus 
esset. — Here  the  subordinate  clause  quod  adversus  se  dux  electus  esset,  forms  an  integral 
part  of  Hannibal’s  thought  (which  was  :  Scipio  vir  prcestans  est  quod  adversus  me  dux 
est  electus'),  and  is,  therefore,  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive.  Had  Hannibal’s  thought 
been  simply :  Scipio  vir  prcestans  est ,  the  subordinate  clause,  being  a  merely  explanatory 
remark  of  the  writer,  would  have  been  expressed  by  the  Indicative :  quod  adversus 
eum  dux  electus  erat. 

(c)  Sempronius  rogat  ut  Virgilii  opera ,  quae  nuper  a  patre  dono  accepi,  sibi  quam- 
primum  transmittam. — In  this  proposition  the  Indicative  accepi  shows  that  the  relative 
clause  is  but  an  explanatory  remark  of  the  writer,  and  not  a  part  of  Sempronius’s 
request,  which  was  simply  this:  Mitte  mihi  quamprimum  Virgilii  opera. — Had  the 
request  been :  Hitte  mihi  quampidmum  Virgilii  opera  quae  nuper  a  patre  dono  accepisti 
the  relative  clause,  forming  an  integral  part  of  this  request,  would  then  have  been 
expressed  by  the  Subjunctive:  quce  nuper  acceperim. 

Note  2. — When  the  inserted  clause  is  a  mere  circumlocution  (as,  iiqui  audiunt  for 
auditor es ;  ii  qui  prcesunt  for  magistratus,  duces ,  or  proof  ecti  ;  ii  quijudicant  for  judi- 
ces  ;  ii  qui  post  nos  futuri  sunt  for  posteri ;  ea  quae  Hannibal  gesserat  for  Hannibalis  res 
gestae  ;  ea  quae  sciunt  homines  for  res  cognitoe  ;  ea  quce  ignorant  for  res  incognitos,  etc.), 
it  commonly  matters  little  whether  such  a  clause  be  considered  as  a  part  of  the  sen¬ 
tence  to  which  it  belongs,  or  as  a  merely  explanatory  remark  of  the  writer  or  speaker. 
We  are,  therefore,  at  liberty  to  use  either  the  Indicative  or  the  Subjunctive.  E.  g., 
Tune  putas  eos  qui  oratorem  audiunt  (or  audiant)  ita  semper  effici,  ut  orator  velit  ?  Sic 
habitote  magistratibus  Usque  qui  prcesint  (or  prcesunt)  rempublicam  contineri.  Eloquendi 
vis  ejjicit  ut  ea  quce  ignorant  (or  ignorent)  homines,  discere  et  ea  quce  sciunt  (or  sciant) 
alios  docere  possint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  GENERAL  SENTENCES. 

Tamdiu  discenduin  est  quamdiu  vivas. 

§  201. — The  Subjunctive  (especially  the  2d  pers.  sing.)  is  used  in 
general  sentences  in  which  no  definite  subject  is  spoken  of.  The  Eng¬ 
lish  language,  in  this  case,  frequently  uses  the  indefinite  pronoun  “  one” 
(French,  on  ;  German,  man).  E.  g.,  “  One  must  learn,  as  long  as  he 
is  alive.” 

Non  decet  ea  vituperare  quce  non  intelligas.  Stultum  est  ea  docere 
velle  quce  nunquam  didicer  is.  '  Nulla  est  excusatio  peccati  si  amici  causa 
peccaveris.  Memoria  minuitur  nisi  cam  exerceas  aut  si  sis  natura 
tardior.  Stultum  est  timere  quod  vitare  non  goossis 


wwciuawr 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


185 


IMPERATIVE. 

Vale,  amice  ! 

202. — The  Imperative  has  two  forms  :  the  present  (scribe,  scribite) 
and  the  future  ( scribito ,  scribitote ,  scribunto). — Thus, 

Valetudinem  tuam  cura  diligenter.  Si  quid  in  te  peccavi,  ignosce. — 
Quum  valetudini  tuce  consulueris ,  turn  consulito  navigationi.  Servus 
mens  liber  esto.  Judices  ne  prcemium  capiunto  neve 1  danto.  Regio 
imperio  duo  sunto  iique  Consules  appellantor. 

Note  1. — The  future  form  is  chiefly  used  by  rulers  and  lawgivers, — in  contracts 
and  wills,  and,  in  general,  when  a  command  or  request  is  expressed  with  reference  to 
future  time. 

Note  2. — Scio  and  memini ,  habeo  in  the  sense  of  “to  know,”  and  sum  in  the  con¬ 
cessive  phrase  “be  it  so,”  admit  of  the  future  form  only;  as  scito,  scitote  ;  memento , 
mernentote ;  sic  habeto  or  habetote  ;  esto  or  verum  esto.  E.  g.,  Dolabella  tuo  nihil  mihi 
scito  esse  jucundius.  Sic  habeto  non  te  esse  mortalem ,  sed  corpus  hoc. 

Note  8. — The  English  imperative  form  “let  us,”  as  a  request  or  advice,  is  ren¬ 
dered  in  Latin  by  the  1st  pers.  plur.  of  the  Pres.  Subj. ;  as,  “  Let  us  rise,”  Surgamus. 
— Imitemur  nostros  Camillos,  Fabricios  •  amemus  patriam ,  pareamus  Senatui.  Memi- 
nerimus  nos  esse  mortales. 

When  “let”  is  equivalent  to  “  allow  or  permit,”  it  is  expressed  by  sino,  patior,  or 
permitto ,  with  either  the  Subj.,  or  the  Acc.  c.  Inf. ;  e.  g.,  “Let  us  go,”  Sinite  abeamus, 
or  Sinite  nos  abire. — “Let  him  write,”  Sine  scribat. — “  Let  me  come  to  you,”  Sine  ad 
le  veniam ,  or  Sine  me  ( patiaris  me,  permitte  mihi)  ad  te  venire. 

§  203. — The  Imperative  is  either  affirmative  or  negative,  according  as 
something  is  commanded  or  forbidden. 

1.  Instead  of  the  affirmative  Imperative  we  may  use  : 

(a)  The  Subj.  Present;  as,  “Let  him  come,”  Veniat. — “Let  them  go,”  Abeant. — 
“  Let  your  attitude,  gait,  etc.,  be  decorous,”  Status ,  incessus ,  vultus ,  oculi ,  teneant 
decorum. 

(b)  Cura,  fac,  velim,  with  the  Subjunctive  (see  §95.  Note  8.);  as,  “Keep  up 
good  spirits  and  good  hope,”  Magnum  fac  animum  habeas  et  bonam  spem.  Cura  ut 
quam  primum  venias.  Valetudinem  tuam  velim  cures  diligentissime.  Nolim  me 
jocari  putcs. 

(c)  The  Indicative  Future;  as,  Si  quid  acciderit  novi,  facies  ut  sciam.  Tu  et  ad 
omnia  rescribes  et  quando  te  expectem ,  facies  me  certiorem. 

2.  Instead  of  the  negative,  or  prohibitive,  Imperative  we  may  use: 

(a)  The  Subjunctive  with  ne  ;  as,  Puer  telum  ne  habeat.  Quod  dubitas ,  ne  feceris. 
Ne  cui  hoc  dixeris.  Ne  dubitaris  mittere.  ( The  2d  pers.  sing,  of  the  Subj.  Per¬ 
fect,  in  the  sense  of  the  Present,  is  quite  common.) 


l)  With  the  Imperative  render  “  not”  by  ne, — and  “  nor,”  by  neve  (not  neque). 


186 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


(b)  Cave  and  fac  ne  with  the  Subjunctive ;  as,  Cave  hoc  facias.  Cave  dixeris.  Cave 
exist imes  me  abjecisse  curam  reipublicce.  Fac  ne  quid  aliud  cures  nisi  ut  convalescas. 

(c)  Noli  with  the  Infinitive;  as,  Noli putare.  Noli  agere  confuse.  Nolite  timere. 

(d)  The  Indicative  Future  with  non  ;  as,  Tu  non  cessabis,  for  ne  cessa. 


INFINITIVE. 

§  204. — The  Infinitive  is  used  either  subjectively  or  objectively : — 
subjectively,  when  it  stands  as  the  nominative  to  the  verb,  as  Erran 
humanum  est  ;  parcere  victis  honestum  est ; — objectively,  when  it  stands 
as  the  accusative  to  the  verb,  as  Sequi  signet ,  ordines  servare  didicerunt ; 
ferre  laborem  consuetudo  docet. 

Note  1. — The  Infinitive  is  used  objectively,  especially  after  such  verbs  as  volo ,  nolo , 
malo ,  cupio ,  opto,  studeo  ;  propono,  decerno ,  statuo,  constituo  ;  possum,  qveo,  nequeo ‘ 
soleo,  assuesco ,  consuesco  ;  conor,  nitor,  tento,  contendo ;  festino,  maturo,  propero  •  audeo , 
debeo ;  ccepi,  incipio,  pergo,  perseve.ro,  desino,  cesso  ;  cogo ,  doceo,  disco ,  scio,  nescio , 
memini,  obliviscor,  and  others  which  do  not  express  a  complete  idea  by  themselves. 

Note  2. — When  the  Infinitive  of  sum  or  of  one  of  those  verbs  that  are  construed 
with  two  nominatives  (§  154),  is  accompanied  by  a  predicate-noun  or  adjective,  the 
latter  is  put  either  in  the  nominative  or  accusative. 

(a)  The  predicate  noun  or  adjective  is  put  in  the  nominative,  when  the  Infinitive  is 
used  objectively,  that  is,  when  the  Infinitive  is  the  accusative  to  the  verb.  E.  g., 
Didici  esse  prudens.  Malo  bonus  esse  quam  dives.  Audeamus  esse  bond  et  sapientes. 
Desine  tandem  mild  molestus  esse.  Perge  esse  bonus  et  diligens.  Grcecia  eloquentia 
princeps  esse  voluit. 

(b)  The  predicate  noun  or  adjective  is  put  in  the  accusative,  when  the  Infinitive  is 
used  subjectively,  that  is,  when  the  Infinitive  is  the  nominative  to  the  verb.  E.  g., 
Non  cidvis  datum  est  esse  prudentem.  Prcestat  bonum  esse  quam  divitem.  Memorem  esse 
acceptorum  beneficiorum ,  grati  animi  est.  Contentum  esse  suis  rebus,  maximee  sun i 
certissimceque  divitice. 

Note  3. — With  an  Infinitive  pass.,  the  forms  coeptus  sum  and  desitus  sum  are  gen¬ 
erally  used  instead  of  ccepi  and  clesii  (§  71,  2) ;  but  the  active  forms  are  found  also. — 
E.  g.,  Vasa  fictilia,  serpentibus  repleta,  in  naves  conjici  ccepta  sunt.  Contemni  ccepti 
erant  a  fmitimis  populis. —  Veteres  orationes  a  plerisque  legi  sunt  desitce.  Hie  est  Papirius, 
qui  primus  Papirius  est  vocari  desitus.  Desitum  est  videri  quidquam  in  socios  iniquum , 
cum  extitisset  in  cives  tarda  crudelitas. 

Note  4. — In  animated  narrative  and  in  descriptions  the  Infinitive  Present  is  often 
used  instead  of  the  Indie.  Perfect  or  Imperf.,  to  represent  past  events  as  going  on 
before  our  eyes.  This  is  what  is  called  the  historical  Infinitive.  E.g.,“ The 
man  began  to  hesitate,  to  look  away,  to  color;”  Hcerere  homo,  aversari,  rubere.  Hit 
judex  ridere,  stomachari  patronus.  Postquam  in  cedes  irruperunt,  diversi  regem 
quaerere ,  dormientes  alios,  alios  occursantes  interjicere,  scrutari  loca  abdita ,  clausa 
ef'ringere,  strepitu  et  tumultu  omnia  miscere. — And  the  Poet : 

Nos  pavidi  trepidare  metu  crinemque  flagrantem 
Excutere  et  sanctos  restinguere  fontibus  ignem. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


187 


; 


THE  INFINITIVE  IN  INDIRECT  NARRATION 

§  205. — Narration  is  either  direct  or  indirect. 

Direct  Narration  is  the  way  of  stating  the  words  of  another  precisely 
as  they  were  uttered  ;  e.  g.,  He  said  :  “I  will  come,” 

Indirect  Narration  is  the  way  of  stating  the  words  of  another  indi¬ 
rectly,  that  is,  dependent  on  a  verb  sentiendi  or  declarandi ;  e.  g.,  “  He 
said  that  he  would  come.” 

(Dir.)  He  said :  “  I  can  scarcely  bel'eve  what  you  tell  me.” 

(Ind.)  He  said  that  he  could  scarcely  believe  what  I  told  him. 


Dicit  se  venturum  si  possit. 

§  206. — In  indirect  Narration, 

(a)  Principal  sentences  are  expressed  by  the  Acc.  c.  Infinitive  ; 

(b)  Subordinate  clauses  are  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive.  E.  g., 

(Dir.)  Veniam  si  possum  (or  potero). 

(Ind.)  Dicit  se  venturum  si  possit. 

(Dir.)  Placet  mihi  quod  facis. 

(Ind.)  Dixit  placere  sibi  quod  facerem,  or  faciam  (Note  5,  b). 

(Dir.)  Dabo  tibi  si  vis. 

(Ind.)  Dixit  se  mihi  daturum  si  vellem,  or  velim  (Note  5,  b). 

Note  1. — Clauses  introduced  by  nam,  enim ,  igitur ,  ideo,  propterea ,  qui-ppe,  videlicet, 
sed ,  verum,  autem ,  quidem ,  and  relative  clauses  in  which  the  relative  is  equivalent  to 
et  with  a  demonstrative,  are  regarded  as  principal  sentences  and  accordingly  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.  E.  g.,  Themistocles  apud  Lacedcemonios  liberrime  prqfessus 
est,  Athenienses  suo  consilio  Deos  patrios  muris  sepsisse  ;  nam  illorum  urbem  ut  pro- 
pugnaculum  oppositam  esse  barbaris ,  avud  quam  (et  apud  earn)  jam  bis  classes  regias 
fecisse  naufragium. 

Note  2. — Questions  of  the  1st  and  Sd  persons,  which  in  direct  Narration  are 
expressed  by  the  Indicative,  are  in  indirect  Narration  generally  expressed  by  the  Acc. 
c.  Inf.  ;  but  questions  addressed  to  the  2d  person,  and  also  Imperatives  and  requests, 
are  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive.  E.  g., 

(Ihr.)  [Words  of  the  populace.]  Quid  vivimus ?  quid  in  parts-  ewi'um  censemur ,  si 
quod  duorum  hominum  virtute par  turn  est ,  id  obtinere  universi  nm  possuntf- 

(Ind.)  Plebs  /remit,  quid  se  vivere?  quid  in  pavte  civium  etnseri,  si  quod  duorum 
'hominum  virtute  part-um  sit,  id  universi  obtinere  non  possintt 

(Dir.)  [Words  of  the  general.]  Omnia  perdita  sunt.  Nonne  hostem  mdetis  undique. 
irruentem  ?  quid  spei  vobis  reliquum  est,  avt  quid  ego  auxilii  ferre  pos&um  ?  Ipsi  vobis 
consulate,  fuga  salutem  petite. 

(Ind.)  Haic  fere  militibus  dux:  omniq \  esse  perdita—rionns  hpstem  viderent 


18S 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


que  irruentem  t  quid  ipsis  spei  reliquum  esse ,  aut  quid  se  auxilii  ferre  posse  ?  ipsi  sibt 
consulerent,  fuga  salutem  pete  rent. 

Questions  of  the  1st  and  3d  persons,  which  in  direct  Narration  are  expressed  by 
the  Subjunctive,  in  indirect  Narration  either  retain  the  same  mood,  or  are  rendered 
by  the  Ace.  c.  Inf.  ;  E.  g., 

(Dir.)  "What  (said  he)  shall  I  do  ?  Quidfaciam? 

(Ind.)  Quid  (inquit)  faceret  ?  or  quid  se  facturum  ? 

(Dir.)  Who  (said  lie)  will  persuade  himself?  Quis  sibi  persuadeot? 

(Ind.)  Quis  sibi  persuader et?  or  quem  sibi  persuasurum  ? 

Note  8. — The  verb,  or  participle  on  which  the  Infinitive  or  Subjunctive  depends,  is 
often  omitted  in  indirect  Narration  ;  as,  Legatos  ad  Ccesarem  mitt unt  (dicentes),  sese 
parat.os  esse  portas  aperire.  Procumbunt  Gallis  ad  pedes  Bituriges  (obsecrarites),  ne 
pulcherrimam  prope  totius  Gallice  urbem  suis  manibus  succendere  cogerentur. 

Note  4. — When  a  subordinate  clause  does  not  make  part  of  the  words  or  thoughts 
of  the  person  spoken  of,  but  is  thrown  in  as  an  explanatory  remark  of  the  writer  him- 
Belf,  the  Indicative  is  used  (Compare  §  200,  1). — E.  g.,  Themistocles  certiorem  regem 
fecit ,  id  agi  ut  pons  quem  idle  in  Eellesponto  fecerat ,  dissolveretur.  JJisseruit  Ccesar  non 
quidem  ea  sibi  ignara  quas  de  Silano  vulgabantur ,  sed  non  ex  rumore  statuendum. 

Note  5. — In  indirect  Narration,  the  Present  and  Perfect  Subj.  are  often  used,  where 
the  general  rule  would  require  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect.  This  is  the  case : 

(a)  When  the  clause  expresses  a  general  truth,  i.  e.,  when  that  which  is  said, 
holds  good  at  all  times  and  in  all  places ;  as, 

(Dir.)  Pauci  eo  quod  habent,  contenti  sunt. 

(Ind.)  Zeno  dicebat  paucos  eo  quod  habeant,  contentos  esse. 

(Dir.)  Invitus  feci  quod  quereris  :  nemo  enim  vult  eum  offendere  a  quo  beneficia  accepit. 

(Ind.)  Ajfirmabat  se  invitum fecisse  quod  quererer.  JSeminem  adeo  insipientem  esse  ut 
eum  offendere  velit  a  quo  beneficia  acceperit. 

(b)  After  the  Present  and  Future  Infin.,  when  they  depend  on  a  past  tense,  and 
after  the  Perfect  Infin., whatever  be  then  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb,  provided  the 
Present  and  Perfect  stand  in  direct  Narration. — Ctesar,  in  case  (b),  generally  uses  the 
Present  and  Perfect  Subj.;  Cicero  and  Livy,  on  the  contrary,  use  the  Imperfect 
and  Pluperfect.  E.  g., 

(Direct.) 

Intelligo  )  I  agat. 

Intellexi  >  quid  •<  egerit. 

Intelligam  )  ( acturus  sit. 

(I  n  direct.) 


quid  ageret  or  agat. 

"  quid  egissel  or  egerit. 
quid  acturus  asset  or  sit, 

A 


'Dicebat 

Dixit 

Dixerat 


se  intelligere,  or 
se  intcllecturum 


After  nny) 
tense  > 
of  Dico  ; 


se  intelloxisse 


USE  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  -DUS. 


180 


THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  -DUS. 

§  201. — The  Participle  in  dus,  or  as  it  is  often  called,  the  Gerundive, 
it.  a  verbal  adjective  of  three  endings,  expressing  in  the  nominative 
(and,  in  the  construction  of  the  Acc.  c.  Inf.,  in  the  accusative  also) 
necessity ,  duty ,  or  conveniency ;  as,  liber  legendus,  a  book  worth  read¬ 
ing — a  book  to  be  read — a  book  which  must  be,  or  ought  to  be  read. 

In  the  remaining  cases,  the  Participle  in  dus  often  seems  to  change 
its  meaning,  but  it  only  appears  to  do  so ;  as, 

Consilium  epistolce  scribendce,  an  intention  of  writing  a  letter  (=*  an  intention  with 
respect  to  a  letter  to-be- written). 

Idoneus  ferendis  oneribus,  fit  for  carrying  burdens  (=  fit  for  burdens  to-be-carried). 

Vinculum  ad  connectendas  amicitias ,  a  bond  for  forming  friendships  (==  a  bond  for 
friendships  to-be-formed) . 

Note. — The  Participle  in  dus  does  not  convey  by  itself  the  idea  of  futurity,  but 
simply  denotes  necessity.  Thus,  e.  g.,  epistola  scribenda  means  a  letter  that  must  be 
written,  and  not  one  that  will  be  written. — A  reference  to  future  time  may  indeed  be 
implied,  but  this  arises  from  the  connection  rather  than  from  the  Participle  itself,  as 
in  the  following  sentences :  Missus  erat  ad  naves  comparandas.  Avi  capita  magis 
capior 1  quam  capiendo,.  Ego  censeo  Carthaginem  esse  delendam ,  etc. 

§  208. — The  Participle  in  dus  is  expressed  in  English'  by  such  words 
and  phrases,  as  must ,  ought ,  should ,  to  be  bound ,  to  be  obliged ,  it  is 
necessary ,  it  is  e.  g.  to  be  done*  it  has  to  be  done ,  etc.  When  these  and 
similar  expressions  remain  untranslated  in  Latin,  their  value  must  be 
given  by  the  Participle  in  dus.  Thus,  the  sentence  :  “  It  is  necessary 
for  all  to  practise  virtue, ,J  can  be  rendered 

Omnes  virtutem  colere  debent , 

Omnes  virtutem  colant  oportet, 

Virtus  ab  omnibus  colatur  necesse  est, 

or,  by  omitting  debeo,  oportet ,  necesse  est,  and  changing  the  verb  colo 
into  the  Participle  in  dus  with  sum : 

Virtus  omnibus  colenda  est. 

Note. — In  the  use  of  the  Participle  in  dus  let  the  pupil  attend  to  the  following 
directions : 

(1.)  Change  the  verb  connected  with  must,  ought,  or  any  other  word  implying 
necessity,  into  the  Participle  in  dus  with  sum  j 


J)  A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in  the  bush.  2)  When  it  is  followed  by  the 
Inf.  pass.,  is  equivalent  to  it  may  or  it  can ,  do  not  render  it  by  the  Partic.  in  dus ,  but 
translate  it  by  possum;  e.  g.,  “This  passage  is  to  be  found  in  the  first  book’’ =•  this 
r-assage  may  or  can  be  found,  etc. 


190 


USE  OF  TEE  PARTICIPLE  IN  -DUS. 


(2.)  See  whether  this  verb  be  transitive  or  intransitive  (§  46),  and  if  transitive, 
Whether  its  object  be  expressed  or  not ; 

(3.)  See  whether  the  Agent  be  expressed,  that  is,  the  person  by  whom  anything 
is  to  be  done, — who  has  to  do,  or  is  bound  to  do  any  thing. 

HggT*  To  find  the  object  and  the  Agent,  simply  ask  these  two  questions; 

1.  What  must  be  e.  g.  loved,  praised,  given,  sent,  etc.? 

2.  Who  must  love,  praise,  give,  send,  etc.  ? 

The  answer  to  the  first  question  is  the  object ;  that  to  the  second,  the  Agent. 

Deus  amandus  est. 

§  209. — When  the  verb  is  transitive  and  its  object  expressed,  the 
object  is  put  in  the  nominative  and  the  Participle  in  dus  with  sum, 
made  to  agree  with  it  accordingly;  as,  “  God  deserves  to  be  loved,”  or 
“  God  is  to  be  loved.” 

Summa  pietati  laus  tribuenda  est.  Qucerilur  sitne  prceponenda.  divitiis 
gloria  '?  Suo  quceque  tempore  facienda  sunt. — Senes  venerandos  esse  quis 
neget?  Tibi  persuadeas  velim  virtutem  vel  in  hosts  esse  laudandam. 
Omnem  memoriam  discordiarum  oblivione  sempiterna  delendam  esse 
censeo.. 

Note. — When  the  object  of  a  verb  transitive  is  a  whole  clause,  or  when  no  object  is 
expressed  at  all,  the  Participle  in  dus  with  sum  is  construed  impersonally.  E.  g., 
“It  will  always  be  necessary  to  learn,”  Semper  discendum  erit.  Modo  legendum  est, 
modo  scribendum. — Confitendum  est  omne  animal  esse  mortale.  Videndum  est  non  modo 
quid’  quisque  loguatur ,  sed  etiam  quid  quisque  sentiat. 


Promissis  stand  um  est. 

§  210. — When  the  verb  is  intransitive,  the  Participle  in  dus  with 
sum,  is  construed  impersonally,  and  when  any  case  depends  on  the  verb, 
it  must  be  retained  in  Latin,  whatever  be  the  case  employed  in  English; 
as,  “  Promises  must  be  kept,”  or  “  It  is  necessary  to  keep  one’s 
promises.” 

Moriendum  certe  erit.  Quceris  ex  me,  quemadmodum  sit  cum  amicis 
vivendum.  Si  in  alterutro  peccandum  est,  malo  videri  nimis  timidus 
quam  parum  prudens. — Non  est  obliviscendum  reipublicce.  Ilosti  victo 
parcendum  est.  Audiendi  non  sunt  qui  graviter  irascendum  {esse) 
inimicis  putant „  Tempore  et  occasions  utendum  est. 

Note  1. — The  impersonal  construction  sometimes  occurs  even  with  transitive 
verbs,  but  only  in  ante-  and  post-classical  writers;  o.  g.,  jEternas  pcenas  in  morte 
iimendum  est;  mihi  hac  node  agendum  est  vigil ias ,  etc.,  instead  of  AEternae  in  morte 
poeruB  timet  idee  sunt ;  mihi  hac  node  agendee  sunt  vigilice. — Whoever  aspires  to  purity 
of  language,  should  carefully  avoid  this  unclassical  form;  nor  should  any  one  allege 


USE  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN’  -DUS. 


191 


in  his  favor  tin,  two  isolated  passages  in  which  even  Cicero  employs  it,  once  with  the 
verb  ingredior:  Via  quam  (according  to  others,  qua)  nobis  quoque  ingrediendum  est,— 
and  another  time,  in  some  fragment,  with  the  verb  obliviscor  :  Obliviscendum  nobis 
putatis  matrurn  in  liberos  scelera  t — In  Cicero,  such  forms  of  expression  are  exceptions 
that  must  be  respected,  but  not  imitated. 

Note  2. — The  verbs  utor,  fruor ,  fuvgor ,  and  potior ,  though  they  govern  the  abla¬ 
tive,  are  often  in  the  Participle  in  dus  construed  like  transitive  verbs  ;  as,  Non 
paranda  nobis  solum ,  sed  etiam  fruenda  est  sapientia.  Omnia  bona  ei  utendci  ac 
possidenda  tradiderat. 


Etiam  senibns  discendum  est. 

§  211. — The  Agent  is  put  in  the  dative,  and  when  there  is  already 
another  dative,  in  the  ablative  with  ab  ;  as,  “Even  old  men  have  to 
learn.” 

Sua  c.uique  sors  ferenda  est.  Tria  videnda  sunt  oratori ,  quid  dicat , 
quo  quidque  loco,  et  quomodo.  Quis  est  qui  nesciat  sibi  quandoque 
moriendum  esse  ?  Juveni  parandum,  seni  utendum  est. — Aguntur  Iona 
multorum  civium,  quibus  est  a  vobis  consulendum.  Non  tibi  a  me,  sed 
a  te  mihi  ratio  reddenda  est. 

Note  1. — The  datives  mihi ,  tibi ,  nobis ,  and  vobis ,  are  commonly  left  out  in  Latin, 
(a)  when  no  particular  person  is  meant,  but  people  in  general;  (b)  when  “we”  and 
“  you”  are  joined  to  verbs  that  govern  the  dative,  and  (c)  when  the  person  meant 
can  easily  be  supplied  from  the  context.  E.  g.,  “  Sooner  or  later  we  shall  have  to 
die,”  Serins  ocius  moriendum  erit.  Non  cuivis  komini  credendum  est.  Discendum  (tibi) 
est  ut  possis  docere.  Edendum  (nobis)  est ,  ut  possimus  vivere. 

Note  2. — With  the  verbs  do,  trado ,  tribuo  ;  concedo,  permitto  ;  accipio ,  suscipio ; 
mitto ,  appono ,  relinquo,  and  others  of  a  similar  meaning,  the  purpose  for  which  any 
thing  is  given,  sent,  received,  etc.,  is  expressed  passively  hy  the  Partic.  in  dus, 
which  is  to  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the  object  given,  sent,  received. 
E.  g.,  “I  send  you  this  book  to  read,”  Mitto  tibi  hunc  librum  legendum.  Demus  nos 
philosophies,  excolendos.  Bex  Harpago  Oyrum  infantem  occidendum  tradidit.  Lentulus 
totam  ltaliam  vastandam  diripiendamque  Catilince  attribuit.  Datames  nrbes  tuendas 
(the  defence  of)  suis  tradidit.  Diomedon  Epaminondam pecunia  corrumpendum  (under¬ 
took  to  bribe)  suscepit.  Hoec  porcis  comedenda  relinquimus.  Natura  mnlieri  domestica 
negotia  curanda  (intrusted  the  care  of)  tradidit. 

This  use  of  the  Participle  in  dus  often,  also,  occurs  with  loco,  “  to  give  some¬ 
thing  in  contract,”  i.  e.,  to  contract  for  having  a  thing  done;  conduco,  “to  con¬ 
tract  for  doing  a  thing,  and  euro ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  cause  or  order  a  thing  to  be 
done,”  or  “to  have  it  done.”  E.  g.,  Redemptor  columnam  Jovis  faciendum  con- 
duxerat.1  Mummius  maximorum  artificum  tabidas  ac  statuas  in  ltaliam  portandas 
locavit?  Conon  muros  a  Lysandro  dirutos  reficiendos  curavit. 


J)  The  contractor  had  undertaken  to  erect....  2)  contracted  for  having . 

brought  to  Italy,  or  gave  the  transportation  of  ... .  in  contract,  or  contracted  for  tho 
freight  of  ... .  to  Italy. 


192 


USE  OF  THE  GERUNDS. 


GERUNDS. 

§  212. — Tlie  Gerund  is  nothing  else  than  the  neuter  of  the  Participle  in 
dus. — Gerunds  govern  the  case  of  their  verbs,  hut  are  used  only  in  the  oblique 
cases,  that  is,  in  the  Gen.,  Dat.,  Acc.,  and  Abl.  singular. 

General  remark. — When  any  Gerund  is  followed  by  an  object-accusative, 
the  object  is  generally  put  in  the  case  of  the  Gerund;  the  Gerund  itself  is 
changed  into  the  Participle  in  dus,  and  the  latter  made  to  agree  with  the 
object  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


Ars  scribendi. 

§  213.  The  Genitive  of  the  Gerund  is  used:  (a)  after  certain  sub¬ 
stantives,  such  as  ars,  causa ,  consilium ,  consuetudo ,  cupiditas ,  facultas , 
libido ,  metus ,  modus ,  occasio ,  potestas,  ratio,  scientia,  spes,  studium ,  timor , 
vis,  voluntas ,  etc.,  when  the  question  what ,  asked  in  connection  with 
any  of  these  substantives  is  answered  by  a  verb;  as,  “The  art  ( what 
art  ? — )  of  writing  — (b)  after  those  adjectives  which  govern  a  geni¬ 
tive,  as  avidus,  cupidus,  studiosus,  certus,  ignarus,  nescius,  peritus,  im- 
peritus ,  etc.,  when  they  belong  to  a  verb,  as  “Desirous  {of  what? — )  of 
learning,”  cupidus  discendi ;  “  Skilled  {in  what  ? — )  in  swimming,” 
peritus  natandi ;  and  (c)  after  causa  and  gratia ,  “  for  the  sake  of.” 

Sapientia  est  ars  bene  vivendi.  Optime  peccatum  evitat  qui  occasiones 
fugit  peccamdi.  Titus  Augustus  equitandi  peritissimus  fuit.  Avari 
homines  non  solum  libidine  augendi  cruciantur,  sed  etiam  metu  amittendi. 
Qui  darn  canes  venandi  gratia  comparantur. 

AVith  an  object-accusative. —  Quis  ignorat  Gallos  usque  ad  hanc  diem 
retinere  illam  immanem  ac  barbaram  consuetudinem  hominum  immolan - 
dorum  (immolandi  homines)  ?  Timotheus  civitatis  regendce  (regendi 
civitatem)  peritissimus  fuit. 

Note  1. — The  change  of  the  Gerund  into  the  Partic.  in  dus  is  not  allowed,  (a)  when  the 
object-accusative  is  the  neuter  of  an  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  such  as  hoc,  id, 
illud,  ea ,  vera,  multa,  etc.  Accordingly  we  ought  to  say :  Cupiditas  have  vet  ilia  videndi ; 
ars  vera  et  falsa  dijudicandi,  and  the  like  ;  and  not,  Cupiditas  horum  videndorum  ;  ars 
verorum  et  falsorum  dijudicandorum,  because  from  these  constructions  we  would  not 
know  whether  things  or  persons  are  meant;  (b)  when  the  object-accusative  does 
not  depend  on  the  Gerund,  but  on  a  preposition  understood  ;  as,  Cupidus  sum  profi - 
ciscendi  Romam,  not  Romce  proficiscendce ;  (c)  when  the  too  frequent  repetition  of  the 
same  termination  would  produce  an  uncouth,  monotonous  sound,  as  in  the  following 
sentence  :  Romanos  splendidorum  et  magnificorum  majorum  templorum  ac  deorum 
simulacrorum  sanctissimorum  videndorum  desiderium  tenebat.  How  much  better 


USE  OF  THE  GEEUNDS. 


193 


thus  :  Romanos  splendida  et  magnijlca  majorum  templa  ac  deorum  simulacra  sanciissima 
videndi  desiderium  tenebat. 

Note  2. — When  the  accompanying  object-accusative  is  one  of  the  personal  pro¬ 
nouns  me,  te,  se ,  nos ,  or  vos ,  the  pronoun  is  generally  put  in  the  case  of  the  Gerund 
( mei ,  tui ,  sui ,  nostri ,  vestri) ,  but  the  Gerund  itself  is  left  unchanged,  though  the 
pronoun  be  plural  or  of  the  feminine  gender.  E.  g.,  Legati  sui  purgandi  causa  vene- 
runt.  Vestri  salutandi  et  confirmandi  gratia  adveni. 

Note  8. — Tempus  est ,  “there  is  a  time  for,”  “to  have  leisure  for,”  is  followed  by  the 
genitive  of  the  Gerund;  as,  “There  is  a  time  for  speaking  and  a  time  for  being 
silent,”  Est  tempus  loquendi  et  tempus  tacendi.  Gerte  tibi  tempus  est  paululum  fdc  com - 
morandi. — But  when  tempus  est  is  equivalent  to  tempestivum  est ,  “  it  is  now  high  time 
to,”  the  Infinitive  should  be  used.  E.  g.,  Expergiscere ,  Mar  cede,  tempus  est  surgere. 
Tempus  est  hujus  libri  finem  facer  e.  Tempus  est  jam  majora  conari. 

Note  4. — Such  forms  as  exemplorum  eligendi  potestas ,  Gic.  ;  agrorum  condonandi 
facultas,  Cic. ;  eorum  adipiscendi  causa ,  Cic.  ;  licentia  diripiendi  pomorum,  Suet. ; 
rejiciendi  amplius  quam  trium  judicum  potestas,  Cic.,  and  the  like,  though  found  in 
the  best  writers,  are  irregularities  which  are  difficult  to  be  accounted  for,  and  which 
should  not  be  imitated  in  good  prose. 

In  like  manner,  expressions  such  as  cantare  peritus,  cupidus  attingere,  cedere 
nescius ,  avidus  committer e  pugnam,  etc.,  being  purely  poetical,  ought  to  be  avoided 

in  prose. 


Utilis  arando. 

§  214. — The  Dative  of  the  Gerund  is  used :  (a)  after  adjectives 
denoting  fitness  and  usefulness,  as  par,  impar ,  noxius ,  aptus ,  idoneus , 
utilis ,  inutilis ,  etc.,  e.  g.,  “  Good  for  ploughing;” — (b)  after  certain 
verbs  and  expressions  denoting  a  purpose  or  design,  such  as  studere , 
operam  dare ,  intentum  esse ,  tempus  insumere  or  impend  ere,  sufficere, 
prceesse,  satis  esse ,  and  esse  in  the  sense  of  “  to  I/e  able,”  “  to  serve 
or.” 

Charta  emporetica  inutilis  est  scribendo.  Magius  solvendo  non  erat. 
Non  omnis  debitor  est  solvendo.  Aqua  nitrosa  utilis  est  bibendo.  Rubens 
ferrum  non  est  habile  tundendo. 

With  an  object-accusative. — Sunt  nonnulli  acuendis  puerorum  ingeniis 
(acuendo  ingenia)  non  inutiles  lusus.  Consul  placandis  diis1  (placando 
deos)  dat  operam.  Non  sum  oneri  ferendo  (ferendo  onus).  Omnem 
laborem  meum  hominum  periculis  sublcvandis  (sublevando  pericula) 
imp&rtiam .  Roniana  juventus  revocandis  in  urbem  regibus  (revocando 
reges)  studebat. 

Note  1. —  Utilis,  inutilis,  aptus,  idoneus,  sufficere,  and  satis  esse,  instead  of  the 
dative  of  the  Gerund,  often  take  the  accusative  with  ad  ;  as,  Bene  sentire  recieque  facets 


')  is  engaged  in  appeasing  the  gods. 


194 


USE  OP  THE  GEKUNDS. 


satis  est  ad  bene  beateque  vivendum.  Palpebrez  aptissimce  sunt  ad  claudendas  pupillas  el 
ad  aperiendas. 

Note  2. — Esse,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  serve  for,”  “  to  tend  to,”  is  sometimes  construed 
with  the  genitive  of  the  Gerund ;  as,  Beegium  imperium  initio  conse?,vandce  libertatis 
atque  augendce  reipublicoe  fuerat.  Hoec  prodendi  imperii  Bomani,  tradendce  Hannibali 
victories  sunt 

Inter  coenandum. 

§  215. — The  Accusative  of  the  Gerund  is  used  only  with  preposi 
tions,  especially  ad  and  inter ;  as,  “While  dining,”  or  “  during  dinner.” 

Non  solum  ad  discendum  propensi  sumus ,  verum  etiam  ad  docendum. 
Ut  ad  cur  sum  equus,  ad  arandum  bos,  sic  ad  intelligendum  et  agendum 
homo  natus  est.  Mores  puerorum  se  inter  ludendum  simplicius  detegunt. 

With  an  object-accusative. — Homo  multa  habet  instfumenta  ad 
adipiscendam  sapientiam  (ad  adipiscendum  sapientiam).  Ferrum  ad 
colendos  agros  (ad  colendum  agros)  necessarium  est.  Ad  connectendas 
amicitias  (ad  connectendum  amicitias)  tenacissimum  vinculum  est  morum 
similitudo. 

Note  1. — With  verbs  denoting  a  purpose,  later  writers  frequently  use  the  dative  of 
the  Gerund,  where  in  the  Classical  period  the  accusative  with  ad,  or  a  clause  with  ut 
would  have  been  employed ;  as,  Multi  canes  propellendis  kominum  ac  ferarum  injuriis 
comparantur.  Tiberius  fir  mandee  valetudini  in  Campaniam  concessit. 

Note  2. — The  phrase  interest  inter,  “there  is  a  difference  between,”  is  followed  by 
the  Infinitive,  when  the  difference  exists  between  two  actions ;  as,  Multum  interest 
inter  legere  et  intelligere.  Pkilosophus  Pyrrho  dixit  nihil  interesse  inter  optime  valere 
et  gravissime  cegrotare. 

Errando  discimus. 

§  216. — The  Ablative  of  the  Gerund  is  used  (a)  without  a  preposi¬ 
tion,  as  an  ablative  of  the  instrument ;  and  (b)  with  the  prepositions  a , 
de,  ex,  and  in,  when  the  questions  from  what  and  in  what  are  answered 
by  a  verb.  E.  g.,  “  By  erring  we  learn.” 

Fabius  a  cunctando  Cunctator  est  appcllatus.  Frovidentia  ex  provi- 
dendo  est  appellata.  Adhibenda  est  in  jocando  moderatio.  Nihil 
agendo  homines  male  agere  discunt.  Aristotelem  non  deterruit  a  scribendo 
amplitudo  Platonis.  Ego  vapulando,  ille  verberando  usque  ambo  defessi 
sumus. 

With  an  object-accusative. —  Omnis  loquendi  elegantia  augetur  legendis 
oratoribus  et  poetis  (legendo  oratores  et  poetas).  In  voluptate  spernenda 
(in  spernendo  voluptatem)  virtus  vel  maxime  cernitur.  Multi  in  equis 
parandis  (in  parando  equos)  adhibent  curam,  in  am  ids  deligendis  (in 
deligendo  amicos)  neghgentes  sunt. 


USE  OF  THE  SUPINES. 


195 


Note. — The  change  of  the  ablative  of  the  Gerund  into  the  Partic.  in  dus ,  always 
takes  place  when  the  ablative  depends  on  a  preposition,  and  nearly  always,  when 
the  Gerund  is  used  as  an  ablative  of  the  instrument. 

Though  the  verbs  utor,  fruor ,  fungor ,  and  potior,  govern  the  ablative,  yet  in 
the  gerundial  construction  they  are  often  considered  and  treated  as  transitives  ;  as, 
Qui  aliquid  tribuit  voluptati ,  diligenter  ei  tenendus  est  ejus  fruendm  (for  ea  fruendi) 
modus. — Thus,  spes  urbis  potiundoe  ,*  fidu&ia  regni  Persarum  potiundi  ;  oculus  probe 
off edits  ad  suum  munus  fungendum  ;  expetuntur  divitiaz  ad  perfruendas  voluptates ,  etc. 


SUPINES. 

§  217. — The  Supines  are,  in  form,  nothing  else  than  cases  of  verbal  substan¬ 
tives  of  the  fourth  declension. 

There  are  two  Supines,  one  in  um,  the  other  in  u :  the  former  has  an  active — 
the  latter,  generally  a  passive  signification. 

The  Supine  in  um,  moreover,  governs  the  case  of  its  verb,  that  is,  it  takes  the 
same  case  as  the  verb,  from  which  it  is  formed. 


Eo  ambulatum. 

§  218. — The  Supine  in  um  stands  with  verbs  denoting  or  imply¬ 
ing  motion,  such  as  ire,  proficisci ,  contendere ,  venire ,  mittere ,  trajicere, 
etc., — and  expresses  the  purpose  or  end  of  the  motion ;  as,  “  I  go  to 
walk.” 

Tkemistocles  Argos  habitatum  concessit.  Laced  cemonii  Agesilaum 
bellatum  miserunt  in  Asiam.  Totius  fere  Gallice  legati  ad,  Ccesarem 
gratulatum  convenerunt.  Ccelius ,  cum  coenatus  cubitum  cum  duobus 
adolescentibus  filiis  isset ,  inventus  est  mane  jugulatus.  Hannibal 
patriam  defensum  ex  Italia  Carthaginem  revocatus  est.  Philippus , 
cum  spectatum  ludos  iret,  juxta  theatrum  occisus  est. 


Note  1. — Verbs  of  hastening,  as  festinare ,  properare ,  maturare ,  though  they 
express  motion,  are  generally  construed  with  the  Infinitive;  as,  Scipio  oppugnare 
urbem  festinavit.  Quin  hue  ad  vos  venire  proper o  ?  Exercitum  jlumen  transducer e 
maturavit. 

Note  2. — When  the  purpose  of  going,  coming,  sending,  etc.,  is  passive, 
instead  of  the  Supine  in  um ,  either  the  Participle  in  dus ,  or  a  passive  clause  with 
ut  must  be  used.  E.  g.,  “Youth  is  sent  to  school  to  be  instructed Juventus  in 
scholam  mittitur  erudienda ,  or  ut  erudiatur.  Multi  Bomanorum  Jilios  suos  Athenas 
miserunt  erudiendos ,  or  ut  erudirentur. 

Note  8. — The  verb  eo  with  the  Supine  is,  in  general,  equivalent  to  velle  with  the 
Infinitive,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  “  I  intend — wish — am  about — am  going 
to.”  Sometimes,  especially  in  dependent  clauses,  it  is  used  as  a  circumlocution,  in¬ 
stead  of  a  simple  verb. — E.  g.,  Our  te  is  perditum  ?  Fuere  eives  qui  sc  remque  vublicam 


196 


USE  OF  THE  SUPINES. 


perditum  irent.  Qui  paucis  sceleratis  par  cunt,  bonos  omnes  perditum  eunt,  i.  q. ,  per- 
dunt.  '  Obtestatus  est  filium  ne  pertinacia  sua  gentem  universam  perditum  iret ,  i.  q., 
perderet. 

Note  4. — It  must  be  remembered  that  the  Supine  in  um  is  of  comparatively  rare 
occurrence,  and  that  the  best  Latin  writers,  in  its  place,  generally  employ  one  of  the 
following  constructions :  (a)  ut  or  qui  with  the  Subj.  Pres,  or  Imperf. ;  (b)  the  geni¬ 
tive  of  the  Gerund  with  causa  or  gratia  ;  (c)  the  accusative  of  the  Gorund  with  ad ; 
or  lastly  (d)  the  Participle  in  urus ,  which  is  to  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case, 
with  the  person  that  has  to  perform  the  action  denoted  by  the  Latin  subordinate 
verb.  E.  g.,  “  The  Yeientes  sent  ambassadors  to  Eomo  to  sue  for  peace;”  Yeienies 
orator es  pacem  petitum  Eomam  miserunt ,  or 

(a)  ut  or  qui  pacem  peterent , 

(b)  pacem  petendi  (pacis  petendae)  causa  or  gratia , 

(c)  ad  petendum  pacem  (ad  pacem  petendam), 

(d)  pacem  petituros. 


Mirabile  visu. 

§  219. — Toe  Supine  m  u  stands  (a)  with  the  substantives  fas ,  nefas , 
and  opus ;  (b)  mill  the  adjectives  facilis ,  difficiUs,  gratus ,  jucundus , 
injucundus  /  suavis}  dulcis ,  acerbus  ;  mollis ,  durus  ;  turpis ,  honestus  ; 
dignus ,  indignus  ;  utilis ,  jnemorabilis ,  mirabilis,  incredibilis, — when  the 
question  “  in  what  respect  ?”*  asked  in  connection  with  any  of  these  ad¬ 
jectives  is  answered  by  a  verb;  as,  “A  thing  wonderful  (in  what 
respect  ? — )  to  behold,  or  to  be  beheld.” 

Videtis  nefas  esse  dictu  miseram  fuisse  Fabii  senectutem.  Quod  opti¬ 
mum  factu  videbitur ,  facies.  De  apibus  multa  narrantur  nolatu  dignis- 
sima.  TJva  primo  est  peracerba  gustatu,  deinde  maturata  dulcescit. 
Difficile  dictu  est  quantopere  conciliet  animos  hominum  comitas  affabilitas- 
que  sermonis. 

Note. — The  Supine  in  u ,  like  that  in  um ,  is  of  rare  occurrence.  Those  actually  in 
use  are  principally  the  following:  auditu ,  cognitu ,  dictu,  factu,  intdlectu,  inventu , 
memoratu,  visu. 

Instead  of  the  Supine  in  u  after  facilis,  dificilis,  and  jucundus ,  Latin  writers  prefer 
the  following  constructions : 

(a)  The  Infinitive  ;  as,  Facile  est  justam  causam  defendere.  Non  facile  est  invenire 
(aliquem),  qui  quod  sciat  ipse,  non  iradai  alteri. 

(b)  The  Passive,— the  adjectives  facilis,  difficilis,  etc.,  being  then  changed  into  ad¬ 
verbs  ;  as,  Justa  causa  facile  defenditur.  Ea  sunt  animadvertenda  peccata  maxime , 
quae  difficillime  praccaventur . 

(c)  The  Gerund  with  ad  ;  as,  Justa  causa  facilis  est  ad  defendendum .  Eo  cibo  uten- 
dum  est  qui  sit  facillimus  ad  concoquendum.  Orator  verbis  ad  audiendum  jucundis 
utatur. 

(d)  A  verbal  substantivo  ;  as,  Justce  causae  facilis  est  defensio.  Virtutum  ac  vitiorum 
facilis  est  distinctio.  Natura  Lei  difficiles  explicatus  habet. 

(e)  Sometimes  the  Participle  Present ;  as,  Justa  causa  dfendenti  facillima  est. 
Decemviri  colloquentibus  difficiles  erant,  i.  e.,  erant  aditu  difficiles. 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES, 


197 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES. 

§  220. — Participles,  like  Gerunds  and  Supines,  govern  the  case  of 
their  verbs  ;  as,  scribens  epistolam ,  parcens  hosti ,  furti  accusatus ,  regem 
aditurus ,  liberalitate  utens. 

To  make  use  of  the  Participial  construction,  it  is  necessary  that  there  be  in  English 
two  sentences  or  clauses, — a  principal  and  a  subordinate. 

Subordinate  clauses  (see  §  86)  are  either  complete  or  abridged ; — complete ,  when 
the  conjunction  is  expressed ;  abridged ,  when  it  is  not  expressed.  E.  g.} 

(Complete.)  When  shame  is  lost,  all  virtue  is  lost. 

(Abridged.)  Shame  being  lost,  all  virtue  is  lost. 

§  221. — The  rules  to  be  observed'  in  the  construction  of  Participles, 
are  as  follow : 

I.  See  whether  in  the  principal  sentence  there  be  a  pronoun  referring 
to  some  substantive  in  the  subordinate  clause.  If  so,  put  the  pronoun 
in  the  place  of  the  substantive  and  the  substantive  in  the  place  of  the 
pronoun.  Thus, 

While  Cato  was  dining,  it  was  announced  to  him. 

It  was  announced  to  Cato,  while  he  was  dining. 

After  Caesar  had  defeated  the  Gauls,  he  pursued  them. 

Ctesar  pursued  the  Gauls,  after  he  had  defeated  them. 

When  the  enemy  had  taken  the  city,  they  pillaged  it. 

The  enemy  pillaged  the  city,  after  they  had  taken  it. 

Note  1. — When  the  Participial  construction  is  to  take  place  in  a  sentence  contain¬ 
ing  a  verbal  noun,  the  latter  must  first  be  changed  into  a  subordinate  clause,  either 
complete  or  abridged ;  as, 

5* 

During  the  reign  (regno)  of  Augustus,  Christ  was  born. 

Augustus  reigning,  or  while  Augustus  was  reigning,  etc. 

At  the  approach  ( appropinquo )  of  spring,  the  swallows  return. 

Spring  approaching,  or  when  spring  approaches,  etc. 

After  the  fall  ( c&pio )  of  Troy,  Alneas  came  into  Italy. 

Troy  being  taken,  or  after  Troy  had  been  taken,  etc. 

Note  2. — When  two  clauses  are  connected  by  “and,”  the  former  usually  is 
made  the  subordinate,  by  changing  its  verb  into  the  present  or  the  past  Participle, 
according  as  the  actions  or  events  expressed  by  the  two  clauses  are  simultaneous  or 
not ;  as, 

Alexander  took  the  cup  and  said  to  the  physician. 

Alexander  taking  the  cup,  said  to  the  physician. 


198 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OP  PARTICIPLES, 


Ambassadors  came  and  sued  for  peace. 

Ambassadors  came  suing  for  peace. 

The  wolf  seized  the  lamb  and  tore  it  into  pieces. 

The  wolf  having  seized  the  lamb,  tore  it  into  pieces. 

II.  Leave  oat  the  conjunction,  and  change  the  verb  of  the  subc 
dinate  clause  into  its  corresponding  Participle. 

(1.)  To  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Act.  (and  also  to  the  simple 
Future  Act.,  when  there  is  another  Future  tense  in  the  principal  clause), 
the  Participle  Present  in  ns  corresponds. 

(2.)  To  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Fut.-Perfect  Active,  and  to  any 
tense  of  the  Passive,  the  Participle  Perfect  in  us  corresponds.  E.  g., 


When  spring  comes  ( appropinguans ),  the  swallows  return. 

His  strength  failing  ( dejiciens ),  he  fell  on  the  ground. 

While  Augustus  was  reigning  ( regnans ),  Christ  was  bom. 

If  you  will  do  this  (_ faciens ),  you  shall  be  safe. 

When  you  have  lost  {perditus)  heaven,  you  have  lost  all. 

Having  crossed  ( trajectus )  the  river,  we  attacked  the  enemy. 

When  thou  art  rebuked  {reprehensus) ,  do  not  reply. 

Henry  blushed,  when  he  was  praised  ( laudatus ). 

Shame  being  lost  ( sublatus ),  all  virtue  is  lost. 

Troy  having  been  destroyed  ( eversus ),  ASneas  came  to  Italy. 

Note  1. — Instead  of  the  Participle  Present,  the  Participle  Perfect  is  not  unfrequeutly 
used  when  the  verb  is  deponent ;  as, 

Forgetting  ( oblitvs )  me,  think  of  you  and  your  children. 

Fearing  ( verities )  Alexander’s  wrath,  Darius  sued  for  peace. 

Note  2. — When  the  subordinate  clause  contains  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  or  Fut.- 
Perfect  Active,  the  clause  must  first  be  changed  into  the  Passive,  unless  the  verb  be 
deponent,  in  which  case  the  English  active  clause  is  left  unchanged.  E.  g., 

Having  crossed  ( trajicio )  the  river,  we  attacked  the  enemy. 

The  river  having  been  crossed  ( trajecius ),  v/e  attacked,  etc. 

Scipio  burnt  the  city,  after  he  had  plundered  it  (diripio). 

Scipio  burnt  the  city,  after  it  had  been  plundered  ( direptus ). 

Having  crossed  ( transgressus, )  the  river,  we  encamped. 

Csesar  having  addressed  ( allocutus )  his  army,  ordered,  etc. 

fegP  The  Perfect  Participle  of  certain  deponents  (see  §  59,  note)  has  besides  the 
active  signification  also  a  passive.  This  Perf.  Participle,  however,  should  never  bo 
used  in  a  passive  sense  in  the  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute.  Forms  like  partito 
exercitu ,  partita  classe ,  partite  copiis ,  depopulate  agris ,  etc.,  in  which  the  Participles  par * 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OE  PARTICIPLES 


199 


titus  and  depopulates  are  used  in  $.  passive  sense,  must  be  looked  upon  as  exceptions 
not  to  be  imitated. 

Note  3. — When  the  subordinate  clause  expresses  a  wish  or  a  being  about  to  do 
something,  its  verb  is  changed  into  the  Panieiplo  in  urns  ; — but  when  it  is  intimated 
that  a  thing  is  to  be  done,  into  the  Participle  in  dtis ;  as, 

When  the  storks  are  to  migrate  (jnigr uterus),  they  all  assemble. 

The  camel  lies  down,  when  it  is  to  be  !adon  {amrandus). 


III.  See  whether  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  refer  to 
gome  word  in  the  principal,  or  not. 

(a)  When  it  does,  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  (in  this 
case  always  a  pronoun)  is  left  untranslated  in  Latin,  and  the  Participle 
made  to  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the  word  in  the  prin¬ 
cipal  sentence,  to  which  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  refers. 
Thus, 

Whilst  he  read,  I  fixed  my  eyes  upon  his  countenance. 

Oculos  in  vultum  legentis  intendi. 

I  met  your  brother,  as  he  was  going  home. 

Fratri  tuo  domum  redeunti  obviam  f  actus  sum. 

When  I  think  of  this,  it  appears  wonderful  to  me. 

Cogitanti  mi/ii  hac  de  re  mirum  videtur. 

Having  crossed  the  river,  we  fortified  the  camp. 

Amnem  transgressi  castra  munivimus. 

(b)  When  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  does  not  refer  to 
any  word  of  the  principal  sentence,  the  ablative  absolute  is  used,  that  is, 
the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  put  in  the  ablative,  and  the 
Participle  made  to  agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  thus, 

If  nature  opposes,  you  will  strive  in  vain. 

Natura  repugnante  frustra  niteris. 

When  spring  approaches,  the  swallows  return. 

Vere  appropinquante  hirundmes  redeunt. 

Shame  being  lost,  all  virtue  is  lost. 

Fudore  sublato  omnis  virtus  tollitur. 

Having  crossed  the  river,  we  attacked  the  enemy. 

Flumine  trajecto  kostem  aggresei  sumus. 

Caninio  consule  seito  neminem  prandisse ,  nihil  eo  consule  mail  factum 
esse.1  Curio  ad  focum  sedenti  magnum  auri  pondus  Samnltes  attulerunt. 


J)  See  Note  3,  p.  200,— and  also  foot-note  to  the  example :  Caninius  fuit  mirifica 
vigilantia,  etc.,  §  109,  II. 


200 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES, 


Regina  apum  nonnisi  migraturo  agmine  procedit.  Id  CarlhaginiT'l 
delatum  (“  and/7)  publice  comprobatum  est.  Perditis  rebus  omnibus  ipsa 
virius  se  sustentare  potest.  Risus  interdum  ita  repente  erumpit  ut  eum 
cupientes  (“though,”  “even  if”)  tenere  nequeamus.  Coesar  omnium 
remotis  equis  cohortatus  suos  proelium  commisit.  Defundo  Traja.no 
JElius  Hadrianus  creatus  est  princeps.  Maximas  virtutes  jicere  o  nines 
necesse  est ,  voluptate  dominante.  Darius  Charidemum,,  maxime  utilia 
suadentem  (“though”),  abstrahi jussit  ad  capitate  supplicium. 


Notes  on  the  Participial  Construction. 

Note  1. — The  English  phrases  by  me,  by  thee,  by  him,  by  us,  etc.,  which  arise  from 
the  change  of  the  active  voice  into  the  passive,  are  in  the  Participial  construction  left 
untranslated ;  as, 

After  Alex,  had  subdued  India,  he  returned  to  Babylon. 

A.  returned  to  B.,  after  India  had  been  subdued  [by  him]. 

Alexander  India  subacta  JBabylonem  rediit. 

Note  2. — When  a  verb  wants  the  corresponding  Participle,  the  Participial  con¬ 
struction  cannot  be  used.  Thus  we  may  say  :  Ccesare  adveniente,  “Caesar  arriving,”  ox 
“  at  Caesar’s  arrival;”  but  we  cannot  say:  Ccesare  advento,  “Caesar  having  arrived,” 
or  “  after  Caesar’s  arrival,”  because  advenio,  being  intransitive,  does  not  admit  of  a 
personal  passive.  Instead  of  Goisare  advento,  wre  must  therefore  say:  cum  Ccesar 
advenisset. — For  the  same  reason  we  cannot  say:  Alexandro  decesso,  “after  Alexander’s 
death,” — Sylla  fdutus  a  multis,  “  Sylla  being  favored  by  many,” — Socrates  qucesitus, 
“  Socrates  being  asked,” — Cato  egregie  impositus  a  Milone,  “  Cato  being  most  beauti¬ 
fully  deceived  by  Milo,”  etc.,  but  we  must  say  :  cum  Alexander  decessisset  •  cum  Sylla 
plurimi  faverent  /  cum  ex  Socrate  queer eretur  or  queesitum  esset ;  cum  Catoni  egregie 
imposuisset  Milo. 

Note  8. — When  sum ,  esse,  is  the  verb  of  the  subordinate  clause,  it  is  left  out  (there 
being  no  Present  or  Perfect  Participle  of  sum).  In  this  case  the  Predicate  noun  ox 
adjective  supplies  the  place  of  the  Participle.  E.  g.,  “  When  the  skies  are  serene,  it 
seldom  thunders,”  Cedo  sereno  raro  tonat. 

Cicerone  consule ,  under  C.’s  consulship,  lit.,  C.  being  consul. 

Ilerode  rege,  in  the  reign  of  Herod,  lit.,  Herod  being  king. 

Te  auctore,  by  thy  suggestion,  lit.,  thou  being  the  adviser. 

dhobis  invitis ,  in  spile  of  us,  lit.,  we  being  unwilling. 

Scipione  duce,  under  Scipio’s  command,  lit.,  Sc.  being  the  leader. 

Me  inscio ,  without  my  knowledge,  lit.,  I  being  ignorant  of. 

Hannibale  vivo,  in  II.’s  lifetime,  lit.,  II.  being  alive. 

Teste  Polybio,  according  to  the  testimony  of  P.,  lit.,  P.  being  voucher. 

Deo  teste,  in  God’s  presence,  lit.,  God  being  witness. 

Note  4. — The  particles  velut,  quasi,  and  tamquam,  “  as  if,”  are  always, — etsi,  licet 
quamquam ,  and  quamvis,  sometimes,  retained  in  the  Participial  construction. 
E.  g.,  “You  live  as  if  you  were  to  live  forever;”  Vivitis  tamquam  semper  victuri. 
Antiochus  securus  admodum  de  hello  Romano  erat,  tamquam  non  tvansituris  in  Asiam 
Romanis. —  Caesar em  milites,  quamvis  recusantem,  ultro  in  Africam  sunt  secuti.  Ccesar 
decumanos  adire  non  cunctatus  est ,  quamquam  deterrentibus  amicis. 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES. 


201 


Note  5. — When  the  connective  “and”  is  followed  by  “would,”  the  verb  following 
is  frequently  rendered  by  the  Participle  in  urus.  E.  g.,  Librum  misi  exigenti  tibi , 
missurus  (‘  and  I  would  have  sent  it’)  esti  non  exegisses.  Red  it  tnihi  quantum  maxime 
potuit ,  daturus  amplius  (‘  and  he  would  have  given,  still  more’)  si  potuisset.  Jure, 
interfedum  Glitum  Macedones  decernunt ,  scpulturd  quoque  prohibitum,  ni  rex  humari 
jussisset.—{  HggT  This  use  of  the  Partic.  in  urus  belongs  chiefly  to  the  writers  of  the 
silver  age.) 

Note  6. — When  of  two  subordinate  clauses  connected  by  “and,”  one  only  admits 
of  the  Participial  construction,  the  connective  “and”  may  be  omitted,  but  the 
introductory  conjunction  as,  since,  when,  etc.,  must  be  expressed  in  the  clause 
which  does  not  admit  of  the  construction.  E.  g.,  “  As  there  was  an  irritation  on 
both  sides  and  the  people  had  become  emboldened,  the  senate  dared,  etc.”  Irritati » 
utriusque  partis  animis ,  quumplebi  animus  accessisset ,  patres  ausi  sunt ,  etc. 

When  both  clauses  admit  of  the  Participial  construction,  the  connective  et  is  some¬ 
times  expressed  and  sometimes  omitted.  It  should  always  be  omitted,  when  one  of 
the  two  Participles  is  an  ablative  absolute,  the  other  not ;  as,  “  The  Carthaginians 
killed  Eegulus  after  they  had  cut  off  his  eyelids  and  tied  him  to  the  scaffold,”  Car- 
thaginienses  Regulum  resectis  palpebris  illigaium  in  machina  necaverunt. — When  both 
Participles  are  ablatives  absolute,  et  may  be  expressed  or  omitted  ;  as,  “  Xerxes,  hav¬ 
ing  bridged  the  Hellespont  and  tunnelled  Mount  Athos,  marched  across  the  sea,” 
Xerxes  IMlesponio  j  undo  (et)  Athone  perfosso ,  mare  ambulavit. 

Note  7. — The  prepositions  before,  after,  till,  from,  on  account  of,  when 
placed  before  a  verbal  noun,  are  expressed  by  ante ,  post,  ad,  ob,  propter ,  de,  respec¬ 
tively,  with  the  Partic.  Perfect,  when  an  action  or  event  already  completed  is  spoken 
of^—and  with  the  Partic.  in  dus,  when  an  action  is  conceived  as  yet  to  be  performed. 
E.  g.,  “Before  (after)  the  birth  of  Christ,”  Ante  {post)  Christum  ndturn.  “  From  the 
building  of  Rome,”  Ab  urbe  condita.—Scipio  propter  Africam  domitam  Africanus  est 
appellatus.  Helium  Tarentinum  ob  violates  (‘  on  account  of  an  insult  offered  to’) 
legatos  Romanorum  ortum  est.  Regulus  de  permutandis  captivis  Romam  missus  est. 

The  preposition  “after,”  before  a  verbal  noun,  is  more  commonly  rendered  by  the 
simple  Participle ;  as,  “  After  the  expulsion  of  the  kings,”  Regibus  exactis,  though 
also  post  reges  exados. 

Note  8. — The  English  “  without”  before  a  participial  noun  is  variously  rendered 
into  Latin : 

(a)  By  a  Participle  with  non,  nemo ,  nullus,  nihil.  E.  g.,  “  Without  fixing  any 
day,”  Nulla  preestituta  die  ;  “  Without  paying  any  regard  to,”  Nulla  habita  ratione. — 
Quam  multa  non  expedata  (without  being  expected)  eveniunt !  Athenienses  non  rogati 
(without  being  asked)  auxilium  ferebant.  Id  etiam  me  tacente  (without  my  telling 
you)  intelliges.  Me  non  sentiente, — nullo  salutato  (without  my  knowing,  without 
saluting  anybody)  abiit.  Lacrimce  cadwnz  nolentibus  nobis  (without  our  willing  it). 
Compressi  tuos  nef arios  conatus ,  nullo  tumultu  publice  condtato.  Multorum  te  oculi  et 
aures  non  sentientem  speeulabuntur  atque  custodient. 

(b)  By  quin  with  the  Subjunctive,  when  the  preceding  sentence  is  negative  ;  as, 
Timoleontem  mater  nunquam  aspexit  quin  eu?n  fratricidam  impiumque  compeilartt 
(without  calling  him). 

When  after  a  negative  sentence,  “without”  is  equivalent  to  “unless,”  it  is  ex¬ 
pressed  by  nisi  with  either  the  Subjunctive  or  the  participial  construction.  E.  g., 
Nunquam  accurate  eleganterque  Latine  scribes  nisi  perlectis  (without  having  read)  opti - 
mis  scriptoribus ,  or  nisi  perlegeris  optimos  scriptores.  Caesar  exercitum  nunquam  pet 
insidiosa  itinera  duxit,  nisi  perspeculatus  (without  having  previously  examined) 
locorum  situs. 


202 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES. 


(c)  By  adjectives, — especially  negative  adjectives  with  the  prefix  in,  as  inscius 
invitus,  insomnis ,  iniquus,  etc.  E.  g.,  “He  does  nothing  without  consulting  me,” 
Nihil  agit  me  inconsulio. — “  Without  our  knowing,”  Nobis  insciis. — “  Without  having 
finished,”  Infecto  labore. — “  To  spend  the  night  without  being  able  to  sleep,”  Noctem 
insomnem  ducere. — “  Without  violating  one’s  conscience,”  Salva  Jide. — “  Without 
complaining,”  AEquo  ( Tiaud  iniquo)  animo. 

d)  Sometimes  by  a  substantive,  an  adverb,  or  a  conjunction  ;  as,  “  Without  hesi¬ 
tating,”  Sine  ulla  dubitatione. — “Without  suspecting  any  thing,”  Sine  ulla  suspicione. — 
“Without  fearing,”  Sine  metu ,  or  confidenter. — “Without  shedding  tears,”  Sine  lacri- 
mis  or  siccis  oculis. — “Without  thinking,  reflecting,”  Imprudenter,  temere. — “ Multi 
poetas  admirantur  nee  tamen  intelligunt  ^without  understanding  them). — Malim  esse 
vir  bonus  nee  videri  (without  seeming  one),  quam  videri  nee  esse  (without  being  so). — 
Quidam  litteris  (ita)  se  tradunt  ut  nihil  possint  ex  his  ad  communem  afferre  usum  (with¬ 
out  being  able  to  produce  ....). 

Note  9. — The  verbs  volo,  nolo ,  malo ,  cupio,  and  oportet ,  are  often  construed  with  the 
Partic.  Perfect,  instead  of  the  Infinitive,  in  order  to  express  the  thing  which  one  has 
in  view,  as  already  completed.  E.  g.,  lllud  te  admonitum  volo.  Omnes  rempublicam 
defensam  conservatamque  volumus.  Vobis  omnibus  me  excusatum  volo.  Miser  est  qui 
patriam  exstinctam  cupit. 

Note  10. — Habeo ,  with  the  Perfect  Partic.  of  verbs  denoting  knowledge,  etc., 
is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  simple  Perfect  of  these  verbs;  as ,  lllud  cognitum 
{perspectum,  perceptum,  comprehensum,  exploratum ,  statutum ,  constitutum ,  deliberatum) 
habeo,  instead  of  lllud  cognovi,  perspexi ,  comprehends ,  etc. — E.  g.,  Gompertum  habeo 
(=  bene  scio),  milites,  verba  virtutem  non  addere.  Caesar  perjidiam  AEduorum  per- 
spectam  habebat.  Siculi  ad  meam  jidem,  quam  habent  spectatam  jam  et  diu  cognitam, 
confugiunt.  An  quisquam  potest  probare  quod  perceptum ,  quod  comprehensum,  quod 
cognitum  non  habet  ? 

Similar  constructions  are  :  urbem  obsessam  tenere ,  pecunias  collocatas  habere ,  domitas 
habere  libidines,  etc. 

Note  11. — The  Perfect  Participle  of  verbs  sentiendi  and  declarandi  (§  101)  sometimes 
stands  by  itself  in  the  ablative  absolute,  the  clause  following  being  considered  as  the 
subject  of  the  Participle.  Ablatives  of  this  kind  are:  audito,  cognito ,  comperto , 
explorato,  nuntiato,  edncto,  and  a  few  more.  E.  g.,  Alexander  audito  (instead  of  cum 
audivisset)  Barium  appropinquare  cum  exercitu ,  obviarn  ire  constituit.  Hannibal  cog¬ 
nito  (instead  of  cum  cognovisset)  insidias  sibi  parari ,  fuga  salutem  qucesivit. — Even 
the  ablative  neut.  of  adjectives  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  an  ablative  absolute  ; 
e.  g. ,  Multi  adnantes  navibus ,  incerio  prce  tenebris  ( quum  incertum  esset )  quid  petercnt 
aut  vitarent ,  foede  interierunt. 

Note  12. — In  the  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute,  two  Participles  belonging  to 
the  same  subject-ablative,  are  to  be  avoided.  Thus  we  may  say:  Quum  Pom - 
peius  Strabo,  de  coelo  tactus ,  mortuus  esset,  etc., — or,  Quum  Regulus,  pr relic  capi-us, 
Carthaginem  esset  ab ductus,  etc., — but  we  should  say  neither :  Pompeio  de  cfoio  iacto 
mot'tuo,  nor  Regulo  proslio  capto  Carthaginem  abducio. 


r  ARTICLES. 


203 


CHAPTER  YIL 
PARTICLES. 

1.  Adverbs. — 2.  Prepositions. — 3.  Conjunctions. 


I.  Adverbs. 

GOVERNMENT  OF  ADVERBS. 

Satis  eloquentiae,  sapiential  parum. 

§  222. — Adverbs  of  quantity  govern  the  genitive.  Such  are,  sat, 
satis,  enough;  parum,  too  little;  abunde,  affatim,  abundantly;  nimis , 
too  much;  as,  “Enough  (of)  eloquence,  but  too  little  wisdom.” 

Affatim  est  hominum ,  quibus  negotii  nihil  est.  Caesar  dicebat ,  se 
potentice  gloriceque  abunde  ad ep turn.  Nimis  insidiarum  adhibent. 
Multis  in  locis  parum  virium  veritas  habet.  In  isto  juvene  animi  satis, 
auctoritatis  parum  est.  Sat  habet  fautorum  semper,  qui  recte  facit. 

Note  1. — Here  is  to  be  noticed  the  phrase  quoad  (==  quantum)  ejus  fieri  potest  or 
quoad  ejus  facere  possum,  “as  far  as  this  is  possible,  ”or  “as  far  as  I  can,-’ — where  the 
genitive  ejus  refers  to  the  preceding  clause.  E.  g.,  Quoad  ejus  fieri  potest,  prcesentias 
tv  as  desiderium  meo  labore  minuitur.  Ta  velim  non  intermittas,  quoad  ejus  facere  poteris , 
scribere  ad  me. 

Note  2. — The  adverbs  of  place,  ubi,  ubinam ,  ubique,  ubicunque ,  usquam,  nusquam , 
unde,  hie,  hue ,  eo ,  quo ,  quoquo ,  aliqvo,  quocunque,  are  often,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis, 
construed  with  the  genitives  gentium ,  terrarum,  lo  corum  ;  as,  “Where  on  earth  (or 
in  the  world)  are  we  ?  Ubinam  gentium  sumus? — Quo  terrarum  abiit?  Vir  bonus , 
ubicunque  terrarum  erit,  diligetur.  Quo  gentium  aufugiam ,  nescio.  Rhodum  aut 
aliquo  terrarum ,  migrandum  est.  Quairis  quod  nusquam  est  gentium.  Abes  longe  gen~ 
tivm,  “you  are  greatly  mistaken.” — Minime  gentium,  “by  no  means.” 

in  the  phrases  postea  loci,  ‘  afterwards interta  loci,  ‘in  the  mean  time;’  adhuc 
b's.rvm ,  ‘  until  now,'  the  genitive  seems  to  be  superfluous. — Ilic  loci,  hoc  loci,  eo  (or 
ioti'-m)  loci,  and  quo  loci,  stand  sometimes  for  hoc  loco,  eo  loco,  and  quo  loco. 

The  adverbs  hue ,  eo,  quo ,  in  the  sense  of  “  to  this  degree,”  are  construed  with  other 
genitives  also;  as,  Eo  insolentice  furorisque  processit.  Vide  quo  amentia  progressus 
sis.  Eo  miseriarum  pervenimus.  Huccine  rerum  (•  to  that  state  of  things’)  venimus  ? 

Note  3. — Pridie  and  postridie  take  both  the  genitive  and  accusative ;  as,  Pridie 
{ postridie )  ejus  diei.  Pridie  ( postridie )  Calendas  or  Calendarmn.  Pridie  insidiarum . 
Postridie  nvptias.  Pridie  Nonas  Junias  litter  as  tuas  accept. 


204 


PARTICLES. 


The  adverbs  propius  and  proxime  take  commonly  the  accusative  ;  as,  Officium  meum 
esse  putavi  exercitum  habere  quam  proxime  hostem : — sometimes  the  dative,  too  ;  as, 
Quam  proxime  potest  hostium  s&stris  castra  communit. 

pT-  The  interjections  en  and  ecce ,  Lo  !  behold  !  are  usually  construed  with  the 
nominative;  as,  “Here  I  am,”  En  ego!  En  nova  rixa !  Ecce  litter  ex  turn!  Ecce 
Homo  ! — Ecce  is  used,  in  poetry  only,  with  the  accusative  of  a  pronoun  ;  as,  Ecce  me! 
Eccum  adest ,  “behold,  there  he  is!” — Eccum  quern  queerebam!  Thus  the  forms  eccam , 
eccillum ,  eccillam ,  eccos,  etc. 

With  V(B  and  hei ,  the  dative  is  used  ;  as,  Vce  victis  !  Hei  mihi! 

Heu  and  pro  ( proh )  take  both  the  accusative  and  vocative  ;  the  accusative,  in  ex¬ 
clamations  of  wonder  or  grief;  the  vocative,  in  direct  address;  as,  Heu  memiserum! 
cur  senatum  cogor ,  quem  laudavi  semper ,  reprehendere? — Proh  deum  hominumque fidem l 
— Heu  pietas ,  heu prisca  fides  !  Pro  sancte  Jupiter  !  Pro  dii  immortales  ! 


Particulars  about  the  Use  of  Adverbs. 

§  223. — 1.  Distinction,  between  plus,  magis,  amplius,  and  potius. 

Plus,  “  more,”  is  used  in  respect  of  quantity,  measure,  value ;  as,  Apud  me 
argumenta  plus  quam  testes  valent.  Vos  et  decern  numero,  et,  quod  plus  est , 
Romani  estis.  Tantum  et  plus  etiam  mihi  debet.  Quam  molestum  est  uno  digito 
plus 1  habere! 

Magis,  “  more,”  is  the  comparative  of  action  or  quality, — it  shows  that  a 
quality  exists  in  a  higher  degree ;  as,  Nemo  fuit  magis  sexerus  nee  magis  eon - 
tinens.  Noe  magis  est  xerisimile. — Magis  xirtute  quam  dolo  contendunt.  Nee 
me  mecs  miseries  magis  exeruciant  quam  tuce. 

pf”  Plus,  in  general,  is  used  where  in  the  positive  multum  would  stand  ;  and 
magis,  w here  v aide. — In  certain  connections  it  is  indifferent  whether  we  use  plus  or 
magis  •  as,  aliquem  plus  or  magis  amare,  diligere. 

Amplius,  “  more,”  “  longer,”  “  further,”  is  used  of  extent  in  time  and  num¬ 
ber; — it  denotes  addition  without  comparison;  as,  Amplius  sunt  sex  menses. 
Milites  amplius  horis  quatuor  fortissime  pugnaverunt.  Duo  haud  amplius 
millia peditum  urbem  ingressi  sunt.  Quid  xis  amplius? 

Potius,  “more,”  “rather,”  “sooner,”  denotes  choice  between  two  objects  or 
actions.  {Magis  attributes  only  a  higher  degree  to  one  of  the  objects  compared, 
whereas  potius  actually  prefers  it.)  E.  g.,  Perpessus  est  omnia  potius  quam 
conseios  indicaret.  Nee  xero  imperia  expetenda ,  etc  potius  non  accipienda 
inter  dum. 

2.  The  adverb  qui  is  often  used  instead  of  quomodo ;  as,  Nos  Deum,  nisi 
sempiternum,  intelligere  qui  possumus  ?  Deus  falli  qui  potest  ?  Qui  potest  esse 
in  ejusmodi  trunco  (“  blockhead”)  scipientia  ? 

3.  Fortasse  and  forsitan  (poet,  forsan )  signify  “  perhaps.” — Forte  means  “  by 
chance,”  “  accidentally :”  but,  when  preceded  by  ne,  si,  nisi,  num,  it  also 
acquires  the  meaning  of  “perhaps.”  E.  g.,  Si  quis  xestrum,  judices,  forte 


i)  a  finger  too  much. 


PARTICLES. 


205 


miratur. — Forsitan  is  generally  used  in  sentences  the  nature  of  which  requires 
the  Subjunctive;  e.  g.,  Forsitan  aliquis  dioat. 

4.  JSTec  vero,  nec  enim,  nec  tamen,  or  neque  vero,  neque  enim,  neque  t amen ,  are 
frequently  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  instead  of  non  vero,  non  enim, 
non  tamen .  E.  g.,  Menti  nihil  est  tarn  inimicum  quam  voluptas :  nee  enim 
libidine  dominants  temperantice  locus  est.  Alcibiades  magnam  amicitiam  sibi 
cum  quibusdam  regibus  Thracice  pepererat :  neque  tamen  a  caritate  patrice  poiidt 
recedere. 

5.  As  nec  {neque)  non  often  stands  for  et  non,  so  Latin  writers  frequently  use 

nec  ullus  for  et  nullus, 

nec  quisquam  “  et  nemo, 

nec  quidquam  “  et  nihil, 

nec  unquam  “  et  nun  quam, 

nec  usquam  “  et  nusquam ; 

as,  K  Many  pretend  to  know  every  thing,  and  yet  know  nothing,”  Multi  omnia 
se  simulant  scire,  nec  quidquam  sciunt.  Impedit  consilium  voluptas,  nec  ullum 
cum  virtute  habet  commercium.  Horae  cedunt  et  dies  et  menses  et  anni,  nec 
prceteritum  tempus  unquam  revertitur. 

G.  In  translating  “  I  don’t  know  whether,”  “  I  am  not  sure  that,”  by  haud 
scio  { nescio ,  dubito )  an,  if  there  is  a  “  not,”  omit  it  in  Latin  :  if  these  is  no 
“  not,”  put  in  non.  Also  translate  “  anybody”  by  nemo,  “  any”  by  nullus, 
“  any  thing”  by  nihil,  “  at  any  time  or  ever”  by  nunquam,  and  “  anywhere” 
by  nusquam. — -Such  is  the  practice  of  Cicero  and  his  contemporaries.  (Com¬ 
pare  §  107,  2.) — E.  g.,  “I  don’t  know  whether  I  should  not  prefer  Thrasybulus 
to  all,”  Dubito  an  Thrasybulum  primum  omnium  ponamd — “  I  am  not  sure 
that  there  is  any  happier  man,”  Haud  scio  an  nullus  sit  beatior  vir .l 2 — “  I  don’t 
know  whether,  wisdom  excepted,  any  thing  better  than  friendship  has  been 
given  by  the  gods  to  man,”  Haud  scio  an  excepta  sapientia  nihil  melius  amicitid 
homini  sit  a  diis  datum. 

7.  The  English  “  I  say  (will,  order)  that  none,  that  no,  that  nothing,  that 
never,” — is  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by  nego  {nolo,  veto)  with  quisquam, 
quidquam,  ullus,  unquam.  E.  g.,  Negavit  se  unquam  (for  dixit  se  nunquam) 
talia  vidisse.  Vetuit  quidquam  (for  jussit  nihil)  per  fraudem  fieri.  Stoici  negant 
quidquam  (for  dicunt  nihil)  esse  bonum  nisi  quod  honestum  sit. 

When  the  verbs  nego,  nolo,  veto,  are  followed  by  a  second  clause,  the  latter 
is  introduced  by  neque,  when  it  is  negative,  and  by  et  {que,  atque),  when  it  is 
affirmative.  E.  g.,  Illi  vero  obsides  daturos  se  negabant  neque  (and  that  they 
would  not)  portas  Consult  prceclusuros.  Plerique  negant  Ccesarem  in  conditions 
mansurum  postulataque 3  (and  that)  hcec  ab  eo  interposita  esse,  quo  minus  quod 
opus  esset  ad  helium,  a  nobis  parareiur. 

8.  Two  negatives  in  the  same  sentence .  are  equivalent  to  an  affirmation. 


l)  Or,  I  am  inclined  to  prefer  Th.  to  all.  2)  Or,  I  am  inclined  to  think  that  there  ia 

no  happier  man,  or  There  is  perhaps  (probably,  most  likely)  no  happier  man.  8)  the 

same  as  dicuntque postulata  luec ,  etc. 


206 


PARTICLES. 


Thus  non  ignoro,  non  nescio,  non  sum  inscius,  non  me  fugit,  non  me  prceterit% 
are  equivalent  to  probe  scio  ;  non  minimum,  to  multum  ;  non  imperitissimus, 
to  valde  peritus  ;  non  inferior,  to  par  or  superior  ;  non  possum  non,  to  cogor  or 
clebeo ;  nee  non,  to  et ;  ne  non,  to  ut ;  neque  vero  non,  to  et  vero  ;  neque  tamen 
non,  to  et  tamen,  etc.  E.  g.,  Corporis  dignitas  non  minimum  commenaat.  Id 
indigne  ferebant,  neque  tamen  non  patiebantur.  Qui  mortem  in  malis  ponit, 
non  potest  earn  non  timere.  Non  potest  non  beatissimus  esse,  cui  nihil  deest. 
Neque  vero  non  (and  in  truth)  fuit  apertum ,  si  Conon  non  fuisset,  Agesilaum 
Asiam  Taurotenus  regifuisse  erepturum. 

When  a  negative  is  followed  by  ne-quidem,  neque-neque,  nee-nee,  or  neve- 
neve,  the  first  negative  is  not  destroyed,  but  ne-quidem  is  then  equivalent  to 
vel  (“even”)  and  neque-neque  to  aut-aut.  E.  g.,  Nunquam  te  ne  minima  quidem 
in  re  offendi,  “  I  never  offended  you  even  in  the  least.” —  Urbes  sine  hominum 
ceetu  non  potuissent  nee  cedificari  nee  frequentari.  Nihil  est  illo  milii  nee  carius 
nee  jueundius.  Ccesar  negat  neque  honestius  neque  tutius  quidquam  mihi  esse 
(=  dicit  nihil  mihi  esse  neque  . . . .)  quam  cib  omni  contentione  abesse. 

fcjyf”  Ne  non ,  ne  nullus ,  ne  nemo ,  after  the  Imperative  vide ,  “  consider,”  must  be 
rendered  by  “  whether,”  or  “  that  not — that  no  one.”  E.  g.,  Credere  omnia  quae 
dicuntur  vide  ne  non  sit  necesse  ;  “  Consider  whether  it  be  necessary  to  believe  every 
thing,”  i.  e.,  “  remember  that  it  is  not  necessary,  etc.” — Vide  ne  nulla  sit  divinatio  ; 
“  Consider  whether  such  a  science  exists  at  all.” 


9.  The  particle  non,  placed  before  nemo,  nullus,  nihil,  nunquam,  renders  the 
affirmation  indefinite  and  incomplete ;  but  placed  after  them,  definite  and 
complete.  Thus, 


non  nemo  means 
non  nulli  “ 
non  nihil  “ 
non  nunquam  “ 


some  one, 
some, 
something, 
sometimes  ; 


nemo  non  means 
nullus  non  “ 

nihil  non  “ 

nunquam  non  “ 


every  one, 
every  one, 
every  thing, 
always  ; 


as,  Nemo  non  benignus  est  sui  judex.  Nulli  non  ad  nocendum  satis  virium  est. 
Hannibal  non  nihil  temporis  tribuit  litteris.  Athenienses  Alcibiadem  nihil  non 
efficere  posse  ducebant.  Nunquam  non  honorificentissime  eum  appellabat. 

When  nihil  non,  nunquam  non,  nusquam  non,  have  an  Infinitive  inserted 
between  them,  they  retain  their  negative  meaning,  and  are  equivalent  to  an 
indefinite  affirmation  ;  as,  Nihil  agere  animus  non  potest,  “  cannot  do  nothing,” 
i.  e.,  must  do  something. —  Ubi  sunt  mortui  aut  quern  locum  incolunt?  Si 
enim  sunt,  nusquam  esse  non  possunt,  “  they  cannot  be  nowhere,”  i.  e.,  they 
must  be  somewhere. 

10.  Tantum  quod,  in  the  Classical  language,  means  “just,”  “just  then,” 
“  hardly,”  “  scarcely ;”  and  tantum  quod  non,  “  only  that  not,”  “  nothing  is 
wanting  but.”  E.  g.,  Tantum  quod  exArpinati  veneram,  cum  mihi  a  te  litteree 
rcdditai  sunt.  Tantum  quod  hominem  non  nominat,  “  he  almost  mentions  him 
by  name.” 

Tantum  non,  in  Livy,  and  in  the  later  prose  writers,  often  occurs  in  the 
sense  of  “  almost,”  “  very  nearly ;”  as,  Nuntii  afferebant  tantum  non  (only  not) 
jam  captam  Lacedeemonem  esse.  Videt  Romanos  tantum  non  jam  circumveniri 
a  dextro  cornu. 


PARTICLES. 


207 


11  Enumerations  are  usually  made  by  means  of  the  numeral  adverbs 

primum,  deinde,  turn,  denique,  or  postremo  ;  as,  Primum  mihi  videtur  de  genere 
belli,  deinde  de  magnitudine,  turn  de  imperatore  deligendo  esse  dicendum. 
Primum  docent  Stoici  esse  deos,  deinde  qucdes  sint,  turn  mundum  ab  his  ad- 
ministrari,  postremo  considere  eos  rebus  humanis. 


II.  Prepositions. 

§  224. — The  fundamental  signification  of  each  preposition  has  been 
already  given  §  17.  This  signification,  however,  in  various  passages 
suffers  various  modifications,  with  which  the  pupil  should  be  duly  ac¬ 
quainted,  in  order  to  comprehend  more  fully  the  sense  of  such  passages. 

The  more  important  of  these  modifications  are  exhibited  in  the  fol¬ 
lowing  paragraphs : 


Prepositions  with  the  Accusative. 

§  225. — AD,  1)  “  near,”  “  at  ”  “  close  by e.  g.,  pugna  ad  Carinas ,  ad  Trebiam ,  ad 
Trasimenum  ;  urbs  sita  ad  mare  ;  liabet  hortos  ad  Tiber im,  ad  portas  urbis ;  negotium 
habere  ad  portum  (=  in  portu)  ; — 2)  “  to,”  “  toward,”  “  till ;”  e.  g.,  ad  meridiem 
spedans  ;  ad  lucem ,  ad  vesperam ,  towards  daybreak,  evening;  ad  mvltam  noctem ,  till 
late  at  night ;  ad  summam  senectutem  tragoedias  fecit;  ad  Alpes  (as  far  as)  processerat ; — 
S)  “about,”  “nearly”  (of  numerals);  e.  g.,  annos  ad  quadraginta  natus  ;  ad  quin- 
gentos  captisunt  ;  and  adverbially  in  the  sense  of  circiter  :  occisis  ad  hominum  millibus 
octo  ; — 4)  “in  comparison  with;”  e.  g.,  nihil  ad  Persium  ;  nihil  ad  hunc  hominem  ; 
terra  ad  universi  codi  complexum  quasi  pundi  instar  obtinet ; — 5)  “at,”  “on”  (of  a 
fixed  time)  ;  e.  g.,  prcesto  esse  ad  horam  destinatam ,  ad  diem  constitutam  ;  ad  diem 
solvere ,  “  to  pay  on  the  day  fixed  upon  ;” — 6)  “  according  to,”  “  after ;”  ad  voluntatem 
loqui,  non  ad  veritatem  ;  ad  speciem  or  similitudinem  alicujus  rei ;  ad  modum ,  ad  nor- 
mam ,  ad  exemplum ,  ad  nutum; — 7)  “in  respect  of,”  “  as  to  ;”  e.  g.,  homo  ad  labores 
belli  impiger ,  ad  consilia  prudens. 

Phrases  :  Ad  tempus ,  “  for  some  time  ;”  as,  perturbatio  animi  plerumque  brevis  est 
et  ad  tempus ;  ad  praesens ,  for  the  moment  ;  ad  extremum ,  ad  ultimum ,  at  last,  at 
length ;  ad  unum  omnes ,  all  to  a  man,  even  to  the  very  last  man  ;  ad  verbum ,  word 
for  word,  literally ;  ad  nummum  convenit ,  it  agrees  to  a  cent ;  omnia  ad  assem 
perdidit ,  to  the  last  cent  or  farthing. — QgiP  Translate  “  at  most”  by  summum ,  not  by 
ad  summum. ) 

APED,  1)  “by,”  “  close  by,”  “  near,”  “  with  ;”  e.  g.,  Apud  PEgos  flumen  Atheni - 
enses  victi  sunt ;  horam  et  amplius  apud  me  fait ;  apud  me  nihil  valet  hominum  opinio  ; 
avud  matrem  rede  est ,  things  go  well  with  the  mother ;  rectissime  sunt  apud  te  omnia ; — - 
2)  “in  presence  of,”  “  before  ;”  e.  g.,  apud  judices.  apud praetor em,  apud  senatum  verba 
facere; — 3)  “in  the  house  of,”  “in  the  works  or  writings  of ;”  e.  g.,  Fuisiiapud  Leccam 
ilia  node  ;  JVeptolemus  apud  Lycomedem  educatus  est ;  apud  Xenophontem  Cyrus  negat ; 
apud  Ciceronem  legimus. 

CIRCA,  CIRCUM,  “  around  ;”  as,  urbes  circa  Capuam ;  multos  canes  circum  or  circa  se 
habebat ;  terra  circum  axem  se  convert  it.  — Mittere  aliquem  circum  ami  cos ,  circum .  vie. nos, 
circum  insulas,  etc.,  means,  “to  send  somebody  around  to  one's  friends,  neighbors, 
to  the  surrounding  isles. — Oikca  is  used  also  of  time,  in  the  sense  of  “  about,” 


208 


PARTICLES. 


“toward;”  e.  g.,  postero  die  circa  eandem  horam  ;  circa  meridiem ;  circa  Nonas. — In 
the  sense  of  “  concerning,  it  occurs  only  in  the  later  prose  ;  as,  varia  dream  h&e 
opinio  /  Tiberius  circa  deos  negligentior  fuit. 

CIRCITER,  “  about,”  occurs  with  the  accusative  of  time  ;  as,  circiter  horam  octz- 
vam  ;  dreiter  Calendas  Septembres. — Circiter  is  more  commonly  used  as  an  adverb, 
as,  diebus  circiter  quindecim  ;  ex  ornni  copia  circiter  pars  quarta  armis  erat  instructa. 

CIS,  CITRA,  “  on  this  side”  (opp.  to  trans  and  ultra).— Cis  is  generally  used  of 
rivers  and  mountains  ;  as,  cis  Rhenum ,  cis  Taurum  montem :  Citra,  also  of  other 
places;  as,  dtra  Rubiconem /  is  locus  est  citra  leucddem. — In  later' writers  citra  fre¬ 
quently  occurs  in  the  sense  of  sine ;  as,  citra  invidiam  nominare  ;  plus  usus  sine  doc- 
trina ,  quam  citra  usum  doctrina  valet. 

CONTRA,  1)  “against”  (always  in  a  hostile  sense);  as,  contra  leges,  contra  natu- 
ram  ;  Beiges  olim  contra  Pop  alum  Romanum  conjurarunt ; — 2)  “  over  against,”  “op¬ 
posite;”  as,  Insulae,  Britannia!  unum  latus  est  contra  Galliam. — Contra ,  adv.,  like 
contrario ,  means  “  on  the  contrary.”  mggT*  Econtra  is  not  Latin. 

JUXTA,  “  beside,”  “  close  by ;”  as ,  juxta  murum  ;  sepultus  estjuxta  viam  Appiam, 
— Sometimes  it  means  “next  to,”  “  immediately  after”  (of  rank  and  estimation); 
e.  g.,  apud  qvos  juxta  divinas  religiones  fides  humana  colitur. — In  the  sense  of  secun¬ 
dum,  “  according  to,”  juxta  is  unelassical  ;  hence,  juxta  Platonem ,  juxta  Taciturn , 
juxta  proeceptum  Themistoclis,  and  similar  expressions,  should  be  avoided. 

Juxta,  taken  adverbially,  means  “  equally,”  “  in  like  manner  ;”  as,  litteris  Greeds 
juxta  atque  Latinis  eruditus  ;  juxta  boni  malique  obtruncati  sunt. 

OB,  “  an  account  of ;”  as,  ob  hoc  ipsum,  for  this  very  reason  ;  ob  commodum  suvm 
dixit. — It  sometimes  occurs  in  the  sense  of  ante ;  as,  non  mihi  mors ,  non  exilium  ob 
oculos  versantur. 

PER,  1)  “through,”  “throughout,”  “all  along,”  “all  over;”  as,  erant  duo  itinera, 
unum  per  Sequanos ,  alteram  per  provinciam  ;  hospitaliter  per  domos  invitati ,  i.  e.,  from 
house  to  house,  in  or  throughout  all  the  houses  ;  milites  fuga  per  proximas  civitates 
dissipati ;  per  agros  vagari ;  religiones  per  manus  traditce,  from  hand  to  hand; — 
2)  “  during;”  e.  g.,  lusdnia  per  totam  noctem  cantat ;  per  quatuor  annos  abfuit;  per 
quietem,  per  somnum,  per  idem  tempus ; — 3)  “through,”  i.  e.,  by  the  means  of  (of 
persons) ;  as,  per  te  salvus  sum  ,*  injurias  per  vos  ulcisci  statuerunt ;  per  me  hoc  didici, 
by  myself; — 4)  “  on  account  of,”  in  such  phrases  as  per  cetatem ,  per  invaletvdinem , 
per  morbum  gravem  non  potuit  proelio  interesse  ;  per  me  licet,  as  far  as  I  am  con¬ 
cerned,  as  to  me  ; — 5)  “  by,”  in  adjurations  and  exclamations;  as,  jurare  per  Jovem 
deosque  penates  ;  per  deos  atque  homines  te  oro  ;  per  deos  immortalesf 

|3gr  Per  is  often  used  to  express  the  manner  in  which  a  thing  is  done;  as,  per 
ludum  ac  jocum,  by  play  and  joke;  per  litteras,  by  letter;  per  scelus,  criminally;  per 
injuriam,  unjustly;  per  insaniam,  in  a  fit  of  madness  ;  per  vices ,  by  turns;  per  iram , 
in  anger ;  per  ordinem ,  in  order :  per  speciem  or  similitudincm,  under  the  cloak  or 
color  of . . . . 

POST,  “after,”  “behind,”  “since;”  c.  g.,  post  meridiem ,  post  tres  annos :  post 
principia,  behind  the  first  line  ;  post  me  erat  urbs,  ante  me  silva  ;  post  hominum  me- 
moriam,  within  the  recollection  of ;  post  natos  homines ,  since  the  creation,  or  lrom 
time  immemorial. 

PRiETER,  1)  “besides,”  i.  e.,  together  with,  not  to  mention;  as,  proeter  audorila- 
tem  etiam  vires  ad  coercendum  habet 2)  “  besides,”  “  except ;”  as,  preeter  se  neminem 
amat ;  nee  hominis  quid  quam  in  eo  erat  preeter  figuram  et  speciem  ; — 3 )  “contrary 


PARTICLES. 


209 


to,”  “against;”  as,  prater  spent,  prater  consuetudinem,  prater  opinionem ,  prater 
naturam,  prater  modum,  beyond  measure; — 4)  “before,”  “along”  (implying  the 
idea  of  passing  by) ;  as,  servi prater  oculos  Lollii  poculaferebant ; — 5)  “  before”  (with 
the  idea  of  distinction) ;  as,  prater  alios,  prater  omnes ;  Aristides  prater  ceteros  Justus 
est  appellatus. 

PROPE,  “near,”  propius,  proxime  ;  as,  prope  urbem ,  proxime  pontem,  propius  mon- 
tem.  ( Propius  and  proxime  take  also  the  dative.) — Prope  is  sometimes  followed  by 
the  ablative  with  ab;  e.  g.,  Tam  prope  a  muris  hostem  habemus. 

PROPTER,  “on  account  of,”  “owing  to;”  as,  mors  propter  brevitatem  vita  nun- 
quam  longe  abest.  It  is  used  also  in  the  sense  of  prope,  “  near  ;”  as,  duo  filii  propter 
patrem  cubantes  ;  propter  rivum  ambulaverunt. 

SECUNDUM,  1)  “according  to,”  “in  conformity  with ;”  as,  secundum  arbitrium 
tuum,  secundum  Platonem  ;  secundum  naturam  vivere  ,* — 2)  “along;”  as,  legiones 
secundum jlumen  duxit  ad  urbem  Gergoviam  ;  secundum  mare  iter  facer  e  ; — 3)  “  alter,” 
“immediately  after,”  “next  to;”  as,  secundum  comitia ;  vulnus  secundum  aurem ; 
secundum  Deum  homines  Tiominibus  maxime  utiles  esse  possunt  j  secundum  te  nihil  mihi 
amicius  salitudine  ; — 4)  “in  favor  of;”  as,  secundum  te  (to  thy  advantage)  decrevit  f 
mulia  secundum  causam  nostram  disputavit. 


Prepositions  with,  the  Ablative. 

5  226. — AB,  1)  “  from ;”  as,  a  prima  atate,  a  principio ,  ab  infantia,  a  pueritia  or  a 
puero;  ingenuis  artibus  a  pueris  dediti  sumus  ;  ab  adolescentia  or  ab  adolescentulo  ;  ab  ortu 
et  occasu  solis ;  a  f route  et  a  tergo,  in  front  and  in  the  rear  ;  a  dextro  ( sinistra )  cornu  •  a 
radicibus,  a  fundamento  ; — 2)  “  from,”  “  against ;”  as,  se  defendere  a  frig  ore,  a  calore , 
ab  hostibus  ;  custodiunt  templum  ab  Hannibale  ; — 3)  “as  to,”  “with  regard  to;”  e.  g., 
mediocriter  a  dodrina  instructus  ;  ab  equitatu  firmus  ;  a  matre  tibi  cognatus  sum ,  on 
the  mother’s  side; — 4)  “  next  to,”  “  immediately  after  ;”  as,  proximus  a  rege  ;  con- 
festim  a  cana,  a  funere ,  a  prcdio  ; — 5)  “  in  consequence  of,”  “  out  of,”  “  from ;”  as, 
a  spe,  ab  ira,  ab  eadem  animi  fiducia  ; — 6)  denoting  an  office;  as,  alicui  esse  a  manu,  an 
amanuensis  ;  ab  epistolis,  a  secretory  ;  a  rationibus,  a  keeper  of  accounts  ;  a  pedibus ,  a 
footman,  servant ; — 7)  denoting  the  followers  of  a  school ;  as,  a  Platone ,  ab  Aristotde , 
a  Socrate  (sc.  pro/ecti). 

Interire  ab  aliquo  is  ■=  occidi  ab  aliquo ;  as,  interiit  a  paucis,  he  fell  by  the 
hands  of  a  few ;  facere,  sentire,  stare  ab  aliquo  =  to  side  with  some  one,  to  be  of  his 
party. 

DE,  1)  “from,”  “down  from,”  “from  among,”  “  out  of;”  e.  g.,  de  tecto  caderc ; 
extorquere  sicam  de  manibus  ;  homo  de  plebe  ;  unus  de  multis  ;  de  meo,  de  tuo,  de  alieno, 
de  publico  (sc.  sumptu),  at  my  (thy,  etc.)  expense; — 2)  “just  after”  (of  time)  ;  as, 
statim  de  prandio ,  statim  de  auctione ;  de  node,  at  night ;  de  tertia  vigilia  ;  de  die,  in 
broad  daylight;  navigare  de  (‘in’)  mense  Decembri  ; — 3)  “after,”  “according  to;” 
as,  de  more ;  de  suorum  sententia  /  de  consilio  meo  ;  de  Dionysio  sum  admiratus,  as 
regards,  as  for,  or  concerning; — 4)  “about,”  “on,”  “respecting;”  as,  cogitare, 
loqui ,  scribere  de  aliquare  • — 5)  sometimes  in  the  sense  of  ab  or  ex;  as,  hocpuer  de 
patre  meo  audivi. 

Phrases:  De  industria ,  purposely;  de  integro ,  afresh;  de  improviso,  unawares; 
nosse  aliquem  de  facie ,  by  his  appearance  ;  expedare ,  differre  diem  de  die,  or  diem  ex 
die  (but  not  de  die  in  diem),  to  be  waiting,  to  put  off  day  after  day. 

EX,  1)  “  from,”  “  out  of;”  o.  g.,  ex  Italia  redierunt ;  ex  equo  pvgnare  or  colloquy. 


210 


PARTICLES. 


scribere  ex  itinere,  on  the  road  ;  ex  fug  a,  during  flight;  ex  omni  parte ,  from  all  parts; 
ex  superiors  loco  dicere  ;  ex  aliquo  audire ,  scire ;  pendere  ex  arbors', — 2)  “from,” 
“  ever  since,”  “  directly  after;”  as,  ex  illo  die  or  tempore  j  ex  consulatu  (ex  dictatura) 
in  Gallium  prof ectus  /  diem  ex  die ,  from  day  to  day,  or  day  after  day  ; — 3)  “  out  of,” 
“from  among;”  as,  unus  ex  multis,  unus  e plebe  ; — 4)  “according  to,”  “in  accordance 
with  ;”  as,  ex  testamento,  ex  lege ,  ex  consuetudine ,  ex  senatus-consuUo  or  auctoritate  ; 
vivere  e  natura ; — 5)  “from,”  “on  account  of”  (denoting  cause);  as,  laborare  ex 
capite ,  ex  oculis ,  e  renibus ,  e  pedibus  /  perire  ex  vulneribus  ;  e  via  languere  ;  ex  lassi- 
tudine  dormire. 

Phrases:  Est  e  re  mea ,  e  re  tua ,  e  re  nostra ,  e  republica,  it  is  for  my  good  or  advan¬ 
tage,  etc.  ;  ex  animo ,  heartily,  sincerely  ;  ex  sententia  or  voluntate,  according  to  one’s 
wish  ;  ex  composite,  according  to  agreement ;  ex  parte,  partly  ;  ex  aequo,  with  equal 
right  or  advantage  ;  ex  adverso ,  e  regione,  opposite  ;  e  longinquo,  from  afar ;  ex  propin- 
quo,  close  by;  e  contrario ,  on  the  contrary;  ex  tempore ,  this  instant,  forthwith;  e  ves- 
tigio,  on  the  spot ;  ex  usu,  useful. 

PRfiE,  1)  “before,”  with  fero  (also  ago)  and  a  pronoun,  as  pugionem  pros  se  tulit, 
he  held  before  him;  pros  se  agere  gregem,  armentum ; — 2)  “in  comparison  with,” 
“  above  or  more  than  ;”  e.  g.,  prcc  se  omnes  contemnit ;  omnes  pros  illo  parvi  futuros 
existimo  ;  Athena  pros  ceteris  urbibus  Gracias  floruere  ; — 3)  “through,”  “on  account  of” 
(of  preventive  causes)  ;  e.  g.,  pra  dolore  loqui  non  potuit ;  solem  pros  sagittarum  mul - 
titudine  non  videbitis. — The  phrase  pros  se  ferre  often  signifies  “  to  show,”  “  dis¬ 
play  ;”  as,  speciem  boni  viri  pra  se  ferre  ;  animum  album  pros  se  ftrre. 

PRO,  1)  “before,”  “in  front  of,”  “close  by;”  e.  g.,  pro  vallo,  pro  castris ,  pro 
oppido ,  pro  templo ;  also  “  in,”  “upon,”  “from,”  as  pro  tribunali  edicere,  pro  suggestu 
pronuntiare ,  pro  rostris  dicere  or  laudare  ; — 2)  “in  proportion  to,”  “according  to,” 
“in  conformity  with;”  as,  pro  multitudine  hominum  ;  pr  odium  atrox  pro  numero 
pugnantium ;  pro  magnitudine  periculi ;  pro  tua  liumanitate,  prudentia ,  sapiential 
agere  pro  viribus  ox  pro  virili  parte,  according  to  one’s  power  or  capacity:  pro  tempore , 
pro  temporibus,  pro  re  or  pro  re  nata,  according  to  circumstances  or  emergencies  ;  pro 
portione,  in  proportion  ;  pro  rata portione  or  pro  rata  parte,  in  certain  proportions, 
proportionally  ;  pro  mea ,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  vestra  parte,  for  my  part,  etc.  ;  pro  se  quis- 
que,  every  one  for  his  part;  pro  eo  ut,  pro  eo  ac,  according  as,  e.  g.,pro  eo  ac  debui , 
according  to  my  duty; — 3)  “for,”  i.  e.,  instead  of,  just  as  much  as  ;  e.  g.,  alicui  esse 
pro  patre,  to  act  as  a  father ;  esse  or  se  gerere  pro  cive  ;  habere  aliquid  pro  certo,  ali- 
quem  pro  amico,  to  consider  as  ;  unus  Plato  est  mihi  pro  centum  millibus  / — 4)  “  for,” 
i.  e.,  for  the  benefit  of;  c.  g.,  pugnare  pro  patria ,  pro  libertate ;  verba  facere  pro 
aliquo . 

For  the  prepositions  IN  and  SUB,  sec  §  78. 

III.  Conjunctions. 

§  221. — Whatever  was  deemed  essential  to  be  known  with  regard 
to  the  signification,  division,  and  use  of  the  conjunctions,  has  been 
already  stated  either  in  the  Elementary  or  in  the  Syntactical  part  of  the 
»  Grammar.  The  following  additional  remarks,  however,  will  not  fail  to 
be  useful  to  the  student. 

1.  The  conjunctions  ac  and  atque  are  generally  used  in  the  sense  of  “  as”  or 
“  than,”  after  ceque,  juxta,  pariter,  perinde,  pro  eo,  similiter ,  totidem,  aliter , 


PARTICLES. 


211 


contra,  sccus,  alius ,  contrarius,  similis,  talis ;  as,  Felicitate  taa  ceque  gaudeo  an 
tu  ipse.  Mon  perinde  atque  ego  putaram ,  res  evenerat.  Pro  eo  tibi  ac  merer  is, 
gratiam  referent.  Gam  totidem  navibus  atque  erat  profectus,  Athenas  rediit. 
Mon  aliter  loquor  ac  sentio.  Omnia  fere  contra  ac  speravi,  evenerant.  Tuam 
salutem  non  secus  ac  meam  tueor.  Aliud  mihi  ac  tibi  videtur.  Similis  Borneo 
pavor  erat  ac  fuit  bello  Gallico.  Hannibalem  in  suspicionem  adduxerunt  tarn - 
quam  alia  atque  antea  sentire. 

2.  The  conjunction  et  sometimes  stands  for  etiam;  e.  g.,  Mon  errasti,  mater , 
nam  et  Me  Alexander  est  Adjuvare  nos  possunt  non  tantum  ii  qui  sunt ,  sed 
et  qui  fuerunt. 

3.  Etsi  and  quamquam  (although)  are  sometimes  used  in  absolute  sentences 
in  the  sense  of  “  yet/’  to  correct  a  preceding  statement ;  e.  g.,  Quamquam  quid 
loquor  f  “  Yet,  why  do  I  speak  ?” — Do  pamas  temeritatis  mece  :  etsi  quce  fuit 
ilia  temeritas  f 

4.  Autem  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  quid  ego  dico  ?  to  correct  an  ex¬ 
pression  just  made  use  of ;  as,  Intelligis  quam  meum  sit  scire  et  curare  quid  in 
republica  fiat ;  fiat  autem  ?  immo  vero  quid  futurum  sit.  Ferendus  tibi  in  hoc 
error  meus,  ferendus  autem  f  immo  vero  etiam  adjuvandus. 

5.  The  disjunctives  aut,  vel  (ve),  and  sive  (seu)  are  thus  distinguished  : 

AUT  stands  when  things  and  expressions  are  so  opposed  to  each  other  that 
if  one  is,  the  other  is  not;  e.  g.,  Hie  vincendum  aut  moriendum,  milites,  est. 
Quidquid  enuntiatur,  aut  verum  est  aut  falsum.  Audendum  est  aliquid  uni- 
versis  aut  omnia  singulis  patienda. — Aut  stands  also  in  the  restrictive  sense  of 
“  at  least,”  to  connect  something  less  important  with  something  more  im¬ 
portant  ;  e.  g.,  Eripe  mihi  hunc  dolorem  aut  minue  saltern.  Profecto  cuncti  aut 
magna  pars  Siccensium  fidem  mutavissent. 

YEL  is  the  Imperative  from  veils,  as  fer  from  ferre.  It  means  “  if  you 
please,”  and  implies  that  it  is  indifferent  which  of  several  things  takes  place. 
Vel,  for  the  most  part,  distinguishes  only  single  words,  more  rarely  whole 
clauses  ;  and  when  it  does  so,  it  implies  not  diametrical  opposition,  but  only 
a  slight  distinction  ;  e.  g.,  Gallia  vel  Britannia  bellum  infer  et  (i.  e.,  one  or  the 
other,  no  matter  which). —  Vel  imperatore  vel  milite  me  utimini  (i.  e.,  use  me  in 
any  capacity  you  like). — Proceres  vel  corrumpere  vel  corrigere  mores  civitatis 
possunt  (i.  e.,  they  can  do  which  they  please). — Here  vel  ad  odium,  vel  ad  miseri- 
cordiam,  vel  omnino  (or  in  general)  ad  animos  judicum  movendos  utilissima  sunt. 
Non  sentiunt  viri  fortes  in  acie  vulnera,  vel  si  sentiunt,  se  mori  malunt. —  Vel 
is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  “  or  rather,”  to  correct  a  preceding  expression ;  as 
Peteres  vel  potius  rogares.  Stupor  cm  hominis  vel  dicam  pecudis  videte.  Valde 
me  diligit,  vel  ut  ejMpaTUidoTEpov  dicam,  valde  me  amat. 

YE  (abridged  from  vel)  unites  single  words;  as,  ter  quaterve  ;  plus 
minusve.  Ea  esse  dico  qua  cerni  tangive  possunt  (i.  e.,  either  of  the  two  will 
suffice.) 

SIVE  (sew)  generally  denote  synonymes  and  expresses  the  equivalence 


212 


PARTICLES. 


of  words  or  clauses ;  e.  g.,  Pallas  she  Minerva  ;  Mars  she  Mavors  ;  Danubius 
live  Ister.  She — she  {sen — sen)  is  commonly  used  when  the  English  “  either — 
or”  is  the  same  as  “  he  it  ....  or  he  it,”  “  be  it  that  ....  or  that ;”  e.  g.,  lllo 
loco  libentissime  soleo  uti  she  quid  mecum  ipse  cogito,  she  aliquid  scribo  aut 
lego. 

SETT  is  common  in  poetry  and  late  prose.  Cicero  uses  it  only  in  combina¬ 
tion  vrith  potius;  as.  Regie  seu  potius  tyrannice.  0  fortunatum  hominem  qui 
ejusmodi  nuntios  seu  potius  pegasos  Jiabet ! 

6.  Nisi,  after  negatives  and  after  questions  implying  a  negative,  is  often 
used  in  the  sense  of  “  except”  or  “  than,”  instead  of  prater  or  praterquam ; 
e.  g.,  Nihil  arbitramur  expedire  nisi  (or  praterquam)  quod  rectum  honestumque 
sit.  Quid  est  pietas  nisi  (or  prceterquam )  voluntas  grata  in  parentes  f  Quern 
unquam  senatus  chem  nisi  (or  prater)  one  nationibus  extern  commendavit  ? — 
When  no  negative  precedes,  praterquam  only  or  prater  can  stand ;  as, 
Prada  omnis  praterquam  hominum  eaptorum  (or  prater  homines  captos )  militi 
concessa  est. 

The  English  “  except  that”  is  expressed  indiscriminately  by  nisi  quod  and 
praterquam  quod,  even  where  no  negative  precedes.  But  when  a  purpose  is 
implied,  nisi  ut  must  be  used  ;  e.  g.,  Mihi  omnia  eum  eo  sunt  communia  nisi 
quod  (or  praterquam  quod)  in  pliilosophia  veliementer  ab  eo  dissentio.  Nihil 
aliud  ex  hac  re  quaro  nisi  ut  intelligas. 

After  nihil  aliud,— nisi  as  well  as  quam  may  follow,  with  this  difference, 
however,  that  nihil  aliud  nisi  means  “  nothing  more  than,”  and  nihil  aliud 
quam,  “  nothing  else  than  ;”  e.  g.,  Bellum  ita  suscipiatur  ut  nihil  aliud  nisi  pax 
quasita  videatur.  Nihil  aliud  onolitus  est  quam  ut  omnes  chitates  in  sua 
temret  potestate. 


APPENDIX 


1.  Ellipsis. — 2.  Figures  of  Syntax. — 3.  The  Roman  Calendar. 


I.  Ellipsis. 

§  228. — Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  word  or  words  which  are 
essential  to  the  grammatical  construction  of  sentences,  but  which  can 
be  readily  inferred  from  the  context. 

The  following  words  are  frequently  omitted : 


Nouns. 

1.  JEdes  or  templum  ;  e.  g.,  Ventum  erat  ad  Vesta.  Senatus  habitus  est  ad 
Apollinis. 

2.  Aqua,  as  calida,  frigida  ;  e.  g.,  Ex  labore  sudanti  frigida  potio  perni- 
ciosissima  est. 

3.  Caro,  as  agnina ,  bubula,  canina,  ferina,  porcina ;  e.  g.,  Poem  a  Dario 
canina  vesci  prohibebantur. 

4.  Castra,  as  cestiva,  hiberna,  stativa  ;  e.  g.,  Tres  legiones  ex  hibernis  educit. 

5.  Febris,  as  tertiana,  quartana ;  e.  g.,  Modo  audivi  quartanam  a  te  dis- 
cessisse. 

6.  Homo  ;  e.  g.,  Boni  sunt  rari. — Thus  amicus,  civis,  miles,  when  they  stand 
with  a  possessive  pronoun ;  as,  Cognovi  ex  meorum  omnium  litteris.  Hanni- 
balem  sui  ejecerunt.  Ccesar  suos  misit.  Insequentes  nostros,  ne  longius  prose- 
querentur,  Sulla  revocavit. 

7.  Locus  and  manus ;  e.  g.,  Non  habeo  quo  confugiam.  JJbi  ad  Diana 
veneris,  ito  ad  dextram. 

8.  Partes,  in  such  phrases  as  alicui  primas  dare,  concedere,  deferre  ;  e.  g., 
Amoris  erga  me  tibi  primas  defero,  “  I  give  you  the  first  place  among  those 
who  love  me.” 

9.  Proedium,  as  Tusculanum,  Pompeianum ;  e.  g.,  Miraris  quod  me  Laur 
rentinum  meum  tantopere  delectet. 


214 


APPENDIX. 


10.  Verba ;  e.  g.,  We  multa,  ne  plum,  quid  plum,  sc.  verba  dicam. — We 
multis  (sc.  verbis  utar),  Diogenes  emitur. — Quid  multa?  sic  mihi  persuasi  non 
posse  esse  animum  mortalem. 

11.  Via ;  e.  g.,  Xerxes,  qua  sex  mensibus  iter  fecerat,  eddem  minus  diebus 
triginta  in  Asiam  reversus  est. 

Verbs. 

§  229. — 1.  Dico,  inquit,  respondeo,  in  quoting  a  person’s  words  or  opinion, 
and  facio,  in  expressing  our  own  opinion ;  e.  g.,  Turn  ille.  Hie  ego. — Gcepius 
olim :  non  omnibus  dormio.  Rede  ille  (fecit) ;  melius  hi  (fecerunt).  Nihil  per 
vim  unquam  Clodius,  omnia  per  vim  Milo  (sc.  fecit). 

2.  Facio,  fio,  after  nihil  aliud  quam,  quid  aliud  quam,  nihil  preeterquam ; 
e.  g.,  “  They  do  nothing  but  laugh,”  or  “  they  are  merely  laughing ;”  Nihil 
aliud  quam  rident. — Tissaphernes  nihil  aliud  quam  bellum  comparavit.  Per 
biduum  nihil  aliud  quam  steterunt  parati  ad  pugnandum.  Ilia  node  nihil 
(sc.  fiebat)  preeterquam  vigilatum  est.  INT  This  form  of  expression  is  found  in 
Livy,  Nepos,  Curtius,  etc. ;  but  it  does  not  occur  in  Cicero. 

3.  Oro,  precor,  obsecro,  in  adjurations  ;  as,  Prop  era,,  per  deos  ;  scis  enim  quan¬ 
tum  sit  in  celeritate.  Per  ego  vos  deos  patrios,  vindicate  db  ultimo  dedecore 
nomen  gentemque  Persarum. 

4.  Pertinere,  “  to  concern  e.  g..  Quid  hoc  ad  me  ?  Quid l  ad  te  ?  Quorsus 
hoc  ?  “  What  is  that  for  ?” — Rede  an  secus,  nihil  ad  nos.  Zaleucus  sive  fuit 
sive  non  fuit,  nihil  ad  rem.  Quid  ad  Geesarem,  quid  agat  nostra  Germania? 

5.  Quod  sometimes  stands  (especially  in  letters)  for  quod  attinet  ad  id  quod, 
“  with  regard  to,”  “  as  regards  the  fact  that ;”  e.  g.,  “  With  regard  to  what 
you  write  about  your  coming  to  see  me,  I  wish  you  to  remain  there  ;” 
Quod  scribis  te  si  velim,  ad  me  venturam :  ego  vero  te  istic  esse  volo.  Quod  mihi 
de  nostro  statu  gratularis  :  minime  miramur  te  tuo  opere  Icetari.  Quod  scribis 
te  velle  scire  qui  sit  reipublicce  status  :  summa  dissensio  est.  Quod  scire  vis,  qua 
quisque  in  te  fide  sit  et  voluntate,  difficile  didu  est  de  singulis. 

6.  Scito,  scitote,  or  (in  indirect  Narration)  sciat,  sciret , — especially  after  quod  in 
the  sense  of  quod  attinet  ad  id  quod  ;  e.  g.,  Quod  mihi  Pompeiam  uxorem  tuam 
commendas,  (scito)  cum  Sura  nostro  statim,  tuis  litteris  ledis,  loculus  sum. 
Legationi  Gcesaris  Ariovistus  respond'd :  quod  sibi  Gcesar  denuntiaret,  se  JEclu- 
orum  injurias  non  neglecturum,  (sciret)  neminem  securn  sine  sua  perride 
contendisse. 

7.  Quid  ?  quod — frequently  occurs  instead  of  quid  dicam  de  eo  quod,,  and  may 
be  rendered  by  “  nay,”  “  nay  even,”  “  moreover e.  g.,  Quid,  quod  salus  soci¬ 
orum  in  periculum  vocatur  ?  Orpheus  in  animum  meum  scepe  incurrit :  quid, 
quod  earum  rerum,  quae  nunquam  omnino  fiuerunt,  neque  esse  potuerunt,  ui 
Scyllae,  ut  Chimcerce,  preesto  est  imago. 

8.  An  Infinitive  is  often  to  be  supplied  in  indirect  Narration  after  relatives, 
where  the  verb,  if  it  were  repeated,  would  be  put  either  in  the  Indicative  oi 


/ 


/  '  -  •  :*  >  .  - 

\ 

APPENDIX.  215. 

Subjunctive,  according  as  the  writer  wished  to  express  liis  own  sentiment  or 
that  of  another  ;  e.  g.,  Fateor  me  in  ea  parte  fuisse  qua  te,  or  qua  tu  fuisti. 
Fatetur  se  in  ea  parte  fuisse  qua  me,  or  qua  ipse  fuerim.  Gamanos  ejusdem 
conditionis,  cujus  Gapuam,  esse  placuit,  or  cujus  Capua  esset. 

Particles. 

§  230. — 1.  The  conjunction  ut  is  sometimes  omitted,  when  a  clause  precedes 
with  ne ;  e.g.,Patres  Conscripti  legatos  in  Bythiniam  miser unt,  qui  ab  rage 
peterent  ne  inimicissimum  suum  secum  haheret  sibique  dederet.  Monere  ccepit 
Forum  ne  ultima  experiri  perseveraret  dederetque  se  victori. — The  conjunction 
et,  que ,  or  atque,  may  in  such  passages  be  rendered  by  “  but.” 

2.  In  the  formula  non  modo  non — sed  ne-quidem  (or  sed  vix),  the  second  non 
is  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted. 

Non  is  expressed,  when  each  clause  of  the  sentence  has  its  own  finite 
verb,  or  when  the  finite  verb  stands  in  the  first,  in  case  there  should,  be  but 
one,  common  to  both.  E.  g.,  Fgo  tibi  non  modo  non  irascor,  sed  ne  reprehendo, 
quidem  factum  tuum.  Ille  non  modo  non  prseerat  ulli  negotio,  sed  etiam  ne 
intererat  quidem. — Horum  summorum  imperatorum  non  modo  res  gestas  non 
antepono  meis,  sed  ne  fortunam  quidem  ipsam.  Id  non  modo  re  prohibere  non 
licet,  sed  ne  verbis  quidem  vituperare. 

Non  is  omitted,  when  the  sentence  has  but  one  finite  verb,  expressed  in  the 
second  clause.— In  English,  either  the  first  clause  is  introduced  by  “not  only 
not,”  and  the  second  by  “  but  not  even”  “  but  scarcely — or  the  order  of  the 
clauses  is  inverted,  and  then  the  former  introduced  by  “not  even,”  the  latter 
by  “  much  less.”  E.  g.,  Vir  bonus  non  modo  face-re,  sed  ne  cogitare  quidquam 
audebit,  quod  non  honestum  sit.  Assentatio  non  modo  amico,  sed  7ie  liber o 
quidem  digna  est.  Tales  homines  non  modo  sine  cura  quiescere,  sed  ne  spirare 
quidem  sine  metu  possunt.  Gamillorum,  Fdbriciorum,  Curiorum  virtutes  non 
solum  in  moribus  nostris,  sed  vix  jam  in  libris  reperiuntur. 

II.  Figures  of  Syntax. 

§  231. — Syntactical  Figures  are  certain  deviations  from  the  or¬ 
dinary  connection  and  arrangement  of  words.  They  are  by  various 
Grammarians  variously  divided  and  subdivided.  The  author,  for  the 
sake  of  reference,  has  preferred  to  present,  them  here  alphabetically 
arranged. 

1.  Anacolttthon,  when  the  latter  part  of  a  sentence  does  not  correspond  in 
construction  with  the  former ;  as,  Bum  hcec  ita  fierent,  rex  Juba,  cogniiis 
Ccesaris  difficultatibus  copiarumque  paucitate,  non  est  visum,  dari  spatium  com 
valescendi.  JJnum  hoc  certe  videor  mihi  verissime  posse  dicere  turn  quum  haberet 
respublica  Luscinos — (thus  far,  indirect :  what  follows,  direct)  et  turn  quum  erani 
Gatones, — tamen  hujuscemodi  res  commissa  nemini  est. 

2.  Anastromie  is  an  inversion  of  the  natural  order  of  words;  as,  Fgo  si 


216 


APPENDIX. 


potero,  faciam  vobis  satis.  Atheniensibus  exhaustis  prater  arma  ei  naves,  nihil 
erat  super. — Transtra  per  et  remos.  Spem  metumque  inter. 

3.  Asyndeton  is  tlie  omission  of  connectives ;  as,  Abiit,  excessit,  evasit, 
erupit.  Ostentas  patientiam  famis,  frigoris,  inopice  omnium  rerum.  Equidem 
non  deero :  monebo,  prcedicam,  denuntiabo,  testabor  semper  Deos  hominesque 
quid  sentiam.  Ex  cupiditatibus  odium,  dissidia,  discor  dice,  seditiones,  bella 
nascuntur. 

4.  Enallage  is  a  change  of  words,  or  a  substitution  of  one  gender,  number, 
case,  person,  tense,  mood,  or  voice,  of  the  same  word  for  another ;  as,  Populus 
late  rex,  for  regnans.  Romanus  proelio  victor,  for  Romani  victores.  Hostis 
habet  muros,  for  hostes  habent  muros.  Nostrum  istud  vivere  triste,  for  vita  nostra. 
Omnia  Giceronis  patent  Trebiano,  for  omnia  mea  tibi  patent.  Rem  vides  quo- 
modo  se  hdbeat,  for  vides  quomodo  se  res  habeat.  Nosti  Marcellum  quam  tardus 
sit,  for  nosti  quam  tardus  Marcellus  sit. 

5.  Evocatio  is  a  figure  by  which  a  verb  in  the  first  or  second  person,  is  joined 
to  a  noun  or  pronoun  of  the  third  person ;  as,  Quisque  suos  patimur  manes. 
Hannibal  peto  pacem  qui  neque  peterem  nisi  utilem  crederem. 

6.  Hellenism,  or  Grecism,  is  the  use  of  Greek  forms  and  constructions ;  as, 
Pallada,  Gyclopas,  for  Palladem,  Cyclopes.  Opaca  locorum,  for  opaca  loca.  Os 
humerosque  JDeo  similis,  for  ore  humerisque.  Desine  querelarum,  for  a  querelis. 
Dignus  amari,  for  qui  ametur.  Ibit  frenare  cohortes,  for  frenatum. 

7.  Hendiadys  is  the  expression  of  one  idea  by  two  substantives  connected 
by  et  ( que ),  where  one  of  the  substantives  stands  in  place  of  an  adjective  or  a 
genitive;  e.  g.,  Pateris  libamus  et  auro,  for  pateris  aureis.  Ex  tenebris  et 
car  cere  procedere,  for  e  tenebroso  car  cere.  Jactari  cestu  et  febri,  for  cestu 
febris.  Redimitus  foribus  coronisque,  for  coronis  e  floribus  factis.  Devinctus 
necessitudine  ac  vetustate,  for  vetusta  necessitudine.  Veteranos  eoloniamque 
deducere,  for  coloniam  veteranorum.  Aliquid  prodere  ad  memoriam  pos- 
teritcdemque,  for  ad  memoriam  posteritatis.  Alicui  inferre  vim  et  manus,  for 
violentas  manus. 

8.  Hypallage  is  an  interchange  of  constructions,  and  a  transferring  of  attri¬ 
butes  from  their  proper  subjects  to  others.  E.  g.,  Dare  classibus  Austros,  for 
classes  Austris.  Vina  qua  cadis  onerarat  Acestes,  for  quibus  cados.  Eontium 
gelidce  perennitates,  for  fontium  gelidorum  perennitates. 

9.  Hysteron  proteron  is  reversing  the  natural  order  of  the  sense,  by  pla¬ 
cing  (of  two  ideas)  that  first  which  should  be  last ;  as,  Valet  atque  vivit,  for  vivit 
atque  valet.  Moriamur  et  in  'media  arma  ruamus.  Incendere  ac  diripere 
urbes. 

10.  Periphrasis  or  Circumlocution  is  a  circuitous  mode  of  expression ;  as, 
Teneri  fcetus  ovium,  for  agrii.  Non  estate  confectis,  non  mulieribus,  non  inf  an¬ 
tibus  pepercit,  for  nemini  pepercit.  Omnes  memoriam  consulatus  tui,  mores, 
faciem,  denique  ac  nomen  detestantur,  for  te.  Quis  sibi  persuadeat  esse  aliquem 
humana  specie  etfigura,  qui  tantum  immanitate  bestias  vicerit,  ut,  propter  quos 


APPENDIX. 


217 


Juinc  suavissimam  lucem  aspexerit,  eos  indignissime  luce  privarit,  for  quis  credat 
esse  hominem  qui  parentes  suos  occidere  possit  f 

11.  Pleonasm  is  using  a  greater  number  of  words  than  is  necessary  to  ex 
press  the  meaning ;  Erant  omnino  itinera  duo  quibus  itineribus  domo  exire  p os- 
sent.  Somnum  ego  hao  nocte  oculis  non  vidi  meis.  Sic  ore  locuta  est.  Tuus 
dolor  humanus  est  is  quidem,  sed  tamen  moderandus. 

12.  Polysyndeton  is  a  redundancy  of  connectives  ;  as,  Post  hunc  maximum 
habere  vim  arbitrantur  Apollinem,  et  Mart  era,  et  Jovem,  et  Minervam.  Una 
Eurusque  Notusque  ruunt ,  creberque  procellis  Africus .  Ex  cupiditatibus  odium , 
et  dissidia ,  et  discordice ,  et  seditiones ,  et  bella  nascuntur. 

13.  Synchysis  is  a  confused  and  intricate  arrangement  of  words ;  as,  Saxa 
vocant  Itali  mediis  quce  in  fluctibus  aras,  for  quce  saxa  in  mediis  fluctibus  Itali 
vocant  aras.  Pcene  macros  arsit  dum  turdos  versat  in  igni,  for  pcene  arsit  dum 
macros  turdos,  etc.  Non  erit  melius,  inquit,  nisi  de  quo  consulimus,  vocem 
misisse,  for  melius  erit,  non  misisse  vocem ,  nisi  de  quo  consulimus . 

14.  Synesis  or  construdio  ad  sensum,  when  the  construction  refers  to  the 
sense  rather  than  to  the  precise  nature  of  the  words ;  as,  Latium  Capuaque 
agro  multati  sunt.  Ubi  illic  est  scelus  (where  is  that  scoundrel)  qui  me  per- 
didit  ?  Incitabant  Gatilinam  corrupti  civitatis  mores  quos  luxuria  atque  avaritia 
vexdbant  (==  mores  civium  quos,  etc.). 

15.  Tmesis, or  Diacope,  is  the  separating  of  a  compound  word  by  the  inter¬ 
position  of  another  word ;  as,  Septem  subjecta  trioni  gens,  for  septentrioni.  Quale 
id  cunque  est.  Altera  pars  per  mihi  brevis  videtur.  Thais  maximo  te  orabat 
opere,  ut  eras  redires. 

16.  Zeugma  is  the  uniting  of  two  substantives  to  a  verb,  which  is  applicable 
only  to  one  of  them ;  as,  Jugurtha,  pacem  an  helium  gerens  periculosior  esset, 
in  incerto  habebatur  (here  gerens  is  applicable  to  bellum  only,  because  pacem 
gerere  is  not  said).  Magonem  alii  naufragio,  alii  a  servis  interfectum  scriptum 
reliquerunt  (we  say  naufragio  perire,  but  not  naufragio  inter fci). 


III.  The  Roman  Calendar. 

§  232. — The  Romans  did  not  reckon  the  days  of  the  month  in  an 
uninterrupted  series,  as  we  do,  from  the  first  to  the  last.  They  dis¬ 
tinguished  in  every  month  three  principal  days :  the  Calendar,  Nonce, 
and  Idus , — from  which  they  counted  backward. 

The  Calendee  were  always  the  first  day  of  the  month ;  the  Nonce  fell 
on  the  5th,  and  the  Idus  on  the  13th,  except  in  March,  May,  July,  and 
October,  in  which  the  Nonce  fell  on  the  1th,  and  the  Idus  on  the  15th. — 
The  day  preceding  the  Calendee ,  Nonce ,  and  Idus,  was  called  priclie 
(i.  e.,  pridie  ante )  Calendas ,  Nonas ,  Idus. 


218 


APPENDIX 


CO  • 

March 

May,  July, 

January,  August, 

April,  June 

Seotember, 

"  . . .  -  "  1  1 

Febr.  has  28  davs 

October 

December 

November 

(in  leap-years  29). 

o 

(31  days). 

(31  days). 

(30  days). 

1. 

Calendis. 

Calendis. 

Calendis. 

Calendis. 

2. 

VI.  ] 

IV. 

ante 

IV- 

ante 

IV. 

ante 

3. 

V. 

ante 

III. 

Nonas. 

III. 

Nonas. 

III. 

Nonas. 

4. 

IY. 

> 

Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

5. 

III.  j 

Non  is. 

Nonis. 

Nonis. 

6. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

VIII.  i 

VIII. ) 

* 

VIII. ) 

7. 

Nonis. 

VII. 

vi/. 

VII. 

8. 

VIII.] 

VI. 

ante 

VI. 

ante 

VI. 

ante 

Idus. 

9. 

VII. 

V. 

Idus. 

V. 

Idus. 

V. 

10. 

VI. 

■ 

ante 

IV. 

IV. 

IV. 

11. 

V. 

Idus. 

III.  J 

III.  J 

III.  J 

12. 

IV. 

Pridie  Idus. 

Pridie  Idus. 

Pridie  Plus. 

13. 

III.  J 

Idibus. 

Idibus. 

Idibus. 

14. 

Pridie  Idus. 

XIX. 

> 

XVIII.  ) 

XVI.) 

15. 

Idibus. 

XVIII. 

XVII. 

XV. 

16. 

XVII. 

•s 

XVII. 

XVI. 

XIV. 

17. 

XVI. 

XVI. 

rH 

XV. 

r-j 

4-3 

XIII. 

Co 

18. 

XV. 

XV. 

'+2 

XIV. 

o 

XII. 

■sbs 

19. 

XIV. 

-j-j 
r~ i 

XIV. 

o 

r * 

r-* 

XIII. 

g 

D 

XI. 

20. 

XIII. 

i— < 

s 

XIII. 

o 

r“t 

XII. 

4-3  'hfi 

X. 

Co 

21. 

XII. 

o 

r~[  , 

XII. 

-4-2 

XI. 

1  o 

& 

IX. 

^£3 

£ 

22. 

XI. 

4h 

XI. 

v •  1— 1 

f  js 

X. 

§  © 

VIII. 

J3 

23. 

24. 

25. 

X. 

IX. 

VIII. 

O  H 

«  o 
£3  ^ 

£  jO 
•"O 

X. 

IX. 

VIII. 

§  b 
£3  ;=; 

£  £ 

*<> 

IX. 

VIII. 

VII. 

1  v 

VII. 

VI. 

V. 

£ 

26. 

VII. 

VII. 

VI. 

£ 

IV. 

27. 

VI. 

VI. 

V. 

III.  j 

28. 

V. 

V. 

IV. 

Pridie  Calendas 

29. 

IV. 

IV. 

III. 

Martias. 

SO. 

III. 

III. 

- 

Cl. 

Pridie  Calend. 

Pridie  Calend. 

Pridie  Calend. 

(of  the  month 

(of  the  month 

(of  tb 

e  month 

following). 

following). 

following). 

Note  1. — The  names  of  the  months  are  sometimes  used  substantively  as  pridie 
Nonas  Februarii. — The  best  writers,  however,  use  them  as  adjectives,  and  make  them 
agree  with  Calends e,  Nona ,  and  Idus  ;  as,  Pridie  Nonas  Februarias.  Calendis  Sextilibus 
veni  Syracusas.  Ecce  Calendis  Janiis  mutata  omnia!  Pridie  Nonas  Juntas  litteras 
tuas  accept.  Ea  mente  discessi  ut  adessem  Calendis  Januariis. 

Before  the  time  of  the  emperors,  the  month  of  July  was  called  Quintilis ,  and  the 
month  of  August,  Sextilis. 

Notk  2. —In  leap  years  ( anni  intercalares )  the  month  of  February  had  one  day 
more  ;  but  this  intercalary  day,  instead  of  being  added  at,  the  end  of  the  month,  as  it 


APPENDIX. 


219 


s  the  custom  in  modern  times,  was  inserted  after  the  23d  of  February,  so  that  the 
24th  of  Febr.  was  reckoned  double,  and  was  for  this  reason  called  dies  bisextus  ( bis 
sextus ),  whence  the  leap  year  itself  received  the  name  annus  bisextus  or  bisextilis. 


Construction  of  time  according  to  the  Roman  Calendar 

§  238. — 1.  On  what  day? — The  question  when ?  or  on  what  day?  is  an¬ 
swered  by  the  ablative  when  the  day  is  one  of  the  three  principal  days  of  the 
month ;  as,  Calendis,  Nonis,  Idibus. — The  day  immediately  preceding  the 
Calendar,  Nonce,  and  Idas,  is  expressed  by  pridie  with  the  accusative,  and 
sometimes,  though  more  rarely,  with  the  genitive  ;  as,  pridie  Calendas,  pridie 
Nonas,  pridie  Idus,  pridie  Galendarum. 

The  remaining  days  are  expressed  either  (a)  by  the  ablative  :  as,  “  He  died 
on  the  30th  of  Dec. Obiit  die  tertio  ante  Calendas  Januarias,  and  abridged, 
without  die  and  ante :  Obiit  tertio  Calendas  Januarias  (obiit  III.  Cal.  Jan.) ; — or 
(b)  by  ante  diem  with  the  accusative ;  as,  obiit  ante  diem  tertium  Calendas 
Januarias  (obiit  a.  d.  III.  Cal.  Jan.). 

(jggjp  The  formula  ante  diem  with  the  accusative,  difficult  as  it  is  to  be  explained 
grammatically,  was  almost  exclusively  used  by  Cicero  and  Livy.  The  '■'‘ante  diem ” 
was  treated  as  an  indeclinable  substantive  to  which,  like  to  other  substantives,  various 
prepositions  were  prefixed:  but,  whatever  the  preposition  prefixed  might  be,  ad ,  in, 
ab ,  or  ex,  it  was  invariably  followed  by  the  accusative. 

2.  By  what  day? — The  question  by  or  for  what  day?  is  answered  by  the 
accusative  with  in,  ad,  usque  ad;  as,  Capuam  venire  jusd  sumus  ad  Nonas 
Februarias  (by  the  5th  of  Febr.), — ad  pridie  Idus  Februarias  (by  the  12th  of 
Febr.), — ad  ante  diem  sextum  Calendas  Martias  (ad  a.  d.  VI.  Cal.  Mart.,  by  the 
24th  of  Febr.).  Nos  in  Formiano  esse  volumus  usque  ad  pridie  Nonas  Martias 
(by  the  Gth  of  March).  Consul  comitia  in  ante  diem  tertium  Nonas  textiles  (in 
a.  d.  III.  Non.  Sext.,  “  he  fixed  the  elections  by  an  edict  for  the  3d  of  August) 
edixit. 

3.  From  what  day? — The  question  from  what  day?  is  answered  by  the 
ablative  with  ab  or  ex;  as,  Ludi  Antii  futuri  sunt  a  IV.  ad  pridie  Nonas 
Maias  (from  the  4tli  to  the  6th  of  May).  De  Quinto  fratre  nuntii  nobis  tristes 
venerant  ex  ante  diem  Nonas  Junias  (=  ex  or  a  Nonis  Juniis)  usque  ad  pridie 
Calendas  Septembres  (from  the  5th  of  June  to  the  31st  of  August). 

Note. — The  next  day  after  the  Cal.,  Nonce,  and  Idus ,  may  be  expressed  also  by 
postridie  ;  as,  Postridie  Calendas  Maias,  the  2d  of  May  ;  postridie  Nonas  Martias,  the 
8th  of  March  ;  postridie  Idus  Decembres ,  the  14th  of  December. 


Method  of  reducing  Roman  time  to  our  own. 

§  234. — 1.  To  reduce  the  Calendar,  add  2  to  the  number  of  days  of 
the  preceding  month :  from  the  sum  subtract  the  given  date,  and  the 
remainder  will  give  you  our  date.  Thus, 


220 


APPENDIX. 


XII.  Cal.  Febr. 
VIII.  Cal.  Mart. 

XIII.  Cal.  Jun. 
XVI.  Cal.  Dec. 


Jan.  has  31  days ; 
Febr.  lias  28  days  ; 
May  has  31  days  ; 
Nov.  has  30  days  ; 


31  +  2  =  33  ;  33  — 12  =  21st  of  Jan. 
28  +  2  =  30  ;  80  -  8  =  22d  of  Febr. 
31  +  2  =  33;  33  — 13  =  20th  of  May. 
80  +  2  =  32;  82 -16  =  16th  of  Nov. 


2.  To  reduce  the  Nonce  and  Idus,  add  1  to  the  number  of  the  day  on 
which  the  Nonce  or  Idus  fall :  from  the  sum  subtract  the  given  date, 
and  the  remainder  will  give  you  our  date.  Thus, 


III.  Non.  Sept.  Non.  on  the  5th  ; 

VI.  Non.  Oct.  Non.  on  the  7th; 

VII.  Idas  Febr.  Idus  on  the  13th  ; 

VII.  Idus  Jul.  Idus  on  the  15th  ; 


5  +  1=  6;  6  —  3  =  3d  of  Sept. 

7  +  1*3  8;  8-6  =  2d  of  Oct. 

13  +  1  =  14;  14  —  7  =  7th  of  Febr. 
15  +  1  =  16;  16  -7  =  9th  of  Jul. 


Method  of  reducing  our  time  to  Homan.  » 

§  235. — 1.  If  the  given  date  is  between  the  Calendce  and  Nonce , 
add  1  to  the  day  of  the  Nonce. ;  if  between  the  Nonce  and  Idus,  add  1 
to  the  day  of  the  Idus  :  from  the  sum  subtract  the  date  given,  and 
the  remainder  will  be  the  Roman  date.  Thus, 

February  3d.  Non.  on  the  5th;  5  +  1=  6;  6—  3  =  III.  Non.  Febr. 

July  2d.  Non.  on  the  7th;  7  +  1=  8;  8—  2  =  VI.  Non.  Jul. 

October  10th.  Idus  on  the  15th  ;  15  +  1  =  16;  16— 10  =  VI.  Idus  Oct. 

December  9th.  Idus  on  the  13th  ;  13+1  =  14;  14—  9  =  V.  Idus  Dec. 


2.  If  the  given  date  is  between  the  Idus  and  the  Calendce  of  the 
month  following,  add  2  to  the  number  of  days  in  the  month :  from  the 
sum  subtract  the  date  given,  and  the  remainder  will  be  the  number  of 
the  Calendce  of  the  next  month.  Thus, 


February  19th.  Febr.  has  28  days  ; 

April  25th.  Apr.  has  30  days ; 

August  18th.  Aug.  has  31  days ; 

November  23d.  Nov.  has  30  days  ; 


28  +  2=30  ;  30-T9c=XI.  Cal.  Mart. 
80  +  2=32;  32— 25=VII.  Cal.  Maias, 
31  +  2=33;  33— 18=XV.  Cal.  Sept. 
30  +  2=32  ;  32  —  28=IX.  Cal.  Dec. 


3.  If  the  date  is  the  day  on  which  the  Calendce ,  Nonce ,  or  Idus 
fall,  it  is  called  Caendce ,  Nonce ,  or  Iclus ,  respectively :  if  it  is  the  day 
before,  it  is  called  pridie  Calendas  (always  of  the  month  following),  or 
pridie  Nonas,  pridie  Idus  (both  of  the  same  month). — Thus  the  31st 
of  Dec.,  is  called  pridie  Calendas  Januarias\  the  6th  of  October,  pridie 
Nonas  Octobres  y  the  14th  of  March,  pridie  Idas  Martias . 


PROSODY. 


CHAPTER  I. 

§  236. — Prosody  treats  of  the  length,  or  quantity,  of  syllables  and 
the  laws  of  Versification. 

A  syllable,  with  respect  to  its  quantity,  is  either  short  (^),  long  (-), 
or  common  (^). 

A  syllable  is  said  to  be  common,  when  it  may  be  used  short  or  long, 
at  the  option  of  the  poet. 

General  Rules. 

A  YOWEL  BEFORE  ANOTHER  VOWEL. 

(Ia  Latin  words.) 

Vocalem  breviant  alia  subeunte  Latini. 

Produc,  ni  sequitur  r,  fio  et  nomina  quintrn,1 
Quae  geminos  casus  e  longo  assumit  in  ei ; 

Verum  e  corripiunt  fideique,  spei que,  reique. 

Ius  commune  est  vati :  producito  alius  ; 

Altenus  brevia.  JPompei  et  talia  produc. 

Eheu  produces  semper,  variabitur  Uhe. 

%  237. — Rule  1.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  a  diphthong,  or  an  h,  is 
short ;  as,  Feus,  pice,  nihil. 

Stat  medio  virtus  :  medium  tenuere  beati. 

Quam  felix  puer  est,  virtus  in  quo  anteit  annos.  Mar. 

Exc.  1.  Fio  has  the  i  long  in  all  its  forms,  except  those  in  which  the  second 
vowel  is  followed  by  r  ;  as,  fiunt,  fiebam,  flam  ; — but  fieri,  flerem,  etc. 

Omnia  jam  fient,  fieri  quae  posse  negabam.  Ovid. 


J)  Read  :  Produc ,  ni  sequitur  Rho,fio ,  etc. 


222 


PROSODY. 


Exc.  2.  Tlie  genitive  and  dative  sing,  of  the  fifth  declension  have  the  e  long 
"before  i ;  as,  diei,  speciei.  But  e  is  short  in  spU,  and  commonly,  also,  in  m 
and  fidei. 

Exc.  3.  Genitives  in  ins  have  the  i  long  in  prose,  but  common  in  poetry  ; 
as,  umus,  soUus,  totius. — The  genitive  cdius,  however,  is  always  long,  and 
alterlus  always  short. 

Xnvidus  alterlus  marcescit  rebus  opimis.  Hor. 

Exc.  4.  Cams,  Pompeius,  Vulteius  (also  Cajus,  Pompejus,  Vultejus),  and  the 
like,  have  the  a  and  e  before  i  long.  Yoc.  0  Cdi,  Pompei,  Vultei. — In  ohe 
and  Diana,  the  first  syllable  is  common  ;  in  eheu  it  is  long. 


A  VOWEL  BEFORE  ANOTHER  VOWEL. 

(In  Greek  -words.) 

Nomina  Grsecorum  certa  sine  lege  vagantur : 

Quasdara  etenim  brevibus,  veluti  symphonia ,  gaudent. 

At  quaedam  longis,  ceu  clia ,  chorea ,  Thalia , 

Darius ,  Cythereci ,  der,  elegia,  platea, 

Atqne  alia.  At  choream  breviat  plateamque  poeta. 

Solvit  et  in  geminas,  veluti  Cythereia ,  longam. 

§  238. — Rule  2.  Words  of  Greek  origin  generally  retain  their  original  quan¬ 
tity.  Accordingly 

a)  The  first  vowel  is  short  in  SimMs,  Deucalion,  Pigmalion,  idea,  sophia, 
philosophla,  theologia,  etymologia,  and  others  in  ia,  which,  however,  are  pro¬ 
nounced  by  many  with  the  accent  on  the  penult.1  [[ggP  In  Academia  the 
penult  ought  to  be  regarded  as  long. 

b)  The  first  vowel  is  long  in  Agesilcius,  Archddus,  Menddus,  Laertes,  Ldome- 
don,  Lycdon,  Troas,  Trains,  Io,  Amphion,  Arion,  Ixion,  Orion,  Pandion,  and, 
in  general,  in  those  words  that  are  written  in  Greek  with  a  diphthong  (ei) ;  as, 
JEneas,  Cythereci,  Galatea,  Medea,  Odeum,  gyuaceum,  Clio,  Arius,  Basilius, 
Iphigenia,  Alexandria,  Antiochia,  Sdeucia,  braxium.  and  also  in  adjectives  in 
eus,  formed  from  Greek  proper  names,  as  Cythereus.  Pythagoreus,  Pelopeus, 
Phoebeus,  giganteus,  etc. 

c)  The  first  vowel  is  common  in  Malea,  Nereis,  Dcedaleus,  and  a  few  more. — 
Chorea  and  platea  (from  ^opelct  and  rr XareTa  sc.  66 op)  have  the  e  long  in 
prose,  but  common  in  poetry,  as  chorea,  platea. 


J)  Idea ,  Andreas ,  sophia ,  philosoplda ,  symphonia ,  evphonia ,  etymologia ,  theologia , 
orthographia,  prosodia,  categoria ,  homilia ,  Lucia ,  Archias ,  Ananias,  et  alia,  quamvis 
vocalem  ante  vocalem  corripiant,  tamen  acuta  penultima  amultis  viris  doctis,  more 
Grcecorum,  in  soluta  oratione  pronunciantur :  Idea,  Andreas,  Sophia ,  etc. — Contra, 
in  comcedia ,  trageedia ,  Urania,  ecclesia,  et  similibus,  quse  pariter  vocalem  ante  vocalem 
eorripiunt,  antepenultima  acuta  potius  Latine  efferri  placuit.  F.  Alvarez. 


PROSODY. 


223 


Sit  Medea  ferox  invictaque,  flebilis  Ino, 

Perfidus  Ixion,  Io  vaga,  tristis  Orestes.  Hot. 

Note  1. — The  long  vowels  e  and  I,  when  arising  from  ti,  are  sometimes  resolved 
into  two  syllables ;  as,  Gytherlia ,  elegeia ,  Pelopeius ,  instead  of  Gythere elegia , 

Pelopeus. 

Note  2. — Greek  genitives  and  accusatives  in  eos  and  ea,  from  nominatives  in  eus, 
have  the  penult  generally  short, — but  sometimes,  also,  long ;  as,  Idomeneos ,  Mome¬ 
nta ,  Ilionea. 


DIPHTHONGS  AND  CONTRACTED  SYLLABLES. 

Omnis  diphthongus  contractaque  syllaba  longa  est. 

Proe  rape  prsepositam  vocali,  dicque  praeiislus. 

§  239. — Rule  3.  Every  diphthong  and  every  contracted  syllable  is  long  ;  as, 
praeda,  rnoeror,  laudo, — cdgo  for  coago,  mdlo  for  mcigis  volo,  junior  for  juvenior, 
fleram  for  jleveram. 

Jam  coeluin  terramque  meo  sine  numine,  venti, 

Miscere  et  tantas  audetis  toll  ere  moles? 

Quos  ego  ....  Sed  motos  praestat  componere  fluctus.  Virg. 

Exc.  Pf(B  before  a  vowel  in  composition  is  short,  as  praealtus,  praeeunt, 
praeiens,  praeustus. 


POSITION. 

Yocalis  longa  est  si  consona  bina  sequatur, 

Ant  duplex,  aut  i  vocalibus  interjectnm. 

Quadrijugus  rapitur,  bijugus  conjungitur  illi. 

§  240. — Rule  4.  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  before  x,  z,  j,  is  long  by 
position  ;  as,  terra,  rixa,  gdza,  major. 

Pluribus  intentus  minor  est  ad  singula  sensus. 

Conscia  mens  recti  famfe  mendacia  ridet.  Ovid. 

Dat  veniam  corvis,  vexat  censura  columbas. 

A  vowel  is  long  by  position,  also,  when  a  word  ends  in  a  consonant, 
and  the  word  following  begins  with  a  consonant :  as,  Sit  Medea  ferox ;  at 
pius  JEneas. 

Exc.  The  compounds  of  jugum  have  the  i  before  j  short ;  as,  bijugus,  trl 
jug  us,  quadrijugus. 


224 


PROSODY. 


MUTE  AND  LIQUID 

Contrahit  orator,  variant  in  carmine  vates, 

Si  mutam  liquidamque  simui  brevis  una  prseibit : 

At  mutam  et  liquidam  quoties  ab  origine  longa 
Prtecedit,  producta  manet,  ceu  mdtris ,  aratrum. 

Utraque  vocalem  si  consona  juncta  sequentem 
Non  ferit,  anteiens  brevis  est,  velut  obruo,  nnnquam. 

§  241. — Rule  5.  A  short  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid  is  common  in  poetry, 
but  always  short  in  prose;  as,  volucris,  latebra,  tenebrce;  in  prose  always 
volucris,  latebra,  tenebras. 

Et  primo  similis  volucri ;  mox  vera  volucris.  Ovid. 

Nox  tenebras  profert :  Plicebus  f'ugat  inde  tenebras.  Ovid. 

Note  1. — That  a  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid  be  common  in  poetry,  three 
things  are  necessary  :  viz., 

a)  That  the  vowel  be  short  by  nature,  as  in  tenebrce,  integri,  lugubris :  for, 
when  the  vowel  is  long  by  nature,  as  in  mdtris,  macro,  salubris,  it  always 
remains  long,  in  prose  and  poetry.1 

b)  That  the  mute  precede  the  liquid,  as  in  pcttris,  dgros,  Cyclops  ;  otherwise 
the  vowel  would  be  long  by  position,  as  in  partis,  Argos. 

c)  That  both  the  mute  and  liquid  belong  to  the  same  syllable,  as  in  a-trox, 
lu-gu-bris,  pha-re-tra ;  otherwise  the  preceding  vowel  would  again  be  long  by 
position,  as  in  ab-luo,  ob-ruo,  sub-levo. 

Note  2. — The  rule  concerning  mute  and  liquid  applies  only  to  the  liquids 
l  and  r. — A  mute  followed  by  m  or  n  in  Latin  words,  makes  the  preceding 
vowel  long  by  position,  as  in  dgmen,  dgnus,  lignum,  regnurn,  ignavus.  This, 
however,  is  not  always  the  case  in  words  of  Greek  origin,  as  cygnus,  Tecmessa. 


Special  Rules. 

PRETERITES  OF  TWO  SYLLABLES. 

Prseterita  assumunt  jM’imam  dissyllaba  longam  : 

Sto,  do,  scindo,  fero,  rapiunt  bibo,  findo,  priores. 

Absciclit ,  a.bscidit,  modulatur  utrumque  poeta. 

§  242. — Rule  G.  Preterites  of  two  syllables  have  the  first  syllable  long ;  as, 
veni,  vidi,  vici. 


q  Whether  a  vowel  be  short  or  long  by  nature,  must  be  ascertained  from  the  ex¬ 
amples  of  the  poets,  or  from  the  4t  Gradus  ad  Paniassum 


PROSODY. 


225 


O  Corydon,  Cory  don,  quse  te  dementia  cepit  ?  Virg. 

Multa  tulit  fecitque  puer,  sndavit  et  alsit.  Hor. 

Exc.  Tlie  following  have  the  first  syllable  short :  steti,  dedi,  soldi,  tali,  bibi, 
fidi,  from  sto,  do,  scindo,  fero,  bibo,  findo. 

([pfsp  Abscidi  from  ccedo  is  long ;  but  abscidi  from  scindo,  short. 


REDUPLICATING  PRETERITES. 

Prseteritum  geminans  primam  breviabit  utramque, 

TJt  pario,  pepbri :  vetet  id  nisi  consona  bina. 

§  243. — Rale  7.  Reduplicating  preterites  have  both  the  first  and  second 
syllables  short,  unless  position  prevent  it.  Thus,  didici,  pepuli,  tetigi. 

Tityre,  te  patulae  cecini  sub  tegmine  fagi.  Virg. 

Quod  pueri  didicere,  senes  dediscere  nolunt.  Hor.. 

Exc.  Cado,  to  fall,  has  ceoidi;  ccedo,  to  cut,  cecidi. — In  cucurri,  mdmordi, 
peperci,  tdtondi,  and  the  like,  the  second  is  long  by  position. 

Obstupuere  animi  gelidusque  per  ima  cucurrit 
Ossa  tremor.  Virg. 


SUPINES  OF  TWO  SYLLABLES. 

Cuncta  supina  volunt  primam  dissyllaba  longam  : 

At  reor  et  cieo,  sero  et  ire,  siwoque  linoquQ, 

Do,  queo ,  et  orta  ruo,  breviabunt  rite  priores. 

§  244. — Rule  8.  Supines  of  two  syllables  have  the  first  syllable  long ;  as, 
visum,  lusum,  moium. 

Hue  ipsi  potum  venient  per  prata  juvenci.  Virg. 

In  patulos  lusum  pergamus,  Tityre,  campos. 

Exc.  The  following  have  the  first  syllable  short :  rdtum,  satum,  datum , 
litum,  itum,  quitum,  situm,  from  reor,  sero,  do,  lino,  eo,  queo,  sino. 

Note  1. — Duo  has  ruitum,  whence  rulturus ;  but  the  compounds  have  rutum, 
as  dirutum,  erutum,  obrutum. — Gitum  from  cieo,  2.  has  the  first  syllable  short, 
but  citum  from  do,  4.  has  the  same  syllable  long  ;  hence  we  find  concitus  and 
concitus,  excitus  and  excitus. 

Note  2. — Stdtum  from  sto,  1.  is  long,  whence  stdturus,  constdturus,  obstdturus, 
preestdturus  ;  but  stdtum  from  sisto,  3.  is  short,  whence  status  (both  noun  and 
adj.),  stdtio,  stdtua,  stdtuo,  stdtura,  stdbilis,  stabulum,  stdtim. 


226 


PROSODY. 


POLYSYLLABIC  SUPINES. 

Utum  atumquQ  tralmut  polysyllaba  cuncta  supina. 

De  vi  preeterito  semper  proclucitur  itum. 

Cetera  corripies  in  itum  qumcunque  supina. 

245. — Rule  9.  Polysyllabic  supines  in  utum,  atum,  and  eium ,  liave  the 
penultima  long  ;  as,  solutum,  argutum,  indutum ,  amdtum,  deletum. 

Spectatum  adinissi  risum  tencatis  amici.  Hot. 

Polysyllabic  supines  in  itum,  from  preterites  in  hi,  likewise  have  the 
penultima  long;  as,  cupivi,  cupitum  ;  pethi,  petitum ;  qucesivi,  qucesitum ; 
condivi,  conditum ; — but  those  in  itum,  from  preterites  not  in  hi,  have  the 
penultima  short;  as,  sonui,  sonitum ;  monui,  rnomtum  ;  tacui,  taciturn;  con - 
didi,  conditum. 

Recenseo  has  rcccnsui,  recensitum  and  recensum. 


DEKIVATIVE  WORDS. 

Derivata  patris  naturam  verba  sequuntur. 

Mobilis  et  forties,  Idterna  ac  regula ,  sedes , 

Quamquam  orta  e  brevibus,  gaudent  producere  primam. 

Corripiuntur  arista ,  vadum,  sopor ,  atque  lucerna ,  . 

Nata  licet  longis  :  usus  te  plura  docebit. 

§  246. — Rule  10.  Derivatives  follow  the  quantity  of  their  primitives :  as, 
patcrnus  from  pater;  mdternus  from  mater ;  salubris  from  salutis  ;  sanguineus 
from  sanguinis  ;  judicium  from  judicis  ;  consilium  from  consulo  ;  pimio  from 
poena;  ctrnor,  amicus,  amicitia,  dmabilis,  from  dmo ;  judex,  judico,  judicium, 
injuria,  from  jus,  juris  ;  leg  ere,  legerem,  legebam,  from  lego  ;  leg  cram,  legerim, 
legerunt,  legisse,  from  legi. 

Sic  volo,  sic  j  ubeo  ;  sit  pro  ratione  voluntas.  Ter. 

Perge  pati  patiens,  pariet  patientia  palmam. 

Esc.  The  following  derivatives  deviate  from  the  quantity  of  their  primi¬ 
tives  :  rex  (regis),  regina,  regius,  regula,  from  rego  ; 


laterna 

from. 

lateo 

sedes 

from 

sedeo 

humanus 

from  homo 

tegula 

u 

tego 

susplcio 

u 

suspicor 

mobilis 

“  moveo 

fomes 

<< 

foveo 

macero 

u 

macer 

secius 

“  secus,  etc. 

arista 

from,  areo 

sopor 

from 

sopio 

sagax 

from  sagio 

odium 

a 

odi 

dux,  due 

is  “ 

d  uco 

molestus 

“  moles 

lucerna 

a 

luceo 

vadum 

a 

vado 

quater 

“  quatuor,  etc. 

PROSODY. 


227 


Ex  bello  reduces  iterumne  ad  bella  reduces  ? 

Turn  cornix  plena  pluviam  vocat  improba  voce.  Virg. 

The  i  is  short  in  fidcs  and  perfidus,  but  long  in  fido ,  confldo,  duff  Ido 
fid  us,  and  infidus. 

COMPOUND  WORDS. 

Legem  simplicium  retinent  composta  suorum, 

Vocalem  licet  aut  diphthongum  syllaba  mutet. 

Dejero  sed  juro  dafc  pejeroagiQ  ;  innuba ,  nubo, 

Pronubaque  ;  atque  hilum ,  ni hilum  ;  dat  semisdpitus 
Sopio  ;  fatidicus  fratresque  a  clico  creantur. 

Participate  ambitum  ab  itum  inter  longa  repone. 

§  247.— Rule  11.  Compounds  generally  retain  the  quantity  of  tlieir  simples, 
though  the  stem  vowel  or  diphthong  be  changed  in  composition  ;  as,  avus, 
proavus ;  nepos,  pronepos  ;  cavus,  concdvus  ;  brevis,  perbrevis ;  htor,  abutor  ; 
nitor,  enitor  ;  solor,  consolor ;  ratus,  irritus ;  satus,  insitus ;  cado,  occido 
(“to  set”);  caedo,  occido  (“to  kill”);  laedo,  illido;  quaero,  inquiro ;  claudo, 
recludo ;  audio,  obedio;  fauces,  suffoco;  trux  caedo,  trucido. 

Conticuere  omnes  intentique  ora  tenebant.  Virg. 

Insequitur  clamorque  virum  stridorque  rudentum.  Virg. 

(psgp  Particular  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  following  compounds : 
exhdlat,  conddmat,  depraved,  emdnat,  delibat ,  constipat,  derived,  evitat,  investlgat, 
instigat,  irrltat,  compotat,  deplorat,  elabdrat,  enodat,  immutat,  indurat,  refutat , 
comparet,  apparet,  adrid&t,  adrepit,  affligit,  command; — exdr  at,  compdrat, 
endtat,  irrigat,  alVtgat,  devorat,  comprdbcd,  computed,  recubat,  adjdcet,  permdnet, 
impedit,  effddit,  expolit,  erudit. 

Exc.  The  following  compounds  change  the  long  vowel  of  their  simples  into 
a  short  one  :  dejero,  pejero,  from  juro ;  innuba,  pronuba,  from  nubo ;  a.gmtum, 
cognXtum ,  from  notum;  nihilum  from  hilum;  semisopitus  from  sopio;  and 
causidicus,  fatidicus,  veridicus,  from  dico. 

Connubium  has  the  syllable  nu  generally  short. — Ambitus  (a  participle)  is 
long ;  but  ambitus  (a  noun),  and  ambitio,  ambitiosus,  are  short. 

So  also  oblitus  from  dbliviscor ;  but  oblitus  from  oblino. 

PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 

Longa  a,  de ,  e,  se,  di ,  prseter  dirimo  atque  disertus. 

Sit  re  breve  ;  at  rdfert ,  a  res,  producito  semper. 

Corripe  pro  Graecum,  produces  rite  Latinum. 

Contrahe  qu &  fundus,  f  agio,  neqotiscpxQ  neposepaQ, 

Vtfeshis,  fari,  fateor ,  fanumqnQ  crearunt. 


228 


PROSODY. 


Iiisce  profecto  acldes,  pariterque  procella ,  prolervus , 

Atque  propago  genus  ;  propago  protrahe  vitis. 

Corripe  ctb  et  reliquas,  obstet  nisi  consona  bina ; 

Quae  sunt  ad  vel  in ,  oh,  per,  sub,  super,  ante que,  circum. 

§  248. — Rule  12.  The  prepositions  a,  de,  e,  se,  di,  are  long  in  composition 
as,  dmitto,  deduco,  erumpo ,  sepono,  dvmitto.  But  di  is  short  in  dirimo  and 
diserius. 

Tergora  diripiunt  costis  et  viscera  nudant.  Virg. 

Ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas.  Ovid. 

Re  is  short  by  nature ;  as,  refero,  revoco,  redux.  But  re  is  long  in  the  im¬ 
personal  verb  refert,  and  whenever  it  is  followed  by  two  consonants  or  a  j ;  as, 
resto,  rescribo,  respondeo,  rejicio,  rejectus. — Before  mute  and  liquid  re  becomes 
common ;  as,  reflecto,  recludo,  reprimo,  refringo. 

Ingemuit,  et  duplices  tendens  ad  sidera  palmas, 

Talia  voce  refert :  0  terque  quaterque  beati !  Virg . 

Nec  refert  dominos  illic  famulosne  requiras  ; 

Tota  domus  duo  sunt :  idem  parentque  jubentque.  Ovid- 

Pro,  in  composition,  is  short  in  Greek  words,  but  long  in  Latin ;  as,  Pro- 
pontis,  Prometheus,  pro  logus, — proveho,  promitto,  propono. 

Exc.  Pro  is  short  in  procella,  prSfari,  profano,  prfifanus,  projiteor,  prdficiscor, 
profecto,  prdfestus,  prdfugus,  prdfugio,  prdfundo,  prdfundus,  pronepos ,  and  pro- 
neptis. — In  propago  (noun  and  verb)  and  propino,  pro  is  common. 

Ab,  ad,  in,  ob,  per,  sub,  super,  ante,  and  circum,  are  short  in  composition, 
unless  they  be  long  by  position ;  as,  dbhinc,  ddhuc,  ddoro,  bieo,  perimo,  subigo , 
superaddo,  antecello,  circumeo, — but  dbduco,  ddmitto,  antesto,  circumdo. 

Quin  adeas  vatem,  precibusque  oracula  poscas.  Virg. 

Nec  frustra  signorum  obitus  speculamur  et  ortus.  Virg. 

5£ir  In  deamo,  deeram,  deesse,  dehisco,  seorsim,  proinde,  prdhibeo, — de,  se,  and 

pro,  are  short  by  Rule  1. 


A,  E,  I,  0,  IN  COMPOSITION. 

Procluc  A  semper  composti  parte  priore : 

At  simul  E,  si mul  I,  crebro  breviare  memento. 
JVequidquam  produc,  nequando ,  venefica ,  nequam , 
Nequaquam,  nequis  sociosque,  videlicet  addes. 
Idem  masculeum  produc  et  siquis,  ibidem , 


PROSODY. 


229 


Scilicet  et  blgce,  tiblcen ,  ublque ,  quadrigae , 

JBlmus ,  tantldem ,  quldaon ,  et  composta  cfo’e*. 

Compositi  0  breviant  Grseci :  Samdthracia  testis  ; 

Sed  Minotaurus  pariterque  geometra  longum  est. 

O  Latium  variat,  producere  namque  alioquin , 

Et  quandoque  ;  at  quandoquidem  breviare  solemus. 

§  249. — Rule  18.  A  at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  a  compound  is  long ; 
E,  generally  short ;  as,  trdno,  trdduco,  trddo  ; — neque,  nequeo,  nefas,  nefandus, 
nefarius,  trecenti,  and  the  compounds  of  facto  and  fio,  as  calc-  {made-,  rube-, 
stupe-,  ti'eme-,  tume-,  and  commonly  also  pate-,  putre-,  tepe-,  and  lique-)  facio. 

Credebant  hoc  grande  nefas  et  morte  piandum.  Jar. 

Exc.  A  is  short  in  quasi :  E  is  long  in  neve,  nedum,  nemo  {ne  homo),  nequis, 
nequitia,  nequam ,  nequaquam,  nequidquam,  nequanclo,  videlicet,  renefica,  sede- 
cim,  and  semestris. 

I  and  Y  at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  compounds  are  generally  short ;  as, 
bipes,  bleeps,  triceps ;  utlque,  undique,  siquidem;  cornicen,  fidicen,  lyricen, 
tubicen ;  carnivorus,  dulclsonus,  igmvomus,  mortiferus,  sacrilegus,  omnipotens, 
ratlcinor,  signlfico  ;  Eurypylus,  Polydorus  ; — but  Polyxena  and  Polycletus. 

Myrtea  silva  subest  bicoloribus  obsita  baccis.  Ovid. 

Exc.  1  is  long  in  the  masculine  idem  (neut.  idem),  slquis,  ibidem,  ubique, 
utrobique,  utrique,  plerique,  bigee,  quadrigae,  scilicet,  ilicet,  bimus,  trimus,  quad- 
rimus,  tantldem,  quantlvis,  quantlcunque,  tiblcen,  lucrlfacio,  and  the  com¬ 
pounds  of  dies,  as  biduum,  triduum,  pridie,  postridie,  meridies,  quotldie. 

In  ubivis,  ubilibet,  ubicunque,  and  ubinarn,  the  i  is  common. 

O  at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  compounds  is  sometimes  long,  as  in 
edidquin,  ceteroquin ,  quandoque,  quominus,  introduco,  retro  versus, — and  some¬ 
times  short,  as  in  the  particle  qudque,  quanddquidem,  lid  die,  duddeni. 

Indignor,  quandoque  bonus  dormitat  Homer  us.  Hor. 

Note. — In  words  of  Greek  origin  the  o  is  long  where  it  is  written  in  Greek 
with  CO,  as  in  lagopus,  geometra,  Minotaurus, — and  short  where  it  is  written 
with  o,  as  in  phildsophus,  Aredpagus,  Oarpbpliorus,  Argdnauta,  Samdthracia. 

In  Micd stratus,  Philoxenus,  and  the  like,  the  o  is  long  by  position  :  in  chiro- 
graphus,  Hippocrene,  it  is  common  on  account  of  mute  and  liquid. 

U  at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  compounds  is  short ;  as,  Trojugena,  quad- 
rapes. — But  it  is  long  in  Jupiter,  judex,  judicium  ;  and  common  in  quadruples ; 
locuples. 


230 


PROSODY. 


CHAPTER  II. 

Increments. 

The  word  Increment,  in  Prosody,  means  an  increase  of  syllables. 
There  are  two  kinds  of  increments :  viz.,  the  increment  of  nouns  and 
the  increment  of  verbs. 


I.  The  Increment  of  Nouns. 

§  250. — A  noun  is  said  to  increase  when  in  any  of  its  cases,  it  has 
more  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  singular;  as,  pax,  pads ;  sermo , 
sermonis. 

The  number  of  increments  in  nouns  is  equal  to  the  number  of  its 
additional  syllables. 

If  a  word  has  but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ;  if  it  has  two  in¬ 
crements,  the  antepenult  is  called  the  first,  and  the  penult  the  second 
increment  ;  and  if  it  has  three,  the  syllable  before  the  antepenult  is 
called  the  first,  the  antepenult  the  second,  and  the  penult  the  third 
increment. 

The  last  syllable  of  a  word,  be  it  a  noun  or  a  verb,  is  never  re¬ 
garded  as  an  increment. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  FIRST  TWO  DECLENSIONS  SING. 

Casibus  obliquis  vix  creseit  prima  :  secunda 

Corripit  incrementa  ;  tamen  producit  Iberi. 

§  251. — The  first  declension  has  no  increment,  except  among  the  poets,  in 
the  old  genitive  form  in  a'i,  where  the  a  is  long ;  as,  auldi,  aqudi,  pictdi,  instead 
of  aulai,  aqua,  pictce. 

The  increments  of  the  second  declension  sing,  are  short ;  as,  mr,  mri; 
miser,  viiseri ;  satur,  saturi. — Bat  I  her  and  Geltiber  have  Iberi  and  Geltiberi. 

Ite  domum  saturae,  venit  Hesperus,  ite  capelloe.  Virg. 


PROSODY. 


231 


INCREMENTS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  SING. 

A. 

Nominis  A  erescens,  quod  flectit  tertia,  longum  est. 

Mascula  corripies  al  et  ar  fiuita ;  simulque 
Par  cum  compositis,  hepar  cum  haccare ,  nectar , 

Cum  vade  mas  et  anas ,  queis  junge  laremque  jubarqne. 

A  quoque  et  as  Grsecum  breve  postulat  incrementum 
S  quoque  finitum,  si  consona  ponitur  ante  ; 

Et  dropax ,  anthrax ,  Atrax  cum  s  mi  lace,  climax. 

His  Atacem ,  panace m ,  colacem ,  styracemque  facemqne, 

Atque  abacem ,  coracem ,  pliilacem  compostaque  necte. 

§  252. — Tlie  increment  A  of  the  3d  declension  sing,  is  long  ;  as,  pax,  pacts, 
Ajax,  Ajdcis ;  Syphax,  Syphdcis ;  calcar,  calcdris;  vectigal,  vectigdlis. 

Rex  erat  iEneas  nobis,  quo  justior  alter 

Nec  pietate  fuit,  nec  bello  major  et  armis.  Virg. 

Exc.  The  increment  A  is  short  : 

1. )  In  masculine  proper  names  in  al  and  ar ;  as,  Hannibal,  Hannibdlis ; 
Caesar,  Gcesdris. 

2. )  In  par,  parts,  and  its  compounds  compar,  dispar,  and  impar;  also  in  sal, 
salts ;  vas,  cadis ;  mas,  marts ;  anas,  anatis ;  hepctr,  hepdtis ;  lar,  jubar,  bac- 
car,  and  nectar. 

Dixit  et  in  caelum  paribus  se  sustulit  alis, 

Ingentemcjue  fuga  secuit  sub  nubibus  arcum.  Virg. 

3. )  In  Greek  words  in  a  and  as ;  as,  thema,  themdtis  ;  lampas,  lampddis ; 
Pallas,  Pallddis. 

Scribimus  indocti  doctique  poemata  passim.  Hor. 

4. )  In  words  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it ;  as,  trabs,  trabis  ;  Arabs,  Ard- 
bis; — and  also  in  the  words  fax,  climax,  abax,  Atax,  colax,  corax,  dropax,  pan- 
ax,  anthrax,  Atrax,  smilax,  styrax,  and  Arctophylax. 

Jamque  faces  et  saxa  volant,  furor  arma  ministrat.  Virg. 

Vela  damns  vastumque  cava  trabe  currimus  eequor.  Virg. 

E. 

E  erescens  numero  breviabit  tertia  primo  : 

Verum  protrahitur  genitivus  in  cnis,  /Jerque, 


232 


PROSODY. 


Ver,  halex ,  locuples ,  hceres,  merccscyio,  g^Vsque, 

Zc;r,  vervex,  ha.lec,  seps,  plebs,  rex:  insuper  adde 
El  peregrinum  :  er  et  es  Grsecum,  oethere  et  acre  demptis. 

§  253. — The  increment  E  of  the  3d  declension  sing,  is  short ;  as,  grex,  gregis ; 
nex,  necis  ;  pes,  pedis  ;  teres,  teretis  ;  Geres,  Cereris  ;  iter,  itineris. 

Salve  sancte  parens,  iterum  salvete  recepti 

Nequidquam  cineres,  animseque  umbrseque  paternae !  Virg. 

Exc.  The  increment  E  is  long : 

1. )  In  Iber,  lberis,  and  in  words  that  make  the  genitive  in  enis;  as,  ren,  renis ; 
Siren,  Sirenis  ;  attagen,  attcigenis.  But  hymen  makes  hymenis. 

2. )  In  the  words  mr,  locuples,  hceres,  merces,  quies,  lex,  rex,  plebs,  vervex, 
seps,  and  halec. 

Quidquid  delirant  reges,  plectuntur  Achivi.  Hor. 

3. )  In  foreign  names  in  el ;  as,  Daniel,  elis ;  Baphael,  elis ;  Israel,  elis. 

4. )  In  Greek  words  in  es  and  er;  as,  magnes,  magnetis;  tapes,  tapetis;  crater , 
crateris  ;  soter,  soteris. — But  aether  and  aer  increase  short,  as  cetheris,  aeris. 


I. 

Corripiet  pariet  crescens  I  tertia  primo 
In  mimero  :  at  Graecum  patrium  prodncit  in  inis , 

Gryps ,  vibex ,  Nesis ,  lis ,  Dis,  glis ,  addito  Samnis. 

Ix  produc  :  breviato  histrix  cum  for  nice,  varix, 

Coxendix ,  choenix que,  Cilix,  natrix que  casque  ; 

Adde  et  Eryx  et  onyx ,  nix  p>que  sa&qae  Jilix que, 
Sardonychis ,  calycis,  lands:  sit  Bebrycis  anceps, 

Sed  brevibus  junges,  in  gis  cum  patrius  exit. 

Mastix ,  mastigis  ;  coccyx ,  cocci] gis  amabit. 

§  254. — The  increment  I  of  the  3d  declension  sing,  is  short ;  as,  stips,  stipis , 
remex,  rcmigis ;  iter,  itineris;  anceps,  andpitis ;  chalybs,  chalfbis ;  chlamys 
cMamydis. 

Gutta  cavat  lapidem  non  vi,  sed  ssepe  cadendo.  Odd. 

Flumina  jam  lactis,  jam  flumina  nectaris  ibant, 

Flavaque  de  viridi  stillabant  ilice  mella.  Odd. 

Exc.  The  increment  I  is  long  : 

1.)  In  genitives  in  inis  and  ynis  from  words  of  Greek  origin  ;  as,  delphin,del~ 
pliinis ;  Phorcyn,  Phorcynis ;  Salamis,  Salamlnis. 


PROSODY. 


233 


2. )  In  the  words  gryps,  gryphis  ;  Bis,  Dltis ;  lis,  litis;  glis,  gliris ;  vibex 
viblcis;  Nesis,  Nesldis;  Bamnis,  Samnitis ,  and  Quids,  Quirltis. 

Noctes  atque  dies  patet  atri  janua  Dltis.  Virg. 

3. )  In  words  in  ix ;  as ,  felix,  felicis  ;  bombyx,  bombycis ;  perdix,  perdlcis , 
pernix,  lets ;  coturnix,  Ids. — But  the  following  in  ix  increase  short :  nix,  nicis , 
Phryx,  Phrygis  ;  strix,igis ;  Styx,ygis;  Japyx,ygis  ;  Onyx,ychis ;  Sardonyx, 
ychis,  together  with  pix,  calix,  larix,  natrix,  salix,  varix,  Gilix,  phoenix,  coxendix, 
Eryx,  filix,  fornix,  histrix,  and  the  proper  names  Ambiorix,  Biturix,  Vercingo- 
toj'ix,  and  the  like. 


0. 

O  crescens  numero  producimus  usque  priore. 

0  parvum  in  Graecis  brevia,  producito  magnum. 

Corripitur  genitivus  oris ,  quern  neutra  dedere  : 

Os,  oris ,  mediique  gradus  sed  protrahe  casus, 

Ut  melius.  Brevibus  dantur  memor,  immemor ,  arbor , 

Et  lepus  et  novg  compositum,  bos ,  compos  et  impos : 

Adde  his  Cappadocem ,  Allobrogem ,  cum  prcecoce,  scrobs ,  ops: 

Verum  produces  Gercops ,  hydropsopxQ,  Cyclopsque. 

§  255. — The  increment  0  of  the  3d  declension  sing,  is  long  ;  as,  sol,  solis , 
dos,  dotis;  vox,  vocis  ;  lepor,  leporis  ;  nepos,  nepotis. 

Gaudia  principium  nostri  sunt  saepe  doloris. 

In  silvis  lepores,  in  verbis  quaere  lepores. 

Exc.  The  increment  0  is  short : 

1. )  In  the  words  memor,  immemor,  arbor ,  lepus,  bos,  compos,  and  impos ;  in  the 
compounds  of  novg,  as  tripus,  polypus,  Qddipus ; — also  in  Cappadox,  Allobrox, 
prcecox,  and  in  words  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  as  scrobs,  ops,  inops, 
JEthiops,  Gecrops,  and  Bolops. — But  Cyclops,  Gercops,  and  hydrops  increase 
long :  Gyclopis,  Gercopis,  hydropis. 

Strata  jacent  passim  sua  quaque  sub  arbore  poma.  Virg. 

2. )  In  genitives  in  oris  from  words  of  the  neuter  gender ;  as,  pecus,  oris . 
decus,  dris ;  ebur,  dris;  marmor,  dris. — But  os,  oris,  and  all  comparatives  in 
crease  long ;  as,  melior,  melioris. 

Tempora  labuntur  tacitisque  senescimus  annis.  Ovid. 

Video  meliora  proboque : 

Deteriora  sequor.  Ovid. 

Sic  oculos,  sic  ille  man  us,  sic  ora  ferebat.  Virg. 

3. )  In  Greek  proper  names  in  or;  as,  Actor,  Castor,  Hector,  Nestor,  am; 
rhetor. 


231 


PROSODY 


4. )  In  words  of  Greek  origin  in  wr,  ovog ;  as,  canon,  aedon,  Iason,  sindon, 
Amazon,  Philemon : — but  those  in  cov,  covog,  increase  long  ;  as,  agon,  Cimon, 
Gonon,  Dion,  Solon,  Laco,  Plato,  Zeno,  Hiero,  and  also  Pros,  heros,  and  Minos 
(gen.,  ois). — In  Orion  and  JEgoion,  the  increment  o  is  common. 

5. )  In  Gentile  names  in  ones,  as  Maceddnes,  Saxunes,  Lingdnes,  Teutones, 
Vascdncs,  Vangiones-.— But  the  following  are  long:  Ebur ones,  Bur gundidnes, 
Suessiones,  and  Vettones.— Brittones  has  the  o  common. 

u. 

TJ  brevia  incrementa  feret :  sed  casus  in  udis, 

Uris  et  utis,  ab  us  recto  producitur,  et  fur , 

Lux,  f nix  ;  sed  brevis  inter  casque  pecusque  Ligusqne, 

%  256. — The  increment  U  of  the  3d  declension  sing,  is  short ;  as,  dux,  dads  ; 
crux,  crucix  ;  mix,  nucis  ;  redux,  reducis. 

Si  canimus  silvas,  silvae  sint  Consule  dignse.  Yirg. 

Lumina  volvit  obitque  triici  procul  omnia  visu.  Yirg. 

Esc.  The  increment  U  is  long  : 

1. )  In  genitives  in  udis,  uris,  and  utis,  from  nominatives  in  us  ;  as,  palus, 
udis ;  incus,  udis  ;  tellus,  uris  ;  nidus,  utis. — But  pccus,  Ligus,  and  intercus, 
increase  short :  pecudis,  Liguris,  inter  cutis. 

Terra  viros  urbesque  gerit  silvasque  ferasque 

Fluminaque  et  nymphas  et  cetera  numina  ruris.  Odd. 

2. )  In  the  words  fur,  f  uris  ;  lux,  lads  ;  Pollux,  ucis;  and  ( frux )  frugis. 

Quid  domini  facient,  audent  cum  talia  f ures  ?  Yirg. 

PLURAL  INCREMENTS  OF  NOUNS. 

§  25 1. — A  plural  increment  exists  in  the  genitive  and  dative  plural, 
when  either  of  these  cases  contains  more  svllables  than  the  ablative 
singular;  as,  musd ,  musarum  j  servo ,  servorum  j  pede,  ped'ibus  ;  re , 
rsrunij  rebus. 

Pluralis  casus,  si  crescit,  protrahet  A,  E, 

Atque  0  ;  corripies  I,  TJ  ;  verum  excipe  bubus. 

§  258. — The  plural  increments  A,  E,  and  0,  are  long ;  I  and  IT,  short ;  as, 
qudrum,  hdrum ;  rerum,  rebus ;  hbrum,  quorum:  nnibus,  tribus ;  tribubus, 
lacubus. — pT  Bubus  (for  bovibus )  is  long. 

Et  jam  summa  procul  villarum  culmina  fumal  ', 

Majoresque  cadunt  altis  6e  mcntibus  umbrae.  Yirg. 


PROSODY. 


235 


II.  The  Increment  of  Yerbs. 

§  259. — A  verb  is  said  to  increase  when  in  any  of  its  parts,  it  has 
more  syllables  than  in  the  2d  pers.  sing,  of  the  Present  Indie.  Active. 

The  number  of  increments  in  verbs  is  equal  to  the  number  of  its 
additional  syllables :  the  last  syllable,  however,  as  has  already  been 
observed,  is  never  regarded  as  an  increment. 

In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs,  an  active  voice  may  be 
supposed.  Thus,  for  example,  the  increments  of  reor,  tueor,  nitor,  and.  molior, 
are  regulated  by  the  supposed  standards  res,  tues,  nitis,  and  molis  : 

r<hbar,  tuh-ba-mur,  ni-thre-mi-ni,  mo-llh-ba-ml-ni. 


A. 

A  crescens  produc  :  do  incremento  excipe  primo. 


§  260. — The  verbal  increment  A  i3  long ;  as,  stabam,  stdbdmus ,  regdmur, 
audiebdmini. 

Donee  eris  felix,  multos  numerabis  amicos.  Ovid. 

Incidit  in  Scyllam  qui  vult  vitare  Charybdim.  Virg. 

Exc.  A  is  short  in  the  first  increment  of  do;  as,  dare,  date,  dabam,  dabo, 
dabdmus,  ddbdmini. 


E. 

E  quoque  producunt  verba  increscentia.  Verum 
Corripiunt  e  ante  r ,  ternee  duo  tempora  prima  : 

Sed  rdris  vel  rere  datur  penultinia  longis. 

Sit  brevis  e,  quando  ram ,  rim ,  ro,  adjuncta  sequuntur ; 
Et  beris  atque  here  in  verbis  breviato  futuris. 

Corripit  interdum  steterunt  dederuntqxiQ  poeta. 


§  261. — The  verbal  increment  E  is  long  ;  as,  fiebam,  rebar,  monerem ,  monere- 
mini,  regens  (Fut.  Ind.  Pass.),  venerunt. 

Jamque  quiesce  bant  voces  hominumque  canumque 
Lunaque  nocturnos  alta  regebat  equos.  Ovid. 

Exc.  The  increment  E  is  short : 

1.)  Before  r  in  the  Present  and  Imperfect  of  the  3d  conjugation  •  as,  regere, 
regerem,  r eg  eris,  regerer,  regeremur .  But  e  before  r  is  long  in  the  ending 
reins,  as  regereris,  loquereris. 


236 


PROSODY. 


2. )  Before  ram,  rim,  ro,  throughout ;  as,  veneram,  venerim,  venero.  (|W° 
ram ,  flerim,  flero,  and  tlie  like,  are  long  by  Rule  3 

Nondum  csesa  suis,  peregrinum  ut  viseret  orbem, 

Montibus  in  liquidas  pinus  descenderat  nndas.  Ovid. 

3. )  In  the  Future  ending  beris  or  here;  as,  amaberis  or  amdbere,  moneberis 
or  monebere. 


Tu  cave  defendas  quamvis  mordebere  dictis.  Ovid. 

I. 

Corripit  I  crescens  verbum  :  producitur  ivi 
Praeteritum ;  sed  imus  breviatur.  Deme  velimus, 

Nolimus ,  simus,  quaeque  bine  composta  dabuntur, 

Et  quodvis  quartae  incrementum  I  protrahe  primum. 

Hi  conjunctivi  possunt  variare  poetae. 

§  262. — The  verbal  increment  I  is  short ;  as,  regimus,  amdbimus,  monebimini, 
audiebamvni. 

Nitimur  in  vetitum  semper  cupimusque  negata.  Ovid. 

Vincimus  ferro,  ferro  quos  vincimus  hostes. 

Scindltur  incertum  studia  in  contraria  vulgus.  Virg. 

Exc.  The  increment  I  is  long  : 

1. )  In  the  penult  of  Perfects  in  ivi;  as,  petivi,  qucesivi,  audivi, — but  imus 
(of  the  plural)  is  short ;  as,  petlvimus,  qucesivimus ,  audivimus,  amavimus. 

2. )  In  the  first  increment  of  the  fourth  conjugation  (except  imus  of  the 
Perfect,  as  just  remarked).  Thus,  ibam,  ibitis,  ite,  sublrnus,  sentimus,  venimus, 
reperimus ; — but  sensimus,  venimus,  reperimus  (Perf.). — In  audiunt,  audiatis, 
audiebar,  etc.,  the  i  is  short  by  Rule  1. 

3. )  In  nolito,  noiite;  nolimus,  nolltis;  velimus,  veliiis;  nialimus,  malitis; 
simus,  sitis ;  possimus,  possitis;  prosimus,  prositis ;  intersimus,  inter sitis ; 
adsimus,  adsitis,  etc. 

pgr  The  I  in  rimus  and  ritis  of  the  Perfect  Subj.  and  the  Fut.-Perfect  seems 
to  be  common  in  poetry,  as  fecerimus,  feceritis  and  fecerimus,  feceritis.  In 
prose  :  Ne  sermonem  des  auditoribus,  says  the  learned  F.  Alvarez,  consuetudini 
regionis  servies. 

0,  u. 

0  incrementum  produc  ;  U  corripe  semper : 

Cuncta  sed  TJ  longum  reddent  tibi  verba  futuri. 

§  263. — The  verbal  increment  0  is  long;  U,  short;  as,  scitote,  habetote ; 
siimus,  possimus,  prosumus,  adsumus,  supersumus,  volumus,  nolumus,  maliir 


PROSODY. 


237 


mus  —  But  U  is  long  in  the  Participles  in  unis,  as  futurus,  facturus,  periturus, ; 
vent  Urns. 


Nos  numerus  sumus  et  fruges  consumere  nati.  Hot. 
Venturae  memores  jam  nunc  estote  senectae.  Ovid. 


CHAPTER  III. 

I.  Quantity  of  Penults. 

§  2G4. — 1.  Patronymics  in  ades  and  ides  (those  in  ides  from  evg  and  Tjg  ex¬ 
cepted)  shorten  the  penult ;  as,  AEneddes,  Scipiddes  ;  Priamides,  Hectortdes — 
but  Atrides,  Pelides,  Heraclides,  from  Atreus,  Peleus,  Hercules  (’A rpevg, 
Ihjhsvg,  'HpcutXfjg). 

Quis  genus  iEneadum,  quis  Troiae  nesciat  urbem  ?  Virg. 

Hinc  procul  JEsoniden,  procul  hinc  jubet  ire  ministros.  Ovid. 

Patronymics  in  ais,  eis,  and  o'is,  commonly  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  Pto- 
lemdis,  JEneis,  Latois. — Thebais  is  short ;  Nereis,  common. 

2. - — Substantives  in  ina  for  the  most  part  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  carlna, 
culina,  farina,  galllna,  medicina,  piscina,  pistrina,  pruina,  resina,  sagina,  sen- 
tina,  spina,  sutrina,  textrina,  tonstrina,  vagina,  etc. — But  the  following  are 
short :  fisclna,  fuscma,  femina,  lamina,  machina,  pagina,  sarctna,  trutXna. 

Eripit  interdum,  modo  dat  medicina  salutem.  Ovid. 

Torquet  nunc  lapidem,  nunc  ingens  machina  tignum.  Hor. 

3.  — Substantives  in  aca,  ica,  and  uca,  generally  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
cloaca,  formica,  lectica,  lorica,  Nasica ,  vesica,  urtica,  festuca,  verruca,  lactuca, 
etc. — But  the  following  are  short :  brassica,  fabrica,  pcdXca,  mantica,  pertica, 
scutica,  tunica. 

Nunc  gruibus  pedlcas  et  retia  ponite  cervis.  Virg. 

Et  tunicao  manlcas  et  liabent  redimicula  mitrae.  Virg. 

4.  — Adjectives  in  acus,  icus,  idus,  and  imus,  usually  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
JEgyptiacus,  aromaticus,  maledicus ,  aeldus,  arldus,  avldus ,  cupidus,  caVtdus, 
callidus,  perfidus,  invXdus,  gelidus,  frigidus,  lepidus,  finitimus,  legitimus,  etc.— 
But  the  following  are  long :  opdcus,  amicus,  apricus ,  immicus,  mendicus,  pudi- 
cus,  fidus,  inf  idus,  opimus,  imus,  and  primus. 


Accipiunt  inimlcum  imbrem  rimisque  fatiscunt.  Virg. 
O  lux  Dardaniae,  spes  0  fldissima  Teucrum!  Virg. 


PROSODY. 


283 

5.  — Adjectives  in  ulus  shorten  the  penult ;  as,  Hindus,  credulus,  garrulus , 
patiilus,  querulus. 

Adjectives  in  ills,  derived  from  verbs,  likewise,  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
agdis,  docilis ,  facllis,  flebttis,  fertllis,  fustlis,  habllis,  mobilis,  nobllis,  utilis, — but 
those  derived  from  nouns,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  anllis,  civllis,  herllis,  hos- 
tUis,  puerllis,  juvenilis,  virllis,  senilis,  to  which  must  be  added  :  exllis,  subtllis, 
Aprllis,  Quintllis,  Sextllis. 

Et  seme!  emissum  volat  irrevocabile  verbum.  Virg. 

Inde  senilis  hiems  tremulo  venit  horrida  passu.  Ovid. 

6.  — Adjectives  in  inus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  agnlnus,  anatlnus,  ansermus, 
arietlnus,  asinlnus,  caninus,  caprlnus,  cervlnus,  equlnus,  ferlnus,  leporlnus, 
luplnus,  taurlnus,  viperlnus  ;  blnus,  trlnus,  qulnus  ;  colllnus,marlnus,  viclnus ; 
matutlnus,  repentlnus,  vespertlnus ;  divlnus,  genulnus,  clandestlnus,  intestlnus, 
adulterlnus,  festlnus,  libertlnus,  inoplnus,  inquillnus,  suplnus,  Alexandrlnus, 
Latlnus,  Venuslnus. — But  inus  is  short  in  cedrinus ,  faglnus,  oleaginus,  cro- 
cinus,  hyacinthlnus,  adcimantinus,  smaragdinus,  coralllnus,  crystallinus,  bom- 
bycinus,  elephaniinus  ;  crastlnus,  diutinus,  pristinus,  serotinus,  perendinus. 

Insta.r  montis  equum  divina  Palladis  arte 

iEdincant,  sectaque  intexunt  abjete  costas.  Virg. 

§  265.  Note. — The  quantity  of  a  syllable  may  not  unfrequently  be  ascer¬ 
tained  either  by  Composition  (i.  e.,  using  compound  words)  or  Subtraction  (i.  e., 
dropping  some  syllable). 

For  this  end  change  the  given  word  by  either  of  these  methods  into  a  tri¬ 
syllable,  but  so  that  the  syllable  in  question  may  occupy  the  place  of  the 
penult.  If  then  the  penult  has  the  accent,  you  may  infer  with  certainty  that 
the  syllable  whose  quantity  you  seek,  is  long  :  if  otherwise,  it  is  short.  Thus 
we  find 

1. )  By  Composition,  that  in  the  words  sanitas,  gratissimus,  scribuntur, 
sumendus,  ponentis,  clamantes,  the  first  syllable  must  be  long,  because  we  know 
that  the  trisyllabic  compounds  insdnus,  ingrdtus,  cidscrlbo,  consmno,  compono, 
excldmo,  have  the  accent  on  the  penult, — and  on  the  contrary  that  in  the  words 
super,  decern,  probus,  rego,  capio,  habeo,  sequor,  the  first  syllable  must  be  short, 
because  we  know  the  trisyllabic  compounds  insuper,  undecim,  imprbbus,  cor- 
rigit,  dccipit,  proMbet,  ednsequor,  have  the  accent  on  the  antepenult. — In  like 
manner  we  find 

2. )  By  Subtraction,  that  in  the  words  rescribentis,  remiseritis,  valetudo, 
ingratissimus,  amicitia,  consumentis,  the  second  syllable  must  be  long,  because 
we  know  that  the  kindred  trisyllables  rescrlbo,  remlsi,  valere,  ingrdtus,  amicus, 
consumo,  have  the  accent  on  the  penult, — and  on  the  contrary  that  in  the 
words  militibus,  cognitio,  sedulitas,  sanguineus,  compulerant,  corrigerent,  the 
second  syllable  must  be  short,  because  we  know  the  corresponding  trisyllables 
milUis,  cbgnltus,  sedulus,  sdngulnis?  compuli,  corrigo,  have  the  accent  on  the 
antepenult. 


PKOSODY. 


239 


II.  Quantity  of  Final  Syllables. 

The  Quantity  of  final  syllables  is  known  partly  by  position,  as  pru~ 
dens,felix  •  partly  by  diphthongs,  as  musae ,  pennae  ;  partly  by  special 
rules. 


Final  A. 

A  finita  dato  longis  :  ita  corripe  semper, 

£jd,  quid ,  et  casus  omnes  ;  sed  protrahe  sextum. 

Productis  Graecos  casus  adjunge  vocandi. 

§  266. — A  final  is  long ;  as,  amd,  circa,  contra,  extra,  frustrd,  posted ,x  tri- 
gintd,  etc. 

Tu  vita  quidquid  tibi  non  est  vita  salusque. 

Signa  te,  signa ;  temere  me  tangis  et  angis.i) 2 

Exc.  A  final  is  short : 

1. )  In  eid,  ita,  quid,  the  adverb  putd  and  the  names  of  letters,  as  alphd, 
beta,  gamma. 

2. )  In  all  the  cases,— the  ablative  sing,  and  Greek  vocatives  from  nomina¬ 
tives  in  as  (gen.  ce  or  antis )  excepted ;  as,  rosa,  regnd,  tempord,  levia,  majord. 
But  rosd,  ed,  ilia  (Ablat.) ;  0  JEned,  Pallet,  Atld! — Greek  vocatives  from 
nominatives  in  es  have  either  e  or  d;  as,  0  Atride  or  Atridd!  0  Tkyeste  or 
Thyesta  ! 

Mitto  tibi  navem  prorii  puppique  carentem.3 
Et  quamquam  sub  aqua,  sub  aqua  quoque  rana  coaxat. 

Final  E. 

Corripe  E ;  sed  primse  quintseque  vocabula  produc, 

Atque  fame ,  cete,  tempe,  ferine que  fere que : 

Adde  doce  similemque  modum  et  monosyllaba,  prrnter 
Encliticas  ac  syllabicas.  Bene  cum  male  demptis 
Cetera  produces  adverbia  cuncta  secundse, 

g  207. — E  final  is  short ;  as,  nate,  fuge,  pome,  sine,  nempl. 

Omne  tulit  punctum  qui  miscuit  utile  dulci.  Hot. 

Heu  fuge,  nate  dea,  teque  his,  ait,  eripe  fiammis.  Virg 
Tityre,  dum  redeo,  brevis  est  via,  pasce  capellas.  Virg. 


i)  Short  (posted)  according  to  some  :  but  in  reality  long.  2)  This  verse  can  be 

spelled  backwards.  s)  i.  e.,  n(AVK)m,  the  n  being  the  prora;  the  m,  the  puppu  of 

the  word  navem ,  —  “I  send  you  (an  ave,  or)  my  best  respects.” 


240 


PROSODY. 


Exc.  E  final  is  long1 

1. )  In  the  cases  of  tlie  first  and  fifth  declensions:  as,  epitome,  Calliope,  re, 
die,  with  their  compounds  quare,  hodie,  pridie, — and  also  in  fame,  fere,  ohe(  and 
the  contract  plural  nouns  cete,  mele,  Tempe. 

2. )  In  the  Imperative  sing.  act.  of  the  2d  conjugation,  as  salve,  vide,  vale * 
But  cave  has  the  e  final  common. 

3. )  In  monosyllables,  as  me,  te,  se,  ne  (conj.),— the  enclitics  qu3,  ve,  ne,  and 
the  syllabic  additions  pte,  ce,  te,  excepted. 

Tu  ne  cede  malis,  sed  contra  audentior  ito.  Virg. 

Semper  honos  nomenque  tuum  laudesque  manebunt.  Virg. 

4. )  In  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  of  the  2d  declension;  as, probe,  late, 
longe,  valde. — But  bene,  male,  inf  erne,  superne,  and  adjectives  of  the  3d  decl., 
used  adverbially,  have  the  final  e  short,  as  sublime,  suave,  facile,  difficile. 


Final  I. 

I  produc  :  brevia  nisi  cum  quasi ,  Grmcaque  junge. 

Jure  milii  variare,  tibl que  sibl que  solemus. 

Corripies  ibi,  ubi,  melius,  clissyllabon  et  cui. 

§  268. — I  final  is  long ;  as,  classi,  fieri,  uti,  Mercuri. 

Rixantur  multi  de  lana  saepe  caprina.  Hor. 

Frigidus,  0  pueri !  fugite  liinc,  latet  anguis  in  herha.  Virg. 

Exc.  I  final  is  short : 

1. )  In  nisi  and  quasi. 

2. )  In  Greek  neuters,  as  gumrni,  sinapi,  moly; — in  Greek  datives  and  vocatives, 
as  Palladi,  Paridi,  Thetidi,  Daphnidi — Alexi,  Tethy,  Pari,  AmarylU, — and  in 
plural  datives  in  si,  as  heroisl,  Dryasi,  Troasi. 

Contracted  Greek  datives,  and  the  datives  of  proper  names  in  cs  (gen.  -is), 
which  follow  in  Greek  the  first  declension,  have  final  i  and  y  long;  as,  Socrati, 
Demosiheni,  Acldlli,  Tethy  ('EoKparei,  Trjdm,  etc.), — Oresti,  Pyladi 

(from  1  OpsoTTjq,  ov ,  etc.). 

|W°  I  final  is  common  in  milii,  tiln,  siln,  and  ubi. — Cui,  as  a  dissyllable,  has 
final  i  generally  short. —  Uti  seems  to  he  uncertain  :  most  prosodians  make  it 
long. 

Of  the  compounds  of  ibi,  ubi,  and  uti,  the  following  should  he  noticed :  velutl, 
ibidem,  ubique,  always  long :  ubicunque,  common  ;  necubl,  sicubi,  utinam ,  and 
utique ,  always  ( ubmam  generally)  short. 

Si  fueris  Romoe,  Romano  vivito  more ; 

Si  fueris  alibi,  vivito  sicut  ibi. 


PROSODY. 


241 


Final  0. 

0  datur  ambiguis  :  Graeca  et  monosyllaba  Iongis, 

Ergo,  vero ,  immo ,  ternus  sextustme  secundse, 

Atque  adcd ,  atque  ufao,  atque  adverbia  nomine  nata. 

Dant  brevibus  modo  cum  sociis,  ego  et  odd,  poetoe. 

§  269. — 0  final  is  common,  though,  more  frequently  long  than  short ;  as, 
Pollio,  Scipio ,  Carthago. 

Quando  conveniunt  Catharina,  Camilla,  Sibylla, 

Sermonem  faciunt  et  ab  hoc,  et  ab  hac,  et  ab  ilia.1 

Otto  tenet  rnappam,  madidam  mappam  tenet  Otto.2 

Horrendum  et  dictu  video  mirabile  monstrum.  Virg. 

Exc.  1.  O  final  is  long  : 

1. )  In  monosyllables  ;  as,  0,  do,  sto,  pro ,  and  in  Greek  words  written  with  CJ, 
as,  Androged,  Atho,  Ind ,  echo,  Clio,  Sappho. 

2. )  In  the  dative  and  ablative  sing,  of  the  2d  declension ;  as,  somiio,  vino, 
loeto, — and  in  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives,  as  falso,  rard,  subito. 

Exc.  2.  0  final  is  short  in  citd,  ego,  odd,  modo,  dummodd,  quomodo,  postmodd, 
and  generally  also  in  dud,  illied,  immo,  scio,  nescio,  and  cedd,  in  the  sense  of 

die  or  da. 

jyjgp  The  shortening  of  0  final  in  verbs  is  very  rare  in  the  writers  of  the  Augus¬ 
tan  age.  It  gradually  became  more  common  with  the  later  writers,  such  aa 
Juvenal,  Lucan,  Martial,  etc. 

Rure  morans  quid  agam,  responded  pauca  rogatus : 

_  Prandeo,  poto,  cano,  ludo,  lavo,  coeuo,  quiesco.  Mart. 

Final  U,  B,  D,  T. 

U  semper  produce :  B,  D,  T,  corripe  semper. 

§  270. — U  final  is  long :  B,  D,  T,  final  are  short,  unless  position  or  contrac¬ 
tion  prevent  it.  E.  g.,  diu,  manic,  Panthu  ; — ab,  ad,  illied,  amat.  But  dst ,  hand, 
amdnt,  obit,  (for  obiit),  at  pius  AErieas. 

• 

Regis  ad  ex em plum  totus  componitur  oris.  Hot. 

Quidquid  id  est,  timeo  Danaos  et  dona  ferentes.  Virg. 

Yos  exemplaria  Grseca 

Nocturna  versate  manu,  versate  diurna.  Hor. 


•)  Imitation  of  woman’s  garrulity.  2)  This  versa  can  be  read  and  sw  elled  back¬ 
wards. 


242 


PROSODY. 


Final  C,  L,  M. 

C  longum  est :  varium  hie  pronomen  :  corripe  donee 

Et  nee:  fac  pariter  malnnt  breviare  poetse. 

Corripe  L ;  at  produc  sal,  sol^  nil ,  multaque  Hebrsea. 

M  vorat  ecthlipsis, — prisci  breviare  solebant. 

§  271.— C  final  is  long,  L  final  short,  and  M  final,  wlien  followed  by  a  vowel, 
is  elided  with  the  vowel  before  it.  Thus,  dc,  die,  due,  sic,  illuc ;  semel,  simul, 
procul,  Consul ;  monstr ’  horrend ’  ingens,  instead  of  monstrum  horrendum 
ingens. 

Omnibus  hoc  vitiwm  est  cantoribus,  inter  amicos 
Ut  nunqua?w  inducant  animum  cantare  rogati, 

Injussi  nunquam  desistant.  Hot. 

Exc.  1.  C  final  is  short  in  nee,  donee,  and  fac. — Hie,  the  pronoun,  is  common, 
but  more  frequently  long  than  short;  hie,  the  adverb,  is  always  long.— Hoc, 
the  nom.  neut.  sing,  is  occasionally  found  short  in  the  comic  poets. 

Exc.  2.  L  final  is  long  in  sal,  sol,  nil,  and  in  Hebrew  names,  as  Daniel , 
Nabal,  Israel. 

Final  N. 

N  longum  est  Grsecis  pariter  pariterque  Latinis. 

En  brevia  quod  format  inis  breve  :  Grseca  secundm, 

Jungimus  et  quartum,  si  sit  brevis  ultima  recti. 

Forsitan ,  iv,forsan ,  tamen ,  an ,  viden\  adjice  curtis. 

§  272. — N  final  is  long  :  as,  en,  non,  sin,  ren;  Titan,  Siren,  Delphln;  Solon , 
agin  Fv)  J  Circen,  Anchisen,  AEnedn;  Athon,  Androgeon;  chalybon,  Georgicon. 

Cum  semel  effluxit,  non  est  revocabilis  hora.  Odd. 

Non  opibus  virtus,  sed  opes  virtute  parantur.  Mur. 

Exc.  N  final  is  short : 

1 . )  In  substantives  in  en,  -Inis  ;  as,  nomen,  flumen,  lumen,  and  in  the  words, 
dn,  in,  forsdn,  forsitan,  tamen,  attamen,  and  ridero  for  videsne  f 

Naturam  expellas  furca,  tamen  usque  redibit.  Hor. 

Monstrum  horrendum,  informe,  ingens,  cui  lumen  ademtum.  Virg. 

2. )  In  Greek  nominatives  in  on  (ov)  of  the  2d  declension  ;  as,  I  Hon,  Pelidn  ; — 
in  Greek  accusatives  of  any  declension,  if  the  ultima  of  the  nominative  is  short; 
as,  Maidn,  IpMgenian  ;  11  ’wdon,  Delon  ;  Darin,  Daphriin  and  in  Greek 
plural  datives  in  in,  as  Arcasln,  Troasln. 


PROSODY. 


243 


Final  R. 

R  breve  :  sed  longum  est  far ,  par  cum  pignore,  ver ,  Nar , 

Cur,  fur,  cum  Grsecis  quibus  est  genitivus  in  eris  ; 

Addito  Iber  ;  sed  cor  melius  breve,  Celtiber  anceps. 

%  7,'!. — R  final  is  sliort ;  as,  vir,  semper ,  precor,  Caesar,  Hector,  turtur. 

Dum  juga  mentis  aper,  fluvios  dam  piscis  amabit, 

Dumque  thymo  pascentur  apes,  dum  rore  cicadse, 

Semper  lionos  nomenque  tuum  laudesque  manebunt.  Virg. 

FiXC.  R  final  is  long  : 

1. )  In  cur,  fur,  far,  par  with  its  compounds  compdr,  dispar,  and  impdr,  ver, 
Iber,  Ndr  and  Idr. 

iEdificare  casas,  plostello  adjungere  mures, 

Ludere  par  impar,  equitare  arundine  longa, 

Si  quern  delectat  barbatum,  amentia  verset.  Hor. 

2. )  In  Greek  words  in  er,  -eris  ;  as,  soter.  crater  {-eris) ;  aer,  aether  {-eris). 

Final  AS. 

A  S  produc:  breve  anas  ;  Grsecorum  tertia  quartum 
Corripit,  et  rectum  per  ddis  si  patrius  exit. 

§  274. — AS  final  is  long ;  as,  fas,  nefds,  terras,  JEneds,  Pallas  {-antis). 

Credebant  hoc  grande  nefas  et  rnorte  piandum.  Jure. 

O  curas  hominum,  0  quantum  est  in  rebus  inane !  Pers. 

Exc.  AS  final  is  sliort . 

1. )  In  ancis,  and  in  Greek  words  in  as,  -adis  ;  as,  Areas,  lampds,  Pallas. 

2. )  In  Greek  accusatives  plur.  of  the  3d  declension ;  as,  Trods ,  delphinds, 
herods,  Cyclopas. 

Final  ES. 

ES  quoque  produces  :  breviat  sed  tertia  rectum, 

Cum  patrii  brevis  est  crescens  penultima :  pes  hiuo 
Excipitur,  paries,  aries ,  abiesqnQ  Ceresque. 

Corripe  et  es  de  sum,  et  penes,  et  pluralia  Grmca. 

§  275. — ES  final  is  long  ,  as,  spes,  dies,  locuples,  vides,  audios,  Anchises. 


PROSODY. 


244 

Regia,  crede  milii,  res  est  succurrere  lapsis.  Ovid. 

Apparent  rari  nantes  in  gnrgite  vasto.  Yirg. 

Noctes  atque  dies  patet  atri  janua  Ditis.  Yirg. 

Exc.  ES  final  is  sliort : 

1. )  In  words  in  es  of  tlie  3d  declension,  which  increase  short  in  the  genitive  ; 
as,  dives ,  eques,  hospes ,  pedes,  miles,  sospes. — Bnt  long  are :  (tries,  paries,  Cerds, 
and  pes  with  its  compounds  bipes,  tripes,  sonipes,  quadrupes. 

Vivitur  ex  rapto,  non  hospes  ah  hospite  tutus.  Ovid. 

2. )  In  penes  and  es  from  sum,  with  its  compounds  potes,  prodes,  dbes,  obes, 
subes. 

3. )  In  Greek  neuters,  as  cacoethes,  Twppomanes,  and  in  Greek  nominatives  and 
vocatives  of  the  8d  declension ;  as,  lampades ,  rhetores,  Amazones,  Troes, 
heroes,  etc. 

Compulerantque  greges  Corydon  et  Thyrsis  in  unum : 

Ambo  florentes  eetatibus.  Arcades  ambo.  Yirg. 

Note  1.  Hcereses,  phrases,  crises,  and  the  like,  being  derived  from  nouns  in 
ig  -Ecog,  and  consequently  contracted  fiom  eig^  are  long. 

Note  2. — Proper  names  in  es  (from  pg,  Eog),  as  Demosthenes,  Diogenes,  Soc¬ 
rates,  Pericles,  have  the  final  es,  long  in  the  nominative,  but  short  in  the 
vocative. 

Final  IS. 

Corripias  IS  et  YS :  plurales  excipe  casus ; 

Glis,  sis ,  vis ,  verbum  ae  nomen,  rco/osque  ve/isque; 

Audis  cum  sociis;  quorum  et  genitiyus  in  inis , 

UntisYe,  and  itis  longum,  producito  semper. 

§  276. — IS  final  is  short ;  as,  apis,  inquis,  digeris,  bibis,  Tethys,  Itys. 

Hei  mihi  qualis  erat !  quantum  mutatus  ab  illo  !  Yirg. 

Stulte,  quid  est  somnus,  gelidae  nisi  mortis  imago  ?  Ovid. 

Tantse  molis  erat  Romanam  condere  gentem  1  Yirg. 

Exc.  IS  final  is  long : 

1. )  In  all  plural  cases  ;  as,  vires,  armis,  musis,  nobis,  'vobls,  omnis,  urbis  (for 
omneis,  urbeis). 

Quam  multa  in  silvis  avium  se  millia  condunt!  Yirg. 

2. )  In  the  2d  pers.  sing,  of  the  Present  Ind.  Act.  of  verbs  belonging  to  the 
4th  conjugation  ;  as,  audis,  sentis,  nescis,fis,  ctbis,  redis,  peris,  subis. 


PROSODY. 


245 


3. )  In  nouns  that  have  in  the  genitive  long  -Inis,  -itis,  or  -entis  ;  as,  Salamis, 
inis;  Samnis,  itis ;  Us,  litis ;  Simois,  entis. 

Grammatici  certant  et  adhuc  sub  judice  11s  est.  Hor. 

4. )  In  the  words  glis,  vis  (verb  and  noun),  veils  and  sis,  with  their  com. 
pounds,  quamvls,  quivis,  utervis;  noils,  malls;  adsls,  absis,  prosis,  possis,  etc.; 
and  in  the  adverbs  foris,  gratis,  ingratis,  imprimis. 

Imbellis  tota  est :  caput  exime, — vis  erit  illi.1 

The  ending  ris  of  the  Fut.  Perfect  and  Perfect  Subj.  is  common ;  as, 
decleris,  feceris. 

Vilis  adulator  si  dixeris :  cestuo,  sudat.  Juv. 


•Final  OS. 

Y ult  OS  procluci  :  compos  breviatur  et  impos, 

Osqne,  ossis ;  Groscorum  et  neutra,  et  cuncta  secundse 
Addicta  Ausonidfim,  Graeciis  genitivus  et  omnis. 

§  277. — OS  final  is  long ;  as,  os  (oris),  vivos,  nepds,  custos;  Trds,  herds,  Minos , 
Androgeus,  and  others  that  are  written  witli  g). 

Os  homini  sublime  dedit  ccel unique  tueri 
Jussit  et  erect 3s  ad  sidera  tollere  vultus.  Ovid. 

Exc.  OS  final  is  short : 

1. )  In  ds  (ossis),  exds,  compds,  and  impds,  and  the  Greek  neuters  ArgSs,  chads, 
melos,  and  epds. 

2. )  In  Greek  nominatives  of  the  2d  declension,  which  are  written  with  o ; 
as,  Delds,  Rhodds,  Tyros ,  Tenedds,  and  in  Greek  genitives  of  the  3d  declension, 
as  Arcadds,  Orpheds,  Tethyds. 

Smyrna,  Rhodos,  Colophon,  Salamin,  Chios,  Argos,  Athenae : 
Orbis  de  patria  certat,  Homere,  tua. 

Final  US. 

US  breve  ponatur  :  produc  monosyllaba,  qiineque 
Casibus  increscunt  longis,  et  nornina  quartie, 

Excepto  recto  et  quinto,  et  quibus  exit  in  nntis 
Patrius,  et  conflata  e  novq,  contractaqne  Graeca 
In  recto  ac  patrio,  et  venerandum  nomen  Jesus. 


J)  Ovis,  o-vis. 


246 


PROSODY. 


§  278. — -US  final  is  short;  as,  littus,  improbus ,  hurts,  scindimus,  intus. 

Fraxiniis  in  silvis  pulclierrima,  pinus  in  liortis, 

Populus  in  fluviis,  abies  in  montibus  altis.  Virg. 

Tityrus  bine  aberat1 :  ipsse  te,  Tityre,  pinus, 

Ipsi  te  fontes,  ipsa  lia3c  arbusta  vocabant.  Virg. 

Exc.  US  final  is  long : 

1. )  In  monosyllables;  as,  plus,  vies,  thus ,  mus ,  and  in  words  that  increase 
long  in  the  genitive ;  as,  solus,  tellies ,  palus. 

Haud  procul  liinc  stagnum,  tellus  liabitabilis  olim.  Ovid. 

2. )  In  the  genitive  sing,  and  in  the  nom.,  acc.,  and  voc.  plur.  of  the  4th  de¬ 
clension.  But  the  nom.  and  voc.  sing,  are  short. 

Hie  situs  est  Phaeton,  currus  auriga  paterni.  Ovid. 

3. )  In  the  compounds  of  rrovg ;  as,  tripits,  Melampus ,  and  when  us  is  con¬ 
tracted  from  oog,  as  in  Opus,  Pessinus,  and  Amathus  (all  three  G.  -untis) ; 
Panthus,  echits,  Glius,  Inus,  Sapphus. 

Est  Amathus,  est  celsa  mihi  Paphos  atque  Cytliera.  Virg. 

4. )  In  the  sacred  Name  of  our  Lord  and  Redeemer ;  as, 

Die,  JESUS  infans  circa  cur  viderit  agmen 
Pastorum  primum? — scilicet  AGNUS  erat. 


CHAPTER  IY. 

Yersificati  on. 

Eeet.  Metre.  Yerse.  « 

§  279. — Poems  are  composed  of  verses  ;  verses,  of  feet;  and  feet,  of 
syllables. 

A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  syllables  of  a  certain  quan¬ 
tity.  Feet  are  divided  into  simple  and  compound. 


0  See  §  284.— 1. 


PROSODY, 


247 


A  simple  foot  consists  of  two  or  three  syllables  ;  a  compound  foot, 
of  four. 

SIMPLE  FEET. 


Spondee 

Pyrrhic 


Molossus 
Tribrach 
Dactyl  . . 
Anapaest 


(of  two  syllables.) 


Trochee 

Iambus. 


(of  three  syllables.) 


V-/  W  W 


Bacchius 
Antibaccliius 
Amphibrach , 
Ampliimacer, 


— 


Choriambus  . 
Antispast . . . . 
Smaller  Ionic 
Greater  Ionic 


COMPOUND  FEET. 


Di  iambus . 

Ditrochee . 

Dispondee  .... 
Proceleusmatic 


First  Paeon . — 

Second  Paeon . 

Third  Paeon . ^ 

Fourth  Paeon .  ^ 


First  epitrit  . 
Second  epitrit 
Third  Epitrit 
Fourth  epitrit 


§  280. — Metre,  in  a  general  sense,  denotes  a  particular  kind  or 
species  of  verse.  Thus  we  say — the  Dactylic ,  Iambic ,  Trochaic ,  Chori- 
ambic,  Ionic  metre,  according  as  the  Dactyl,  the  Iambus,  the  Trochee, 
the  Choriambus,  or  the  Ionic,  prevails. 

We  also  say — the  Sapphic ,  Alcaic ,  Asclepiadic ,  Anacreontic  metre,  after  the  name  of 
some  celebrated  poet,  who  has  employed  a  particular  species  of  verse. 

Metre ,  in  a  restricted  sense,  signifies  either  a  single  foot  in  a  verse,  or 
a  combination  of  two  consecutive  feet,  usually  called  a  Dipodia. 

In  the  Dactylic  and  Choriambic  Metre,  every  single  foot  constitutes  “a  metre”  or 
measure,  so  that  a  dactylic  verse  of  six  feet  is  called  hexameter;  of  five,  pentameter; 
of  four,  tetrameter,  etc. 

In  the  Iambic,  Trochaic,  and  Anapaestic  Metre,  “a  metre”  or  measure  consists  of 
two  feet;  hence,  an  Iambic  verse  of  eight  feet  is  called  Iambus  tetrameter;  of  six 
feet,  trimeter;  of  four,  dimeter. 

§  281. — A  Verse  (arlxog)  is  a  certain  number  of  feet,  arranged  in  a 
regular  order  and  forming  a  line  of  poetry. 

A  verse  that  has  the  exact  number  of  syllables  requisite,  is  called  acataleetic:  if  it 
lacks  a  syllable  at  the  end,  it  is  called  catalectic ;  if  two  syllables,  brachycatalectic ;  if 
it  lacks  a  syllable  at  the  beginning,  acephalous ,’  and  if  it  has  a  syllable  too  much  at 
the  end,  hyper  catalectic  or  hypermeter . 


2TS 


PROSODY. 


RHYTHM.  ARSIS.  THESIS. 

§  282. — By  Rhythm  is  meant  a  regular,  alternate  raising  and  lower¬ 
ing  of  the  voice.  The  effort  by  which  stress  is  laid  upon  a  syllable,  is 
called  ictus  or  rhythmical  accent. 

A  syllable  which  has  the  ictus  or  rhythmical  accent,  is  said  to  be  in  the  arsis;  a 
syllable  on  which  the  voice  sinks,  in  the  thesis. 

The  natural  place  of  the  arsis  is  the  long  syllable  of  every  foot:  hence,  in  the  iam 
bus  it  falls  on  the  second  syllable;  in  the  dactyl  and  trochee,  on  the  first. — The  spon¬ 
dee,  in  lambic  and  Anapaestic  Verse,  has  the  arsis  on  the  second  syllable;  but  in 
Trochaic  and  Dactylic,  on  the  first.  Thus  the  tribrach,  in  the  lambic  metre,  baa 
the  arsis  on  the  last  syllable  (  w  w  ^ ) ;  but  in  the  Trochaic,  on  the  first  (  ^  w  w  ), 

CAESURA.  SCANNING.  FIGURES. 

§  283. — The  Caesura  is  used  by  prosodians  with  reference  either  to 
whole  verses  or  to  single  feet. 

Caesura,  with  reference  to  whole  verses,  means  such  a  division  of  the  line 
into  two  parts  as  affords  to  the  voice  a  short  pause  of  rest  in  some  convenient 
place,  without  injury  to  the  sense  or  to  the  harmony  of  the  verse.  This 
caesura  is  usually  called  the  cmural  pause,  and  has  its  application  chiefly  in 
hexameter  verses.  Its  place  is  for  the  most  part  after  the  arsis  of  the  third 
foot,  or  in  the  thesis  of  that  same  foot.  Sometimes,  however,  a  different  divi¬ 
sion  is  admitted.  Eg, 

Hectora  quis  nosset,  ||  felix  si  Troia  fuisset?  Odd. 

Infandum  regina  fl  jubes  renovare  dolorem.  Virg. 

Belli  ferratos  postes  ||  portasque  refregit.  Hor. 

Prima  tenet  ||  plausuque  volat  ||  fremituque  secundo.  Virg. 

Cassura,  with  reference  to  single  feet,  is  either  masculine,  feminine,  or 
monosyllabic. 

The  caesura  is  said  to  be  masculine  when,  after  a  foot  is  completed,  there  re¬ 
mains  a  syllable  at  the  end  of  a  word  to  begin  the  next  foot ;  feminine,  when 
there  remains  a  trochee  ;  and  monosyllabic,  when  the  first  syllable  of  a  foot  is 
a  monosyllable.  E.  g., 

% 

Sub  lace-|ris  cre-|bro  vir-|tus  latet  |  aurea  |  pannis.  Mur. 

Sic  abe-]unt  rede-|untque  me-|i  vari-|antque  ti-|mores.  Virg. 

Idem  ego  |  sum,  qui  |  nunc  an  |  vivam,  |  perfide,  |  nescis.  Odd. 

Scanning  is  dividing  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which  it  is  composed. — • 
To  scan  correctly,  one  must  know  not  only  the  quantity  of  each  syl¬ 
lable,  but  also  the  several  poetical  usages  and  licenses,  called  figures  of 
prosody. 


PROSODY. 


249 


The  following  are  the  principal  figures :  Synalapha,  Ecthlipsis,  Synaresis, 
Diuresis,  Systole,  Diastole  or  Ectasis. 

Synalgepha  is  a  figure  "by  which  a  vowel  or  diphthong  is  cut  off  at  the 
end  of  a  word  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a  vowel,  a  diphthong,  or 
the  letter  h ;  as,  Dardanid’  infensi,  ub’  ingens,  instead  of  Dardanid  a  infensi, 
ubi  ingens. 

Synalapha  never  takes  place  in  the  particles  0,  ah,  vah,  va,  hei,  lieu, 
and  proh. 

Conticuere  omnes  intentique  ora  tenebant.  Virg. 

Kara  avis  in  terris  nigroque  simillima  cygno. 

Ecthlipsis  is  a  figure  by  which  the  consonant  on  together  with  the  pre¬ 
ceding  vowel,  is  cut  off  at  the  end  of  a  word,  when  the  following  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  a  diphthong,  or  an  h.  Examples  are  obvious. — Both  Ecthlipsis 
and  Synalcepha  sometimes  take  place  at  the  very  end  of  a  verse  ;  as, 

/■  ' 

Omnia  Mercurio  similis  vocemque  coloremg^e 

Et  crines  flavos  et  membra  decora  juventse.  Virg. 

Jamque  iter  emensi  turres  ac  tecta  Latinorwm 

Ardua  cernebant  juvenes  murosque  subibant.  V'b'g. 

SUNiERESis  is  a  figure  by  which  two  syllables  are  contracted  into  one ;  as,  deinc, 
proin-de,  for  de-hinc,  pro-in-de  ;  dee-ro ,  dee-ram,  for  de-e-ro,  de-e-ram  ;  om-nia, 
au-reis,  for  om-ni-a,  au-re-is ;  anthac,  sorsum,  for  antehac,  seoo'sum ;  vemens, 
prendo,  for  vehemens,  prehendo ;  vincla,  o'epostum,  for  vincula,  repositum ; 
taldior,  porgite,  for  calidior,  porrigite ;  antire,  antambulo,  for  anteire, 
anteambulo ;  tenvis,  genva,  for  tenuis,  genua ;  abjete,  parjetes,  for  abiete, 
parietes,  etc. 

Sint  Maecenates  :  non  dee-runt,  Flacce,  Marones.  Mart. 

Genva  labant,  gelido  concrevit  frigore  sanguis.  Virg. 

Manet  alta  mente  repostum 

Judicium  Pariclis,  spretaeque  injuria  formae.  Virg. 

Diaeresis  is  a  figure  by  which  one  syllable  is  divided  into  two  ;  as,  aural, 
aquai,  Naiades,  siluce,  persoluisse,  subiectus,  etc.,  instead  of  aura,  aqua,  Naiades , 
silva,  persolvisse,  subjectus. 

Flebilis  indignos,  elegei’a,  solve  capillos.  Odd. 

Aulai  in  medio  libabant  pocula  Bacchi.  Virg. 

Systole  is  a  figure  by  which  a  syllable  is  shortened,  which  is  otherwise 
long  by  nature  or  by  position;  as,  steterunt,  dederunt ;  subicit,  abicit ;  viden\ 
satin’,  instead  of  steterunt,  dederunt,  subjicit,  dbjicit,  videsne,  satisne. 

Di  tibi  divitias  dederunt  artemque  fruendi.  Hor. 

Obstupui  steteruntque  comae  et  vox  faucibus  lisesit.  Virg. 


250 


PROSODY. 


Diastole  or  Ectasis  is  a  figure  by  which  a  syllable  naturally  short  is 
made  long.  This  figure  occurs  chiefly  in  proper  names  and  in  words  com¬ 
pounded  with  re  ;  as,  ~ Italia,  ~ Arabia ,  from  w Italics ,  ''Arabs  ;  religio,  reliquiae, 
reperi,  retuli  (also  written  relligio,  relliquice,  repperi,  rettuli ),  instead  of  religio, 
reliquiae,  reperi,  retuli. 

Ibitis  ’Italian!  portusque  intrare  licebit.  Virg. 

Hanc  tibi  Prlamides  mitto,  Ledsea,  salutem.  Odd. 

%  284. — Besides  the  above-mentioned  licenses,  the  following  two  are  also  to 
be  noticed : 

1. )  That  a  syllable  naturally  short  is  occasionally  made  long  when  it  falls  in 
the  arsis,  that  is,  when  it  is  csesural ;  as, 

Desine  plura  pu-er,  et  quod  nunc  instat,  agamus.  Virg. 

Luctus  ubique,  pavor  et  plurima  mortis  imago.  Odd. 

2. )  That  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  in  the  csesural  syllable,  occasionally  re¬ 
mains  unelided  and  is  even  made  short  when  it  falls  in  the  thesis ;  as, 

Et  succus  pecori  et  lac  subducitur  agnis.  Virg. 

Te  Cory  don,  wO  Alexi;  trahit  sua  quemque  voluptas.  Virg. 

Ter  sunt  conatl  imponere  Pelio  Ossam.  Virg. 


Dactylic  Metre. 

Dactylic  Hexameter. 

§  285. — The  Hexameter ,  as  its  name  imports,  consists  of  six  feet.  Of 
these,  the  first  four  may  be  either  dactyls  or  spondees;  the  fifth  must 
regularly  be  a  dactyl ;  the  sixth ,  a  spondee. 


1. 

2. 

8. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

-  V^/ 

- 

- 

-  vy  vy 

- 

- 

Tltyre,  |  tu  patu-|lse  recu-|bans  sub  |  tegmine  |  fagl 
Silve-|strem  tenu-|x  Mu-]sam  medi-]taris  a- 1  vena.  Virg. 


Note  1. — Sometimes  the  fifth  foot  of  a  hexameter  is  a  spondee  instead  of  a 
dactyl :  but  in  this  case,  there  is  generally  a  dactyl  in  the  fourth  foot  and  a 
word  of  four  syllables  at  the  end  of  the  verse.  Such  lines  are  called  spondaic 
verses.  E.  g., 

Cara  deum  soboles,  magnum  Jovis  incrementum.  Virg. 

Const' tit  atquo  oculis  Phrygia  agmina  circumspexit.  Virg. 


PROSODY. 


251 


Note  2. — The  hexameter  is  called  also  the  heroic,  verse,  because  this  kind  ol 
verse  has  been  chosen  by  the  epic  poets  to  celebrate  the  achievements  of  dis¬ 
tinguished  heroes.  The  hexameter  is  used,  moreover,  in  didactic  and  satyric 
compositions. 

Rules  for  the  structure  of  hexameters. 

§  286. — 1.  Every  well-formed  hexameter  should  have  a  least  one  masculine 
caesura,  if  possible,  on  the  third  foot. — Lines  with  only  one  caesura  either  on 
the  second  or  fourth  foot,  are  in  general  for  want  of  melody  to  be  rejected. — 
Lines  without  any  caesura  at  all,  are  destitute  of  poetical  beauty  and  harmony, 
and  scarcely  differ  from  common  prose.  Of  this  kind  are  the  following  lines  : 

Nuper  ]  quidam  |  doctus  I  coepit  |  scribere  |  versus. 

Aurea  |  scribis  |  versus,  |  Juli,  |  maxime  |  vatum. 

Sparsis  |  hastis  |  late  |  campus  |  splendet  et  |  horret. 

i 

When  a  verse  has  two  caesuras,  they  are  either  on  the  2d  and  3d  feet,  or  on 
the  3d  and  4th,  or  on  the  2d  and  4th. — When  a  verse  has  three  caesuras,  they 
are  generally  on  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  feet ;  as, 

Ode-|runt  liila-|rem  tri-]stes,  tri-]stemque  jo-]cosi.  Hor. 

2.  Every  hexameter  ought  to  end  with  a  dissyllable  or  trisyllable,  as 
utile  |  dulcZ,  irrepd-\rabile  |  tempus,  rand  co-\dxdt,  fun-\dsa  cuApldo,  and 
the  like. — Monosyllables  should  never  be  placed  at  the  end  of  a  line,  except 
[a)  when  another  monosyllable  precedes  ;  ( b )  when  the  verse  ends  with  est,  and 
the  word  before  it  suffers  elision ;  (c)  when  the  poet  wishes  to  express  some¬ 
thing  harsh  and  rough,  or  something  which  is  quite  unexpected.  Thus, 

Principibus  placuisse  viris  non  ultima  laus  est.  Hor. 

Pauca  loqui  puero  sed  tempestiva,  decorum  est.  Mur. 

Parturiunt  montes,  nascetur  ridi cuius  mus.  Hor. 

Sternitur  exanimisque  tremens  procumbit  liumi  bos.  Virg. 

3.  Too  many  monosyllables  or  polysyllables  in  succession  should  be  avoided. 
The  following  lines  are,  in  this  respect,  faulty : 

Contur-|baban-]tur  Con-[stanti-]nopoli-[tani 
Innume-[rabili-|bus  |  so!lici-|tudini-|bus. 

4.  The  beauty  and  elegance  of  Hexameter  Verse  depend  chiefly  on  a  hapoy 
and  expressive  combination  of  dactyls  and  spondees,  and  on  a  judicious  use  of 
the  caesura.  Thus  beautifully  Virgil : 

Vertitur  interea  coelum  et  ruit  Oceano  nox, 

Involvens  umbra  magna  terramque  polumque 

Myrmidonumque  dolos:  fusi  per  moenia  Teucri 

Conticuere :  sopor  fessos  complectitur  artus. 


PROSODY. 


OK.) 


And  again  : 

Incubuere  mari,  totumque  a  sedibus  imis 

Una  Eurusque  Notusqne  ruunt,  creberqiie  procellia 

Africus,  et  vastos  volvnnt  ad  littora  fluctus. 

Eripinnt  subito  nubes  coelumque  dicmque 
Teucrorum  ex  oculis :  ponto  nox  incubat  atra. 

Intonuere  poli  et  crebris  micat  ignibus  aether, 

Prsesentemque  viris  intentant  onrnia  mortem. . 

Sometimes,  however,  the  poet  exceeds  in  dactyls,  when  he  wishes  to  express 
quickness  of  motion,  vivacity,  or  joy.  Thus  the  dactyls  in  the  folio-wing  lines 
from  Virgil,  in  which  he  respectively  describes  a  courser  at  full  speed,  and  a 
pigeon  hastening  to  her  nest,  both  suggest  and  imitate  the  gallop  of  the  horse, 
and  the  rapid  flight  of  the  bird  : 

Quadrupedante  putrem  sonitu  quatit  lingula  campum. 

Mox  aere  lapsa  quieto 
Radit  ite/  iiquidum,  celeres  neque  commovet  alas. 

On  the  other  hand,  he  exceeds  in  spondees,  when  he  wishes  to  express  slow¬ 
ness  of  motion,  majesty,  or  grief.  Thus  Virgil  by  a  succession  of  spondees 
describes  the  slow  and  measured  stroke  of  the  Cyclops  in  forming  the  thunder : 

Illi  inter  sese  magna  vi  brachia  tollunt 
In  numerum,  versantque  tenaci  forcipe  massam ; 

The  majesty  of  the  tempest  king : 

Hie  vasto  rex  iEolus  antro 
Luctantes  ventos  tempestatesque  sonoras 
Imperio  premit _ ; 

The  grief  at  the  loss  of  Anchises : 

Amissum  Ancliisen  flebant,  cunctoeque  profundum 
Por  turn  aspectabant  flentes.  . . 

And  again  the  sadness  of  JEneas : 

Atque  heec  ipse  suo  tristi  cum  corde  volutat, 

Aspectans  silvam  immensam  et  sic  voce  precatur. 

5.  Elisions  should  be  neither  too  harsh  nor  too  frequent ;  nor  should  they 
take  place  at  the  very  beginning  of  a  hue,  especially  between  monosyllables, 
as  in  the  following  line  from  Virgil: 

Si  ad  vitulam  spectos,  nihil  est  quod  pocula  laudes,  Virg. 

Quodsi  in  co  spatio  atque  ante  acta  aetate  fuere.  Lucr. 


PROSODY. 


253 


6.  Two  successive  feminine  caesuras  in  the  second  and  third  feet  should  he 
avoided,  because  they  give  the  verse  a  flippant,  cantering  air.  Still  more  un¬ 
couth  and  inelegant  are  those  lines  in  which  the  feminine  caesura  runs  through¬ 
out;  as. 

Ergo  magisque  magisque  viri  nunc  gloria  claret. 

Sole  cadente  juvencus  aratra  reliquit  in  arvis. 

7.  The  words  of  a  line  should  be  so  disposed  of  as  not  to  render  the  sense 
obscure  and  puzzle  the  reader.  Of  this  kind  are  the  following  lines  : 

Dico  poeta  bonum  quem  carmen  fecit  Homerum.1 * 

Omnia  principium,  musse,  Jovis  ab  Jove  plena.3 

8.  If  rhyme  is  to  be  avoided  in  prose,  it  is  not  less  so  in  poetry.  Hence 
verses  like  the  following  should  not  be  imitated : 

Hac  sunt  in  fossa  Bedse  Yenerabilis  ossa. 

Contra  vim  mortis  non  est  medicamen  in  liortis 

Mensibus  erratis  ad  solem  ne  sedeatis. 

Post  coenam  stabis,  passus  aut  mille  meabis. 

9.  The  too  frequent  repetition  of  the  same  letter  or  syllable  ought  likewise 
to  be  avoided.  Hence  the  following  lines  are  so  severely  censured : 

0  fortunatam  natam  me  Consul  e  Komam  !  Oic. 

0  Tite,  tute,  Tati,  tibi  tanta  tyranne  tulisti.  Auct.  ad  Her. 

Africa  terribili  tremit  horrida  terra  tumultu.  Han. 

In  a  playful  style,  however,  the  repetition  of  the  same  letter  or  syllable  may 
be  tolerated,  and,  not  unfrequently,  the  repetition  may  even  prove  agreeable, 
as  in  the  following  lines : 

Perge  j?ati  j9atiens,  pariet  jpatientia  jpalmam. 

Si  qua  sede  sedes  et  erit  tibi  commoda  sedes, 

Ilia  sede  sede,  nec  ab  ilia  sede  recede. 

The  same  may  be  remarked  of  the  following  distich,  which  is  said  to  have  thus 
originated. — A  youth,  gifted  with  uncommon  poetical  talent,  happened,  for 
some  crime  or  other,  to  be  sentenced  to  death.  The  unfortunate  offender  ap¬ 
pealing  for  mercy,  his  prince,  in  consideration  both  of  his  age  and  abilities, 
promised  to  spare  his  life  if  he  could,  on  the  instant,  compose  a  Latin  distich, 
every  word  of  which  should  begin  with  the  same  letter.  The  youth,  in  awful 
suspense  between  fear  and  hope,  after  a  moment’s  pause,  produced  the  follow¬ 
ing  beautiful  lines : 

Flos  fueram  factus,  florem  fortuna  fefellit : 

Florentem  florem  florida  Flora  fleat. 


i)  Poeta ,  quem  dico  Ilomerum ,  l o num  carmen  fecit.  ?)  Ab  Jove  principium,  musce, 

Jovis  omnia  plena.  Virg. 


254 


PROSODY. 


Dactylic  Pentameter. 

§  28T. — The  Pentameter  (so  called  from  the  number  of  its  feet)  is 
composed  of  two  dactyls  or  spondees  and  a  long  csosural  syllable,  fol¬ 
lowed  by  two  dactyls  and  another  long  or  short  syllable,  which,  with 
the  foregoing  ecesnral  syllable,  constitutes  the  fifth  foot. 

The  Pentameter  is  commonly  used  as  an  appendage  to  a  hexameter.  Both 
together  are  termed  a  distich  (from  dig,  “  twice/’  and  ortxog,  “a  verse”);  and 
a  collection  of  such  distichs  is  called  an  elegy  or  elegiac  poem,  because  they 
were  originally  employed. on  mournful  subjects. 


(First  hemistich  ) 

(Second  hemistich.) 

—  — 

—  - 

— 

-  w 

—  w  ^ 

Principiis  obsta,  sero  medicina  paratur, 

Quum  mala  |  per  lCn-jgas  |  invalu-Jere  mo-jriis. 

Pastor,  arator,  eques,  pavi,  colui,  superavi, 

Capras,  |  rus,  ho-jstes,  |  fronde,  li-|gone,  ma-lnu.1 

Est  avis  in  silva  nigro  vestita  colore: 

SI  cor  |  sustule-jrls,  j  res  erit  |  alba  ni-|mls.2 


LUSUS  ECHUS. 

Hsec  Betlileemitoe  pastoris  verba  referre 
Audita  est  echo,  quae  juga  montis  habet. 

Quis  natus?  dixit:  JPatus! — Patrisne  Judaei? 

Ilia:  Dei. — Verusne  est  homo?  dixit:  homo. 

Atque  hie  idem  nonne  Deus  remanet?  manet. — Estna 
Ut  Pater  omnipotens  ?  retulit  ilia :  potens. 

Hunc  quid  de  coelis  duxit?  lis  duxit. — At  istam 
Die  utrum  vincet?  vincet,  et  ipsa  refert. 

Litis  erat  radix  longceva  ?  Eva. — An  mala  ?  mala. 

Anne  gula  hoc  potuit3?  Ilia  refert  :  potuit. 

An  puer  liic  fiet  magnus?  quae  reddidit:  Agnus. 

Ipse  ait  hoc  ?  ait  hoc. — Cur  ita  clamat  ?  amat. 

Is  majus  nostro  numquid  dare  possit  amori? 

Reddidit  ilia  nihil  quam  gemebunda :  mori. 

Hoc  faciet?  faciet — Moriens?  oriens  ! — Deus  ille? 

Hsec  :  ille. — Est  forsan  causa  tua  ?  ausa  tua. 
Diligere  hunc  ergo  par  est  super  omnia  Christum? 
Istum. — Nonne  Deum?  dixit:  Eum, — et  tacuit. 


D  By  this  distich  allusion  is  made  to  Virgil’s  Eclogues  ( Pastor •  pavi  caprat 
Jronde ),  Georgies  {Arator  colui  rvsligone),  and  iEneid  {Eques  superavi  hostem 
manu).  2)  Cornix ,  cor — nix.  s)  See  §  284. — 1. 


PROSODY 


255 


Rales  for  the  structure  of  pentameters. 

§  288. — 1.  At  tlie  beginning  of  a  pentameter,  a  dactyl  followed  by  a  spondee 
is  preferable  to  a  spondee  followed  by  a  dactyl. 

2.  Neither  hemistich  should  end  with  a  monosyllable.  If,  now  and  then,  a 
monosyllable  happen  to  be  at  the  end  of  the  first  hemistich,  it  should  be  pre¬ 
ceded  either  by  another  long  monosyllable,  or  by  a  word  of  two  short  syllables, 
such  as  sine ,  mdgis,  and  the  like ;  e.  g., 

Idem  ego  sum  qui  nunc  an  vivam,  perfide,  ncscis, 

Cura  tibi  de  quo  |  quaererc  nulla  fait.  Ovid. 

Atque  ita  te  tacitus  quaerenti  plura  legendum 

Ne  quod  non  opus  cst  |  forte  loquare,  dabis.  Odd 

An  exception,  however,  is  made  when  the  monosyllabic  at  the  end  of  either 
of  the  hemisticlis  is  the  verb  est,  and  the  word  going  before  suffers  elision, 
(gpip  In  the  first  hemistich,  the  word  before  est  may  be  either  a  dissyllable  or 
a  polysyllable ;  but  in  the  second  hemistich,  it  should  always  be  a  dissyllable.) 
E.  g->  * 

Nihil  opus  est,  dixit,  certamine,  Romulus,  ullo  : 

Magna  tides  avium  est,  |  experiamur  aves.  Odd. 

Die,  age,  die  aliquam  quae  te  mutaverit  iram : 

Nam  nisi  justa  tua  est,  |  justa  querela  mea  est.  Odd. 

3.  Those  pentameters  are  reckoned  the  best  which  end  with  a  dissyllable, 
especially  with  a  dissyllabic  noun,  pronoun,  or  verb,  such  as  aqua,  ddlor,  sdnus, 
deus,  manu,  domo,  caput, — mild,  meo,  tuo, — e-rat,  eris,  vides,  poles,  refert,  dedi, 
tidi,  and  the  like. 

4.  Elisions  should  take  place  as  rarely  as  possible,  especially  in  the  second 
hemistich,  and  never  in  the  last  dactyl,  except  in  the  case  of  est ,  when  it  ends 
the  verse,  and  is  preceded  by  a  dissyllable,  as  in  the  foregoing  line :  “Nam  nisi 
justa  tua  est,  justa  querela  mea  est.” 

Iambic  Metre. 

§  289. — The  Iambic  Metre,  so  called  from  the  iambus,  of  which  it 
was  originally  composed,  consists  either  of  4,  6,  or  8  feet,  and  is  accord¬ 
ingly  either  Iambus  dimeter,  Iambus  trimeter,  or  Iambus  tetrameter 
In  the  odd  places — that  is,  in  the  first,  third,  and  fifth  feet — there  may 
be  an  iambus,  a  tribrach,  spondee,  dactyl,  or  anapmst;  in  the  even 
places — that  is,  in  the  second  and  fourth  feet — the  long  syllable  of  the 
iambus  is  sometimes  resolved  into  two  short  ones,  and  thus  the  tribrach 
obtained  admission. — At  the  end  of  the  verse,  a  pyrrhic  may  be  used 
instead  of  an  iambus. 

jppp  Horace  did  not  use  this  kind  of  metre,  except  in  combination  with  verses  of  a 
different  kind. 


256 


PROSODY. 


1.  Iambic  dimeter  acatalectic. 


(First  metre  or  dipod.) 

(Second  metre  or  dipod.)  . 

1. 

2. 

8. 

4. 

'w'  - — 

W 

-  'w'  V 

' - '  - - 

v-/  - 

' — ✓  v — / 

^  - 

-  ^ 

V  v-/  - 

Several  of  tlie  sublime  bymns  in  the  public  service  of  the  Catholic  Church 
are  composed  in  this  metre.  The  following  lines  form  the  commencement  of 
two  of  those  beautiful  hymns  : 


Salutis  humanae  sator, 
JESU,  voluptas  cordium, 
Orbis  redempti  conditor 
Et  casta  lux  amantium,  etc. 


Vexilla  regis  prodeunt, 
Fulget  crucis  mysterium, 
Qua  vita  mortem  pertulit 
Et  morte  vitam  protulit,  etc. 


2.  Iambic  trimeter  acatalectic. 


(First  metre  or  dipod.) 

(Second  metre  or  dipod.) 

(Third  metre  or  dipod.) 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

- 

w 

- 

'w'  - 

w  v _ ' 

• -  \«/ 

^  - 

Vw' 

— 

Vw/ 

-  W 

w  - 

BSa-|tus  !l-|le,  qui  |  prociil  |  nego-|tns; 

Ut  pris-[ca  gens  |  morta-|lium, 

Pater-[na  ru-|ra  bo-jbiis  ex-|ercet  |  sins, 

Solu-|tus  om-|ni  foe-|nore,  etc.  Hor. 

The  Iambic  trimeter  is  often  called  the  u senarius”  from  the  number  of  feet  of 
■which  the  line  is  composed.  When  a  line  consists  entirely  of  Iambusses,  it  is  called 
a  pure  Iambic  line;  but  when  other  feet,  besides  the  iambus,  enter  into  it,  a  mixed 
Iambic. 

By  prefixing  one  metre  to  the  common  iambic  trimeter,  the  latter  is  changed  into 
the  Iambic  tetrameter  or  “  octonariusf'  which  species  of  verse  was  used  especially  by 
the  Latin  comic  writers. 


PROSODY. 


257 


Trochaic  Metre. 

§  290. — The  Trochaic  Metre,  so  called  from  the  trochee,  its  principal 
foot,  is  generally  composed  of  either  four  or  eight  feet.  In  the  odd 
places,  it  admits  a  tribrach  ;  but  in  the  seventh  foot,  a  trochee  only. 
In  the  even  places,  besides  the  tribrach,  the  spondee  also,  the  dactyl, 
and  anapaest  are  admitted. 

The  most  common  trochaic  verse  is  the  octonarian  or  tetrameter  catalectic. 
It  has  tlie  ccesural  pause  uniformly  after  the  fourth  foot,  and  is  from  its  grave 
and  sonorous  character  admirably  adapted  for  hymns. 


Trochaic  tetrameter  catalectic. 


1. 

2. 

o 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

GO 

- 

Vw'  Vw/ 

- 

- 

-  Vw/ 

- 

'w'  V 

- 

-  W 

V-/  V-/ 

- 

Vw/  'w' 

- 

- V-/  w 

- 

Pange  |  lingua  |  glori-|osi  ||  laure-[am  cer-[tami-|nis, 

Et  su-|per  cru-[cis  tro-|phseo  ||  die  tri-|umphum  |  nobi-|lem, 
Quali-jter  Re-idemptor  |  orbis  ]|  immo-|latus  |  vice-|rit.  8.  Aug. 


Trochaic  dimeter  catalectic. 

§  291. — The  Trochaic  dimeter  catalectic,  which  some  prosodians  con¬ 
sider  and  scan  as  an  lambic  dimeter  acephalous,  admits  in  the  second 
place  the  spondee,  dactyl,  and  anapaest.  But  Horace,  in  the  few  lines 
he  left  us  of  this  metre,  uniformly  employed  the  trochee. 

The  Lyric  Metres  of  Horace. 

§  292. — A  poem  which  contains  one  kind  of  verse  only,  is  called 
carmen  monocolon ;  a  poem  which  contains  two  kinds,  dicdlon;  and  a 
poem  which  contains  three  kinds,  tricolon. 

When  in  a  poem,  after  the  second  verse,  the  first  returns,  it  is  called 
distrophon ;  when  after  the  third,  iristrophon ;  when  after  the  fourth, 
tetrastrophon. 

The  several  verses  which  occur  before  the  first  line  returns,  are  called 
a  stanza  or  strophe. 


258 


PROSODY, 


§  293. — 1.  ALCAIC  ( carmen  tricolon  tetrastrtiphon).  The  Alcaic  strophe  con¬ 
sists  of  four  lines.  The  first  two  are  greater  Alcaics,  so  called  from  the  poet 
Alcaeus.  The  third  is  an  iambic  dimeter  hypermeter,  and  the  fourth  a  Minor 
Alcaic. 


2.  SAPPHIC  ( carmen  dicolon  tetrastrophon).  The  Sapphic  strophe  consists 
of  three  Sapphic  verses,  invented  by  the  poetess  Sappho,  and  one  Adonic. 


3.  ASCLEPIADIC  ( carmen  monocolon ).  The  Asclepiadic  Metre  consists 
one  verse,  invented  by  the  poet  Asclepiades. 


of 


4.  ASCLEPIADIC-GLYCONIC  ( carmen  dicolon  tetrastrophon).  This  metre 
consists  of  three  Asclepiadic  lines  and  one  Glyconic,  invented  by  the  poet  Glyco . 


5.  ASCLEPIADIC-PHERECRATIC-GLYCONIC  ( carmen  tricolon  tetrastro - 
phon).  It  consists  of  two  Asclepiadics,  one  Pherecratic,  so  called  from  the  poet 
JSherecrates ,  and  one  Glyconic. 


— 

-  V  - 

-  — 

| 

--  1 

—  1  - 
— '  —  | 

PROSODY. 


259 


C.  GLYCONIC-ASCLEPIADIC  {carmen  diculon  distrdphon).  This  metre 
consists  of  two  verses — the  first,  a  Glyconic ;  the  second,  an  Asclepiaaic. 


7.  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  {carmen  monocolon).  See  §  289. — 2. 

8.  One  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  and  one  IAMBIC  DIMETER  {carmen  dicolon 
distrdphon).  See  §  289. — 2  and  1. 

9.  One  IAMBIC  DIMETER  acephalous  and  one  IAMBIC  TRIMETER  aca- 
talectic  {carmen  dicolon  distrdphon). 


10.  CHORIAMBIC  PENTAMETER  {carmen  monocolon).  This  line  is  made 
up  of  a  spondee,  three  clioriambi,  and  an  iambus. 


11.  One  CHORIAMBIC  DIMETER  and  one  CHORIAMBIC  TETRA¬ 
METER  {carmen  diculon  distrdphon).  |W°  In  the  first  foot  of  the  second  verse, 
Horace  generally  uses  a  second  epitrit  ( —  ^  — - )  instead  of  a  choriambus. 


12.  One  HEXAMETER  and  one  DACTYLIC  TETRAMETER  a  posterior 
[carmen  diculon  distrdphon).  The  dactylic  tetrameter  a  posteriore  consists  of 
the  last  four  feet  of  the  hexameter. 


260 


PROSODY. 


13.  One  HEXAMETER  and  one  DACTYLIC  TRIMETER  catalectic  ( carmen 
dicolon  distrdphon).  The  dactylic  trimeter  consists  of  the  last  three  feet  of  the 
hexameter. 


14.  One  HEXAMETER  and  one  LIMBIC  TRIMETER  ( carmen  dicolon  dis¬ 
trdphon).  See  §§  285  and  289.-2. 

15.  One  HEXAMETER  and  one  I AMBICO- DACTYLIC  (carmen  dicolon  dis¬ 
trdphon). 


16.  One  ARCHILOCHIAN  HEPTAMETER  and  one  IAMBIC  TRIMETER 
catalectic  ( carmen  dicolon  distrdphon).  The  Archil ochian  heptameter  is  made 
up  of  a  dactylic  tetrameter  a  priori, — that  is,  of  the  first  four  feet  of  the  hexa¬ 
meter,  of  which  the  fourth  is  always  a  dactyl, — and  of  a  pure  trochaic  dimeter 
brachy  catalectic. 


294. — Index  to  the  Odes  of  Horace, 


(From  the  Paris  edition) 

containing  the  first  words  of  each,  with  reference  to  the  synopsis 
of  the  Horatian  metres,  as  exhibited  in  §  293. 


iEli,  vetusto  ....... 

AEquam  memento  . . 
Altera  jam  teritur.. 
Angustam,  amici... 

At,  0  deorum . 

Bacchum  in  rmiotis 

Beatus  ille . 

Ccelo  sn pinas . 

Coelo  tonantem . 

Cur  me  querelis. . . . 
Delicta  majorum... 

Descende  ccelo . 

Dianam  tenerae . 

Diffugere  nives  . . . . 
Dive,  quem  proles. . 
Divis  orte  bonis . . . . 


1 

1 

14 

1 

8 

1 

8 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

5 

13 

2 

4 


Donarem  pateras  .... 

Eheu  fugaces . 

Est  milii  nonum  .... 
Et  tbu re  et  fidibus  . . 
Exegi  monumentum. 
Faune,  Nympharum. 
Festo  quid  potius  die 

Herculis  ritu . 

Horrida  tempestas  .. 

Ibis  Liburnis . 

Icci,  beatis . 

Ille  et  nefasto . 

Impios  parrse . 

Inclusam  Danseen  ... 
Intaetis  opulentior  . . 
Integer  vitse . 


8 

1 

2 

6 

8 

2 

6 

2 

15 

8 

1 

1 

2 

4 

6 

2 


PROSODY. 


261 


Jam  pauca  aratro .  1 

Jam  satis  terris .  2 

Jam  veris  comites .  4 

Justnm  et  tenacem .  1 

Laudabunt  alii .  12 

Lupis  et  agnis .  8 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes .  11 

Maecenas  atavis . * .  8 

Mala  sol uta .  8 

Martiis  cselebs .  2 

Mercuri  facunde . 2 

Mercuri,  nam  te .  2 

Monti um  custos .  2 

Motum  ex  Metello .  1 

Musis  amicus .  1 

Natia  in  usum .  1 

Ne  forte  credas .  1 

Nobs  longa  ferae .  4 

Non  ebur  neque .  9 

Non  semper  imbres . 1 

Non  usitata .  1 

Nullam,  Vare .  10 

Null  us  argento .  2 

Nunc  est  bibendum .  1 

0  diva,  gratum . 1 

O  fons  Bandusiae .  5 

O  matre  pulchra .  1 

0  nata  mecum .  1 

O  navis,  referent .  5 

0  saepe  mecum . l 

O  Venus,  regina .  2 

Odi  profan  um . 1 


Otiumdivos.. . 2 

Parcus  dcoruin .  1 

Parentis  olim .  8 

Pastor  quum  traheret .  4 

Persicos  odi .  2 

Phoebe,  silvarumque .  2 

Phoebus  volentem .  1 

Pindarum  quisquis .  2 

Poscimur  :  si  quid .  2 

Quae  cura  patrum .  1 

Qualem  ministrum .  1 

Quando  repostum . 8 

Quantum  distet .  6 

Quem  tu,  Melpomene .  6 

Quern  virum .  2 

Quid  bellicosus .  1 

Quid  dedicatum .  1 

Quid  immerentes .  8 

Quis  desiderio .  4 

Quo  me,  Bacche .  6 

Quo,  quo  scelesti .  8 

Eectius  vives . 2 

Scriberis  Vario .  4 

Septimi,  Gades .  2 

Sic  te  diva .  6 

Solvitur  acris  hiems .  16 

Te  maris  et  terreo .  12 

Tu  ne  qusesieris . . 10 

Tyrrhena  regum .  1 

Vclox  amcenum .  1 

Vides,  ut  alta .  1 

Vilepotabis .  2 


Rhyming  Versification. 

§  295. — Towards  the  middle  of  the  fifth  century  a  new  political  order 
compelled  the  Latin  races  to  admit  into  their  language  a  great  many 
words,  borrowed  from  the  conquerors.  The  pronunciation  was  altered, 
little  attention  paid  to  prosody,  and  the  meters,  which  result  from  a 
skilful  combination  of  long  and  short  syllables,  seemed  to  have  lost  their 
power.  Then  sprang  up  a  new  poetical  system,  not  grounded,  as  that 
of  the  ancients,  on  the  quantity,  but  on  the  number  of  syllables :  the 
harmonious  blending  of  sounds  became  the  chief  object  of  poetry,  and, 
at  a  still  later  period,  symmetry  called  forth  the  modern  rhyme.  Fart 
of  the  aJesu  dulcis  memorial  and  the  whole  of  the  “ Dies  irce ”■ — two 
sacred  songs  that  have  acquired  a  well-deserved  celebrity,  are  subjoined 
as  examples  of  rhyming  versification.  The  easy  flow  and  sweetness  of 
the  former  make  us  almost  forget  Anacreon  ;  while  the  short,  majestic 
lines  of  the  latter  so  powerfully  impress  the  mind,  that  they  can  scarcely 
be  matched  by  the  sublimest  numbers  of  Horace. 


262 


PROSODY. 


JESU  DULCIS  MEMORIA. 

(Attributed  to  St.  Bernard.) 

Jesu  dulcis  memoria, 

Dans  vera  cordis  gaudia, 

Sed  super  mel  et  omnia 
Ejus  dulcis  praesentia. 

Nil  canitur  suavius, 

Nil  auditur  jucundius, 

Nil  cogitatur  dulcius, 

Quam  Jesus  Dei  Alius. 

O  Jesu,  spes  poenitentibus, 
Quam  pius  es  petentibus, 

Quam  bonus  te  quaerentibus, 
Sed  quid  invenientibus  ? 

Nec  lingua  valet  dicere, 

Nec  littera  exprimere, 
Expertus  potest  credere, 

Quid  sit  Jesum  diligere. 

Jesu  rex  admirabilis 
Et  triumphator  nobilis, 
Dulcedo  ineffabilis, 

Totus  desiderabilis. 

Quando  cor  nostrum  visita?, 
Tunc  lucet  ei  veritas, 

Mundi  vilescit  vanitas 
Et  intus  fervet  charitas. 

Jesu,  decus  Angelicum, 

In  aure  dulce  canticum, 

In  ore  mel  mirificum, 

In  corde  nectar  ccelicum. 

Qui  te  gustant,  esuriunt ; 

Qui  bibuut,  adhuc  sitiunt ; 
Desiderare  nesciunt, 

Nisi  Jesum,  quern  diligunt. 

0  Jesu  mi  dulcissime, 

Spes  suspirantis  animae, 

Te  quaerant  piae  lacrimae 
Te  clamor  mentis  intimae. 


PROSODY. 


Quocunque  loco  fuero, 

Mecum  Jesum  desidero  : 

Quam  laetus  cum  inveuero, 

Quam  felix  cum  tenuero  ! 

Jesum  omnes  agnoscite, 

Amorem  ejus  poscite ; 

Jesum  ardenter  quserite, 

Quserendo  inardescite. 

Te  nostra,  Jesu,  vox  sonet, 
Nostri  te  mores  exprimant, 

Te  corda  nostra  diligant, 

Et  nunc  et  in  perpetuum.  Amen 

DIES  irse. 

(Immortalized  by  Mozart’s  Requiem.) 

Dies  iroe,  dies  ilia 

Sol  vet  saeclum  in  favilla, 

Teste  David  cum  Sibylla. 

Quantus  tremor  est  futurus, 
Quando  Judex  est  venturus, 
Cuncta  stricte  discussurus ! 

Tuba  mirum  spargens  sonum 
Per  sepulchra  regionum, 

Coget  omnes  ante  thronum. 

Mors  stupebit  et  natura, 

Cum  resurget  creatura, 
Judicanti  responsura. 

Liber  scriptus  proferetur, 

In  quo  totum  continetur, 

Unde  mundus  judicetur. 

Judex  ergo  cum  sedebit, 

Quidquid  latet,  apparebit : 

Nil  inultum  remanebit. 

Qufd  sum  miser  tunc  dicturus* 
Quern  patronum  rogaturus, 

Cum  vix  justus  sit  seeurus  ? 


PROSODY. 


264- 

Rex  tremendse  majestatis, 

Qui  salvandos  salvas  gratis, 
Salve  me,  fons  pietatis. 

Recordare,  Jesu  pie, 

Quod  sum  causa  turn  vise, 
Ne  me  perdas  ilia  die. 

Qumrens  me  sedisti  lassus, 
Redemisti  crncem  passus : 
Tantus  labor  non  sit  cassus. 

Juste  judex  ultionis, 

Donum  fac  remissionis, 

Ante  diem  rationis. 

Ingemisco,  tamquam  reus, 

Culpa  rubet  vultus  mens ; 
Supplicanti  parce,  Deus. 

Qui  Mariam  absolvisti, 

Et  latronem  exaudisti, 

Mihi  quoque  spem  dedisti. 

Preces  mem  non  sunt  dignm ; 
Sed  tu  bonus  fac  benigne, 
Ee  perenni  cremer  igue. 

Inter  oves  locum  prsesta, 

Et  ab  lioedis  me  sequestra, 
Statuens  in  parte  dextra. 

Coufutatis  maledictis, 

Elammis  acribus  addictis, 
Yoca  me  cum  benedictis. 

Oro  snpplex  et  acclinis, 

Cor  contritum  quasi  cinis, 
Gere  curam  mei  fmis. 

Lacrimosa  dies  ilia, 

Qua  resurget  ex  favilla, 
Judicandus  homo  reus. 

Huic  ergo  parce,  Deus : 

Pie  Jesu  Domine, 

Dona  eis  requiem.  Amen. 


READING  LESSONS 


DIALOGUES. 

1.  Or  God. 

Pater.  Filins. 

P.  Quid  putas,  fill  mi,  si  consideras  hose  prata,  bos  Sores,  Las  arbores ; 
si  conspicis  fruges  in  agris,  pisoes  in  aquis,  aves  in  aere,  solem  in  coelo: 
num  Ltec  omnia  casu  fortuito  orta  sunt?  F.  Hoc  credere  non  possum. 
P.  IJnde  igitur  omnia  habent  originem  ?  F.  A  Deo  qui  conditor  est  om¬ 
nium  rerum.  P.  Recte,  fili  mi!  Deus  auctor  est  cceli,  solis,  lunre,  et 
siderum ;  ignis,  aeris,  aquse  et  terras;  hominum,  bestiarum,  quadrupedum, 
avium,  piscium,  ceterarumque  animantium ;  plantarum,  frutieum,  et  arbo- 
rum ;  marium  et  fluminum  ;  montium  ac  vallium  ;  lapidum  et  metallorum. 
Unde  igitur  nosti,  Deum  esse?  F.  Ex  innumeris  ejus  operibus. 

2.  Or  rising. 

Vivianus.  Paulus. 

V.  Ileus,  Leus,  Paule,  expergiscere  !  tempus  est  surgere.  Audisne  ? 
P.  Non  audio.  V.  Ubi  ergo  Labes  aures?  P.  In  lecto.  V.  Hoc  video. 
Sed  quid  facis  adhuc  in  lecto?  P.  Quid  faciam? — dormio.  V.  Dormis?  et 
lo'queris  tamen  mecum.  P.  Saltern  volo  dormire.  V.  Nunc  autem  non  est 
tempus  dormiendi,  sed  surgendi.  P.  Quota  Lora  est?  V.  Septima.  P.  Quan- 
do  tu  surrexisti  e  lecto?  V.  Jam  ante  duas  Loras.  P.  Num  sorores  jam 
surrexerunt?  V.  Jam  pridem.  P.  Sed  Ludovicus  certe  adbuc  jacetin  lecto. 
V.  Eri  •as.  Quum  expergefacerem  eum,  statim  reliquit  nidum  stmm.  P.  Mox 
igitur  surgam.  II 

3.  Or  icriting. 

Leonardus.  Henricus. 

L.  Quid  agis,  Henrice?  H.  Scribo,  ut  vides.  L.  Quid  scribis?  H.  Versus 
quos  prseceptor  dictavit.  L.  Ostende,  qusoso,  scripturam.  H.  Aspice. 
L.  Videris  mibi  nimis  festinanter  scripsisse.  II.  Scribo  interdum  melius. 


266 


READING  LESSONS. 


L.  Our  igitur  nunc  tarn  male  scribis  ?  H.  Desunt  mibi  bene  scribendi  adju 
menta.  L.  Quasnam?  II.  Bona  cbarta,  bonnm  atramentum,  bona  penna. 
IIa3C  enim  charta,  ut  vides,  mi  sere  diffundit  litteras  ;  atramentum  est  aquo- 
surn  et  pallidum;  penna  mollis  et  male  parata.  L.  Cur  ista  omnia  non 
mature  providisti  ?  H.  Pecunia  mibi  deerat  et  nunc  etiam  deest.  L.  Tibi 
aliquid  pecunim  commodabo,  ut  meliorem  chartam  resque  ceteras  tibi  emero 
possis.  H.  Benevolentiam  tuam  gratus  agnosco. 

4.  On  ink. 

Julius.  Augustus. 

J.  Habesne  bonum  atramentum,  amice?  A.  Ilabeo.  J.  Visne  mibi  dare 
aliquantulum  ?  A.  Eho  !  non  babes?  J.  Equidem  habeo,  sed  eo  non  pos¬ 
sum  scribere.  A.  Cur  non  ?  J.  Quia  nimis  spissum  est.  A.  Porrige 
vasculum  tuum ;  ego  tibi  infundam.  J.  Ecce,  infunde.  Yah,  quam  liqui- 
dum  est!  Sed  admodum  decolor  esse  videtur.  A.  Satis  nigrum  evadet, 
modo  bene  miscueris.  J.  Feci,  et  probe  miscui.  A.  Nunc  fac  periculum  et 
scribe  aliquid.  J.  Dicta  milii  sententiam  aliquam.  A.  Grsecam  mavis,  an 
Latin  am,  an  Anglicam?  J.  Dicta  Latinam.  A.  Scribe:  Experientia  est 
optima  rerum  magistra.  J.  Scrips).  A.  Nunc  expecta  dum  scriptura  bene 
desiccata  sit.  Jam  vide  quam  nigra  sit.  J.  Sic  est.  A.  Ergo  experientia 
tua  magistra  fait. 

5.  On  letter-writing. 

Daniel.  Philippas. 

I).  Quid  legis,  Philippe?  P.  Epistolarn.  D.  Quis  scripsit?  P.  Prater 
meus.  D.  IJnde?  P.  Parisiis.  P.  Quo  die?  P.  Die  Mercurii.  P.  Quando 
accepisti?  P.  Hac  ipsa  bora.  P.  Quis  attulit?  P.  Nescio.  P.  Nescis? 
Quis  tibi  earn  dedit?  P.  Auriga  quidam  misit  mibi  e  deversorio.  P.  Quid 
tibi  scripsit  f rater  ?  P.  Longum  est  enarrare  omnia,  necdum  totam  perlegi: 
litteras  ipsas  tibi  ostendam  post  prandium.  P.  Id  mibi  pergratum  erit. 
Quando  rescribes?  P.  Fortasse  perendie.  P.  Turn  saluta  eum  meo nomine. 
Nosti  enim  quantopere  eum  semper  amaverim.  P.  Hoc  probe  scio.  P.  Ergo 
epistolarn  mecum  communicabis  ?  P.  Ut  promisi. 

6.  On  repetition. 

Fredericus.  Carolus. 

F.  Quid  agis,  Carole?  C.  Repeto  pensum  besternum.  F.  Tenesne  memo- 
ria?  C.  Propemodum.  Et  tu  num  recitare  poteris?  F.  Yereor  ut  possim. 
C.  Yisne  repetamus^na  ?  F.  Libentissime.  Sed  quomodo  rem  instituemus? 
C.  x\udiamus  alter  alterum.  F.  Cur  autem  repetimus  hodie  quae  pridie 
didicimus  ?  C.  Quia  prseceptor  nos  sic  facere  jubet?  F.  Td  satis  scio  ;  sed 
cur  jubet?  C.  Ut  memoriam  exerceamus;  nam  quo  diligentius  pensum 
repetimus,  eo  melius  tenemus.  Incipe  igitur  et  recita.  F.  Atqui  tuum  est 
ootius  incipere.  0.  Quid  ita?  F.  Quia  me  invitasti.  G.  Iucipiam  igitur. 
Tu  vero  attente  audi  ut  moneas  si  quid  peccaverim. 


HEADING  LESSONS. 


267 


7.  On  playing. 

Conradus.  Godofredus.  Otto. 

C.  Veni,  Godofrede  !  veni  Otto  !  venite  ambo  !  G.  Quo  tandem  ?  G.  In 
aream;  preceptor  enim  nos  jussit  ludere.  0.  Quid  hie  narrat?  G.  Quod 
certissimum  est  et  quod  ipsi  a  ceteris  commilitonibus  mox  audietis.  G.  Lu- 
dant  sane  alii,  quantum  voluerint :  ego  non  ludam.  0.  Nec  mibi  animus  est 
ludendi.  C.  Quare  autem  ?  G.  Malo  repetere  lectiones  meas  quam  ludendo 
tempus  perdere.  G.  Num  hoc  est  tempus  perdere,  si  corpus  exercemus  ad 
valetudinem  conservandam?  0.  Tu  corpus  exerce :  ego  vero  describam 
quse  prseceptor  dictavit.  C.  Ohe  !  quam  morosos  babeo  condiscipulos ! 
G.  Sibi  quisque  serit,  sibi  metit.  G.  At  preeceptor  nos  ludere  jusssit. 
0.  Mentiris!  Debebas  dicere  enm  permisisse  ut  ludamus,  non  autem  jus- 
sisse.  Nemo  enim  ad  ludum  cogitur.  G.  Yalete,  ego  ludam. 

8.  Funny  talk. 

Andreas.  Mauritius.  Rudolplius. 

A.  Salve,  mi  Mauriti!  M.  Gratias  ago,  mi  Andrea!  Quid  afters? 
A .  Meipsum.  M.  Sic  rem  baud  magni  pretii  hue  attulisti.  A.  Atqui 
magno  constiti  patri  ineo.  IT.  Credo  pluris  quam  quisquam  te  sestimet. 
A.  Sed  Rudolpbus  estnedomi?  M.  Nescio.  Pulsa  fores  ejus  et  videbis. 
A.  Ileus!  Rudolpbe,  num  domi  es?  R.  Non  sum.  A.  Rnpudens !  non 
ego  audio  te  loquentem  ?  R.  Immo  tu  es  impudens.  Nuper  ancillte  vestrse 
credidi,  te  non  esse  domi,  cum  tamen  esses;  et  tu  non  credis  mihi  ipsi. 
A.  iEquum  dicis;  par  pari  retulisti.  R.  Equidem,  utnon  omnibus  dormio, 
ita  non  omnibus  sum  domi.  Nunc  vero  adsum.  A.  Sed  tu  mihi  videris 
cochlese  vitam  agere.  R.  Quid  ita?  A.  Quia  perpetuo  domi  latitas,  nec 
unquam  prorepis.  R.  Foris  mihi  nihil  est  negotii.  A.  At  serenum  caelum 
nuncinvitat  ad  deambulandum.  R.  Verum  est.  Si  ergo  deambulare  lubet, 
per  horulam  te  comitabor;  nam  toto  hoc  mense  pedem  porta  non  extuli. 
Vocabo  Mauritium  ut  una  nobiscum  eat.  A.  Placet.  Sic  enim  jucundior 
erit  deambulatio. 

9.  The  sluggard. 

M  ax  i  rn  i  1  i  a  n  u  s .  G  u  i  li  el  in  u  s . 

M.  Hodie  te  conventum  volebam,  Guilielme;  sed  negabaris  esse  domi. 
G.  Non  omnino  mentiti  sunt.  Tibi  quidem  non  eram,  sed  mihi  turn  eram 
maxime.  M.  Quid  isthoc  senigmatis  est  ?  G.  Dormiebam.  M.  Quid  ais  ? 
atqui  jam  prseterierat  octava,  quum  sol  hoc  mense  oriatur  ante  quartam. 
G.  Per  me  quidem  soli  liberum  est  oriri  vel  media  nocte,  modo  mihi  liceat  ad 
satietatem  usque  dormire.  Nullus  enim  somnus  suavior  est  quam  post  exor- 
tum  solem.  M.  Qua  tandem  hora  soles  e  lecto  surgere  ?  G.  Inter  quartam 
et  nonam.  M.  Satis  amplum  spatium !  Yix  unquam  vidi  hominem  te 
magis  prodigum.  G.  At  mihi  parsimonia  potius  videtur;  interim  enim  neo 
candelas  absumo,  nec  vestes  detero.  M.  Prsepostera  sane  parsimonia. 
Aliter  sentiebat  ille  philosophus  qui  rogatus  quid  esset  pretiosissinjum,  re^ 
spondit,  tempus. 


268 


READING  LESSONS. 


10.  Continued. 

G.  Sed  dulce  est  dormire.  M.  Quid  potest  esse  dulce  nihil  sentient!? 
Yerum  reputa,  qussso,  quantum  eruditionis  tibi  parare  possis  quatuor  illia 
horis  quas  somno  intempestivo  perdere  soles.  Nosti  proverbium  :  Aurora 
musis  arnica.  Nunquam  enim  alacrior  est  animus  hominis  quam  matutino 
tempore,  nec  unqnam  feliciores  in  litterarum  studiis  progressus  facere  pos~ 
sumus.  Quid  suspiras,  Guilielme?  G.  Yera  profecto  prsedicas  et  vix  a 
lacrimis  mibi  temperare  possum  quum  cogito  quantam  feeerim  jacturam. 
M.  In  id  igitur  incumbe  ut  futuro  tempori  parcas ;  nec  nimio  te  dedas 
somno.  Septem  enim  boras  dormisse  adulto  homini,  bene  valenti,  sufficit. 
G.  Vereor  ut  possim ;  nam  consuetudo  est  altera  natura,  ac  difficillimum 
est  ea  relinquere,  quibus  din  assuevimus.  M.  Initio  quidem,  sed  earn  moles- 
tiam  brevi  tempore  vinces,  et  turn  tibi  ipse  sero  licet  gratulaberis  mihique 
gratias  ages  qui  monuerim. 

11.  Invitation  to  dinner . 

Gustavus.  Stephanas. 

G.  Salve  multum,  jucundissime  Stepbane  !  8.  Salve  et  ipse,  bumanissime 

Gustave!  Quid  agis?  G.  Ego  nonnihil  babeo  quod  tibi  succenseam. 
8.  Quid  ita  ?  quid  admisi  sceleris  ?  G.  Quod  me  plane  negligis  meque  tarn 
raro  revisis.  8.  Yerum  boc  non  mea  culpa  accidit.  Dabis  veniam  occu- 
pationibus  meis  per  quas  mibi  non  licet  te  quoties  cupio  revisere.  G.  Ita 
demum  tibi  ignoscam,  si  hodie  apud  me  coenes.  S.  Haud  iniquas  pacis  leges 
prsescribis,  Gustave.  Libentissime  veniam.  G.  At  cave  me  deluseris. 
8.  llac  in  re  non  fallam.  Sed  heus  tu !  cave  quidquam  paraveris  prater 
.quotidiana.  G.  Cavebo  et  satis  frugali  coena  te  excipiam.  At  tu  vide, 
omnes  curas  tuns  et  quidquid  bilaritati  official,  domi  relinquas.  8.  Ita  fiet, 
Explicabimus  frontem  nosque  jucunditati  dabimus.  Numquid  aliud  vis? 
G.  Fac  ad  quintam  boram  adsis.  8.  Adero.  Interea  vale. . 

12.  On  hunting. 

Paulus.  Theophilus.  Vivianus.  Ludovicus.  Bernardos. 

P.  Trabit  sua  quern que  voluptas:  mibi  placet  venatio.  T.  Placet  etiasi 
mibi ;  sed  ubi  canes,  ubi  venabula,  ubi  casses  ?  P.  Yaleant  apri,  ursi,  cervi, 
et  vulpes !  nos  insidiabimur  cuniculis.  V.  At  ego  laqueos  injiciam  locustis. 
T.  Ego  ran  as  captabo.  B.  Ego  papiliones  venabor.  T.  Difficile  est  sectari 
volautia.  B.  Difficile,  sed  pulcbrum  ;  nisi  pulcbrius  esse  ducis  sectari  lura- 
bricos  aut  cocbleas,  quia  carent  alis.  L.  Equidem  malo  insidiari  piscibus ; 
est  mihi  bamus  elegans.  B.  Sed  unde  parabis  escam  ?  L.  Lumbricorum 
ubivis  magna  est  copia.  B.  Sed  plerique  pisces  delicatioris  et  elegantioris 
sunt  palati  quam  ut  esca  tarn  vulgari  capiantur.  T.  Tu  vide,  Ludovice, 
possisne  imponere  piscibus;  ego  ranis  facessam  negotium.  L.  Quomodo  ? 
ueti?  T.  Non;  sed  arcu.  L.  Novum  piscandi  genus.  T.  At  non  injucun- 
dum.  Yidebis  et  fatebere.  V.  Quid,  si  eertemus  nucibus?  P.  Nuces 


BEADING  LESSONS. 


269 


pueris  relinquamus ;  nos  grandiores  snmus.  V.  Et  tamen  nihil  adhuc  aliud 
quam  pneri  sumns.  P.  Sed  quibus  decorum  est  ludere  nucibus,  iisdem  non 
indecorum  est  equitare  in  arundine  longa.  V.  Tu  igitur  prroscribito  lusus 
genus ;  sequar  quocunque  vocaveris.  P.  Et  ego  futurus  sum  omnium  hora- 
rum  homo. 

13.  The  traveller. 

Ferdinandus.  Eugenius. 

P.  Salve,  mi  Eugeni  1  E.  Tu  quoque  salve,  mi  Ferdinande !  F.  Quomodo 
vales  ex  tarn  diuturno  itinere?  E.  Optime,  ut  vides.  F.  Vehementer 
gaudeo  te  rediisse  incolumem.  Ubinam  fuisti  tot  annis?  quas  terras  pera- 
grasti.  E.  In  Anglia  fui,  in  Gallia  et  Italia.  F.  Quasnam  Italise  urbes 
vidisti?  E.  Imprimis  commoratus  sum  Genuse,  Florentine,  Yenetiis,  Nea- 
poli,  et  Romse.  Postea  Bononiam  vidi,  Patavium,  et  Mediolanum ;  in  sin¬ 
gulis  autem  hisce  urbibus  tantum  aliquot  menses  commoratus  sum.  P.  Quid 
autem  novi  vidisti  in  tot  locis  celeberrimis  ?  E.  Fere  omnia  mihi  nova  vide- 
bantur ;  sed  longum  est  omnia  enarrare.  F.  Die  saltern  quomodo  urbs  nostra 
tibi  visa  sit  post  tarn  longam  absentiam?  E.  Omnia  mutata  sunt.  Quam 
repente  res  hominum  mutantur !  Yix  decern  annos  abfueram,  et  non  secus 
omnia  admirabar  ac  somnians  ille  Epimenides,  cum  esset  expergefactus. 

14.  Continued . 

F.  Qunenam  ista  est  fabula  ?  E.  Narrant  historici  de  Epimenide  quodam 
Cretensi,  qui  deambulandi  gratia  solus  urbe  egressus,  quum  subita  pluvia 
compellente  in  quandam  speluncam  iugressus  obdormisset,  nescio  quot 
annos  perpetuos  somnum  continuant.  F.  Quid  narras?  Isthoc  est  men- 
tiri !  Sed  perge,  quseso.  E.  Epimenides  igitur  somno  solutus  e  spelunca 
prodit,  circumspicit,  mutata  videt  omnia,  silvas,  flumina,  ripas,  arbores, 
agros.  Accedit  ad  urbem  ;  percontatur,  manet  illic  aliquamdiu,  neque 
novit  quemquam,  neque  a  quopiam  agnoscitnr.  Alius  hominum  cultus, 
mutatus  sermo,  diversi  mores.  Nec  miror  hoc  Epimenidi  post  tot  annorum 
spatium  evenisse,  quum  mihi  idem  propemodum  evenerit  qui  nonnisi  paucos 
annos  abfuerim.  F.  Jam  te  diutius  detinere  nolim;  alio  tempore  multa 
mihi  narrabis.  Yale,  Eugeni  carissime!  E.  Yale. 

15.  A  promenade. 

Pater.  Filins. 

P.  Paululum  deambulaturus  sum  et  tu  me  comitaberis,  fili  mil  F.  Quo- 
nam  ibimus,  pater  carissime  ?  P.  In  agros.  Segetem  lustrabimus.  F.  Qua 
vero  via?  hacne  lata,  an  ilia  semita?  P.  Per  semitam  ibimus ;  nam  heec 
lata  via  nondum  satis  sicca  est.  F.  Yerum  ista  semita  angusta  est  et  lu- 
brica.  P.  Noli  timere.  Simulac  post  illam  maceriam  venerimus,  lat.ior  fiet 
atque  expedition  F.  0  quam  serenum  et  mite  ccelum!  P.  Audisne  alau- 
dam  canentem?  F.  Audio,  sed  non  video.  P.  Alauda  magis  auribus  perci- 
pitur  quam  oculis.  Sed  hie  sursum  tollo  vultum,  et  earn  videbis.  F.  Jana 


27x0 


READING  LESSONS. 


video.  Puncti  instar  est ;  adeo  pusilla  apparet.  P.  Nunc  pervenimus  ad 
collem,  mi  fili!  ex  quo  immensa  panditur  planities.  Ascendamus  igitur. 
F.  O  prasclarum  prospectum !  P.  Hie  urbem  nostram  vides  et  fluvium 
flexuosis  anfractibus  labentem,  ad  dexteram  campos  patentissimos,  ad  sinis- 
tram  montes  silvis  vestitos,  et  vineas  amoenissimas. 


16.  Continued. 

F.  Istic  ovium  gregem  conspicio.  Ubi  est  opilio?  P.  Illic  sub  arbore 
consedit.  F.  Nuliine  ei  canes  sunt?  P.  Nonne  eos  vides  prope  opilionem 
cubantes?  F.  Timeo  ne  me  mordeant.  P.  Non  est  quod  timeas ;  non  te 
bedent,  Sed  illuc  verte  oculos.  Yidesne  cervum  ramosis  ornatum  corni- 
bus  ?  F.  Quam  prsestanti  est  forma !  Hie  leporem  video  currentem.  Quos 
ille  saltus  fac'd !  P.  Est  animal  timidissimum.  F.  Sed  quis  ille  vir  est, 
viridi  indutus  veste  ?  P.  Venator  est.  F.  Habet  secum  duo  canes  vena- 
ticos.  P.  Hi  semper  venatorem  sequuntur,  cum  sint  ad  venandum  neces- 
sarii.  F.  Video  bominem  pauperem,  nobis  appropinquantem.  Nos  allocu- 
turus  videtur  esse.  Ibo  ei  obviam,  ut  si  forte  ope  nostra  egeat,  preces  ejus 
prseveniam.  P.  Bene  facis,  fili  mi,  ito !  F.  Non  erat  mendicus,  sed  viator, 
qui  me,  ut  viam  sibi  monstrarem,  rogabat.  P.  Monstrastine  brevissimam? 
F.  Monstravi,  ut  aberrare  non  possit.  P.  Sed  jam  redeamus,  satis  jam 
ambulatum  est.  Eamus  per  banc  silvulam  ;  hac  via  citius  domum  venie- 
mus.  F.  Visne  praecedam  ?  P.  Praecede. 

.  17.  Missed  lessons. 

Theodoras.  Augustus. 

A.  Hodiene  demum  rure  rediisti  ?  T.  Hodie,  paulo  ante  prandium 
A.  Atqui  dixeras  te  modo  biduum  ibi  mansurum.  T.  Ita  fore  sperabam 
et  pater  sic  prsedixerat.  A.  Quid  igitur  obstitit,  quominus  citius  redieris  ? 
T.  Mater  me  detinuit.  A.  Cur  te  tam  diu  retinuit?  T.  Ut  ipsam  rede- 
untem  comitarer.  A.  Quid  vero  agebas  interea?  T.  Colligebam  fructus 
cum  rusticis  nostris.  A.  Quos  fructus  ?  T.  Quasi  ignoti  tibi  sint  fructus 
serotini:  pira,  mala,  juglandes,  castanese.  A.  Jucundum  sane  negotium  ! 
Sed  interim  quinque  aut  sex  scholarum  fructus  tibi  periit.  T.  Hoc  valda 
doleo  :  sed  omnibus  viribus  enltar  ut  damnum  quodammodo  resarciam. 
A.  Quid  facies?  T.  Describam  omnia  quam  diligentissime.  A.  Sed  non 
omnia  satis  intelliges.  T.  Turn  tu  mihi  aderis  et  explicationem  prseceptoris 
mecum  communicabis.  A.  Quanto  priestitisset,  ipsum  audire  magistrum ! 
T.  Multo  sane  prsestitisset ;  sed  cum  boc  mihi  non  contigerit,  nec  mea  culpa 
factum  sit,  non  habeo  quod  me  accusem.  A.  Eecte  dicis.  Sed  frater  nos 
vocat  ad  ccenam.  T.  Intremus  igitur. 


/ 


READING  LESSONS.  271 

15. 

Carolus.  Eugenius. 

G.  Audi  amice!  E.  Quid  vis?  G.  Yisne  mecurn  ire  in  liortum  princi- 
pis  ?  E.  Quid  illic  aspectu  jucundum  videbimus  ?  G.  Varias  et  pulchras 
arbores,  herbarum  et  florum  miram  varietatein,  amcenissimas  ambulationes, 
fontes  salientes  plurimasque  statuas.  E.  Cceli  serenitas  nos  invltat,  et  tem- 
pns  vacat.  Paululum  modo  expecta,  dam  vestem  mutaverim.  Jam  para- 
tus  sum.  Num  hortus  longe  hinc  abest?  G.  Non  admodum  longe.  Nun- 
quamne  in  eo  fuisti?  E.  Nunquam.  C.  Ecce  porta!  Intremus!  E. 
Pr®i,  ego  sequar.  G.  Yidesne  ambulationem  pulcherrimam?  hie  ad  dex- 
tram  taxorum  duplicem  seriem  ?  E.  Et  bos  statu®,  quam  artificiose  sculpt® 
sunt ! 

Continued. 

E.  Ubi  autem  est  fons  saliens?  G.  Mox  videbis.  E.  Jam  video.  Yah, 
quam  alte  aquas  ejaculatur!  C.  IJic  xystus  est,  in  quo,  cum  pluit,  inainbu- 
lant,  lie  imbre  madescant.  E.  Queen  am  sunt  hoe  arbores,  in  cistis  ligneis 
posit®?  C.  Sunt  citri  et  ficus.  Ambulemus  paulisper  in  hoc  pomario.  E. 
O  locum  amoenissimum  !  quot  areol®,  pulcherrimis  floribus  cons-t® !  G. 
Illic  topiarii  filiolus  florum  fasciculum  colligit.  Ilium,  credo,  tibi  offeret. 
E.  Ego  vero  sorori  me®  feram.  Gratissimum  id  ipsi  futurum  scio.  G.  Sed 
munusculum  aliquod  puerulo  dandum  est.  E.  Sane!  ejusmodi  dona  gratis 
accipere  turpe  esset.  G.  Nullus  est  sensus,  qui  hie  non  aliqua  voluptate 
atfleiatur.  Qu®  col orum  vari etas !  qui  cantus  avium!  quam  grati  odores! 
Et  quid  mollius  liac  ipsa  aura,  qu®  salutari  spiritu  corpus  refrigerat  et  vires 
reficit.  Non  solum  corpus,  sed  etiam  animus  noster  exhilaratur  hujusmodi 
amoenitatibus.  E.  Yerum  est,  quod  dicis.  Sed  fructus  isti  me  coen®  com- 
monefaciunt.  Invitatus  sum  a  Sempronio.  G.  Redeamus  igitur. 

16. 

Gustavus.  Ferdinandus. 

G.  Audisne  ventum  veliementer  flantem?  F.  Audio.  G.  Nonne  melius 
nobiscum  ageretur,  si  omnis  ventus  et  tristis  ilia  hiems  a  terris  nostris  abes- 
set?  ZdNonestita;  ist®  res  valde  utiles  sunt.  G.  Cuinamrei?  F.  Yenti 
purgant  aerem  vaporibus  minus  salubribus  et  ne  pestiferis  impleatur  vapori- 
bus,  impediunt.  G.  Audio.  Sed  quid  hiems  prodest?  F.  Terr®  aliisque 
rebus  vires  reddit,  quas  per  ®statem  amiserunt.  Nonne  arbores,  si  perpetuo 
solis  calore  crescere  et  fructus  ferre  cogerentur,  brevi  tempore  interirent  ? 
G.  Unde  autem  fit,  ut  hieme  terra  gelu  concrescat  etflumina  glacie  induren- 
tur  ?  F.  Hiberno  tempore  radii  solis  obliquius  feruntur  ad  earn  terr®  par¬ 
tem,  ubi  hiems  est,  ideoque  longe  minorem  vim  habent  calefaciendi.  Hue 
accedit  quod  per  hiemem  noctes  longiores  sunt,  dies  autem  breviores. 

Continued. 

G.  Attamen  satius  foret,  si  perpetuo  vere  frueremur.  F.  Erras.  Yer 
perpetuum  tibi  et  mihi  omnibusque  tandem  t®dio  foret.  G.  Hoc  vix  credi- 


272 


HEADING  LESSONS. 


derim.  F.  Omnis  voluptas  rernm  varietate  nititur.  Ees  quamvis  pulober* 
rima  et  jucundissima  tandem  tgedio  fit,  si  ea  perpetno  utimur.  Cogita  quam 
suavis  sit  sanitas  corporis  iis,  qtii  gravi  morbo  iaborarimt,  et  quam  parvi 
sestimetur  ab  iis  qui  nun  quam  segrotarunt.  G.  Quid  autem  dicis  de  tonitri- 
bus?  Nonne  optandum  esset,  ut  nunquam  fulmina,  nun  quam  tonitrua  nos 
terrerent?  F.  Etiam  fulmina  et  tonitrua  sunt  necessaria;  terrain  enim  fer- 
tilioreiu  reddunt  noxiosque  vapores  consumunt.  Deus  etiam  ea  qua)  terri- 
bilia  nobis  videntur,  commodi  nostri  causa  fecit.  G.  Non  stulte  loqueris. 
Video  Deum  res  omnes  sapientissime  instituisse. 

17. 

Julius.  Augustus. 

J.  Quid  facis,  Auguste?  Cave  tibi,  obsecro.  A.  Quid  mibi  cavebo ?  J. 
Ne  in  morbum  incidas  tua  ipsius  culpa.  A.  Qua  ex  causa?  J.  Ex  nimia 
lusus  intemperantia.  A.  Unde  adparet  periculum?  J.  Quia  totus  testuas, 
totus  suclore  mades.  A.  Eecte  et  in  tempore  admones;  profecto  non  sen- 
tiebam.  J.  Desiste,  si  me  audis.  A.  Libentissime  tibi  morem  gero.  Quis 
enim  respuat  tarn  fidele  consilium  ?  J.  Deterge  faciem  et  vesti  te  celeriter, 
ne  subitum  frigus  contrabas.  Omnis  enim  subita  mutatio  periculosa  est. 
A.  Habeo  tibi  gratiam,  Juli,  ram  vere  morbis  sum  obnoxius.  J.  Tanto 
magis  debes  cave  re.  A.  Istud  probe  scio,  et  parens  uterque  me  monet  sib- 
pissime.  Sed  quid  again  ?  natura  proni  sumus  in  nostram  perniciem.  J.  O 
mi  Auguste!  non  est  voluptati  scrviendum,  sed  temperantia  valetudini  con- 
sulendum.  Jam  satis  bene  indutus  es.  Nunc  suadeo  ut  domum  redeas. 
A.  Yale,  suavissime  Juli,  monitor  amicissiine! 


READING  LESSONS. 


273 


NARRATIVES  AND  ANECDOTES. 

1. 

Sutor  quidara  corvmn  instituerat,  ut  Augustum  his  verbis  salutaret :  Aye, 
Caesar,  victor,  imperator!  Quoties  autem  corvus  hanc  salutationem  reeitare 
nolaerat,  sutor  indignabundus  dixerat :  Oleum  et  operam  perdidi.  Tandem 
avem  obtulit  Augusto.  Qui  cum  audiret  corvi  salutationem  :  Satis,  inquit, 
domi  salutatorum  talium  habeo.  Turn  corvus  addidit :  Oleum  et  operam 
perdidi.  Risit  Augustus,  emique  avem  jussit,  quanti  nullam  adhuc  emerat. 

2. 

Marcus  Piso,  orator  Romanus,  ne  interpellaretur,  servis  prseceperat,  ut  ad 
interrogata  tantum  responderent,  nee  quidquam  prseterea  dicerent.  Evenit 
ut  Clodium  qui  turn  magistratum  gerebat,  ad  coenam  invitari  juberet.  Hora 
coenoe  instabat ;  aderant  ceteri  conyivm  omnes ;  solus  expectabatur  Clodius. 
Piso  servum,  qui  convivas  vocare  solebat,  aliquoties  emisit  ut  videret,  num 
veniret.  Vesperascente  jam  ccelo,  quum  adventus  ejus  desperaretur,  Piso 
servo :  Die,  inquit,  num  forte  non  invitasti  Clodium  ? — Invitavi,  respondit 
ille. — Cur  ergo  nonvenit? — Quia  venturum  se  negavit.  Turn  Piso:  Cur 
id  non  statim  dixisti? — Quia  id  non  sum  abs  te  interrogate. 

3. 

Puer  quidam,  cui  interdictum  erat  ne  quid  cibi  inter  ccenandura  peteret, 
quum  se  prsetermissum  videret,  nonnihil  salis  posuit  in  orbe.  Interrogatus 
quare  id  faceret:  Hoc,  inquit,  sale  aspergam  carnem  quam  accepturus  sum. 

4. 

Quum  medious  celeberrimus  omnes  artis  sum  vias  ad  levandum  Frederici 
Seeundi,  Borussise  regis,  morti  jam  vicini,  morbum  frustra  teutasset,  atquo 
hie  vultu  indignanti  et  impatienti  ex  ipso  queesisset:  Tune  jam  multis  iter 
ad  inferos  maturasti?  ille,  qui  regem  breviter  et  acute  sibi  responderi  velle 
probe  intelligeret :  Non  tarn  multis,  quam  tu,  rex. — Atqueboc  ei  responsum 
non  displicuisse  vultu  turn  prodidisse  dicitur. 

5. 

Hugo  Grotius,  quum  esset  inimicorum  macliinis  in  custodiam  conjecfcus, 
identidem  arcam  librorum,  sibi  ab  uxore  missam  in  carcerem,  recepit.  Iloa 
libros  quum  perlegisset,  in  eadem  area  repositos  ad  uxorem  referri  jussit, 
quse  earn  novis  libris  onustam  ad  Grotium  remittere  solebat.  Tandem  uxor 
consilium  cepit,  hac  ratione  mariti  ex  custodia  liberandi.  Suasit  ei  ut  se 
ipsum  in  hac  area  componi  pateretur.  Obsequutus  est  Grotius,  et  custc- 
dum  diligentiam,  quippe  qui  libros  more  consueto  e  career©  efferri  puta* 
rent,  fefellit. 


274 


READING  LESSONS. 


6.  Demosthenes  cmd  the  judges. 

Demosthenes  causam  orans  qoum  judiees  parum  attentos  videret:  Paul* 
lisper,  inquit,  aures  mihi  prsebete;  rem  vohis  novam  et  jucundam  narrabo, 
Quum  aures  arrexissent :  Juvenis,  inquit,  quispiam  asinum  conduxerat,  quo 
Athenis  Megaram  profecturus  uteretur.  Iu  itinere  quum  sol  ureret,  neque 
esset  umbraculum,  deposuit  ciitellas  et  sub  asino  consedit,  cujus  umbra 
tegeretur.  Id  vero  agaso  vetabat,  clamans,  asinum  locatum  esse,  non  um- 
bram  asini.  Alter  quum  contra  contenderet,  tandem  in  jus  ambulant. 
Ilsec  locutus  Demosthenes,  ubi  honlines  arrectis  auribus  auscultantes  vidit, 
abiit.  Turn  relocates  a  judicibus  rogatusque  ut  reliquam  fabulam  enarraret: 
Quid,  inquit,  de  asini  umbra  libet  audire  ?  causam  hominis  de  vita  pericli- 
tantis  non  audietis? 

7.  The  silly  critic. 

Sunt  qui  vel  mundi  opificem  sapientissimum  reprehendere  audeant.  Quum 
quidam  cucurbitam  grandiorem  tenuiin  caule  humi  jacentem  videret :  Hem  I 
inquit,  non  in  caule  tenui,  sed  in  alta  quercu  ego  earn  suspendissem.  Abire 
deinde,  et  sub  quercu  aliqua  obdormiscere.  Qui  quum  dormiret,  ventus 
glandes  innumeras  a  quercu  decutere,  quarum  aliqua  nasum  hominis  vehe- 
mentius  tetigit.  Expergefactus  ille  quum  sanguinem  e  naso  profluentem 
cerneret :  Quid,  inquit,  si  hmc  cucurbita  fuisset,  vix  equidem  viverem 
amplius.  Deum  profecto  sentio  sapientissime  atque  optime  mundum  dis- 
posuisse. 

8.  Remarkable  sayings. 

Thales  interrogates,  hominumne  facta  Deum  fallerent,  ne  cogitata  quidemy 
respondit. — Idem  rogatus  quid  maxime  commune  esset  hominibus,  Sq)es,  re- 
spondit ;  hanc  enim  illi  quoque  habent  qui  nihil  hdbent  aliud. — Socrates  in 
pompa  quum  magna  vis  auri  argentique  ferretur :  Quam  multa  non  desidero , 
inquit. — Epictetus  interrogatus  quis  esset  dives?  Oui,  inquit,  satis  est ,  quod 
habet. — Rutilius  Rufus,  homo  justissimus,  quum  amici  cujusdam  injustis 
precibus  resisteret  isque  indignabundus  dixisset :  Quid  ergo  amicitia  tua 
mihi  prodest,  si  quod  rogo,  non  facis?  Immo ,  inquit,  quid  mihi  tua ,  si 
propter  te  aliquid  inhoneste  facturus  sum  f 

9.  The  boaster  put  to  the  trial. 

Homo  quidam  reversus  in  patriam,  unde  aliquot  abfuerat  annos,  ubique 
gloriabatur  jactabatque  prasclara  sua  facinora.  Inter  alia  narrabat  in  insula 
Rhodo  saliendo  se  vicisse  optimos  in  hac  exercitatione  artifices.  Ostendebat 
etiam  spatii  longitudinem,  quam  prseter  se  nemo  potuisset  saltu  superaro, 
cujus  saltus  testes  se  habere  universos  Rhodios  dicebat.  Turn  unus  ex  ad- 
st antibus  :  Ileus  tu,  inquit,  si  vera  narras,  nihil  opus  est  istis  testibus.  Hio 
Rhodum  esse  puta,  hie  salta. 


10.  Funny  stories. 

Geminorum  frater  alter  mortuus  erat.  Quidam  igitur  obvius  vivo  :  Time, 
inquit,  mortuus  es  an  frater  tuns  ? 

Yir  qui!  am  nob  ilia  in  littore  maris  ambulabat.  Occurrit  liomo  importu- 


READING  LESSONS. 


275 


mis  ejusque  latus  percutiens:  Non  ego,  in  quit,  cuilibet  fatuo  decedere  soleo. 
At  ego  soleo,  inquit  alter  et  decessit. 

Vir  quidam  verberibus  castigavit  servum  maxime  ob  pigritiam.  Cur  me 
percutis,  liic  clamare  coepit,  nihil  enim  feci.  Atqui  propter  hoc  ipsum,  re¬ 
sponds  herus,  te  percutio,  quod  nihil  fecisti. 

11. 

Quidam  flumen  trajecturus,  equo  insidens  navem  conscendit.  Quum  quis 
causam  percontaretur :  Festino,  inquit. 

Homo  quidam  stolidus  audiverat  corvos  arnplius  ducentos  annos  vivere. 
Hoc  igitur,  verumne  esset,  exploraturus,  pullum  corvinum  in  cavea  inclusum 
alere  coepit. 

Puer  quidam  passeres  in  arbore  conspicatus,  clanculum  subrepsit  et  linteo 
substrato  arborem  quassavit,  passeres  excepturus. 

12. 

Ag&so  quidam,  quum  asinis  suis  identidem  numeratis  sensisset  unum  nu- 
mero  abesse,  iratus  accusare  vicinos  furti  coepit,  oblitus,  se  illi  asino  insidere, 
quern  amissum  arbitrabatur. 

Stolidus  stolido  obviam  factus :  Audivi,  inquit,  te  mortuum  esse. — At  me 
vivum  adhuc  et  spirantem  vides,  respondit  alter.  Verum,  inquit  ille;  sed 
qui  mihi  hoc  dixit,  te  fide  dignior  est. 

Hominem  jocosum  stolidus  quidam  interrogavit :  Cur,  quseso,  inquit,  sol 
qui  occidentem  versus  occidere  solet,  semper  tamen  ab  oriente  resurgit? 
Respondit  alter,  solem  eadem  semper  via  recurrere  post  occasum,  sed  cerni 
non  posse  redeuntem,  obstante  scilicet  noctis  caligine. 

13. 

Grsecus  quidam  Augusto  e  Palatio  descendenti,  honorificum  aliquod  epi- 
gramma  porrigere  solebat  spe  prsemii.  Id  quum  saepe  frustra  fecisset,  Au¬ 
gustus  eum  deterriturus  breve  epigramma  sua  manu  exaratum  Graeculo  ad- 
venienti  obviam  misit.  Ille,  dum  legeret,  laudabat,  et  turn  voce,  turn  vultu 
gestuque  mirabatur.  Deinde  ad  sellam  accessit  qua  Caesar  ferebatur,  pau- 
cosque  ex  crumena  denarios  protraxit,  quos  Caesari  daret,  dixitque,  se  plus 
daturum  fuisse,  si  plus  habuisset.  Omnes  risere ;  Caesar  autem  dispensato- 
rem  vocari  et  Graeco  satis  magnam  pecuniae  summam  numerari  jussit. 

14. 

Lysimachus  inter  duces  Alexandri  illustri  genere,  sed  longe  magis  virtute 
quam  genere  clarus  erat.  Cum  Alexander  Callisthenem  pliilosophum  mise- 
randum  in  modum  omnibus  membris  truncasset  et  msuper  cum  cane  in 
cavea  inclusum  circumferri  jussisset,  Lysimachus,  qui  philosophum  audire 
atque  ex  ejus  ore  virtutis  et  sapientiae  prsecepta  percipere  solltus  erat,  vene- 
num  ei  dedit  remedium  calamitatum.  Quod  adeo  aegre  tulit  Alexander,  ut 
Lysimachum  leoni  objici  juborot.  Sed  quum  leo  impetum  fecisset  in  eum, 


276 


BEADING  LESSONS. 


Lysimachus  manum  araiculo  involutam  in  os  leonis  immersit  arreptaqne 
lingua  feram  exaniinavit.  Quod  quum  nuntiatum  regi  esset,  admiratio  irsa 
successit,  carioremque  Lysimachum  babuit  propter  tantam  constantiam. 

15. 

Ad  P.  Scipionem  Africanum  visendum,  cum  in  villa  prope  Liternum 
versaretur,  plures  prsedonum  duces  eodem  tempore  forte  convenerant. 
Quos  cum  Scipio  ad  vim  faciendam  venisse  putaret,  prsesidia  domesticorum 
disposuit  omnique  modo  domum  defendere  statuit.  Praedones,  hoc  viso, 
arm  a  statim  abjecerunt  januaeque  appropinquantes  clara  voce  exclamarunt 
se  non  vitae  ejus  hostcs,  sed  virtutis  admiratores  venisse ;  conspectum  et 
congressum  tanti  viri  quasi  coeleste  aliquod  beneficimn  se  expetere :  proinde 
securus  spectandum  se  praeberet.  Turn  Scipio  januas  reserari  ac  praedones 
intromitti  jussit.  Qui  quum  januam  tamquam  aram  aliquam  aut  delubrum 
venerati  essent,  cupide  Scipionis  dextram  comprehenderunt  atque  osculati 
sunt.  Mox  positis  ante  vestibulum  donis,  quae  deorum  numini  consecrari 
solebant,  Iteti,  quod  Scipionem  videre  contigisset,  ad  nave3  suas  recesserunfc. 
Tanta  bujus  viri  admiratio  etiam  apud  abjectissimos  fuit  homines. 

16. 

Antisthenes  discipulos  hortabatur  ut  sedulo  operam  darent  sapientiae. 
Pauci  obtemperabant.  Itaque  indignatus  dimisit  omnes.  Inter  hos  Dio¬ 
genes  erat.  Qui  quum  magna  discendi  cupiditate  incensus  ad  Antisthenem 
ventitare  pergeret  nec  discedere  vellet,  Antisthenes  tandem  minatus  est  se 
caput  ejus  percussurum  esse  baculo  quern  manu  gestare  solebat.  Non  re- 
cessit  Diogenes,  sed  animo  obstinato :  Percute,  inquit,  si  ita  placet.  Ego 
tibi  caput  praebebo,  neque  tam  durum  fustem  invenies,  quo  me  a  tuis  dispu- 
tationibus  abigas.  Antisthenes  tarn  cupidum  doctrinae  discipulum  admisit 
eumque  maxime  adamavit. 

17. 

Athenis  olim  fuit  vir  quidam,  nomine  Timon,  qui  in  universum  hominum 
genus  odium  conceperat.  Is  aliquando  prodiit  in  concionem.  Quod  cum 
praster  consuetudinem  faceret,  magna  omnium  expectatio  fuit,  quidnam 
afferret.  Turn  ille  e  suggestu,  in  quern  ascend  erat :  Athenienses,  inquit,  est 
mihi  ficus  quaedam,  e  qua  jam  multi  sponte  se  suspenderunt.  Quoniam 
autem  in  area  ilia  aedes  exstructurus  sum,  priusquam  ficum  caedo,  monere 
vos  volui,  ut  si  quis  de  suspendio  cogitet,  quam  maxime  properet. 

18. 

Fuerunt  olim  duo  pictore3  celeberrimi,  quorum  alter  Zeuxis,  Parrhasius 
alter  appellatus  est.  Hi  aliquando  de  arte  certabant.  Zeuxis  uvas  pinxerat 
atque  sic  erat  iinitatus  naturae  veritatem,  ut  aves  ad  tabu! am  advolarcnt, 
quasi  verae  essent  uvae.  Turn  Parrhasius  tabulam  attulit,  in  qua  linteum 
pinxerat.  Zeuxis  decQptus  pictum  linteum  verum  habuit,  sub  quo  pictura 


READING  LESSONS. 


277 


occultaretur.  Qiram  igitur  diutius  morari  videretur  Parrliasins,  Zeuxis 
flagitabat  ut  tandem  linteum  removeret  ostenderetque  picturam.  Turn  vero 
quum  intellexisset  errorem,  palmam  Parrhasio  detulit  ingenuo  pudore,  quo- 
niam  ipse  aves  fefellisset,  Parrliasins  autem  ipsum  artificem. 

19. 

Diogenes  interroganti  cuidam,  quanam  ratione  posset  optime  ulcisci 
inimicum  :  Si  te  ipsum,  in  quit,  probum  et  honestum  virum  prsestiteris. — 
Cum  Grseci,  qui  Asiam  incolebant,  Persarum  regem  ex  more  Magnum  ap- 
pellarent,  Agesilaus:  Num,  inquit,  ille  me  major  est,  si  non  est  justior  et 
temperantior  ? — P.  Scipio  dicere  solebat,  nunquam  se  minus  otiosnm  esse, 
quam  quum  otiosus,  nec  minus  solum,  quam  quum  solus  esset.  Magnifica 
vero  vox  et  magno  viro  ac  sapiente  digna! — Solon,  Atbeniensium  legislator, 
cum  interrogaretur,  cur  nullum  supplicium  constituisset  in  eum  qui  paren- 
tem  necasset:  Quia  neminem,  inquit,  hoc  facturum  esse  puto. — Diogenes 
lucernam  accensam  circumferens  clarissima  luce  in  foro  ambulabat,  quse- 
renti  similis.  Rogantibus  quid  ageret  ?  Hominem,  inquit,  quasro. 

20. 

Marcus  Cato  puer  in  domo  avunculi  sui,  Drusi,  tribuni  plebis,  educabatur. 
Apud  quern  cum  socii  de  civitate  impetranda  convenissent,  et  Quintus  Pop- 
pedius,  Marsorum  princeps,  eum  rogaret  ut  socios  apud  avunculum  adjuva- 
ret,  constanti  vultu  respondit,  non  facturum  se.  Iterum  cleinde  et  saepins 
l'ogatus,  in  proposito  perstitit.  Tunc  Poppedius  puero  in  altissimam  aedium 
partem  sublato  minatus  est,  se  eum  inde  dejecturum,  nisi  precibus  obtem- 
peraret.  Sed  Cato  ne  hac  quidem  re  ab  in  cep  to  depelli  potuit.  Ita  Poppe- 
dio  vox  ilia  expressa  est:  Gratulemur  nobis,  socii,  hunc  esse  tarn  parvum : 
quo  senatore  ne  sperare  quidem  civitatem  liceret.  Sic  ea  constantia,  quam 
postea  per  totam  vitam  ostendit,  jam  in  puero  Catone  apparuit. 


278 


READING  LESSONS. 


FABLES. 

a 

1. 

Vulpes,  extrema  fame  coacta,  uvam  appetebat,  ex  alta  vite  dependentem. 
Quam  qimm  summis  viribus  saliens  attingere  non  posset,  tandem  discedens : 
Nondum  matura  est,  inquit;  nolo  acerbam  sumere. — Sic  saepe  homines, 
quae  facere  non  possunt,  verbis  elevant. 


2. 

Asinus  segrotabat  famaque  exierat  eum  cito  esse  moriturum.  Cum  igitur 
lupi  canesque  venissent  ad  eum  visendum,  quaererentque  ex  filio,  quomodo 
pater  ejus  se  baberet,  ille  per  ostii  rimulam  respondit:  Melius  quam  velletis. 


3. 

Opiliones  aliquot,  caesa  atque  assata  ove,  convivium  agebant.  Quod  quum 
lupus,  qui  praedandi  causa  forte  stabula  circumibat,  videret,  ad  opiliones 
conversus :  Quos  clamores,  inquit,  et  quantos  tumultus  vos  contra  me  exci- 
taretis,  si  ego  facerem,  quod  vos  facitis?  Turn  unus  ex  iis:  Hoc  interest, 
inquit :  nos  quae  nostra  sunt  comedimus ;  tu  vero  alien  a  furaris. 

4. 

Rapuerat  caseum  corvus  atque,  ut  comederet  ilium,  in  celsa  arbore  con- 
sedit.  Quo  conspecto,  vulpes  avida  casei,  accurrit  eumque  blande  astuteque 
aggreditur :  O  corve,  inquit,  quam  pulchra  es  avis,  quam  speciosa!  Te  de- 
cuit  esse  avium  regem.  Sane  omnes  aves  regiis  virtutibus  antecedere's,  si 
vocem  liaberes.  His  corvus  laudibus  inflatus,  ut  vocem  ostenderet,  clamo- 
rem  edidit,  sed  simul,  aperto  rostro,  caseum  amisit.  Ilunc  vulpes  statim 
arripuit  atque  irridens  dixit :  Ileus,  corve !  Nihil  tibi  deest  praeter  mentem. 


5. 

Formica  sitiens  quum  ad  fontem  descendisset  ut  biberet,  iu  aquam  cecidit 
nee  multum  abfuit  quin  misera  periret.  Columba  quaedam,  in  arbore  se- 
dens,  misericordia  tacta,  ramulum  in  aquam  injecit.  Hunc  assecuta  est  for¬ 
mica  eique  innatans  mortem  etfugit.  Paulo  post  adfuit  auceps,  qui  colum- 
bae  insidiabatur.  Formica,  ut  piae  columbae  opein  ferret,  ad  aucupem  arrep- 
sit  et  tarn  vehementer  eum  momordit  ut  arundines  prae  dolore  abjiceret. 
Columba,  strepitu  arundinum  territa,  avolavit  ac  periculum  incolumis  evasit. 
— Juva  et  juvabere ;  raro  beneflcium  perit. 


READING  LESSONS. 


279 


6. 

Vulpes,  asinus  et  leo  venatum  iverant.  AmpU  prseda  facta,  lco  asinum 
illam  partiri  jnbet.  Qui  quum  singulis  singulas  partes  poneret  sequales,  leo 
eum  correptum  dilaniavit  et  vulpi  negotium  partiendi  tribuit.  Ilia  astutior 
leoni  maximam  partem  apposuit,  sibi  vix  minimam  reservans  particulam. 
Turn  leo  subrTdens  ejus  prudentiam  laudare  et,  unde  boo  didicerit,  interro- 
gare  ccepit.  Et  vulpes:  Iiujus  me,  inquit,  calamitas  docuit,  quid  minores 
potentioribus  debeant. 


7. 

Leo  annis  confectus  inorbum  finxit.  Ut  eum  viserent,  plures  bestise  ad 
asgrotum  regem  venerunt,  quas  ille  protinus  devoravit.  Sed  cauta  vulpes 
prooul  ante  speluncam  stab  at,  regem  salutans.  Leo  rogavit,  cur  non  intra- 
ret?  Quia,  inquit,  multa  intrantium  vestigia  video,  sed  nulla  exeuntium. 

8. 

Asinus  sale  onustus  fluvium  transiit  et  titubans  in  aquam  decidit.  Quum 
surgeret,  onus  non  nihil  levatum  esse  sensit;  sal  enim  in  aqua  delicuerat. 
Qua  re  gavisus,  quum  postea  spongiis  onustus  ad  fluvium  accederet,  spera- 
vit,  si  rursus  collaberetur,  fore  ut  onus  fieret  levius.  Quare  de  industria 
lapsus  est.  Spongiis  autem  madefactis  exsurgere  nequivit  ideoque  oneri 
succumbens  misere  in  aqua  periit. 


9. 

Serpens  ingenti  saxo  oppressus  rogavit  virum  iliac  iter  facientem,  ut  a  se 
onus  amoliretur,  pollicitus,  se  illi  ingentem  thesaurum  daturum  esse  si  hoc 
faceret.  Quod  cum  vir  iste  fecisset,  non  modo  promissa  non  solvit,  sed 
hominem  occidere  conatus  est.  Dum  contendunt,  accidit  ut  vulpes  transi- 
ret.  Quae  arbitra  electa :  Non  possum,  inquit,  tantas  lites  componere,  nisi 
videro  prius,  quomodo  serpens  saxo  oppressus  fuerit.  Cum  igitur  vir  ser¬ 
pent!  saxum  iterum  imposuisset,  vulpes  astuta:  Ingratum  animal,  inquit, 
sub  saxo  relinquendum  esse  censeo. 


10. 

Lupus  et  agnus,  siti  compulsi,  ad  eundem  rivum  venerant.  Superior 
lupus,  longe  inferior  agnus  stabat.  Tunc  improbus  latro  jurgii  causam  quse- 
rens:  Cur,  inquit,  aquam  milii  bibenti  turbulentam  fecisti?  Agnus  porter- 
ritus:  Quomodo,  inquit,  hoc  facere  possum  ;  aqua  a  te  ad  me  decurrit.  Lu¬ 
pus,  veritate  rei  repulsus:  Sex  menses  abhinc,  inquit,  mihi  maledixisti.  Illo 
tempore,  respondit  agnus,  equidem  nondum  natus  eram.  Hercle  igitur,  in¬ 
quit  lupus,  pater  tuus  de  me  male  locutus  est,  atque  ita  correptum  agnuin 
dilaniat. 


280 


READING  LESSONS. 


11. 

Oervus  cum  vehem  enter  sitiret,  ad  fontem  accessit,  suaque  in  aquis  im¬ 
agine  conspecta,  cornuum  magnitndinem  et  varietatem  landabat,  crura  vera 
ut  graoilia  et  exilia  vituperabat.  Haec  cogitanti  supervenit  leo.  Quo  viso 
in  fugam  se  conjicit  cervus  et  leoni  longe  prsecurrit.  Quamdiu  in  planitie 
erat,  nullum  ei  ab  hoste  imminebat  periculum.  Ubi  vero  ad  nemus  venit 
opacum,  inter  dumeta  cornibus  adhssrescens,  quum  celeritate  pedum  uti  non 
posset,  captus  et  dilaniatus  est.  Turn  moriturus:  O  me  desipientem,  inquit, 
cui  ea  displicerent,  quae  me  servarunt,  placerent  autem,  qua)  me  perdide- 
runt! 

12. 

Senex  quidam  ligna  in  silva  ceciderat  et,  fasce  in  hnmeros  sublato,  do- 
mum  redire  coepit.  Quum  autem  defatigatus  esset  et  onere  et  itinere,  de- 
posuit  ligna,  et  senectutis  inopiaeque  miserias  secum  reputans,  clara  voce  in- 
vocavit  mortem  ut  se  ab  omnibus  malis  liberaret.  Mox  adfuit  mors  quid 
vellet  interrogans.  Tunc  senex  p enter ritus  :  Nihil  volo,  inquit,  nisi  ut  liunc 
fascem  lignorum  humeris  meis  imponas. 

13. 

Duo  amici  iter  una  faciunt.  Occurrit  in  itinere  ursus,  quo  conspecto  alter 
eorum  illico  arborem  conscendit  sicque  periculum  evltat ;  alter  vero,  quum 
meminisset,  bestiam  illam  cadavera  non  attingere,  humi  se  prosternit  ani- 
mamque  continet,  se  mortuum  esse  simulans.  Accedit  ursus,  contrectat 
jacentem,  os  suum  ad  hominis  os  auresque  admovet  atque,  cadaver  esse 
ratus,  discedit.  Quum  postea  socius  qusereret,  quidnam  ei  ursus  dixisset  in 
aurem,  respondit:  Monuit  ne  amicum  esse  milii  unquam  persuaderem,  cujus 
fidem  adverso  tempore  non  fuissem  expertus. 

14. 

Mures,  in  pariete  cavo  commorantes,  diu  contemplabantur  felem,  quae 
capite  demisso  et  tristi  vultu  placide  recumbebat.  Tunc  unus  ex  iis :  Hoc 
animal,  inquit,  admodum  benignura  et  mite  videtur  esse.  Quid,  si  alloquar 
et  familiaritatem  cum  illo  contraham  ?  Quae  cum  dixisset  et  propius  acces- 
sisset,  a  fele  captus  et  dilaceratus  est. 

15. 

Sturnum,  qui  ex  urbe  aufugerat,  cuculus  interrogavit :  Quid  dicunt  ho¬ 
mines  de  cantu  nostro?  quid  de  luscinia?  Sturnus:  Maximopere,  inquit, 
omnes  cantum  ejus  laudant.  Quid  de  alauda?  Permulti,  respondit  sturnus, 
hujus  quoque  cantum  laudibus  extollunt.  Et  quid  de  coturnlce  dicunt? 
Non  desunt,  qui  voce  ejus  delectentur.  Quid  tandem,  rogat  cuculus,  de  me 
judicant?  Hoc,  inquit  sturnus,  dicere  nequeo;  nusquam  enim  tui  fit  men- 
ro.  Iratus  igitur  cuculus :  Ne  inultus,  inquit,  vivam,  semper  dq  me  ipse 
oquar. 


READING  LESSONS. 


281 


16. 

Cani  perpingui  occurrit  forte  lnpns  macie  confectus.  Quum  inter  se  salu- 
fcassent,  lupus:  Uncle,  in  quit,  sic  nites?  aut  quo  cibo  tam  pinguis  factus  es? 
Ego,  qui  longe  fortior  sum,  fame  pereo.  Oanis  respondit:  Eadem  tibi  erit 
fortuna,  si  domino  par  offieium  prsestabis.  Quodnam?  inquit  ille.  Gustos 
ut  sis  liminis  et  noctu  domum  a  furibus  tuearis.  Turn  lupus:  Ego  vero,  in¬ 
quit,  paratus  sum ;  nunc  enim  patior  frigora  et  imbres,  in  silvis  oberrans. 
Quanto  facilius  est  sub  tecto  vivere  et  largo  satiari  cibo! — Yeni  ergo  me- 
cum. — Dum  procedunt,  aspicit  lupus  collum  canis  catena  detritum.  Unde 
lioc,  amice?  Nihil  est. — Die,  quaeso  ! — Quia  acer  sum,  me  interdiu  alligant, 
u t  quiescam  et  noctu  alacrior  sim.  Vesperi  me  solvunt.  Tunc  vagor  ubi 
lubet.  Ultro  mihi  afferunt  panem,  de  mensa  sua  dat  ossa  dominus,  frusta 
dat  familia. — Age  vero,  si  quo  abire  vis,  estne  tibi  abeundi  licentia? — Non 
semper. — Yale,  respondit  ille,  et  fruere  ista  felicitate  tua,  quam  mihi  laudas. 
Equidem  regnare  nolo,  si  libertate  carendum  est. 

IT. 

Cosdebat  quidam  ligna  juxta  fluvium.  Laboranti  excidit  secilris  et  in 
flumine  demersa  est.  Turn  ille,  inops  consilii,  in  ripa  assidens,  deflere  for*' 
tunam  suam  et  misere  lamentari  coepit.  Mercurius  autem,  cum  querelas* 
illius  cognovisset,  hominis  miseritus,  ex  aqua  emersus,  ei  retulit  secQrim, 
non  earn  quidem,  quam  amiserat,  sed  auream,  hominemque  interrogavit, 
hceccine  esset,  quam  perdidisset.  Cum  suam  illam  esse  negaret,  Mercurius 
alteram  argenteam  extulit ;  sed  quum  ne  hanc  quidem  agnosceret  lignator, 
ferream  postremo  protulit,  quam  Ice tus  homo  suam  esse  dixit.  Qua  probi- 
tate  delectatus  deus,  omnes  secures  homini  donat. 

18. 

Ranee  olim  regem  a  Jove  petivisse  dicuntur.  Quarum  ille  precibus  com* 
motus  trabem  ingentem  in  lacum  dejecit.  Ranse  sonitu  perterritaa  primum 
refugerunt,  deinde  vero,  trabem  in  aqua  natantem  conspicatce  magno  cum 
contemptu  in  ea  consederunt  aliumque  regem  novis  clamoribus  expetive- 
runt.  Turn  Jupiter,  ut  ranarum  stultiam  puniret,  hydrum  illis  misit,  a  quo 
plurimce  captse  misere  perierunt.  Turn  sero  stolidarum  precum  ranas  pceni- 
tuit. 

19. 

Circum  leonem  dormientem  lascive  discurrebant  musculi,  quorum  unus 
in  dorsum  ejus  insiluit.  Captus  autem  a  leone  experrecto  excusavit  impru- 
dentiam  gratiasque  se  ei  liabiturum  esse  pollicitus  est,  si  vitco  parceret. 
Leo,  etsi  erat  ira  commotus,  ignovit  tamen  musculo  precanti,  et  tam  con- 
temtam  bestiolam  dimisit  incolumem.  Paulo  post  incautius  preedam  vestT- 
gans  leo  in  laqueos  incldit,  quibus  adstrictus  rugltum  maximum  edidit. 
Accurrit  musculus,  cernensque  vinculis  detentum,  qui  sibi  dudum  vitam 


BEADING  LESSONS. 


potenti  concesserat,  arrepsit  ad  laqueos  eosque  corrosit.  Hoc  modo  quum 
leonem  periculo  liberasset :  Tibi,  inquit,  ludibrio  eram,  quasi  nullum  vicissim 
beneficium  praastare  possem ;  nunc  scias,  etiam  murem  gratias  referre  posse. 


20. 

Lupus  moribundus  vitam  ante  actam  perpenclebat.  Malus  quidem  fui,  in- 
quit,  neque  tamen  pessimus.  Multa  male  feci,  fateor,  sed  multum  etiam 
boni  perpetravi.  Agnus  aliquando  balans,  qui  a  grege  aberraverat,  jam 
prope  ad  me  accesserat,  ut  facile  devorare  possem ;  sed  parcebam  illi.  Eo- 
dem  tempore  convicia  ab  ove  quadam  in  me  jactata  Eequissimo  ferebam 
animo,  licet  a  canibus  nihil  milii  metuendum  esset. — Atque  base  omnia  ego 
testari  possum,  in  quit  •wipes.  Probe  enim  rem  memini.  Nimirum  turn 
temporis  accidit,  cum  os  illud  devoratum  in  faucibus  tuis  heereret,  ad  quod 
extrahendum  gruis  opem  implorare  cogebaris. 


21. 

Societatem  inierunt  leo,  capra  et  ovis.  Praada  autem,  quam  ceperant,  in 
quatuor  partes  diyisa,  leo :  Prima,  inquit,  mea  est,  quia  sum  leo,  yobis  longe 
praastantior.  Tollam  etiam  secundam,  quam  meretur  robur  meum.  Tertia 
debetur  egregio  labori  meo.  Quartam  qui  tangere  voluerit,  is  sciat  mecum 
sibi  negotium  futurum  esse.  Sic  improbus  totam  praadam  solus  abstulit. 

22. 

Mendax  et  yerax  simul  iter  facientes  forte  in  simiorum  terram  venerant. 
Quos  quum  unus  e  turba,  qui  se  regem  simiorum  fecerat,  yidisset,  teneri  eos 
jussit,  ut  audiret,  quid  de  se  homines  dicerent.  Simul  jubet  omnes  adstare 
simios  longo  ordine  dextra  lEovaque,  sed  sibi  poni  thronum,  ut  hominum 
reges  quondam  facere  viderat.  Turn  homines  in  medium  adduetos  rogat : 
Qualisnam  vobis  esse  yideor,  hospites?  Respondit  mendax:  Rex  videris 
esse  maximus.  Quid  hi,  quos  mihi  vides  astantes?  Hi  comites  tui  sunt,  hi 
logati  et  militum  duces.  Simius,  mendacio  laudatus,  munus  dari  adulatori 
jubet.  Turn  ad  veracem  simius:  Et  qualis  tibi  esse  videor?  et  quales  illi, 
qui  mecum  sunt?  Yir  verax:  Verus,  inquit,  tu  es  simius,  et  simii  omnes 
illi,  qui  tui  similes  sunt.  Turn  rex  iratus  dentibus  et  unguibus  eum  dilace  - 
rari  jussit. 

23. 

Ferunt  quodam  in  conventu  bestiarum  tarn  belle  saltasse  simium,  ut  om¬ 
nium  sententia  rex  crearetur.  Hunc  vulpes  superbientem  videns,  dixit 
simio,  quum  regnum  ipsi  obtigisset,  se  non  amplius  celare  yelle,  quaa  magno- 
pere,  ut  rescisceret,  regis  interesset.  Quid  id  esset,  simio  interroganti,  the- 
saurum  respondit  sibi  a  patre  suo  esse  indicatum,  defossum  in  solitudine, 
qui  jam  optimo  jure  regis  esset.  Eamus  igitur,  inquit  simius,  ut  effodiamus. 
— Cave  tibi,  in  quit  vulpes,  nam  ego  smpe  audiyi,  lianc  rem  periculo  non 
carere.--— Nihil,  inquit  simius,  periculi  est;  an  tu,  obsecra,  times?  Eamus 


READING  LESSONS. 


283 


modo,  in  quit  vulpes.  Din  ambo  in  silvis  vagantnr.  Tandem  venerunt  ad 
laqneos  sub  frutioibus  ad  capiendas  bestias  absconditos.  Turn  vulpes  :  Hie, 
inquit,  thesaurus  obrutus  est.  Simius  festlnans  neque  ullo  modo  sibi  cavens 
statim  capitur  ac  laqueis  implicitus  vulpem  suppliciter  orat,  ut  sibi  succur* 
rat.  Hose  vero:  Regem,  inquit,  attingere  non  audeo;  ceteroquin  ars  sal 
tandi  regnum  non  merebatur, 

24. 

Eusticus  moriturus,  cum  relinquere  filiis  suis  divitias  non  posset,  animos 
illorum  ad  stadium  diligentis  agrorum  cultures  et  ad  laboris  assiduitatem 
excitare  voluit.  Arcessit  igitur  illos  ad  se  atque  ita  alloquitur :  Filii  mei, 
quo  modo  res  mess  se  babeant,  videtis ;  quidquid  autem  per  omnem  vitam 
reservavi,  boo  in  vinea  nostra  qussrere  poteritis.  Hsec  cum  dixisset,  paulo 
post  moritur  sen  ex.  Filii  in  vinea  patrem  alicubi  thesaurum  abscondisse 
arbitrantes,  arreptis  ligonibus  universum  viness  solum  effodiunt.  Thesaurum 
quidem  nudum  inveniunt,  terrain  vero  fodiendo  adeo  fertilem  reddiderunt, 
ut  vites  uberrimum  fructum  ferrent. 

25. 

Agitata  vulpes  a  canibus,  longo  spatio  confecto,  devenit  tandem  ad  casu- 
lam,  ante  quam  lignator  findebat  stipitem  quernum.  Ad  eum  supplex  con- 
fugit,  orans,  ut  sibi  latebras  aliquas  demonstraret,  in  quibus,  dum  venatores 
prssteriissent,  occultaretur.  File,  misericordia  motus,  suam  casulam  jubet 
subire.  Postea  recordatus  animantem  illam  esse  nocentem,  nec  tamen 
manifeste  prodere  supplicem  ausus,  venatoribus  vulpem  persequentibus  et, 
num  vulpem  vidisset,  percent  antibus,  verbis  quidem  se  vidisse  negabat,  sed 
manu  oculisque  casulam  suam  indicabat.  Sed  venatores,  non  animadverso 
indicio,  celeriter  discedunt.  Vulpes,  quss  omnia  audierat  et  viderat,  non 
ita  multo  post  de  casula  progressa,  insalutato  lignatore  abiit.  Quod  quum 
ille  asgre  ferret  et  cum  vulpe  expostularet,  astutum  animal:  Libenter,  inquit, 
tibi  gratias  agerem,  si  cum  oratione  tua  manus  et  oculi  non  discrepassent* 
Unguam  tuam  laudo,  sed  manus  tibi  prcecisas  et  oculos  effossos  velim. 


984 


READING  LESSONS. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  CICERO. 

1. 

Cum  rex  Pyrrhus  populo  Romano  helium  ultro  intulisset,  cumque  de  im 
perio  certamen  esset  cum  rege  generoso  ac  potente,  perfuga  ab  eo  venit  in 
castra  Fabricii,  eique  est  pollicitus,  si  premium  sibi  proposuisset,  se,  ut  clam 
venisset,  sic  clam  in  Pyrrhi  castra  rediturum  et  eum  veneno  necaturum. 
Hunc  Fabricius  redueendum  curavit  ad  Pyrrhum  ;  idque  factum  ejus  a  sen- 
atu  laudatum  est.  {De  Office.  III.  22.) 

2. 

Laudabo  sapientem  ilium,  Biantem,  ut  opinor,  qui  numeratur  in  septem  ; 
cujus  cum  patriam  Prienen  cepisset  hostis,  ceterique  ita  fugerent,  ut  multa 
de  suis  rebus  secum  asportarent,  cum  esset  admonitus  a  quodam,  ut  idem 
ipse  faceret :  Ego  vero,  inquit,  facio  ;  nam  omnia  mea  porto  mecurn  {Farad. 
I.  1.) 

3. 

Socrates  quum  esset  ex  eo  queesitum,  Af chelaum  Perdiccse  filium,  regem 
Macedonum,  qui  turn  fortunatissimus  haberetur,  nonne  beatum  putaret. 
Baud  scio,  inquit,  nunquarn  enim  cum  eo  collocutus  sum.  Ain’  tu  ?  an 
aiiter  id  scire  non  potes  ? — Nullo  modo. — Tu  igitur  ne  de  Persarum  quidem 
rege  magno  dicere  potes,  beatusne  sit? — An  ego  possim,  inquit,  quum  igno- 
rem  q-uam  doctus  sit,  quam  vir  bonus  ? — Quid  ?  tu  in  eo  sitam  esse  vitam 
beatam  putas  ? — Ita  prorsus  existimo  :  bonos  beatos,  improbos  miseros. — 
Miser  ergo  Archelaus? — Certe,  si  injustus.  {Tuscul.  Quccst.  Y.  12.) 

4. 

Duodequadraginta  annos  tyrannus  Syracusanorum  fuit  Dionysius,  cuin 
quinque  et  viginti  natus  annos  dominatum  occupavisset.  Qua  pulchritudine 
urbem,  quibus  autem  opibus  prasditam,  servitute  oppressam  tenuit  civita- 
tem!  Atqui  de  hoc  homine  a  bonis  auctoribus  sic  scriptum  accepimus, 
summam  fuisse  ejus  in  victu  temperantiam,  in  rebusque  gerendis  virum 
acrem  et  industrium;  eundem  tamen  maleficum  natura  et  injustum.  Ex 
quo  omnibus,  bene  veritatem  intuentibus,  videri  necesse  est  miserrimum. 
{Tuscul.  Qucest.  Y.  20.) 


Xenocrates,  cum  legati  ab  Alexandro  quinquaginta  ei  talenta  attulissent, 
quas  erat  pecunia  temporibus  illis,  Athenis  prsesertim,  maxima,  abduxit 
legatos  ad  coenam  in  Academiam :  iis  apposuit  tantum,  quod  satis  esset, 
nullo  apparatu.  Cum  postridie  rogarent  eum,  cui  numerari  juberet :  Quid  ? 


READING  LESSONS. 


285 


vos.hesterna,  inquit,  ccenula  non  intellexistis,  me  pecunia  non  egere  ?  Quoa 
quum  tristiores  yidisset,  triginta  minas  accepit,  ne  aspernari  regia  liberali- 
tatem  videretur.  ( Tuscul .  Qucest.  V.  32.) 

6. 

iEschines,  cum  propter  ignominiam  judicii  cessisset  Atlienis,  et  se  Rho- 
dum  contulisset,  rogatus  a  Rhodiis,  legisse  fertur  orationem  illam  egregiam 
quam  in  Ctesiphontem  contra  Demosthenem  dixerat :  qua  perlecta,  petitum 
est  ab  eo  postridie  lit  legeret  etiam  illam,  quaa  erat  contra  a  Demosthene 
pro  Ctesipbonte  edita  :  quam  cum  suavissima  et  maxima  voce  legisset,  .ad- 
mirantibus  omnibus :  Quanto,  inquit,  magis  admiraremini,  si  audissetis  ip- 
sum  !  {De  Orat.  III.  56.) 


7. 

Cum  Hannibal,  Carthagine  expulsus,  Ephesum  ad  Antiochum  venisset 
exsul,  invitatus  est  ab  hospitibus  ut  Phormionem  quendam  philosophum 
andiret ;  cumque  se  non  nolle  dixisset,  locutus  esse  dicitur  homo  copiosus 
aliquot  boras  de  imperatoris  officio  et  de  omni  re  militari.  Turn,  cum  ceteri 
qui  ilium  audierant,  vebementer  essent  delectati,  qumrebant  ab  Hannibale, 
quidnam  ipse  de  illo  philosopho  judicaret.  Hie  Poenus  non  optime  graace, 
sed  tamen  libere  respondisse  fertur,  multos  se  dellros  senes  seepe  vidisse,  sed 
qui  magis,  quam  Phormio,  deliraret,  yidisse  neminem.  Neque  mebercule 
injuria  Quid  enim  arrogantius  aut  loquacius  fieri  potuit,  quam  Idannibali, 
qui  tot  annos  deimperio  cum  populo  Romano  omnium  gentium,  victore  cer- 
tasset,  Grascum  liominem,  qui  nunquam  liostem,  numquam  castra  vidisset, 
nunquam  denique  minimam  partem  ullius  publici  muneris  attigisset,  pree- 
cepta  de  re  militari  dare?  {De  Orat.  II.  18.) 

8. 

Roges  me  quid  aut  quale  sit  Deus,  auctore  utar  Simonide ;  de  quo  cum 
qusesivisset  hoc  idem  tyrannus  Hiero,  deliberandi  causa  sibi  unura  diem  pos- 
tulavit.  Cum  idem  ex  eo  postridie  quoareret,  biduura  petivit.  Cum  ssepiua 
duplicaret  numerum  dierum,  admiransque  Hiero  requireret  cur  ita  faceret : 
Quia  quanto,  inquit,  diutius  considero,  tanto  mibi  res  videtur  obscurior. 
{De  Nat.  Deor.  I.  22.) 

9. 

Dionysius  tyrannus  ipse  indicavit,  quam  essetbeatus.  Nam  quum  quidam 
ex  ejus  assentatoribus,  Damocles,  commemoraret  in  sermone  copias  ejus, 
opes,  majestatem  dominatus,  rerum  abundantiam,  magnificentiam  sedium 
regiarum,  negaretque  unquam  beatiorem  quemquam  fuisse :  Visne  igitur, 
inquit,  0  Damocle,  quoniam  bmc  te  vita  delectat,  ipse  eandem  degustare  et 
fortunam  experiri  meam  ?  Quum  se  ille  cupere  dixisset,  collocari  jussit 
bominem  in  aureo  lecto  strato  pulcberrimo  textili  stragulo,  magnificis  operi- 
bus  picto  :  abacosque  complures  ornavit  argento  auroque  cmlato.  Turn  ad 
mensam  eximia  forma  pueros  delectos  jussit  consistere  eosque  nuturn  illius 


286 


READING  LESSONS. 


intuentes,  diligenter  ministrare.  Aderant  unguenta,  coronas ;  incendebantur 
odores,  menses  conquisitissimis  epulis  exstruebantur.  Fortunatus  sibi  Damo¬ 
cles  videbatur.  In  boc  medio  apparatu  Dionysius  fulgentem  gladium  o 
lacunari  seta  equina  aptum  demitti  jussit,  ut  impenderet  illius  beati  cervi- 
cibus.  Itaque  nee  pulchros  illos  ministratores  aspiciebat  Damocles,  nec  ple¬ 
num  artis  argentum,  nec  manum  porrigebat  in  mensam  :  jamipses  deiluebant 
coronas  :  denique  exoravit  tyrannum  ut  abire  liceret,  quod  jam  beatus  nollet 
esse.  ( Tuscul .  Qucest.  V.  21.) 

10. 

Lysandrum  Lacedeemonium  dicere  aiunt  solitum,  Lacedeemonem  esse 
bonestissimum  domicilium  senectutis :  nusquam  enim  tantum  tribuitur 
eetati,  nusquam  est  senectus  bonoratior.  Quin  etiam  memorias  proditum 
est,  cum  Atbenis,  ludis,  quidam  in  theatrum  grandis  natu  venisset,  in  magno 
consessu  locum  ei  a  suis  civibus  nusquam  datum ;  cum  autem  ad  Lacedes- 
monios  accessisset,  qui  legati  cum  essent,  in  loco  certo  consederant,  consur- 
rexisse  omnes,  et  senem  ilium  sessum  recepisse.  Quibus  cum  a  cuncto  con¬ 
sessu  plausus  esset  multiplex  datus,  dixisse  ex  iis  quondam,  Atbenienscs 
scire  quee  recta  essent,  sed  facere  nolle.  (Be  Senect.  XYIII.) 

11. 

Sic  existimabam  nihil  homines  aliud  Romee,  nisi  de  qusestura  mea,  loqui. 
Frumenti  in  summa  caritate  maximum  numerum  miseram  :  negotiatoribus 
comis,  mercatoribus  Justus,  municipibus  liberalis,  sociis  abstinens,  omnibus 
eram  visus  in  omni  officio  diligentissimus  :  excogitati  quidam  erant  a  Siculis 
honores  inauditi.  Itaque  bac  spe  decedebam,  ut  mihi  populum  Romanum 
ultro  omnia  delaturum  putarem.  At  ego,  cum  casu  diebus  iis,  itineris  fa- 
ciendi  causa,  decedens  e  provincia,  Puteolos  forte  venissem,  cum  plurimi  et 
lautissimi  solent  esse  in  iis  locis  ;  concidi  pcene,  cum  ex  me  quidam  qusesis- 
set,  quo  die  Roma  exissem,  et  num  quid  in  ea  esset  novi :  cui  cum  respon- 
dissem,  me  ex  provincia  decedere :  Etiam  mebercules,  inquit,  ut  opinor,  ex 
Africa.  Huic  ego  jam  stomachans  fastidiose  :  Irno  ex  Sicilia,  inquam.  Turn 
quidam,  quasi  qui  omnia  sciret :  Quid?  tu  nescis,  inquit,  hunc  Syracusis 
qusestorem  fuisse  ? — Quid  multa?  destiti  stomacliari,  et  me  unum  ex  iis  feci, 
qui  ad  aquas  venissent.  Sed  ea  res  baud  scio  an  plus  mibi  profuerit,  quam 
si  mihi  turn  essent  omnes  congratulati.  (Orat.  pro  Plancio  ;  26.  27.) 

12. 

Annibalem  Coelius  scribit,  cum  columnam  auream,  quae  esset  in  fano  Ju- 
nonis  Lacinke,  auferre  vellet,  dubitaretque  utrum  ea  solida  esset  an  extrin- 
secus  inaurata,  perterebravisse  ;  cumque  solidam  invenisset,  statuisse  tollere : 
ei  secundum  quietem  visam  esse  Junonem  prsedicere  ne  id  faceret,  minari- 
que,  si  id  fccisset,  se  curaturam  ut  eum  quoque  oculum,  quo  bene  viderot, 
amitteret ;  idque  ab  bomine  acuto  non  esse  neglectum.  Itaque  ex  eo  auro, 
quod  exterebratum  esset,  buculam  curasse  faciendam,  et  earn  in  summa 
columna  coilocavisse.  (De  Divinat.  I.  24.) 


READING-  LESSONS. 


“1  O 

JLo. 

Fuii  Spartiatarum  gens  fortis,  dnm  Lycurgi  leges  vigebant :  e  quibus  nnns, 
quum  Perses  hostis  in  colloquio  dixisset  glorians :  Solem  prse  jaculorum 
multitudine  et  sagittarum  non  videbitis ;  In  umbra  igitnr,  inqnit,  pugna- 
bimus. — Esto  :  fortes  et  duri  Spartiatse  ;  magnam  babet  vim  reipublicas  dis- 
ciplina.  Quid  ?  Cyrenceum  Tlieodornm,  philosopbnm  non  ignobilem,  nonne 
miramur  ?  cni  qimm  Lysimacbns  rex  crucem  minaret  nr  :  Istis  quceso,  inquit, 
ista  liorribilia  minitare  purpuratis  tuis  :  Tlieodori  qnidem  nihil  interest,  bu- 
mine,  an  sublime  putrescat. — Leges  Lycurgi  laboribus  erudiunt  juventutem, 
venando,  currendo,  esuriendo,  sitiendo,  algendo,  aestuando.  Spartee  veto 
pueri  ad  aram  sic  verberibus  accipiuntur,  ut  multus  e  visceribns  sanguis 
exeat :  nonnunquam  etiam,  ut,  cum  ibi  essem,  audiebam,  ad  necem :  quo¬ 
rum  non  modo  nemo  exclamavit,  sed  ne  ingemuit  quidem.  ( Tuscul .  Qucest. 
I.  42,  43  ;  II.  14.) 

14, 

L.  Manlio,  cum  dictator  fuisset,  M.  Pomponius,  tribunus  plebis,  diem  dixit, 
quod  is  paucos  sibi  dies  ad  dictaturam  gerendam  addidisset ;  criminabatur 
etiam,  quod  Titum  filium,  qui  postea  est  Torquatus  appellatus,  ab  bominibus 
relegasset,  et  ruri  liabitare  jussisset.  Quod  quum  audivisset  adolescens- 
filius,  negotium  exbiberi  patri,  accurrisse  Eomam  et  cum  prima  luce  Pom¬ 
pom  i  domum  venisse  dicitur:  cui  quum  esset  nuntiatum,  quod  ilium  iratum 
allaturum  ad  se  aliquid  contra  patrem  arbitraretur,  surrexit  e  lectulo,  remo- 
tisque  arbitris,  ad  se  adolescentem  jussit  venire.  At  ille,  ut  ingressus  est, 
confestim  gladium  destrinxit,  juravitque  se  ilium  statim  interfecturum,  nisi 
jusjurandum  sibi  dedisset,  se  patrem  missum  esse  facturum.  Juravit  boc 
coactus  terrore  Pomponius:  rem  ad  populum  detulit;  docuit  cur  sibi  causa 
desistere  necesse  esset ;  Manlium  missum  fecit;  tantum  temporibus  iliia 
jusjurandum  valebat.  {De  Ofjic.  III.  31.) 

-  15. 

Sophocles  ad  sumxnam  senectutem  tragoedias  fecit :  quod  propter  studium 
cum  rem  familiarem  negligere  videretur,  a  filiis  in  judicium  vocatus  est ;  ut, 
quemadmodum  nostro  more  male  rem  gerentibus  patribus  bonis  interdici 
solet,  sic  ilium,  quasi  desipientem,  a  re  familiari  removerent  judices.  Turn 
senex  dicitur  earn  fabulam,  quam  in  manibus  habebat,  et  proxime  scripserat, 
CEdipum  Coloneum  recitasse  judicibus,  qugesisseque,  num  illud  carmen  desi- 
pientis  videretur :  quo  recitato  sententiis  judicum  est  liberatus.  {De  Senect. 
YII.) 

16. 

Cam  duo  quidam  Arcades  familiares  iter  una  fecissent  et  Megaram  venis- 
sent,  alterum  ad  cauponem  dcvertisse  ;  ad  hospitem,  alterum  :  qui  ut  coenaP 
quiescerent,  concubia  nocte  visum  esse  in  somnis  ei  qui  erat  in  bospitio, 
ilium  alterum  orare  ut  subveniret,  quod  sibi  a  caupone  interitus  pararetur  : 
eum  prime  perterritum  somnio  surrexisse ;  dein  quum  se  collegisset,  idque 
visum  pro  nihilo  babendum  esse  duxisset,  recubuisse ;  turn  ei  dormicnli 


HEADING  LESSORS. 


289 

enndem  ilium  visum  esse  rogare,  ut,  quoniam  sibi  vivo  non  subvenisset. 
mortem  suam  ne  inultam  esse  pateretur  :  se  interfectum  in  plaustrum  a  cau- 
pone  esse  conjectum  et  supra  stercus  injectum  ;  petere,  ut  mane  ad  portam 
adesset,  priusquam  plaustrum  ex  oppido  exiret.  Hoc  ver5  somnio  eum 
eommotum,  mane  bubulco  prmsto  ad  portam  fuisse  ;  qumsisse  ex  eo,  quid 
esset  in  plaustro  ;  ilium  perterritum  fugisse ;  mortuum  erutum  esse  ;  caupo- 
r.em,  re  patefacta,  poenas  dedisse.  ( De  Divin.  I.  27.) 

17. 

In  itinere  quidam  proficiscentem  ad  mercatum  quendam  et  secum  all- 
quantum  nummorum  ferentem,  est  consecutus  :  cum  hoc,  ut  fere  fit,  in  via 
Ecrmonem  contulit ;  ex  quo  factum  est  ut  illud  iter  familiarius  facere  vel- 
lent :  quare  quum  in  eandem  tabernam  devertissent,  simul  ccenare  et  in 
eodem  loco  somnum  oapere  voluerunt.  Ooenati  discubuerunt  ibidem.  Caupo 
autem  quum  ilium  alterum,  videlicet  qui  nummos  haberet,  animadvertisset, 
noctu,  postquam  illos  arctius  jam,  ut  fit,  ex  lassitudine  dormire  sensit,  ac- 
cessit :  et  alterius  eorum,  qui  sine  nummis  erat,  gladium  propter  appositum 
e  vagina  eduxit,  et  ilium  alterum  occidit,  nummos  gbstulit,  gladium  cruen- 
tatum  in  vaginam  recondidit,  ipse  sese  in  lectum  suum  recepit.  llle  autem, 
gujus  gladio  occisio  erat  facta,  multo  ante  lucem  surrexit,  comitem  ilium 
suum  inclamavit  semel  et  smpius :  ilium  somno  impeditum  non  respondere 
existimavit :  ipse  gladium  et  cetera  qum  secum  attulerat,  sustulit,  solus  pro- 
fectus  est.  Caupo,  non  multo  post,  conclamavit  hominem  esse  occisum,  et, 
cum  quibusdam  deversoribus,  ilium  qui  ante  exierat  consequitur :  in  itinere 
hominem  comprehendit,  gladium  ejus  e  vagina  educit,  reperit  cruentum, 
homo  in  urbem  ab  illis  deducitur  ac  reus  fit.  ( De  Invent.  Rhetor.  II.  4.) 

18. 

Acerrimo  studio  tenebar;  quotidie  et  scribens,  et  legens,  et  commentans, 
oratoriis  tamen  exercitationibus  contentus  non  eram.  Juris  civilis  studio 
multum  operas  dabam ;  quumque  princeps  academies  Philo  cum  Athenien- 
sium  optimatibus,  Mithridatico  bello,  domo  profugisset  Eomamque  venisset, 
totum  ei  me  tradidi,  admirabili  quodam  ad  philosophiam  studio  concitatus; 
in  quo  hoc  etiam  commorabar  attentius,  quod  rerum  ipsarum  varietas  et 
magnitude  summa  me  delectatione  retinebat.  Eodem  anno  etiam  Moloni 
Rhodio  Romm  dedimus  operam,  et  actori  summo  causarum,  et  magistro. 
Ego  vero,  hoc  tempore  omni,  noctes  et  dies  in  omnium  doctrinarum  medita- 
tione  versabar.  Eram  cum  Stoico  Diodoto,  qui  quum  habitavisset  apud  me, 
mecumque  vixisset,  nuper  est  domi  mem  mortuus:  a  quo,  cum  in  aliis  rebus, 
turn  st'udiosissime  in  dialectica  exercebar,  qum  quasi  contractu  et  adstricta 
eloquentia  putanda  est.  Huic  ego  doctori  et  ejus  artibus  variis  atque  multis 
ita  eram  tamen  deditus,  ut  ab  exercitationibus  oratoriis  nullus  dies  vacuus 
esset. — Commentabar  declamitans  (sic  enim  nunc  loquuntur)  smpe  cum  M. 
Pisone,  et  cum  Q.  Pompeio,  aut  eum  aliquo  quotidie ;  idquo  faoiebam  mul- 
tnm  etiam  latine,  sed  grmce  smpius :  vel  quod  grmca  oratio  plura  ornamenta 
suppeditans,  consuetudinem  similiter  latine  dicendi  afierebat,  vel  quod  a 
Grmcis  summis  doctoribus,  nisi  grmce  dicerem,  neque  cOrrigi  pi'ssem,  neque 


EE  LDIXd  LEoSONS. 


98? 


aocori.  Itaque  prim  a  causa  pul)  lie  a,  pro  Sext.  Koscio  dicta,  tantum  com- 
mendationis  liubuit,  ut  non  ulla  esset,  qnm  non  digna  nostro  patrocinio  vide- 
rotiLr.— (JDe  Claris  Orat.  89,  etc.) 

19. 

Nunc,  quoniam  totum  me  videris  velle  cognoscere,  complectar  nonnull  a 
etiam,  quee  fortasse  yideantur  minus  necessaria.  Erat  eo  tempore  in  nobis 
gumma  gracilitas  et  infirmitas  corporis:  procerum  et  tenue  collum: qui 
liabitus  et  quee  figura  non  procul  abesse  putatur  a  vitae  periculo,  si  accedit 
labor  et  laterum  magna  contentio.  Eoque  magis  hoc  eos,  quibus  eram  cams, 
commovebat,  quod  omnia  sine  remissione,  sine  varietate,  vi  summa  vo.is  05 
totius  corporis  contentione  dicebam.  Itaque  quum  me  amici  et  medioi  hor- 
tarentur  ut  causas  agere  desisterem,  quodvis  potius  periculum  mihi  adeun- 
dum,  quam  a  sperata  dicendi  gloria  discedendum  putavi.  Sed,  quum  cen- 
serem  remissione  et  moderatione  vocis,  et  commutato  genere  dicendi,  me  et 
periculum  vitare  posse,  et  temperantius  dicere,  ut  consuetudinem.  dicendi 
mutarem,  ea  causa  mihi  in  Asiam  proficiscendi  fuit.  Itaque  corn  essem 
biennium  versatus  in  causis,  et  jam  in  foro  celebratum  meum  nomen  esjet, 
Roma  sum  profectus.  Cum  venissem  Athenas,  sex  menses  cum  Antiocho, 
yeteris  academiae  nobilissimo  et  prudentissimo  philosopho,  fui;  studiumque 
philosophise  nunquam  intermissum,  a  primaque  adolescentia  cult-um  et  sem¬ 
per  auctum,  hoc  rursus  summo  auctore  et  doctore  reno^avi. — (P°,  elarii 
Orat.  89.) 

20. 

Aiunt  T.  Coelium  quendam  Tarracinensem,  hominem  non  obscurum,  quuir, 
ccenatus  cubitum  in  idem  conclave  cum  duobus  adolescentibus  filiis  isset, 
inventum  esse  mane  jugulatum.  Quum  neque  servus  quisquam  reperire- 
tur,  neque  liber,  ad  quern  ea  suspicio  pertineret;  id  setatis  autem  duo  fili: 
propter  cubantes  ne  sensisse  quidem  se  dicerent :  nomina  filiorum  de  parri 
cidio  delata  sunt.  Quidpostea?  erat  sane  suspiciosum  :  neutrum  sensisse  < 
ausum  autem  esse  quemquam  se  in  id  conclave  committere,  eo  potissimum 
tempore,  quum  ibidem  essent  duo  adolescentes  filii,  qui  et  sentire  et  defen- 
dere  facile  possent?  Erat  porro  nemo,  in  quern  ea  suspicio  conveniret. 
Tamen  quum  planum  judicibus  esset  factum,  aperto  ostio  dormientes  eos  re- 
pertos  esse,  judicio  absoluti  adolescentes  et  suspicion e  omni  liberati  sunt. 
Nemo  enim  putabat  quemquam  esse,  qui  quum  omnia  divina  atque  humana 
jura  scelere  nefario  polluisset,  somnum  statim  capere  potuisset:  propterea 
quod  qui  tantum  facinus  commiserunt,  non  modo  sine  cura  quiescere,  sed  ne 
spirare  quidem  sine  metu  possunt. — {Orat.  pro  Bose.  Amer.  23.) 

21. 

Narrat  Xenophon,  Cyrum  minorem,  regem  Persarum,  prsestantem  ingenio 
atque  imperii  gloria,  cum  Lysander  Lacedeemonius,  vir  summas  virtutis, 
venisset  ad  eum  Sardis  eique  dona  a  sociis  attulisset,  et  ceteris  in  rebus 
somcm  erga  Lysandrum  atque  humanum  fuisse  et  ei  quendam  conseptum. 
ftgrum,  diligenter  consitum  ostendisse.  Quum  autem  admiraretur  Lysander 


290 


BEADING  LESSONS. 


et  proceritates  arborum  et  directos  in  quincuncem  ordines,  et  humum  sub- 
actam  atque  purain,  et  suavitatem  odornm  qui  afflarentur  e  floribus  :  turn 
dixisse,  mirari  se  non  modo  diligentiam,  sed  etiam  solertiam  ejus,  a  quo 
essent  ilia  dimensa  atque  descrip ta;  et  ei  Cyrum  respondisse:  Atqui  ego 
omnia  ista  sum  dimensus,  mei  sunt  ordines,  mea  descriptio;  multse  etiam 
istarum  arborum  mea  manu  sunt  sate.  Turn  Lysandrum  intuentem  ejus 
purpuram,  et  nitorem  corporis,  ornatumque  Persicum  multo  auro,  multisque 
gemmis  dixisse:  Pecte  vero  te,  Cyre,  beatum  ferunt,  quoniam  virtuti  tuse 
fortuna  conjuncta  est. — [De  Senect.  XVII.) 

22. 

Quid  potest  esse  tam  apertum,  tamque  perspicuum,  cum  ccelum  suspexi- 
mus,  coelestiaque  contemplati  sumus,  quam  esse  aliquod  numen  praestantis- 
simce  mentis,  quo  hrec  regantur  ?  Quod  qui  dubitet,  haud  sane  intelligo  cur 
non  idem,  sol  sit,  an  nullus  sit  dubitare  possit.  Quid  enim  est  hoc  illo  evi- 
dentius?  Quod  nisi  cognitum  comprehensumque  animis  haberemus,  non 
tam  stabilis  opinio  permaneret,  nec  confirmaretur  diutumitate  temporis,  nec 
una  cum  seculis  setatibusque  liominum  inveterare  potuisset.  Etenim  vide- 
mu3  ceteras  opiniones  fictas  atque  vanas  diuturnitate  extaVaisse.  Quis  enim 
Eippocentaurum  fuisse,  aut  Cbimaeram  putat?  Quseve  anus  turn  excors  in- 
veniri  potest,  quae  ilia,  quae  quondam  credebantur  apud  inferos  portenta, 
extimescat?  Opinionum  enim  commenta  delet  dies:  naturae  judicia  confir- 
mat. — {De  Nat.  Deor.  II.  2.) 

23. 

Praeclare  Aristoteles:  “Si  essent,”  inquit,  “qui  sub  terra  semper  habita- 
vissent,  bonis  et  illustribus  domiciliis,  quae  essent  ornata  signis  atque  pictu- 
ris,  instructaque  rebus  iis  omnibus,  quibus  abundant  ii  qui  beati  putantur, 
nec  tamen  exissent  unquam  supra  terram :  accepissent  autem  fama  et  audi- 
tione  esse  quoddam  numen  et  vim  deorum:  deinde  aliquo  tempore,  pate- 
faotis  terrse  faucibus,  ex  illis  abditis  sedibus  evadere  in  haec  loca  qum  nos 
incolimus  atque  exire  potuissent :  cum  repente  terram,  et  maria  ccelumque 
vidissent,  nubium  magnitudinem,  ventorumque  vim  cognovissent,  aspexis- 
sentque  solem,  ejusque  turn  magnitudinem  pulcbritudinemqne ;  turn  etiam 
efficientiam  cognovissent,  quod  is  diem  efficeret  toto  ccelo  luce  diffusa;  cum 
autem  terras  nox  opacasset,  turn  coelum  totum  cernereut  astris  distinctum 
et  ornatum,  lunmque  luminum  varietatem  turn  crescentis,  turn  senescentis, 
eorumque  omnium  ortus  et  occasus,  atque  ratos  immutabilesque  cursus* 
bsec  quum  viderent,  profecto  et  esse  deos,  et  haec  tanta  opera  deorum  esse 
arbitrarentur.’’ — Atque  haec  quidem  illo. 

Nos  autem  tenebras  cogitemus  tantas,  quanta)  quondam  eruptione  EDtna) 
orura  ignium  finitimas  regiones  obscuravisse  dicun tur,  ut  per  biduum  nemo 
hominem  homo  agnosceret ;  quum  autem  tertio  die  sol  illuxisset,  turn  ut  re- 
vixisse  sibi  viderentur.  Quod  si  hoc  idem  ex  seternis  tenebris  contingeret, 
ut  subito  lucem  aspiceremus  :  queenam  species  cceli  videretur!  Sed  assidui- 
tate  quotidiana,  et  consuetudine  oculorum,  assuescunt  animi :  neque  admi- 


READING  LESSONS. 


291 


rantur,  neque  requirunt  rationes  rerum  enrum  quas  semper  violent:  proinde 
quasi  novitas  nos  magis,  quam  maguitudo  rerum,  debeat  ad  exquirendas 
causas  excitare. — {Be  Nat.  Deov.  II.  87.) 

24. 

Quis  hunc  hominem  dixerit,  qui  quum  tarn  certos  coeli  motus,  tam  rates 
astrornm  ordines,  tarnque  omnia  inter  se  connexa  et  apta  viderit,  neget  in 
his  ullam  inesse  rationem,  eaque  casu  fieri  dicat,  quoo  quanto  consilio  geran- 
tur,  nullo  consilio  assequi  possumus?  An,  quum  machinatione  quadam 
moveri  aliquid  videmus,  ut  sphasram,  ut  horas,  ut  alia  permulta,  non  dubi- 
tamus  quin  ilia  opera  sint  rationis;  cum  autem  impetum  coeli  admirabili 
cum  celeritate  moveri  vertique  videamus,  constantissime  conficientem  vicis- 
situdines  anniversarias,  cum  summa  salute  et  conservatione  rerum  omnium, 
dubitamus  quin  ea  non  solum  ratione  fiant,  sed  etiam  excellenti  quadam 
divinaque  ratione?  Licet  enim  jam,  remota  subtilitate  disputandi,  oculis 
quodammodo  contemplari  pulchritudinem  rerum  earurn,  quas  divina  provi- 
dentia  dicimus  constitutas. — {Be  Nat.  Beor.  II.  38.) 

25. 

Esse  prsestantem  aliquam  seternamque  naturam,  et  earn  suspiciendam  ad- 
mirandamque  hominum  generi,  pulcbritudo  mundi,  ordoque  rerum  coeles- 
tium  cogit  confiteri. 

Firmissimum  hoc  afferri  videtur,  cur  deos  esse  credamus,  quod  nulla  gens 
tam  sit  fera,  nemo  omnium  tam  sit  immanis  cujus  mentem  non  imbuerit 
deorum  opinio.  Multi  de  diis  prava  s.entiunt :  id  enim  vitioso  more  efilci 
solet:  omnes  tamen  esse  vim  et  naturam  divinam  arbitrantur.  Nee  vero  id 
collocutio  hominum  aut  consensus  effecit :  non  institutis  opinio  est  confir- 
mata,  non  legibus.  Omni  autem  in  re  consensio  omnium  gentium,  lex 
naturae  putanda  est. — {Be  Buili.  II.  72. — Tasc.  Qucest.  I.  13.) 

26. 

Hie  ego  non  mirer  esse  quemquam,  qui  sibi  persuadoat  corpora  quaedam 
solida  atque  individua  vi  et  gravitate  ferri,  mundumque  efilci  ornatissimum 
et  pulcherrimum  ex  eorum  corporum  concursione  fortuita?  Hoc  qui  exis- 
timat  fieri  potuisse,  non  intelligo  cur  non  idem  putet,  si  innumerabiles  unius 
et  viginti  formse  litterarum  vel  aureso,  vel  qualeslibet,  aliquo  conjiciantur, 
posse  ex  his  in  terrain  excussis  annales  Ennii,  ut  deinceps  legi  possint, 
effici:  quod  nescio  an  no  in  uno  quidem  versu  possit  tantum  valere  fortuna. 
Isti  autem  quemadmodum  asseverant,  ex  corpusculis  non  colore,  non  quali- 
tate  aliqua,  non  sensu  praeditis,  sed  concurrentibus  temere  atque  casu,  mun- 
dum  esse  perfectum?  vel  innumerabiles  potius  in  omni  puncto  temporis 
alios  nasci,  alios  interire  ?  Quod  si  mundum  efficere  potest  concursus  ato- 
morura,  cur  porticum,  cur  templum,  cur  domum,  cur  urbem  non  potest,  qua) 
sunt  minus  operosa,  et  multo  quidem  faciliora?  Certe  ita  temere  do  mundo 
effutiunt  ut  nunquam  admirabilem  coeli  ornatum  suspexisse  videantur. — {Be 
Nat.  Beor.  II.  37.) 


292 


READING  LESSONS. 


bus  picto :  abacosquo  complures  ornavit  argento  auroque  c®lafco.  Turn  ad 
mensara  eximia  forma  pueros  delectos  jussit  consistere  eosque  nutum  illius 
intuentes,  diligenter  ministrare.  Aderant  unguenta,  coronas;  incendebantur 
odores,  mens®  conquisitissimis  epulis  exstruebantur.  Fortunatus  sibi  Damo¬ 
cles  videbatur.  In  boc  medio  apparatu  Dionysius  fulgentem  gladium  e 
lacunari  seta  equina  aptum  demitti  jussit,  ut  impenderet  illius  beati  ceryi- 
cibus.  Itaque  nec  pulcbros  illos  ministratores  aspiciebat  Damocles,  nec  ple¬ 
num  artis  argentum,  nec  manum  porrigebat  in  mensam  :  jam  ips®  defluebant 
coron® :  denique  exoravit  tyrannum  ut  abire  liceret,  quod  jam  beatus  nollet 
esse. 

15.  Socrates  and  Xenophon. 

Xenoplionti  in  angiportu  obviam  yenit  Socrates.  Qui  quum  yideret  ado- 
lescentem  vultu  admodum  specioso  atque  verecundo,  porrecto  baculo  yetuit, 
ne  pr®teriret.  Ut  constitit,  Socrates  earn  interrogayit,  ubinam  venderentur, 
qu®  essent  necessaria  variis  civium  usibus.  Ad  qu®  quum  expedite  respon- 
disset  Xenophon,  percontatus  est,  ubinam  boni  ac  probi  homines  fierent, 
Quum  autem  adolescens  responderet,  id  se  nescire,  Socrates :  Sequere  igitur 
me,  inquit,  et  disce.  Ex  eo  tempore  Xenophon  ccepit  esse  Socratis  auditor 
et  bonus  probusque  factus  est. 


LETTERS. 

-1. 

M.  T.  0.  Teeentt^e  SuiE  S.  P.  D. — In  Tusculanum  nos  venturos  putaraua 
aut  Nonis,  aut  postridie  :  ibi  fac  ut  sint  omnia  parata.  Plures  enim  fortassa 
nobiscum  erunt,  et  ut  arbitror,  diutius  ibi  commorabimur.  Labrnm,  si  in 
balneo  non  est,  fac  ut  sit :  item  cetera,  qu®  sunt  ad  victum,  et  ad  valetudi- 
nem  necessaria.  Yale. 

2. 

M.  T.  0.  Teeenti.ze  Siee  S.  P.  D. — Si  vales,  bene  est :  ego  valeo.  Reddi- 
t®  mihi  tandem  sunt  a  C®sare  litter®  satis  liberal es :  et  ipse  opinione 
celerius  venturus  esse  dicitur.  Cui  utrum  obviam  procedam,  an  hie  eum 
expectem,  cum  constituero,  faciam  te  certiorem.  Tabellarios  mihi  velim 
quamprimum  remittas.  Yaletudinem  tuam  cura  diligenter.  Yale. 

3. 

M.  T.  0.  Tieoxi  S.  P.  D. — Omnia  a  te  data  mihi  putabo,  si  te  valentem 
videro :  summa  cura  expectabam  adventam  Menandri,  quern  ad  te  miseram, 
Cura  si  me  diliges,  ut  valeas,  et  cum  te  bene  confirmaris,  ad  nos  venias. 
Yale. 

4. 

Ciceeo  S.  D.  Tekextle. — Quod  nos  in  Italiam  salvos  venisse  gaudes,  per- 
petuo  gaudeas  velim.  Sed  perturbati  dolore  animi,  magnisque  injuriis, 
metuo  ne  id  consilii  ceperimus,  quod  non  facile  explicare  possimus.  Quare, 


READING  LESSONS. 


293 

quantum  potes,  adjuva.  Quid  autem  possis,  mihi  in  mentem  non  venit.  In 
viam  quod  te  des  hoc  tempore,  nihil  est :  et  longum  est  iter,  et  non  tutum  : 
et  non  video,  quid  prodesse  possis,  si  veneris.  Yale.  D.  prid.  Nonas  No- 
vembres.  Brundusio. 

5. 

Ciceeo  S.  D.  Tieoni. — Non  queo  ad  te,  nec  lubet  scribere,  quo  animo  sim 
affectus :  tantum  scribo,  et  tibi  et  mihi  maximse  voluptati  fore,  si  te  firmum 
quam  primum  videro.  Tertio  die  abs  te  ad  Alyziam  accesseramus.  Is  locus 
est  citra  Leucadera  stadia  CXX.  Leucade  aut  te  ipsum,  aut  tuas  litteras  a 
Marione  putabam  me  accepturum.  Quantum  me  diligis,  tantum  fac  nt 
valeas,  vel  quantum  te  a  me  scis  diligi.  Nonis  Novemb.  Alyzict. 

6. 

Ciceeo  S.  D.  Tieoxt. — Tertiam  ad  te  hanc  epistolam  scripsi  eodem  die, 
magis  instituti  mei  tenendi  causa,  quia  nactus  eram,  cui  darem,  quam  quo 
haberem,  quid  scriberem.  Igitur  ilia :  quantum  me  diligis,  tantum  adhibe 
in  te  diligentieo.  Ad  tua  innumerabilia  in  me  officia  adde  hoc,  quod  mihi 
erit  gratissimum  omnium  :  cum  valetudinis  rationem,  ut  spero,  habueris, 
habeto  etiam  navigation^.  In  Italiam  euntibus  omnibus  ad  me  litteras 
dabis,  ut  ego  euntem  Patras  neminem  prastermitto.  Cura,  cura  te,  mi  Tiro. 
Cum  non  contigit,  ut  simul  navigares,  nihil  est,  quod  festines :  nec  quidquam 
cures,  nisi  ut  valeas.  Etiam  atque  etiam  vale. 

1. 

Cioeeo  Papieio  Pzeto  S. — Heri  veni  in  Oumanum :  eras  ad  te  fortasse. 
Sed  cum  certum  sciam,  faciam  te  paulo  ante  certiorem.  Etsi  M.  Ceparius, 
cum  mihi  in  silva  Gallinaria  obviam  venisset,  quaesissemque  quid  ageres, 
dixit  te  in  lecto  esse,  quod  ex  pedibus  laborares.  Tuli  scilicet  moleste,  ut 
debui :  sed  tamen  constitui  ad  te  venire,  ut  et  viderem  te,  et  viserem,  et 
coenarem  etiam.  Non  enim  arbitror,  coquum  etiam  te  arthriticum  habere. 
Expecta  igitur  hospitem  cum  minime  edacem,  turn  inimicum  ccenis  sumptu- 
osis.  Y  ale. 

8. 

Ciceeo  S.  D.  Memmio. — Aulum  Fusium,  unum  ex  meis  intimis,  observan- 
tissimum,  studiosissimumque  nostri,  eruditum  hominem,  et  summa  humani- 
tate,  tuaque  amicitia  dignissimum,  velim  ita  tractes,  ut  mihi  coram  rece- 
pisti.  Tam.  gratum  mihi  id  erit,  quam  quod  gratissimum.  Ipsum  prseterea 
summo  officio,  et  summa  observantia  tibi  in  perpetuum  devinxeris.  Yale. 

9. 

Ciceeo  S.  D.  Czelio. — Marco  Fabio,  viro  optirno  et  homine  doctissimo, 
familiarissime  utor,  mirifieeque  eum  diligo,  cum  propter  summum  ingenium 
ejus  summamquo  doctrinam,  turn  propter  singularem  modestiam.  Ejus 
negotium  sic  velim  suscijiias,  ut  si  esset  res  mea.  Novi  ego  vos  magnoa 


294 


READING  LESSONS. 


patronos:  hominem  occidafc  oportet,  qui  vestra  opera  uti  velit.  Sed  in  hoo 
homine  nallam  accipio  excusationem.  Omnia  relinques,  si  me  amabis,  cnm 
tua  opera  Fabius  uti  volet.  Ego  res  Romanas  vebementer  expecto  et  desi- 
dero :  in  primisque,  quid  agas,  scire  cupio :  nara  jam  diu  propter  hiemis 
magnitudinem  nihil  novi  ad  nos  afferebatur.  Yale. 

10. 

Cicero  S.  D.  Teebatio. — Quam  sint  morosi  qui  amant,  vel  ex  hoc  intelligi 
potest.  Moleste  ferebam  antea  te  invitum  istic  esse  :  pungit  me  rursus, 
quod  scribis  esse  te  istic  libenter.  Neque  enim  mea  commendatione  te  non 
delectari  facile  patiebar ;  et  nunc  angor,  quidquam  tibi  sine  me  esse  jucun- 
dum.  Sed  hoc  tamen  malo,  ferre  nos  desiderium,  quam  te  non  ea,  quse 
spero,  consequi.  Cum  vero  in  0.  Matii,  suavissimi  doctissifnique  hominis, 
familiaritatem  venisti,  non  dici  potest  quam  valde  gaudeam:  qui  fac  ut  te 
quam  maxime  diligat.  Mihi  crede,  nihil  ex  ista  provincia  potes,  quod 
jucundius  sit,  deportare.  Cura  ut  valeas. 

11. 

Cioeeo  S.  D.  Coenificio. — Sex.  Aufidius  et  observantia,  qua  me  colit, 
aecedit  ad  proximos ;  et  splendore  equiti  Eomano  nemini  cedit.  Est  autem 
ita  temperatis  moderatisque  moribus,  ut  summa  severitas  summa  cum  hu- 
manitate  jungatur.  Cujus  tibi  negotia,  quse  sunt  in  Africa,  ita  commendo, 
ut  majore  studio,  magisve  ex  animo  commendare  non  possim.  Pergratum 
mihi  feceris,  si  dederis  operam,  ut  intelligat,  meas  apud  te  litteras  maxi- 
mum  pondus  habuisse.  Hoc  te  vebementer,  mi  Cornifici,  rogo.  Yale. 


12. 

Ciceeo  S.  D.  Seevio  Sulp. — Asclapone  Patrensi,  medico,  utor  valde  fanii- 
liariter :  ejusque  cum  consuetudo  mihi  jucunda  fuit,  turn  ars  etiam,  quam 
sum  expertus  in  valetudine  meorum :  in  qua  mihi  cum  ipsa  scientia,  turn 
etiam  fidelitate  benevolentiaque  satisfecit.  Ilunc  igitur  tibi  commendo ;  et 
a  te  peto,  ut  des  operam,  ut  intelligat  diligenter  me  scripsisse  de  sese,  me- 
amque  commendationem  usui  magno  sibi  fuisse.  Erit  id  mihi  vebementer 
gratum.  Y  ale . 

13. 

Ciceeo  S.  1).  Aoilio.— On.  Octacilio  Nasoue  utor  familiarissime  ;  ita 
prorsus,  ut  illius  ordinis  nemine  familiarius.  Nam  et  humanitate  ejus,  et 
probitate  in  consuetudine  quotidiana  magnopero  delector.  Nihil  jam  opus 
est  expectare  te,  quibus  eum  verbis  tibi  commendem,  quo  sic  utar,  ut  scripsi. 
Ilabet  is  in  provincia  tua  negotia,  quae  procurant  liberti,  llilarus,  Antigonus, 
Eemostratus :  quos  tibi,  negotiaque  omnia  Nasonis  non  secus  commendo, 
ac  si  mea  essent.  Gratissimum  mihi  feceris,  si  intellexero,  banc  commen* 
dationem  magnum  apud  te  pondus  habuisse.  Yale. 


HEADING  LESSONS. 


29  6 


tuis  rebus  capio,  maxime  scilicet  consolatur  spes,  quod  valde  suspicor  fore, 
ut  infringatur  hominum  improbitas  et  consiliis  tuorura  amicorum,  et  ipsa 
die,  qua  debilitantur  cogitationes  et  inimicorum  et  prodiforum.  Facile  se- 
cundo  loco  me  consolatur  recordatio  meorum  temporum,  quorum  imaginem 
video  in  rebus  tuis.  Nam  etsi  minore  in  re  violatur  tua  dignitas,  quam  mea 
salus  afflicta  sit;  tamen  est  tanta  similitude,  ut  sperem,  te  mihi  ignoscere,  si 
ea  non  timuerim,  quae  ne  tu  quidem  unquam  timenda  duxisti.  Sed  prsesta 
te  eum,  qui  mibi  a  teneris  (ut  Greed  dicunt)  unguiculis  es  cognitus.  Illus- 
trabit  (mihi  crede)  tuam  amplitudinem  hominum  injuria.  A  me  omnia 
gumma  in  te  studia  officiaque  expecta :  non  fallam  opinionem  tuam.  Yale. 

16. 

Cicero  T.  Fuefaxo  Proc.  S.  D. — Cum  Aulo  Caecina  tanta  mihi  familiari- 
tas  consuetudoque  semper  fuit,  ut  nulla  major  esse  possit:  nam  et  patie 
ejus,  claro  homine,  et  forti  viro,  plurimum  usi  sumus:  et  hunc  a  puero,  quod 
et  spem  mihi  magnam  afferebat  summae  probitatis,  summaeque  eloquent! te, 
et  vivebat  mecum  conjunctissime,  non  solum  officiis  amicitise,  sed  etiarn 
studiis  communibus,  sic  semper  dilexi,  ut  nullo  cum  homine  conjunctius 
viverem.  Nihil  attinet  me  plura  scribere  ;  quam  mihi  necesse  sit  ejus  salu- 
tem  et  fortunas,  quibuscunque  rebus  possim  tueri,  vides.  Eeliquum  est,  ut 
cum  oognoverim  pluribus  rebus  quid  tu  et  de  bonorum  fortuna,  et  de  Kei- 
publicee  calamitatibus  sentires,  nihil  a  te  petam,  nisi  ut  ad  earn  voluntatem, 
quam  tua  sponte  erga  Csecinam  habiturus  esses,  tantus  cumulus  accedat 
commendatione  mea,  quanti  me  a  te  fieri  intelligo.  Hoc  mihi  gratius  facere 
nihil  potes.  Yale. 

17. 

Cicero  L.  Culleolo  Proc.  S.  D. — Quae  fecisti  Lucceii  causa,  scire  te  plane 
volo,  te  homini  gratissimo  commodasse :  et  cum  ipsi,  quae  fecisti,  pergrata 
sunt,  turn  Pompeius,  quotiescunque  me  videt  (videt  autem  ssepe),  gratias 
tibi  agit  singulares.  Addo  etiam  illud,  quod  tibi  jucundissimum  esse  certo 
scio,  me  ipsum  ex  tua  erga  Lucceium  benignitate,  maxima  voluptate  affici. 
Quod  superest,  quamquam  mihi  non  est  dubiurn,  quin,  cum  antea  nostra 
causa,  nunc  jam  etiam  tuce  constantiae  gratia  mansurus  sis  in  eadem  ista 
liberalitate :  tamen  abs  te  vehementer  etiam  atque  etiam  peto,  ut  ea,  quae 
initio  ostendisti,  deincepsque  fecisti,  ad  exitum  augeri  et  cumulari  per  te 
velis.  Id  et  Lucceio,  et  Pompeio  valde  gratum  fore,  teque  apud  eos  prie- 
clare  positurum  confirmo  et  spondeo.  De  republics,  deque  his  negotiis 
cogitationibusque  nostris  perscripseram  ad  te  diligenter  paucis  ante  diebus, 
easque  litteras  dederam  pueris  tuis.  Yale. 

IS. 

Cicero  Dolatieliae  Suo  S.  D. — Yel  meo  ipsius  interitu  mallem  litteras 
meas  desiderares,  quam  eo  casu,  quo  sum  gravissime  afflictus:  quern  ferrem 
certe  moderatius,  si  te  haberem.  Nam  et  oratio  tua  prudens  et  amor  erga 
me  singularis  multum  levaret.  Sed  quoniam  brevi  tempore,  ut  opinio  nos¬ 
tra  est,  te  sum  viaurus,  ita  me  affectum  offendes,  ut  multum  a  te  possim 


200 


READING  LESSONS. 


juvari;  non  quod  ita  sim  fractus,  ut  ant  hominem  me  esse  oblitus  sim,  aut 
fortunes  snccumbenclnm  putem,  sed  tamen  hilaritas  ilia  nostra  et  suavitas, 
qu®  te  p raster  ceteros  delectabat,  erepta  mibi  omnis  est.  Firmitatem  tamen 
et  eonstantiam,  si  modo  fuit  aliqnando  in  nobis,  eandera  cognosces  quam 
reliquisti.  Quod  scribis  prcelia  te  mea  causa  sustinere,  non  tarn  id  laboro, 
ut,  si  qui  mihi  obtrectent,  a  te  refutentur,  quam  intelligi  cupio,  quod  certe 
intelligitur,  me  a  te  amari:  quod  ut  facias  te  etiam  atque  etiam  rogo,  ignos- 
casque  breyitati  mearum  litterarum  ;  nam  et  celeriter  una  futuros  nos  arbi- 
tror,  et  nondum  satis  confirmatus  sum  ad  scribendum.  Yale. 

19. 

Cicero  S.  P.  Marcello. — Etsi  nihil  erat  novi,  quod  ad  te  scriberem,  ma- 
gisque  litteras  tuas  jam  expectare  incipiebam,  vel  te  potius  ipsum :  tamen 
cum  Theopliilus  proficiscer'etur,  non  potui  nihil  ei  litterarum  dare.  Cura 
igitur,  ut  quam  primum  venias.  Yenies  enim,  mihi  crede,  spectatus,  neque 
solum  nobis,  id  est,  tuis,  sed  prorsus  omnibus.  Yenit  enim  mihi  in  men- 
tem,  subvereri  interdum,  ne  te  delectet  tarda  decessio.  Quod  si  nullum 
haberes  sensum,  nisi  oculorum,  prorsus  tibi  ignoscerem,  si  quosdam  nolles 
videre;  sed  cum  leviora  non  multo  essent,  qu®  audirentur,  quam  qti®  vide- 
rentur ;  suspicarer  autem,  multum  interesse  rei  familiaris  tu®,  te  quampri- 
mum  venire,  idque  in  omnes  partes  valeret,  putavi,  ea  de  re  te  esse  admo- 
nendum.  Sed,  quoniam  quod  mihi  placeret,  ostendi,  reliqua  tu  pro  tua 
prudentia  considei  urns.  Me  tamen  velim,  quod  ad  tempus  te  expectemus, 
certiorem  facias.  Yale. 

20. 

Cicero  S.  P.  D.  Txroni  Sijo. — Paulo  facilius  putavi  posse  me  ferre  desidh- 
riumtui:  sed  plane  non  fero;  et  quam  quam  magni  ad  honorem  nostrum 
interest  quamprimum  ad  urbem  me  venire,  tamen  peccasse  mihi  videor  qui 
a  te  discesserim :  sed  quia  tua  voluntas  ea  videbatur  esse,  ut  prorsus,  nisi 
confirm  ato  corpore,  noiles  navigare,  approbavi  tuum  consilium:  neque  nunc 
rauto,  si  tu  in  eadem  es  sententia:  sin,  posteaquam  cibum  cepisti,  videris 
tibi  me  posse  consequi,  tuum  consilium  est.  Marionem  ad  te  eo  misi,  ut  aut 
tecum  ad  me  quamprimum  veniret;  aut,  si  tu  morarere,  statim  ad  me  redi- 
ret.  Tu  autem  hoc  tibi  persuade,  si  commodo  valetudinis  fuse  fieri  possit, 
nihil  me  malle  quam  te  esse  mecum  :  sin  intelliges  opus  esse  te  Patris  con- 
valescendi  causa  paulum  commorari,  nihil  me  malle  quam  te  valere.  Si 
statim  navigas,  nos  Leucade  consequere:  sin  te  confirmare  vis,  et  comites  et 
tempestates  et  navem  idoneam  ut  habeas,  diligenter  videbis.  Unum  illud, 
mi  Tiro,  videto,  si  me  amas,  ne  te  Marionis  adventus  et  h®  littene  move- 
ant.  Quod  valetudini  tine  maxim e  conducet,  si  feceris,  maxime  obtempe- 
rabis  voluntati  meee.  H®c  pro  tuo  ingenio  considera.  Nos  ita  te  desidera- 
mus,  ut  amemus :  amor,  ut  valentem  videamus,  hortatur ;  desiderium,  ut 
quamprimum.  Illud  igitur  potius.  Cura  ergo  potissimum  ut  valeas ;  de 
tuis  innumerabilibus  in  me  officiis,  erit  hoc  grafissmmm.  Tertio  Nonas 
Novembris.  Yale. 


9Z55 


DOES  NOT  CIRCULATE 


BOSTON  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY  HEIGHTS 
CHESTNUT  HILL,  MASS. 


Books  may  be  kept  for  two  weeks  and  may 
be  renewed  for  the  same  period,  unless  re¬ 
served. 


Two  cents  a  day  is  charged  for  each  book 
kept  overtime. 

If  you  cannot  find  what  you  want,  ask  the 
Librarian  who  will  be  glad  to  help  you. 

The  borrower  is  responsible  for  books  drawn 
on  his  card  and  for  all  fines  accruing  on  the 


same. 


